THE LIGHT OF NAVIGATION.  
WHEREIN ARE DECLARED AND LIVELY POVRtrayed, all the Coasts and Havens, of the West, North and East Seas.  
COLLECTED PARTLY OUT OF THE BOOKS OF the principal Authors which have written of Navigation, (as Lucas johnson Waghenaer and diverse others) partly also out of many other expert Seafaring men's writings and verbal declarations: corrected from many faults, and enlarged with many new Descriptions and Cards.  
Divided into two Books.  
HEREUNTO ARE ADDED (BESIDE AN INSTITUTION in the Art of Navigation) new Tables of the Declination of the Son, according to Tycho Brahes Observations, applied to the Meridian of Amsterdam. Together with new Tables and Instructions to teach men the right use of the North-star, and other firm stars, profitable for all Seafaring men.  
BY WILLIAM JOHNSON.  
AT AMSTERDAM Printed by William johnson, dwelling upon the Water, by the Old Bridge, at the Sign of the Golden Son-dyal. Anno 1612. Cum Privilegio.  
AMSTERDAM   view of Amsterdam  

  

To the Reader.  
WHat great good and profit (gentle Reader) is procured unto all Seafaring men by Books of Seacardes/ which heretofore have been made and composed by Lucas johnson Waghenaer/ Albert Hayen/ William Barents and others/ wherein they with most great diligence have written the situation of the Streams/ Havens and Channels of the Seas in diverse countries/ it is impossible to declare/ for that thereby not only many Ships and Merchants goods/ but also many Men have had their lives preserved/ which is so manifest and well known unto every man/ that it were altogether needless and in vain to illustrate it by examples.  
It is also well known to every Seafaring man/ how much some Havens and Channels in the Seas/ are and have been in process of time clean altered and changed/ specially in these Countries of Holland/ Zealand and Freesland/ which also for the most part are so much altered/ since then were described by the said Authors/ that some of them have now no likeness nor similitude thereof/ some are almost spoiled/ and some wholly abolished/ and clean stopped up: for the North channel/ which by Waghenaer and Albert Hayen was described to be the best Channel of the Vlie/ at this present reacheth out clean contrary/ and therewithal it is so much altered/ that it can not be used but by small ships. The North Elve/ which by them is described to be a deep and fair Channel/ is also clean spoiled/ but in steed thereof the South Elve is broken out again with a fair deep channel. And the place where yet within these few years the steeple of Huysden did stand/ lieth now so far into the Sea/ that Ships full laden run over it/ both entering into/ and coming out of the Texel: whereby such descriptions at this time are not only unfit/ but very hurtful/ if a man should rule himself by them.  
This considered/ I (according to my ability/ for the good and benefit of Seafaring men) have taken the Books of the aforesaid Authors in hand/ to cleanse/ correct and amend them of all their faults (besides that which I have newly gotten and collected to add unto them) as much as possible I can: wherein I have neither spared trouble/ labour nor charges/ that by the aid and furtherance of many expert and skilful sailors/ Pilots and Masters (of whose still and knowledge I was well assured) I might describe and declare the same/ in such manner as the present work/ and the necessity and worthiness thereof requireth. Lucas johnson Wagenaer himself (not long before he died) hath also by writing showed many notable faults/ which in his Book were necessarily to be corrected and amended. As touching the Cards/ I have especially much bettered them/ with the reaching of their Compasses very necessary to be used/ and also enlarged them/ and according to the examples of the best Cards so corrected them/ that therein you not only see/ how you may sail into/ and come out of all Havens and Channels/ but also how far they reach/ and are in wideness and length distant from each other: which never heretofore (be it spoken without boasting) was so perfectly and so beneficially done for the good of Seafaring men. I have also placed all the places of the West Seas under their right heights: but touching the East Seas/ I could not bring that to pass before this time/ because we wanted the true collection thereof/ for that the same which Lucas Wagenaer writeth thereof/ is false/ and he contradicteth himself/ which may partly be perceived by that which ensueth. He writeth/ that the Sound lieth under 56 degrees and 12 minutes/ and Schagen under 57 degrees and 48 minutes/ whereby it should follow/ (for that the said two places lie distant southeast and northwest) that they should be distant one from the other 33 or 34 Dutch miles: whereas notwithstanding he himself writeth/ that they are but 25 miles distant from each other: but that both these positions are false/ I prove it thus. The middle of the I'll of Ween lieth just under 55 degrees and 54 minutes/ and seeing that the Sound is but a mile and an half or two miles distant from thence/ and rather westerlyer than north/ then of force the Sound can not lie higher/ then under 56 degrees: and so/ if we (according to the common guessing) reckon/ from the Sound to Schagen 25 miles/ then the Point of Schagen must lie under 57 degrees and 11 or 12 minutes/ which differeth from Wagenaers' position almost two third parts of a degree. Or if Schagen lay under such a height as Wagenaer writeth/ then Schagen and the Sound should be distant from each other about 38 miles/ which is not credible. Many such like/ and (as I think) much greater faults should be seen/ if the certain truth thereof could be found.  
Besides this/ I have hereunto added a Brief Institution touching the Art of Navigation: wherein is perfectly showed/ what knowledge of Astronomy is necessary for a Seafaring man: wherein hitherto there hath been much abuse committed among them. But unnecessary things/ wherewith some Seafaring men trouble themselves in vain/ I have omitted and wholly left out: as/ what the Eccentricities/ Augeas and Apogeas/ the Longitude/ Latitude/ and the Paralaxes of the Planets are: all which things (as also many other Astronomical high Speculations) have no use in Seafaring/ nor can by any means further a Seafaring man.  
I have likewise omitted and forborn to write any thing of the Lengths/ which men commonly call/ the East and West/ whereof some men boast and vaunt themselves/ to have found great matters/ and that a man may find the way from East to West so perfectly/ as from South to North: but all that which hitherto/ touching that matter is come to light/ is not only unprofitable/ but also (if a man should trust thereunto) both hurtful and deceitful: whereof in the fourth part of this Book I think to write more at large/ as also/ what good and benefit a Pilot may have by the Direction of the Needle/ or altering of the Compass/ whereupon these new found Lengths are built/ although without ground or true foundation.   

A BRIEF AND SHORT INTRODUCTION FOR THE understanding of the Celestial Sphere, as far as it concerneth the Art of Seafaring.  

CHAPT. I. Of the two Poles of the World.  
THe Earth with the Waters making both together a perfect and just round Globe, the which all Mathematicians by good and infallible reason's confirm, as also by experience it is found so to be. This Globe, the Everlasting and Almighty God hath firmly placed in the middle of the world, as a centre or middle point thereof, & hath so placed the Heavens as a hollow Globe, with so unmeasurable wideness round about the same, that the distance thereof is equally set, and separated from the earth in all places alike, like unto the compass of a circle which is equally drawn and separated from the middle point thereof: and hath so ordained, that every 24 hours it is carried about the world: by the which daily motion, it draweth with it all the heavenly lights, as the Son, Moon, and all the stars, the which also by that means every 24 hours are carried round about the whole World, as it is daily seen.  
This moving or stirring of the heavens is performed upon two sure fast points, that stand directly each against other, in such manner, as if a bale should be turned round upon two pings, as upon an axle-tree. So suppose that you see a strait line stretching out from one of the aforesaid points of the heavens to the other, like to an axle-tree, the same is it that passeth right through the centre, (that is through the middle of the earth) this line is called the axle-tree of the world, and the two points aforesaid the Poles or axle-tree points of the World, the one named the North, the other the South Pole: Now that this may be the better understood, I will declare it by this figure.   diagram of Earth  

CHAP. II. Of the Equinoctial Line.  
THe whole circle of the Heavens is divided into 360 degrees or steps, whereby, by the foresaid Chapter we may perceive, that the two poles are distant one from the other 180 degrees, that is half the circle of the Heavens. Right in the middle between both the Poles we suppose a circle to be placed, which we call the Equinoctial Line, or the Equator, and is so called for that whensoever the Son cometh to this circle, the day and night is of one length throughout all the World. This circle is in all places equally distant from both the Poles of the World, to wit 90 degrees, & devideth the Heavens in two equal parts, whereof the one reacheth northward, and is called the North-part, the other southward, and is called the Southpart, as it is plainly seen in the foresaid Globe or Figure, where you see the circle E C the Equinoctial Line, standing just of one length from the Poles B D, dividing the Heavens into two equal parts, as the North-part E B C, and the Southpart E D C.   

CHAP. III. Of the Tropikes and Zodiac.  
THree and twenty degrees 31 ½ minutes northward from the Equinoctial Line there is a circle supposed to be, which is called Tropicus Cancri, or the course of the Son in Cancer: for that when the Son cometh by course unto that circle, he beginneth to turn again towards the Equinoctial. And likewise 23 degrees 31 ½ minutes southward from the Equinoctial Line, there is another circle supposed to be, which is called Tropicus Capricorni, or the course of the Son in Capricornus, for that when the Son in winter time cometh to this circle, he beginneth again to turn unto the Equinoctial. These two circles go round about the Heavens, and are equally distant from the Equinoctial. But how & in what manner toucheth the Son in his course (once in Summer & another time in Winter) those two circles? It happeneth thus: we suppose a great circle to be in the Heavens wherein the Son holdeth his course, which lieth thwartwise over the Equinoctial, that is, the one half northward, the other half southward, in such manner, that in the place where he goeth most northward from the Equinoctial Line, there he entereth into Tropicus Cancri, and where he goeth most southward from the Equinoctial Line, there he entereth into Tropicus Capricorni. The two points or places where he goeth or cutteth over the Equinoctial, stand right over against each other, so that both the Equinoctial and these two circles are divided into two equal parts, which points are called the one, the Equinoictall in Lent, and the other the Equinoctial in Harvest, which by the Figure enseweing more plainly appeareth.  
Example.   diagram of Earth 
Let A be the Earth, B C D the Heaven, E F C G the Equinoctial, B the North-pole, D the South-pole, and the Line B A D the axle-tree of the World, as aforesaid: Then the Circle K L is Tropicus Cancri, lying northward from the Equinoctial Line, & the circle H I Tropicus Capricorni southward from the Equinoctial Line, K F I G is the great Circle, wherein the Son hath his continual course, lying crosswise over the Equinoctial, reaching northward beyond the Line to Tropicus Cancri in K and southward beyond the Line to Tropicus Capricorni in I. The Equinoctial in Lent is F, and the Equinoctial in Harvest is G, in the places where this Circle & the Eqvinoctiall cut or pass through each other. This Circle is commonly called the Zodiac, although the right name thereof is the Ecliptic Line, or the passage of the Son, being the right middle part of the Zodiac, for the Zodiac itself is a Circle almost 20 degrees broad, that is on each side of this Circle or passage of the Son, 10 degrees. This Circle aforesaid is divided into 12 even parts, each part having a proper sign belonging unto it, & every sign hath 30 degrees, so that the whole Circle (as all other Circles do) containeth 360 degrees. The names of the signs are, Aries, Taurus, Gemini, Cancer, Leo, Virgo, Libra, Scorpius, Sagittarius, Capricornus, Aquarius, and Pisces, and these are placed in this manner: Aries beginneth where the Equator & the Zodiac cut or pass through each other, in the Equinoctial of Lent, and follow in order as aforesaid, so that the beginning of Cancer is just at Tropicus Cancri. Libra on the other side, beginneth where the Equator & the Zodiac cut or pass through each other again in the Equinoctial of Harvest: and the beginning of Capricornus is just where the Zodiac or Ecliptic Line toucheth Tropicus Capricorni, and so forth.   

CHAP. FOUR Of the course of the Son.  
IN this Zodiac or Ecliptic Line aforesaid, the middle point of the Son hath his course, without once going out of it, passing through it every year once, that is every month through one sign, and every day almost a degree. Upon the 20 of March stilo novo, and the 10 of March stilo vechio, when the days & nights are just of one length throughout all the World, than the Son entereth into the Equinoctial, that is to say, into Aries, the 20 or 10 of April he entereth into Taurus, the 20 or 10 of May into Gemini, the 21 or 11 of june into Cancer, upon Tropicus Cancri, and then he is at the farthest of his course northward from the Equinoctial, than all those that dwell northward from the Line have their longest day, and those that dwell southward from the Line their shortest day. The Son holding his course, then beginneth to turn again to the Line, and the 23 or 13 of julie entereth into Leo, the 23 or 13 of August into Virgo, and the 23 or 13 of September he cometh again on the Line, in the beginning of Libra, making the days and nights one again of one length throughout all the World, the 23 or 13 of October he entereth into Scorpio, the 22 or 12 of November into Sagittarius, and the 22 or 12 of December to Tropicus Capricorni, in the beginning of Capricornus, then are the days longest with them that dwell southward from the Line. The 20 or 10 of januarie, the Son cometh further, and entereth into Aquarius, about the 18 or 8 of February into Pisces, and the 20 or 10 of March he entereth again into Aries. This aught also to be known and marked: that this Zodiac standeth unmovably with the fixed Stars, with the which every day he is carried about from East to West, without alteration: and that the Son doth the foresaid yearly course contrariwise, from west to east, whereby in his daily course he is so much hindered, that in the year he goeth one time less about then the fixed Stars.   

CHAP. V Of the Declination of the Son and what it is.  
THe declination of the Son is nothing else, than his departing from the Equinoctial: or to speak more plainly, the distance or wideness that is between the Son and the Equinoctial Line. When the Son through the aforesaid course cometh to the Equinoctial Line, than he hath no declination, which happeneth twice every year, that is the 20 of March and the 23 of September stilo novo, but as soon as he is on the one or the other side of the Equinoctial, than he hath declination, and that just as much as he is gone from the equinoctial. And this Declination is twofold, Northward and Southward: for when the Son is on the north part of the Line, than his declination is Northward, and when it is on the southpart of the Line then his declination is Southward.   

CHAP. VI How you shall find the perfect declination of the Son every day in the year.  
TO know the declination of the Son perfectly every day in the year, in former times there were tables made which served for four years, but they were gathered out of old and corrupt observations, so that at some times of the year they differed almost a fourth part of a degree from the truth, as it appeareth by the true calculation thereof made by the Learned Astronomer Tycho Brahae. And therefore for the good of all Seafaring men, not without much labour & diligence I have collected a new book of degrees for four years out of the aforesaid Tycho Brahae breast corrected notes, just for the Meridian (that is) after the longitude of the Low-countries, which Tables of declinations may serve without any weighty alteration (or that can be any hindrance unto Seafaring men) for the space of 20 years. Now to know how much the Son in every day of the year declineth from the Equinoctial, first see in what year and month you are, and what day of the month it is, the same day seek in the first column, and there against it in the second column you shall find how many degrees and minutes the Son is gone or declined from the Equator: but to know whether it be northward or southward, you must understand, that from the 10 of March to the 13 of September it goeth on the northside from the Line, and from the 13 of September again to the 10 of March southward from the Line. But to know whether it is a Leap-yeare, or the first, second, or third year from it, we have to that end placed a small Table under this Chapter, wherein without any labour you may find it.  
Leap years. First years. Second years. Third years. 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1617. 1618. 1619 1620 1621. 1622 1623. 1624. 1625 1626. 6627 1628. 1629 1630 1631  

 sun with face Here follow the Tables of the Declination of the Son after the New style.  

The Declination of the Son, serving (after the New style) for the Leap Year.  

januarie.  da deg. mi. 1 23— 7 2 23— 2 3 22— 50 4 22— 50 5 22— 44 6 22— 37 7 22— 30 8 22— 22 9 22— 14 10 22— 5 11 21— 56 12 21— 47 13 21— 37 14 21— 27 15 21— 16 16 21— 5 17 20— 53 18 20— 41 19 20-29 20 20— 16 21 20— 3 22 19— 49 23 19— 35 24 19— 21 25 19— 7 26 18— 52 27 18— 36 28 18— 21 29 18— 5 30 17— 49 31 27— ●2 
February.  da deg mi. 1 17— 15 2 16-58 3 16— 41 4 16— 23 5 16— 5 6 15— 47 7 15— 28 8 15— 9 9 14-50 10 14-31 11 14-11 12 13— 51 13 13— 31 14 13— 11 15 12-50 16 12— 30 17 12— 9 18 11— 48 19 11— 27 20 11— 5 21 10— 44 22 10— 20 23 10— 0 24 9— 38 25 9— 16 26 8— 53 27 8— 31 28 8— 8 29 7-45 
March.  da deg. mi. 1 7— 22 2 6— 59 3 6— 36 4 6— 13 5 5— 50 6 5— 27 7 5— 4 8 4— 41 9 4— 17 10 3— 53 11 3— 30 12 3— 6 13 2— 42 14 2— 19 15 1— 56 16 1— 32 17 1— 8 18 0— 44 19 0— 20 
☞  20 0— 3 
☜  21 0— 27 22 0— ●0 23 1— 14 24 1— 38 25 2— 1 26 2— 24 27 2— 48 28 3— 12 29 3— 35 30 3— ●8 31 4— ● 
April.  da deg. mi. 1 4— 44 2 5— 7 3 5— 30 4 5— 53 5 6— 16 6 6— 38 7 7— 1 8 7— 23 9 7— 40 10 8— 8 11 8— 30 12 8— 52 13 9— 13 14 9— 35 15 9— 56 16 10-17 17 10-38 18 10— 59 19 11— 20 20 11— 41 21 12— 1 22 12— 21 23 12— 41 24 13— 1 25 13— 21 26 13— 40 27 13— 59 28 14— 18 29 14— 37 30 14— 55 
May.  da deg. mi. 1 15— 13 2 15— 31 3 15— 49 4 16— 6 5 16— 23 6 16— 40 7 16— 57 8 17— 13 9 17— 29 10 17-45 11 18— 1 12 18— 16 13 18— 31 14 18— 45 15 18— 59 16 19— 13 17 19— 27 18 19— 40 19 19— 53 20 20— 6 21 20— 18 22 20— 30 23 20— 42 24 20— 53 25 21— 4 26 21— 14 27 21— 24 28 21— 34 29 21— 43 30 21— 52 31 22— 1 
june.  da deg. mi. 1 22-9 2 22— 17 3 22— 25 4 22— 32 5 22— 39 6 22— ●5 7 22— 51 8 22— 56 9 23— 1 10 23— 6 11 23— 10 12 23— 14 13 23— 18 14 23— 21 15 23— 24 16 23— 26 17 23— 28 18 23— 29 19 23— 30 20 23— 31 21 23— 31 ½ 22 23— 31 23 23— 30 24 23— 29 25 23— 28 26 23— 26 27 23— 24 28 23— 21 29 23— 18 30 23— 15 
julie.  da deg. mi. 1 23— 11 2 23— 7 3 23— 2 4 22— 57 5 22— 52 6 22— 46 7 22-40 8 22-33 9 22— 26 10 22-18 11 22-10 12 22— 2 13 21— 54 14 21— 45 15 21— 36 16 21— 26 17 21— 16 18 21-6 19 20-55 20 20-44 21 20— 32 22 20-20 23 20-8 24 19-55 25 19— 42 26 19— 29 27 19— 16 28 19— 2 29 18— 48 30 18— 34 31 18-19 
August.  da deg. mi. 1 18— 4 2 17-49 3 17-33 4 17— 17 5 17-1 6 16-45 7 16-28 8 16-11 9 15— 53 10 15— 35 11 15-18 12 15— 0 13 14-42 14 14-24 15 14-5 16 13— 46 17 13— 27 18 13— 7 19 12— 47 20 12-28 21 12-8 22 11-48 23 11— 27 24 11— 6 25 10— 45 26 10-24 27 10-3 28 9-42 29 9-21 30 9— 0 31 8-38 
September.  da deg. mi. 1 8— 16 2 7-54 3 7— 32 4 7-10 5 6-48 6 6-25 7 6— 2 8 5— 40 9 5— 17 10 4-54 11 4-31 12 4-8 13 3— 45 14 3— 22 15 2-59 16 2— 35 17 2-12 18 1— 49 19 1— 26 20 1— 2 21 0-38 22 0— 15 
☞  23 0-8 
☜  24 0-32 25 0— 56 26 1— 19 27 1— 43 28 2— 6 29 2— 29 30 2— 53 
October.  da deg. mi. 1 3— 16 2 3-40 3 4-3 4 4-27 5 4-50 6 5— 13 7 5— 36 8 5-59 9 6-22 10 6-45 11 7-8 12 7-31 13 7-54 14 8-16 15 8-39 16 9-1 17 9-23 18 9-45 19 10-7 20 10-29 21 10-50 22 11-11 23 11— 33 24 11-54 25 12-15 26 12-35 27 12-56 28 13— 16 29 13— 36 30 13— 56 31 14-16 
November.  da deg. mi. 1 14-35 2 14-55 3 15— 14 4 15-32 5 15-51 6 16-9 7 16-27 8 16-44 9 17-2 10 17-19 11 17-36 12 17-52 13 18— 8 14 18-24 15 18-39 16 18-54 17 19-9 18 19-24 19 19-38 20 19-51 21 20-5 22 20-18 23 20-31 24 20-43 25 20-55 26 21— 6 27 21— 17 28 21-28 29 21-38 30 21-48 
December.  de deg. mi. 1 21— 57 2 22-6 3 22-15 4 22-23 5 22— 31 6 22— 38 7 22-45 8 22-51 9 22-57 10 23— 2 11 23— 7 12 23— 12 13 23— 16 14 23— 19 15 23— 22 16 23— 25 17 23— 27 18 23— 29 19 23— 30 20 23— 31 21 23-31½ 22 23— 31 23 23— 30 24 23— 29 25 23— 28 26 23— 26 27 23-23 28 23-20 29 23— 16 30 23— 12 31 23— 8   

The Declination of the Son, serving (after the New style) for the first Year after the Leap Year.  

januarie.  da deg. mi. 1 23— 3 2 22-58 3 22-52 4 22-46 5 22-39 6 22-32 7 22-24 8 22-16 9 22-7 10 21— 58 11 21-49 12 21— 39 13 21— 29 14 21— 18 15 21— 7 16 20-56 17 20-44 18 20— 32 19 20-19 20 20-6 21 19-53 22 19-39 23 19— 25 24 19-10 25 18-55 26 18-40 27 18-25 28 18— 9 29 17— 53 30 17-36 31 17— 19 
February.  da deg. mi. 1 17-2 2 16-45 3 16-27 4 16-9 5 15-51 6 15-33 7 15— 14 8 14-55 9 14-35 10 14-15 11 13— 56 12 13— 36 13 13— 16 14 12— 56 15 12— 35 16 12— 14 17 11— 53 18 11— 32 19 11— 10 20 10-49 21 10— 27 22 10— 5 23 9-43 24 9-21 25 8— 59 26 8— 36 27 8— 13 28 7— 51 
March.  da deg. mi. 1 7-28 2 7-5 3 6— 42 4 6-19 5 5-56 6 5-33 7 5-9 8 4-46 9 4-23 10 3— 59 11 3— 35 12 3— 12 13 2-48 14 2-24 15 2— 1 16 1— 37 17 1— 14 18 0-50 19 0-26 
☞  20 0-2 
☜  21 0-21 22 0-45 23 1— 8 24 1— 32 25 1— 55 26 2-19 27 2-42 28 3— 6 29 3— 29 30 3— 53 31 4-16 
April.  da deg. mi. 1 4— 39 2 5— 2 3 5— 26 4 5-48 5 6-11 6 6-33 7 6-56 8 7— 18 9 7-40 10 8— 3 11 8-25 12 8— 47 13 9— 9 14 9-30 15 9-51 16 10-13 17 10— 34 18 10— 55 19 11-16 20 11— 36 21 11— 56 22 12-17 23 12-37 24 12-57 25 13— 16 26 13-35 27 13— 54 28 14-13 29 14-32 30 14-50 
May.  da deg. mi. 1 15-9 2 15— 27 3 15— 45 4 16-2 5 16-20 6 16-37 7 16-54 8 17-10 9 17-26 10 17-41 11 17-57 12 18-12 13 18— 27 14 18— 41 15 18— 56 16 19-10 17 19-24 18 19— 37 19 19-50 20 20-3 21 20— 15 22 20— 27 23 20-39 24 20— 50 25 21— 1 26 21— 12 27 21— 22 28 21— 32 29 21-41 30 21— 50 31 21-59 
june.  da deg. mi. 1 22-7 2 22— 15 3 22— 23 4 22— 30 5 22— 37 6 22— 44 7 22— 50 8 22— 55 9 23— 0 10 23— 5 11 23— 10 12 23— 14 13 23— 17 14 23— 20 15 23-23 16 23— 26 17 23— 28 18 23— 29 19 23— 30 20 23— 31 21 23— 31½ 22 23— 31 23 23— 31 24 23— 30 25 23— 29 26 23— 27 27 23— 25 28 23-22 29 23— 19 30 23— 16 
julie.  da deg. mi. 1 23-12 2 23— 8 3 23— 3 4 22-58 5 22— 53 6 22-47 7 22— 41 8 22-34 9 22-27 10 22-20 11 22— 12 12 22— 4 13 21— 56 14 21— 47 15 21— 38 16 21— 28 17 21— 18 18 21— 8 19 20-57 20 20-46 21 20— 35 22 20-23 23 20-11 2● ●●— 58 25 ●9 46 26 19— 33 27 19— 19 28 19— 5 29 18-51 30 18— 37 31 18-22 
August.  da deg. mi. 1 18— 7 2 17-52 3 17-37 4 17— 21 5 17— 4 6 16-48 7 16-32 8 16-15 9 15-57 10 15-40 11 15— 22 12 15— 4 13 14-46 14 14-28 15 14-9 16 13— 50 17 13-31 18 13— 12 19 12— 52 20 12-33 21 12— 13 22 11-52 23 11— 32 24 11-12 25 10— 51 26 10-30 27 10— 9 28 9— 48 29 9-27 30 9— 5 31 8-43 
September.  da deg. mi. 1 8— 21 2 7-59 3 7-37 4 7-15 5 6— 53 6 6-31 7 6-8 8 5-45 9 5-23 10 5-0 11 4-37 12 4— 14 13 3— 51 14 3-28 15 3-5 16 2-41 17 2-18 18 1-55 19 1— 31 20 1— 8 21 0— 44 22 0-21 
☞  23 0-3 
☜  24 0— 26 25 0— 50 26 1— 13 27 1— 37 28 2— 0 29 2— 24 30 2-47 
October.  da d●g. mi. 1 3-1● 2 3-34 3 3-58 4 4-21 5 4-44 6 5-7 7 5-30 8 5-53 9 6-17 10 6-40 11 7-3 12 7-25 13 7-48 14 8-11 15 8-33 16 8-55 17 9-17 18 9-40 19 10-2 20 10-23 21 10-45 22 11-6 23 11-28 24 11— 49 25 12-9 26 12-30 27 12-51 28 13-11 29 13-31 30 13-51 31 14-11 
November.  da deg. mi. 1 14— 31 2 14-50 3 15-9 4 15-28 5 15-46 6 16-4 7 16-22 8 16-40 9 16-58 10 17-15 11 17-32 12 17-48 13 18-4 14 18-20 15 18-36 16 18-51 17 19-6 18 19-20 19 19-34 20 19-48 21 20-2 22 20-15 23 20-28 24 20-40 25 20-52 26 21— 3 27 21— 14 28 21— 25 29 21-36 30 21— 46 
December.  de deg. mi. 1 21— 55 2 22— 4 3 22-13 4 22-21 5 22— 29 6 22— 36 7 22-43 8 22— 50 9 22— 56 10 23— 2 11 23— 7 12 23-11 13 23— 15 14 23— 19 15 23-22 16 23-25 17 23— 27 18 23— 29 19 23— 30 20 23— 31 21 23-31½ 22 23— 31 23 23— 31 24 23-30 25 23-28 26 23— 26 27 23-24 28 23— 21 29 23— 17 30 23-13 31 23— 9   

The Declination of the Son, serving (after the New style) for the second Year after the Leap Year.  

januarie.  da deg. mi. 1 23— 4 2 22— 59 3 22-53 4 22— 47 5 22-41 6 22-34 7 22-26 8 22-18 9 22-9 10 22-0 11 21— 51 12 21— 42 13 21— 32 14 21— 21 15 21— 10 16 20— 59 17 20-47 18 20-35 19 20-22 20 20— 9 21 19— 56 22 19— 42 23 19-28 24 19— 14 25 18-59 26 18-44 27 18— 29 28 18— 13 29 17-57 30 17— 40 31 17— 24 
February.  da deg. mi. 1 17-7 2 16-49 3 16-32 4 16— 14 5 15-56 6 15— 37 7 15— 18 8 14— 59 9 14— 40 10 14-21 11 14— 1 12 13— 41 13 13— 21 14 13— 1 15 12— 40 16 12— 19 17 11-58 18 11— 37 19 11— 16 20 10-54 21 10— 32 22 10-11 23 9-49 24 9-27 25 9— 4 26 8-42 27 8-19 28 7— 57 
March.  da deg. mi. 1 7— 34 2 7-11 3 6— 48 4 6— 25 5 6-2 6 5— 39 7 5-15 8 4— 52 9 4-29 10 4-5 11 3— 42 12 3-18 13 2-55 14 2— 31 15 2— 7 16 1— 43 17 1-20 18 0-56 19 0— 32 20 0— 8 
☞  21 0— 15 
☜  22 0— 39 23 1— 2 24 1— 26 25 1— 50 26 2-13 27 2-37 28 3— 0 29 3— 23 30 3— 46 31 4— 10 
April.  da deg. mi. 1 4— 33 2 4-56 3 5-19 4 5-42 5 6— 5 6 6— 28 7 6— 50 8 7— 12 9 7— 35 10 7-57 11 8— 19 12 8— 41 13 9— 3 14 9— 25 15 9— 46 16 10— 7 17 10— 29 18 10— 50 19 11-10 20 11— 31 21 11— 52 22 12-12 23 12-32 24 12— 52 25 13— 11 26 13-31 27 13— 50 28 14— 9 29 14— 28 30 14— 46 
May.  da deg. mi. 1 15— 4 2 15— 22 3 15-40 4 15-58 5 16-15 6 16-32 7 16— 49 8 17— 5 9 17-21 10 17-37 11 17-53 12 18-8 13 18-23 14 18-38 15 18— 52 16 19— 6 17 19-20 18 19— 37 19 19-47 20 20-0 21 20— 12 22 20— 24 23 20-36 24 20— 47 25 20-58 26 21— 9 27 21— 19 28 21— 29 29 21-39 30 21— 48 31 21— 57 
june.  da deg. mi. 1 22— 5 2 22— 13 3 22-21 4 22— 28 5 22— 35 6 22— 42 7 22-48 8 22— 54 9 22— 59 10 23— 4 11 23-9 12 23— 13 13 23— 16 14 23— 20 15 23— 23 16 23— 25 17 23— 27 18 23— 29 19 23— 30 20 23— 31 21 23-31½ 22 23-31½ 23 23— 31 24 23-30 25 23— 29 26 23— 27 27 23— 25 28 23— 23 29 23— 20 30 23— 17 
julie.  da deg. mi. 1 23— 13 2 23— 9 3 23— 5 4 23— 0 5 22-54 6 22-48 7 22-42 8 22— 36 9 22-29 10 22-22 11 22— 14 12 22— 6 13 21— 58 14 21— 49 15 21— 40 16 21— 31 17 21— 21 18 21— 10 19 21— 0 20 20-49 21 20— 38 22 20-26 23 20-14 24 ●0— 2 25 19— 49 26 19— 36 27 19-23 28 19— 9 29 18-55 30 18— 41 31 18-26 
August.  da deg. mi. 1 18-11 2 17-56 3 17-41 4 17— 25 5 17— 9 6 16— 53 7 16— 36 8 16-19 9 16-2 10 15-45 11 15— 27 12 15— 9 13 14— 51 14 14— 33 15 14— 14 16 13— 55 17 13— 36 18 13— 17 19 12— 57 20 12-37 21 12— 17 22 11-57 23 11— 36 24 11— 16 25 10-56 26 10— 35 27 10— 14 28 9— 53 29 9— 32 30 9— 10 31 8-49 
September.  da deg. mi. 1 8— 27 2 8— 5 3 7— 43 4 7-21 5 6-58 6 6-36 7 6-14 8 5— 51 9 5— 28 10 5— 5 11 4-43 12 4— 20 13 3— 57 14 3-33 15 3-10 16 2— 47 17 2-24 18 2— 0 19 1— 37 20 1— 14 21 0-50 22 0-27 23 0— 3 
☞  24 0— 20 
☜  25 0— 44 26 1— 8 27 1— 31 28 1— 54 29 2— 18 30 2— 41 
October.  da deg. mi. 1 3— 5 2 3— 29 3 3— 52 4 4— 15 5 4— 38 6 5— 2 7 5-25 8 5-48 9 6-11 10 6-34 11 6-57 12 7-20 13 7-43 14 8-5 15 8-28 16 8-50 17 9-12 18 9-34 19 9-56 20 10— 18 21 10-40 22 11— 1 23 11-23 24 11-44 25 12— 4 26 12— 25 27 12-46 28 13— 6 29 13— 26 30 13— 46 31 14-6 
November.  da deg. mi. 1 14— 26 2 14— 45 3 15— 4 4 15— 23 5 15— 42 6 16— 0 7 16— 18 8 16— 36 9 16— 53 10 17— 10 11 17— 27 12 17— 44 13 18— 0 14 18-16 15 18-32 16 18— 47 17 19-2 18 19— 17 19 19— 31 20 19-45 21 19— 59 22 20— 12 23 20— 24 24 20— 37 25 20— 49 26 21— 1 27 21— 12 28 21— 23 29 21— 33 30 21— 43 
December.  de deg. mi. 1 21— 53 2 22— 2 3 22— 11 4 22— 19 5 22— 27 6 22— 34 7 22— 41 8 22— 48 9 22— 54 10 23— 0 11 23— 5 12 23— 10 13 23— 14 14 23— 18 15 23— 21 16 23— 24 17 23— 26 18 23— 28 19 23— 30 20 23— 31 21 23— 31½ 22 23— 31½ 23 23— 31 24 23— 30 25 23— 29 26 23— 27 27 23— 25 28 23— 22 29 23— 19 30 23— 15 31 23— 10   

The Declination of the Son, serving (after the New style) for the third Year after the Leap Year.  

januarie.  da deg. mi. 1 23— 6 2 23— 1 3 22— 55 4 22— 49 5 22— 42 6 22— 35 7 22— 28 8 22— 20 9 22— 12 10 22— 3 11 21— 54 12 21— 44 13 21— 34 14 21— 24 15 21— 13 16 21— 2 17 20— 50 18 20— 38 19 20— 25 20 20— 12 21 19— 59 22 19— 46 23 19— 32 24 19— 18 25 19— 3 26 18— 48 27 18— 32 28 18— 17 29 18— 1 30 17— 45 31 17— 28 
February.  da deg. mi. 1 17— 11 2 16— 53 3 16— 36 4 16— 18 5 16— 0 6 15— 42 7 15— 23 8 15— 4 9 14— 45 10 14— 26 11 14— 6 12 13— 46 13 13— 26 14 13— 6 15 12— 45 16 12— 24 17 12— 3 18 11— 42 19 11— 21 20 11— 0 21 10— 38 22 10— 16 23 9— 54 24 9— 32 25 9— 10 26 8— 47 27 8— 25 28 8— 3 
March.  da deg. mi. 1 7— 40 2 7— 17 3 6— 54 4 6— 31 5 6— 8 6 5— 44 7 5— 21 8 4— 58 9 4— 34 10 4— 11 11 3— 47 12 3— 23 13 2— 59 14 2— 36 15 2— 13 16 1— 49 17 1— 25 18 1— 2 19 0— 38 
☞  20 0— 14 
☜  21 0— 9 22 0— 33 23 0— 56 24 1— 20 25 1— 44 26 2— 7 27 2— 31 28 2— 54 29 3— 17 30 3— 40 31 4— 4 
April.  da deg. mi. 1 4— 27 2 4— 50 3 5— 13 4 5— 36 5 5— 59 6 6— 22 7 6— 44 8 7— 7 9 7— 29 10 7— 51 11 8— 14 12 8— 36 13 8— 58 14 9— 19 15 9— 41 16 10— 2 17 10— 23 18 10— 44 19 11— 5 20 11— 26 21 11— 46 22 12— 7 23 12— 27 24 12— 47 25 13— 7 26 13— 26 27 13— 45 28 14— 4 29 14— 23 30 14— 41 
May.  da deg. mi. 1 15— 0 2 15— 18 3 15— 36 4 15— 53 5 16— 11 6 16— 28 7 16— 45 8 17— 1 9 17— 17 10 17— 33 11 17— 49 12 18— 4 13 18— 19 14 18— 34 15 18— 49 16 19— 3 17 19— 17 18 19— 30 19 19— 43 20 19— 56 21 20— 9 22 20— 21 23 20— 33 24 20— 44 25 20— 55 26 21— 6 27 21— 17 28 21— 27 29 21— 37 30 21— 46 31 21— 55 
june.  da deg. mi. 1 22— 3 2 22— 11 3 22— 19 4 22— 27 5 22— 34 ● — 40 7 22— 46 8 22— 52 9 22— 58 10 23— 3 11 23— 7 12 23— 11 13 23— 15 14 23— 19 15 23— 22 16 23— 25 17 23— 27 18 23— 29 19 23— 30 20 23— 31 21 23— 31 22 23— 31½ 23 23— 31 24 23— 30 25 23— 29 26 23— 28 27 23— 26 28 23— 24 29 23— 21 30 23— 18 
julie.  da deg. mi. 1 23— 14 2 23— 10 3 23— 6 4 23— 1 5 22— 56 6 22— 50 7 22— 44 8 22— 38 9 22— 31 10 22— 24 11 22— 16 12 2 8 13 22— 0 14 21— 51 15 21— 42 16 21— 33 17 21— 23 18 21— 13 19 21— 3 20 20— 52 21 20— 41 22 20— 29 23 20— 17 24 ●0— 5 25 19— 52 26 19— 39 27 19— 26 28 19— 12 29 18— 58 30 18— 44 31 18— 30 
August.  da deg mi. 1 18— 15 2 18— 0 3 17— 45 4 17— 29 5 17— 13 6 16— 57 7 16— 40 8 16— 23 9 16— 6 10 15— 49 11 15— 31 12 15— 13 13 14-55 14 14-37 15 14-19 16 14-0 17 13— 41 18 13— 22 19 13-2 20 12-43 21 12-23 22 12-3 23 11— 42 24 11— 22 25 11— 1 26 10-40 27 10— 19 28 9— 58 29 9— 37 30 9— 16 31 8-54 
September.  da deg. mi. 1 8— 32 2 8— 11 3 7— 49 4 7— 27 5 7— 4 6 6— 42 7 6— 19 8 5— 57 9 5— 34 10 5— 11 11 4— 48 12 4— 25 13 3— 2 14 3— 39 15 3— 16 16 2— 53 17 2— 30 18 2— 6 19 1— 43 20 1— 19 21 0— 56 22 0— 33 23 0— 9 
☞  24 0— 14 
☜  25 0— 38 26 1— 2 27 1— 25 28 1— 49 29 2— 12 30 2— 36 
October.  da deg. mi. 1 2— 59 2 3— 22 3 3— 46 4 4— 9 5 4— 33 6 4— 56 7 5— 19 8 5— 42 9 6— 5 10 6— 28 11 6— 51 12 7— 14 13 7— 37 14 7— 59 15 8— 22 16 8— 44 17 9— 7 18 9— 29 19 9— 51 20 10— 13 21 10— 34 22 10-56 23 11— 17 24 11— 38 25 11— 59 26 12— 20 27 12— 41 28 13— 1 29 13— 21 30 13— 11 31 14— 1 
November.  da deg mi. 1 14— 21 2 14-40 3 14-59 4 15-18 5 15— 37 6 15— 55 7 16-13 8 16-31 9 16-49 10 17-6 11 17-23 12 17— 40 13 17-56 14 18-12 15 18-28 16 18-43 17 18— 58 18 19-13 19 19— 27 20 19-41 21 19-55 22 20-8 23 20— 21 24 20— 34 25 20— 46 26 20— 58 27 21— 9 28 21— 20 29 21— 31 30 21— 41 
December.  de deg. mi. 1 21— 51 2 22-0 3 22-9 4 22— 17 5 22— 25 6 22— 33 7 22— 40 8 22— 47 9 22— 53 10 22-59 11 23— 4 12 23— 9 13 23— 13 14 23— 17 15 23— 20 16 23— 23 17 23— 26 18 23— 28 19 23— 29 20 23— 30 21 23— 31 22 23-31 1/● 23 23-31 24 23— 30 25 23-29 26 23-27 27 23-25 28 23-22 29 23— 19 30 23— 15 31 23— 11     

CHAP. VII. Of the fixed Stars, their declination, and how they may alter in the declination, withal showing how men may easily learn to know them.  
THe Declination of the Stars is almost like unto that of the Son, and is twofold, that is Northward & Southward: those that stand Northward from the Equinoctial decline northward, and those that stand Southward from the Equinoctial decline southward. But this is the difference between the declination of the Son and of the stars, the declination of the Son altereth, and is increased or shortened every day, and the one half year declineth northward, and the other half year southward: but the declination of the fixed stars is otherwise, for some of them that decline northward or southward, are always on the north or south side of the Line: & some of them that decline northward, may decline southward, and some that decline southward may also decline northward: but that is very long and in a great space of time, though some of them do it with more speed, and in shorter time than the rest; according to their situations in the Heavens. Some of them increase or decrease a minute every three years, so that every ten or twelve years they need correction, and some cannot alter a minute of their declination in 40 or 50 years, as may be proved by good reason drawn from the natural course and moving of the fixed stars. The brightest, and chiefest; and most fit to be used at Sea, we have hereafter placed, with their right declination according to the year 1608, as they by the aforesaid Tycho Brahae are found and observed to be situated. How great commodity & profit it is for a Seafaring man to have the knowledge of the fixed Stars and their ordinary course, specially in strange and long voyages, is well known unto all expert and skilful Pilots. And for that in these days there are yet many Seafaring men, that have no knowledge of the fixed Stars, we will hereafter together with their declination, show also an easy and convenient way, readily to learn to know them, and at all times perfectly to know when each of them enter into the south or are at the highest, and are fit to be used. In the fourth chapter it is showed, that the fixed Stars, go once a year about the Heavens more than the Son, so that every day they come about 4 min. further southward, which is every week, about half an hour, and every month two hours, which that it may the better be understood, we will make it evident by an example taken from the Star called Syrius, 
The great Dog.  or Canis major the great Dog which always followeth a little after the Image of the Giant Orion & his Girdle, which is called the three Kings, 
Canis major.  which appear a little over the great Dog, it is the greatest & clearest of all the fixed Stars, which for the most part is known unto all Seafaring men, 
Syrius  his declination is southward from the Line, 16 degrees, and 11 minutes, 

And it is south upon the 24 of januarie stilo novo, at ten of the clock at night.  
The 23 of February at eight of the clock at night.  
The 28 of March at six of the clock at night.  
The 30 of April at four of the clock in the eavening.  
The 30 of May at two of the clock after noon.  
The 28 of june at twelve of the clock at noon, even with the Son.  
The 28 of julie at ten of the clock before noon.  
The 29 of August at eight of the clock before noon.  
The 1 of October at six of the clock in the morning.  
The 2 of November at four of the clock in the morning.  
The 1 of December at two of the clock in the morning.  
The 28 of December at twelve of the clock at night.    
Whereby every man may easily reckon at what hour and time this Star is south every day in the year, as well in the day time when you can not see it, as in the night when we may see it. And if you desire to know the like touching all the rest of the fixed Stars upon every day in the year, then mark what was said before, upon what hour of the day before set down, the great Dog cometh into the south, and then by the tables hereafter following touching the declination of the Stars, mark how long time the Star you seek for cometh into the south before or after the great Dog, and by that means you shall find the just and perfect time that you desire.  

Hear followeth the Table of the Declination of the fixed Stars, withal showing at what time each of them comes into the south, and how you shall know them.  

The Twins.   depiction of the constellation Gemini 
The south or lowest Head thereof cometh 54 minutes after the great Dog into the south, and is declined northward 28 degrees, & 54 min.  
The clearest in the Foot cometh a quarter of an hour before the great Dog into the south, his declination is sixteen degrees and 40 minutes northward.   

Canis minor, or the Little Dog, called Canicula. protion.  
The little Dog called Canicula, 
Canicula.  hath three Stars in form  depiction of the constellation Canis Minor as they are here figured: 
protion.  the clearest of them, cometh 50 minutes after the great Dog into the south, his declination is 6 degr. & 11 min. northward from the Line.   

The Water Snake, Hydra.  
The Heart or the clearest of the Water-snake cometh after  depiction of the constellation Hydra Syrius or the great Dog two hours, 
Cor Hydra.  & 40 minutes into the south, his declination is southward from the Line six degrees, and nine-and-fiftie minutes, and showeth itself with such small Stars as are here figured, whereby he is easily known.   

The Lyon.   depiction of the constellation Leo 
The second or the Neck of the Lion cometh three hours thirty minutes after the great Dog into the south, and is declined northward from the Line one-and-twentie degrees, and 48 minutes.  
The Back of the Lion cometh after the great Dog into the south, 4 hours 26 minutes: his declination is northward from the Line, 22 degrees and 40 minutes.  
The Tail of the Lion cometh four hours after the great Dog into the south, his declination is 16 degrees, 
Cauda Leonis.  and 46 minutes northward from the Line.   

Virgo, or the Maid.  
After that followeth Virgo, 
VIRGO Cingulum Virgins.  whereof the most principal & clearest Stars show themselves as they are here figured: the Virgins Gerdle cometh into the south six hours and 12 minutes after the great Dog, his declination is five degrees, and 34 minutes northward from the Line.  
That in the north Wing is called Vindemiatrix, & cometh six hours and sixteen minutes after the great Dog into the south, his declination is northward from the Line 13 deg. 5 min.   depiction of the constellation Virgo 
The Corne-eare Spica Virgins, 
Spica-virginiss.  cometh 6 hours and 36 miminutes after the great Dog into the south, his declination is 9 degrees and 4 minutes southward from the Line.   

Boötes, the Clown.  
Seven hours 30 minutes after Syrius, the clearest Star of  depiction of the constellation Bootes the Clown Boötes cometh into the south, and standeth between his thighs, in form with some others as in this figure is declared, and is called Arcturus, 
Arcturus.  his declination is one-and-twentie degrees, and sixteen minutes northward.   

North Crown.  
After Boötes followeth the North Crown, having the form  depiction of the constellation Corona Borealis almost of a circle as it is here set down in figure, 
Corona Ariadn●  & by Seafaring men is called the Hospital, & when in clear weather there are certain clear Stars seen therein, they are called Sicke-men: the greatest & clearest of them cometh 8 hours & 48 minutes after Canis major into the south, his declination is 28 deg. & 4 min. northward from the Line.   

The Weights, Libra.   depiction of the constellation Libra 
The South-ballance cometh 8 hours after the great Dog into the south, his declination is souhward from the Line 14 degrees & 20 minutes.  
The North-ballance cometh 8 hours 48 minutes after the great Dog into the south, his declination is 7 degrees 52 minutes southward from the Line.   

The Scorpion, Scorpius.  
 depiction of the constellation Scorpius After that followeth the Scorpion as this figure showeth: 
SCORPIUS.  the Star most northward in the Forehead cometh 9 hours 15 min. after the great Dog into the south, his declination is eighteen degrees and forty minutes southward.  
The heart of the Scorpion called Antares 
Antares  cometh nine hours eight-and-thirtie minutes after Syrius into the south: 
Cor Scorpi●.  his declination is five-and-twentie degrees, & seven-and-twentie minutes southward from the Line.   

The Snake bearer and Hercules.   depiction of the constellation Serpentarius 
The head of the Snake-bearer cometh ten hours 48 minutes after Syrius into the south, his declination is 12 degrees & 56 min. northward from the Line.  

Caput Herculis.  Hercules' head standing by the Snake-bearers head, cometh 20 minutes before it into the south, and is declined northward fourteen degrees & 55 minutes.   

Lyra.  

Vultur Cadens.  After that followeth Lyra, as you see it figured in this place, the  depiction of the constellation Lyra greatest with 2 small ones by it, by Seafaring men is called the Threestale, the lightest and clearest Star of Lyra cometh 11 hours and 55 minutes after the great Dog, or (which is all one) 12 hours and 5 minutes before him into the south, his declination is eight and thirty degrees and eight and twenty minutes northward from the Line.   

The Eagle.  
The Eagle showeth himself as this figure declareth: the clearest  depiction of the constellation Aquila of them, 
Vultur vol●ns. Aquila.  that is the middlemost of the three cometh therteen hours after the great Dog, or eleven hours before him into the south, his declination is seven degrees five and fifty minutes northward from the Line.   

The Swan.   depiction of the constellation Cygnus 
The north Wing cometh 13 hours & 4 minutes after the Dog into the south, his declination is 44 degrees and 13 minutes northward.  
The south Wing cometh 14 hours after the great Dog into the south, his declination is 32 degr. & 32 min. northward.  
The lightest and clearest of the Swan, 
Cauda Cygni.  which standeth in the tail cometh 14 hours after the great Dog, or 10 hours before him into the south, his declination is 43 degrees and 55 minutes, northward from the Line.   

Capricornus.  
The Star most southerly and clearest of the two that have  depiction of the constellation Capricornus most light in the Horns of Capricornus, 
Capricornus.  standing as is here showed in the figure, cometh 13 hours & 30 minutes after the great Dog into the south, his declination is southward from the Line 15 degrees & 56 minutes.   

The Flying Horse.  
The Flying-horse called Pegasus 
Pegasus.  is seen in the Heavens as it standeth figured in this place, the Star in the mouth cometh 14 hours and 56 minutes after, or 9 hours & 4 minutes before the great Dog into the south: his declination is 8 degrees, and 7 minutes northward from the Line.   depiction of the constellation Pegasus 
That which standeth upon the right Hip, or the right Leg called Scheat, 
Scheat.  cometh 16 hours, & 16 minutes after the great Dog, or 7 hours and 44 minutes before him into the south, his declination is 26 deg. less one min. northward from the Line.  
Even at the same time also the first or foremost Star in the Wing called Marcab, 
Marcab.  cometh into the south: his declination is 13 degrees and 8 minutes northward.  
The last in the Wing of Pegasus cometh 16 hours and 44 minutes after the great Dog, or 7 hours and 16 minutes before it into the south: his declination is 13 degrees and 1 minute northward from the Line.  
Andromedaes' Head with Pegasus stars making a great quadrangle or square, 
The Head of Andromeda.  (whereby it is easy to be known) cometh after the great Dog into the south, 17 hours and 24 minutes, or 6 hours & 36 minutes before him: his declination is 26 degrees, and 57 minutes northward from the Line.   

Andromeda.   depiction of the constellation Andromeda 
That in the south foot cometh 4 hours 48 minutes before the great Dog into the south: his declination is forty degrees & sixe-and-twentie minutes northward from the Line.  
The Star called Fomahant 
Fomohant.  standeth a great distance full south from the Flying-horse, in the uttermost part of the water running from Aquarius: it is a great and a clear Star, & cometh 16 hours and 6 minutes after Syrius, or seven hours and 44 minutes before into the south: his declination is 31 degrees and 36 minutes southward from the Line.   

Caetus, the Whale.   depiction of the constellation of Cetus 
24 min. after that cometh the Star that is most southward into the south, his declination is southward from the Line 20 deg. & 12 minutes.   depiction of the star Menkar  depiction of the constellation Aries  depiction of the constellation Perseus 
Right northward followeth the clear Star in Perseus 
Perseus.  in this form, which cometh before Syrius into the south 3 hours and an half, his declination is northward 48 degrees and 24 minutes.   depiction of the constellation Taurus  

Auriga, Erichthonius.   depiction of Auriga 
The right Shoulder goeth seven-and-fiftie minutes before the great Dog into the south, and is declined northward 44 degrees and fifty minutes.  
The Right Foot, which also is called the North-horne of Taurus goeth one hour and 22 minutes before the great Dog through the south, his declination is 28 degrees and 12 minutes northward.   

The Giant.   depiction of the constellation Orion 
The right-shoulder cometh 58 minutes before the great Dog into the south and hath 7 degrees and 16 minutes northerly declination.  
The great & clear Star in the Left-foot called Regel 
Regel.  goeth one hour 32 minutes before the great Dog through the south: his declination is southward from the Line 8 degrees and 42 minutes.  
The first of the three Stars in the Girdle, which are called the three Kings, 
Three Kings.  goeth one hour and 16 minutes before Syrius through the south, his declination is 39 minutes southward from the Line.  
Four minutes after that cometh the second or middlemost into the south, his southerly declination is just a degr. & an half.  
Nine minutes after the first cometh the third or the last of the three Kings into the south, his declination is southward from the Line two degrees and 12 minutes. These three Kings stand always and appear a little above the great Dog, on the one side, whereby they are well to be known.   

Hear after follow some Stars which show themselves in the north, & therefore by some are called North-starres.   depiction of the asterism Big Dipper 
The Star most southerly of the Fore-wheeles cometh into the north at the highest or right above the Pole five hours & five minutes after the great Dog is passed the south, his declination five-and-fiftie degrees and 54 minutes northward from the Line, and standeth from the Pole four-and-thirtie degrees and six minutes.  
The Forewheele that is most north followeth three-an-twentie minutes after the other to the highest, his declination is nine-and-fiftie degrees, and 12 minutes, and standeth above the Pole 30 degrees and 48 minutes.  
The Horse next to the Wagon cometh at the highest into the north, six hours & eight minutes after that the great Dog is passed through the south, and it is eight-and-fiftie degrees and seven minutes declined northward, & standeth from the Pole 31 degrees and 53 minutes.  
The middlemost Horse cometh half an hour after the other to the highest: his declination is just seven-and fifty degrees. It standeth therefore 33 degrees from the Pole.  
The foremost or uttermost Horse of the Wagon cometh to the highest 7 hours and 4 minutes after that Syrius is gone through the south: his declination is one-and-fiftie degrees, and nineteen minutes, and standeth from the Pole eight-and-thirtie degrees, and one-and-fortie minutes.  
The middlemost and the clearest of the Waiters is declined northward five-and-seventie degrees and one-and-fiftie minutes, and standeth from the Pole 14 degrees and 9 minutes.  
NOTA. Touching the north-star her declination and how it is to be used with the Watchers is hereafter described.   depiction of dragon's head  

Cassiopea.   depiction of the constellation Cassiopeia 
Half an hour after that followeth the Breast called Schedir, 
Schedir.  his declination is 54 degrees, & 24 minutes, it standeth therefore from the Pole, 35 degrees and 36 minutes.  
Fifteen minutes after that followeth the Star upon the Hip, which is declined 58 degrees and 36 minutes, so that it standeth from the Pole, 31 degrees, and 24 minutes.  
Seven-and-twentie minutes later followeth the Star upon the Knee: his declination is 58 degrees, & 10 minutes, and standeth from the Pole 31 degrees and 50 minutes.  
NOTA. You must understand that whensoever these aforesaid North-starres come into the north at the highest above the Pole: that just 12 hours after, they come at the lowest right under it.     

CHAP. VIII. How to find the hours of the night at all times of the Year.  
IN the Chapter before it is showed, how a man at all times of the year shall perfectly know at what hour the Stars, (as well by day as by night) come into the south or the north Now it is necessary with all to know, how a man by night shall know and find out what hour it is. Whereunto such an Instrument as hereafter is set down is very requisite, whereof you may make the like, or else you may prepare this for the purpose in manner hereafter following: the undermost and greatest Rondel and piece whereon the twelve months are marked, you must cleave upon a plain round board, so that (as in this Figure) the first of September be set right under, and the 27 of February right over, and right in the centre or middle, make a round hole, wherein you may put a reasonable wooden pin or copper nail, which within must be hollow like a pipe. The other Piece whereon the hours are marked you must cleave upon another board, or piece of pasteboard, and in the middle thereof also make another hole, which may go over the nail, & wind about it. Lastly make a Ruler of wood or copper (as the figure showeth you) with a hole also, that it may wind about the hollow nail, but you must look that the one end of the Rule doth reach or stand right upon the middle of the hole of the hollow nail, that is, upon the centre of the whole Instrument. The Instrument being thus prepared, if you desire to know what hour it is of the night by the Stars, than set the tooth that pointeth out the twelfth hour in the movable Rondel where the hours stand, right upon the day of the year whereof you desire to know the hour, & hold it fast standing in that sort: after that lift the whole Instrument uppe on high & bow the uppermost part thereof so much towards you, until you may see the north Star through the hollow nail: but you must understand that the Instrument must be holden so, that the neither end of the foot thereof marked A B may stand like a water-compas. Now when you see the North-star through the hole, then wind the Rule so long about until that on the right side of the Rule, you may see the hinder wheels of the great Wagon; which done, than the Rule will point unto the hour upon the movable Rondell what time of the night it is. But if it chanceth, that by any let or hindrance you cannot see the great Wagon, then in steed thereof take the middlemost and lightest of the Watchers, and do in all points as aforesaid: but than you must know that it will be four hours and 15 minutes later than the Rule will show it, by reason that the aforesaid wheels of the Wagon go so much before the Watchers.  
Here after followeth the figure of the Night-dyall, or Nocturlabium  depiction of a nocturnal   

CHAP. IX. Of the Horizon, or the Circle that boundeth the sight.  
WHere the Heavens and the Earth, or the Waters seem in our sight to meet together, that is called the Horizon, or the Circle-bounding-the-siight, because our sight endeth there, and can go no further: by our netherlands Seafarers it is also called the Kimmen. This Circle devideth the Heaven's just in two even parts, so that just the one half is seen by us here above, and the other half can not be seen by us, because it is hidden underneath us: which happeneth in this manner. The Earth, (as in the first Chapter is showed) standeth as a Centre in the middle of the Heavens, the which by reason of the unmeasurable quantity or largeness thereof, is so far separated from th' Earth, that the whole thickness of the Earth in respect of the Heavens, is no more than a point or prick, or at least so little that it cannot be perceived by our sight, and that which by our sight, along upon the Earth or the Water we can comprehend (which can not reach further than about three Dutch miles, that is ten English miles) seemeth in our eyes by reason the space is so little, to be no other than an half globe falling perpendicular upon a plain, so that our sight falleth in the Heaven, as if we stood in the middle point of the World, and saw right compasse-wise, whereby it falleth out, that just the half of the Heavens is seen by us, and the other half is not seen by us, in like manner as if a man should lay a line over the centre of a circle, than the one half of the circle is above, and the other half is just under. All the heavenly lights, as the Son, Moon, and Stars (by the turning of the Heavens) coming above the Horizon are seen by us, and going down under it, go out of our sight.   

CHAP. X. Of the Meridian or Midday-circle.  
THe Meridian is a circle in the Heavens, which we must conceive to pass through both the Poles of the World, right over our heads, and crosswise through the Equinoctial, and to cut through the Horizon right north & south. The Son touching this circle is at the highest: and then it is just noon, or the middle time of the day, & likewise the Stars when they come upon this Circle, they are (like the Son) at the highest of the Horizon, and right south, and as soon as they have passed it they begin to go downward again.   

CHAP. XI. Of the height of the Son or Stars, and what it is.  
THe Height of the Snne or Stars is nothing else but the distance or space, that is between the Horizon and the Son or Star itself: which to understand perfectly, you must mark, that we suppose a point or prick to be right above our heads in the Heavens, that is equally distant from the Horizon in all places, which point is called the Zenith, or the Head-point: Now seeing that the whole circuit of the Heavens containeth 360 degrees, and that the just half thereof is seen above the Horizon, it is certain that this point called the Zenith in all places is above the Horizon 90 degrees, whether you turn East, West, North, or South, or any other way: now when the Son riseth above the Horizon, and ascendeth higher and higher from it, and cometh toward this point or Zenith, we say that as many degrees as it is ascended, from the Horizon, towards the aforesaid point or Zenith, that the same is the height thereof, as by example, when he is risen half up from the Horizon towards the Zenith, than he is 45 degrees high, and if he be risen a third part from the Horizon than he is 30 degrees high, and so forth, the like is also to be understood of the height of the Stars.   

CHAP. XII. How to measure or find the height of the Son or of the Stars.  
TO find the height, the Mathematicians have devised diverse fit Instruments, whereof there are two that are most to be used at Sea, which are the Astrolabium, & the common cross-staff, the use of the Astrolabium is plain and well known unto all men, for holding the Instrument by the ring let the Son shine through the holes of the ears, than the uttermost part of the Dial (counting from below upwards) showeth how many degrees the Son is risen above the Horizon: as the former figure plainly showeth.  
The cross-staff is used thus, you must place the end of the Staff underneath the eye, than you must remove the Cross to and fro, until the upper end of the Cross standeth even upon half the Son or Star, and the under end just with the Horizon, and then the Cross will show you upon the Staff how many degrees there are between the Horizon and the Son or Star, that is, how many degrees they are in height, so you account after those numbers whereof 90 standeth at the end of the Staff that is next to your eye, the computation going backward from the other end of the Staff: for otherwise if you reckon by those numbers that proceed forward from the end next your eye, than it will show you how many degrees, the Sun or Star standeth from the Zenith, or Head-point to the Horizon, as you may see by the figure enseving.   

CHAP. XIII. How you must make a perfect cross-staff and how you shall mark it.  
THe Crosse-staves are often times made the one after the other, by imitation, or patterns, and that many times without judgement or knowledge whether the pattern be good or not, whereof notwithstanding a man ought to be very certain, for it is a matter of great importance and therefore I have here set down two several ways easy to be understood, how to make the same exquisitely and perfectly, upon good reason and good ground.  
Behold in the page following the Figure with the description thereof.   diagram 
Make an even smooth board, and past good paper upon it, then darwe a strait line upon one edge or side thereof, as you see in this figure a line marked C A D, then make another line as you see it marked B C, that B C A be a right & just half square, then take a good  of Compasses, and set one foot thereof in the Angle marked C, and compass therewith as you see B E A, so that A E B may be a right quadrant, or fourth-part of a circle, then divide it into two parts, to E, and then divide the other half (which is A E) into 90 parts, or degrees as thus: first divide it into three parts, and then divide each third-part again into three, & then it will be divided into 9 parts, which done, divide each of them into two parts, and those divisions or parts divide into five parts, and then it will be divided into 90 parts. then take a strait line, and lay the one end thereof upon the Centre C, & so forth upon every several point, which you have divided in the Quadrant, and then draw lines from the Centre C through all the aforesaid points, as long as the board will contain them, as you may see in this figure: which done then your Instrument is fully made & prepared to mark your Staves thereupon. Which to do, with your Compasses take just the half length of your Cross, and set the one foot thereof in the Centre C & put the other at F, and do the like from D right to G, which two points or pricks draw with a strait line unto each other as you see the line F and G, and then mark where the line F G is cut through by the lines that come out of the Centre through the degrees or points of the quadrant: for those cutings through, show upon the said line the right marking of your cross-staff: that is, you must mark your Staff just as you see that these lines in F G are marked, by the lines that come out of the Centre and pass through it, whether the Cross be long or short, you must follow the same order that you be taught, as in the Figure the line H I is drawn for a shorter Cross than the former, and K L for one that is shorter than that, viz. whose half is just as long as the line C K.  
The second manner of framing your cross-staff much excelleth the first in perfectness and curiosity, so you divide it perfectly with your Compass, which is done in this manner. Upon an hard even board which is pasted with paper draw a strait line, as long as your Staff is, and with your Compass take the just half of the length of your Cross, whereunto you mean to mark your Staff, and prick it as many times along in the said line as you can: and divide each of the said lengths into tenne-thousand equal parts, then look upon the table hereafter enseving, which show you, how many of those points or parts you shall mark for each degree, and that you must do in manner following: from the end of the Staff, which you will make the eye-end, prick just the half length of the Cross, and there make a cross stroke, from whence prick for every degree so many of the aforesaid parts as the table enseving showeth you. As for example, for the first degree prick 178 parts, for the second 355 parts, for the third 538 parts, for the fourth 724 parts, and so forth: Remembering that you must prick all the lengths of pricks or parts aforesaid, from the aforesaid Cross stroke, which is marked upon the half length of the Cross: but if you can not divide the half length of the Cross into tenne-thou-sand parts, then divide the whole Cross so, and then take for every degree half so many as the table showeth unto you: and if you can not do so, divide half the Cross into a thousand parts, and then leave the two hinder letters of the table out, as where you should for the first degree take an hundred-seventie-and-eight parts, take but 17 parts, leaving the last figure out: but if your Crosses be so small that you can divide the half of them into no smaller than an hundred parts, then leave out the two last figures in the table. But you must understand that the more parts that you divide the Crosses into, your marks will fall out so much the better and perfecter.  
de parts 1 176 2 355 3 538 4 724 5 913 6 1106 7 1303 8 1504 9 1708 10 1918 11 2131 12 2349 13 2572 14 2799 15 3032 16 3270 17 3514 18 3764 19 4019 20 4281 21 4550 22 4826 23 5108 24 5399 25 5697 26 6003 27 6318 28 6643 29 6976 30 7320 31 7675 32 8040 33 8418 34 8807 35 9210 36 9626 37 10057 38 10503 39 10965 40 11445 41 11943 42 12460 43 12998 44 13558 45 14142 46 14751 47 15386 48 16051 49 16746 50 17475 51 18293 52 19042 53 19887 54 20777 55 21716 56 22708 57 23759 58 24874 59 26059 60 27321 61 28667 62 30108 63 31653 64 33315 65 35107 66 37046 67 39152 68 41445 69 43955 70 46713 71 49758 72 53137 73 56912 74 61154 75 65958 76 71445 77 77769 78 85144 79 93854 80 104301 81 117062 82 133007 83 153499 84 180811 85 219038 86 276362 87 371885 88 561810 89 1135891 90 endless.   

CHAP. XIIII. Of the cutting of the cross-staff and how a man may help and prevent all the defects of the staff.  
THere being a cross-staff well and exquisitely framed, according to the doctrine of the former chapter: it falleth out that certain ignorant persons cut off a piece from the eye-end of the Staff, about a degree, or a degree & an half, or two degrees long, and can give no other reason of that their doing but that it must be so, and that they have experience that it ought so to be. But questionless seeing they prove by their experience that they do not find their measuring with uncutt Staves perfect and right as it should be, the fault thereof is not in the Crosse-staves uncutt, but in themselves, for that they know not how to use the Staff aright, nor understand not the true ground thereof. Others that will seem wiser than the former, give a reason thereof: to wit, that the Staff must be cut, because of the hollowness of the eye, for that otherwise the Staff cannot come to stand so that the end thereof be conjoined to the middle point or centre of the eye or sight: this reason hath some show of truth, but notwithstanding is alike untrue & erroneus: for the Staff may very well be set, either on the innermost or outtermost corner of the eye, so that the sight of the eye may fall to answer just to the end of the Staff: that this is truth we will prove with good reason as followeth.  
Set the great Cross with the middlemost upon like degrees: to wit each upon such as for that purpose are marked upon the Staff: then apply the Staff (the Crosses so firmly remaining) unto your eye in such manner, (whether it be on the innermost or uttermost corner it is all one) as that you discern the ends of the Crosses both above & beneath just over each other, in form as this figure specifieth. If then you draw strait lines by the ends of the Crosses A B and D C they shall meet just in the middle point of your sight. And inasmuch as the Crosses are placed upon like degrees, the lines aforesaid shall meet just upon the end of the Staff; seeing that that end of the Staff representeth the centre of the quadrant whereby your staff is marked.   diagram 
So then the foresaid lines or ends of the Crosses answer both just upon the end of the Staff, and also upon the sight: so that it followeth necessarily and appeareth evidently, that the end of the Staff & the sight meet in one: or to speak properly, both of them stand just in the centre of the quadrant.  
Therefore whensoever with the cross-staff you will take the height of the Son or of any Star, then observe diligently: how many degrees it is elevated above the Horizon: and place the two Crosses upon so many degrees: then apply the Staff to your eye in such manner as that you may see the ends of the Crosses just over each other, according as is taught before: in such form then as you find the Staff to stand to your eye, shall you place the Staff (taking away one of the Crosses) when you desire to measure according to such height: this is a sure rule which will never fail, neither can you possibly miss if you follow it.   

CHAP. XV. Of the breadth of the Lands.  
THe breadth of Lands or Countries is no other, than the distance or wideness that is between the said Lands and the Equinoctial Line, which is reckoned in a double manner, that is northerly and southerly, to the number of 90. Such Lands or Countries as lie right under the Equinoctial Line have no breadth: but such as lie northward from it, have northerly breadth, and they that lie southerly, have southerly breadth.  
Example.  
The Island of S. Thomas, in the River Gaban in Guinea lieth right under the Line, and therefore hath no breadth, neither northerly nor southerly.  
The Cap S. Vincent in Spain lieth northward from the Line 37 degrees, and therefore the northern breadth of Cap S. Vincent is 37 degrees.  
The point of Lezaret in England lieth northward from the Line 50 degrees, therefore the north breadth of Lezaret is 50 degrees.  
The Cap de bona Esperance lieth southward from the Line 34½ degrees, therefore the southerly breadth of Cap de bona Esperance  34 1/●. degrees. In like manner you must understand and reckon other Lands, Countries and Towns.   

CHAP. XVI. Of the height of Lands and Countries, and what it is.  
THe height and breadth of Lands & Countries although that in themselves they are diverse things, yet they are always one like unto the other: Any Country being situated under the breadth of 30 degrees, lieth also in the height 30 degrees, which by Seafaring men is taken without difference, but what it is, or what it hath in it or signifieth few men understand, and yet it behoveth a Seafaring man, that seeketh for the height of any Countries, to be expert therein, for that no man without it can well understand how any Instrument (whether it be Astralabium, or cross-staff, no nor the Sea-compasse itself) should well be used: for that these things are all built upon one foundation, & like a chain hang one upon the other. But it may be that some man will object and say, that there are many Pilots which do not well understand such things, and yet are able to go directly unto diverse places, whither they desire to sail: which I confess to be true: but tell me, how many times are they deceived? how many times are they in great doubt and fear? and how seldom dare they trust unto the height which they have taken or reckoned, when they are to seek out any country there by? how often times hath it heretofore happened, that for want of such knowledge, ships have sailed out of their way either behind England or upon France, which thought to pass through the channel between England and France, and that in so short and well known, and common sailed water, as to come out of Spain or France? what would such men do, if they should pass the Line, and were to seek or find out certain islands? or that after they had sailed up and down the Seas certain months together, should then seek out for Land? but I am of this opinion which I know every man will grant, that it is much better and more assured to go a way being guided by his own eyesight, then like a blind man to be led by another, and knoweth not whether that other seethe well or not: but to come again to our matter, touching the height of Countries, it is no other but the height of the Pole above the Horizon, that is to say, so many degrees as the Pole in any Land is lifted up above the Horizon, so much is the height of such a Country: and this height agreeth always with the breadth as aforesaid. In the 10 chapter it is showed, that wheresoever a man goeth or turneth, always the one half of the Heavens showeth itself above the Horizon and the other half is hidden from us: in the first Chapter it is said that the two Poles stand right one against the other, whereby it is evidently to be understood, that whensoever a man being upon the earth is right under the Equinoctial Line, that then both the Poles of the World, lie right in the Horizon, one in the south and the other in the north: & as much as a man travaileth northward from the Equinoctial Line, and winneth breadth northerly, so much the north Pole riseth above the Horizon: and the south Pole contrary wise goeth so much under: & on the contrary, as many degrees as a man goeth from the Equinoctial Line southward, and winneth breadth southward, so much the south Pole riseth above the Horizon, and the north Pole goeth so much under: which may easily be understood by the Figure hereafter following.   digram 
In this figure the undermost rondel that turneth about, signifieth the Heavens, N the north pole, S the south Pole, A the Equinoctial, the uppermost edge of the half movable rundle, signifieth the Horizon, the one half of the Heavens is above it, and the other half just under it, the round bale in the middle signifieth the Earth, whereon you see a little man, that may be turned upon the Earth southward and northward.  
Now perfectly to mark and perceive that which is before written, that is to know what height is, & that it always agreeth with the breadth, bring the little man upon the Earth-globe right under the Equinoctial, that is to say, that it have no breadth, neither northward nor southward, than you shall see that both the Poles lie just with the Horizon, & that neither of them both are elevated above it, nor depressed under it: and with all you shall see that they that dwell under the Equinoctial have no height or elevation of the Pole, nor yet any breadth. But if you remove the man so much northward that he goeth ten degrees upon the Earth, that is, that he cometh ten degrees upon the north beadth, you shall see that the north-Pole shall be raised or elevated ten degrees above the Horizon in the north, and the south Pole shall go ten degrees under the Horizon: and if you remove the man upon the Earth more northerly, as thirty, forty, or fifty degrees, the north Pole will also be so much elevated, and the south Pole to the contrary so much depressed under the Horizon: so that if you turn the man upon the Earth to ninety degrees, than the north Pole also will be elevated ninety degrees, that is the Pole will stand right above his head, and the Equinoctial will join with the Horizon in one circle: that which thus is said of the Elevating of the north Pole, is also in the same manner to be understood of the south Pole: for if likewise you move the man upon the Earth in the figure toward the south, the south Pole will be elevated above the Horizon, as much as the man in breadth goeth southward, and the north Pole will go so much under the Horizon.  
One thing is herein to be noted, that as much as the Pole riseth above the Horizon just so much the Equinoctial goeth under it, and when the Pole goes under the Equinoctial riseth again in equal proportion.  
But above all you must mark, that the number of the Poles elevation added to the height of the Equinoctial always make even 90 degrees; so that when the Pole is elevated thirty degrees in the north, the Equinoctial is elevated sixty degrees in the south: but if the south Pole be elevated above your Horizon twenty degrees, the Equinoctial will be elevated in the north seventy degrees, which is clearly understood and showed in this manner: we always see half the heavens above the Horizon, (as aforesaid) which is twice ninety degrees, from the south to the Zenith or the point just over our heads, and from the Zenith to the Horizon in the north. Now seeing that between the Equinoctial and the Pole there are always ninety degrees, (as is showed in the second Chapter) it followeth that that which is beneath the Pole and the Equinoctial, maketh also ninety degrees: therefore when we know the height of the Equinoctial, and take it out of ninety, that which resteth over is always the height of the Pole. This also may be seen in the figure aforesaid.   

CHAP. XVII. How to find the height of the Pole by the Son.  
TO find the height of the Pole by the Son, one thing is specially to be marked, to wit, whether you are northward or southward from the Son, whether the Son standeth northward or southward from you is easily known, when you are in such a place upon the Earth as is far from the Line, or from the Son, but when the Son is near almost above your head, than you can not well see it with your eye, therefore set a compass before you, that you may see where north and south is, then take your Astrolabium, and set it so that the one edge thereof stand right south, and the other north, and then you shall see at a hairs breadth, whether the Son being at the height, standeth northward or southward from the head-point or Zenith: if then you will seek the height of the Pole, when you are on the north side of the Son, that is when the son is southward from you, then take the just height first, and as much as the declination of the Son is northward, take it out of your height & that which resteth is the height of the Equinoctial in the south, 
With northerly declination.  which subtracted out of ninety, (as in the former Chapter is declared) than you have the height of the north Pole.  
Example.   digram 
In this figure let P be the north Pole, and G the south Pole, E H the Equinoctial, A B the Horizon, Z the Zenith, and D the Son: let the height of the Son B D be sixty degrees above the Horizon: the northerly declination D E eight degrees: if then you take D E eight degrees from B D the height of the Son, there will rest B E two-and fifty degrees, which is the height of the Equinoctial, which taken out of ninety degrees, resteth eight-and-thirtie degrees, for the height of the north Pole A P, as in the sixteenth Chapter is showed.  
If the declination be southerly, then add it to the height aforesaid taken: and then if the addition be less than ninety, 
With southerly declination.  then look upon the height of the Line in the south which taken out of 90, as aforesaid, it leaveth you the height of the north Pole.   diagram 
Let the height of the Son be D B 40 degrees, the southerly declination of the Son E D 20 degrees, then add E D 20 degrees, to D B 40 degrees, it maketh E B 60 degrees, the height of the Equinoctial, which subtracted from 90, as E G the distance between the Equinoctial and the south Pole, than there will rest 30 for B G, that is, as much as the south Pole is gone under the Horzion: as before is showed, so much as the one Pole is under the Horizon, just so much is the other above it, the north Pole P shall here be elevated 30 degrees.  
But if the height of the Son being added unto the declination, maketh more than 90 degrees, than you must understand, that the Equinoctial is northward from your head just so much as the aforesaid addition is more than 90 & so consequently the south Pole also shall be so much elevated.  
Example.   diagram 

How you shall find the height of the Pole, when you are southward from the Son.  
WHen you perceive that you are southward from the Son, that is when the Son standeth northward from you, first (as beforesaid) take the height of the Son: then if the declination be southward, 
With southerly declination.  take it out of your height which you have found, & then you shall have the height of the Equinoctial, which subtracted from 90 it showeth under what height you are, southward from the Line.  
Example.  
Behold the figure above standing.   diagram 
Let A D be the height of the Son in 64 degrees: the southerly declination E D 16 degrees: which subtracted from AD the height of the Son, there remaineth for A E 48 degrees, the height of the Equinoctial in the north, which subtracted out of 90, than the height of the south Pole G B will be 42 degrees.  
If the declination be northerly, then add it to the height found out, if then the addition be less than ninety it showeth you the height of the Equinoctial, which taken out of 90, you find the height of the south Pole.  
Example.   diagram 
But if the height and the declination of the Son added together, make more than 90, you must then note that the Line is southward from your Zenith, as much as that number is above 90.  
Example.  
Look on the figure in the page following, let the height of the Son AD in the north be 84 degrees, the declination E D 21 degrees, add them together, than you have A 105 degrees, which is the distance between the Equinoctial E and the Horizon in the north: now mark that A is 105, and P the Pole, and E the Equinoctial are even 90 degrees from each other: than it followeth that P from A is 15 degrees, that is the height of the north Pole above the Horizon, and so much you must be northward from the line, and you must also mark that you are between the Line and the Son.   diagram  

How you shall find the height when you are right under the Son.  

Being just under the Son.  IF you understand the rules before going well then this is easy to be found. If you be right under the Son, that is, when the Son is elevated ninety degrees, than you are even as many degrees northward or southward from the Line, as the Son hath northerly or southerly declination.  

The explication thereof.  
Suppose that you find the height of the Son above the Horizon to be ninety degrees, and that it is declined toward the north sixteen degrees, then are you also sixteen degrees northward from the Line, & the north Pole shall be so much elevated.  
But if the Son hath no declination, that is when it standeth even in the Line, than you must understand, that you are also right under the Line, and so both the Poles are on the Horizon without any elevation.    

How you shall find the height of the Son northward in such places whereas it goeth not down.  
THey that in Summer sail to Moscovia, in the months May, june, and julie coming about the North Cape, find that the Son at that time goeth not down there, 
Where the Son goeth not down.  but is always above the Horizon, so that a man according to the rules aforesaid, may not only seek the height of the Pole by the Son, when it is highest southward, but also when it is northward at the lowest, in this manner following. Take the height of the Son with the cross-staff, when it is lowest in the north, and add thereto the filling of the declination (which is such a number as together with the declination make ninety, or so much as the Son standeth from the Pole) and you shall find the just height of the Pole: or if you subtract the height of the Son from his declination than you shall find how deep the Equinoctial is depressed northward under the Horizon, or in the south elevated above the Horizon, which subtracted from ninety will likewise leave the height of the Pole, both these ways I will declare apart.  
Example.   diagram 
Mark the Figure aforegoing, where let B D be the height of the Son above the Horizon, in the north 7 degrees, H D the declination of the Son 20 degrees, then D P shall the filling of the declination, or the distance of the Son from the Pole be 70 degrees: now if you add P D the filling of the declination 70, to B D the height of the Son, you shall find 77 degrees for B P the height of the Pole.  
Another example.  
If you take the height of the Son A D 7, from H D 20 the declination of the Son there will remain 13 for H B, and so much is the equinoctial in the north depressed under the Horizon, which if you subtract out of H P 90, there remaineth for A P 77, the height of the Pole as above said.    

CHAP. XVIII. How you shall find the height by the Stars.  
YOu must follow the same rule that is taught for the Son, touching all the fixed Stars in the south, without any difference, you may also do the like with all Stars hard by the north, which go round about the Pole, as the great Wagon, the Waiters, and such like: but seeing you may do it with less labour & trouble, I will show you the shortest & best way to do it: first therefore it is necessary for you to know, how many degrees they stand from the Pole, which in the table enseving you may see.  
 deg. mi. The hinder wheel of the Wagon that standeth farthest north is situated from the Pole 26 9 The hinder wheel of the Wagon that standeth farthest south is from the Pole 31 32 The forewheele most north is from the Pole 30 48 The forewheele most south is from the Pole 34 6 The nearest horse to the Wagon is from the Pole 31 53 The middle horse of the Wagon is from the Pole 33 0 The foremost horse of the Wagon is from the Pole 38 41 The middlemost or clearest watcher is from the Pole 14 9 The tail of the Swan is from the Pole 46 5 The breast of Cassiopea Schedir, is from the Pole 35 36 The clearest star in Perseus' side is from the Pole 41 36 The Goat Hircus or Capella is from the Pole 44 29  
Whensoever these stars stand right above Leyen or the North-star, than you must subtract the declinations aforesaid: but when they come right under Leyen, than you must add it, and so you shall have the right height.  
Example.  
The middlemost watcher standing right above Leyen I find to be high above the Horizon 52 degrees, from whence I subtract 14 degrees 9 minutes, (for so much he is distant from the Pole right above) then there resteth 37 degrees 51 minutes. Coming to another place and finding the same Star to stand right under the North-star, above the Horizon 43 degrees, I add thereunto 14 degrees 9 minutes, & then I find 57 degrees 9 minutes for the height of the Pole: in like sort you must do with the rest.  
Mark.  
That the declination of the Stars, which we have here & also in the seventh chapter set down, do not agree, and fall out alike, with that which we have set down in our Degree-bookes of Anno 1605: the reason is that these are placed according to the year of our Lord 1608 and 1609 as it is said in the aforesaid Chapter, but in the aforesaid Degree-bookes, they are placed according to Anno 1600, whereby you may partly see the alteration of the declination of the fixed Stars.  

An admonition how to take the height.  
THe Son & the Stars coming near unto the Horizon shine and show themselves always to be higher than naturally they are, and you shall always take them higher: which happeneth by means of the vapours & exhalations, which by reason of the heat of the Son continually rise up from the earth: and the nearer the heavenly lights approach unto the Horizon, the more are they marked of us, in regard that the aforesaid vapours and exhalations the nearer they approach unto the Horizon the thicker they show, and by that means the heavenly lights seem higher in our sight. The Son standing upon the Horizon shineth 34 min. higher in our sight then naturally he is, & the stars about half a deg, which they lose by little and little by rising up from the Horizon, the Son to 30 deg, & the Stars to 20 deg. high: but how much that may import in several heights as by long and much curious observation hath by the aforesaid Tycho Brahe been found out, you shall see by these Tables following.  

A table of the sons Refraction, or rising up, by occasion of vapours or exhalations.  The Son being high 0 degrees shineth 34 minutes higher than it is indeed. 1 degrees shineth 26 minutes 2 degrees shineth 20 minutes 4 degrees shineth 15 minutes 7 degrees shineth 13 minutes 10 degrees shineth 10 minutes 16 degrees shines 7 minutes 23 degrees shineth 3 minutes 32 degrees shineth 1 minutes  

A Table of the Stars refraction or rising up, by occasion of vapours or exhalations.  The fixed Stars being high 0 degrees shine 30 minutes higher than they are indeed. 1 degrees shine 22 minutes 2 degrees shine 15 minutes 4 degrees shine 11 minutes 7 degrees shine 8 minutes 11 degrees shine 5 minutes 15 degrees shine 3 minutes  
This is requisite to be well marked by them that sail far northward, and find the Son near unto the Horizon: for it may differ half a degree, if you use it in the north at the lowest, and in the south at the highest.   depiction of a tub of water 
If you will see and mark it better in another manner, put a piece of money, or some thing else in an empty pail, or tub, & then go or step so far back, that you lose the sight of the money, and stand still there, then let another man fill the pail or tub full of water, and the piece of money will be so much elevated or lifted up, that you shall see it a good way above the side of the pail or tub, where as before you could not see it: and in such sort the heavenly lights that are near the Horizon, by means of the vapours and exhalations, are lifted up.    

CHAP. XIX. Of the North-star, and how you shall find the Height thereby.   diagram 
N is the north Star: P, is the north Pole: W, is the Wagon: and C, are the Stars of Cassiopea, whereof B, is the breast.  
This is a certain and a general rule which by no means can fail and in all places of the Earth (where we may see & use the north Star) is without any alteration.  

How you must use the North star, when you take the Watchers upon the four chief strokes in the Compass.  
ALL Seafaring men commonly use the north Star when they take the Watchers upon one of the eight-quarter strokes of the Compass, whereunto they have certain tables to know how much the north Star standeth upon every stroke of the compass either under or above the Pole, that is how many they shall add or subtract to or from each Star. In most part or the books made for Seafaring it is showed, that when the Watchers stand in the east, that then the North Star standeth beneath the Pole a degree and an half, some say a degree and 40 minutes: and again when the Watchers stand in the west, that then the North Star standeth as much (that is a degree & an half) above the Pole. Now if East and West were used and understood by Seafaring men; when the middlemost Watcher is just East and West with the North-star, & that generally in all heights & places without any difference, certainly they should be much deceived by such rule and custom, for such working is not general, but in each height several, and so working in that manner they must use several tables. The North-star is always more under the Pole when the Watchers stand in the east, than he is above the Pole when the Watchers stand in the west, as in the table following you may see, being about the Equinoctial it should not differ much, but there a man can not use it: but as soon as you sail northward, & leave the Equinoctial Line, than it beginneth to alter, and the more northerly that you go, the more it differeth, so that at last, before you come to the height of 80 degrees, and that the Watchers come to stand in the west, the North Star is a great deal under the Pole, how much this may differ upon one str●ke, it may be reckoned by this example. When you are under the height of 20 degrees, and that the Watchers stand in the west, that is when the middlemost Watcher in the west, standeth just as high above the Horizon as the North-star, than the North-star shall stand above the Pole one degree and two minutes: but coming under the height of 80 degrees, and that the middlemost Watcher standeth in the west just as high as the North-star, than the North-star shall stand 35 minutes beneath the Pole, which with the former differeth very near two whole degrees, & that upon one stroke. And although two such places are far distant one from the other, notwithstanding hereby it may easily be perceived and understood by men of judgement that this alteration, as you sail from the one place unto the other, by little & little increaseth. Many men herein note a great difference, because thereby they cannot guess right, and yet can not understand what the cause thereof is, so that some of them to mend it cut off a piece of their cross-staff, others make themselves tables according to their own fantasies, one thus much, the other so much, yet without any ground or understanding, so that in their need, they dare not trust to the●r own doings. Others for this cause wholly reject the North-star, esteeming it altogether unfit to take the height by: but that is done for want of understanding, for having good tables to that purpose it is as fit for use as any other star, & to the end that men should use it with good security, without any fault, I have (for the good of all seafaring men) to that end collected, & (notwithout great labour) perfectly made a new table, wherein men may truly see, how without any fault they may use the North-star by the 4 chief points of the Compass, that is, South, North, East & West, the rest of the points or strokes, to weet, northwest, southeast, south-west, and North-east, I leave out wittingly and willingly, for a man can not place any certain mark, whereby they may make a just guess, whensoever the watchers stand upon those strokes, so that for that cause they are subject to more falsehood, and therefore it is thought good that men should not use them.   

How much the North-star goeth under or above the Pole, when you set the Watchers upon the four principal points of the Compass, and that upon different heights.  

Upon the height of 10 degrees.  
When the watchers stand in the east, than the Northstarre is under the Pole 1 degree 30 minutes.  
When the watchers stand in the north then Leyen is beneath the Pole 2 degrees 23 minutes.  
When the watchers stand in the west then Leyen is above the Pole 1 degree 25 minutes.  
When the watchers stand in the south than the North-star is above the Pole 2 degrees 24 minutes.   

Upon the height of 20 degrees.  
When the watchers stand in the east than the North-starr is under the Pole 1 degree 33 minutes.  
When the watchers stand north then Leyen is under the Pole 2 degrees 23 minutes.  
When the watchers stand west then Leyen is above the Pole 1 degree 21 minutes.  
When the Watchers stand south then Leyen is above the Pole 2 degrees 24 minutes.   

Upon the height of 30 degrees.  
When the watchers stand east then Leyen is beneath the Pole 1 degree 37 minutes.  
When the watchers stand north then Leyen is beneath the Pole 2 degrees 23 minutes.  
When the watchers stand west, than Leyen is above the Pole 1 degree 16 minutes.  
When the watchers stand south then Leyen is above the Pole 2 degrees 24 minutes.   

Upon the height of 40 degrees.  
When the watchers stand east, than Leyen is beneath the Pole 1 degree 41 minutes.  
When the watchers stand north, than Leyen is beneath the Pole 2 degrees 23 minutes.  
When the watchers stand west, than Leyen is above the Pole 1 degree 11 minutes.  
When the watchers stand south, than Leyen is above the Pole 2 degrees 24 minutes.   

Upon the height of 50 degrees.  
When the watchers stand east, than Leyen is beneath the Pole 1 degrees 47 minutes.  
When the watchers stand north, than Leyen is beneath the Pole 2 degrees 22 minutes.  
When the watchers stand west, than Leyen is above the Pole 1 degrees 4 minutes.  
When the watchers stand south, than Leyen is above the Pole 2 degrees 25 minutes.   

Upon the height of 60 degrees.  
When the watchers stand east then Leyen is beneath the Pole 1 degrees 55 minutes.  
When the watchers stand north then Leyen is beneath the Pole 2 degrees 21 minutes.  
When the watchers stand west then Leyen is above the Pole 53 minutes.  
When the watchers stand south then Leyen is above the Pole 2 degrees 26 minutes.   

Upon the height of 70 degrees.  
When the watchers stand east, than Leyen is beneath the Pole 2 degrees 8 minutes.  
When the watchers stand north then Leyen is beneath the Pole 2 degrees 20 minutes.  
When the watchers stand west then Leyen is above the Pole 32 minutes.  
When the watchers stand south then Leyen is above the Pole 2 degrees 27 minutes.   

Upon the height of 80 degrees.  
When the watchers stand east, than Leyen is beneath the Pole 2 degrees 37 minutes.  
When the watchers stand north then Leyen is beneath the Pole two degrees 17 minutes.  
When the watchers stand west then Leyen is beneath the Pole 35 minutes.  
When the watchers stand south, than Leyen is above the Pole two degrees 30 minutes.  
These certain and true rules being well understood, every man may easily guess, how he shall deal with other heights that fall between those heights before set down: as for example, if you will know how much the North-star standeth beneath the Pole, when the watchers stand east, at the height of 45 degrees, first look how much it is at the height of 50 degrees, and you shall find 1 degree 47 minutes, and then at the height of 40 degrees, and you shall find 1 degree 41 minutes, & for that 45 minutes is the middle height between 50 and 40, take the middlemost between 47 and 41, and you shall have one degree 44 minutes, & so much shall Leyen stand beneath the Pole, when the watchers stand in the east, at the height of 45 deg, in like sort you must do for all other places, & you shall fail little or nothing  
NOTE. That when it is here said, When the watchers stand in the east, you must thereby understand, when the middlemost or clearest of the watchers standeth east, as high above the Horizon, as the North-star, as the like is said of the watchers standing in the west, you must thereby understand, when the middlemost of the watchers standeth west even as high as Leyen: and when it is said when the watchers stand north, thereby is meant, when the middlemost watcher standeth right above Leyen: and in the south, that is right under Leyen: for, for all such measures and taking of heights, these tables are just and perfectly made, and so are they most assuredly to be reckoned upon the strokes of the compass.     

CHAP. XX. How many leagues a man may sail upon every stroke before he win or lose a degree in height, & also how many leagues you are then without the Meridian or south and north line from which you sailed.  

When you sail rightsouth or north, than you sail for a degree 20 leagues.  
And you stay under the same Meridian, that is, you go neither more easterly nor westerly then at first you did.  
Upon the stroke of south and by west, or north and by west, you sail for a degree 20½ leagues  
And then you have left the Meridian or the south and north Line, under which you were at the first 4 leagues. 

Southsouthwest, & n.n.e. you sail for a degree 21 leagues.    
And then you are out of the aforesaid Line 8 leagues. 

South w. by south, & n.e. by n. you sail for a deg. 24 leagues.    
And without the Meridian 12½ leagues. 

south-west & north-east for one degree 28 leagues.    
And without the Meridian 20 leagues. 

S.w. by w. & n.e. by n. you sail for one degree 36 leagues.    
Then you are without the Meridian 29 leagues. 

W. s.w. & e.n.e. you sail for a degree 52½ leagues.    
Then you are without the Meridian 48 leagues. 

W. by south, & east by n. you sail for a degree 103 leagues.    
And then you are without the Meridian 100 leagues.  
Sailing east or west you neither win nor lose, but you keep always in one height.    

CHAP. XXI. What is necessary for a Seafaring man or Pilot further to know, together with an instruction to all young Seafaring men, that desire to be good Pilots.  
THese aforesaid rules although that they are so necessary & needful for a Pilot to know, that without the knowledge of them he can be no good Pilot, to go any long voyage, yet are they not sufficient to make a good Pilot, that is all are not good Pilots that understand them well. For first a good Pilot must besides them be expert at Sea, as the principal thing, which no man can learn by any speculation, but by his own experience, and dealing in time he shall obtain it, whereby he shall know perfectly to dispose all things that occur in the art of Navigation. It is most necessary and convenient for him to know the Lands, and how they lie to Seaward, how f●rre, and upon what strokes of the compass, the Points, Havens, and Rivers, are distant one from the other, and specially he must be perfect in reckoning his Tides, that he may know every where what Moon maketh an high water in that place, that when he would enter into any Haven or place, where he can not get in at a low water, than he may stay till it be half flood, or till it be high water, as time serveth, that he may sail in, and save both ship and goods. It is also very necessary for him to know how the Ebbs and Floods fall out, whether it be along by, or against the Land, thereby to know when the wind is strong, whether he may lie in the stream, or go against the stream, thereby to know whether it will be any hindrance or furtherance unto him, whereon many times there consisteth much. And also when a man is in the wind, whether it be in the North-sea under England, Holland, Flanders, or in the Channel of the sea, under England, that he should know how to set his tides and course, that he might stop his tides. All these things old experienced Pilots, ought willingly to show and learn young men that are desirous and zealous to learn the art of Seafaring, and not to hide any such thing from them, as some men do without reason, who go out of the way with their Instruments, as Crosse-staves, Astrolabium and Compasses, and will not suffer the common sailors to see their work. This by some is done upon pride and unwillingness, because they would keep the art & knowledge only to themselves, and by some because they understand not their proceed well, & therefore are in fear to be shamed, but let not young Seafaring men, and such as are desirous to know the art & cunning of Seafaring, for that cause leave off their study therein, & to that end when you sail out of any river or haven, you must reckon every course along the reach from ton to ton, or from beacon to beacon, which you must keep well and perfectly and write it in a book, and some times draw the situation in manner of a Card, and when you begin to leave the Land, than you must take good heed, of the Capes, Points, Towers, and other marks, and how the mouth of the Haven reacheth into the Sea, what depth is at the entrance of the Haven, and how deep it is both within and without, cast out your lead often times, and let it not rest when you are in the Haven nor in the Stream, whereby in sailing out and into the river, you shall know what countries are flats, or shoring that you may beware of them, & when you are a coming without the Land, than you must earnestly mark what hills or downs lie there abouts, what churches, towers, castles, or other marks stand upon them, and those you must note and counterfeit with a pen upon several strokes of the compass, as they change their form of standing by sailing along by them, oftentimes using the lead, all which being perfectly noted, it will be a great help unto you to know the said Lands, when you come thither again.  
Likewise when you pass by any strange Country, and sail along so near by it that you may plainly see it, then take the counterfeit or form thereof with a pen, to know in what manner they show themselves upon such strokes of the compass, & there let the lead fall, to see what depth and ground is there, which for your memory you must also note, for that which you mark in that manner will stay longer by you, then that which you have but simply seen, and heard of of an other. But when you come against any Points or Havens, where you mean to lad or unlade, there you must take good heed unto your course, & mark how you sail by that Land or Haven, and when you see any marks or towers, you must note them with a pen, and bring the marks and points both well together, thereby to go right into the river, & to guide you by the lead till you be in, & when you are within and at an anchor, then visit all the points of the Haven, and note them down with a pen cardewise, how they reach outward and inward, that when you come thither again, you might enter into the same place again, and know the situation thereof, but when you are in the open Sea, and the wind against you so that you lie by the wind, both on the one side and the other, than you must mark how long you must lie on the one bought or on the other, and when you must turn. Besides this you must specially note how much the ship goeth forward, and what you may sail in one meal, & how the ship lieth, to the which end you shall some times let the lead, or the lead line with a piece of wood hang out behind, to see how much the ship windeth, and how much the waves casteth it out of the right course that it should hold. This you must do upon your compass every evening and morning, and note it in your memorial, that you may cast it over and peruse it again in the Cards, whether in noting or marking it, you should have chanced to have mistaken yourself. You must likewise take heed to your steering, to see how much you must wind on either side in your Card. And further when you find a good & sure height, by your cross-staff or Astrolabium, that will give you a good security of your right guessing, so that your compass agreeth also with it, and then you shall certainly see in your Card how all points and Countries lie from you, but if your guessing and your height agree not together, than you must warily correct your guessing according to your height, and see as near as you can whether you fail either to little or to much in your guessing, and all this must be done with good skill and understanding in your Card, and when you come to the place where you will seek for Land, then without doubt you shall land in such a place as your Instrument & good guessing show you.  
To learn to know all courses and strokes perfectly by heart, to that end you must take the printed Card and read it oftentimes over, and every course & stroke which you find to meet you must place together: as from Cape Finistere to Cisarga, the West-coast of England, the Coast of Flanders, the Coast of Freesland, of Hartshals to Schagen and such like. The like you must do with the tides, to weet, you must note all the places (where the Moon maketh a high water upon any point or stroke of the Compass) by each other in a Register, as in the table of the tides hereafter enseving you may see: and he that doth so, without doubt shall do all things right and perfectly, and shall bear about him all the experience, and knowledge of Seafaring, needful & necessary, which no man in the world can take from, or bereave him of.   

CHAP. XXII. Of the Water-tydes and how a man shall reckon them perfectly by the Moon.  
We have hereunto added certain tables of the Water-tydes, as they are commonly used by Pilots, wherein is showed upon what points or strokes of the Compass the Moon must be, before it maketh a high water in any of the places set down in the tables, but you must understand, that you must not take or reckon such strokes or points according to our common Compass lying flat, or driving water-compasse, but only the north & south points, for they must be esteemed not after the Horizon or Kimmen, but according to the flat or superficial part of the equinoctial. Therefore if you will take the Son or Moon by or with the common Compass, than you must lift up the side of the Compass so much, that the corner thereof may stand right against the equinoctial, & that the pin in the middle showeth right to the Pole, and so you may take the Son or Moon thereafter, which will be a great difference from a Compass that lieth flat: for at the height of fifty degrees, or there abouts, and the Son being in Cancer, in his highest sign, that is in the highest declination, it will be half an hour before eight of the clock before it cometh into the East, and half an hour before five before it come into the West. If you take it by a flat Compass, that is he goeth from East to West in nine hours, and again from West to East in 15 hours. At the height of thirty degrees, he cometh first a little before half an hour past nine into the East, & a little before half an hour past two into the West, so that in less than five hours and an half he goeth from East to West, & full eighteen hours and an half before he cometh again from West to East: and seeing that the Moon some times makes his declination five degrees more northerly than the Son, so it may chance that the Moon may go an hour & more faster from the East into the West than the Son, so that he that will alwaise take the Son or Moon by our common Compass, shall often times much deceive himself if he should reckon his tides thereafter, whether it were requisite to stop any tides, or to enter into any havens: to prevent that, I have in the tables enseving noted upon what hour and minute the Moon cometh upon such points, whereby the floods are ruled, wherein only it is necessary to know the age of the Moon, that is how many tides are passed from the time of the new or full Moon, for the first part of the table showeth the age of the Moon every day, that is how many days are passed since the new or full Moon. The second part of the table showeth the hour and minutes when the Moon upon the same days cometh to the same stroke, as you may see on the top thereof, and right against it standeth the places where the Moon than maketh a high Water. As for example the Moon being 8 days old, I would know when it will be south-west or North-east, than I look for the point of south-west, and in the first column of cyfers standing under it, I tell eight downwards, or look into the place where 8 standeth, and against it in the second column I find 9 hours 24 minutes, and at such a time it is then high water in the places that are noted down right against it, as at Amsterdam, Rotterdam, etc. or there a south-west or North-east Moon makes a full Sea.  

Hear follow the tables of the Water-tydes.  

South and North.  da how. mi.  Falling of streams upon the same stroke. 0 12— 0 
At the juttish Islands.  
Before the Hever, Eyder, and Elve.  
Before Emden & Delfziel.  
Before Enchuysen, Horn and Vrck  
Upon all the coasts of Flanders.  
Upon the Foreland.  
At Dover in the Pier.  
At Bevesier on the Land.  
At Hantom on the Kaye.  
Before Sierenbergh and the Ras of Blanckaert.  
At Olfe●snes.  
In the Conduit.  
At jubleter in the Rode.  1 12-48 2 1— 36 3 2— 24  4 3— 12  5 4— 0 From the Nesse to Beunen. 6 4— 48 7 5-36 8 6-24  9 7-12  10 8-0  11 8— 48  12 9— 36  13 10-24  14 11— 12   15 12— 0   
Southsouthwest, and North-north-east.  da how. mi.  Falling of Streams upon the same stroke. 0 1— 30 
Under Holy-land.  
Before the Maze and Goeree.  
Before the Veer.  
At Armuyen.  
Upon the Vlack before Rammekens.  
Before the Wielings.  
On the Zeeuse Coasts.  
Before the Thames of London.  
Before jarmouth  
In Duyns on the Rode.  
Near the Cingle.  
On the West end of Wight.  
Without Calis and Swartenes.  
In Blavet.  
Bulline at the Land.  1 2-18 2 3-6  3 3— 54  4 4-42 From Grevelingen to Beunen. 5 5— 30 6 6-18 7 7-6  8 7-54  9 8-42  10 9— 30  11 10— 18  12 11— 6  13 11-54  14 12-42   15 1— 30   
South-by-west, and North-by-east.  da how. mi.  Falling of Streams upon the same stroke. 0 12— 45  1 1— 33  2 2— 21   3 3— 9 
Within the Maze.  
Within the Veer.  
At Flusshing.  
Near Bevesier in Sea.  
In the Chamber.  
At Winckle-Sea.  
In Garnzea.   4 3— 57 
From Beunen to the Somme.  
Also from Estaples to Beunen.  5 4— 45 6 5— 33 7 6— 21 8 7— 9 9 7-57   10 8— 45   11 9-33   12 10-21   13 11— 9   14 11— 57   15 12— 45   
South-west-by-south, and North-east-by-north.  da how. mi.  Falling of Streams upon the same stroke. 0 2-15  1 3— 3 
Without Fontenay.  
Without Blavet.  
Under Bulline.  
Before the Wielinge.  
Before the Maze.  2 3— 51  3 4-39 
Amidst through the Hoofden.  
Fron Dunkerck to Greveling.  
Fron Stapels to Fecam.  
From Dortmout to Exmout.  4 5— 27 5 6-15 6 7-3  7 7-51  8 8-39  9 9-27  10 10-15  11 11— 3  12 11— 51   13 12-39   14 1-27   15 2-15   
south-west, and north-east.  da how. mi. 
At Amsterdam, Rotterdam, Dort, & Ziericksea.  
Before Newcastle, the Tese & Hartlepoole.  
In Robbenhoods bay.  
Without the Flemish banks.  
In Pas de Calis.  
Before Conquer.  
At Pleymarques, Groy, Armentiers, Heys, Kiliaets, Por thus; the river of Bordeaux.  
On all the Southcoasts of Bretaigne, Gascoigne, Poictou.  
On all coasts of Biscayen, Galissien Portugal & Spain.  
On the West-coasts of Irland.  
At boeckeness, & Orkenesse.  
In Hitland & Fayerhil.  Falling of streams upon the same stroke. 0 3— 0 1 3— 48 2 4— 36 
Fron Cape de Hagu to the Island of Ornay.  
Through the Ras of Ornay.  
Fron Garnsea to Casquets.  
From Muylford to Ramsey.  
At Fawyck in the Channel.  
At Portland in the Sack.  3 5— 24 4 6— 12 5 7— 0 6 7— 48 7 8— 36 8 9— 24 9 10— 12 10 11— 0 11 11— 48 12 12-36 13 1— 24 14 2— 12  15 3— 0   
West-south-west, and eastnortheast.  da how. mi. 
Fron Tessel to Pas of Calis in the Fareway.  
Before Humber.  
Before Flamborough & Scherenborough.  
Abruat.  
In Vaelmouth.  
In the Moushole.  
Seven islands.  
S. Paul's without the Haven.  
Between Garnsea and Sept Isles in the Farewater  
In the Breesond.  
Without the Four.  
All Southcoasts of Irland, as Kinsael, Corck, jochel, Waterford & Cape de Clare.  Falling of Streams upon the same stroke. 0 4-30 1 5— 18 2 6-6 
From ostend to S. Catelines.  
From Barchfleur to Strusaert.  
The Breesond out and in.  
Fron Cap. de Clare to the Island Saltes  
Between Londey and Holmen so far as Brust  
From Sorlis to England's end.  
Fron Start point to Portland.  3 6— 54 4 7— 42 5 8— 30 6 9-18 7 10— 6 8 10— 54 9 11-42 10 12— 30 11 1— 18 12 2— 6 13 2— 54 14 3— 42  15 4-30  
South-west-by-west, and North-east-by-east.  da deg. mi. 
Between Pas of Calis & the Maze  
At Rovanen. In the Sorlis.  
Before S. Matthewes point.  
In Bristol & Croixdowne.  
In the Ford between Heysat.  
Bofore the Bos. At S. Marten.  
Before Rochel.  
Before Brouwaghe.  
At Rovaen.  
In the river of Bordeaux.  
Within the Channels situated on the coasts of Spain, Portugal, Galissien, the Southside of Bretaigne, Gascoigne, & the west-coasts of Ireland.  Falling of streams upon the same stroke. 0 3— 45 1 4— 33 2 5— 21  3 6— 9 
From Strusaert to Diepen.  
From Lezaert to Start.  
From Caep de Clare to Londey.  4 6— 57 5 7— 45 6 8— 33 7 9— 21 8 10— 9 9 10— 57 10 11— 45  11 12— 33  12 1— 21  13 2— 9   14 2— 57   15 3-45   
West-by-South, and East-by-north.  da how. mi.  Falling of Streams upon the same stroke. 0 5— 15 
In Torbay and Dartmouth,  
In Plymouth and Vawyck.  
In the Sea of Galls.  
In Vaelmouth.  
In Muylford.  
At Ramsey in Wales.  
Before Linne in England.  
Against Londey.  
In all Havens on the South-coast of Ireland.  1 6-3 2 6— 51 
Fron Isle Bas to the Four.  
Fron Dorsey to Cap. de Clare.  
Fron the Sorlis to Lezard.  
Fron Portland to Wight.  
Fron Wight to Beach or Bevesier.  3 7-39 4 8-27 5 9-15 6 10— 3 7 10-51 8 11— 39 9 12-27  10 1-15  11 2— 3  12 2— 51   13 3— 39   14 4-27   15 5— 15   
West, and East.  da how. mi.  Falling of streams upon the same stroke. 0 6-0  1 6-48 
Before Hamborgh.  
Before Bremen.  
Before the Marsdiep or Tessel.  
At Hull.  
At Blackney & Wells.  
Before Antwerp.  
Der Goes.  
Der Gouwe.  
At Concallo & S. Malo.  
S. Paul's in the Haven.  
Without the Sorlis in the Channel.  2 7-36  3 8-24  4 9-12  5 100L 
From the Kiscasses to Berchfleur.  
Fron Englandsende to Lezart.  6 10-48 7 11-36 8 12-24 9 1-12 10 2-0  11 2-48  12 3-36   13 4-24   14 5-12   15 6-0   
West-north-west, and East-south-east.  da how. mi.  Falling of Streams upon the same stroke. 0 7-30 
At ehe Nesse by Wieringhen.  
In Tessel in the Coopverders Rode.  
At Kilduyn.  
In the middle of the Channel in the Fairway.  
Near Goutstert in the Channel.  
And between Moushole & Vaelmuyen in Sea.  
Near Plymouth in Sea.  
At Lezart by the land.  1 8-18 2 9-6  3 9-54  4 10-42 
Fron the Island Briack to S. Malo.  
From Berghfleur to Seynhooft.  5 11-30 6 12-18 7 1— 6 8 1-54 9 2-42 10 3-30  11 4-18   12 5-6   13 5-54   14 6-42   15 7-30   
West-by-north, and East-by-south.  da how. mi.  Falling of Streams upon the same stroke. 0 6-45  1 7-33  2 8-21   3 9-9 
Between Fawijck and Vaelmuyen in the Channel.  
Amidst in the Channel.  
At Briston at the Kaye  
Before S. Nicolas and Podessemske.   4 9-57 From the Island Bas to Marwanen along the land. 5 10-45 6 11-33 7 12-21 8 1-9  9 1-57   10 2-45   11 3-33   12 4-21   13 5-9   14 5-57   15 6-45   
North-west-by west, and South-east-by-east.  da how. mi.  Falling of Streams upon the same stroke. 0 8-15  1 9— 3  2 9-51 
Without the Kiscasses in the Channel.  
By Wight in the Channel.  
From Wight to Bevesier by the land.  
Upon the Coast by west the Foreland.  
Without the Vlie.   3 10-39 
Behind Garnsea in the Farewater.  
Within the seven islands.  4 11-27 5 12-15 6 13 7 1-51 8 2-39  9 3-27  10 4-15   11 5-3   12 5-51   13 6-39   14 7-27   15 8-15    

Northwest, and Southeast.  da how. mi.  Falling of streams upon the same stroke. 0 9-0 
Before the East and West Eemses.  
Before the Vlie.  
Before the Scholbalgh.  
On all the freeze Coasts.  
Upon the freeze and Wieringer Vlack  
Before Crammer Winterduyn, and Yarmouth.  
Within the Seine.  
At the East end of Wight.  
In the Rasse of Poortland.  
Between Garnsea & the Kiscasses.  1 9-48 2 10-36  3 11— 24 In the Wyck of Bennyte. between Morlaix and the Drieakelpots. 4 12-12 5 1— 0 6 1-48 7 2-36  8 3-24  9 4-12  10 5— 0  11 5-48  12 6-36  13 7-24   14 8-12   15 9-0   
North-north-west, and Southsoutheast.  da how. mi.  Falling of streams upon the same stroke. 0 10-30 
At Olfersnes and Harwidgh, without the banks.  
At Leytstaffe in the Rode.  
Yarmouth in the Rode. before the Thames of London.  
At Margat.  
At Wight within.  
At Beunen, Diepen, & Seynhooft.  
In the Fosse of Caen.  
At Struysaert, & all the coasts of Normandy, & Picardy.  
At S. Helen & Calveroort.  1 11-18 2 12-6  3 12-54 
From Berghfleur to Alhonga.  
From Cape Dorsi to the Island Dardan.  4 1-42 5 2-30 6 3-18 7 4-6 8 4-54 9 5-42  10 6— 30  11 7-18  12 8— 6  13 8-54   14 9-42   15 10-30   
North-west-by-north, and South-east-by-south.  da deg. mi.  Falling of streams upon the same stroke. 0 9— 45  1 10-33 
The Needles of Wight.  
In the Channel by Wight.  
The Kiscasses.  
At Garnsea in the Channel.  
Near Leytstaffe & Yarmouth without the banks.  
At Der Gouwe.  
At the Wolfshorne.  2 11-21  3 12-9 
Before Concallo.  
Before the Island of S. Michanel in the Wyck.  4 12— 57 5 1-45 6 2-33 7 3-21 8 4-9 9 4-57   10 5-45   11 6-33   12 7-21   13 8— 9   14 8-57   15 9-45   
North-by-west, and South-by-east.  da how. mi.  Falling of streams upon the same stroke. 0 11-15 
Between Cripplesand and the Kreyl.  
Within at Olfersnes.  
At Hantom.  
At Portchmouth, & at Wolfershorne.  
At Calveroort in Wight. before the haven of Caen.  
Within the Thames of London.  1 12-3 2 12-51  3 1-39 
From S. Matthewes point unto Backovens.  
From Fontenay to S. Matthewes point.  4 2-27 5 3-15 6 4— 3 7 7-51 8 5-39 9 6-27   10 7-15   11 8-3   12 8-51   13 9-39   14 10-27   15 11-15      

CHAP. XXIII. How you shall find the time of the new and full Moon.  
THe former Tables of the Water-tydes are unprofitable & not to be used, when the age of the Moon is not known, and therefore we have hereunto added, an Almanac for the next ten years, one enseving the other, wherein you may perfectly find when it is a new or full Moon, and also the just time of the quarters.  
Which to understand, you must first know, that all Astronomers reckon the day from one noon time to another, and to that end reckon from one noon to the noon next after enseving 24 hours, which custom also is observed in these Almanacs, thereby to show the difference between forenoon and afternoon. But to find the time of the new Moon or full Moon or of the quarters, then note first that there are two parts of the Almanac noted with figures, the first showing the day of the month standing against it whereon the Moon is new, full or in the quarters, The second showeth the hour and minutes of the same day: which perfectly to understand I will manifest by an example.  
Example.  
Anno 1612 I desire to know in the month May, when it will be full Moon, to that end I look into the Almanac of Anno 1612, in the month May, & there I find the full Moon, upon the 14 day, at 9 of the clock 38 minutes, that is at 9 in the night: but the new Moon in the same Month, is the 29 day, 22 hours and 33 minutes, that is so many hours after noon of that day, and therefore if you tell from the said noon 22 hours 33 minutes, than you will find that it shall be upon the 30 day at 10 of the clock and 33 minutes before noon. But to know upon what day of the week it is, you must first know the Sundays letter for the yeere-and also with what letter every month begins. the Sundays letter you shall find noted under every several years Almanac. The Leap years have 2 Sundays or Dominical letters, the first is used until the 25 day of February, the other from the 25 of February unto the end of the year, but with what letter each month beginneth, that you shall find in this table enseving.  
januarie beginneth with A February D March D April G May B june E julie beginneth with G August C September F October A November D December F  
If then you will know upon what day of the week the aforesaid 14 day of May falleth, then reckon upon the line of letters standing hereunder, beginning at the first B (because May beginneth with B) to the number of 14, than your number that you reckon will end upon A: but for that Anno 1612 is a Leap year, and hath 2 Dominical letters, to were, A & G. then (as aforesaid) from the 25 of February you shall use the last, which in this is G. and for that your reckoning falls upon A, that is a day after G which is Sunday, than the 14 of May will be upon a Monday. If you look in the months of januarie or October, you must reckon from the first A, for those months begin with A, and April and june with G, and so forth.  
a, b, c, d, e, f, g, a, b, c, d, e, f, g, a, b, c, d, e, f, g, a, b, c, d, e, f, g, a, b, c, d, e, f, g, a, b.  

Hear followeth the Almanac for 10 years, calculated upom the Meridian of Amsterdam N●●●●●.  

The Almanac for the Year 1611. New style.   Moon. da ho. m. januarie. last quarter. 5 11. 2 new moon 13 14. 17 first quarter 21 10. 58 full moon. 28 1. 56 February. last quarter. 4 4. 19 new moon 12 8. 43 first quarter 19 21. 19 full moon. 26 12. 48 March. last quarter. 5 23. 20 new moon 14 0. 49 first quarter 21 4. 43 full moon. 28 0. 22 April. last quarter. 4 18. 43 new moon 12 13. 53 first quarter 19 10. 18 full moon. 26 13. 0 May. last quarter. 4 13. 2 new moon 12 0. 16 first quarter 18 15. 57 full moon. 26 2. 27 june. last quarter. 3 5. 37 new moon 10 8. 40 first quarter 16 22. 52 full moon. 24 17. 17 julie. last quarter. 2 19 57 new moon 9 15. 54 first quarter 16 8. 15 full moon. 24 8. 20 August. last quarter. 1 7. 28 new moon 7 23. 12 first quarter 14 20. 42 full moon. 22 23. 43 last quarter. 30 16. 39 September. new moon 6 7. 15 first quarter 13 12. 19 full moon. 21 15. 6 last quarter. 29 5. 0 October. new moon 5 16. 48 first quarter 13 6. 37 full moon. 21 5. 39 last quarter. 28 6. 21 November. new moon 4 5. 3 first quarter 12 2. 38 full moon. 19 19 0 last quarter. 26 13. 20 December. new moon 3 20. 3 first quarter 11 23. 5 full moon. 19 7. 5 last quarter. 25 22. 7  
In this Year 1611, the Golden number is 16. The circle of the Son 24. Dominical letter B. The Roman Indiction 9 The Epact 16. After-winter, 7 weeks 1 day. Quadragesima February 20. Easter day 3 of April. Ascension day the 12 of May. Whitsonday the 22 of May. Advent the 27 of November. This year there shall be 2 Eclipses of the Son, which shall not be seen above our Horizon.  

The Almanac for the year 1612. New style.   Moon. da ho. m. januarie. new moon 2 13. 45 first quarter 10 18. 10 full moon. 17 17. 58 last quarter. 24 9 46 February. new moon 1 8. 46 first quarter 9 10. 28 full moon. 16 4. 1 last quarter. 23 0. 0 March. new moon 2 3. 29 first quarter 9 23. 11 full moon. 16 13. 39 last quarter. 23 16. 24 new moon 31 20. 31 April. first quarter 8 8. 0 full moon. 14 23. 18 last quarter. 22 10. 1 new moon. 30 10. 46 May. first quart. 7 14. 0 full moon. 14 9 38 last quarter. 22 3. 53 new moon 29 22. 33 june. first quarter 5 18. 33 full moon. 12 21. 7 last quarter. 20 21. 12 new moon. 28 8. 6 julie. first quarter 4 23. 24 full moon. 12 10. 4 last quarter. 20 13. 15 new moon 27 16. 11 August. first quarter 3 6. 20 full moon. 11 0. 38 last quarter. 19 3. 41 new moon. 25 23. 56 September. first quarter 1 16. 22 full moon. 9 16. 39 last quarter. 17 16. 4 new moon 24 8. 0 October. first quarter 1 6. 0 full moon. 9 9 29 last quarter. 17 2. 25 new moon 23 17. 10 first quarter 30 23. 8 November. full moon. 8 2. 16 last quarter. 15 10. 49 new moon 22 4. 13 first quarter 29 19 2 December. full moon. 7 17. 57 last quarter. 14 18. 16 new moon 21 17. 47 first quarter 29 16. 9  
The Golden number for this Leap year is 17. The circle of the Son 25. Dominical letter A G. The Roman Indiction 10. The Epact 27. After-winter 10 weeks just. Quadragesima March 11. Easter-Day the ●2 of April. Ascension day 31 of May Whitsonday 10 of june. Advent 2 of December. In this year there shall be four Eclipses, 2 of the Son, and 2 of the moon, whereof but two shall be seen above our Horizon: the first of the Moon May 14, 9 hours 48 min. after noon, the other of the- Son the 30 of May, at 10 of the clock 42 min. before noon.  

The Almanac of the year 1613, New style.   Moon. da ho. m. januarie. full moon. 6 7.53 last quarter. 13 1.53 new moon. 20 9.44 first quart. 28 13. 0 February. full moon. 4 19.52 last quarter. 11 10.41 new moon. 19 3.15 first quart. 27 7. 6 March. full moon. 6 5.47 last quarter. 12 21.47 new moon. 20 21.10 first quart. 28 22. 4 April full moon. 4 14.54 last quarter. 11 11. 4 n●w moon. 19 14.15 first quart. 27 9 0 May. full moon. 3 23.15 last quarter. 11 2. 0 new moon. 19 5.34 first quart. 26 16.35 june. full moon. 2 7.48 last quarter. 9 18.20 new moon. 17 18.48 first quart. 24 21.39 julie. full moon. 1 17.19 last quarter. 9 11.32 new moon. 17 5.56 first quart. 24 1.48 full moon. 31 4.28 August. last quarter. 8 4.44 new moon. 15 15.42 first quart. 22 7. 5 full moon. 29 18. 0 September. last quarter. 6 21.31 new moon. 14 0.38 first quart. 20 14.55 full moon. 28 9.39 October. last quarter. 6 13. 1 new moon. 13 9.24 first quart. 20 2. 0 full moon. 28 3.15 November. last quarter. 5 2.45 new moon. 11 18.41 first quart. 18 17.36 full moon. 26 21.40 December. last quarter. 4 14. 8 new moon. 11 5. 9 first quart. 18 12.15 full moon. 26 15.28  
In this Year 1613, the golden number is 18: the circle of the Son 26. The dominical letter F. The Roman Indiction 11. The Epact 8. The After-winter 7 weeks 5 days. Quadragesima February 24. Easter day the 7 of April. Ascension day the 16 of May. Whitsonday the 26 of May. Advent 1 of December. This year there shall be 6 Eclipses, four of the Son, and two of the Moon, whereof but one of the Moon shall be seen upon the 28 of October. 3 hours 37 minutes after noon, all the rest shall be seen out of our Horizon.  

The Almanac of the year 1614 New style.   Moon. da ho.m. januarie. last quarter. 2 23.20 new moon 9 17.13 first quart. 17 8.55 full moon. 25 7.18 February. last quarter. 1 6.50 new moon. 8 6.48 first quart. 16 5.50 full moon. 23 20.37 March. last quarter. 2 14. 2 new moon. 9 22.23 first quart. 18 1.17 full moon. 25 7.18 last quarter. 31 22. 0 April. new moon. 8 14.37 first quarter 16 17.57 full moon. 23 16. 6 last quarter. 30 7.46 May. new moon. 8 6.53 first quart. 16 7.19 full moon. 22 23.46 last quarter. 29 19.40 june. new moon. 6 22.31 first quarter 14 17. 3 full moon. 21 7.15 last quarter. 28 9.49 julie. new moon. 6 12.56 first quart. 13 23.55 full moon. 20 15.16 last quarter. 28 1.51 August. new moon. 5 2. 7 first quart. 12 5. 2 full moon. 19 0.54 last quarter. 26 19.32 September. new moon. 3 13.56 first quart. 10 9.54 full moon. 17 13. 0 last quarter. 25 13.45 October. new moon. 3 0.49 first quarter 9 16.16 full moon. 17 3.45 last quarter. 25 7.55 November. new moon 1 10.55 first quarter 8 1.31 full moon. 15 21.14 last quarter. 24 0.53 new moon 30 20.54 December. first quarter 7 14.34 full moon. 15 16.20 last quarter. 23 15.24 new moon 30 7. 8  
This Year the Golden number shall be 19 The circle of the Son 27. Dominical letter E. The Roman Indiction 12. The Epact 19 The After-winter 6 weeks 4 days. Quadragesima the 16 of February. Easter day 30 of March. Ascension day 8 of May. Whitsonday 18 of May. Advent 30 December. Four Eclipses shall this year be seen, the first and last out of our Horizon, the second of the Moon the 23 of April, 16 hours 14 minutes: the third of the Son, the 3 of October 55 minutes after noon.  

The Almanac for the Year 1615. New style.   Moon. da ho. m. januarie. first quarter 6 7. 0 full moon. 14 11.29 last quarter. 22 3. 0 new moon 28 18. 2 February. first quarter 5 2. 0 full moon. 13 4.55 last quarter. 20 11.39 new moon 27 5.48 March. first quarter 6 22. 0 full moon. 14 19.35 last quarter. 21 18.15 new moon 28 18.42 April. first quarter 5 18. 0 full moon. 13 7.15 last quarter. 20 0. 9 new moon 27 8.34 May. first quarter 5 11.14 full moon. 12 16.35 last quarter. 19 7. 0 new moon 26 23.24 june. first quarter 4 2.17 full moon. 11 0.18 last quarter. 17 15.44 new moon 25 14.31 julie. first quarter 3 14.56 full moon. 10 7.24 last quarter. 17 3.10 new moon 25 5.50 August. first quarter 2 0.29 full moon. 8 14.51 last quarter. 15 17.30 new moon 23 20.41 first quarter 31 7.46 September. full moon. 6 23.25 last quarter. 14 10.30 new moon 22 10.52 first quarter 29 13.45 October. full moon. 6 10.11 last quarter. 14 5.24 new moon 22 0. 0 first quarter 28 19.52 November. full moon. 4 23.46 last quarter. 13 1.19 new moon 20 12. 0 first quarter 27 3.38 December. full moon. 4 16.17 last quarter. 12 20.43 new moon 19 23.10 first quarter 26 14.13  
In this Year 1615, the Golden number is 1. The circle of the Son 28. Dominical letter D. The Roman Indiction 13. The Epact 1. After-winter, 9 weeks 3 days. Quadragesima the 8 of March. Easter day April 19 Ascension day the 28 of May. Whitsonday the 7 of june. Advent the 30 of November. This year there shall be 2 Eclipses of the Son, the first the 29 of March, in the morning between 6 and 7 of the clock, which shall be best seen of them which inhabit East-India, the other shall not be seen by us.  

The Almanac for the year 1616. New style.   Moon. da ho.m. januarie. full moon. 3 11. 0 last quarter. 11 14. 10 new moon 18 9.31 first quarter 25 3.50 February. full moon. 2 6.21 last quarter. 10 4.23 new moon 16 19 37 first quarter 23 20. 9 March. full moon. 3 0.37 last quarter. 10 14.56 new moon 17 5.44 first quarter 24 14. 8 April. full moon. 1 16.26 last quarter. 8 22.17 new moon. 15 16.25 first quart. 23 8.41 May. full moon. 1 5.28 last quarter. 8 3.29 new moon 15 4. 0 first quarter 23 2.40 full moon. 30 15.51 june. last quarter. 6 8.22 new moon. 13 16.47 first quarter 21 19.18 full moon. 29 0.25 julie. last quarter. 5 14.33 new moon 13 6.46 first quarter 21 10. 0 full moon. 28 7.54 August. last quarter. 3 23.13 new moon 11 22. 0 first quarter 19 22.42 full moon. 26 15.22 September. last quarter. 2 11.21 new moon 10 14. 5 first quarter 18 9 0 full moon. 24 23.39 October. last quarter. 2 2.51 new moon 10 6.16 first quarter 17 17.27 full moon. 24 9.37 last quarter. 31 21.25 November. new moon 8 21.55 first quarter 16 0.36 full moon. 22 21.45 last quarter. 30 17.54 December. new moon 8 12. 9 first quarter 15 7.52 full moon. 22 12.47 last quarter. 30 14.49  
The Golden number for this Leap year is 2. The circle of the Son is 1. Dominical letter C B. The Roman Indiction 14. The Epact 12. After-winter 7 weeks 2 days. Quadragesima February 21. Easter-Day the 3 of April. Ascension day 12 of May Whitsonday 22 of May. Advent 27 of November. In this year there shall be four Eclipses, 2 of the Son, and 2 of the moon, whereof one of the moon the 27 of August in the morning between 3 and 4 of the clock, shall be seen by us, the other shall be without our Horizon.  

The Almanac of the year 1617., New style.   Moon. da ho.m. januarie. new moon. 7 0.48 first quart. 13 16.26 full moon. 21 5.33 last quarter. 29 10.23 February. new moon. 5 11.51 first quart. 12 3. 4 full moon. 20 0.35 last quarter. 28 3. 0 March. new moon. 6 21.32 first quart. 13 16. 9 full moon. 21 18.50 last quarter. 29 15.49 April new moon. 5 6.29 first quart. 12 7.15 full moon. 20 11.16 last quarter. 28 1.52 May. new moon. 4 16.45 first quart. 11 23.46 full moon. 20 1.33 last quarter. 27 6.44 june. new moon. 3 0.50 first quart. 10 17. 1 full moon. 18 13.26 last quarter. 25 11. 4 julie. new moon. 2 11.31 first quart. 10 10.15 full moon. 17 23.26 last quarter. 24 15. 6 August. new moon. 1 0. 3 first quart. 9 2.54 full moon. 16 8. 7 last quarter. 22 22.14 new moon. 30 14.40 September. first quart. 7 18.16 full moon. 14 16.23 last quarter. 21 7.57 new moon. 29 7. 0 October. first quart. 7 7.55 full moon. 14 0.51 last quarter. 20 1.15 new moon. 29 0.45 November. first quart. 5 19.38 full moon. 12 10.29 last quarter. 19 15.38 new moon. 27 18.26 December. first quart. 5 5.6 full moon. 11 21.39 last quarter. 19 10.37 full moon. 27 10.55  
In this Year 1617., the golden number is 3: the circle of the Son 2. The dominical letter A. The Roman Indiction 15. The Epact 23. The After-winter 6 weeks. Quadragesima February 12. Easter day 26 of March. Ascension day the 4 of May. Whitsonday the 14 of May. Advent 3 of December. This year there shall be 5 Eclipses, three of the Son, and two of the Moon: of all which only the last of the Moon can be here seen the 16 of August, at 8 of the clock and 7 minutes after in the evening.  

The Almanac of the year 1618. New style.   Moon. da ho.m. januarie. first quart. 2 13. 0 full moon. 10 10.58 last quarter. 18 7.48 new moon. 26 1.22 February. first quart. 1 20.32 full moon. 9 2.13 last quarter. 17 4.23 new moon. 24 15.43 March. first quart. 3 4.34 full moon. 10 18.52 last quarter. 18 22.45 new moon. 25 23. 8 April. first quarter 1 14.21 full moon. 9 11.57 last quarter. 17 13.31 new moon. 24 7.32 May. first quart. 1 2. 8 full moon. 9 4.25 last quarter. 17 1. 0 new moon. 23 15.23 first quarter 30 16. 2 june. full moon. 7 19.34 last quarter. 15 8.41 new moon 21 23.18 first quarter 29 7.41 julie. full moon. 7 9 4 last quarter. 14 14. 9 new moon. 21 8. 17 first quart. 29 0.35 August. full moon. 5 20.56 last quarter. 12 18.32 new moon. 19 19.12 first quart. 27 18.13 September. full moon. 4 7.51 last quarter. 10 23.47 new moon. 18 8.34 first quarter 26 11.46 October. full moon. 3 17.10 last quarter. 10 7.32 new moon 18 0.36 first quarter 26 4.40 November. full moon. 2 2.39 last quarter. 8 18.49 new moon 16 18.53 first quarter 24 19.37 December. full moon. 1 12.26 last quarter. 8 9.54 new moon 16 13.45 first quart. 24 8. 1 full moon. 30 22.57  
This Year the Golden number shall be 4. The circle of the Son 3. Dominical letter G. The Roman Indiction 1. The Epact 4. The After-winter 8 weeks 6 days. Quadragesima the 4 of March. Easter day 15 of April. Ascension day the 24 of May. Whitsonday 3 of june. Advent the 2 December. There shall be seen upon the Globe of the Earth three Eclipses, 2 of the Son, and 1 of the Moon, but none of the three shall be seen above our Horizon.  

The Almanac of the year 1619, New style.   Moon. da ho.m. januarie. last quarter. 7 4.11 new moon. 15 8. 5 first quart. 22 17.49 full moon. 29 10.41 February. last quarter. 6 0.23 new moon. 14 0.14 first quart. 21 1.14 full moon. 27 23.40 March. last quarter. 7 20.54 new moon. 15 13.24 first quart. 22 7.51 full moon. 29 14. 0 April last quarter. 6 15.57 new moon. 13 23.57 first quart. 20 14 9 full moon. 28 5.12 May. last quarter. 6 8.30 new moon. 13 8.22 first quart. 19 23.18 full moon. 27 20.39 june. last quarter. 4 22. 8 new moon. 11 15.46 first quart. 18 10. 0 full moon. 26 12. 5 julie. last quarter. 4 8.30 new moon. 10 23. 0 first quart. 17 23.30 full moon. 26 2.51 August. last quarter. 2 16.11 new moon. 9 6.55 first quart. 16 15.23 full moon. 24 16.46 last quarter. 31 21.58 September. new moon. 7 16.32 first quart. 15 9.11 full moon. 23 5.35 last quarter. 30 3.16 October. new moon. 6 4.32 first quart. 15 4.12 full moon. 22 17.16 last quarter. 29 9.55 November. new moon. 5 19.32 first quart. 13 23.24 full moon. 21 4.21 last quarter. 27 19 0 December. new moon. 5 13.14 first quart. 13 17.22 full moon. 20 14.49 last quarter. 27 7.37  
The Golden number of this year 1619 is 5: the Circle of the Son 4. The Dominical letter F. The Roman Indiction 2. The Epact 15. The After-winter 6 weeks & 5 days. Quadragesima, or the first day of Lent, the 17 of February. Easter-day the 31 of March. Ascension day the 9 of May. Whitsonday the 19 of May. Advent the 1 of December. This year there shall be 5 Eclipses, three of the Son, & two of the Moon: of which the first of the Moon the 26 of june, at 12 of the clock and 5 minutes at night, and the second the 21 of December, in the morning at 2 of the clock 49 min. shall be seen: the other in the Son shall come to pass without our Horizon.  

The Almanac of the year 1620 New style.   Moon. da ho.m. januarie. new moon 4 8.26 first quart. 12 9 0 full moon. 19 1. 0 last quarter. 25 23.11 February. new moon. 3 3.30 first quart. 10 20.42 full moon. 17 11.22 last quarter. 24 17.29 March. new moon. 3 21. 0 first quart. 11 5.30 full moon. 17 22.32 last quarter. 25 12.36 April. new moon. 2 11.33 first quarter 9 11.55 full moon. 16 10.28 last quarter. 24 7.36 May. new moon. 1 23.26 first quart. 8 17.27 full moon. 15 23.28 last quarter. 24 1. 8 new moon. 31 8.30 june. first quarter 4 17.22 full moon. 14 13.23 last quarter. 22 16.29 new moon 29 16.14 julie. first quarter 6 7. 0 full moon. 14 4. 0 last quarter. 22 5.27 new moon. 28 23.23 August. first quart. 4 17.39 full moon. 12 19.28 last quarter. 20 16.11 new moon. 27 6.57 September. first quart. 3 7.42 full moon. 11 11.14 last quarter. 19 0.45 new moon. 25 15.55 October. first quarter 3 0.53 full moon. 11 2.32 last quarter. 18 7.44 new moon 25 2.50 November. first quarter 1 20, 24 full moon. 9 16.49 last quarter. 16 14.16 new moon 23 16.34 December. first quarter 1 16.52 full moon. 9 5.41 last quarter. 15 21.52 new moon 23 8.34 first quart. 31 12.50  
In this Leap-yeere the Golden number is 6. The circle of the Son 5. The Epact 26. Dominical letter E D. After-winter 9 weeks and 4 days. Easter day the the 19 of April. Ascension day 28 May. Whitsonday the 7 of june. Advent the 29 of November. Two great Eclipses of the Moon shall come to pass this year: the first the 14 of june 13 hours, and 13 minutes after noon, the other the 9 of December at night, at five of the clock and 41 minutes.    

CHAP. XXIIII. How at all times you shall find the New Moon, or her age, without help of any Almanac.  
Whereunto it is requisite to know the Golden number, whereby you know the Epact or Key of the year: the Golden number riseth every year one, that is with the beginning of the year to the number of 19, so that every 19 years it goeth about, or makes an end; then again it beginneth at 1, 2, 3, etc. To find it in such a year as you desire, do thus: see how many years are past since Anno 1500, which divide by 19, and that which resteth is the Golden number, but if nothing resteth, that is, that even 19 parts are produced out of it, than your Golden number is 19  
Example.  
I desire to know the Golden number Anno 1608, setting the 1500 aside, I look how many times 19 there is in 108 years, and I find 5, and 13 remaining, which 13 is the Golden number for that year, the like must be done with all the other years.  

Of the Epact.  
THe Epact or Key of the year, altereth every year upon the 1 of March next after enseving, rising every year 11 to the number of 30, & when it is more than 30, then take 30 out of it, and the rest is the Epact: and so every year reckon 11 more as aforesaid.  
But the Epact of the Old Style is always 10 more than the New Style, because the Old Style followeth 10 days after the New Style: so that if you add 10 to the Epact of the New Style, than you have the Epact of the Old Style: but if the number riseth higher than 30, then leave 30 and that which remaineth is the Epact of the Old Style, which you shall clearly see in the table enseving.  
How much the Epact is in every year, you may perceive by this table, namely right against the Golden number, which to know without looking in a book, you must do thus. Count the Golden number upon the three joints of your thumb, beginning with one at the undermost joint, and count so long until you come to the Golden number of the year that you require, and if it ends on the undermost joint of your thumb then the Golden Number and the Epact is all one number; but if it endeth on the middle joint of your thumb, them add 10 to your Golden number, & that will be the Epact; but if it endeth upon the end of your thumb, than you must add 20 to your Golden number, and then you shall find the Epact.  
Golden number. New Epact. Old Epact. 1 1 11 2 12 22 3 23 3 4 4 14 5 15 25 6 26 6 7 7 17 8 18 28 9 29 9 10 10 20 11 21 1 12 2 12 13 13 23 14 24 4 15 5 15 16 16 26 17 27 7 18 8 18 19 19 29  
Example.  
I would know the Epact of Anno 1609, the Golden number for that year is 14: now when I tell this number upon the three joints of my thumb it endeth upon the middlemost joint of my thumb, for which cause I add 10 thereunto, and it makes 24, which is the Epact of that year, agreeing with the table aforesaid, this is to be understood after the new Style.  
Now if you will know when it is a new Moon, then take the number of the Epact of your year, and thereunto add the number of the months since March to the month wherein you are, accounting that therein: if the number be just 30, than it will be a new Moon upon the first day of the month, but if it be less than 30, then know that there must want so many days of the month as the number is less than 30, before it shall be a new Moon.  
Example.  
In Anno 1614 I desire to know when it shall be a new Moon, in the month of julie: the Epact of that year is 19, whereunto add 5 for the months from March, which added together maketh 24, which wanteth 6 of 30, so that the new Moon shall be upon the 6 day of the month of julie.  
But if you desire to know how old the Moon is upon any day, add the Epact & the number of the months from March; to the days that are passed in the month that you are in, and if the number be less than 30, than it will show the age of the Moon, but if it be more than 30, then subtract 30 out of it, and that which then remaineth, is the age of the Moon.  
Example.  
In the year 1614 aforesaid, I desire to know the age of the Moon the 28 of julie, the Epact is 19, whereunto I add 5 for the months passed from March, and 28 more for the days of the month that are past, which together maketh 52, from which I subtract 30, & there resteth 22, and that is the age of the Moon upon that day: that which is here alleged concerneth the New Style wholly.    

CHAP. XXV. Of the Seacardes.  
IT is well known unto every man, specially to all those that understand the grounds of cosmography, that the Earth and the Sea together is a round body or Globe, so that it is impossible in such sort to set down and show the same, or the parts thereof in one platform, or card, that they may be well distinguished without error, for it is impossible to make a thing that is round to be like in all proportions with that which is flat, so that the common flat Seacardes many times in some places are untrue, specially those that set forth great voyages, far from the Equinoctial: but the Seacardes that are commonly used here abouts for the East & West voyages by Sea, they are reasonable true, or else the faults therein are so small, that they cannot be any hindrance thereunto: they are most fit Instruments to be used by sea, and our old farefathers which first practised them did great pleasure, & profit unto Seafaring men. The want that we find in them, consisteth herein, & is thus found: If a man were to sail to a place with three points into the Sea, the two first points might be sailed by their strokes and distances, but from the second to the third place (that is the third side of the triple point) it will fail both in the stretching and the distance.  
Example.  
I sail from the Lezard with a right course to the islands of Canaria, and from thence again to the islands of Corvo & Flores, for the which two strokes and distances my Card is well made, but if I will sail again from Corvo to Lezard from whence I first sailed the Card will show me an imperfect course, that is it will show farther in the Card than it is, and it shall differ also in the stretching, so that you must set your course more northerly than the Card showeth.  
In our short ways, as aforesaid, this is not much marked, & is little esteemed, but they that sail to West-India, they perceive it well enough. When they sail outward, they hold their way far southward, and there find their Cards just with their due lengths, because the Cards are made for the purpose: but returning home again, when they hold their course northerly, than they find the way to be shorter than their Cards show it. The cause thereof is this, all the lines in flat Sea cards from south to north, are all over drawn just even each some other, from the Equinoctial to the Pole: but upon a round Globe, which is made in form like the Earth, they are not of alike wideness, but the more Northerly they are, the nearer they come one to the other, so that two strokes of south and north, at the breadth of 60 degrees, are but half so wide one from the other as upon the Equinoctial Line, and under the Pole they fall close together. Wherefore if two ships being under the Equinoctial, distant from each other 200 leagues, both of them may sail right north without let or hindrance, & they would come to the height of 60 degrees, and be but 100 leagues one from the other, and if they should hold on the same course, they would at last meet both together under the Pole, but if you should prick the course of those two ships in a flat Sea-carde, the distances in the Card would remain alike, whereby it is plainly seen, that all places in the Seacardes lying far northward are much to great, unless they be drawn less, which cannot well be done, without making other places falser, but how all such places may be made even, and helped you may see it in the Seacardes of West India, which were printed and made by us.  
Amongst many Pilots there is an opinion, that they had rather use the written Cards, than such as are printed, esteeming the printed Cards to be imperfect, and say that the written Cards are much better and perfecter, they mean the written Cards that are daily made by men, are every day corrected, & the printed never: but herein they are not a little deceived, for the printed Cards in each respect are as good, yea & better than the written, for that the printed Cards are once in every point with all care and diligence made perfect, in regard that they serve for many, for that being once well made, all the rest may with as little labour be made good as well as bad. But the Seacardes that are written can not be made so sound nor with such speed, because so much cost for one piece alone were to much, but are all one after the other, with the least labour copied out, and many times by such persons that have little or no knowledge therein. Whatsoever there is yet resting to be corrected or made better, is as easy to be corrected in the Cards that are printed, as in them that are written, which we also are ready to do at our charge, if any man can by good pro show us any thing that is to be corrected in the Cards that are printed by us.   
The end of the Introduction.   

THE FIRST BOOK OF THE LIGHT OF NAVIGATION WHEREIN ARE DESCRIBED AND DRAWN all the Coasts and Havens of the West Seas: as of Holland, Zealand, Flanders, France, Spain and Barbary.  
ALSO Of the islands of Canaria, Madera, and the Flemish islands: together with the South and West Coasts of Ireland and England.  
AT AMSTERDAM Printed by William johnson, dwelling upon the Water, by the Old Bridge, at the Sign of the Golden Son-dyall. Anno 1612.   

Set here the first Card noted with N. 1.   


Caarte vande Zuyder-Zee, en van de vermaerde Stromen end Gaten vaned Vlie end Texel, wat zanden, platen, drooghten, diepten, end ondiepten daein gheleghen zÿn, end hoemen die zoo in't open als afzeylen schouwen end mÿden zal.  
Description de la Zuyder-Zee, et des tresrenommez fleuves du Texel et Vlie, monstrant tous sables, bancqs, secheresses et autres inconveniens sur lesdictes fleuves, et par quel moyen on les peult eviter.   map of the Zuiderzee   


CHAPTER I. THE DESCRIPTION OF the Stream running in the Fly, and the Tessel, and how you must sail out of the Fly and the Tessel.  

I To sail from Amsterdam and Enchuysen to the Flie.  
TO sail from Amsterdam to the fall of Urck, you must sail in the middle of the water to Tyort, and if you will sail from thence over Pampus, with a ship that draws much water, (that is at least ten foot or more) then keep Marker church without upon the Land of Udam, called Schyteldoecks' haven, so long till the Steeple of Zuyderwou cometh even with Kinnigherbuert: which are the houses that stand half way between Schyteldoecks' haven & Diergerdam, then go eastward to the Land, until the New church of Amsterdam joins with Diergerdam, & keep the New-church standing so, until the church of Weesp is even with the house of Muyen, 
Marks of the deepest water of Pampus.  if that the church of Muyen standeth nearer than the house, keep Weesp standing so until you see Edam without the east end of Marcken. In this channel it is almost a foot deeper then if you sail right through.  
But to shun Muyer-sand Mariners were wont to bring the houses that were wont to stand upon Tyort, southward of the Heyliger-stee of Amsterdam, there by a man may make some guess, 
Marks of Muydersand.  and they are good long-markes: but when Monnikedam is about the west end of Schiteldoecks' haven, and the house of Muyen between Weesp and Muyen church, than you are against Muydersand. But to sail right through over Pampus, you must keep Diemer steeple, above or against the point of Tyort, as long as you may see Tyort, for that is a right longmarke to sail over Pampus.  
When you are right against the east end of Marken, than you must go North-east, and somewhat more easterly to the fall of Urck, which is almost seven leagues from thence: but when you come within a league of Urck, than you come to a hard sand called Houtrib, which stretcheth southeast and northwest cross over the water, which hath no moor water upon it, then is upon the flats of Wieringen or Vriesland, so that you can find no deeper water upon it then right through. 
Marks of the Houtrib.  When Enchuysen is northwest, & northwest-by-west from you than you are upon the Houtrib, when Urck lieth more northerly, than North-east from you, & that you find Sand that is certainly the Houtrib, for you can not sail so by Enchuysen sand, you are not at Enchuysen sand, before that Urck church is southward of the buert of houses that stand upon Urck: or when the walls of the old church stand right against the middle of the buert, than you are about Enchuysen sand, 
Marks of Enchuysen sand.  then sail northwest & by west till Medenblick cometh without the point of Venus, then go west-north-west to the ton upon Hofstede.  
Between Urck and the Hofstede ton there lieth a flat of hard sand, reaching to the end of Enchuysen sand, 
The flatto between Vrck and Hofstede.  which is no deeper than the Vries-flatt: eastward about is the deepest water, & on the west side, (which by some men is called Cat-gat) you are sooner about the High-horne or Enchuysen sand, and it is good for ships that go not deep: when Enchuysen steeple is south-west or more westerly from you, than you are upon the flat.  
The Crosse-markes of the tons both upon the Creupel & Hofstede are Grootebroeck and Hempskirke, 
Marks of the tons between Hofstede and the Cripple.  which are two sharp steeples coming right over against each other, then also if a sharp steeple called Warns cometh on the southside of Stavern clif, than you have the length of these tons, which lie both at 3 fathom, the one upon the east bank, the other upon the point of the Creupel, the right channel is here 4 fathoms and an half soft ground. 
Marks of Cripplesand.  When the steeple of Medenblick is northward of Medenblick house, as far as the breadth of the house, than you have gone by and past Creupel sand, then go to the ton that lieth by Kreil, northwest, & north-west-by-north, as the wind & the stream is, the right Channel here is scarce 5 fathom. But when you come against the Kreil, in sailing out, or about the Kreil sailing in, there lieth right within the Kreil, on the north side a hard sand or flat called South-Kreil, which reacheth along towards the ton at the Hofstede, there at a low water it is but 9 foot deep: but between this bank & the north wall it is 3 fathom deep, soft ground, and south or west it is 4 fathom and an half deep. 
Marks of the flats between the Kreil & the Hofstede.  The marks of this flat are, when Mirnes a flat steeple in Friesland is right over a long Landhouse, which standeth southward from Stavern church, than you are right against the said flat.  
But the marks of the ton that lieth before Kreil are tehse when the sharp steeple of Twisch, which standeth westward from Memelick, is right against the Cornemill, that standeth westward from Memelick, 
Marks of the tun at the Creil.  and when the flat Steeple of Mirnes is against the south side or east side of the Clif, than you are at the ton which lieth at the Kreil, and the Channel is there 4 fathom and an half, and 5 fathom soft ground. But the ton lieth upon 4 fathom, and when necessity compelleth you, you may sail a cables length eastward about, then from the ton at the Kreil, to the ton at the freeze Placed, the course is north and by east, when Twisck is right north from Memelick, then keep the steeple standing so, as long as you can see it, & so you shall not sail upon any shallows between the Plaet and the Kreil.  
Between the ton at the Kreil, and the freeze Plaet, on the west shore there lieth a hard sand called Monicksand, 
Monicsand.  which you may shun well, when you are some what out of the way, but when you are about the Kreil, than you must go north & by east, right through over the point of Breesand, to the ton lying west from Worcum, with a ship that draweth not much water, but the right Channel is deeper as followeth.  
If you sail with a ship that draweth much water, over the Frees-flatte, then set the flat steeple of Pandraghen (standing west of Worcum) so, 
Marks of the tun at the Frees-plaet.  that it may stand west from the houses that lie westward from Worcum, that is a good Longmarke for the ton that lieth at the Frees-Plaet. If you have a ship that draweth much water, then go eastward of the ton about the freeze Plate, for there is more water than westward. When Warns & Mirnes are right over against each other northward from Stavern than you have the length of this ton, and when you are passed this ton, then go north-north-east, so long, till Pandraghen cometh between the buert of houses and Voorwold, if then the Cliff standeth right upon Stavern, there you have the deepest water upon the dryest place of the flat, 
Deepest water at the Vlack.  then go some what more northerly to the ton that lieth at the bought, for eastward of this ton it is all flat water to Freesland. The Long-marks of this Ton at the bought are, 
Marks of the ton at the bought.  when Pandraghen is right against Voorwolde, which is a steeple that standeth westward from Worcum on the water side, you may sail by this ton on the east side, and if you have a ship that draweth much water, than you must go close west by the ton, that you may not sail by the point of Breesand, which cometh from the west bank. These are the Marks of the deepest water upon the dryest part of the flat: when the Newland, which is a sharp steeple standing by Bolsweert, cometh between Voorwold aforesaid, and the aforesaid village or buert of houses: 
Marks of the deepest water on the Flat.  the old Crosse-markes of the ton at the bought are, Mirnes, Molqueren, Hemelum, and some long buert of houses, when these four stand together, than you have the length of this ton, which lieth upon 14 foot, and between these two tons, that is the ton at the Frees-plact, and that at the bought is the dryest of the flat. Now when the ton at the bought is sidewaies on you, then go north and by west, and some what more westerly, to the ton lying west from Worcum: which lieth upon these marks. 
Marks of the tun be-west Worcum.  There standeth a sharp steeple far within the Land called Harich, when it is right over certain buert-houses which lie northward of Hinloopen called Dertwisch, there this ton lieth upon the east wall, at 16 foot low water, & the right depth there against it, is full 3 fathom. The old marks are two villages nearest to Mackum, which stand north-east from you, & come through each other, and stand upon the water side, and when they are a little through each other, than you shall see two little steeples some what northerly from Bolsweert, which come within very little one hard by the other, in manner as the other stand separated that stand upon the water side, the one is called Idsega houses. The Cros-marks are these, 
Crosse-markes.  there standeth a high house on the east end of Condom, which cometh within a windbomes length near to the south end of Hinlopen, and when that house cometh on the south end of Hinlopen, them you are to near the cast bank, and when it standeth the length of a cable or more from Hinlopen, than you are to near to the west shore, these are the marks of the ton, at west from Worcum. From thence to the ton at Iglepoint the course is north: the marks thereof are these, there standeth a sharp steeple called Lutgeest, with a long village cross from you, when that steeple is within the innermost gap of the long village, 
Marks of the tun at Iglehooke  than you are against the ton, and that is a good cross mark, but the long-markes are, when the sharp steeple of Pingom is right against the flat steeple of Corenwaert, standing upon the water side, and Pandraghen is right against a little house which standeth northward from the village with the gap, or when the mills of Stavern stand between the town and the bulwark of Stavern, these are all good Long-markes of the ton at Igelhooke, and this ton when you sail outward, may be sailed by on the east side, and so you may come northward of the middle ground again into the Vliestreame, but not with great ships.  
From Iglehooke to the Middle ground, the course is north & south, & the right depth in the Middle ground is 7 fathom, but in the channel between west of Worcum and the Middle ground it is 4 fathom deep good ground, 
Marks of the boy at the Middleground.  and the east wall is flat and the west is shoring. The ton of the middle ground lieth upon these marks, when the two sharp steeples which stand North-east or there abouts from you (that is Arum & Pingom) are both one against the other, than you have the length of this ton, or when Bolswert is right north with a house that standeth north from Mackum, these are good Crosse-markes of the middle ground: Long-markes are these, when Kinswaert (that is the Looper) is right behind Surich church, than you are right in the channel. This Surich church standeth on the water side upon a point of land about North-east and by north from you, or when the flat steeple of Wynaldum or Wynaem which standeth north from Harlinghen, showeth between Mildum & Harlinghen, than you are right in the middle ground, and unto which side Winaldum standeth nearest, unto that shore are you nearest: Wynaldum must stand between the east end of Harlinghen and Mildum, but Mildum nearest: this is a right Longmarke. The right channel in Middlegrond is 7 fathom as aforesaid, and both the sides or grounds are shoring.  
When you are through the Middleground & will sail outward to the Vlie, you must not sail by any points of sand on the west along to Monick Slot, 
Middle plaet.  but you must not go nearer to the west shore between the Middle ground and Swanebalgh, than three fathom deep: and from Swanebalgh forward (going outward) you must not go nearer than 4 fathom, and you must be diligent to cast out your lead, specially when you come against Schieringshals, but when you come out of the Sea homewards you may sail under the west shore, as it shall hereafter be declared.  
When you come in out of the Sea, you may sail by the tun that lieth at the Middleground, for there is a flat called Middle flat, which you may sail eastward about, and so come southward of the tun to Iglehooke again into the Vliestreame but not with great ships, 
Dominicus plaet.  this Middle plaet lieth on the east shore, on the west shore also you sail by a flat, called Dominicus flat, before you come to the Middle ground, which is also called the point of the Waert, or Doode balgh, & upon it there standeth a row of beakons: northward from this Flat there is a good Rode, right over against the ton at Swanebalgh: for there you have shallow water and little streams. When you are passed the ton or boy of Middle ground, 
Marks of the tun at Swanbalgh.  then go n. n. w. to the ton at Swanebalgh. The Crosse-markes of this ton are, when Bolswaert is right over a small short house, which standeth southward of Cornwaert, than you have the length of this ton, and here you may sail by a point of sand when you go outward. This ton lieth at 3 fathom on the east wall, & on the west wall you may cast out your lead and find 4 fathom water all along to Schieringshals. When you are inward, then keep on the cast shore with a foreflood, 
Marks of the long reach.  for it would draw you into this shelf before you were aware of it. The marks to sail along by this long reach are these: you may see Mackum with a mill on the waterside, which lieth southeast from you, & southward from Mackum there is a village with a flat steeple called Idsegahuysen. Now when Pandraghen cometh between Mackum and this village, you need not fear the point of sand or Doodebaigh, but if Pandraghen be nearest to Idsegahuysen, them you are to near to the point of sand aforesaid, but if Pandragen be nearest to Mackum then you are to near the cast wall, these marks hold in this sort, as long as you can see them.  
From the ton at Swanbalgh to Schuytesandt, the course is northwest, and something more northerly: 
The ton at Schuytesand.  When Wynaldum is right against the point of Harlingen, than you have the length of the ton of Schuytesand. The Long-markes are these, Bolsworth cometh northward of the Sluys which standeth northward of Woens, and this ton lieth at six fathom on the east shore, and there it is very shoring, the right depth is 7 and 8 fathom, you may sound four or five fathom on the west shore, but the east ground is shoring.  
Fron Schuytsand to Kaeshooke the course is west-north-west, & east southeast, and sometimes northwest and by west, as the wind and stream is: for in this long reach there goeth but half tides along the deep, & then they go about with the Moon, and fall almost cross the deep, 
Marks of the tun at Kaespoint.  or channel. The marks of the ton at Kaeshooke are, when Franicker steeple cometh between the mill and the town of Harlingen, and cometh also in the haven of Harlingen, or upon the masts of the ships which lie in the haven. This ton lieth on the east wall at 5 fathom, you must shun the innermost point of Kaeshooke a little, both coming in and going out, the right channel is here abouts 9 or 10 fathom deep.  

Old Vlie  A little westward from Kaeshooke lieth the old Fly, & stretcheth itself towards the ton at the Nesse in the Tessel stream. The forestood is very hard at the entering into this channel, and you may sail from the Sea inward at 4 fathom, 
Marks of the old Vlie.  it reacheth southward in: when Franicker steeple is right north from the steeple of Harlingen than you are right against the old Fly, which lieth on the west shore, and is shoring all along to the Flie.  

Wolfshook  From Kaeshooke to Wolfshooke the course is northwest by north, the ton lieth at 4 fathom on the east side, between them there lieth a new shoring dry point, whereat there lieth a ton. To sail from Kaeshooke to Wolfshooke first go northwest and by north, or northwest to get above this ton, and after that northwest, or north-and-by-west, to the ton at Wolfshooke, here it is best that you keep towards the west wall to shun the shallow point aforesaid. 
The Inschot.  When you are passed the ton at Wolfshooke, take heed of the Inschot or creak, for there the fore flood runneth in very strongly: it is wide & broad, and it is there as deep as in the channel, when you come in from the Sea, you may sail by it at 9 or 10 fathom, it goeth in northward from the ton at Wolfshooke: you must also beware of the fore-ebbe, for that cometh very strongly out of the Inschot upon Schiernigshals, whereby many a ship is cast away.  
From the ton at Wolfshooke to the ton of Schieringshals' sail north-north-west, and north-west-by-north, as the wind and stream serveth: for as I said before, the fore-ebbe falleth out of the Inschot very strongly upon Schieringshals, and the fore flood very strongly from Schieringshals into the Inschot. 
Scheringshals.  Schiringshals is a point of sand which shooteth out from the west wall, which, as you come in from the Sea, you may sail by at 6 fathom, commonly there lieth a white ton at it: when you sail in this reach, look well to the stream, and to your course that you be not driven into the Inschot nor upon Schieringshals, the right deep between Wolfshooke & Schieringshals is 10 11 & 12 fathom.  
From Schieringshals to Longhesand 
Longsand.  the course is northwest, & northwest & by north. Between Schieringshals and Longesand is the best Road in all the Fly stream, 
freeze or Pompers Rode.  you go by the west wall at low water, and there goeth a little stream, the ton lieth at 5 fathom, the right depth is 6 and 7 fathom. When you come in from Sea, you may sail by Longesand on the east side, and by Schieringshals on the west side, & if you keep at 7 fathom, you can take no hurt on neither side.  
From Longhesand to the Monicke slote the course is north-north-west. Upon Vlieland there was wont to stand two Capes that were one against the other, & men were wont to sail that Reach up and down to Wolfshooke, but now they are broken off. The marks of the ton at Longsand are these: 
The ton at Longsand.  when the high beacon of lettingh cometh over the Island of Grind, than you have the length of the ton at Longsand.  
When you come from Schieringshals & will go to Monickslote, than you see the mills upon the Vlieland stand in the middle right against a low flat down, which showeth some what black, for it is full of heath. 
Marks to sail from Schieringshals to Monickeslote.  Keep the mills standing right against it, and sail upon it, and so you can not fail: but if the mills stand on the east side of the downs, than you are to near the west wall, and when the mills are nearer the west end of the downs, than you are to near the east wall: this is a right Longmarke from Schieringshals to Monickslote.   

II. How you must sail from Enchuysen to the Vlie and to the Tessel.  
FRom the east end of Marcken to the south channel of Enchuysen, the course is north and by east five leagues. The channel reacheth about south and north. 
The south channel of Enchuysen  When you will enter into the south channel, than set the mast with the ton right upon the west blockehouse or steeple, and sail right upon it, till Greatbrooke steeple be right against the mill, which is in the middle between Brookhaven and the Streecke, and then you are right against the uttermost ton: then sail inward along by the ton, to the south Dyke, and from thence along before the town. In the south channel you have 8 foot water, in the Road before Enchuysen it is 3 fathom and a foot deep at low water. When Broocke is right against Broockehaven, than you are right against the north end of the Trindel, which is a sand of 3 foot deep low water, which runneth along from the Dyke towards Leeck, and when Wynesser Wierdyke is without the point of Leeck, than you are at the south end of the Trindel. You may pass between the Dyke & this sand at 5 foot low water.  

The north channel of Enchuysen.  But to sail out through the north channel, then go from the Road to the beacon north and by east; and than you shall find the innermost ton, which lieth upon these marks. Groatebrooke cometh upon the land house, which standeth in the boucht of the Dyke, and the tower of the town house is within a hand-staffe of the east end of a great house, which standeth in the Breestreet. From the innermost ton to the middlemost the course is north, and north and by west: & lieth upon these Marks: the same landhouse is right against Boekarspel, and the tower of the town house is right upon the gavell end of the great house, so that you may see just between them. From the middle ton to the north ton in Hillegat, the course is north and north and by west, 
Marks of the uttermost tun in the north channel.  and lieth upon these marks: Greatbrooke is right against a low land house which standeth north from the high Hayhill which standeth upon the Dyke, and Enchuysen steeple is right cast from a high house which is in the middle of the town, in such sort as you may see just between them, and also when the steeple is right against a Cape which is placed there, that is the best mark, and by that you find the uttermost ton, when you come from the Sea, and seek to go in at the north channel.  
To sail from the uttermost ton from Hillegat to the ton upon Creupel, 
Marks of the ton at Creupel  your course is north and by west, and north-north-west, according to the wind and the stream, which lieth upon these marks: Brooke is right against Hempskirke, two sharp stteeples, as before in the description of the Vlie stream is declared: and if you desire then to sail to the Vlie, then sail from thence to Kreil, as in the aforesaid description I have showed. In like sort if coming from Amsterdam through the fall of Urck, you desire to go to the Tessel, and are at the ton at Creupel, as aforesaid, then take the course hereafter set down.  
The ton at Creupell lieth at 3 fathom water upon the east end of Creupel sand, and from thence to the beacon upon Creupel sand, 
The beacon upon Creupel-sand.  the course is northwest, and northwest and by west; when the blunt steeple of Lutkebrooke is right against the sharp steeple of Hempskirke, than you have the length of the beacon upon Creupel.  
From the beacon upon Creupel sand, to the south ton, upon Wieringer flats, the course is west-north-west, and northwest and by west, as the wind and stream serveth. The marks are: 
South tun upon Wieringhen flats.  Grootebrooke steeple is between two Hayehilles which stand east from the mills upon the north Dyke, that is a Longmarke. When the square steeple of Twisch westward of Memelick is right over Almerdorp, which in times past had a blunt steeple, but now it is fallen down, and therefore not so well to be known, that was a right Crosse-marke. But upon Wieringhen there is a Cape set, bring that right upon the blunt steeple on the east end of Wieringh●n, & sail towards it, & you can not miss the south ton: and when Westlander steeple is over Cleverstee, (which is three or four houses standing upon the west end of Wieringhen) than you may see the south ton upon Wieringhen Flattes. 
How to shun the Gammels.  If you will sail over Wieringhen flats when you sail outward, then note, that if Twisch first cometh upon Almerdorp, than you are to near the Gammels, but if Cleverstee first come upon Westlander church than you are to near Breesand. These are sure marks when there are no tons, to sail over the flats.  
But if you will Anchor before Wieringhen flats, then go no nearer the flats, then when Twisch is between Almerdorp and Opperdoes, for when Twisch is right against Almerdorp, than you have the length of the south ton, as I said before.  
To sail from the south ton to Memelick keep the five water mills the length of a ship on the east or south side of Memelick, and so sail right upon Memelick, and sailing so, 
To sail to Memelick.  you shall not find less than 11 or 12 foot water at half flood.  
From the south ton upon Wieringen flats to the second ton, the course is northwest, and northwest and by north: but if you will sail in the deepest water, then from the south ton you must first sail northwest so long, till that Ipelshover church is right against the water mill, called the Bolmill, and then go northwest and by north to the second ton. The second ton lieth upon the south end of the flat called Repel: the west channel thereof is full 2 fathom deep at low water, and hardly three fathom at high water. The marks of the second ton are these: when the Cornemill of Wieringhen is right against the open of the Oever. Right west from the middle ton upon Wieringhen flats, there lieth a hard sand or flat, called the Sow, 
The Sow.  which reacheth to the north ton, and upon it there always standeth a beacon. That flat at the east end is very shoring. When you sail outward you must leave it on the baghborde, and you must be very circumspect to look unto it, for there it is not broad. 
Marks of the North ton.  When you have passed by the middle ton, then go north-north-west to the north ton upon the Flat, and when you are right against it, than Oostlander church and the cornemill are both right against the little chapel which standeth upon the Oever, which is a chapel covered with red tiles: and right against it standeth the beacon upon the Sow. 
To shun the Sow.  Upon Wieringhen by the Oever there standeth a watch-house, when you leave the middle ton, keep it standing so, that you may see between the Oever and the watch-house, & then you shall not come near the Sow, that is a good Longmarke for such as know it. When you come to the north ton, then hold one course, until Oostlander church be north from Wierdyke of the Oever, because of jaepvaers Flat, 
japevaers' flat.  which you must leave on starboard, then go north and north & by west to the beacon upon Vlieter, 
The Vlieter.  which standeth upon the point of the Waert, where you may sail through the Wieringher shelf. But keep the north ton right against Memelick steeple, as long as you can see it, and go north and by west, until you see the ton or the beacon upon the Nesse on the west wall, for on it there standeth a beacon, 
The Nes.  or else there lieth a white ton, but on the east side a black ton before the Balck, which in sailing up a man may sail by at 4 or 5 fathom.  
If you will seek the best Road before Wieringhen Flattes, for ships that must be lightened, then set Westlander church right against the broken church of Strew, and there you shall find the best Rode.  
When you are at the beacon or white ton upon the Nesse, then go by degrees westerly, that is, north-north-west, northwest and by west, & northwest to the beacon upon Voglesand, 
The Beacon upon Vogelsand.  the west wall may be sounded with the lead at 5 6 & 7 fathom. The marks of this reach are these, when the mill of Oostereynd (which is a buert house upon tessel) is right upon the cape which is made upon the dyke, 
Marks of Vogelsand to Copevaerders Rode.  than you are in the middle of the channel, but when the mills are any thing southward or westward from the cape, than you are by the south wall, which is steep, so that with lavering you can come no nearer unto it than 8 or 9 fathom, the right deep is 10, 11, and 12 fathom, but when you are upon Vogelsand, the south wall is flatter, but the east wall is altogether shoring, and as soon as you perceive that it beginneth to dry, them you must wind, otherwise you would presently be upon the wall.  
When you are about Vogelsand, then keep the cape and the mil one against the other, so long until the horn is right against certain houses, which stand a little inward to the land northward from Sconce, called South-haffell, let that stand so until you be at Copevaerders Road, 
Copevaerders Rode.  and there anchor where you think good, before Oosterende it is best for small ships, for there it is flat water, and there runneth the least stream, but most ships anchor before Geest.   

III. How a man shall sail from Coopevaerders Road to Huysduynen, and out of the mouth of the tessel.  
IF you will sail from Copevaerders Road to Huysduynen, then go south-west to the new deep, or go along by Tessel side at 9 and 10 fathom, till you come to the Helder, and if you will sail out at the Spaniards got, then go west close by the shore, and sometimes somewhat northerly, until the capes stand right against Huysduynen, then put to the north shore at 5 or 6 fathom water, and so go forward, 
Schelvis downs.  but when the Wambus is right against a high white down, which Pilots call Schelvis downs, there it is flatter water, and there you may go nearer to the north shore, at 3 or 4 fathom water, and as near as you will yourself, till you come out, for there the north points are altogether flat, but you must not go near all the south wall of the Spaniards got with your lead, for it is very shoring.  
If you will sail out of the Slenck, 
To sail out at the Slenck.  then go out by Huysduynen, as I said before, until the capes be one against the other, then go nortdwest till the Wambus, or Sint john's Tower upon Tessel are within a bow length of the cape, but not right against each other. As you sail in this manner from Huysduynen, be very wary (specially with afore ebb) of the south shore, for that is very shallow, and the fore-ebbe falleth very strong southsouthwest, cross over the Grounds, and falleth not out at the Spaniards got before the Moon is about east north east. When the lop or inner cape of Huysduynen is even with the south end of the downs, which is called Wierendyke, than you are close by the south shore, which are good marks for those that know them. When the cape upon tessel, 
Marks of the innermost tun.  and the Wambus are about a bow length one near an other, there you shall have the innermost ton of the Slenck, them go west-south-west, and sometimes somewhat more southerly, as south-west and by west, than south-west (but yet do as you find the wind and stream to serve your turn) and leave all those four tons on baghbords, for they lie all near to the east shore, you may easily see them one after the other, the walls on either side are indifferent flat, and in the Slenck you shall find three fathom & an half or four fathom water at half flood. 
Marks of the uttermost tun.  When the mills upon Huysduynen are right against the old Kerckbuert, that is a few houses standing above north from Kickeduyn then you are right against the uttermost ton and out of the channel, than the Wambus is a bow length westward from the cape of Tessel.  

To sail out of the Landdeepe.  But if you will sail out at the Land deep channel, then run along by the foot strand of Huysduynen about a bow shoot from it, and then you shall not miss the innermost ton, which lieth upon the threshold on the west wall at three fathom, and there it is not very broad: Upon the tessel on the New land there standeth a house with red tiles upon it, when the church of Burgh on tessel is a ships length near to that red tiled house, than you hold a good course, but if the Burgher church, and that red tiled house aforesaid, are right over against each other, 
Marks of the deepest water.  than you should sail upon the west shore. Upon old jaeps bollen, when you are right against the entry, than the ground altars very dry, for at one cast of the lead you shall have 15 or 16 fathom, at the second seven or eight fathom, and at the third three fathom, and when the wind bloweth somewhat, you may see the waves break on both sides, which you may pass through between them, when you are over the entry, which continueth about three or four casts of the lead, than you have three & an half, four, & four & an half fathom deep. Upon Huysduynen there standeth a ton upon a mast, let that be somewhat westerly from the inner cape, which then standeth about north from you, hold it so, and then go till you be clean out of the channel, and let the ton lie to Seaward from you. When the mill upon Huysduynen is right against the high Kickedownes, than you are by the third and uttermost ton, and free of all shallows, & then direct your course which way you will.   

FOUR How you shall sail out of the Vlie.  

A ton upon the Flat.  NOrth from the Monick-sloot there lieth a Flat, and thereon there lieth a ton, from the Sloot to the ton it is north-north-east. The ton lieth at three fathom, and when you sail out you must leave it on the starboard, in the channel between the Sloot and the ton it is 10, 9, and 8 fathom deep, and against that ton five fathom, from this ton upon the Flat to the southerlyest white ton at Speckhooke 
Spechook  the course is North-east, and it lieth on the northwall, at twelve foot deep at low water, but from the ton upon the Flat to the black ton at Speckhooke, the course is eastnortheast, but yet as the wind and stream serveth, for with an ebb you must sail east, to get above the white ton. The black ton at Speckhook lieth at 3 fathom low water, or at three fathom and an half, half stood. The channel between them both is right against the ton upon the Flat three fathom, but further forward it is drier, so that against the white ton it is not deeper than thirteen or fourteen foot deep at low water. But when you are passed the white ton, than again it is deeper, as three, four, and against the black ton at Speckhooke five fathom at low water, the south wall between both is flat, so that you may cast out the lead and sound it, the white ton aforesaid lieth upon the south end of Peter's sand, & when you sail out you must leave it on baghborde, and the black ton on starboard, a man with a ship that is something flat bottomed, may sail a little northward from the white ton over the aforesaid point of Peter's sand, with twelve foot deep low water, and a little northerly from the northerlyest white ton of Speckhooke enter again into the channel.  
From the black ton at Speckhooke, to the ton at Hobbesand, 
Hobbesand.  the course is north-north-west, the right depth there between them both is five, six, seven, eight & nine fathom. The ton lieth upon the point of Hobbesand at five fathom deep low water.  
Right over against the ton at Hobbesand lieth the most northerly white ton at Speckhooke, 
The north white tun at Speckhooke.  you must leave the ton at Hobbesand on starboard, and the white ton on baghborde, on the west shore it is very shoring, and right north from the aforesaid white ton on the west shore there lieth a Flat, which at low water is clean dry. From the tun at Hobbesand to the ton at Bos, it is north-north-west, ●nd that lieth at five fathom at the end of the Bos. 
The Bos.  Th●●●ght depth between Hobbesand & the Bos, is ten, nine, & eight fathom. The west wall is very shoring, and you must not go nearer than six fathom to the east wall, specially with a foreflood, for it would easily carry you behind the Bos. From the ton at the Bos, to the ton at Feyhook 
Feyhook.  the course is n. n. w. That is a white run, and it lieth at the east end upon the point of Peter's sand, at 3 fathom low water, when you will go out at the north channel, than you leave it on baghborde, and then you must go southward. But to go out at Bomekens channel, you must leave it on starboard, and against it Bomekens channel is northwest, it is there 7 or 8 fathom deep low water, and on the west wall lieth Peter's sand, also a dry flat, north from the said dry flat. 
Slenck through Bomekens ground.  Right west-north-west from the ton of Fayhooke there runneth a Slencke through Bomekens ground, which at low water is about 12 foot deep, but it is not marked or showed. The west end of Bomekens channel is very shoring, to the end thereof, but the east shore is flat, which may be sounded with the line northward from Feyehooke at 3 fathom and an half, without any hurt. Between Feyhooke and the uttermost ton 
The uttermost tun.  in Bomekens channel, there lieth two tons more. From Feyhooke to the first of them it is north-north-west, & that lieth on the east shore, at 5 fathom, from thence to the other, or almost to the uttermost, the course is north and by west, and that lieth in the middle of the channel at 4 fathom and an half low water, from thence to the uttermost ton, it is north-north east, the uttermost ton lieth in the Sea, at 10 fathom, right without the point of the west land or of Bomekens ground, between the uttermost ton and the second ton at the entry of the channel it is 3 fathom low water. When you are at the uttermost ton, than the steeple of Brandaris, & the west cape of the Schellingh are one against the other, and stand about southeast, and some what more easterly from you, when you sail out at that channel, & that you come to the first ton at Feyhooke, you may go out along by the cast land, at 3 and 3 fathom and an half, most part north-north-east, & leave the two uttermost tons a good way from you on baghbord, for the east shore is altogether flat and good to be sounded with the lead.  
TO sail out at the north channel, 
To sail out at the north channel.  sail just south to the ton at Feyhooke, n. and by east, to the old Legger, which lieth on the south wall at 3 fathom, & the water is 4 fathom deep. Between the ton at Feyhooke & the Bos it is very narrow, and the Bos is there very shoring, so that you cannot sound it, all along to the old Legger, where it is flatter, & so it may there be founded, Petersand, or the north wall also is very shoring. From the old Legger to the new Legger the course is North-east and by east, & east north east, that lieth also on the south shore at two fathom & an half, the right depth against it is 3 fathom and an half, when you come to the new Legger, 
A Slenck through Petersand.  than Brandaris steeple lieth southsoutheast from you. From the new Legger there runneth a Slencke cross through Petersand, north-north-west into the Sea, upon the entry at low water you have 12 foot deep. There standeth a cape upon the Schellingh a little eastward by the cape of Bomekens channel, which is right against Brandaris, when you come to the new legger, and then it standeth with the steeple southsoutheast from you, you must hold the cape so right against Brandaris, and then go n.n.w. into the Sea, It is a fair Slenck for flat bottomed ships, the west wall is shoring, but the east side is flat, so that you may sound it well. But to go out of the north channel from the new Legger, than the course from the new Legger to the second ton from without inward is eastnortheast, and that lieth at the east end of the Bos, at 14 foot deep low water, & in the channel right against it it is no deeper. From thence to the uttermost ton, it is e. n. e. which lieth in the Sea, right without the east point of Petersand, at 3 fathom: when you are at it, than the most northerly cape at the Schellingh is right against Brandaris, and then they are s. s. w. from you, & then you are out of the channel.  
BUt to go out of the Landdeepe from the Schellingh with ships that go not very deep, 
To sail out of the Land-deep of the Schelligh.  then go between the ton at Hobbesand and the ton at Bos, North-east to the northwest point of the Schellingh, then sail over the point of jelmers' Flat to 4 fathom, and being over it is again 6 and 5 fathom deep, then sail close along by the strand of the Schellingh, 
jelmers' Flat.  for so you cannot do amiss, if you sail not bluntly upon the shore. The north shore or the Bos is fine and flat, which you may sound all along at 3 fathom or 2 fathom and an half, when you come to the end of the Bos, that is right against the second ton of the north channel, there it is flat, and there is no more but 10 foot deep, but sail along out by the fore strand, till you get to deeper water, and from thence set your course whether you will.  
IF you will sail out at Stortmelck, 
To sail out of Stortemelck.  when you are about Boots-horne, go along by the footstrand of the Vlieland n. and by w. for it is very fair, or from the ton upon the plaet, then go n. n. w. to the innermost ton of Stortemelck, which lieth at 3 fathom low water, and it is therein the channel between the plaet and the innermost ton at Stortmelck 5 6 & 7 fathom deep. When you come to the innermost ton then run north about it, and leave it on baghborde, for on the south side there lieth the foot of the North-east point of the Vlieland unto that ton: on the north fide of that ton in the channel it is 4 fathom deep. When you are passed the innermost ton, then go west and by south to the second ton, which lieth on the north wall at 5 fathom. The right depth there on the south side is 7 fathom. From thence outward you may sail by the strand, for it is very fair, you may runnne along by it at 3 fathom & an half from the second ton to the third, that is the uttermost but one, the course is west and by south, that lieth at 4 fathom on the north wall, 
A ton at Droghe-drie.  the depth against it is four fathom, this ton is called the ton at the Droghe Dry. From thence to the uttermost ton the course is west, and west & by north, that lieth in the Sea at 5 fathom, nearest to the north wall, but you may there go somewhat northerly, for the north wall is reasonable flat, so that you may sound it with your lead at 4 or 5 fathom. Between the uttermost ton and the ton upon the Droghe Dry, it is not deeper at the entry than 16 foot low water: when you are at the uttermost ton, 
Uttermost ton.  than the cape and the mil upon Vlieland are one right against the other, & are then about east-south-east, & southeast from you.  
NOTE. All the depths here set down, are understood and described to be so at low water: at half flood it is all over about half a fathom deeper, for there it floweth a fathom up & down with a daily tide,   
Hear followeth the Card N. 2.   

CHAPTER II. THE DESCRIPTION OF the Sea-coasts and Havens of Holland, Sealand, and Flanders, from the tessel to Pas of Calis, and through it.  

I. To know the tessel and Huysduynen, and how you shall reach and enter into the Spaniards got, and other Channels of the tessel.  

tessel.  THe Island of tessel lieth north from Huysduynen and hat● four churches: at the west end thereof th' e is a high sharp steeple called Wambus, somewhat more inward there is a sharp steeple called Hoorn, and more north from those churches there is a great flat steeple called Burch, and further eastward there standeth a church without a steeple called the Oogh or the Koogh, which is covered with blue slate, otherwise it is a long plain Island, the north points run from the west end a good way into the Sea, on the south side thereof the Spaniards got or channel goeth in, as hereafter it is showed.  
Eyerland 
Eyerland.  is eastward close by the Tessel, & is fast to the Tessel, but with a high flood it is cut off by the Sea, (which then runneth over between them both) and made an Island, it showeth outwardly like a low slight small Island with small hills, upon it there is but two houses.  
Thus the Island of Tessel showeth itself when it lieth about east and by north from you.  
Wambus.   view of Texel 
Huysduynen 
Huysduynen.  is a short point of Land with some white downs, whereof the greatest is called Kyckeduyn, or Kyckersduyn. Westward they are very low & seem nothing, so that at the last it is nothing but a plain sand on the east end, called the Helder, there is also some downs: but between the Helder and the high downs it is for a long way nothing else but a bare strand, at the east end there stand two capes, and not many years since there was a steeple, but that is gone, and the place where it stood so far in the Sea, that now the ships sail over it. There is nothing else specially to be marked upon it: the Tessel lieth north from it, as is said before.  
Thus the land of Huysduynen showeth itself when it lieth about southeast from you.   view of Huisduinen 
The channels of Holland Sealand & Freesland alter & change often times, as it is well known to all Seafaring men, yet some less than others. The Spaniards got continueth in a manner all at one stay, and in long time hath altered but very little, only that every year it reacheth out further northerly. But the other channels as the Slencke and the Land deep alter oftentimes, and sometimes very much in a little time, & therefore they are not to be described in such sort, as that they may serve for ever, I will here show the situation which they now have, and thereby certify the Reader that all those channels are to be used with Pilots.  
Pascaarte van Hollandt Zeelandt end Vlaenderen, van Texel of tot deur de Hoofden, toonende de rechte gheleghentheyt aller gaten, Zanden, bancken, diepten end ondiepten aldaer gheleghen, nieulÿcx beschreven door Willem jansz.  
Cart marine de Holland Zeelande et Flanders, de Texel iusques a● Pas de Cal●●, manstrant la uraye sunation des Ports de mer, bancq● de sable, profonditez, et seicheresses sitiez au long des costs desdictes Contreez, novellement descript per Guillai●me jansi   map of the coasts of Holland, Zeeland and Flanders 
To sail in at the Land deep when you come from the south, 
To sail in at the Land deep.  then keep from the wall five fathom, and so sail along by the land, but go no nearer to the wall than 4 fathom & an half, for a little south from the Kyckersdowne, there cometh a piece or foot of a Sand from the wall & reacheth inward to the Sea, which you may sail behind at 4 fathom. The Depth that is after this point the Pilots call Ariaen Bergers Kill: but if you come out of the Sea with a strong wind, then set and keep the highest of the Kyckersdowns each-where from you, & sail upon it toward the wall, and coming against the wall you shall come into the view of the uttermost ton, 
Marks of the first ton.  and so you shall not sail by Ariaen Bergers Kill: the uttermost ton lieth at five fathom, on the west wall, leave it lying Seaward from you, and go right North-east all along the wall, and if it be any thing rough, then may you see the waves break on both sides. Let the second ton also lie on baghborde, the third ton also lieth on the west wall upon the entry of the Land deep, at the entry it is not very wide, but at low water it is sixteen foot deep. 
Marks of the west wall.  Upon the Tessel on the new land there standeth a red tiled house, now when you come against the entry, and that the Burgh church on tessel standeth about a ships length eastward from that red tiled house, than you are in a good way: but if the Burgh church and the red tiled house stand one right against another, than you are too near the west wall. So soon as you are over the entry than you have deep water, that is seven, eight, and ten fathom, and presently after 15 and 16 fathom, then go forward along by the footstrand of Huysduynen inward.  
The south Slenck, as it was used the years forepast, 
To sail in at the Slenck.  was Anno 1607 wholly spoiled, but to sail in at the Slenck, as it lieth at this time, set the cape upon tessel a bow length southward or eastward from Wambus, and let them stand so, and sail right upon them, and so you go a little westward from the first ton right into the Slenck, when the mill upon Huysduynen are right against the old Kerckbuert (which are certain houses which stand alone) than you are against the outmost ton, 
Marks of the first ton.  which lieth at 4 fathom half flood. In the Slenck there are four tons, you may easily see from the one to the other, sail along by the tons and leave them on starboard, for they lie all on the eastwall, you shall find no less water in the Slenck then three fathom and an half, at half ●lood. The Land on either side is reasonable flat, so that you may easily found them with a lead. From the first ton to the second it reacheth North-east in, after that North-east and by east, and somewhat easterlyer, and lastly eastnortheast, but look well to your stream, and direct your course according to the wind. When you are at the innermost ton, than the cape upon tessel is a bow length westward from the Wambus, then when you find deeper water go right to Huysduynen, but beware of the south wall for it is very shoring, when you come to Huysduynen, then go in along by the foot strand.  
By Tessel strand, there was a deep also wont to run in, but now it is gone, 
The Landdeepe of tessel.  for now there runneth a Slenck or Kill through the north points, where at a low water it is about 2 fathom water, but it is not well to be used, but by small ships, and by such as are very well acquainted therewith. To sail into it take the tessel side at 4 fathom, and so run along by it till you come to the north point, and then you shall perceive that Slenck by the waves, for they are on both sides of it, as the wind bloweth somewhat hard, there you must run in between them both, at the dryest you shall find two fathom and an half, at half flood, when you are over the shallow and find deep water again, than you may run along by the north points, at 3 or 4 fathom deep, or right towards Huysden. This channel as I said before, is not to be used but by such as are well skilled and acquainted therewith.  
If you will go from Huysden to Coopvaerders channel or Road, 
To sail from Huysden to Copevaerders deep or Rode.  then sail from the New channel or deep northeastward and so you shall not sail by the land on neither side, the land on either side is very shoring, yet you may found the Tessel side with your lead at 8 and 9 fathom without any hurt: but the Wieringer side is so steep that at one cast of the lead you shall have 12 and 13 fathom water, and at the second cast you shall be on ground.  
If you desire to go inward from Huysden, then from the New deep or channel, sail North-east or rather more easterly, 
To sail from Huysden to the Vlack.  as wind and stream serveth, or (as I said before) along by tessel at 8 or 9 fathom, so long until that Horn standeth north from the row of houses which stand north from the Sconce a little within the Land, called South-haffel, keep the marks standing so, and so sail toward Vogelsand, so long till the cape on tessel and the mill of Oosterender are one right against the other. then leave the aforesaid marks of Horn, but enter into that reach with a large wind no nearer to the southside then at 7 fathom water, for westward by Vogelsand there reacheth a point of sand outward, which you may sail by at five or six fathom water, but with an east wind, when you must laveere, or wind and turn, and that you go cross to and fro, than you may go within five fathom deep of the wall. When the cape and Oosterender mills are one against the other, keep them so as long as you can see them, and then the corn mill and the water mill upon Wieringhen will be one against the other: when you keep the aforesaid mills upon Tessel a bow length southward from the cape, then run along by the south side, but go no nearer unto it, (when you are within the beacon upon Vogelsand) then at 8 fathom, for there it is very steep, and when the Oosterender mills are a hand staff length northward from the cape, than you are on the north side, which is altogether shoring and steep, and as soon as it beginneth to dry, you must turn as you laveere, otherwise you would presently be upon the Land.  
Without the Land of the Tessel, 
What Moon maketh a full Sea before the Tessel.  an east & west Moon make a high water, and upon the Land or the shore an east-south-east, & a west-north-west Moon, but in Copevaerders Road a southeast and by east, or a northwest & by west Moon. The stream runneth before the mouths of the channels about with the Son, so that when a ship is at Anchor without the channel, and is out of danger of the waves it shall have but a little still water.  
The foreflood and the after ebb fall both together into the Sea to the Keysers' Flat north or somewhat more westerly. 
The falling of the streams  To the contrary again the after flood and the fore ebb, fall inward to the Land south, and somewhat more easterly, & to conclude the streams for the most part run cross the channels, the flood for half the tide falleth North-east over the points, and then it runneth into the Spaniards got, but without the Land the flood runneth North-east and the ebb south-west, therefore look well to your streams for it importeth you much.   

II. The description of the West coast of Holland between Huysden and the Maze, showing what marks are thereon, & how you shall know them.  
HUysduynen or the Tessel and the Maze, lie one from the other southsouthwest, and some what southerlyer, & north-north-east, and somewhat northerlyer about 24 leagues distant. Fron Huysduynen to Petten it is 4 leagues south and by west: Petten 
Petten.  hath a small church with a little steeple, & about Petten you may see two other sharp little steeples in the North land, full south there abouts lieth the Houtbosch. A league south from Petten lieth Camper Down, 
Camper-downe.  which is the best land there abouts to be known: the north end is a slope steep white bank, which runneth stoup downwards, but the south part thereof is grey, and rough, overgrown with heath, on the south side thereof there are many rugged knots or downs, and sometimes there runneth a white blenck under it, whereby it is very easily to be known. From Petten to Egmont upon the Sea, 
Egmont upon the Sea.  it is 3 leagues. Egmont upon the Sea, also is very well to be known, for it hath a thick flat steeple which standeth like a sail in the downs, and a little to the south from it there you may see Egmont within, 
Egmont within.  which hath two high towers upon the Abbay, which stand one right against the other, whereof the one is sharp, the other, to wete that which is most north is flat: for that one of the speeres thereof fell down not long since. On the north side of the Abbay there is yet a tower of the church, which yet standeth upon the old wall, but it is not so high as that upon the Abbay: So that upon the whole coast of Holland, there is no place so well to be known as this. From Egmont upon the Sea to Wyck upon the Sea 
Wyck upon the Sea.  it is three leagues, which also hath a flat steeple, when you are over against Wyck upon the Sea, than north from thence you may see the steeple of Beverwyck, which is a great high speere steeple, & besides this between Egmont & Wyke upon the Sea you may see Castricom and other speere steeples. From Wyke upon the Sea to Sandvoort it is 3 leagues, Sandvoort 
Sandvoort  hath a speere steeple with a high beacon, which standeth right south from it in the black downs, which showeth like a steeple. North from Sandvoort there lieth a high white down, where you may see Haerlem 
Haerlem.  over it, which is a high four square cross church, with a high spear steeple, which standeth in the middle of the church, and on the north side also an other long small spear steeple, called Backenesser steeple. Hear abouts the Coast of Holland hath a great creak or Inwyke. From Sandvoort to Nortwick 
Nordwyc.  upon the Sea it is 3 leagues, it is a flat steeple, and right against it there standeth a beacon: north from Northwick upon the Sea, you may see Northwick within the land, which is a flat steeple, whereon there is a little cape not very high and in the middle of the church there is a small tower. Fron Northwick to Catwick 
Catwick.  upon the Sea, it is a league, which also hath a flat steeple, which in times past had a spear, right south from it there standeth a high beacon, which you may easily see before the steeple, there about also you see within the land (when you are not far from the land) Catwick upon the Rhine, Rinsburgh, & Valckenburgh, which are all spear steeples. From Catwick to Scheveling 
Scheveling.  are 3 leagues, the quire of Scheveling church is higher than the body of the church, as the Haeghes church is full south from that church there standeth also a beacon: about half a league within the land you may see the Haegh church, & it is very well to be known. From Scheveling to the Heyde it is two leagues, and from thence to Gravesand 
Gravesand.  or the north point of the Maze, it is a league, the Heyde is a village without a steeple, but a little within the downs there standeth a flat steeple called Monster: But Gravesant is an high spear steeple, which is very well to be known, & standeth on the north point of the Maze. The Briel 
The Briel.  is a flat steeple, and that standeth upon the south point of the Maze, and this whole coast of Holland, from Huysduynen to the Maze, is altogether a fair strand, you may go as near unto it as you will, at four or five fathom water or thereabouts.  

Thus the coasts of Holland lieth and showeth, between Huysduynen and Wyck upon the Sea, when you sail along by it about two leagues from the land.  
Egmont within.  
Beverwyck.  
Tooghe.  
Petten.  
Camperduyn.  
Egmont on the Sea.  
Wyck of Sea   view of Holland  

Thus appeareth the coast of Holland between Wyck upon the Sea and the Maze, as one saileth along by it about a league and an half from the land.  
Haerlem.  
The Haegh.  
Monster.  
Sandvoort  
Noortwyck.  
Catwyck.  
Scheveling.  
Gravesand.   view of Holland   

III. How to know the land about the Maze, and how you must sail into the Maze, as the expert and skilful Pilot of the Briel jacob Bouwenson gave me instruction at large in November 1607.  
ON the north side of the Maze lieth Gravesand, which hath a high speere steeple, which is called our Lady steeple, which is the best to be known of all others in the Maze, and a little eastward from it there standeth a flat steeple called Monster, on the south side of the Maze, upon the land of Vooren you shall see a great flat steeple which is within the Briel. Westward from the Briel standeth Eastvooren, which is a flattish steeple, with a small speere upon it, like to the Haeghs steeple.  
Thus appeareth the land of Vooren, as you are about a league without the Maze  
Briel.  
Eastvooren.   view of Voorne 

To sail into the Maze.  If you will sail into the Maze, then sail till you bring both the capes which stand upon the land of the Briel, one right against the other, and then they will be about east and by south, and east-south-east from you, and sail so upon them and you shall find the uttermost ton, which lieth at four fathom & an half at low water, than the Haegh steeple is very near right against Monster, which is a flat steeple which standeth a little inward to the land from the Hay. From the first ton to the second, the course is east-south-east, and so forward along to the fift ton, so that from the first ton to the fift you sail along by the marks of the cape, but than you must leave them. The second ton lieth at three fathom and an half water, the third at the rising of the threshold, at three fathom, the fourth at the dryest of the entry, at two fathom, but the fift ton again lieth at three fathom, and being at it, you are passed the shallowest: all the tons in the Maze lie on the north side of the haven, and are so near one unto the other, that a man may easily see from the one to the other, you must sail between the tons and the land, three or four ships length southward from the ton it is the deepest water. From the fift to the sixth ton, & so forward to the ninth or last ton, the course is east, the sixth ton lieth also upon the north side, at two fathom & an half, but the right depth between the sixth ton and the land is about 5 fathom, & the nearer to the wall the deeper, when you are passed by the ninth or last ton (which lieth right against the Nesse) then turn towards the Mayland of the Briel, where you shall see certain boys and some small tons, you must sail through between them, and so along forward by the land, to the head, where you may cast anchor, when you pass between the boys and the tons, there you shall find ten foot water at the lowest, but there it is very narrow, so that you can not laver or wind there. Therefore if it chance that as you enter into the Maze you have a sharp wind, then mark that when you come to the seventh ton, Eastvooren being three or four ships length westward from the uttermost cape, & about south-west from you, that you keep those marks standing so, and go on North-east, and so you shall go over a Flat of nine foot water, which is wide and broad, when you are passed it, you shall have three fathom water again, but as soon as you perceive that it beginneth to be deep water again, than you must presently sail southeast, towards the land of the Briel without danger, and when you are at the head there you may cast anchor, there you have five, six, and seven fathom water. If you will go farther up there you may have a Pilot, and sail up the Maze where you desire to be.  

To sail fran northward into the Maze.  If you come out of the north, and will enter into the Maze, then sail along by the land of Holland at three fathom water, and go along in that sort within the mouth or entry of the Maze so long until you have the capes upon the land of the Briel one right against the other, and so you shall fall upon the third ton in the Maze, and from thence you may sail forward into the Maze, as I said before.  
By the footstrand of Gravesand there is now again a fair passage broken, called the Landdeepe, or Northgat or channel, in the year 1608 marked at the charge of the Seatownes lying upon the Maze, and now is signed with six red tons.  

To sail into the land deep or Northchanel.  If you will sail in at the Northgat or channel of the Maze, coming from Sea, than set the beakons or capes that stand on the north side of the Maze full one against another, hold them so standing and sail right forward, and then you shall sail upon the body of the outmost ton, which lieth at 18 foot low water: the tower or steeple of Gravesand lieth severed from the uttermost ton full east and by north, and the Briel lieth from it almost southeast and by south, if then you set the tower or steeple of Gravesand east and by north from you, and sail forward till the foresaid beakons come one against the other, then can you not miss the uttermost ton. From the first ton to the second and third is the course east-south-east. The second ton lieth upon twelve foot, coming thither let the capes be a capstock-beame length each from other, and the Hey stand under the down. The third ton lieth at eleven foot: then Gravesand is on the high down. The fourth ton lieth at 11 foot also: then cometh Monster upon the bores house. When you are passed the fourth ton than shall you find deeper water, namely 15 and 16 foot, and there if occasion require, it is fit to anchor. But against the fift ton it is somewhat shallower, for it lieth at 12 foot, then cometh Monster through Gravesand. The sixth ton lieth also at twelve foot, and when you come unto it then cometh Eastvooren, upon the land of the Briel within the uttermost or the most westerly cape. From hence which is on the southside of the Maze sail boldly forward to the head of the Briel southsoutheast, there are no shallows nor dangerous places, and there anchor where you please. All the tons upon the north channel are red tons and lie all on the south wall, so that if you sail inward you must leave them all on starboard, and sail northward along.  
They that come from Scheveling or out of the north along the strand, and will go in at the north channel of the Maze, must keep along the wall at eighteen foot, and then they shall fall upon the uttermost ton, or if you sail nearer the shore at 11 or 12 foot, than you shall come to the second ton. The wall or shore is very fair without danger, so that (if there were no tons) you might wholly pass by the footstrand, with the help and direction of the lead at 10, 11, or 12 foot, so deep or shallow as you thought good, or as the flood permitted, when you are come in by the direction of the lead so far, that Eastvooren cometh through the uttermost cape on the south wall, than you may sail right forward to the head of the Briel, as afore is said.  
This Situation of the North channel was described to me in writing by the Pilots of the Briel in januarie, in the year 1610.  
All the depths here specified touching the Maze, 
NOTA.  are to be understood at low water, and the measure of the depth is to be understood of Mase feet, which are so much greater than the North Holland feet, that they gain one foot in 12.  
Before the Maze a south-west and by west, and a North-east and by east moon make a high water, and before the Briel a south-west, and a North-east moon, and it sloweth there with a continual daily tide 5 or 6 foot up and down: a little after that the flood beginneth to run without before the Maze, than it falleth also right into the Maze, so that there is small difference to be seen, whether it be without or within the channel or mouth of the Maze.   

FOUR How you shall sail into the Goree got or channel.  
IF you will sail in at Goree got or channel, when you come out of the west, then let the cape that standeth upon the land of Goree stand right against the steeple of Goree, and then it will stand east and by south from you, sail strait upon it, 
A Flat before the Goree ga●  to the land of Goree, and so you shall go over a great Flat, where at low water at the dryest, there is not less than three fathom water, or a little more. When you are over that Flat, & go near to the strand of Goree, than you have deeper water again, 5, 6, 7, & 8 fathom, then go forward close by the footstrand, until Goree standeth s. w. from you, & then anchor where you think good, for so far inward it is good anckoring in every place. But if you come from the north or out of the Maze, then run along by the land of the Briel at 4 fathom, but go no nearer unto it, for in some places it is somewhat shoring, 
How to go into the Goree channel, out of the north.  and when you are so far southward, that the steeple of Goree standeth south & by east from you, or somewhat more easterly, then sail right upon the Land of Goree, and then also you shall sail over the Flat aforesaid, but when you are near the Land of Goree, then beyond the Flat you enter into the deeper water, then go in forward along by the Mayeland of Goree, (as I said before) and anchor where you will. The Flat before spoken of is very broad, and stretcheth cross over the channel, it is very even, and all of one depth. The channel of Goree is very broad & wide, for when the steeple of Goree standeth between east and by south, 
Marks of Goree got or channel.  and s. & by e. from you, than you may without all fear sail to the footstrand of Goree, you must then still run over the Flat aforesaid, and shall not find less than three, and three fathom & an half water at low water, and when you come to the footstrand of Goree, you shall have deeper water, then go in forward by the mayeland as aforesaid.  

To know Goree land.  The Land of Goree is known by the great flat steeple of Goree, & by a sharp little steeple, which standeth on the west end called Outdorp, further also you see the cape there, whereof I spoke before.  
Thus the Land of Goree showeth when it is about a league crosswise from you.  
Goree. Outdorp.   view of Goeree  

V To sail into the channel of Brewer's haven.  
HE that desireth to sail into Brewer's haven, he must understand that there are three banks lying before the land, which run along by the strand, the uttermost lieth at least a kenning from the land, which is called the Breebanck, 
Breebanck  upon it it is 7 fathom deep but within it it is again 19 fathom deep. The second lieth nearer to the land, upon the which it is five fathom deep, 
The Ooster. Schelbanck  and within it 7 fathom water. The third called the Schelbanck lieth cross before the mouth of the haven, without the first ton, and upon it at low water it is 3 fathom water.  
If you will sail into the channel of Brewer's haven, than set the two capes that stand upon the Land of Schouwen one right against the other, and sail upon them to the strand of Schouwen to four fathom water: and when you have gotten to four fathom water, then run North-east in (yet as wind & stream serveth you) & there you shall find the uttermost ton, which you must leave to seaward, or on the baghborde, sail forward in that sort, so long until that Renesse, standeth eastward of the blenck, that is the high down which lieth on the west side of Bruwers haven, than Goree will be right against Outdorp, or almost one upon the other, keep those marks in that sort, until you have deeper water, or that you have passed the second ton, which as you enter in leave upon starboard, when you will keep in the deepest water, but you may sail lower about. And then if you will sail to Brewer's haven, than set Bommene without the point of Ossesteert, and sail upon it to the foot strand of Schouwen: for the sands on baghborde are very shoring, you must not go nearer unto them when you laver, then six fathom, go forward along by the strand, to the head of the haven, and there anchor, there you shall have 8 & 9 fathom deep, the tons in Brewer's havens channel are laid against the Buysses go out to Sea, and taken in again when they have done fishing.  
When a man cometh out of the Sea, 
To know the land of Schouwen.  the Land of Schouwen when you fall upon it, showeth to your sight with 3 or 4 high and long white downs, which are called the Woolsackes, that in the west is the highest and longest: upon the land also you may see some churches with small spears, but on the south end towards Sealand, there is a high four square flat church. Brewer's haven hath a sharp steeple, and the land of Scouwen reacheth itself out further east than the other lands, whereby also it is well to be known. From the west end of the Land of Schouwen there is a bad long Riffe, at least two leagues and more into the Sea, which is called the Banjaert, 
The Banjaert.  from the uttermost end of the Riffe to Botkil, it is southsouthwest, and with such a course you can not miss it.  
Thus the land of Schouwen showeth when it lieth about a league & an half thartwise from you.  
Brewer's haven.   view of Schouwen  

VI How you shall sail into the Veer-chanel or Haven.  
TO sail into the Veerhaven or got (so called in Dutch) I counsel you not to enter into it, before half flood be past, for the latter ebb, & the fore flood fall right cross over the Banjaert into the Roompot, to the land of Schouwen, but when the flood is half spent, than it runneth right into the Veerhaven, a south and a north Moon make the highest water in Veerhaven: and an east & west Moon the lowest water therein: but when the Moon is southeast or northwest, than the water there is 2 thirdpartes flood.  

How to sail into Veer haven coming out of the north.  If you will sail into the Veerhaven, coming out of the north, then go no nearer to the land of Schouwen, or the Banjaert then seven fathom water: for upon the Banjaert in some places it is not above 4 or 5 foot deep, and much drier: but beyond it, it is 7, 8, and 9 fathom soft ground, sail about it on the outside, until that Eastchappell is half a ships length eastward from Middleburgh, sail with those marks to Walcheren, 
Marks to ent●r the haven.  so long until that the steeples of Westkerck and Coortgeen be right upon each other, or that the steeple of Coortgeen standeth a bow length southward of the flat steeple of Westkerck, sail then upon it, and you shall find the first ton, but go no nearer to the strand of Walcheren then 7 or 8 fathom water, for if you do you may chance to sail behind a point of land called the Onrust, which cometh off from Walcheren. You must also go no nearer to the land of Schouwen or the Banjaert, than 8 fathom water, for it is very steep. The first ton lieth at 8 fathom, on the south strand, when you come to the first ton, you may easily see the second, & so forth from the one to the other, all the four tons must be left on starboard when you go in, and you must sail close by them, for on both sides it is very steep and shoring, when you are at the innermost, then sail to the Mayland, and go close along by it at three or four fathom, if you sail not upon the heads, you can not go amiss upon the Dykes.   

VII. To sail into the Botkill  

Steenbanck  TO sail into the Botkill, you must do it by day, and take heed of Stonebanck, which is a bank lying a league & an half from the Land of Walcheren, along in the Sea, stretching to the Botkill. The marks of this bank are these, there standeth a steeple between Eastchappel, 
Marks thereof.  and Westchappel, called Domburgh, now when the steeple of Middleburgh standeth just between Eastchappel & Domburgh, than you are at the eastende of this bank, and when Middleburgh and Domburgh are one against the o●her, than you are right over against the middle of that bank, but when Westchappel is east-south-east from you or in a black valley in the downs, than you are against the west end of that bank.  
If you will go within or sail eastward about that bank to enter into Botkill, 
To sail about on the east side of the Steenbanck to Botkill.  than place Middleburgh steeple half way between Eastchappel & Domburgh, but let Eastchappell be nearest, and so go towards the strand at 4 fathom and an half, 5, & 5 fathom and an half, and cast out your lead along by the wall, but when you come between Domburgh and Westchappell, there runneth a sand off from the Wall called the Cloots, which take heed of: therefore sail southsouthwest, or south-west & by south forward, so long until that Westchappel standeth southeast from you, or in a black valley in the downs, keep it standing so, until that the two steeples of Eastchappel & Domburgh be one against the other, and hold the Mayland side at 4 and an half, 5 and 6 fathom deep. And the two towers aforesaid, that is Eastchappell & S. Achten or Domburgh are a little past each other, then presently you find deeper water, that is 9 or 10 fathom, then sail southeast or southeast & by south, as the wind serves, along the strand to Flushing.  
But if you will sail without or about on the westside of the Stone bank to the Botkill, 
To sail on the westside of the stonebanck into the Botkill.  then run so long about east or west, (as you see your way) until that Westchappel be eastsoutheast from you, and then Westchappel standeth in a black valley of the downs, sail so long ●owards it, until the steeples aforesaid of Eastchappel & Domburgh are one somewhat past the other, than (as aforesaid) you get deeper water, then run forward along by the land of Flushing, the Sea-coast there lieth southeast, and southeast & by south. When you are against Souteland, then run close by the footstrand, 
A Flat against Souteland.  for against Souteland there reacheth out a Flat, and you must sail through between that Flat and the strand, and there it is not very broad.  
The land of Walcheren is a low plain land to see to, but upon it there standeth many steeples, which for the most part in times past were sharp steeples, but at this time the most part of them are flat, Flushing hath a spier steeple, but Westchappel hath a high flat steeple. From Flushing to Westchappel it is three leagues, and between both there lieth many rough downs, the land between them reacheth northwest and by north. Next to Flushing standeth Koukerck which is a sharp steeple, but next to Westchappel standeth Souteland, which is a flattish steeple. When you are in the Deurloy then Westchappel standeth bare without downs. Fron Westchappel to Domburgh it is a league, that also is a sharp steeple, and standeth next the strand, a quarter of a league eastward standeth Eastchappel, which is a flat steeple. About a league eastward from the Hacken or Polder (which is the north end of the land of Walcheren) there is a low downish land to behold. Southeast up from this Hacken lieth the Polder, which also is a flat steeple. By it also there standeth another flat steeple, called Sandwick. Veer also hath a short thick flat steeple, and upon that steeple there standeth a small speere, so that it is very easy to be known. But Middleburgh hath a high speere steeple, which is higher than all the rest.  
Thus the land of Walcheren showeth itself when you are in the Deurloy, or before the Splete.  
Westchappel. Souteland. Middleburgh-Souburgh. Koukerck. Flushing.   view of Walcheren  

VIII. How you must sail in and out of the Deurloy.  
IF you will sail into the Deurloy, than you must run over the Raen 
The Raen  with your lead, until the sconce is a masts length from Westchappel, that is, that Westchappel standeth a mast length northward from the sconce, sail towards it until the castle of Sluys be right east from the high downs of Casand, there at a foreflood you shall find four fathom water, which is upon the threshold of the channel, where it will straight be over, and then you shall find it a great half fathom deeper. Now when the castle of Sluys standeth on the east corner of the high downs of Casand, then go in southeast, and southeast and by south, until that Middleburgh cometh to the high downs, which are between the Isehooke and Souteland, then change your course, and go east towards Flushing, and you shall neither sail by Shallows nor Sands.  
If you desire to come out of the Deurloy, then from Flushing go west so long, until the castle of Sluys be east from the high downs of Casand, keep those marks standing so, and go northwest and by north forward, but as wind and stream serveth, and as you sail on this sort out, then mark the castle of Sluys, and if it be east from the downs of Casand aforesaid, than you must hold your course somewhat more westerly, and if the castle standeth westward, than you must hold your course more northerly, and hold it so standing east of the downs as aforesaid, until that Westchappel be a mast length northward from the sconce, than you are without all the Sands that may hinder you, and may set your course whether you will.   

IX. How to sail into the Splete.  
THe Splete lieth between the Deurloy and the Wielingen, he that desireth to sail into the Splete or the Wielinges, he must know, that from the bank of the English Pol, there reacheth a bank along the coast to ostend, which is called the Trip, 
The Trip.  which is about a quarter of a league broad, hard sand & very good anchor ground, when you come out of the Sea you may perfectly sound the Trip with your lead, all along the drought, and it is very hard Sand. When Blanckenburgh standeth southeast and by east from you, then upon the Trip it is 6 fathom deep with a low water, and the more westerly the deeper upon the Trip. When you come southeastward a musket shot length or more over the drought or hardness of the Trip, then presently it is half a fathom deeper, and soft ground, which is the channel of the Wielinges.  
If you will sail into the Splete, coming west out of the Sea, leave the coast of Flanders, and when you guess yourself to be past ostend, than cast out your lead, until you find shallower water and harder ground, than you are against the Trip, when you have found this shallow, be it at 6, 7, or 8 fathom water, as you are easterly or westerly, (for the easterlyer the drier, and the westerlyer the deeper as aforesaid) than you must not pass over it so towards the land, for you should fall into the mouth of the Wielinges, but you must there put about a saker shot or more northward into the Sea, until you have it somewhat deeper, and soft ground again, for northward from the Trip it is also soft ground like the Wielinges, then run in east-north-east, and now & then make southward towards the Trip, till you have shallow and hard ground, which is the northside of the Trip, hold so all along by the Trip, until that Brugge be over against Liswegen, or that Blanckenbergh be on your side, than you are against the west point of the Raen in the Splete. If so be you can see it, then hold Middleburgh standing over a high down, which lieth between Isehooke and Souteland, & from which on the east side there lieth no more downs, then go in east-north-east, and then you shall not sail by any bank or Raen, until the castle of Sluys come within the high downs which lie eastward from Casand, when you have these marks go freely forward to Flushing, without any doubt, & you shall sail neither by Raesses nor French Pol.  
But if it chance to be dark or glome wether, than you must go along by the north end of the Trip eastnortheast, still sounding with your lead, until you find the drought or hard ground of the bank, and running so eastnortheast along by it, than you shall go in between the Raen and the bank. The west point of the Raen is very flat, so that you may easily sound it, and in the channel between the bank and the Raen it is soft ground, and on either side, both on the Raen and on the bank upon the shallow it is hard ground. When in this sort you run in eastnortheast, to the dryest part of the bank, and that you put from the bank, than it beginneth to be deeper, so that you may pass over the bank at 18 foot water half flood, but I counsel you not to go over it, lest you run upon the French Pol, but keep along by the hard ground of the bank & direct your course somewhat easterlyer to shun the Raesses, which reach into the Sea from the Souteland, for you can not sound them with your lead, then when you are somewhat more inward, go east to Flushing, and then you shall sail by no drougths.  
IF you will sail out of the Splete, 
How you may sail out of the Splete.  then go from Flushing west and by north so long till S. Anne come without the east down of Casand, then may you run forth into what channel you will: but if you will run out of the Splete then bring Westchappel out of the downs, and Middleburgh against the high down which lieth between the Isehooke and Souteland, If you be next Flanders side, then S. Anne cometh first out of the downs: but if you be next Walcherens' side, than Westchappel cometh forth first. When Middleburgh is against the foresaid down, then go west-south-west, & keep Middleburgh so situate so long as you can see it. When Brugghe cometh against Lisweghen, than you are passed all shallows, & you may set your course whither you will: or if it fall out that you lose the sight of Middleburgh, then run along out by the course of Raen, which you may wholly sound with the lead, but the Pol inward is altogether steep.   

X. How to sail into the Wielinges.  
When you come out of the Sea towards Flanders, and will sail into the Wielinges, then seek out Liswegen, that is a thick flat steeple standing in the downs: when Bruggeling standeth a Cable length from Liswegen westward, then are you from danger of all Sands, Polls, and Rasses: keep Bruggeling so standing and so sail towards Flanders upon five fathom, there you find soft ground. Then go eastnortheast or east and by north, as the wind & stream serveth: keep the coast of Flanders at five fathom till Blanckenbergh cometh into the gap of the Gallows field, that is a great gap in the downs: keep Blanckenbergh so standing till you see Heys in another great gap in the downs, almost half a masts length east from the Ungeboedt, then is Westchappel in Flanders full against Knock: then sail forward North-east & by east, & North-east as the wind or stream is that you may run beyond the French Pol. When S. Anne cometh upon that high down of Casand which is most easterly than are you beyond the French Pol & all shallows, then sail forward to Isehook, toward Walcheren, & forward by the dyke along by the Hoofden & so to Flushing.  
If you will sail into the Wielinges when you come out of the west, with a south wind, then as it is aforesaid in the description of the Splete, you must seek Flushing coast with your lead. When you are passed ostend, than you shall find dry and hard ground, which is the ground of the Trip, which you must sail over and when you are about the length of a musket shot over it, than you shall presently have half a fathom deeper water & soft ground, than you are in the channel of the Wielinges, & in a good way, but if than you go somewhat more to landwards or southeastward, than you will lose the soft ground, and find hard & dry ground again, by reason of a Sand which lieth from Blanckenburgh about an English mile from the strand along the coast, so far as to Wenduynen, where at a low water, you have 15 foot water at the dryest, you may sail under this sand, when you go over the Trip a little eastward from ostend, and so go somewhat to far over to the strand: 
To shun the Bank of Blanckenbergh.  but to shun it you have no better means, but when you are passed the hardness and dryness of the Trip, and find soft ground with a little deeper water, that then you put no more towards the land, but go in right North-east, and sometimes northerly, according to the hardness of the Trip or bank, and then hold off again, till you find soft ground again, whereby you shall be assured, that you run along by the south end of the Trip, or bank in the channel of the Wielinges, this do so long until Heys be about a masts length westward from the beacon, than you must sound no more northward with your lead for the bank there is very steep, for that close by the bank it is eight fathom deep at the least. When Heyes is right against the beacon, than you are right against the shallowest of the bank or English Pol, 
Marks of the English Pol.  then go still eastnortheast till Heyes be a mast length eastward from the beacon, in a hole or plain where there are no downs, than you must go no longer eastnortheast, but go a point northerlyer, that is North-east and by east, to shun the French Pol, 
Marks of the French Pol.  so long till S. Anne is right against the easterlyest high downs of Casant, than you are passed the French Pol, and all dangers. Then sail up the Isehooke to Walcheren, and so along to Flushing as is said before.  
Thus the coast of Flanders showeth when you sail out and into the Wielinges.  
S. Lambert. Sluys. Knock. Heys. Liswegen-Blanckenbergh.   view of Flanders  

XI. Of the falling and running of the stream in the channels of Sealand.  
HE that will sail these channels, must necestarily understand, how the streams upon the droughts (which lie before these channels) fall and turn that he may know how to govern himself wisely and warily therein.  
At Westchappel before the land a south and north moon maketh a high water, & when the water is fallen half an hour, than the stream beginneth to fall outward, and when the water is risen half an hour, than it beginneth to fall in, but when you are before the Botkill, than you must understand that the ebb first beginneth to go, when the water hath fallen an hour, but it falleth long into the Sea.  
But in the Splete, and upon the drougths lying there about, the tides run about against the Son, and at last falleth into the channel, an east and west moon maketh lowest water there, and the foreflood falleth there over the shallows towards the land, but when the moon is about east-south-east, or when the water hath flown about two hours, upon those shallows, than the tide beginneth to turn southward, first southsouthwest, and so by the south to the east, so long till the moon be southsoutheast, than the flood falleth east. But to know how far westward the tide beginneth to turn & by what marks: you must understand, when Blanckenbergh standeth about southeast and by east from you, from thence the tide beginneth to run eastward, but from thence westward you shall find no turning tides.   

XII. To know all the places upon the coast of Flanders.  
FLanders is a low hilly and downish land, full of steeples and churches, & reacheth from Calis to the point or end of the Swine, most altogether eastnortheast, and westsouthwest. To know it when you sail along by it, from Sluys to Calis, first you have a flat steeple called S. Anne, and then the speere steeple of Knock, which standeth further into the downs, Heys is also a speere steeple which standeth westward from the Knock, but westward from Heys lieth Liswegen, which hath a flat steeple standing in the downs, then followeth Blankenbergh, which is a flat steeple, but not so big as Liswegen, inward to the land from Blanckenbergh standeth Bridges, and there standeth two speere steeples upon one church, and westward from Blanckenbergh half a league lieth Wenduynen with a speere steeple. Between Wenduynen & Blanckenbergh, there standeth an other steeple, called jan Davies steeple, but ostend lieth a league westward from Wackerbout, half a league westward from ostend lieth S. Catheline. A league westward from it lieth Middlekerck, which is a thick flattish high steeple, from Middlekercke to Newport it is two leagues, which hath a flat steeple, and there within the land you may see another speere steeple, a little eastward from Newport lieth our Lady of Lombardie, which is a high flat steeple.  
From Newport to Broers it is almost 3 leagues, & from Broers to Duynkerck 4 leagues, Soutcotten is a league eastward of Duynkerck, Duynkerck hath a high flat steeple with a small speere steeple. From Duynkerck to Greveling it is 3 leagues, between them are these steeples, first little Sinten a speere steeple, Great Sinten a flat steeple, Mardicke a great thick flat steeple, and S. George's a high speere steeple. Greveling hath no steeples, but there are two mills in it, one upon the Eastgate the other upon the westende of the town. From Gravelling to Calis it is also 3 leagues, Calis hath many speere steeples or towers, whereof one is higher than all the rest, and between them both are these villages, but yet without steeples, unless it be one or two flat steeples: first Hoogenprise & Dasen which are two flat steeples, and Valdam a flat church with a small speere upon it, in the middle thereof. This is the whole description of Flanders coast, from Blanckenbergh to Calis. So that the coast of Flanders between Calis and Blanckenbergh is 24 leagues long, or as some say 22 leagues, and Blanckenbergh from Flushing almost 9 leagues, so that from Flushing to Calis it is at least 29 leagues, or as some say 31 leagues at the most.  
That which is here set down of the steeples & leagues along the coast of Flanders, is by good and expert Pilots diligently collected and set down, and is very necessary and convenient to be known, not only in regard of that which is before said touching the Wielings, but also for the sailing by the havens of Flanders, & specially for the knowledge of the Flemish coast, as hereafter it is declared.  
Thus the country of Flanders showeth itself between Neweport and ostend.  
Wenduynen. ostend. Middlekerck. Neweport. Wackerbout. S. Catheline. Lombardie.   view of Flanders 
Thus the country of Flanders showeth itself between Calis and Neweport, when you sail. along by it eastward.  
Neweport. The Broers Soutcotten. Duynkercken. Grevelingen. Calis Clooster at the Downs.   view of Flanders  

XIII. How to sail in to the Havens of Flanders.  
TO sail into ostend let the new church stand westward from the old church, & so go in close by the west head, it is a tide haven which you must use with high water, you must keep the fire-beakons one right against the other, or a little a sunder, that they may stand southeast & by south from you, and so go in right upon them, with a ship that draweth not much water, you may sail in there at half flood, and by night you may sail in by the lights of the fire.  
Neweport is a tydehaven, which at low water is dry, at the continual tides, there is two fathom water, at high water, 
To sail into Newport.  and at a spring tide it is 3 fathom water, but the latter flood bringeth most water upon this coast, he that will sail into it, must stay till half flood and set the highest beacon a little eastward from the lesser beacon, & so he must sail into the Duycker. When the Duycker is under you have water enough, but coming thither by night you shall understand, that they set out fire no longer then from half flood to half ebb, which every man must observe. Newport as I said before, is a dry haven, and westward it is flat water, and from the east-head there cometh a Sand falling down, where at a high water you must go over, close by the bank it is 3 fathom deep.  

To sail into Duynkerck.  At Duynkerck they burn fire by night, from half flood to half ebb, and no longer: if you will enter into it, you must understand, that the lowest beakons stand nearest to the water, which you must keep one right against the other till you be within the heads, shun the westside, and run in close by the east-head into the haven, the westhead lieth further into the Sea than the other doth.  

To sail into Greveling.  Greveling is a tydehaven, where you must enter at high water, there stand beakons which you must hold one against the other, & so sail in between the heads, on the westside there is a Sand-banck which you must shun.  
But when you go along by the coast of Flanders through Wolbrechsont, and that you come at last to the Smal-banck, than you come to the west end of the Sand that lieth out at Greveling, which reacheth far into the Sea, on the eastside thereof you may go into the haven of Greveling, and there a great way it is flat water, but by night you must run in right upon the fire, and right west from the haven of Greveling, there lieth a bank of five fathom about west into the Sea. There you may run over it at three fathom. This Sand is called the Neweland, which lieth along by the land to the haven of Calis.  
When you are passed that Sand of Newland, then sail to the east head of Calis, 
To sail into Calis.  and go in close by the head to the town, & when you are within the westhead, than you must turn westward into the Cuype, where you lie dry at low water, but from the westhead there cometh a Sand-banck falling off, but you must run in between that Sand-bancke and the east-head, when it is tied there are two fires by which you go in.  
There lieth also cross from the westhead of Calis, a bank of two fathom, between the head or Mayeland and this bank you may go through at 3 fathom half flood, the bank is two fathom deep, and under Calis cliff you may anchor at 10 fathom at the east-end, but at the westend there lieth a rock under the water, which is about a Culvers shot from the land, and this Calis cliff lieth between Calis and swartness, whereof somewhat shall be spoken in the chapter enseweing.   

XIIII. The situation and stretching of the Flemish banks.  
ABout two leagues from ostend lieth the Tricx, 
The Tricx.  a bank whereon there is not above 15 or 16 foot water. When the Old church is right against the steeple of the New church, than you are against this bank, and when S. Catelines steeple is right against ostend, than you sail against that bank, between this bank and the head of ostend there lieth another bank of 3 fathom water.  
Between ostend & Newport there lieth 4 banks, which begin all four right against ostend: the 2 nearest the land end against Newport, the other two reach almost to Duynkerck, along the land. The first is called the Gear, 
Gear.  between this bank and the land there goeth a channel of 8, 9, & 10 fathom.  
The 2 called Laland 
Laland.  which endeth also against Newport, between these two banks there runneth also a channel, of 8 & 9 fathom.  
The 3 is called Stroom, 
Stroom.  which runneth almost to Duynkerck, on the east end having a point which reacheth east, ending almost against Newport, it is a bank of 3 or 4 fathom, and of 5 and 6 fathom at the east end.  
The 4 called Sandele, 
Sandele,  Calbanck, 
Calbanck,  or Oudemoers bank 
Oudemoers-banck.  runneth along by Breebanck, the utmost end is at least 2½ leagues long.  
Such ships as desire to go into Duynkerck, and will not sail along by Flanders, run about without these banks, till they come against Breebanck, and then go in by it at 5 or 6 fathom.  
The channel is 15 fathom deep, 
Marks of these banks.  and every one of these four banks hath a dry polder, & when two flat steeples southward from Newport stand a bow length from each other, than you are right against these four Sands, which are no deeper with a low water then 1 fathom, & at a spring flood fall almost dry.  
Between all these banks you may anchor at 9, 10, 11, & 13 fathom, & without it is 9, 10, 11, & 12 fathom deep, you may run over them at 4 fathom, but when you are westward from them, than it is deeper, that is 8 9 and 10 fathom.  
Broers bank 
Broersbanck.  is three cornered, it lieth close by the land against Broers, & the Closter in the downs, & reacheth from the land about w. n. w. a league into the Sea, when the Closter in the downs or Broers lieth s. from you, than you are on the inside of Broers bank, you may pass along between this bank and the land at 4 fathom low water, but commonly men go west about it, when they sail along by Flanders within the banks.  
Right westward from Broersbanck lieth Cams' bank, 
Cams-banck.  which is 3 fathom deep, which lieth upon many Sands, you may also run between this bank & the land at 8, 9, & 10 fathom, you may also ride there safely against all winds upon the land of Flanders, between this sand & Broers bank it is 5 fathom deep, when you go between this bank & the land, you go along by Quadebanck, to the entry of the channel before Duynkerk.  
Quadebanck 
Quabanck.  is a bank which eastward from the head of Duynkerck falleth of about 2 leagues west, ending against the heads of Duynkerck. East from the east-head of Duynkerck haven you may lie at road safe against a n.w. north, & n. e. wind behind this bank, & there it is 2 fathom deep low water, but at the entry it is drier. Before the mouth of the haven at Duynkerck, it is 9 or 10 fathom deep, & on the west side of the westhead of Duynkerck it is 6, 7 or 8 fathom. From thence you may go over the Smal-banck 
Small bank  at 3 fathom, & go towards the Broad-banck, this Smal-banck lieth right cross before the haven of Duynkerck, between Duynkerck and the Broad-banck.  
From the westhead of Duynkerck there runneth a bank toward Greveling two leagues, which is called the Splinter, 
Splinter.  there on the west side you may sail under the Road at 10, 8, 6, & 5 fathom, you must sail in close by the foot strand, you may sail in between the land and this bank almost to the westhead of Duynkerck, but you must sail out of it again backward.  
When you are a good way past the head of Duynkerck, about s. w. from the Splinter, than you run over a sand of 2 fathom, which is called Wilbaertsondt, 
Wilbaertsondt.  being over it, it is 10, 11, & 12 fathom deep again. When Borburger steeple is in the valley of the downs, than you are against this bank, & with these marks you may sail through the banks n.n.w. into the Sea, and so come to the point of the Broad-banck, at 4 fathom, and then when you turn somewhat towards the land again at 12, 13 or 15 fathom, than you may also sail through the Broad & the Small bank e. n. e. or e. & by n. till you have passed the Closter in the downs or Broers bank, which cometh down from the Closter a league into the Sea, eastward past this bank it beginneth to be flat water, against Newport 4 or 5 fathom, & when you are past Newport, chose then the Mayland at 8 or 9 fathom keeping close by the land, than you shall run between the land and a bank called Gear, which reacheth towards ostend, but when you are against ostend, you are free of the banks, & then you may safely put to Sea to go to the Wielinges.  
There lie yet five long banks along by the coast of Flanders when Greveling is s. e. from you than you are against the south end of those banks, & when Newport is s. e. from you, than you are against the north end of those banks, 
Marks of the Flemish banks.  they are very long, & between each of them there goeth a white channel of 8, 9, 12, 15, 16, 18, 19, & 20 fathom deep each of a several depth.  
The uttermost bank, which is most westerly & reacheth not far northward, lieth from Calis cliff n. n. e. about 4 leagues & an half, and is 3 fathom and an half deep, between this & the other bank there goeth a white channel, of 23 & 24 fathom.  
The second bank lieth from Calis cliff 
The Cliff.  North-east and by north, about 4 leagues, and there it is 5 or 6 fathom deep, but at the south end there is a polder or sand of a fathom and an half. When the south end of Winocxbergen is between the two flat steeples or towers that stand westward of Duynkerck, than you are against this Polder which is called the Cliff.  
There stand also three or four mills eastward from Duynkerck, when the uttermost is against the east end of the town or wall, that also is a good mark of this polder or sand, and Duynkerck tower will then stand about southeast from you four leagues. Between this and the third sand there is also a channel of 12 and 13 fathom.  
The third bank lieth North-east from Calis cliff, and is 4 and 5 fathom deep, and at the south and north ends of this bank are polders or sands, that most south is a fathom deep, and lieth also upon the marks of Winocxbergen, about northwest and somewhat westerlyer from Duynkerck, which is called the Polder of the dyke, or Dyke-polder. The other polder or shallow of this bank is about four fathom and a quarter, and is called the Ruyting. 
The Ruyting.  When the Closter in the downs is south east from you, than you are against the Ruyting. Upon this bank you must be wary, for the Ruyting lieth almost in the channel, and with a low water they have but two fathom deep, & are very dangerous.  
The fourth bank called Retlebanck, 
Retlebanck.  lieth north-east and by east from Calis cliff, and is 3, 4, 5, and 6 fathom deep, at the southende whereof also is a shallow, of a fathom deep at low water, & with a spring-streame these polders are dry. Between this also there goeth through a channel of 19 and 20 fathom, & so also the aforesaid bank.  
Between all the banks aforesaid there run fair channels, which you may laveere from one bank to the other, and between all the said banks you may anchor where you w●ll.  
The south end of Breebanck 
Breebanck.  lieth eastnortheast from Calis Clif, and hath a sand or shallow at the south end, of two leagues long, and all through is three and four fathom deep.  
Westward from this bank there goeth a great channel, of 19 and 20 fathom, which reacheth farthest northward, so that the north end thereof is northwest and southeast from Newport: but it lieth far without the land, so that the north end of these three banks may well be the same, which is called the Broers bank, for they lie right with the north end against Broers bank, and the Closter in the downs lieth then southsoutheast from you, about 4 or 5 leagues, and at the north end they are 6, 7, and 8 fathom deep.   

XV. Of the running of the stream in all these places aforesaid.  
IN the North Sea, the stream falleth in round more than half a tide, in the Breadth 14 it followeth the Son or the moon, & falleth but one quarter right along the Sea, coming along by the coasts against Holland and Sealand, the stream whether it be ebb or flood runneth right to the land, but in the middle of the tide, than the stream runneth right along the Sea, but at the last of the tide it will run inward to the Sea, whether it be westward or northward.  
How the streams fall into the Marsdeepe is also declared before, that the foreflood and the latter ebb fall northward cross the channels, to the last quarter of the tide, and the latter flood with the fore ebb contrarily southwards over the grounds.  
The flood runneth not into the Maze before it be a quarter flood, and although the foreflood falleth towards the land into the channel, yet the latter ebb cometh out of the channel over the Sands, and so fall again one with the other into the Sea.  
But if you will sail into the Veerhaven or channel, you must understand that the flood falleth not right in, before the moon be right southeast, and southeast and by south, and then it is about half flood, for along by Sealand side the flood falleth outward along the Bangaert northward, against Sealand in the channel a third part of the flood falleth towards the land, than it beginneth to fall North-east and by north.  
Between Marsdeepe and the Maze in the channel the foreflood cometh out of the north Sea, and so followeth after the moon falling towards the land n. e. and n. e. and by n.  
Along by the Flemish banks, the foreflood falleth to the land over the banks, and in the middle of the flood it falleth right into the Sea, but the latter flood falleth northward into the right channel.   

XVI. What moon maketh high water in these places.  
BEfore the points or hooks of the Tessel an east and west moon maketh a high water.  
Between Haerlem and Petten a w. n. w. and e. n. e. moon maketh a full Sea.  
Before the Maze a s. w. and by w. and a s. e. & by e. moon make a full Sea.  
Along by Sealand in the channel without the Flemish banks a south west moon maketh a full Sea.  
Before the Wielinges, a south-west, and s. s. w. moon maketh a full Sea.  
Along by the coast of Flanders upon the land a north and south moon make a full Sea.  
Before Fulshing and the Veer, it is full Sea with a south and by west and a north and by east moon.  
Before Ramekens & Armue a s. s. w. moon makes a full Sea.  
Before the Briel a south-west and North-east moon.  
Before Delfs haven a w. s. w. moon maketh full Sea.  
Before Rotterdam a s. w. by s. moon maketh high water.  
Before Marsdeepe an east & west moon maketh full Sea.  
Before Tessel at Copevaerders Road an e. s. e. and w. n. w. moon maketh high water.  
Upon Wieringer Flat it is high water with a s. e. moon.   

XVII. Of the depths against these places, and at what depths a man may see the land.  
Between the Marsdeepe & the Heads in the right channel it is 23 or 24 fathom deep, but coming by Goodwin or about the Foreland it is 26, 28, and 30 fathom deep, the nearer Goodwin the deeper water.  
Right without the Flemish banks it is 18, 19 & 20 fathom deep.  
Between the Breadth-fourteen and the land it is deep 19 fathom, & as soon as it is 16 or 17, fathom than you begin to see the land, upon the Breadth-fourteene it is 14 fathom deep.  
The high steeples of Holland and West Vreesland are seen sooner than the downs, as Egmont upon the Sea, the steeples of Egmont within, Wyck upon the Sea, Sandvoord, and other steeples, and then you are about 5 leagues from the land, and then it is 14 or 15 fathom deep.  
But Camper downs and the downs against Hhaerlem, are seen before some steeples, now most of the steeples are flat, except Scheveling and Sandvoort.  
Before the Maze and Goree, you may see land at 14 or 15 fathom.  
You may see Sealand from the poop of the ship at 16 fathom.  
You may see Flanders at 15 or 16 fathom, and then you are within the tail of the Flemish banks.  
The Clif of Calis & the point of Dover may be seen when you are before the Heads at 24 fathom.   

XVIII. How these places lie one from another.  

FRom Tessel to Petten south & by west 4 leagues.  
From Petten to Egmont s. s. west 4 leagues.  
From Egmont to the Maze south south w. 15 leagues.  
From the land of Vooren to Goree south-west 2 leagues.  
From Goree to the land of Schouwen south w. 2 leagues.  
From the land of Schouwen to Walcheren south w. 4 leagues.  
From Flushing to Blanckenhergh w. s. w. 10 leagues.  
From Blanckenbergh to ostend s. w. & by west 2 leagues.  
From ostend to Newport west south-west 3 leagues.  
From Newport to Duynkerck west south west 5 leagues.  
From Duynkerck to Greveling west south west 4 leagues.  
From Greveling to Calis w. s. w. 4 leagues.  
From Calis to Calis cliff south-west and by west 1 league.    

XIX. How these places lie distant from other countries.  

FRom Tessel to Bornriffe the course south-west & North-east about 12 leagues.  
From Tessel to the Maze the course s. s. w. 24 leagues.  
From the Maze to Kaybanck the course s. w. & n. e. 18 leagues.  
From Tessel to Pas of Calis south-west & somewhat more southerlyer, & n. e. and somewhat more northerlyer 52 leagues.  
Calis lieth s. w. & by south from Tessel, than you come upon the Flemish banks, and the Foreland lieth s. w. from Tessel, than you come upon Goodwin or Querens. Therefore every man must be very wary and take heed thereof. The Flemish Banks may be sounded with the lead, at 15 & 16 fathom, and the channel is 24 & 25 fathom deep. But Goodwin is steep and uneven, for at one casting of the lead you have 26 fathom, and at another cast of the lead you shall be fast upon the Sand, the south end of Goodwin you may sound at 15 and 16 fathom.  
From Tessel or Marsdeepe to Calis cliff s. w. by s. 52 leagues.  
From Tessel to the Foreland south-west 47 leagues.  
From Tessel to Orfordnesse west-south-west 36 leagues.  
From Tessel to Yarmouth west, & w. & by s. 32 leagues.  
From Tessel to Schilt or Crammer west 40 leagues.  
From Tessel or Marsdeepe to Flamboroughhead w.n.w. 60 le.  
From Marsdeepe to Lieth in Schotland northwest and by west and somewhat more northerlyer 100 leagues.  
From Marsdeepe to Newcastle w. n. w. and somewhat northherlyer 81 leagues.  
From Tessel to Bokenes n. with, and n. w. & by n. 118 leagues.  
From Marsdeepe to Aberdyne northwest and somewhat northerlyer 113 leagues.  
From Marsdeep to Lieth of Bergen in Norway n. 117 leagues.  
Fron Marsdeepe to the northend of Hitland n.n.w. 160 leagues. Then you fall about five leagues eastward of the land.  
From Marsdeepe to the Neuse n. and by e. 93 leagues.  
From the Maze to Nase e. and by w. 29 leagues.  
From the Maze or Goree to Dover s. w. and by w. 36 leagues.  
From Flushing to the Foreland east and west, & somewhat southerlyer 24 leagues.  
From the Wielings to Dover w. s. w. 24 leagues.  
Out of Pas de Calis to the Riffe n. n. east 120 leagues.  
From Calis Cliff to the Neuse in Norway n. & by e. 153 league.    

XX. Under what degrees these places be.  
HUysduynen lieth just under 53 degrees, sail east out of the North Sea and you shall see it.  
The north cape or point of the Maze lieth under 52 deg you shall sail by it when you sail east under this height.  
Flushing, Ramekens and Westchappel lie under 51½ degrees, & under this height are east from you.  
The Pass of Calis & Dover lie under 51 degrees 12 minutes.  
Hear followeth the Card N. 3.    

CHAPTER III. A DECLARATION HOW a man shall sail all the Sea-coasts and Havens of Picardy and Normandy, between Calis and Cape de la Hague: And What Banks, Sands, Cliffs or Rocks, and Shallows are there to be found, and how you may shun them.  

I. To sail from Calis to Diepen.  
IN the middle of the Heads between Calis and Dover lieth the bank of Vrouwesand, 
Vrouwesandt.  of 5, 6, 7, and 8 fathom deep, the shallowest or dryest part of Vrouwesand lieth about west & by south from Calis cliff, & south, and south & by west from Dover, where it is dryest, and no deeper than 4 fathom.  
This bank aforesaid reacheth along the land of swartness, and lieth nearest to the French side, it is at least 4 leagues long, on both sides of this bank, both on the east and west sides it is 20 and 21 fathom deep.  
Cross from the westhead of Calis there lieth a bank of 2 fathom, you may sail between the head or Mayeland & this bank at 3 fathom, with half flood, you may anchor under Calis Cliff 
Road to anchor under Calis cliff.  at the east end at 10 fathom water, but at the westend of Calis cliff there lieth a Rock under the water the length of a Culver shot from the land. The high land between Calis and swartness is called Calis cliff.  
A league & an half southward from Calis lieth swartness, 
Swartenes.  which is a foul point lying out, by the which there lieth certain Rocks, you cannot anchor there, for the ground in that place is very foul. A little way southward of swartness there stand some few houses with a mill, all along to the mill you may not anchor, but you will endure some hurt and damage either in your cables or anckors.  
Two leagues southward from swartness lieth the Old-man or Tour d'ordre, 
Tour d'ordre, or the Oldman.  there is a fair sandy Bay, there you may lie safe & free from a north wind, it is a good Road for North-east, east, and southeast winds, for ships that will fail eastward, you may anchor there at 6 or 7 fathom, so that the point or the steeple be north and by east from you.  
But half way between swartness and the Old man lieth S. john's Road, 
S. john's Rode.  there you may anchor at 15 or 16 fathom, for there it is fair ground. To anchor there you must bring the steeple of the village against the middle of the houses, but there lieth some rocks along by the land, which you must be careful to shun, and go not near unto them.  
About two leagues from Tour d'ordre lieth Beunen or Bullen, and when such as lie at anchor under the Oldman go on land they may from above look down into the River of Bullen.  
Between Tour d'ordre & the Some 
Somme.  there is a great creak, and when you are right against the Somme it is shallow water, 3 or 4 leagues at the least into the Sea, about 6 or 7 fathom deep, such ships as come out of the west, are many times cast away there, but when you find shallow water for a long time, you must understand that you are about the river of Somme.  
He that will sail up to Bullen 
To sail into Bullen haven.  must go by the land by Tour d'ordre, at 3 fathom, and then along by the land to the middle of the river, and then keep the middle of the channel: the north side is full of rocks or cliffs, & from the south side there cometh a riff or sand shooting out and runneth a good way by the haven, which you must be wary of, and close before the river also there lieth a bank which you may sail under on the south side at two fathom, & on the north side at 3 fathom, and there you may anchor or go into the haven. It is a tydehaven where you must go in at a high water, and at a low water sit dry, as you do in all the havens of Flanders. You may there run close along by the coast, at 2, 3, 4 & 5 fathom, as dry as you will, but before the havens you must put somewhat further off because of the rocks which lie before them.  
The course from the Oldman to the river of Some is south and north, distant 8 or 9 leagues, and from Bullen to Somme 
Somme.  it is south, and south and by west, distant 6 leagues. Between them there are two rivers more, the one called Cauche, 
Cauche.  the other Antij: 
Antij.  upon the first there lieth Monstruel and Estaples, 
Estaples and Monstruel.  about 3 or 4 leagues southward from Bullen. This is no special haven, you must enter into it at high water, and keep the middle of the channel, you shall find it dry when you are within it.  

To sail up the river Somme  Before the Somme it is shallow water at least two leagues into the Sea, at 5 or 6 fathom, and from the north point of the river there cometh a Riffe or Sand shooting out, which runneth almost over the deep, so that a man passing it by the south shore, he must sail at 3 fathom water, as far as to S. Valeries, which lieth on the south side, & then from the southshore there cometh another Sand shooting off, almost clean over the river, so that as than you must turn to Crottoy, which lieth on the north side, if it were not for the bank aforesaid, (which runneth cross over before the haven) it were a haven for a great ship to go into, for in the entry of the haven it is 3 fathom, and within 2 fathom deep, Abbeville 
Abbeville.  lieth about 5 leagues upwards in the land.  
From Tour d'ordre or the Oldman to Deep, the course is s. s. w. 16 leagues, but from the river of Somme to Diepen 
Diepen.  it is south-west and North-east, 8 or 9 leagues, between both, that is 4 leagues from Somme, and 4 leagues from Deep, lieth the river of Heu, and on the north side thereof a little town called Triport or Tresport, where into you must enter with a high water, as in a tydehaven, with low water lying dry.  

To sail into the haven of Diepen.  The Haven of Deep, on the east side is to be entered at 3 fathom, there lie three tons in the channel, you must sail from the one unto the other, leaving them on your left hand as you go in, on the east side of the land there shooteth a piece of land out along, but if you keep at 3 fathom, than you sail not under that piece of land, and from the west point of the haven or town, there cometh a great Sand running down, and reacheth north: without in the channel it is 3 fathom, and within somewhat drier, that is 2 fathom. There may a reasonable great ship go into the rivers of Somme and Deep when it floweth, but small ships may go in there at half flood, at a low water you lie dry.  
To sail from Deep to the river of Roan, you have first from Deep to S. Valerie or Valderie in Caux 
S. Valerie in Caux.  4 leagues. This is a dry tydehaven, wherein you must enter with high water, whereby there goeth none but small ships in and out from it.  
From S. Valerie to Fecam 
To sail into Fecam.  it is w. s. w. 4 leagues, it is a fair tydehaven, where at low water there is about 2 fathom.  
There lieth a bank or Flat on the east side of the haven, you may pass with small ships between the land and this Flat with the lead, at 8 or 9 foot water, having regard to the Eastland for that is flat.  
But if you will go about or without the Flat, than you must place Fecam steeple without the land, or without the west point of the haven, and then it will stand s. s. e. from you, and so go into the haven, than the Sand is on baghborde. Eastward of the said haven also there is a channel to go in, but the west side is best, having in the haven 2 fathom water, and when you are within before the town, there you may anchor on the west side at 3 fathom half flood, the east side is flat.  
From Fecam it is w. s.w. to Struysaert, 
Struysaert and Seynhoft.  a little town lying in a creak about 3 leagues from Seynhead or Seynhoft.  
Without the point of Struysaert lie two high sharp Rocks, and are about north, & n. & by e. from Seynhead 2 leagues.  
From Deep to Struysaert it is w. s.w. distant 8 leagues, and from Struysaert to Seynhead south and north 2 leagues.  
About n.w. from Seynehead there lieth a bank of 3 fathom at low water, or as some say 2 fathom & an half. When the town of Able is without Seynhead, than you are against the bank, & you go in close by Seynhead to the first mil, & there anchor at 6 fathom, staying for a Pilot to bring you into the haven.  
The land from Calis Cliff to beyond Bullen showeth itself thus, when you sail along by it.  
Calis cliff. Tour d'ordre, Oldman. The land of Boulogne.   view of Calais  

II. To sail into the Road of Newhaven & the River of Roan.  
When you come from the north, & will sail up the River of Roan, 
To sail into the river of Seyne.  you must sail right to Seynhoft, so long until the south point of the River be against the point of Seynhoft, hold it so standing, and make straight towards it, so long until the land which lieth east from Newhaven be without Newhaven, 
To sail to Newhaven.  then sail to the haven of Newhaven, or if you will go about without the bank, than wind so much off from the land, and sail west about until the River openeth, then sail to the point of Tochet, and go into it with your lead, at high water it is 3 fathom, and at low water a fathom deep.  

To shun the Rettiers.  The Rettiers lie in the middle of the River, which are stony, hard, sandy ground.  
When the land of Caen is without the point of Seynhead, than you sail without them if you hold south, on the north side it is 3 fathom deep at half flood, on the south side at half flood it is but 2 fathom deep.  

To sail into the Seyne to Newhaven.  If you come out of the west, you must run into the river of Roan with the tide, & that when the most part of the flood is gone, then sail along by the land of Deep by your lead, till you may see the river of Newhaven open, than the south castle is right against the east-head and the mill, run right upon it, but sail but half way to the castle and Seynhead, stay there for a Pilot, but if none come to you, then sail right upon the castle which standeth upon the head, there it is deep water.  
When you hold Struysaert a bow length without the land of Seynhead, than you go without the Rettiers and the bank, than the east gate of Newhaven is right against the east-head & the east mill, than you go right northward in from the Rettiers, and then you can not miscarry on the bank which lieth towards Seynehead, and when you are a little way from Seynehead you must stay for a Pilot, as I said before.  

The Rettiers.  The Rettiers reach along in the middle of the River towards the point of Honfleur, and westward from them it is all full of Sands, so that you must sail in with high water.  
He that will enter into Newhaven he must go in with a high water, and every tide lie dry.  
He that will go from Newhaven upward to Roan, he taketh a Pilot, you must go with a tide through the first dry banks, which reach from Newhaven to Honfleur s. e. along by the south land, the banks reach along by the north side of the River to Kilgebuf, than you are passed the first banks, but let every man be wary of the strong springtide, (by the Normans called the Bar) which cometh with such a force, that you can hardly stay a ship with all her anckors and cables, for this & other dangers it is not good to sail up the River without a Pilot, and it is a water for a Pilot.  
The situation or form of Strusaert and Seynhead when you sail by it.  
Struysaert. Seynhead.   view of Struysaert 
Thus the land of Khan showeth itself being 4 leagues from you.   view of Caen  

III. To sail from the River of Roan to Cape de Hague.  
TWo leagues southward from the river of Roan, 
To sail into Tochet.  there lieth a tydehaven called Tochet, there standeth a beacon on the west point of the haven, by the which you go in, or you may go in (with good heed) on the east side, some French ships go in and out that way.  
From the point of Seynhead s. w. and s. w. & by s. about six leagues, there lie many banks a great way into the Sea, 
To sail into Fosse of Caen.  men sail east and west from them into the River or Fosse of Caen, which for the most part reacheth in south, & lieth in a creak.  
On the west side there is a Boght, you may anchor behind it, there it is wide and broad, and all sand strand.  
The east land is downy and shallow, to enter upon with the lead, without it is far shallow to wete 6 or 7 fathom.  
From Seynhead to Cape de Barchfleur, 
Cape Barchfleur  or Cape de Chierenberch the course is east and west 19 leagues.  
About 4 leagues eastward lie the islands of S. Mark, 
islands of S. Mark. Lafoy Hung.  which you may sail round about, but it is not all to fair there.  
Right west from the islands of S. Mark or Markel about a league lieth la Hung, which hath a flat steeple, there westward lieth the point of Barchfleur, with a fair creak, 
Bay of Barchfleur  wherein you may lie safe against a n. n. w. wind, at 6 or 7 fathom, a north east wind bloweth right into it by the north point, which then lieth from you n. n. w. there falleth a bank off from the land but a ship may well go over it.  
This Bay and the islands are by our Sailors called the Hongiers, but when you come out of the west, you shall not find less than 4 or 5 fathom water, & there you are safe almost from all winds.  
From the point of la Hung to Chierenberch 
Chierenburch.  it is 4 leagues, west, and w.n.w. Chierenberch is a small tydehaven.  
Westward from the point of Barchfleur there are foul passages, when the high land of Chierenburch cometh without the Cape la Wyke, you can take no hurt on them. A great league North-east from the point of Barchfleur there lieth a rock under the water but no ship can go over it.  
It is also good lying before Cape de Wyck, 
Road before Cape la Wyck.  right east from the two high cliffs in a sandy Bay at 6 fathom.  
And before Chierenburch lie the Cliffs or islands, which round about are fair, westward from them you go into the Fosse of Moberille, 
To sail into Moberille.  a tydehaven, on both sides having high cliffs or rocks four or five in number, you may pass in between them to Moberille at high water.  
A league westward from thence lieth Cape de Hage 
Cape de Hague.  or Hague, from Cape de Hage west & by north almost 3 leagues, lieth the Island of Aldernex, or Ornay, 
Ornay.  reaching east & west, between this Island of Ornay & Cape de Hague runneth the Rasse of Blanckert, 
Ras of Blanckaert.  but westward from Ornay lie the Casquettes, or Kiscasses, which in the next Chapter shall be described.  
Thus Chierenburch and the land after the Cape de Hague showeth itself, when it is southeast from you four leagues.   view of Chierenburch  

FOUR How these Countries lie distant one from the other.  

FRom Calis to swartness south-west 1 ½ league.  
From Calis Cliff to Tour d'ordre, or the Oldman south and north distant 2 leagues.  
From Calis cliff to the River of Some s. and n. 8 leagues.  
From the river of Somme to Treport s. s. w. 8 leagues.  
From Triport to Diepen south-west 8 leagues.  
From Diepen to Fecam west-south-west 11 leagues.  
From Fecam to Struysart south-west & by west 2 leagues.  
From Struysaert to Seynhead southsouthwest 2 leagues.  
From the Seynhead to Caen in the Fosse s. s. w. 8 leagues.  
Fron Caen to Dierliet or the point of Barchfleur n. w. 16 leagues.  
From Dierliet to Cape de Hague west, & w. & by n. 8 leagues.  
From Calis cliff to Diepen southsouthwest, and somewhat southerlyer 19 leagues.  
From Calis cliff to Struysaert or cape de Caux w. & by south, and somewhat southerlyer 29 leagues.  
From swartness to Diepen southsouthwest 16 leagues.  
From swartness to Struysaert south-west & by south, & somewhat westerlyer 29 leagues.    

V How all these places lie distant from other Countries.  

FRom swartness to Casquettes w. s.w. 48 leagues.  
From swartness to the Isle of Wight west, & somewhat southerlyer 36 leagues.  
From swartness to Bevechier west 20 leagues.  
From Diepen to the I'll of Wight w.n.w. 36 leagues.  
From Diepen to Bevechier northwest 21 leagues.  
From Diepen to Dover north 23 leagues.  
From Struysaert to the East end of the I'll of Wight northwest and somewhat northerlyer 29 leagues.  
From Struysaert to Bevechier south & north 24 leagues.  
From Struysaert to Fierley north and by east 28 leagues.  
From Struysaert to the point of Dover n. n. e. 32 leagues.  
From Stonehead to Dierliet or the point of Chierenburch west and somewhat northerlyer 20 leagues.  
Fron Seynhead or Stonehead to Portland n.w. & by w. 36 league.  
From Dierliet to the point of Chierenburch to Kasquettes west and by north 16 leagues.  
From Dierliet to the I'll of Wight north, and somewhat westerlyer 20 leagues.  
From Dierliet to Bevesier North-east & by north 29 leagues.  
From the Rasse of Blankart to Portland n.n.w. 17 leagues.  
From Cape de la Hague to Kasquettes w. & by n. 16 leagues.    

VI Of the falling of the streams, and what Moon maketh a high water on these coasts.  
BEfore Calis and swartness the flood falleth one quarter toward the land, than it falleth north-north-east & southsouthwest, and there on the land a southeast moon maketh an high water.  
From swartness to Bullen the flood falleth n. & by e. upon the land, but without in the Sea it falleth n. n. e. and s. s. w. a southsoutheast moon maketh a high water there.  
From Bullen to Diepen, and before the river of Some the flood falleth a quarter towards the land, than it falleth North-east and by north, a southsoutheast moon maketh the highest water in this haven.  
From Diepen to Struysaert without the land in the Trave, the flood falleth North-east & by east, & the ebb s. w. & by w.  
From Struysaert to Caen in the Fosse, the flood falleth southsouthwest, and the ebb n. n. e.  
From Seynhead to Barchfleur the flood falleth east and by north, & west & by south by the land, but in the channel without the land the flood falleth e. n. e. and the ebb w. s. w.  
At Newhaven & in the river of Roan, it is high water with a southeast moon.  
Before the haven of Caen it is high water with a southsoutheast moon, & within the haven with a s. & by e. moon.  
At Markel, lafoy Hung, Berchuliet, Chierenburch and Cape de Hague by the land a s. & by e. moon maketh a high watr.   

VII. At what depths you may see these places, and how you shall know the land.  
When you are through the Heads, against the Singles or about Deep, and being a little out of the channel, you may see the land at 20 and 21 fathom.  
The high land of Staples lieth southward of the Oldman or Tour d'ordre, it is very high land, the steeple of the Oldman is a thick flat steeple, and standeth upon the northpoint of the haven of Bullen, if you fall upon the river of Somme, it is shallow water, 8, 9, and 10 fathom, and then the high land of Estaples will be north-north-east from you.  
The land from the river of Somme to Deep is all sandy strand, and there you find diverse speere steeples, & some mills and trees upon the land.  
About 4 leagues without Struysaert it is 20 fathom deep.  
Five leagues without the land of Caen it is 22 fathom deep.  
Against the cape of Barchfleur and Chierenburch 4 leagues from the land it is 30 fathom deep.  
The land between Deep and Stonehead is known because there stand many churches with speere steeples and other trees and houses, but Struysaert is best to be known, because there is a high cliff thereon like to a high steeple, and in the Trave it is 16 or 17 fathom deep.  
Lafoy Hung is a flat steeple lying two leagues eastward from Barchfleur, there lie the two islands of S. Mark eastward, which you may sail round about.  
Barchfleur is a high point, and there standeth a flat steeple beneath upon the white land, & about eastward is more white land, and there stand two mills, & some houses upon it, whereby this point is well to be known.  
Upon Cape de la Hague standeth a castle with a small tower, and a little eastward within the land there standeth a speere steeple, and Chierenburgh lieth two leagues about eastward upon the water side, having a flat steeple.   

VIII. Under what degrees these places lie.  
CAlis cliff lieth under 50 degrees 52 minutes.  
The river of Some lieth under 50 degrees 18 minutes.  
The point of Struysard lieth under 49 deg. 45 minutes.   
Hear followeth the Card N. 4.   


Beschrivinge der Zeecuste●●an Picardy end Normandy Jtem de ghelegentheijt aller Rivieren. Reeden end Havenen, tusschen Cales end de Kiscassen ghelegen, watmen aldaer te ontm●eten end waermen 'em voor te wachten heeft, van nieus op veel plaetsen seer gecorrigeert en verbetert.  
Description des Costs marines' de Picardie et Normandy, monstrant la uraije situation de toutes les Rivieres, Rades et Haures entre Calais et les Casquettes, aussij tout ce qu'on peut rencontrer la environ, et de quoy on se doit garder, de nouveau emendé et corrige en plusieurs lieux   map of the coasts of Picardy and Normandy   

CHAPTER FOUR THE DESCRIPTION OF all the islands, Sea-coasts, and Havens of Normandy and Brittany, situate between Cape de Hague and the Seims, and how you shall sail by them  

I. The situation of the islands of Ornay, Casquettes, Garnsey, Sarck, and jarsey.  
ON the Cape de Hague, west and by north almost 3 leagues, lieth the Island Aldernex, which is also called Ornay, 
Ornay.  it is almost three leagues long, reaching east & west. The east end is fair, for you may there sail indifferently close by the land, but at the west end it is very foul. There lie some small islands off from the west end, when you are passed them, than you may well sail to jarsey, the islands lie close on the west end, and southward from these islands there shooteth out a rock or stone-riffe, when you are there within on the south side it is fair. The south point of Ornay is foul, he that will anchor there southward, he must be careful to set right east from the tydehaven.  
The Casquettes or Kiscasse 
Casquette●, Kiscasses.  are distant from this Island of Ornay w. n. w. and west and by north almost 3 leagues. The uttermost of them is a great high Clif which hath many rocks round about it. In the middle between this Cliff or Rock and the Island of Ornay lieth another rock, but that is not so high, but there are many other rocks, which reach out from it towards the other rock, when it is low water than you may see them all. These two rocks are by the French men called Casquettes, and by the Dutch men Kiscasses. Some Shippers and Sailors are much deceived herein, which know not these Rocks, calling the land of Chierburch the great Kiscas, and the land of Ornay the small Kiscas, for the Kiscasses are nothing else but mere rocks lying out in the Sea. About w. n. w. and w. & by n. from this Island of Ornay or Aldernex, there lie two other smooth great Rocks, called Barroches, 
Barroches.  which lie on the west end of Ornay close by the land.  
To know Ornay, you must understand that the north side hath a white hill or down, and the west end is high & steep downwards, at the east end it is hilly & dally, but lower then upon the west end, you may see a steeple or two upon it and some mills.  
Thus Ornay showeth when you sail along by it being four leagues from the land.   view of 'Ornay' (Channel Islands) 
Thus Ornay showeth itself with Casquettes, southsoutheast being three or four leagues from you.   view of 'Ornay' (Channel Islands) 
From Ornay to Garnsey the course is w. s.w. about 8 leagues but from the Casquettes to the west end of Garnesey 
Garnsey.  the course is west and by south 8 leagues. To know Garnesey, you must understand that the east end is flat and the west point steeping downwards.  
There stand two speere steeples upon it, and some mills, and the land is double when you sail northward by it about four leagues from the land, than it showeth as it is here set down.  
Thus Garnsey showeth when it is cross from you 4 leagues.   view of Guernsey 
But coming out of the west, & that Garnsey lieth e. n. e. or e. and by n. from you than it showeth thus.   view of Guernsey 
He that cometh out of the north, and intendeth to anchor under Garnesey, 
Road under Garnesey.  he must go westward about the rocks of Kafquettes, and so sail upon the northend of Garnesey, until the castle which standeth upon the rock be right against the south end of the land, which you must hold so, until you come by the castle, but beware of the little Island called Arem, 
Arem.  for it is almost full of rocks about it, between the castle which standeth in the water and the land is a good Rode, but if you will anchor without the castle, then do it at 12 and 13 fathom, or if you will anchor between the point of the land and the castle, then sail till you be at 6 or 7 fathom low water, and there anchor. You must understand that there abouts it ebbeth and floweth 6 or 7 fathom up and down at every tide.  
Or else help yourself with these marks: when you are west from the Kasquettes, then go southeast in, until that the east-end of Garnesey lieth south and by west from you, than sail upon it, than you shall see the castle upon the rock, & then do as you are taught before. Between the Kasquettes and Garnesey it is 35 and 40 fathom almost all stone ground.  
He that cometh out of the west, or from the Kasquettes & will anchor upon the southside of Garnesey, he must run close about by Cape de Gruse, or by the south-west end, along by the south side of the land, and when he is full half way from the land, he may anchor where he will at 18 or 19 fathom, and if the wind should chance to blow south-west, or w. s.w. he may go about the point, and anchor on the north or south side of the castle, as I said before.  
From the southside of Garnesey there lieth a rock above the water, which men must be careful to shun.  
There lieth also a row of rocks south and by west, & s. s. w. from Garnesey called Rockedoves, 
Rockedoves.  about 8 leagues from it, which are at least a league long.  
Fron Rockedoves to Cap Farelle the course is s. e. 11 leagues.  
From Rockedoves to the Island Briack s. & by w. 8 leagues.  
From Rockedoves to the Rocks called the monks west & by north 10 or 11 leagues.  
From Rockedoves to the rock Canine the course is south & by west 4 leagues.  
From Garnesey to the seven Islands the course is south-west and by south 17 leagues.  
From Garnesey to S. Maloes' the course is southsouthwest, and southeast and by south 17 leagues.  
From Garnesey to Sarcke the course is e. & by n. a league.  
Between Garnesey and Sarcke there lie two little Islands. arkly and Arem, 
ark. Arem.  you may sail between them: he that will anchor under Sarcke, must do it at 26 or 27 fathom, you may anchor round about Sarcke, but from the north & south ends there shooteth out certain rocks, whereof some of those at the north end lie under the water, but at the south end they lie above the water.  
Sarcke, & the Rasse of Ornay, or Cape de Hague lie distant south-west and by south, and North-east and by north 8 leagues.  
From Cape de Hague to the northwest end of jarsey the course is southsouthwest, than you run through between jarsey and Sarcke. 
Sarcke.  Sarcke and jarsey are distant 4. leagues.  
From Garnesey to jarsey 
jarsey.  the course is southeast 8 leagues, round about under jarsey is good Road, on the north side you may anchor all along at 10 & 11 fathom, at the west end there are some rocks, specially on the west point, 
Rhodes under jarsey.  there the rocks lie a good way off from the land, but between both points you may anchor at 10, 11, or 12 fathom. On the south side of jarsey it is also a good Road for northwest, and west-north-west winds. On the east side of jarsey it is good lying at road in Catelynen Bay, a little within, or eastward from the west point, on the north side of jarsey there lie some Rocks, which are called the Paternosters. 
Paternosters.  When you come out of the west, you may run between them and the land at 11 fathom, and anchor before the sandy Bay, called Trinity, there is good anckoring at 10 & 11 fathom, leaving the Paternosters, or Rocks of Pierlech north-north-west from you.  
From the west end of jarsey to S. Maloes' the course is south and by east, and s. s. e. 8 or 9 leagues, but about midway between the west end of jarsey, and the I'll of Sicember, which lieth before S. Maloes', there lie certain high rocks in the channel, which contain in circuit, to sail about them, 
Monks or Minx.  about 8 leagues, which a man must be careful to shun, which rocks are called the monks.  
From jarsey to Concale the course is southsoutheast, and south and by east, distant 11 or 12 leagues.   

II. To sail the coast along from Cape de Hague to S. Malo.  
Between Cap. de la Hague and the Island of Ornay, the Rasse of Blanckart or Ornay runneth in, from whence a man may sail through the islands in diverse manners to S. Maloes', as hereafter followeth and also along the coast by Granville and Concale.  
First from Cape de la Hague or Hagu, to Cape de Vorha, 
Cape de Vorha.  it is s. s. e. and south and by east about 8 leagues. From Cape de Hague there shooteth of a rock, which you must be careful to shun.  

Buf-rocks  When you are past Cape de Vorha, than you shall find three or four high rocks called the Buff, you may go about betwixt them and the firm land east and west: as also between the Rocks and jarsey, to the Riffe of Sand called Mortefam. 
Martefam.   
From Cap. de Vorha to the said Riffe of Mortefam the course is southsoutheast 8 leagues.  
Against this Riffe there lieth a row of Rocks reaching east & west more than a league into the Sea. Those that are most easterly lie above the water, these Rocks are called Bufkin. 
Bufkin.   
Being past Buff, you leave on your right hand, (as you do all other rocks,) a great row of Rocks which reach out from the southeast point of jarsey to Granville, which are called Eckron, 
Eckron,  all these rocks you leave on your right hand.  
He that saileth to Granville between Buff and jarsey, let him understand that he may anchor well under the north end of jarsey at 11 or 12 fathom.  
But coming by the sand or riff of Mortefam, there you must sail s. s. e. forward to Granville, between Mortefam & Bufkin.  
Right south from this riff of Mortefam there standeth a church with two steeples, called Quotanse. 
Quotanse.   
From the Rock Bufkin to the utter point of Granville 
Granville.  it is southeast 6 or 7 leagues, about the south point there lie two or three little rocks, going about behind them you go behind a stone or head, where at low water you sit dry.  
You must understand that between Cape de Hague and Granville the coast is full of houses, mills and trees, and that you may anchor all along by that coast at 6 and 7 fathom, specially on the south side of Cape de Hague. The Cape of Vorha and Granville are two points shooting or reaching out.  
About five leagues southward of Granville, there lieth an Island about a league from the firm land, whereon the castle or little town of S. Michael's 
Mont S. Michael.  lieth, having a high tower which may be seen far off, lying before the river of Averentie, which falleth dry into the Sea, at least a league long, so that from the strand you may see no Sea.  
And about west from Granville lie the rocks of Sausee or Santsee, 
Sausee or Santsee.  which are about 3 leagues long, reaching east & west.  
From Granville to the point of Concale 
Concale.  the course is south-west 5 leagues: you must run in close by the point for there it is 8 or 9 fathom deep, there lie three rocks off from the point, before them you may anchor at 10 fathom, but before the town it is shallow water.  
There lie two rocks also on the north side of the town, under them you may anchor at 5 or 6 fathom.  
Within the rocks to Mount S. Michael it is very rising ground, of 13, 9, & 6 fathom, it is all one, so that at a low water the whole shore is dry as I said before.  
From the uttermost rock of Concale to the East haven of S. Maloes' 
S. Maloes.  west, and w. & by s. it is 5 leagues.  
There lieth a little Island before the haven, whereon there standeth a church called Sicember, you may sail in on both sides thereof.  
The east channel 
The east-chanel.  goeth in by a high sharp rock, called the Meeusteen, and so you sail upon the west Island, than you see two small islands or rocks more, and on each of them there standeth a little house, which you leave on backborde, sailing upon the uttermost, and close in by it.  
When you are within the cliffs or rocks, whereon the houses stand, than you may anchor at 5 or 6 fathom low water. This east channel reacheth south in, and upon the west land in the Bay against S. Maloes', there are three or four little houses, which in sailing in you must keep close upon the two aforesaid islands whereon the houses stand, and you must sail right up upon them, until you are within the two islands or rocks, where you may anchor before the town at 5 fathom.  
At a low water it is there all full of rocks and stones, so that there you can hardly see through them, but sailing in the channels of S. Maloes', at half flood, you can do no hurt, so you sail not upon any high rocks, for at high water it is there 14 fathom deep, and it floweth every tide 7 fathom high.  
The west channel beginneth to run in a little westward of Sicember. 
The westchanel of S. Maloes'.  Sicember is the Island whereon the little church standeth, there westward lie two or three great rocks, whereby you run in leaving a great rock on starboard, running in close by the rocks that be most North-east and by south, and e. s. e. till you are against the two rocks whereon the two houses stand, then turn southward up to the town as aforesaid.  
The marks of the west channel are these, 
Marks of the westchanel.  there standeth a mill on high upon the way to the town, when that is right upon the north or east corner of the town of S. Maloes', let it stand so till you come to the aforesaid islands with houses.  
The south channel of S. Maloes', 
The south channel of S. Maloes'.  runneth along by the land between it and the rocks, where you leave all the rocks to seaward, keeping the west point of the haven right against the south corner of the town, so that between the town and the islands you may see the place whereon the mills stand, and so you run upon the point of the haven in, and close in by the point, and when you are at the point, than you may anchor in the Bay where the houses stand, at five fathom low water, in the middle of the haven there lie two or three sands, stone ground which you must shun.  
At S. Maloes' an east and west moon maketh a high water, & the stream falleth into the west haven, through the cliffs or rocks, and out again at the east channel: which you must mark well when you go in at the west channel of S. Maloes'.   

III. The situation from S. Maloes' to S. Paul's de Lion.  
ABout five leagues west from the south channel of S. Maloes' there lieth a great sandy Bay, where a man may lie safe from all winds, at 6 or 7 fathom, you anchor under a great cliff or rock, turning westwards up towards the mills with the trees.  
And almost three leagues northwest from this foresaid Sandbay lieth Cape de Farelle, 
Cape de Farelle.  which also is called Cape de Late, because the castle la Late standeth east from this point, there also is a good Road for a west and south-west wind.  
West from Cape de Farelle lieth a great cliff or rock, and west from it you may anchor in the great Sandbaye.  
You may know Cape de Farelle by the aforesaid rock, there are many Sand bays also in the strand, & upon the point standeth a great castle.  
From Cape de Farelle to the north end of the Island Briack 
Island of Briack.  it is west and by north 13 or 14 leagues.  
Between them both there lieth the Havens or Rivers of S. Brieux and Benit, 
S. Brieux. S. Benit.  and about west from Cape de Farelle there lieth a great row of outrockes above the water, two leagues from the land.  
Two leagues northwest from S. Maloes' channel lieth the east bank, right over against Cape de Farelle, there you may ride under at 6 or 7 fathom.  
You shall know the Island of Briack when you come out of the east by two mills which stand upon the land about two cables length one from the other, and between the two mills there standeth a high round hill, and on it a house, it reacheth southsouthwest, & n. n. e. almost 3 leagues in length.  
You may sail round about this Island, and anchor when you will, it is all good ground, although there lie some rocks round about it, as one a great way from the north point, called Souffe, which you must take heed of, and beware also of a row of rocks at the north end, lying under the water.  
In the Trave of jarsey, Rockedove, and the Island Briack it is 20, 25 and 30 fathom.  
West-south-west a league and an half from the Island Briack lie the Outrockes of Pickels, 
Pickels rocks.  which you may sail round about. They lie 4 leagues from the firm land, and east near to the firm land there lie many blind rocks which you must shun.  
Four leagues west from Briack, lieth Portblanke 
Port blanc.  upon a great river called Lantriliers, East from this haven lie many Outrockes, you may sail between them at 6 or 7 fathom with a low water, about behind the Seven islands, and come westward by the Green Island into the Sea again.  
From Pickels aforesaid to the Seven islands it is 8 leagues east and by north, 
Sept Isles.  & w. & by s. you cannot sail through nor between those Seven islands, but between the firm land & the Seven islands, there runneth a white channel through.  
The Seven islands are to be sailed upon at 45 fathom, and when you are against them than you see a steeple upon the firm land, whereby they are well to be known, this church is called Our Lady of Brightness.  
And from the Island which lieth furthest east there shooteth off a Sand, at the end whereof there lieth a rock, for a good mark to sail about this Sand.  
Above a league south from Seven islands lieth the Green Island otherwise called Tabeliuck, 
Green Island. Taveliuc.  which may be sailed round about, and from thence runneth the deep to the Driakelpotten northwest into the Sea.  
The Seven islands are about 8 or 9 leagues long, and northwest from the west end of them, there lieth a rock under the water which at low water is above it.  
From these islands to Driakelpotten 
Driakelpottes.  the course is west-south west, & e n. e. 5 leagues, these are all mighty and fearful Outrockes, spreading out far and broad, and lie without the coast of the land about five or six leagues.  
Between the Driaklepotten and the Sept Isles lieth the river of Laminoe, and east from it the Green Island or Taveliuc, which may be anckored round about.  
The haven behind the Green Island is called Ulles haven, 
Vlles' haven.  to sail into it you must leave Taveliuc on backborde, and you must go in south, it is a great creak, than the river will open itself, but you must take heed of the northside of the river for it is foul.  
To know the Driaklepotten, you shall see a high steeple standing upon the land, although there it must be clear wether before you can have any sight of the land.  
Along by this coast it is 50 and 45 fathom deep, and you may easily see the land, so that in the night time you may come no nearer unto it then 45 fathom.  
He that cometh from Voert and will sail to S. Maloes', must go no nearer east with a south wind, than eastnortheast, but if the wind be west then go n. e. & by e. until you have Driaklepotten on your side, otherwise the flood would draw you thither, the flood falleth there northwest and southeast in behind the Seven islands, but by day there is no danger when you can see.  
Behind the Driaklepotten lieth the haven of S. john de Doye, 
S. john de Doye.  almost three leagues westward from the Green Island, & as much eastward from Morlions, it is a tydehaven, from thence you may go to Morlions through the rocks, and anchor at 5 or 6 fathom low water.  
West from the Driaklepotten or pots, lieth a great rock: about s. w. & by s. from the same lieth the east channel of Morlions, 
Morlions.  about 4 leagues distant.  
Westsouthwest, & west & by south from the aforesaid rock, 5 or 6 leagues lieth the west channel of Morlions, running in by a long craggy rock, you may sail into this channel south, and south and by west, to the castle of Morlaix, 
The castle of Morlaix  and being about the castle you may sail eastward on through the rocks, and go from the long rock n. n. e. and n. & by e. out of the east haven into the Sea again, as the stream serves. The flood cometh from the northwest.  
Being within the castle of Morlaix, and desiring to go to Morlions they sail east through the rocks, it is all broken land, where with low water it is five fathom deep. But if you will put into S. Paul's de Lion, 
S. Paul de Lion.  then sail to the great rock with the two horns or saddle, and sail close along by the rock, & when you have gotten about the rock, then choose your land, there lieth a village upon the land called Plainpoul, 
Plainpoul.  sail to it, for there eastward the river goeth in. These are all tyde-havens, but between the rock of Morlions and the Island called Bas, it is deep enough at low water to hide a ship.   

FOUR The situation of the land between S. Paul de Lyon and Heysant.  
TO know the land of S. Paul you must understand that it is double land, and that there stand two speere steeples upon the church, and upon the Island de Bas there stand two stakes up, like unto mills, it lieth cross before them. This Island at the east end hath a high craggy rock, and when you are east from this rock, than you may see two speere steeples standing a little the one from the other, which are the steeples of Plainpoul, & you shall also see the castle of Morlaix lying southeast from you, upon a high rock.  
The aforesaid uttermost craggy rock of Morlaix lieth from the point of the Island de Bas east, and east and by south 4 or 5 leagues, you may run along between the firm land & these rocks to Seven islands, and in many places it is good anchor ground, for they are all great creeks, and between the rocks of Morlions and the Island de Bas it is deep enough at a low water to hide a ship, you may go in on both sides of the Island de Bas at 7 or 8 fathom with a low water, and anchor where you will.  
Thus the land of S. Paul showeth itself to the Four toe, when you sail along by it four leagues from the land.  
S. Paul de Lyon. Obreurack. Le Four.   view of Saint-Pol-de-Leon 
Behind the Isle de Bas lieth the town of Roscou, which hath many great ships, because the water is deep there.  
To go into the east channel, 
East channel.  when you are passed the high rock, and come against the point of the firm land, you must go in between it and the Isle de Bas, about west, and west & by south, and anchor at half way the low Island de Bas, at 8 or 9 fathom than you lie in the haven of Roscou.  
To go into the west channel, 
West have or channel.  which goeth in by the land of Voert, you shall see two great long rocks lying westward, close by the firm land, and from the point of the land right east of the easterlyest long rock, there goeth a Sand off from the firm land, which is the west side of the west haven of Roscou, which runneth in by the west end of Isle de Bas, about southeast, and when you are within, then turn North-east up under the Island, there is the best Road, than Roscou will lie south, and south & by east from you.  
It is from the Island de Bas to Voert or Bacovens w. s. w. & w. & by s. about 13 leagues. But from Roscou to Abbewrack 
Abewrack  it is almost 7 leagues.  
About northwest a league without the rocks of Abbewrack lieth a row of rocks under the water, therefore those that put by night out of Voert, or that will laveere to the Four, must go no nearer to the land of Abbewrack than 4.5 fathom.  
To know the land about the Voert, there lieth many white pieces of land, as if they were Sandbayes, & along to the Voert many long rocks, like as if they were villages, and upon the land you may see some houses standing, whereby this land is well to be known.  
La Four and Heysant are distant almost 3 leagues, west-south west, and eastnortheast.   

V To sail between the Voert and Heysant through Conquer & Fontenay. Also the situation of all Creeks, Havens, and Rhodes lying there abouts.  
THe Voert or Backovens, 
Bacovens.  in French called le Four, 
Le Four,  is known by many out rocks which stand like black villages, and in the firm land there are many Sandbayes.  
And you shall know Heysand, 
Heysant.  for that at the south end it goeth most part sloping down, and in the middle you see a small flat steeple, as the figure enseving show you.  
Thus Heysant showeth itself when it is s. & by e. from you about 4 leagues.  
Thus Heysant showeth itself when it is s. e. from you about 4 leagues.   view of Heysant 
When Heysant is e. n. e. from you about three leagues it showeth thus.  
Heysant three or four leagues n. n. w. from you showeth thus.   view of Heysant 
From the Four to S. Mathewes 
S. Mathewes.  point it is s. s. e. 4 leagues. He that will sail to Voert he must run close by the land of Voert or le Four, there lie rocks like black villages or houses along by the land, & behind them are many white Sandbayes (as I have said before, showing how to know the land) sail close along by the rocks, till you come to the point. Upon the point there lie also two rows of small rocks, which you may pass along by at half the length of a pieces shot, or the length of two cables, and when you are about the point you shall see three heaps of rocks lying each a quarter of a league from the other, sail along close by them because of the north Hagles, which lie between Heysant and the Four.  
When you are against the middlemost heap of rocks, then hold S. Mathewes Closter under the point of Conquets-ort or corner, & sail right upon it until you be close upon the point, without turning far from it, because of the Bellaert, which lieth cross over about two cables length from the said point and with a spring tide is above water.  
And when you are by Conquets-ort or corner run a cables length along by the same until you see the haven open, 
Conquer.  but take good heed of the Fenestiers 
Fenestiers.  which lie a cables length from the land, on the east point or side of Conquets haven.  
Pascaarte vande Zeecusten en landen van Normandy en Bretaigne, tusschen de Cabo de Hagu westwaert tot om Heijssant en de Zeijins, vertoonen de wonderlijcke gebroocken landen, menichte van Eijlanden, en clippen, aen die gewesten geleghen, hoemen die beseijlen shall, en wat men mente schouwen heeft, alles gestelt op sijne rechte streckingen distantien en hoochten.  
Cart marine des Costes de Normandie et Bretaigne, entre le Cap de Hagu verse ovest visques a Heysant et les Seems, monstrant au vif les terres merveille●ses et entrerompues, lafoy multitude des isles, guez et escueils, situez ausdictes endroicts, comment le tout on navigera, et dequoij on sc gardern, le tout mis selon ses vr●ijes routs, distances, et elevations ou haulteurs du Pole.   map of the coasts of Normandy and Brittany 
When Halman (which is a high rock lying at the east end of Heysant) is over against the northwest end of the northerlyest Cheminees or Kimmenesses than you are against the Hagles. 
Halman. Marks of the Hagles   
He that will sail into breast water, 
breast water.  must understand, that about a league eastward of S. Mathewes point there lieth a rock which he must shun. To sail into breast water from S. Mathewes point go e. s. e. and keep the north end of the southerlyest Kiminesses without S. Mathewes point, so long until that the mill upon the north land is north from the trees, then sail southward by the rock, and so you cannot err. You may sail within two cables length along by the north land, until that breast is without the point, & then sail up to it. Or if you will sail otherwise into breast water, northward of the rock aforesaid, which lieth about a league within S. Mathewes point right against Bartrams Bay, then keep the north land well, and hold the southerlyest Kimmenesse covered behind the great rock which lieth off from S. Mathewes point, and so sail upon the west point of Bartrams Bay, until that the mill which standeth upon the north land be n. w. & by n. and the trees n.n.w. from you, than you are passed the stone. But it is best to go southward by the stone, it lieth about half a piece shot from the north land. If you will go into the haven of breast, then sail most part along by the north land, so long till that you come upon the point of Breest. When the south point of breast water is right against the point of Croduin, 
Baghin rocks.  than you are against Baghin, which are a row of rocks lying in the mouth of breast water, about two cables length from the north side, & at a low water are seen, being there within, you may turn up eastward or southward before the rivers of Landerneau or Lefou, & anchor there against the south land, at 10, 12, and 13 fathom, before the little town called old Croduyn. breast water for the most part reacheth in eastnortheast, there it floweth every tide three fathom up and down, and a south-west & by west, and North-east & by north moon there maketh a high water.  
He that lieth within breast, must pay about twelve pence for anchor money, 
Croixduin.  & for that you have a bill to signify that you are free there, so that if you lose your ship upon the coast of Brittany, you might there freely lay hold on your goods, otherwise it is not free: there you lie at anchor in the Sea at 8 or 9 fathom, and at land your ship is made fast with a rope at a tree.  
To sail from S. Mathewes point to Claesduinen or Croduin, keep the southerlyest Kimmenesses without the Blank Moines, & go forward e. s.e. until you come to the west point of Claesduynen, and when you are about the point, and may see the Bay open, than you shall see a church stand upon a piece of land distant from the main, run up to it, and anchor about the church at 6 or 7 fathom. Croduin is a great creak, & lieth almost 3 leagues distant from S. Mathewes point, right over against Croduin lieth Bartrams Bay, 
Bartrams bay.  there you may anchor safe against a north, and n. w. wind, at 10 or 11 fathom.  
The Cheminees 
Cheminees.  or Kimmenesses lie southward from Heysant, and westward from S. Mathewes point: between the Kimmenesses and Heysant, a ship that will may well sail through, it is there 6 or 7 fathom deep with low water. If a man by reason of the flood cannot sail above Heysant and the Cheminees, he may well sail through between them (as I said before) it is there broad and deep enough, the channel reacheth about n. e. & s. w. & going in the middle of the water you cannot err.  
He that will sail over the Trave from S. Mathewes point to the Emperor & Empress, must have good regard to the rocks which lie between them. The Colengier 
Colengier.  lieth from S. Mathewes point s. s. e. almost two leagues.  
The Hen with her Chickens, 
Hen with her Chickens.  and the middlemost Foukenesses lie from S. Mathewes point s. e. & by e. almost 2 leagues.  
The Foukenesses lie from the west point of Croduyn about w. s. w. almost half a league.  
The southerlyest Foukenesse 
Foukenesses.  lieth from the northerlyest half a league, or two shoots of a piece, and at a high water it is covered: and n. n. e. a cables length from it there lieth a blind rock, which at allow water is also seen. The said southerlyest Foukenesse lieth south-west & by south from Croixduin. There lieth also another blind rock, westward from the northerlyest Foukenes, which also at a low water is uncovered.  
The Hen lieth w. s. w. a pieces shot & an half from Foukenesse, it is a round sharp rock, which round about is deep and fair, at 6 & 7 fathom. The Chickens 
The Chickens.  lie a bases shot n. w. & by w. from the Hen, which are two sharp stumps, which with low water are even above the water, and lie about west from the northerlyest Foukenesse.  
The Scheminkel hills lie southward from the Foukenesses, 
Scheminckle bergen or rocks.  you may run between them at 10 fathom, to the west point of Croduin, there also is good road and anchor ground.  
The Ras of Fontenay 
Rasse of Fontenay.  lieth from S. Mathewes point south & by east five leagues, if you will sail from S. Mathewes point over the Trave in the Ras of Fontenay, then go south and by east, and hold the mill of Fenestiers, which standeth upon the east point of Conquets haven, over the point of S. Mathewes Closter, as long as you can see it, and when you come before the Emperor 
Emperor.  and the Empress, shun the Emperor, because of the rocks thereof which lie under the water, and beware also of the Empress, 
Empress  for from it also there runneth a sand called the Calf, 
Calf.  over which the stream breaketh very much, and falleth very stiff from it, therefore mark your streams here well, for the stream runneth cross over this Ras of Fontenay, so that with a south-west wind, and an out fall or ebb it is very dangerous to put into that channel, as also with a calm. This channel runneth through s. s. w.  
The Seims stand a little south from the Emperor, and reach about 3 leagues w. n. w. into the Sea, 
Seims rocks.  & about northwest from them lieth a rock which you must shun.  
Between the said Seims and Heysant, reacheth Breesand 
Breesond.  in e. n. e. against the which reacheth that of S. Mathewes point into the Sea, w. n. w. five leagues.  
East from Fontenay or the Empress lieth Friesebaye, 
Friese bay.  there you may anchor against a s. e. & by s. wind, there is good anchor ground.  
And further east from Friesebaye lieth Boldavids' bay, 
Boldavids' bay.  a deep wide bay reaching in e. n. e. on the east side of the haven there lie two islands or rocks, which you may anchor under, there you may lie safe from all winds.   

VI The running of the streams, and what Moon maketh a high water there.  
A South & by east moon maketh a high water at Cap de Hague by land.  
In the Ras of Blankaert or Ornay the flood falleth s. w and the ebb North-east, but here you can reckon no falling of streams, for one quarter of a tide the flood falleth cross into the Casquettes, forth of the one haven into the other, and so out again, but most North-east, and n. e. and by n. through the islands, where a n. and by e. and s. & by w. moon maketh a full Sea. In Garnsey also it is high water with a n. & by e. and s. & by w. moon.  
At Concalo & Granville a w.n.w. moon maketh highwater  
At S. Maloes' the streams run in at the westchanel through the rocks, and run out again at the east channel, which a man must remember when he will go into S. Maloes'.  
An east and west moon maketh a high water at S. Maloes'.  
From the Island of Briack in the creak or haven of Benit the stream falleth southeast, but in the channel it falleth e. s. e. and w. n. w. an east & west moon maketh high water there.  
Behind the Casquettes the tide turneth against the Son, so that there it is never still water.  
On the east side of the Island of Briack, in the channel in the Road, the flood goeth s. s.e. & a west moon maketh high water.  
Between Garnsey and the Island of Briack in the channel, the stream falleth e. s.e. & w.n.w. & it is there full Sea with a west-south-west moon.  
Between the Septisles and Garnsey a w. s.w. moon also maketh a high water in the channel.  
Between Briack and the SeptIsles the stream falleth west, and west & by north, & a w. & by s. moon maketh a full Sea.  
Between the Seven islands and the outrockes of Morlions the flood falleth in behind the Driaklepottes, to the Greene-Iland, and falleth in s. s.w. but in the channel it falleth most east, and e. & by n. and at Morlaix and S. Paul's a w. & by s. moon maketh a high water, and in the channel a south-west & by west, and a west south-west moon.  
At Septisles and S. Paul de Lyon a w. & by s. moon maketh a high water.  
From Morlions or the Island de Bas to Voert the stream falleth w. & by s. and a w. s.w. and w. & by s. moon maketh high water there. Without Heysant a w. s.w. moon maketh a high water, and within the Voert a s. w. & by w. moon.  
Without the Isle de Bas in the channel the stream falleth eastnortheast, and w. s.w.  
The flood falleth very stiff upon Heysant, and through the Chimenees cross over the Voert to the Bacovens, he that cometh to sail about Heysant he must be careful hereof.  
Before S. Mathewes point a s. w. & by w. moon maketh a high water. From the Four to S. Mathewes point the ebb fale south and by east, and the flood north and by west.  
In Bresondt between Heysant & the Seims a w. s.w. moon maketh a high water. The flood runneth into Breesond towards Breest, it falleth also by S. Mathewes point in towards Backovens, and it raketh there very much.  
The flood falleth through very stiff between the Emperor and falleth thwartwise over to the Empress, & so falleth with great rakings over the Calf, which is a rock, which stretcheth of from the Empress, & then falleth forward also north, & north and by west into S. Mathewes point. But every one that will sail through this way must be wary lest he be carried away with the stream in calm wether, and with a storm out of the north or south it is not good to come into this channel with an out or in-fall. A south-west and by south, and a North-east & by north moon maketh a high water.  
Upon all the coast of Brittany, Poictou, & Gascoigne a south-west and a North-east moon maketh a high water, and there they make no reckoning of any falling of the stream.   

VII. Of the depths against these places, and at what depths a man may see these countries.  
Without the Kiscasses about three leagues from the land it is 35 and 40 fathom deep, there is also a pit about n. n. e. 4 leagues from Garnsey where it is 80 or 90 fathom deep, otherwise it is deep there abouts 40 fathom.  
About four leagues from Garnsey, when it lieth southeast from you, it is 40 fathom deep.  
About the Driaklepottes along the coast it is 50 and 45 fathom, and at such a depth a man may see the land but by night you must come no nearer to it then 45 fathom.  
You may well run to the Sept Isles at 45 fathom.  
Between Ornay and jarsey it is 20 and 28 fathom deep.  
Against the Sept Isles about 5 or 6 leagues from the land it is 40 and 45 fathom.  
Against S. Paul's de Lion about five leagues from the land it is 45 and 50 fathom.  
Against Isle de Bas, & Abbewrac, or Marwanen five leagues from the land it is 50 and 55 fathom.  
At the Backovens or the Four a man may see the land at 15 fathom, and you may know it by many outrockes, which stand like black villages, and in the firme-land there are many Sandbayes. And you shall know Heysant because at the southend it goeth slope downwards, and in the middle you see a small flat tower, and southeast from the same Island five or six leagues from the land it is 75 fathom deep, and you may see the land from the poop of the ship.  
Upon S. Mathewes point there standeth a flat tower, and coming out of the Sea, you may see that flat tower over the Kimenesses.  
At the Seims and the Sheets you may see the land at 60 & 65 fathom. The Seims reach westnorthwest from the Emperor into the Sea, and about a mile from thence northwest, there lieth a rock which you must shun, and right there without it is 50 fathom deep. In Breesond it is 45 fathom deep. North from Heysant it is 50 fathom deep, and you may also see the land. Without the Seims it is 55 fathom deep, and then you may see the sheets also.   

VIII. How these Country's aforesaid lie distant one from the other.  

FRom Cape de Hague to Casquettes w. & by n. 8 leagues.  
From Cap. de Hagu to Cap. de Vorha s. & by e. 7 leagues.  
From Cape de Vorha to Granville s. s. e. 9 leagues.  
From Granville to Mount S. Michael s. s. e. 5 leagues.  
From Granville to the West point of Concale s. w. 5 leagues.  
From thence to the east channel of S. Maloes' west, and west and by south 5 leagues.  
From the Island Sicember before S. Maloes' to Cape de Farelle, east and west 7 leagues.  
From Cap. de Farelle to the Island Briack w. & by n. 13 leagues.  
From the I'll of Briack to Pickels rocks w. & by s. 2 leagues.  
From Pickels to the Sept Isles w. s. w. 9 leagues.  
From Sept Isles to the rocks of Driaklepottes westsouthwest 5 leagues.  
From Driaklepottes to Isle Bas or Westpalen w. s.w. 9 leagues.  
From the Isle Bas or Westpalen to the Four w. s.w. 16 leagues.  
From the Four to S. Mathewes point southsoutheast, & southeast and by south 4 leagues.  
From S. Mathewes point to Claesduin or Croduin east-south-east almost 3 leagues.  
From S. Mathewes point to the Ras of Fontenay, or near to the Emperor s. & by e. 5 leagues.  
The Ras of Fontenay runneth through between the Empress and the Emperor s. s. w. and n. n. e.  
From Cape de Hague to the west end of jarsey southsouthwest 10 leagues. 

Then you go through between Sarke and jarsey.    
From the Kiscasses to the west end of Garnsey south-west & by south. 5 or 6 leagues.  
From Garnsey to jarsey s. e. & by e. 6 leagues.  
From Garnesey to S. Maloes' s. s.e. & n.n.w. 16 leagues.  
From the southend of jarsey to S. Maloes' s. s.e. 9 or 10 leagues.  
From Garnesey to Sept Isles s. w. & by south 17 leagues.  
From Garnesey to the rocks called Rockedoves southsouthwest and n. n. e. 8 or 9 leagues.  
From Rockedoves to the rock called Mincke west and by north 9 or 10 leagues.  
From Rockedoves to the Island Briack s. & by w. 8 leagues.  
From Kiscasses to S. Paul de Lyon south-west 29 leagues.  
From Kiscasses to the Four s. w. and by w. 45 leagues.    

IX. How these places lie distant from other Countries.  

FRom Casquettes to the Sorlinges west and somewhat northerly 56 leagues.  
From the Kiscasses to Startpoint w. n. w 19 leagues.  
From Kiscasses to Portland n. and by w. 13 leagues  
From Casquettes to the I'll of Wight n. e. & by n. 20 leagues.  
From Casquettes to Bevesier or the Beach North-east & by east 37 leagues.  
From Garnsey to Lezard west & by north. 37 leagues.  
From Sept Isles to Lezard n. w. & by w. 26 leagues.  
From Sept Isles to Startpoint north and by west, & somewhat westerlyer 37 leagues.  
From Sept Isles to Portland n.e. and by n. 33 leagues.  
From S. Paul de Lion to Lezard n.w. and by n. 29 leagues.  
From S. Paul de Lion to Startpoint n. & by e. 29 leagues.  
From S. Paul de Lion to Portland n. e. & by n. 40 leagues.  
From Heysant to Portland n. e. 54 leagues.  
From Heysant to Startpoint n. e. & by n. 40 leagues.  
From Heysant to Lezard north 29 leagues.  
From Heysant to Sorlinges n. w. & by n. 37 leagues.  
From Heysant to Cape de Clara in Ireland n. w. 84 leagues.  
Fron Heysant to the Island S. Michael's s. w. & by w. 360 leagues.  
From Heysant to Cap Finisterre southsouthwest & somewhat westerlyer 123 leagues.  
From Heysant to Cizarga s. s. w. 113 leagues.  
From Heysant to Cape de Prior s. s.w. 107 leagues.  
From Heysant to Cape de Pinas south 97 leagues.  
From Heysant to Laredo s. s. e. 113 leagues.   
When you go south and by east from Heysant, than you go right without the Seims.   

X. Under what degrees these places lie.  

THe Casquettes or Kiscasses lie under 49 degrees 48 min.  
The Sept Isles lie under 49 degrees.  
Heysant lieth under 48 degrees 30 minutes.  
The Seims lie under 48 degrees 5 minutes.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 5.   

CHAPTER V HOW A MAN MAY sail along by the Coast of Brittany and Poictou, from Seims to the Island of S. Martin together with all the Rivers, Havens, and islands, lying in and about the same Coast.  

I. The situation of the land between Seims and Blavet.  
THe Seims 
Seims.  (as in the chapter aforegoing is declared) are right southward from the Emperor, and westnorthwest almost 3 leagues into the Sea. From the uttermost of the Seimes to the Westpenmarques it is east-south-east and somewhat southerlyer about 13 leagues. But from the Ras or from Fontenay to Westpenmarques the course is southeast 9 leagues.  
Between them both lieth Odegerne 
Odegerne.  a fair haven, about five leagues eastsoutheast from Fontenay, right before the channel or haven there lieth a bank, which you may run by on both sides at six fathom. The south point of this haven is shallow, therefore sail in by the east side, and there you have not less than three fathom at low water.  
The knowledge of the land between Fontenay & Odegerne is two round hills, which the Hollanders call the Slaeplakens, that is the Sheets, 
Sheets.  westward from which there stand two mills, it is a very craggy point, which without the Seims you may well see at 55 fathom, whereby this land is well to be known.  
From Odegerne southeast & by south lie the Westpenmarques, 
Westpenmarques.  which are good to know, for such as have once seen them, for on the southeast end there standeth a thick flat steeple, & a little westward there standeth a speere steeple, and yet somewhat more westerly against the high land there standeth a village like a castle, at the east side whereof there standeth a flat steeple, there lie two great rocks close by the land.  
The Westpenmarques run from the firm land more than a league southeast into the Sea, you sail east into them, leaving all the rocks on the left hand, running along by the strand, until you come by a great rock, which you must sail southward about, leaving it on your right hand, than you turn up northnorthwest, and so anchor right within the rock, at three fathom low water, than you can see no Sea, but at a low water it rolleth very hard through the rocks.  
You may from thence run at a high water southeast between the rocks into the Sea again, but you must take good heed. Without the great rock in the entry of the haven it is ten fathom deep, so that a man might there hide a great ship if need were.  
Thus the Slaeplakens or the Sheets with Westpenmarques show themselves when you sail along by them, and are about four leagues cross from them.  
Fontenay. Odegerne. Westpenmarques,   view of Penmarch 
From the Westpenmarques to Eastpenmarques or Glenant 
Eastpenmarques. Glenant.  the course is eastsoutheast, southward about, with such a course you may run far enough without, & behind the Eastpenmarques lieth a haven called Bindet, 
Binde●.  the east end whereof is full of rocks, you enter into that haven by these marks: there standeth a mill far within the land, which cometh over against a little Castle which standeth upon a point within the haven, which you must hold standing one over the other, that is the east mill, and go in North-east and North-east and by north, and so you can get no hurt on neither side of the land, and then anchor against the town, you may also sail behind the Eastpenmarques, 
Road behind the Eastpenmarques.  the firm land is sandy strand, where you may anchor at 10 or 11 fathom, nearest the Island of Motten which is very fair.  
A league south-west from Gloyland, by us called the Eastpenmarques, there lieth a great rock under the water, whereon it raketh continually, within & without this rock it is 40 fathom deep, and when you go eastsoutheast from the Westpenmarques than you run far enough without them.  
Thus the land of Eastpenmarques showeth itself when you sail by it.   view of Penmarch 
About two leagues eastward of Glenant lie the islands of Motten, 
Motten.  you may sail between them and the firm land to Groye or Blavet, there it is 9 or 10 fathom deep. But if you will go through between Glenant and Motten, sail along by the Island of Motten, till you are without Glenant, & then sail whither you would be.  
Thus the land eastward of Glenant or Gloyland to Groye when you sail along by it, openeth itself.   view of Glenan 
From Motten to Groye 
Groye.  the course is east and by south eight leagues. To know Groye, you must understand that there stand three or four mills upon it, and the east end goeth slope downwards, whereby it is easy to be known.  
When Groye is n. n. e. from you four leagues it showeth thus.   view of Groix 
Under Groye it is good anckoring for a south-west wind, at 6 or 7 fathom, though at the southeast end of Groye there lieth a Sand, which you must beware of, for there it is foul ground.  
Right behind the Island of Groye lieth the haven of Blavet 
Blavet.  which runneth in North-east and by north, at 4 or 5 fathom, upon the west side of this haven there standeth a high speere steeple called Quinperley. 
To sail into Blavet  The Barse lieth on the east side of the haven, which is a rock which cometh off from the east side of the haven. On the east side also there lie two blind rocks which you must be very wary of as you enter in, you must sail in along by the west side. When you are within it is wide and broad, you may there anchor before the Island which lieth in the middle of the haven at 5 or 6 fathom, it is 3 or 4 fathom deep at low water.   

II. The situation of Belisle and the islands lying there about, also the Creeks of Morbeam and Croisil or Croiswyke.  
FRom Westpenmarques to Belisle 
Belisle.  or Boelin, the course is eastsoutheast 21 leagues. But from Groye to Belisle it is southsoutheast 5 leagues. To know Belisle you must understand that on the northwest end it hath a rugged point, wherein there is a great saddle, you may also see some houses there upon the land, and the east end goeth whole sloping down, you may see it at 55 fathom.  
Thus Belisle openeth itself when the northwest end is east from you about four leagues.  
When Belisle is North-east from you 4 leagues then it showeth ihus.   view of Belle Isle 
He that will seek harbour under Belisle, must shun the northwest end, for there under the water there lieth a rock a good way from the land. When you are there within, than you sail about two towes length along by the land, and within a bases shot about by the north point, 
Road under Belisle.  till you come to the village with the speere steeple, called S. Paul's, there standeth a castle upon the point, westward from the aforesaid steeple, anchor within the point at 9 or 10 fathom, than you lie safe from a south, south-west, west, and northwest winds, if it bloweth any thing northerlyer you may remove before the east end, which is half a league broad, at 10 and 11 fathom, the Island reacheth s. e. and n. w. and as the wind bloweth so a man must remove from one Road to another, it is good lying there. There lie many islands behind Belisle, 
islands behind Belisle.  but you may sail behind them to Groye, and Morbeam, in some places having good Rhodes, and specially the middlemost which hath a good haven, which goeth in by a great rock, but to sail through there & back again, a man must have some knowledge thereof, because there lie many rocks both above and under the water. The east-Iland is called the Cardinal, 
Cardinal.  and is distant from the east-end of Belisle e.n.e. and e. & by n. about 4 leagues, they lie 3 leagues from the firm land, where there lie two great creeks or rivers, from whence a man may sail through between the firm land, and the aforesaid islands lying behind Belisle to Croiswyke or Croixisle, and also up the River of Nantes called Loire.  
He that will sail into Morbeam 
Morbeam.  let him go from the east-Iland called the Cardinal, to the Mayland n.w. & n.n.w. there it is deep 8 or 9 fathom, then go somewhat northerlyer upon the point which lieth west from S. jolme and run in by it, within the point it is 6, or 7, & also 8 fathom deep. When you are within the point, leave the west-point & run close in by the eastpoint, and as soon as you are within the west-point of the haven, then take good heed to your stream, for the flood falleth very stiff into the river of Fauns, then choose the westland at 6 or 7 fathom, there it is all shallow, and when the steeple of Morbeam upon the westland is west from you, than anchor in the middle of the haven at 9 fathom, than Aury the innermost steeple lieth n. n. w. from you, and the other steeple n. & by e. but the point of Mayland e. s. e.  
The little Island that lieth in the Sea lieth e. s. e. & w. n. w. from the west-point of the haven, and the land from the haven to S. jolmes steeple n.w. and s. e. and so to Croiswyke w.n.w. and e. s.e.  
This Island aforesaid lying without the haven of Morbeam, on the northend is foul, you must leave it on the left hand, and run to the point of the Mayeland, and close in by it as aforesaid, in the Trave it is 6, 7, and 8 fathom deep.  
From the east-end of Belisle to Crois-isle the course is east and by north, 
Croixisle.  and eastnortheast about 11 leagues.  
But he that will sail from Blavet to Morbeam, he may sail through behind Groye and the islands lying behind Belisle, and when he is within the islands, he must go northnortheast, till he be before the haven of Morbeam. Before it there lieth a rock or an Island, as I said before, you must sail in through the rock and the east-land, to the east-end of the haven, and you must shun the west-point at 6 fathom, for it is shallow: the eastside is deepest, till you come somewhat within, then there lieth a rock which at half flood is above the water, you must go east, or west about it, and anchor right behind the rock, making a tow fast on land, or as you come within the west-point, you may turn westward as I said before, until the village of Morbeam be west from you, and there anchor at 9 fathom.  
I said before that the land of the eastpoint of this haven to S. jolmes steeple reacheth northwest, and southeast, and from S. jolmes to Croiswyke westnorthwest, and eastsoutheast, along by the land it is about 7, 8, and 9 fathom deep, the more southward about the deeper, but against the point of Croixwyke you have six and seven fathom water again, so long until you be within the bank.  
Behind the west point of Croiswyke there is a Road 
A Road behind Croiswyke.  as if it were a haven, where you may lie at five, six, and seven fathom water.  
And westward from the northwest-point of Crois-isle there is a flat church upon the high land. The land of Olduynen 
Oldu●●●●  lieth close north from this church. The church standeth upon the first point of Croixwyke.  
south-west and by south from this church, two leagues from the land, lieth a bank called the Foer, 
Poer.  which in some places is dry at a low water, it lieth a league from the northwest-point of Croiswyke, and from the eastpoint of Pulyen west and by north, and somewhat northerlyer, and from Belisle it lieth east, it reacheth in length south-west and North-east, when you keep the steeple of Olduynen over against the west-point of Croixwyke, and so go eastnortheast, than you miss the bank. And when the speere steeple standeth over the height of the east-end of the land, than you go northward about the same bank: and when you bring Pulyen steeple over the northwest-point of Croiswyke or Crois-isle, than also you run northward about the aforesaid bank. And when you sail eastnortheast from the east-end of Belisle to Croiswyke, than you go west about the bank: but when you go east, and east and by south, from the east-end of Belisle, than you go east about the bank, sail so long east, and east and by south on, until that the steeple of CroixIsle or Croiswyke be northnorthwest from you, and then sail to the land, and so forth at two cables length along by the land, until you see the rock and the haven called Pierrepasse, then sail close in by it, it is there 4 fathom deep.  
But when you come from the Cardinal, then keep the steeple which standeth west from Croixwyke over the point, than you run northward about the bank, then sail towards the land, about two towes length along by it, as I said before.  
When you come to the east point of Croiswyke, then there shooteth a sand off from the land, 
Sand of Croiswyk.  which you may sound at three fathom round about. The channel is 8, 9, & 10 fathom deep.  
The westerly steeple is Croiswyke, the high steeple standing eastward is Pulien.   

III. How you may sail into the River of Nantes, and the Bay & the situation of the Island of Heys  
IF you will sail up the River of Nantes, 
The River of Nantes.  and are within the bank called the Four, than you must run to the land of Croiswyke, half a pieces shot along by it, until you come to the Rock with the hole, where you see through as if it were a gate, there in the channel it is deep 8 & 9 fathom, but against the rock it is 5 or 6 fathom deep, and when you go by the north point of the river, it is there 3 & 4 fathom deep at low water, within to S. Nazaret it is still deeper water, as 5, 6, and 7 fathom. S. Nazaret 
S. Nazaret  is a sharp steeple standing upon an outpoint, a little within the north point of the River. The Rock with the hole is called Pierrepasse, from it you must run at two towes length in, upon the north point of the River, whereon the sharp steeple called S. Nazaret standeth, until you are within the rocks called les Porceaux, 
The Pourceaux.  which lie in the middle of the River, between the Rock with the hole and the steeple aforesaid, and appear above the water at half tide. A little within S. Nazaret, upon the northland standeth a sharp spear steeple, when that steeple is without the south land, than you cannot hurt yourself upon that rock, & there run northward about. A little eastward there lieth another sand with rocks, where you may run eastward about with great ships, for there it is very flat to the point: being within the point, you may anchor at 6 or 7 fathom. Eastward from S. Nazaret there lie two villages, between those villages it is very flat, & stone ground, there you must choose the south land. But when you are half way between the easterlyest village, than you may sail upon the point of the village, till you be passed it, but against the easterlyest village on the south side, at the point there lieth a bank called Pinbuf, 
Pinbuf.  it reacheth almost half into the River, yet you may go between the point and this bank at 5 or 6 fathom, for this is the Road for ships that will put to Sea.  
A league further inwards in the middle of the River, there lie two banks of stones, which at low water are seen above it, these banks lie in the channel. At Pelerin 
Pelerin.  is the lading place, almost three leagues from Nantes, from whence the wares come in boats to lad the ships. But this is Pilot water, which you commonly take in by the aforesaid sharp tower of S. Nazaret, where when you are within, you may anchor at 10 or 12 fathom, and stay for a Pilot. Those that from S. Nazaret will go to Sea again, must do as followeth, sail along by the northland, until you come without the second point of the River, turn then off from the north land into the middle of the River, and sail a great way southward about Pierrepasse, and then when you may see the rock (which lieth north from Pierrepasse) without the point, there it is four fathom and an half deep, and when Pierrepasse is northnorthwest, and n. & by w. from you, than you are right against the rock, and there you have deeper water, at 5, 6, and at last 7 fathom, but when you come into the Trave of Picqueliers, than you have 10 and 12 fathom water.  
Before the River of Nantes there lie many banks, but at half flood you may well go over them. And the south point of the River of Nantes, is distant from the north point, n. n. w. & s. s. e. 4. leagues. Then this land runneth into a great creak, and there men run into the Bay. These uneven banks in the River of Nantes are very unlike, sometimes you cast 15 fathom, and presently after but 7 or 8 fathom.  
But to sail from Belisle to the bay of Armentiers, 
To sail to the bay.  then go on e. s. e. till you see the Closter of Armentiers, but before the River of Nantes it is uneven and banckie, when you see the Closter of Armentiers 
Armentiers.  eastward from the trees which stand into landward beyond the said Closter, then go forward east, and e. and by n. so long until that the Closter cometh within the castle of Armentiers, than you are within the Monck-lege, 
Monck-lege.  then go e. s. e. until you are within the rock called Pierremen, 
Pierremen  which you may go about on both sides, and when you may see the Grave open, than you may anchor at 7 or 8 fathom, & go on land to fetch a Pilot, for it is Pilots water. From Belisle to Armentiers the course is e. s. e. about 12 or 13 leagues distant.  
From Armentiers to Heys it is south and by east 7 leagues. And from Belisle to Heys 
Heys.  it is s. e. 16 leagues. The Island of Picqueliers lieth right upon the point of Armentiers. Between Armentiers or Picqueliers 
Picqueliers.  & Heys, it is an uneven channel, with many shallows and banks, of 4, 5, 6, and 7 fathom.  
To know Heyes you must understand, that you may see it beneath on the hatches, when you are at 35 fathom in the Sea, on the east end of Heys there standeth a sharp steeple, & some houses and mills, so that it is well to know.  
When you sail along by Heys almost 3 leagues of it showeth itself thus.   view of Heys 
In the channel between Heys and Bel Isle it is 35 and 40 fathom, but when you are within the channel than it is but 25 fathom deep.  
Under Heys there is no great good Rode, 
Road under Heyes.  for there it rolleth too much as if the water came from under the Island, and at the north end it is flat water. The Road is, when the steeple of the church is south-west from you, at 8 or 9 fathom, but you lie not safe there but from a south-west, & a westsouthwest wind, and there it raketh always very much.  
From Heyes to the Kiliates, or the Island of S. Marten the course is e. s. e. 12 or 13 leagues. Between them both lieth the Barse of Olone, about half a league from the land of Poictou, but how you must shun it & sail by the Kiliates is declared in the chapter ensuring.  
Thus the land of Poictou showeth itself between Heyes and the Island of S. Marten when you sail along by it, being four leagues from it.  
Olone.   view of Poictou  

FOUR What Moon maketh a high water on these coasts, and of the falling of the streams.  
Upon all the Coasts of Britain and Poictou, as also upon all the Islands there abouts, a south-west & a North-east moon maketh a high water. But within the Havens, Rivers, Creeks and Bays, a s. w. and by w. and a n. e. & by e. moon, or a point later, as the Havens or Rivers stretch deeper into the land, and there you reckon no falling of streams.   

V At what depths you may see the land, about these Coasts and islands.  
AT the Seims and Sheets you may see the land at sixty and five and sixty fathom.  
Against the East and Westpenmarques you may see the land at 55 and 60 fathom.  
You may see Belisle at 60 fathom, but than you must run into the shorones or else to the top of the mast, but at 55 fathom you may see it beneath.  
Heys a man may see at 60 fathom with clear wether. You may see S. Martens Island and the north end of Olderdom or Oleron at 30 and 27 fathom.   

VI How these Lands lie one from the other.  

FRom the Ras of Fontenay to Westpenmarques the course is southeast 9 leagues.  
But from the west end of the Seims to Westpenmarques eastsoutheast and somewhat southerlyer 13 leagues.  
From Fontenay to Odegerne e. s. e. 5 leagues.  
From Odegerne to Westpehmarques s. e. & by s. 5 leagues.  
From Westpenmarques to Eastpenmarques e. s. e. 7 leagues.  
From Glenant or Gloylant to Groye east & west 9 leagues.  
From Groye to the West end of Belisle south and by east, and southsoutheast 5 leagues.  
From Glenant or Gloyland to Belisle s. e. & by e. 12 leagues.  
From the northwest end of Belisle to the southeast end southeast and by east 3 leagues.  
From Westpenmarques to Belisle eastsoutheast 21 leagues.  
From the southeast-ende of Belisle to Picqueliers or Armentiers eastsoutheast 12 leagues.  
From Belisle to the Cardinal east and by north and somewhat northerlyer 4 leagues.  
From Belisle to Croiswyke e. & by n. & e. n. e. 11 leagues.  
From the Cardinal to Olduynen e. n. e. 7 leagues.  
From the West-point of Croiswyke, to the Northpoint of the River of Nantes eastsoutheast 3 leagues.  
From the point of the River of Nantes to Picqueliers southsouthwest 7 leagues.  
From Pierremen to Armentiers w. s. w. 3 leagues.  
From Armentiers or Picqueliers to Heys s. & by e. 7 leagues.  
From the east-end of Belisle to Heys southeast, and somewhat easterlyer 16 leagues.  
From Heys to the Barse of Olone e. & by s. 7 leagues.  
Fron Heys to the Kiliates or S. Martens Island e. s.e. 12 or 13 league.    

VII. How these Countries are distant from other Countries.  

FRom the Seims or Fontenay to the Krage of Oleron s. e. and by e. 72 leagues.  
From the Seims to Bayone in France s. e. 112 leagues.  
From the Seims to S. Sebastian's s. e. & by s. 112 leagues.  
From the Seims to Bilbao southsoutheast and somewhat easterlyer 101 leagues.  
From the Seims to S. Andero s. s. e. 96 leagues.  
From the Seims to Cape de Pinas or Tores south 88 leagues.  
From Seims to Ribadeus south & by west 93 leagues.  
From the Seims to Cape Ortegal southsouthwest and somewhat southerlyer 91 leagues.  
From the Seims to Cape Finisterre south-west & by south, and somewhat southerlyer 112 leagues.  
From the Seims to Sorles' northnorthwest 46 leagues.  
From Seims without about Heysant n. & by w. 10 leagues.  
From Westpenmarques to Viverus southsouthwest 88 leagues.  
From Westpenmarques to Cizarga s. w. & by s. 104 leagues.  
From Groye to Cape de Finisterre s. w. 123 leagues.  
From Belisle to the River of Bordeaux southeast 50 leagues.  
From Belisle to S. Sebastian's southsoutheast, & somewhat southerlyer 80 leagues.  
From Belisle to S. Andero south 72 leagues.  
From Belisle to Cape de Pinas or Tores s. s. w. 80 leagues.  
From Belisle to Cape de Ortegal south-west 91 leagues.  
From Belisle to Cape de Finisterre south-west 123 leagues.  
From Heys to Cape de Pinas s. w. & by s. 73 leagues.  
From Heys to Cape Ortegal s. w. & by w. 94 leagues.    

VIII. Under what degrees these Country's lie.  

THe Seims lie under 48 degrees 8 minutes.  
The Westpenmarques lie under 47 degrees 50 minutes.  
The Island of Belisle lieth under 47 degrees 25 minutes.  
The Island of Heys lieth under 46 degrees 48 minutes.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 6.   


Eygentlijcke afbeeldinge der Zeecusten van Bretaignen en Poictou, tusschen de Semse en het eijlat van S. Martin, mitsgaders all eijlanden. Clippen, Bancken en ondiepten daer ontrent gelegen, hoemen die self custen beseijlen en all periculen bequamelick schouwen mach  
Vraij portrait des Costs marines' de Bretaigne et Poictou, situez entre les Seemses et l'fsle de Re, ensemble toutes les isles, bancs de sable, secheresses et inprofonditez la envir●n, comment commodieusement on navigera lesdictz lieux, et evitera touse perilz   map of the coasts of Brittany and Poictou   

CHAPTER VI A TRUE DESCRIPTION of the Sea-coasts of France and Biscayen, between the Island of Heys, S. john de Luz and Cabo de Massichaco.  

I. To sail into the Kiliates and Porthus, and so to Brouwage: as also the situation of Mamm●sont.  
THe Kiliates or S. Martens Island is distant from Heys eastsoutheast 12 or 13 leagues. If you will sail to Kiliates then run east and by south, and eastsoutheast, till you be past the Baers of Olone, 
Baerse of Olone.  which lie about two leagues from Olone, & east & by south 7 leagues from Heys, so that it lieth right in the channel, and because it is nothing else but rocks and stones, therefore it is not good to go to near to it in dark wether, you may well sail round about them, and at low water they are seen. He that will sail from Heys to Kiliates 
To sail into the expiates.  within through the Baers, first he must hold his course east, and being within the Baers of Olone, then sail to that land of Poictou, that reacheth from Olone to S. Martens Island eastsoutheast, & from Olone to the Picqueliers n.w. then sail by the land of Poictou, and leave two thirdpartes of the water to S. Martens Island, and one third-part towards the firm land, and sail in this sort so long until S. Martens church be s. s. w. from you, than you may go well over the bank before S. Martens 
Banc● before S. Martens.  and anchor at 5 or 6 fathom. But when the church aforesaid is south and by west from you, (for on that side of the Island so far inwards it is all banckie) than the channel is deep there 12 fathom, and when S. Martens church is south-west from you, than it is still drier, than you may well turn toward the Island at 4 or 5 fathom, as I said before, it drieth up there very quickly, for from 10 fathom you find presently but five or six fathom.  
If you will go with a ship that draweth much water over the bank which cometh off from the Closter to Urck, than stay till it be half flood, for upon the bank at low water it is no more than three fathom and two foot water, but when it is somewhat flowed a great ship may well go over it. When the steeple of Lisors standeth at the northend of Urck or Travelenes, than you are upon the dryest part of the bank: but when the steeple is over the southende of the Island, than it beginneth to be deep again. The marks to keep the deepest water when you go over the bank are these: 
Marks of the deepest water.  hold the great steeple of Rochel a bow length southward from the boxe-tree which standeth upon the northerlyest height, and so sail over the bank. If you will anchor in the Road before the Closter under the bank, then run at six and seven fathom, and anchor there.  
But if you will not anchor under S. Martens, but will go forward to the Brand-Iland then place the steeple of Lesors or Lussoer over the house which standeth upon the little Island, & keep it so, and then you cannot miscarry upon Laverdin. 
Laverdi●.   
The Layerdins are certain rocks lying a quarter of a league from the eastpoint of S. Martens Island, and with a low water after a springtide are seen above the water. You may also sail through between Laverdin and S. Martens Island, there it is deep enough. The marks of Laverdin are these, 
Marks of Laverdin.  when the great steeple of Rochel cometh upon the southpoint of the Bos, and that the other point northward from the Bos be right over against the northpoint of the Bos, than you are right upon the Laverdin, so that whensoever you go into the Kiliates, and that Rochel is a ships length without the point of the Bos, than you are passed the Laverdin, than you may boldly go southeast and by south unto the Brand-Iland.  
To sail into Porthus which lieth southeast and by east from Heys distant 15 leagues, it is a wide and broad haven; reaching in between S. Martens Island and Oleron or Olderdom eastsoutheast. When you will sail into Porthus; 
To sail into Porthus.  you must sail along by S. Martens Island, to the east-end thereof, and then if you will anchor under the Bos, keep the great steeple of Rochel a ships length without the Bos, than you cannot be hurt upon Laverdin; but if you will anchor under the Abbay or Closter of S. Martens Island, then keep the said Closter without the sandy point of the same Island, and so run into the sandy bay, on the eastside of the closter, & so you sail not also by Laverdin.  
At the northend of Oleron lieth the Crage, 
The Crage of Oleron.  which is a very foul dangerous rock, when you sail through between S. Martens Island and Oleron, and if you go up into the top of the mast, than you may see it lie in the water, go no nearer to it by night then 12 or 13 fathom.  
When you come by the east-end of S. Martens Island, and sail into Porthus, and mean to go into Brant Island, 
Brant-Iland.  than you must sail to it southeast and by east. When the steeple of the Four is over the  or Brant Island, than you may cast your ballast over board, there it is 12 fathom deep.  
But if you will sail up into the River of Saranten, 
River of Xarante.  then go southward about the  Island, you may also sail about it northward, and sail by the steeple of the Four, at a low water this River is dry four leagues within the land.  
To sail from the  Island to Browage, 
to sail to Brouwage.  sail s. s. e. and keep the little steeple of Heers so long west from the wood, until the steeple of Four be over against the red tiled house which standeth upon the southside of the river of Sarenten, then sail in southeast, and sometimes s. e. and by e. until the village of Front which lieth upon the strand be north from Soubise, when Soubise cometh within the village aforesaid, and the mill above the village, than you are against the point of the east-banck 
East-banck.  then go southeast and by south, and set the uttermost steeple of Hers upon the uttermost hillock of sand whereon the Gallows stand, and keep them standing so, and sail s. s.e, and then when the steeple of Hers cometh to the east-corner of the valley in the wood, then hold that sharp steeple right over the east-corner of the valley in the wood, & sail so until you are within the creak or River of Brouwage. At Brouwage there was sometime no one house standing, whereas now there is a fair strong town, which hath been so within these fifty years.  
The Banjaert 
Banjaert.  lieth along by the land of Oleron, & reacheth into the  Island, at a low water it is above it, and the foot or tail thereof reacheth out far northward. If you must laveere outward from the creak to the  Island, then ●et not the steeple of Rochel without the  Island, before you are right against it, because of the Banjaert; for so you can do no hurt to yourself.  
To sail out of the Sea into the Mammesond, 
to sail into the Mammesondt.  you must understand that it reacheth in east and by north, and e. n. e. and is deep enough for a great ship, when you come within it there runneth up southeast a river, where you lad salt, going towards Salis, 
Marks to shun the Flat.  and when passing by it you come to the other point of Mammesont; then there lieth a Flat, which you must go northward about with these marks: you must hold the mill which standeth upon the land of Oleron over against the trees, and so you go northward about the Flat, & there is the Road for those that will fetch salt at Oleron.  
But if you will sail from within out of the River again, 
to sail from with in through Porthus.  than you must sail about so long east, until that Salis be over the trees that stand within Merven. Now to shun the tail, or the Sand which shooteth off from the point of Oleron, when Salis is over against the trees, then sail north and by west to the  Island, but bring Duke Charles steeple southward from the  Island, that you may not sail under the Banjaert, when the steeple of Hers cometh upon the wood hold it standing so, until that Rochel cometh over against the north-corner of the  Island, and then sail out at Porthus. From the westend also of S. Martens 
A Riffe at the westend of S. Martens  Island there shooteth out a Sand, which you must shun.  
There lieth a great row of Rocks in the Sea, upon the which at low water there is not above 4 or 5 fathom, they are called Wrkamia, 
Wrckamia  the Sea ravels always much upon them, these Rocks lie south, and s. and by w. from Heys 13 leagues, from Olone s. w. and w. s. w. from S. Martens Island, and west from the Island of Oleron.  
To know S. Martens Island there standeth a high steeple with a high house, and a mill upon the strand, and you shall see four or five high downs. Upon Oleron also there standeth a high speere steeple upon a red point, whereon you may see some trees also standing, and southward there are craggy downs in two or three places.  
Thus S. Martens Island showeth when it is n. & by e. from you.   view of Saint-Martin-de-Re 
When you sail into or out of Porthus then S. Martens Island showeth thus.  
La Fosse de Joys. S. Marten. Closter. S. john.   view of Saint-Martin-de-Re 
Thus Oleron or Olderdom showeth itself, when you are before Porthus about four leagues from the land.   view of 'Oleron' (town in France)  

II. To sail into, and out of the River of Bordeaux.  
FRom the Krage of Oleron to the steeple of Cordam 
Cordam.  it is s. s. e. and south and by east 13 leagues. To know the River you must understand that the downs that lie east or north from the steeple of Cordam are five or six white high downs, and that the land southward from it is low land, black downs overgrown with heath.  
The Monages 
Monages.  or Monasses reach off from the steeple of Cordam towards the high downs upon the northland, which is a small white sand, which you may sound round about at seven fathom, till you be within the steeple of Cordam, which standeth upon the same Sand, yet the end is very steep, for by the point of Monages it is 20 fathom deep.  
To sail up into the River of Bordeaux, called La Garonne, you must understand that the right channel reacheth in n. e. and by n. till you be at the high downs upon the northland, those high downs you must set North-east and by north from you, & go in n. e. and n. e. & by n. as wind and stream serveth, until you come to a pieces shot about those high downs, than the castle at Talemont will stand within two ships length southward from the point of massy, whereon all the mills stand, and the village of Soulack within the land, will come within two ships length of the southpoint of the River, keep the castle that standeth upon the Sand two ships length without the point of Messie, and then go southeast and by east, till you are within the point of Messie, whereon the mills stand, which is 4 leagues within the River.  
To get this haven 
to get to the haven.  when you come out of the Sea, then know that when the steeple of Cordam standeth e. & by n. from you, and that you run upon it to the marks aforesaid, that is, when the high downs upon the northland, stand n. e. & by n. from you, than you sail without the South-asses, that is south about from them, then go to the downs aforesaid n. e. & by n. and so further inward as I said before, that is the right channel. But when Cordam steeple is e. s. e. from you, than you may also run upon it forward through the Asses, to the marks aforesaid of the high downs, and this channel is three fathom deep.  
And when the steeple of Cordam is southeast, and s. e. & by e. from you, there goeth also a wide and broad channel through the North-asses of 2 fathom deep, which you may also run into, to the aforesaid marks of the high downs, and go forward upon them North-east, and n. e. and by n. as aforesaid.  
To sail into the south-chanel, 
How to sail into the south-chanel.  you must know that it runneth in by the land: set the steeple of Cordam north from you, and when Royanen is North-east, and North-east & by north from you, than the highest steeple cometh within a ships length of the middlemost point of the northland, and you are upon 5 fathom on the strand, then sail upon Royan and it will still be drier, that is four, and also three fathom, and upon the innermost threshold of the channel 15 and 16 foot at high water, then when the house that standeth westward of Royan cometh into the middle of the Sandbaye, then run over the threshold, which being over run to the point of Missie, within this threshold of the south-chanel it is 20 fathom deep, & on the south land you may anchor at 6, 7, and 8 fathom.  
You may also go into this haven, all sounding with your lead along to Monages, at 4 and 5 fathom, till you be within the Flat which lieth without the channel.  
There runneth a channel also in by the north, which is very crooked, you must run to the strand at 4 fathom, and keep along by it, and then coming against the north-corner of the high downs, there it is two fathom deep at the deepest, and that is at the threshold of the channel, but presently after it will be three fathom again, than you must hold cross off from the land, until you get deep water, that is 4 or 5 fathom, and being there, run up to Royan as aforesaid.  
Now when you are within the haven, and come against the point of Messie, which is the point whereon the mills stand, then go over to the broken castle called Castilion s. e. & by s. which is 8 leagues from Missie, than you must go along by the southland southeast into Pouliack, 
Pouliack  which is almost 3 leagues.  
In the channel between Monages & the point of Missie with the mills, it is 10, 11, and 12 fathom deep: but against the south-chanel it is 20 fathom deep, but out of the channel whether it be upon the north or southside it is drier as 5, 6, 7, and 8 fathom, you must run along close by the point of Messie, there also it is 22 fathom deep, and by the point of Monasges it is also 20 fathom deep.  
Now when Royan cometh on the west-point whereon the mills stand, keep it so standing, and go s. e. and by s. to chastilion: 
Chastilion  in this reach it is most five fathom deep, but going nearer to the north or southside it is drier, and on the northside it is full of sand, where you may also sail through if you know it. From Chastilion to Pouliack it is southeast almost 3 leagues, as aforesaid, and there it is 4, 5, 6, and 7 fathom deep.  
Against Pouliack in the middle of the River, there lieth an Island, which you go eastward about straight up to Bley, and there you must go over with the tide, for at a low water it is but a fathom deep, before Bleye it is 3 or 4 fathom deep again, and you run out by the northland at 3, 4, and 5 fathom, and when you come before the river which reacheth up northwards, then sail first on upon the middle of the Island, & so along by it, until y●u are against or past the gallows, which standeth upon the eastpoint of the River, than along again by the northside to the four houses, than you must put over to the high steeple of Dubelot 
Dubelot.  or Duvecot, and when you are on the southland by the steeple of Dubelot, than you must presently cross over again eastward about to the west-point of the bought, then go along by the east-land again to Larmond, than you must cross over again to the houses of Chartroysen, and so along by the southland to the town of Bordeaux, before Bordeaux it is 4 or 5 fathom deep, in the crooking it is 5, 6, and 7 fathom. To conclude in sailing up the River there are many depths, and it is full of Sands, so that you must often cross over from one land to the other, as I have said before.  
When you will sail out of the River of Bordeaux, than you must stay at Royan for good wether and a fore-ebbe, & therewith go out, and when you go out, keep the north-downes North-east and by north from you, so long until that the steeple of Cordam be eastsoutheast from you, than you may sail w. n. w. through the Asses into the Sea.  
The North-Esels or Asses may well be sounded at six or seven fathom, that channel is wide and broad, and 12 or 13 fathom deep.   

III. To sail into the channels of Occason, Bayona, and S. john de Luz.  
FRom Cordam to Accason it is south and by north distant 20 leagues, between them both there lieth a tydehaven called Anchises, 
Anchises.  which may be entered by a great ship at high water, for it is a deep tydehaven.  
The coast from the river of Bordeaux or from Cordam to Accason is flat, and it is there all downy land to S. john de Luz.  
Right before the haven of Occason, 
Accason.  there lie three islands, which you may sail in by on the north or southside.  
The northchanel 
Northchanel.  reacheth in southeast, there stand two high steeples upon the southland, which you must hold two masts length distant from each other, and sail so upon them until you are in. Right within the southpoint lieth a row of rocks under the water which you must shun, and within about the middle of the haven there lieth a row of blind rocks, but when you keep the steeples standing so, than you run through between the rocks at four fathom, and on the southside you may anchor at four fathom low water.  
The south-chanel 
South-chanel.  runneth in between the southpoint and the southerlyest Island, and eastward from the village of Accason there standeth a black hillock upon the land, when that is n. n. e. from you, then go right in upon it, & when you come between the innermost and the northpoint of the haven, there lie many blind rocks on both sides under the water: but go right upon the black hillock North-east, and North-east and by north, before the village or small town, and there anchor at 8, 9, and 10 fathom, in the northchanel also you have 9 or 10 fathom water, between the north and southpoint of the haven it is 5 fathom deep, and within it is 12 fathom deep.  
From Accason to Bayona 
Bayona.  it is south and north 17 leagues, between them both lieth Cabriton, 
Cabriton.  before which in former time there was wont to be a thoroughfare for the ships that would sail into Bayona, through a channel of 7 leagues long. The channel or haven of Bayona runneth in between two sleight strands, e. s. e. and e. and by s. There lieth a Baerse before the haven, and upon the land there stand two trees or masts keep them one upon another, & so run into the haven, there is at a high water & a spring stream full three fathom, at daily tides two fathom and an half, but at low water but three foot water, when you come about the point, you turn up southward, and anchor before the town at 5 fathom, within on the northside it is pyled, to keep the channel deep: and it is Pilots water.  
Fron the haven of Bayona to S. john de Luz the course south and by west 4 leagues. S. john de Luz 
S. john de Luz.  is a tydehaven, as if it were a peer, you must go in there at high water, the town lieth on the right hand, when it is a springtide the haven is so dry, that you may go driefoot over it, but it is a bay wherein men lie.   

FOUR The situation between S. john de Luz and Cabo de Massichaco.  
THree leagues south-west, and s. w. & by w. from S. john de Luz lie the rocks called the Pingnons of S. Anne, 
Pingnons of S. Anne.  which lie close by the land. A league westward from them lieth the creak of Fonteravia, it is a fair bay, where upon the head there standeth a castle, and southward from it a church. Upon the westside of this Bay lieth the Cape de Figuer, 
Cape Figure.  & upon the point of the Cape lieth a rock somewhat distant from it, but the Sea cannot there pass through between them except it be at a very high flood, than it breaketh a little through: If you will anchor in this Bay of Fonteravia, 
Fonteravia.  cast anchor at 8 or 9 fathom, so that the aforesaid rock be n. n. w. from you, there is it fair sandground, where you may lie safe from hurt by a n.w. wind. Lying in the Bay you have the Pingnons of S. Anne e.n.e. and Cape de Figuer n.w. & by w. from you.  
A league westward from Cape de Figure lieth Passaje, 
Passaie.  also a fair haven, on the eastside of the haven, which is very narrow, there lieth a round rock, so that there it is ill going in with an ebb, but with a flood it is better, without it is very fair, there are no shallows at all, but only the aforesaid round rock. The town lieth right within the haven on the eastside, where men anchor at seven fathom.  
Almost three leagues westward from Passage lieth S. Sebastian, 
S. Sebastia●.  between them both there is a sandbay, which lieth within a creak, and there there goeth a dry little river up into the land, there come many barks into it when it is fair wether.  
S. Sebastian's haven is good to go into, you go in between two castles, whereof the easterlyest is the greatest, it standeth almost as if it stood upon an Island, but it standeth upon a high hill, the westerlyest standeth upon a small Island or Rock, which is a foursquare tower: in sailing in, in the narrow way between these two castles lieth a rock which at low water is 6 fathom deep, and when the storm cometh out of the Sea it always ravels upon it, it lieth nearest unto the east-land, & on the westland it is 10 fathom deep. Now to shun this rock as you enter in, there is a closter east from the westerlyest Island, and there standeth a steeple, which come one over against the other, which you must run eastward about.  
Now to anchor without S. Sebastian's in the Road, you must hold the high hill, which lieth upon the point of Cape de Figure, without the easterlyest Island aforesaid, and then you may anchor there, but if it fall to be covered under the Island, them you cannot anchor before S. Sebastian's in the Road, but when you are through the narrow strait within the rock, and past the castles, than you may anchor on the eastside under the great castle, there is the best Road: & behind the castle aforesaid there goeth up a little water from the east-castle you may go on foot along upon a high strand upon firm land at low water, but the strand at high water is covered: it is a creak, & within before the town it is deep 5, 6, & 7 fathom, & on the westside under the small Island you cannot anchor, for there it is flat & dry.  
Such as come out of the west and seek to go into S. Sebastian's, they must keep by the land, for it is fair. And a league westward from S. Sebastian's haven lieth a Sandbay, where you may anchor as deep as you will, but they that from thence will go into S. Sebastian's, they must go in in the middle of the water, between both the islands, and leave the little Island whereon the chapel standeth on starreborde, running so towards the first or second wall of the town, and anchor there, the shalopes or barks will come aboard to you, and help to get you into the haven between the walls.  
From S. Sebastian's to Cape de Massichaco the course is w.n. w. 13 leagues, between them lie these Rhodes, to weet, Gaturia and Deva. 
Gaturia. Deva.   
Gaturia lieth from S. Sebastian distant w. and by n. and w. n.w. 8 leagues: it is a round Bay or creak, where it is safe lying against a south-wind, you may lie behind the west-point before the town upon fair Sandground, a n. w. wind is there corner-winde. This Bay is commonly called Kings-haven.  
Along the coast of Biscaya between S. john de Luz and Gaturia it is all over fair ground, & good anckoring at 20 fathom.  
From Gaturia to Deva it is 2 leagues to the west, it is a falling water which cometh out of the hill.  
Three leagues westward lieth the outpoint of Massichaca. 
Cape Massicha●a.   
Thus the land about the bought of S. john de Luz showeth itself from Cabriton till you be passed S. Sebastian's.  
The land of Bayona and Cabriton is downy land and reaches south and north.  
The land Fonteravia reacheth south-west and North-east but by S. Sebastian's it reacheth east and west.  
Cabriton.  
Bayona.  
S. john de Luz  
Fonteravia.  
Passage  
S. Sebastian.   view of Saint-Jean-de-Luz 
Thus S. Sebastian openeth itself when you have the sight of it seven leagues from it.   view of San Sebastian  

V Of the running of the streams, and what Moon maketh a high water here.  
IN these places they reckon no falling of streams, for in all the havens lying upon these coasts a south-west & North-east moon commonly maketh a high water, but within the havens or within the land a point later, that is a south-west and by west, and a North-east and by east moon.   

VI Of the depths against these places, and at what depths you may see the land.  
Without Heys it is 35 fathom deep, and then you may see the land as you stand below upon the hatches, when it is clear wether you may see it at 60 fathom.  
You may see the land of Olone beneath at 25 & 30 fathom.  
S. Martens Island and the northend of Oleron may be seen at 28 and 30 fathom. When you have a sight of S. Martens Island, then on it you see a high steeple and a high house, and on the strand a mill, with four or five high downs. Upon Oleron you see a high speere steeple upon a red point, whereon you see some trees standing, and southward it hath black downs in three or four places.  
Upon the land on the northside of the River of Bordeaux, or the steeple of Cordam you see five or six high white downs, but on the southside thereof they are low black downs overgrown with heath, you may see the land against the River of Bordeaux from the poop of the ship at 30 fathom.  
The Coast from Cordam to Accason is a flat coast, which may also be seen at 30 fathom.  
Between Accason and S. john de Luz, you may likewise see the land at 30 fathom, and when you are about Bayona, than you see Cabriton, Bayona, Bederte and S. john de Luz, which for the most part are all flat steeples.  
When you come before Passage, you may see the corner of Cape de Figure, and also S. Sebastian's, and there the land lieth in a great creak or bowing.  
About Cape de Figuer there lieth a high hill, which on the south-west end is very steep, and it is very long, the slopeness descending towards the north, when you are close by the land it is very high and steep, but when you are before S. Sebastian's 7 leagues from the land than it is long, & on the westend steeping and hollow.  
When you are 8 leagues without S. Sebastian's, than you may see the east-castle, and also the small Island.   

VII. How these Countries lie distant from each other.  

FRom Heys to S. Martens Island e. s.e. 12 or 13 leagues.  
From Heys to Porthus or the Crage of Oleron southeast and by east 15 leagues.  
From S. Martens Island to Cordam, s. s.e. 16 leagues.  
From the Crage of Oleron to the steeple of Cordam, or the River of Bordeaux southsoutheast, and s. and by e. 13 leagues.  
From Cordam to Accason south 20 leagues.  
From Accason to Bayona south and north 16 or 17 leagues.  
From Bayona to S. john de Luz s. and by w. 4 leagues.  
From S. john de Luz to Pingnons de S. Anne south-west & by west. 3 leagues.  
From S. john de Luz to S. Sebastian's west 8 leagues.  
From S. Sebastian's to Gateria w. & by n. & w.n.w. 8 leagues.  
From Gateria to Cape de Massichaco n. w. 5 or 6 leagues.    

VIII. How these Countries are distant from other Countries.  

From Heys to Ortegal s. w. and by w. 94 leagues.  
From S. Martens Island to Cape de Pinas s. w. 80 leagues.  
From S. Martens Island to Ortegal westsouthwest and somewhat southerlyer 99 leagues.  
From the steeple of Cordam or the River of Bordeaux to Cape de Pinas w. s.w. and somewhat southerlyer 75 leagues.    

IX. Under what degrees these Country's lie.  

THe Island of Heys lieth under 46 degrees & 48 minutes.  
The Middle of the Island of S. Marten lieth under 46 degrees and 26 minutes.  
The northpoint of Oleron lieth under 46 degrees 15 minutes.  
The steeple of Cordam or the River of Bordeaux lieth under 45 degrees 45 minutes.  
Accason lieth under 44 degrees 36 minutes.  
Bayona in France lieth under 43 degrees 45 minutes.  
Or as some say under 43 degrees 35 minutes.  
The Cape de Massichaco lieth under 43 degrees 46 minutes.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 7.   

CHAPTER VII. A DESCRIPTION OF the Sea-coasts of Biscaya, between Cabo de Massichaco and Capo de Pinas.  

I. The situation between Cape de Massichaco and Bilbao.  
Westnorthwest from S. Sebastian lieth Cape de Massichaco 
Massichaco.  13 leagues, there goeth a haven in right west from the Cape, which is a far tydehaven, the town lieth about a league into the land, upon a River which cometh out of the hill, right west from Cape de Massichaco lieth a great rock fast upon the land, and a little west from it another, which you may well sail about with barks, and that lieth upon the sharp point of Avellanes.  
south-west and by west from Massichaco lieth the haven of Barmea, 
Barmea.  it is a fair great creak, the east-end whereof is foul, therefore you must shun it, and go on the westside, and anchor where you will, it is wide enough.  
West from Barmea lieth Placentia 
Placentia.  upon a little river, the town lieth a little into the land, they are all tyde-havens.  
From Cape de Massichaco to Bilbao (between which lieth Barmea and Placentia) it is southsouthwest, and south-west and by south 7 leagues.  
From Placentia to Bilbao 
Bilbao.  are almost 3 leagues, west-south-west, and west and by south. Bilbao lieth upon a great river, down from the which there cometh much iron: it is a good haven, but it runneth not far in, because of the Bank called lafoy Barse, 
La Barse.  which lieth cross over the haven, which you must go over at high water.  
On the eastpoint of Bilbao there cometh a Sand shooting down, you must shun that point, for there lie stones and rocks also under the water, and it is a high steep point, which showeth white, yet you anchor before it at seven or eight fathom, from this point to the haven of Bilbao or the Barse is two leagues, south & by west, and you must anchor under this point between the rocks and the Peer, from whence the Pilots come down, there you lie safe from a northwest wind, but a westnorthwest wind is open into it. The channel reacheth in by the westland, there stand five or six houses upon the westland, when the two westerlyest houses are one against the other, or when you may see between the two easterlyest houses which stand within the land, than you are upon the Barse or drought, go then to the castle of Portogalete south, and south and by east, close along by the castle, and set right within the castle against a west-wind: though as you are before the haven than the Pilots come down & bring you to the town.  
When you lie before the creak, 
S. Anthony's hill.  than you see Monte Anthoni west and by north from you.  
Thus the land east from Bilbao showeth when you fall upon it.   view of Bilbao 
On the westside you see a high sharp hill, and it showeth thus to Castro.   view of 'Castro' (Spain)  

II. To sail from Bilbao to S. Andero.  
Pascarte van Biscaijen, afbeeldende de rechte gelegentheijt der Zeehavenen end custen tusschen de C. Massichaco en de C. de Pinas gelegen, alles gestelt op sijne rechte streckinghe, distantien, end hoochden.  
Cart Marine de Biscaije, demonstrant la uraije situation des Costes et Ports marins, situez entre le C. de Massichaco, et le C. de Pinas, le tout dress selon ses uraijes routs, distances, et elevations du Pole.   map of the Bay of Biscay 
From Bilbao to S. Anthony's Hill it is west & by north 9 or 10 leagues. From Castro to Laredo the course is west distant six leagues: on the westside lieth the said Hill of S. Anthony, which is a high hill, you may sail close in by it, or set this Hill south & by east from you, and so also run in about the eastpoint of the haven, there it is wide and broad, and a fit haven for great ships, and there about east you may anchor at 7 or 8 fathom. Eastward against S. Anthony's Hill in the middle of the way lieth a row of rocks under the water, which you may sail about on both sides, it ravels always upon them, there within is the Road for common ships, and that is right before the haven which is closed with a wall, but great ships lie somewhat further off, there it is 6 and 7 fathom deep. On the southside of the haven there is a tydehaven, from the which there cometh a great Sand shooting off from the eastside to S. Anthony's Hill, there within it is two fathom water, & that is right before the village, but from the village there cometh a point or tail of sand reaching cross out, within it at low water it is a fathom deep, in the middle of the channel it is 9 fathom, & at the point of S. Anthony it is 20 fathom deep.  
From S. Anthony's Hill to Cape de Kesgo it is west, & west and by south 3 leagues, 
C. Kesgo.  it is a great Cape lying east from S. Andero, and there is fair ground.  
From Cape de Kesgo to the west-point of S. Andero it is w. & by s. five leagues, and right southward from the point of S. Andero upon the eastpoint of Sardinis is a sandy Bay, where it is good anckoring at 10 fathom.  
From Cape de Kesgo to the haven of S. Andero the course is w. s.w. distant 3 leagues. S. Andero 
S. Andero.  lieth in a creak, and there lieth an Island before the haven, you may go about it on both sides, it is 8 and 9 fathom deep, but southward about the Island it is 5, 6, and 7 fathom deep, after you come near to the strand. The channel first reacheth w. n. w. the Island lieth a great league within the creak, it is from the eastpoint of the haven to the west-point of the land about south and north a great league. S. Anthony and the west-point of S. Andero lie east & west from each other about 5 leagues. 
How to know the land about Laredo.   
To know the land when you fall about Laredo, then know that on the westside of the haven of Laredo S. Anthony's Hill lieth, which is a very high hill, which you see very far both from east and west, and right above the town of Laredo you see also a sharp hill, as if it were the point of a diamant, or the point of a two-handed sword, and further about Laredo it is very high double land, two, three, & at some places four double.  
S. Andero hath no special or known hills, but when you are before the haven then eastward you may see the town, and the castle standing upon a high hill, as if it were a suger-lofe, or a haycock, & eastward there is much double land, two or three height double. But when you are about Cape de Kesgo, then presently you see the castle upon the westland.  
The land eastward of Laredo being south from you, showeth thus with a sharp hill.   view of Laredo 
Thus S. Anthony's hill showeth itself, lying on the westside of Laredo.   view of Laredo 
Thus S. Anthony's hill showeth itself, when you are southsoutheast from it.   view of Laredo  

III. How all the Havens and Rhodes between S. Andero and Cape de Pinas should be sailed.  
FRom S. Andero to Cape de Pinas the course is west, or a little northerlyer 37 or 38 leagues, between the which these Havens following do lie.  
First the haven of S. Marten 
S. Marten.  or Settevilles, 
Settevilles.  lying east & west 4 leagues from S. Andero, it is a tydehaven.  
From thence to S. Vincents, 
S. Vincent.  also a tydehaven is 5 leagues, the channel goeth in on the eastside, on the westside there cometh a sand shooting off, and in the middle of the channel lieth an Island, which you may go about on both sides.  
From S. Vincents to Lhanes 
Lhanes.  the course is west three leagues, this is a tydehaven, upon the westside of the haven there standeth a church, & right within the haven a middle-flatte or sand, but you must go about on the westside: these are all unknown narrow havens, he that hath occasion may use them.  
From Lhanes to Rio de Selia 
Rio de Selia.  the course is west five or six leagues, he that will go in there must have regard to a mast which standeth upon the east land, you must go in close by it, for the westside is foul within, & you must anchor within the mast before the village, it is also a tydehaven.  
From Rio de S●ila westwards nine leagues is Villa Viciosa, 
V lla Vic●●●a.  this also is a tydehaven, but fair: the channel runneth in southeast and southeast and by east, close upon the west-point of the land, for the eastpoint is foul to the middle of the haven: there lieth a flat right in the middle of the haven, which at low water is dry, therefore as you go in you must turn up westward again, on the westside lieth the Plecke, you may sail to it, and anchor upon flat water.  
Seven leagues westward from Villa Viciosa lieth the outpoint of Sanson, 
Sanson.  eastward there lieth a little Island whereon there standeth a steeple: between Sanson and the said Island it is good road at 7 and 8 fathom.  
On the westside of Sanson is also good road, right before the little haven of Sanson at six and seven fathom.  
West from Sanson lieth Gyon, 
Gyon.  having a peer or pyled-head under the which the fishermen that dwell there lay their barks.  
A league and an half west from Gyon lieth the creak of Tores, 
Tores.  a good Road for a south-west and west wind at 8 and 9 fathom: upon the point reaching out, standeth a high steeple.  
Three leagues westward of Tores lieth Cape de Pinas, 
Cape de Pinas.  from whence many rocks lie off to Seaward good half a league at least: it is said by some that a man may sail through between the point and those rocks.  
Thus the land of Biscaya showeth itself between Laredo and Rio de Sella, as you sail along by it.  
Laredo. Lhanes. Rio de Sella.   view of Biscay 
Thus the land showeth itself from Rio de Sella to Cape de Pinas, as you sail along by the same.  
Rio de Sella. Villa Viciosa.   view of Biscay  

FOUR What Moon maketh high water upon these Coasts.  
AT all places and before all the havens of this coast, a south-west and North-east moon maketh a high water, but within the havens about a point later, as they reach deeper into the land, as upon the coasts of Britain, Poictou & G●●coigne. Hear also they reckon no falling of streams. But the streams fall cross to and fro.   

V How these Countries are distant one from the other, and from other Countries also.  
HOw these Country's reach and are distant from each other it is already showed in the description.  

From Cape de Massichaca to Accason North-east and somewhat easterlyer 28 leagues.  
From Cape de Massichaca to Heys north and somewhat e●sterlyer 60 leagues.  
From S. Andero to the Seims n. n. w. 96 leagues.  
From Cape de Pinas to the steeple of Cordam eastnortheast, and North-east and by east 72 leagues.  
From Cape de Pinas to Porthus or S. Martens Island North-east and somewhat easterlyer 80 leagues.  
From Cape de Pinas to Belisle n. n. e. 80 leagues.  
From Cape de Pinas to the Seims north 88 leagues.  
From Cape de Pinas to Cabo de Veilli in Ireland north and by west and somewhat westerlyer 171 leagues.  
From Cape de Pinas to Ortegal w. & by n. 29 leagues.    

VI Under what degrees these Country's lie.  
Scape Massichaca lieth under 43 degr. 46 or 48 minutes.  
Cape de Pinas lieth under 43 degrees 54 or 56 minutes.  
The whole coast of Biscaya between Cape de Pinas & Cape de Massichaca lieth about 43 degrees and 43, 44, or 45 minutes.   
Hear followeth the Card N. 8.   

CHAPTER VIII. A TRUE DESCRIPTION of the Sea-coasts of Gallicia, from Cabo de Pinas to Cabo de Finisterre.  

I. To sail from Cape de Pinas to Aviles and Ribadeus.  
FRom Cape de Pinas there lieth out a row of rocks, which reach half a league into the sea, they say that a man may sail between those rocks and that point. But right within or westward from Cape de Pinas lieth a great rock, which you may sail through between it & the land.  
When you are within Cape de Pinas, Aviles 
Aviles.  lieth from thence s. s. w. three leagues, it is a good tydehaven, where a great ship may well enter at half flood, there is also a good Road before this haven at 6 and 7 fathom deep.  
To sail into this haven you must go along by the eastside, for the westside is very flat, there standeth a little chapel upon the eastside which you must run in close by, till you be within the two rocks that lie on the eastside of the haven, which you must sail close by, & anchor a little way within the rocks. The town lieth about a league upwards. Fron the west-point there shooteth off a sand, which reacheth within along the haven to the town, so that there on both sides it is very shallow. On the westside of the haven, without in the bowing thereof there lie two great rocks, right before the little church, in the sandy Bay, which you may sail round about, but it is not all to fair, yet without the rocks it is good anckor-ground at 7 & 8 fathom, which is right over against the church, which standeth against the high land.  
From Aviles to Luarca 
Luarca.  it is 7 leagues, and from Luarca to Ribadeus 
Ribadeus.  the course is w. s. w. seven leagues. Or from Aviles to Ribadeus s. w. and by w. 13 leagues.  
To sail into the haven of Ribadeus you must go close in by the westland, on the westside of the haven there standeth a high flat steeple, as if it were upon the Corongne, you must sail in along by the said steeple at two cables length, (for at the eastpoint there lieth a rock under the water) them you must sail forward in the middle of the water, the haven for the most part reacheth in south, and south & by east, you may anchor on the eastside before Castrapol, 
Castrapol.  or on the westside before Ribadeus, where you will at five or six fathom. Within it is all flat water, if you lie far out or deep within as 4, 5, 6, and 7 fathom.  
Thus the land of Aviles showeth itself when you are before Aviles.   view of Aviles  

II. To sail from Ribadeus to Viverus, and then to Ortegal.  
North-west from Ribadeus about eight leagues lieth the Cape de Brilo, 
Cape de Brilo.  and a little west from thence lieth the little town of Viverus. 
Viverus.  Westward from the bay of Cyprian (where you may anchor at ten fathom) there lie two great high rocks, westnorthwest from those rocks about half a league lieth the Island of S. Cyprian, 
Island S. Cyprian.  which lieth right before the haven of Viverus, whereby this haven of Viverus is well to be known, you may sail round about on both sides of this Island into the haven of Viverus, in the middle of the water south & south & by west, right before the town, and being within you may anchor where you will, either on the east or westside, it is there flat water of 5, 6, 7, & 8 fathom, as you run far inward.  
Pascaarte vande Zeecusten van Galissien, tusschen de C. de Pinas, end de C. de Finisterre, vertoonende de rechte gelegentheijt der Zeegaten en havenen aldaer geleghen, hoemen die beseijlen, en all periculen en ondiepten mijden shall.  
Cart marine des costes de la Mer entre le C. de Pinas, et le C. de Finisterre, menstrant au vif la situation des Ports et haures sitnez a lesdictes costs, et comment en costoÿant icelles on evitera tous perils et lieux dagereux.   map of Galicia 
And three leagues westward from S. Marks lieth the River of Karins, 
Karins.  and there also it is good anckoring along to the castle of Ortegal, all the coast along is fair. From Karins to Ortegal the course is northwest 5 leagues.  
Ortegal is a great point of land lying out, eastward from it you may lie safe from a northwest, west, south-west, and south wind, against the castle is the best Road, where you may anchor at 8 and 9 fathom. When you come from the east, Ortegal is well to be known, you may see the castle stand against the high land.  
Thus Ortegal showeth when it is s. w. & by s. from you.   view of Ortegal 
Thus Ortegal showeth when the easterlyest hill lieth southsoutheast from you, and you may see the east-end clearly eight, nine, or ten leagues into the Sea.   view of Ortegal 
Thus Ortegal showeth itself as it is s. e. & by s. from you.  
When Ortegal is southeast from you it openeth thus.   view of Ortegal  

III. To sail from Cape de Ortegal to Ferol de Corongne, and to the Island of Cyzarga.  
ABout a league into the Sea northnorthwest from Ortegal lieth a row of great rocks, you may sail between them and the firm land at 10 fathom, Ortegal & Cape de Prior are distant North-east and south-west 11 leagues ..  
Between Ortegal and Cape Prior lieth the haven of Siguera 
Siguera.  or Siverus, which is a deep haven, reaching in southeast, the northside is rocky & foul, you must go in close by the westland, sailing along by a high land at 12 fathom, within it is 10 fathom, and you must anchor before the village of Siguera at 6 or 7 fathom.  
Five leagues westward from Siguera lieth Cape de Prior, 
Cape de. Prior.  which is a very craggy uneven hill, which to see to is like as if it sat full of men.  
Three leagues from Cape de Prior southward lieth the haven of Ferol, sailing to it you come first to two white Sandbayes, 
How to sail into Ferol.  which lie northward from the said haven, whereof the southerlyest is the greatest, whereon also one or two white houses stand, southward from that lieth the northpoint of the haven of Ferol, and when you go by it then the haven openeth itself, which you must run into through the middle of the channel e. n. e. and e. & by n. between two high lands, & when you are within, you must turn up northward, and anchor at 12 and 13 fathom, for before the village of Ferol it is rocky and flat. The southpoint of Ferol reacheth far out, and is all foul, when you are in the middle of the narrow or strait, than you may see through between the firme-land and the Island of Cyzarga, in the narrow it is 20 fathom deep, and so narrow that you may cast a stone upon the land on both sides thereof.  
But when you come from Corongne from the west, and will put into Ferol, then from the Island of S. Blaze go n. and n. & by w. until you may see the haven of Ferol open, and sail still till it closeth again, than you shall see the great Sandbaye with two or three houses, sail to it until you are within the southpoint of the haven, for (as I said before) it is foul and rocky, & then sail upon the northpoint of the haven, them you sail the haven open again, and so go through the middle of the channel, and anchor therein as is taught you before.  
To sail from Ferol to Corongne the course is south, 
How to sail into Corongne  and south and by west about four little leagues, but when you come to the westland you must shun it at least four or five cables length, for it is not very fair: when you come to the point whereon the castle standeth, than you see a little Island with a small house upon it, you may sail by it within half a cables length, and go about by it, and then go up westward till you come before the Fisshermens' village, and there anchor at 6, 7 or 8 fathom water.  
From C. de Prior to Corongne the course is south and north 6 leagues: to sail from thence to the Carongne you must also do as I said before.  
You may sail into the haven or entry of the Carongne 5 or 6 leagues right southeast in, coming from Farol or Cysarga, passing by the Coruna or Corongne to Fontaine 
Fontaine.  or Pitance, 
Pitance.  where on the westside under a row of rocks, you may anchor at 10 or 12 fathom, and you may run so far inwards that you may see no Sea.  
Right against la Corongne e. n. e. lieth another haven called Pont de Mas, 
Pont de Mas.  which teacheth in eastward, wherein also you may run so far that you can see no Sea, there also you may anchor at 10 or 12 fathom. There lieth a row of rocks on the northside, and over the river there goeth a great bridge.  
He that cometh out of the west from Cysarga must go in e. s. e. until he be a little within the steeple which standeth on the west-point of the Corongne, for on the westside it is altogether foul, so long till it beginneth to come right against the castle, and then doing as I said before.  
Westnorthwest from the Corongne 8 leagues lieth the Island of Cyzarga, 
Cysarga.  and from Cape Prior it is w. s.w 8 leagues.  
But from Cape Ortegal it is south-west & by west 17 leagues, this Island of Cysarga (which by us is called Cesarien) is round about foul.  
Thus Cape Prior showeth itself being the eastpoint of Corongne.   view of 'Corongne' (city in Spain) 
The Land lying east from Corongne showeth thus when it is southeast from you.   view of 'Corongne' (city in Spain)  

FOUR To sail from the Island of Cysarga to Cape de Finisterre.  
FRom the Island Cysarga south and by west, and s. s. w. lieth the haven of Queres, 
Queres.  which is a good haven, the westside is fair, but the eastside is foul, therefore you must go in along by the westside, and when you are between the two lands, then run in through the middle of the channel, to the point, then turn up westward a league inwards, & there anchor at 7, 8, & 9 fathom, it is a fair haven for great ships.  
From the Island of Cysarga south-west and by west, and westsouthwest 12 or 13 leagues lieth the eastpoint of Monsy, 
Cape de Bylem.  called Cabo de Bilem, it is a high sloping point with many craggy rocks, lying lose off from the land, as if it were a steeple, it showeth black, and is called the Monk. 
Monck.   
There lieth a great row of rocks right before the haven of Monsy, 
Rocks before Monsy.  s. w. and by s. from Monck, but the innermost end of them lieth south and by west from the Monk, for they are at least two or three cables in length, when you fall upon Monsy it is double land, and about Cape de Finisterre lieth a high white sand reaching into the land, as if it were a sandbaye.  
And as you come about Cape de Finisterre you see also a craggy hill, which runneth in so far southwards that you may see it before Moors.  
If you will enter into Monsy coming from Cysarga, 
To sail into Morsy.  you must go in close by Cape de Bylem or Bellem, this point is altogether a high craggy sharp land full of high steep rocks, as I said before, and when you are by the point, you must hold Cape de Coriane a ships length without Cape de Cotte so long until S. Mary's church cometh without the point of Monsy, then go into the east-chanel 
East-chanel.  with these marks, and sail in s. s. e. till you pass by the church, than you shall see a row of rocks, run in behind them, and anchor there before the village of Monsy at 5, 6, or 7 fathom: as you sail thus from Cape Bylem to Monsy, them the rocks that lie in the middle before the haven are about a quarter of a league inward to the Sea from you.  
To sail in at the westchanel, 
Westchanel.  you must go eastsoutheast easily along by the land, & when our Lady's church cometh without the point, than you must go towards the rocks which lie before Monsy, as aforesaid, and anchor within the rocks at seven or eight fathom, but go not too far in, for there shooteth out a sand along the haven which is very dry.  
The east-chanel is better to enter then the west channel, but sail not into Monsy before you see the church without the point: you may also anchor well on the northside of the haven at 5, 6 or 7 fathom.  
South from the village of Monsy there is a creak, before the which there lieth a shallow reaching e.n.e. two cables length along by the haven.  
Our Lady's church & the Monk lie distant from each other n. and by e. and s. & by w.  
south-west from C. de Bylem 3 leagues lieth Cap de Coriane. 
C. de Coriane.   
And from Cape de Coriane it is south & north three leagues to Cape de Finisterre. Between these two Capes there is a Sandbaye, where you may anchor eastward from the great rock at 6 or 7 fathom. This is a great creak, which reacheth far into the land. On the northside of this Bay there lie rocks under the water which you must shun.  
There lieth a great Sandbaye east from the Cape de Finisterre, when you see it you may know, that you are by Cape de Finisterre, there lieth also another between the haven of Corcobayona and the Cape, but the first is the greatest, but by this second the haven of Corcobayona or Seche goeth in, which for the most part reacheth in north, as in the Chapter enseweing it is showed.  
Thus the land of Monsy showeth itself between Cape de Finisterre and Cysarga, as you sail along by it coming out of the east, about four leagues from the land.   view of 'Monsy' (Spain) 
When Cape de Finisterre is southsoutheast from you it showeth thus.   view of Cape Finisterre 
Cape de Finisterre being southeast and somewhat southerlyer from you showeth thus.   view of Cape Finisterre 
Thus Cape de Finisterre showeth itself when it is southeast and somewhat easterlyer from you.   view of Cape Finisterre 
When Cape Finisterre is southeast and by east from you five or six leagues it showeth thus.   view of Cape Finisterre  

V What Moon maketh high water here.  
Upon all these Coasts of Gallicia a south-west and a North-east moon maketh a high water, and within the channels and havens a south-west and by west, and a North-east and by east moon, or a point later, as the havens reach deep or far into the Land, as upon the coasts of Biscaya and France.   

VI How these Country's lie from others.  

FRom Cape de Pinas to Aviles s. s. w. 3 leagues.  
From Luarca to Ribadeus w. s. w. 7 leagues.  
From Ribadeus to Cape de Brilo n. w. 8 leagues.  
From S. Cyprian to Ortegal w. n. w. 9 leagues.  
From Carins to Ortegal northwest 5 leagues.  
From Ortegal to Siverus south-west 4 leagues.  
From Siverus to Cape Prior south-west 5 leagues.  
From Cape Prior to Ferol south and by east 3 leagues.  
From Ferol to Corongne south and s. & by w. 4 leagues.  
From Corongne to Cyzarga w. n. w. 8 leagues.  
From Cysarga to Queres s. & by w. and s. s. w. 3 leagues.  
From Cysarga to Cape Bylem or the eastpoint of Monsy s. w. and by w. and w. s. w. 12 or 13 leagues.  
From Cape Bylem to Cape de Coriane or Torrevian south-west 3 leagues.  
From Cape Coriane to Cape Finisterre s. & n. 3 leagues.  
From C. de Pinas to Ribadeus s. w. & by w. 13 or 14 leagues.  
From Cape de Pinas to the Island of S. Cyprian east and west 19 or 20 leagues.  
From Cape de Pinas to Ortegal west and by north and some. what westerlyer 29 leagues.  
From Ortegal to Cape Prior south-west 11 leagues.  
From Cape Ortegal to Cysarga s. w. and by w. 17 leagues.  
From Cape de Prior to Cysarga w. s. w. 8 leagues.  
From Ferol to Cysarga east and west 8 leagues.    

VII. How these Lands are situate in respect of other Lands.  

FRom Cape de Pinas to Cap de Veel in Ireland north and west 168 leagues.  
From C. de Ortegal to Waterford northward 160 leagues.  
From Ortegal to Startpoint north and by east, and somewhat more easterly 128 leagues.  
From Cysarga to Cape Vejo north 160 leagues.  
From Cysarga to the Sorlinges north and by east 138 leagues.    

VIII. Under what heigths these Lands are situate.  

Scape de Pinas lieth under 43 degrees 56 minutes,  
Or as some say under 43 degrees 44 minutes.  
Cape de Ortegal lieth under 44 degrees 5 minutes,  
Or as some say under 43 degrees 52 minutes.  
Cap de Finisterre lieth under 43 degrees.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 9   


Pascaarte van een deel der Zeecusten van Gallissen en van Portugal gelegen tussen de C. de Finisterre end de Barlengas, hoemen die, mitsgaders all Zeehavenen aldaer geleghen shall beseijlen alles gestelt op zijne rechte streckinge end distantie van mijlen  
Carte marine des Costes de la mer dune party de Galisse et de Portugal, entre le Cape de Finisterre et les Barlenges representant aussij la uraije situation des haures et Ports de mer situez ausdictes costs, et comment on les marinera, le tout mis selon ses uraijes routs, distances de lieves, et elevations du pole   map of the coasts of Galicia and Portugal   

CHAPTER IX. THE DESCRIPTION OF the Sea-coasts of Gallicia and Portugal, lying between Cabo de Finisterre and the Barrels.  

Thus Cabo de Finisterre showeth itself when it lieth five leagues east and by south from you.   view of Cape Finisterre 
Thus Cabo de Finisterre showeth itself, when this craggy or rugged hill is North-east and somewhat easter liar from you.   view of Cape Finisterre 
And then the land of Mores showeth thus, when it is east North-east from you.   view of 'Mores' (town in Spain) 
Thus lieth the craggy hill of Finisterre when it is North-east and by north from you.   view of Cape Finisterre 
When Cabo de Finisterre is about northnortheast, and the land of Moors seven leagues North-east from you, than the Cape lieth thus broken in three pieces, and the land of Moors thus.   view of Cape Finisterre  

I. The situation of Cabo de Finisterre, Mores, Rio Roxo, or Villa Nova.  
Between Cape de Coriana and Cape de Finisterre (as I said in the chapter before) there goeth in a great creak, which reacheth far into the land, where you may anchor eastward of the great rock, before a Sandbaye at 6 or 7 fathom.  
About a league eastward from Cape de Finisterre on the southside lieth the haven of Seche 
Seche.  or Corcovia, which the Hollanders call Corcke Bayone: 
Corcke Bayone.  between this haven & the Cape there lie two Sandbayes, the first nearest to the Cape is the greatest, and by the second goeth this haven in, and reacheth in north at 8 or 9 fathom. On the eastside of the haven lieth a great rock, and about southsouthwest from this rock, (almost in the middle of the haven) there lieth a blind rock under the water, but run northward until you see the town on the westside, and there anchor at 6 or 7 or 8 fathom, within the river there lieth a village or little town about north North-east from you.  
From Cape de Finisterre to the haven of Moors 
Moors.  the course is southeast six leagues. To know the land there abouts you must understand that when you are about Cape de Finisterre, you see a craggy ragged hill, which runneth so far southwards that you may see it before Moors.  
When the said craggy Rock is North-east from you, than you are against C. Finisterre, and then Monte Lauro, 
Monte Lauro.  a hill lying upon the northeast-point of Moors, lieth eastnortheast from you. This hill called Monte Lauro is a cloven high hill, which is easy to know.  
When the craggy hill between Cape Finisterre and Mores lieth eastnortheast seven leagues from you, it showeth thus.   view of Cape Finisterre 
Southeast three leagues from Cape de Finisterre there lie a company of rocks under the water, and eastsoutheast also about 3 leagues from the aforesaid rocks there lie some rocks above the water, & they lie northward from Monte Lauro, or the haven of Moor's east and by north and west and by south distant from Monte Lauro. There lie also a number of rocks southward from the haven of Moors, and almost in the middewaie from Monte Lauro, right in the middle of the Voert there is a blind rock also about south-west from Monte Lauro.  
He that will sail into Mores must set Monte Lauro North-east and by north from him, 
To sail into Moors.  and sail right upon Monte Lauro, than he shall sail by no dangers, when he cometh to Monte Lauro, than he shall see the aforesaid outrockes northward from Monte Lauro, let them, as also the point of Monte Lauro lie two or three cables length on baghborde, & sail so along by them, till you be past the second point, leaving the blinde-rock which lieth in the middle of the way on starboard, and when the Fisshers' village which standeth northward from Monte Lauro is whole open to be seen, them you are within the aforesaid blinde-rock lying in the middle of the way, south and by east, and somewhat easterlyer from the east-end of the aforesaid Fisshermens' village.  
When you come to the second point, then go a cables length along about by it, & turn up northward, till you come before the village, or westward up before the town, whether you will, and there anchor at 12 and 13 fathom.  
To sail into Rio Roxo, 
To sail into Rio Roxo.  then run about without the rocks which lie southward from Moors, and go on southeast and by south, till you come before the haven of Rio Roxo, than you shall see a great number of outrockes reaching out from the northland almost to a great rock like an Island, which is called Salure: you may go north about this Island, and so between it and these outrockes, but it is very narrow and straight, because of the rocks aforesaid, which come off from the northland, therefore sail southward along forward about that Island, leaving it on baghborde, or to seaward from you, until you see the River open, then run in through the middle of the channel, until you see the Island of Roxo in the middle thereof, and sail up unto it, and when you come to it, than you may anchor on the southside. On the southland there are two Sandie-bayes, where there is good anckor-ground.  
When Cape de Finisterre is North-east, or northnortheast, and Monte Lauro five leagues eastnortheast from you, it showeth itself with the high land of Moors thus.  
Monte Lauro. The high land of Moors.   view of Cape Finisterre  

II. To sail into Ponte Vedro and Bayona.  
FRom Rio Roxo or the Island of Salure to Ponte Vedra, or the Island Blidones 
Blydones.  the course is s. s. e. four leagues, between them both there lieth an Island, called Monte Carbela, 
Monte Carbela.  behind it it is three fathom deep, but right before the haven of Ponte Vedro there lieth an Island called Blidones, which may be sailed round about, on the northside it is no deeper than five or six fathom, and within the haven on the northside there lie two rocks called the Boos or Oxen, on the southside of Blidones it is the right channel to sail into Ponte Vedro, the channel reacheth in North-east, till you be within the Island, in the middle of the haven there lieth an other Island, which you must also go southward about, therefore go all e. n. e. and along by the southland, until you see the flat steeple which standeth upon the southland, there you must run over a bank forward to the point of Ponte Vedro, there within lieth the town, & against the flat steeple you may anchor at 8 and 9 fathom. This haven in some places is 40 fathom deep.  
Five leagues southward from the Island of Blidones, lie the Islands of Bayona, 
islands of Bayona.  when you come out of the Sea upon them, than those islands shine like grey or black rocks, and lie as if they were three islands, although the water runneth between them but in one place, but between each of them there is a valley.  
To landward over these islands you may see a high hill with three hillocks, and between each hillock there is a valley.  
There lie two such hills, the northerlyest hath one valley more than the other, right east from this hill you may see a white closter stand against the high land, whereby this land is well to be known.  
You may sail in there both by north and by south of the islands of Bayona, and on the northpoint of the islands there lieth a rock under the water, about a cables length from it which you must beware of. You may also anchor under the islands at 10, 11, or 12 fathom.  
He that will sail northward in, 
North channel.  he must run in about the middle of the channel, between the islands and the firm land, but nearest to the islands, till the havens of Vigo and Cannae lie open, than you must sail in eastward, it is a wide haven, where on both sides, that is on the southside before Vigo, and the northside before Cannae you may anchor at twelve or thirteen fathom.  
You may also sail inwards about the southpoint of Rondella, where you may lay the ship safe in the mud without anchor or cable.  
But he that will go in southward about the islands to Vigo or Cannae, 
South channel.  he must sail in between the southerlyest Island & the point of the land of Bayona, along in the middle of the channel North-east, and North-east and by north 3 leagues at the least, keeping the north-haven two ships length open, so long until that Cannae 
Cannae  cometh on the northland without the point of Fignes or Vigo, 
Vigo  than he must let the point of Vigo lie on starboard from him, & go in in the middle of the channel, between the northland & the land of Fignes, till he be before the town of Vigo, and there he must anchor, as aforesaid, before Cannas or Vigo where he will at 10 or 12 fathom.  
But he that will sail into Bayona, 
Bayona.  he must sail on from the southerlyest end of the castle of Bayona, and when he cometh within the point of Bayona, he must not sail far into the bought, for there lieth a rock under the water, but then sail to the eastpoint of Bayona whereon the castle standeth, and being within the castle, then turn or run quickly southward till you be before the town, and anchor at 4, 5, and 6 fathom, but right before the town there lieth a blind rock, which you must shun.  
You may also, lying between the point on the other side of the aforesaid haven and the Island or Rock, sail through a● three or four fathom to Vigo.  

To know the land of Bayona.  To know the Land such as come from the south, must understand that north from the hill of S. Rego half way to Bayona, there standeth a closter upon the side or corner of the land, which is a good mark for Bayona to those that come out of the south. This hill of S. Rego aforesaid, lieth right northward from Camina, and if is a high steep hill, which above upon the middle thereof hath a cleft or saddle as you behold it, it is almost like to Monte Lauro, but it is at least once as high again, and it is a very good mark to know this Country. Behind Bayona also there lieth a high hill with three cliffs in it, whereof I have spoken before, when this Hill is eastsoutheast from you, than you are right against the islands of Bayona, you may then sail to the said islands if you will go into Bayona, & then you cannot do amiss.  
When the point of Bayona is eastnortheast, and the high land east from you, than it showeth thus, and then southward lieth the high hill of S. Rego.  
Bayona. Closter. S. Rego.   view of Bayona 
When the high hill of S. Rego is east from you, than the high land of Bayona showeth thus, as it is here set down, and the Closter standeth about half way between S. Rego and Bayona.  
Bayona. Closter.   view of Bayona  

III. To sail into Camina and Viana.  
FIve leagues southward from the islands of Bayona lieth the haven of Camina, 
Camina.  it is a tydehaven, which great ships must enter into at a high water, the channel reacheth in North-east and by north, within the haven there lieth a rock nearest to the southside, upon it there standeth a house, and close southward from this little Island is the deepest water to sail out and into the haven. Within the haven on the northside there lieth a little Island, whereon there standeth a steeple, which you must keep over against the steeple which standeth upon the northland, & so go in upon it, in the channel it is two fathom deep at half flood.  
From the westside of the haven there cometh a bank of stony sand shooting off, and there it is for the most part flat water, and very rocky, therefore men must be careful thereof.  
Seven leagues southward from Camina lieth the Tydehaven of Viana, 
Viana.  he that will go into it must understand, that from the northside of the River there cometh a stony bank of sand shooting down, cross over before the River, there (when you come out of the Sea) you must go so long southward about, until that the two fire-towres are one against the other, and then run to the strand, so long until that the tower standing upon the northside be over against the two houses, keep it standing so, & run to the rock with the mast, and sail eastward about from it and close along, you shall find two fa●●●me water upon that Sand (with a continual daily tide) at low water: when you are passed that Rock, than you shall see another Rock with a mast or beacon standing thereon, lying on the north side of the land within the river, run there likewise about close along southward, and then easily along by the northland, until you come before the town, there sometimes there shooteth out a Sand, which you must shun, & anchor before the town. When you lie before the town, then there lieth a little Island southward from you, whereon there standeth a little chapel, westward from this Island lieth a great bank; which at low water is seen above it, but there behind the bank it is five and six fathom deep, and before Viana it is seven, eight and nine fathom deep. When you go in you may run southward, about the aforesaid bank, and come by the Island whereon the house standeth out again, before the town.  

Road before Viana.  You may also anchor well without in the Road at twelve fathom, there is the farest ground, there take in a Pilot, because it is a very narrow channel to enter into.  
Or you may sail well in with these marks: there stand two marks upon the southside, which (when you come out of the Sea) you must hold one against the other, and sail so long to the land, until the two marks standing on the northside of the River are likewise one against the other, and so sail in by the southside, eastward about the rock whereon the mast or stenge standeth, until you see the River open, then sail in eastward, southward of the second rock with the steng that standeth up, and when you are a bow shot within the said rock, then strait let your anchor fall, and carry cables to the south land and make your ship fast with four ropes.   

FOUR The situation between Viana and Port a port.  
FRom Viana to Port a port the course is south and by east twelve or therteene leagues. Between them both lieth Villa del Conde, 
Villa del Conde.  seven leagues from Viana and Metelin. Villa del Conde is a Tydehaven, before the mouth thereof there lie many rocks, which may be sailed about either south or north, about them it is 5 or 6 fathom, and inwards again there lieth a bank cross over the haven, which is two fathom deep with high water, within the haven it is 3 or 4 fathom deep, & southwards up it is deepest and safest, for on the northside it is full of rocks, which for the most part lie under the water, so that it is best lying on the southside at 5 or 6 fathom.  
Four leagues southward from Villa del Conde, lie the great outrockes called Lesons, 
Lesons.  right before a tydehaven, of two fathom deep called Metelin, 
Metelin.  & south-west from the southpoint of the said Lesons, about half a league inward to the Sea, there lieth a blind rock under the water: between the land and the Lesons rocks it is six or seven fathom deep.  
About a league south from Lesons rocks lieth Port a port 
Port a port.  which hath two channels, the one runneth in n. the other south.  
The south channel 
South-chanel.  (which runneth in southward, & now the best) runneth along by the southland, & is 3 fathom deep, to the rock with the cross, close in along by it, and keep in the middle of the channel, till you come by a great steeple, upon the northland, which you may see through, & there anchor. This channel altereth sometimes, & therefore you must be careful thereof.  
You must run into the northchanel 
Northchanel.  in this manner, you must sail along by the northpoint, where now with half flood it is three fathom water, it reacheth in e. s. e. and e. and by s. there reach many rocks cross over the haven from the said northpoint, but you run along by them, leaving two-partes of the water on the northside, than you run upon the southland, and along by it till you come to the rock with the cross, and then in the middle of the channel, till you come before the town, where you have 10 or 12 fathom deep.   

V To sail into Avero with the situation of Cape de Montego and the Barles.  
FIrst to sail from Port a port to Avero 
Avero.  the course is s. and by n. 10 leagues. To know the land, you must understand, that from Port a port to Avero it is altogether sandy strand, & you may go along by the strand at 10 or 12 fathom.  
Inward to the land, upon the high land there lieth a black hillock upon the land, when that lieth e. s.e. from you, than you are open before Avero, and when you can not see the black hillock of Carmale, there lieth a row of downs northward from the haven, than you are half a league from the haven.  
To sail into the haven of Avero, 
To sail into Auro.  you must understand that when you come upon the land at 6 or 7 fathom, than you may see three beakons made of masts of ships upon the southland, place them one right against the other, & so run in e. & by s. & e. s.e. over the bank, (at the entry of the channel you have but 2 fathom water at half flood) till you come by the beakons, then turn alaine northwest and northnorthwest, till you be close by the northland, then run close by it, and so you leave all the shallows on your right hand, until you see the River open, than you see a house upon the strand on the westside, then go from thence up into the River east and by south, and eastsoutheast in the middle of the channel between both lands, till you be before the Salt-pannes or Avero, where you may lad your ship full of salt, when you go upon the masts or beakons out of the Sea, than you see a dry Sand, by the which you must quickly wind about, and sail in by the westland, as I said before. This channel is two fathom deep, with daily tides, but within you have 4 or 5 fathom deep.  
From Avero to Cape de Montego 
Cape de Montego.  it is southsouthwest 7 leagues.  
A league southward from Cape de Montego lieth Pissago, 
Pissago.  a Tydehaven, in it you find two fathom water (with a continual tide) at half flood.  
Half a league westward into the Sea from this haven lieth a bank of six fathom deep, which you may anchor under at 12 or 13 fathom, it is at least a great league long, and it is best to come in about under this bank.  
Coming off from Cape de Montego you may also anchor under this bank at 7 fathom.  
From Cape de Montego to Pineche, 
Pineche.  or Nova Lisbona the course is s. w. and by s. 11 leagues. From Cape de Montego to the Barlis it is s. w. 12 or 13 leagues.  
The point behind the Barlis or Barlinges, is also called Cape del Fisiron, there lieth a rock off from the point, & there southward there is a great creak, where the castle or town lieth, there you may run behind with barks, and lie safe, the town is called Atogie, it lieth against the high hills.   

VI To know the places of this Coast.  
THe Coast of Portugal about Viana is well to be known, by means of the aforesaid hill of Rego, because it is so extreme high, and lieth upon the water side, and the high land of Viana lieth twice or thrice double behind it. Between Viana, Villa del Conde, and Port a port, you may see many steeples, and houses upon the Land, and you see Villa del Conde lie as if it were a great town. You may know the River of Port a port by the rocks called Lesons which are very high, and lie right north from the River. But about Avero it is altogether sandy strand, and inward to the land there lieth a black hillock within the land.  
Cape Montego is a high point, & there against it in the land it is high hills. This Cape is sometimes taken for Roxant, but that is well to be known from the other, because of the Barlis which lieth between both.  
Thus the coast of Portugal showeth itself from Bayona to Cape de Montego, when you sail about four leagues from it.  
S. Rego.   view of the coast of Portugal 
That which standeth heereunder belongeth to that that standeth above where the crosses stand.  
☞ Cap de Montego.   view of Cabo Mondego 
When that black hillock whereby the hand is, standeth e. s. e. from you, than you are right against, or before the River of Avero.   

VII. What Moon maketh high water here.  
Upon all these coasts of Portugal a North-east and south-west moon maketh a high water, but within the havens a point later, as I have said before, you need not reckon any falling of streams here, for the flood there goeth cross towards the land and off again.   

VIII. How these Countries lie one from the other.  

FRom Cape de Finisterre to Moors or Monte Lauro the course is southeast 5 leagues.  
From Rio Roxo to Ponte Vedra s. s. e. 5 leagues.  
From Ponte Vedra or Blidones to the islands of Bayone southsoutheast 5 leagues.  
From Bayona to Camina south & by east 4 leagues.  
From Camina to Viana southsoutheast 7 leagues.  
From Viana to Villa de Conde south & by east 7 leagues.  
From Villa de Conde to Port a port s. & by e. 5 leagues.  
From Port a port to Avero south 11 leagues.  
From Avero to Cap Montego southsouthwest 7 leagues.  
From Cape de Montego to Pineche or Cape de Fisiron south-west & by south 11 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to the islands of Bayona southeast and by south 19 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to Port a port s. s. e. 44 leagues.  
From C. de Finisterre to Avero s. & by e. & s. s.e. 54 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to Barrels south 67 leagues.  
From Bayona to Barrels 49 leagues.  
From Port a port to Barrels s. s. w. and s. w. & by s. 29 leagues.  
From Avero to Barrels south-west 20 leagues.    

IX. How these Country's lie from other Countries.  

FRom Cape de Finisterre to great Canaria southsouthwest and somewhat southerlyer 307 leagues.  
From Cape Finisterre to the Savages s. s.w. 273 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to the I'll of Madera south-west and by south and somewhat southerlyer 246 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to the I'll of S. Michael westsouthwest 247 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to the Isles of Tercera w. s. w. and w. and by s. 280 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to the south-west point of Ireland n. and by west, and north 174 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to Cape de Claro south 174 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to Waterford or the southeast point of Ireland north and by east 184 or 186 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to Startpoint n. n. e. 153 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to the Seims n. e. & by n. and somewhat northerlyer 112 leagues.  
From Cape de Finisterre to Belisle south-west 122 leagues.    

X. Under what degrees these Country's lie.  

Scape de Finisterre lieth under 43 degrees.  
Bayona lieth under 42 degrees 10 minutes, 

or as some say 42 degrees.    
Port a port lieth under 41 degrees.  
Avero lieth under 40 degrees 26 minutes.  
Cape de Montego lieth under 40 degrees 8 minutes.  
The Barlinges lie under 39 degrees 40 minutes.   
The other places lying on these coasts you may take the height thereof in the Card with the compasses.   
Hear followeth the Card N. 10.   

CHAPTER X. THE DESCRIPTION OF the Sea-coasts of Portugal and Algarve, which lie between the Barlinges and Cabo de S. Vincent.  

I. How you shall sail the River of Lisbon.  
FRom Barlinges to Roxent the course is south and by east, and southsoutheast, distant 16 leagues. Behind the Barlinges or Barlis there is a good Rode and anchor ground, 
Road behind the Barils.  against the hermits house, where you may anchor at 10 fathom, under the great Island, as it standeth marked in the Card, you may go south and north on both sides thereof, behind them as you will, for there it is fair.  
Behind the Barlis lieth Cape de Fisiron, and right south from thence lieth a high round hill, which our sailors name young Rocxent. 
Young Rocxent.  From Cape de Fisiron to Rocxent it is south & north 15 or 16 leagues. Rocxent is a point of land well to be known, for although you are a great way from it, yet you may see the sharp hillock of Syntra closter.  
When Roxent is east and by south and eastsoutheast from you seven leagues than it showeth thus.   view of 'Roxent' (a hill in Portugal) 
Thus Rocxent showeth being North-east from you 7 leagues.   view of 'Roxent' (a hill in Portugal) 
A league east from the point of Roxent lieth the Road of Cas●alis, where you may lie safe from a northwest, north, and North-east wind, at 12 or 13 fathom, as dry as you will. A great league east from Cascalis lieth the point of S. julian or S. Giles, 
S. Giles.  thereon standeth a strong castle, and that is the northpoint of the River of Lisbon, and the northchanel 
Northchanel.  of the said River goeth up the length of a bullets cast in by it.  
To sail in by this point, you must sail within a masts length of the castle, and keep the northland to Restiers, and so to Lisbon, commonly you anchor before the village of Bolin, at 12 and 13 fathom, but you must take heed that you enter not into the haven with still water, and with an ebb, for it falleth very strong upon the north Shops or Sops. The channel of S. Giles reacheth in e. & by s. and when you are within you must sail e.n.e. and n.e. and by e. and when you come against the closter at Restiers, than you must make somewhat towards the southland, otherwise you must hold all along the northland, as aforesaid.  
To sail into the Crake-chanel, 
To sail into the Crake-chanel.  than you must place Cascalis over the point of Roxent, until the steeple (which you may see standing above the closter at Restiers) cometh over against the white closter which standeth furthest from Restiers, that is, over against S. Katherine's closter, then go in n. e. and n. e. & by n. keeping these marks standing thus, until you come within S. Giles point, and so go in along by the northland of Restiers, till you be within the castle, and then anchor where you will: with these marks you may sail into & out of the Crake channel. Or if you come from the west, and will go into Crake-chanel, than place Cascalis over against the westend of Roxent, and so sail about the North-capes, until the town of Lisbon be within two ships length of the southside of the River, and sail in so, n. e. & n.e. & by n. when you see the Sandbaye within S. Giles point, than you are in a good way.  
Pascaarte vande Zeecusten van Portugal tusschen de Barlenges en de C. de S. Vincente geleghen, vertoonende naeed leaven de ware geleghentheijt vande vermaerde Riviere van Lisbona, hoemen die mitsgaders andere Zeegaten aldaer op en afseijlen shall, en waermen op de selfde gewesten hem voor te wachten end te hoeden heeft.  
Cart marine des costes de Portugal situeez entre les Barlenges et le C. de S. Vincente, representant au vif la uraije situation de la fameuse Riviere de Lisbone et autres Ports la environ, comment en les navigant on se gardera de toutes inprofonditez, bancx de sable et autrez perilz.   map of the coast of Portugal 

To laveere in the Krake channel.  He that will laveere out of and into the Crake-chanel must leave the steeple aforesaid (standing in the land) a ships length southward, & a ships length northward from S. Katherine's closter aforesaid, and then turn every bout, and so laveere out & in. And go not out of or into this channel with a calm or an ebb, for it falleth very stiff over the east-end of the Cachops.  
If you will go out of the Crake-chanel, take good heed to the steeple, when it cometh under the highland, than set it right west from the second white closter, and go on s. w. & by s. than the steeple will come upon the closter.  
But if you must laveere out then look well to your tide, for the stream falleth very stiff over the Cachops, 〈◊〉 that with a calm it is dangerous to go out and into this channel, but specially in sailing out with an ebb, for that falleth cross over the Cachops, therefore look well to it in calm wether.   

II. To sail to S. Wes or Setubal, & so to C. S. Vincent.  

S. Was point. C. Spichel.  FRom Roxent to S. Uves point the course is s. e. & by s. 11 leagues. It is a point well to be known, because there lieth a high round hill thereon, also you see the upper part of the castle of Sizember, upon a flat hill, as if it were a great gavel end of a countrie-house.  
Thus S. Wes point showeth when it is east and by north from you 7 leagues.   view of Cape Espichel 
S. Uves point is called Cape de Spichel, right south about the point there is a rent or cloven place in the land, there against it is good riding at 9 and 10 fathom, and before Sisember you may also anchor at 15 or 16 fathom.  
Five leagues eastward from Cape de Spichel, or S. Uves point lieth S. Uves, where there lieth a great bank before the haven, there standeth a white castle beneath the high land upon the water, when it is n.n.e. from you, than you are right before the channel or haven.  
He that will sail to S. Uves over the bank coming down from S. Uves point he must keep the west-point of Sisember a ships length without the eastpoint, 
To sail into S. Wes.  and so go forward e. & e. and by n. until the castle of Palmelo, which standeth above S. Uves cometh in a valley over the white castle which standeth upon the water side, then sail in right n.n.e. till you be within the castle which standeth upon the water, and then within a cables length in by the northland n.e. & by e. till you are before the town of S. Uves or Setubal. But when the castle of Palmelo cometh under the land, so that you can see it no more, than there standeth a white house on the northside of the castle that standeth upon the water side, keep that standing so, & run in upon it, till you be within the white castle, and then go along by the northland, as I said before, till you be before the town of Uves, & anchor before the fishermen's village at 6 or 7 fathom. Upon the bank it is 3 fathom and a half water at half flood, & when you sail over it you find seven shallow or dry places, By the southland also there goeth in a channel, but that is only for barks, between this channel & the right depth, the banks in some places lie so dry, that they lie almost above the water.  
Now to go over the deepest water in the bank of S. Uves as you sail out, with ships that draw much water, when you set sail from the white castle, than set the white house over against the northside of the castle, so that you may see through them, and hold it so, until S. Uves point gins to come without the eastpoint of Sisember, then bring the white house on the southside of the castle which standeth upon the water side, and so run out, for there you shall have the deepest water, but when you may see the castle of Palmelo, that is a right long mark to run over the bank. Then the white castle must be n.n.e. & somewhat northerlyer from you.  
Fron S. Uves point to C.S. Vincent 
C. S. Vincent.  it is s. & s. & by e. 29 league. between them there is no known havens. But eastward about from Cape S. Vincent you may anchor before a sandbay at 20 fathom, against a n. & n.n.w. wind.  
But to know the land, you must understand that between C. S. Vincent & S. Uves point there lie some high hills, called Salines, & half a league n. from Cape S. Vincent, there lieth a high whitish cliff in the land, which is higher than the other land, when you see it then you are by the Cape, & upon the point of S. Vincent there standeth a broken closter, & close by the Cape there lieth a high rock. The whole coast of Algarve may be known by the Fgge-hilles, 
Fig-hilles  as also Cape S. Vincent.  
Thus the land about Cape S. Vincent showeth itself when you come from the north, and sail along by it.  
Blewe-hill. Salines. Figge-hill C. S. Vincent   view of Cape Saint Vincent  

III. What Moon maketh the highest water here.  
AS upon all the other Coasts of Portugal and Gallicia, so also here upon these described Coasts, a North-east and south-west Moon maketh high water, but within the channels or rivers a streeke or two later, according as they reach deep or far into the land. And because the flood here cometh cross against the land, and cross back from the land, so have you here no falling of streams.   

FOUR How these Countries lie distant one from the other.  

FRom Barlinges to Roxent s. & by e. & s. s.e. 16 leagues.  
From Cape de Fisiron, Pineche, or Nova Lisbona to Roxent south and north 15 or 16 leagues.  
From Roxent to Cape de Spichel, or S. Uves-point southeast and by south 11 leagues.  
From C. de Spichel to C. S. Vincent s. & s. & by e. 29 leagues.  
From Barlinges to Cape de S. Vincent s. and by e. 54 leagues.  
From Roxent to Cape de S. Vincent s. & by e. 37 leagues.    

V How these Countries are distant from other Countries.  

FRom Barlinges to great Canaria s. s. w. 248 leagues.  
From Barlinges to the Palma s. w. & by s. 256 leagues.  
From Roxent to great Canaria southsouthwest & somewhat westerlyer. 340 leagues.  
From the River of Lisbon to the Isle of Savages 208 laagues.  
From the Ri●er of Lisbon to Porto Santo s. w. 160 leagues.  
Fron the River of Lisbon to the I'll of Madera s. w. 174 leagues.  
From the River of Lisbon or from Roxent to the I'll of Tercera west 274 leagues.    

VI Under what heigths these Country's lie.  

THe Barlinges lie under 39 degrees 40 minutes.  
Roxent lieth under 38 degrees 52 minutes, 

or as some say 39 degrees.    
Cape de Spichel or S. Uves-point lieth under 38 deg. 25 min.  
Cape S. Vincent lieth under 37 degrees.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 11.   


Afbeeldinghe der Z●●●usten, tusschen de C. de S. Vincente en de Strute van Gibraltar: als e'en deel van Algarve, de groote Condaet, en de custen van Andalusien, vertoonende de rechte gelegentheijt aller Rivieren, Havenen, en Reeden aldaer geleghen. Jtem all Sanden, Bancken, Clippen, end Rudsen, diemen in't beseijlen derselver plaetsen te schouwen en te mijden heeft  
Pour traicture des costs marines' entre le C. de S. Vincente et l'estroict de Gibraltar, come une party d'Algarve, la grand Condade, et les costs d'Andalusie, monstrant au vif la uraije situation de toutes Rivieres, Haures, et Rades desdictes costs. Item de tous Bancqs, sables, escueilz et rochers, que en navigeant lesdictes lieux on a veviter.   map of the coasts of Algarve and Andalusia   

CHAPTER XI. THE DESCRIPTION OF the Sea-coasts of Algarve and Andalusia, lying between Cabo de S. Vincent and the Straight of Gibraltar.  

I. The situation between Cape S. Vincent and Cape de S. Maria.  
RIght east from Cape S. Vincent about the second point in the Sandbaye, 
Road under Cape S. Vincent  there is good Road for a northwest and north-winds, at 14 or 15 fathom, from Cape de S. Vincent to Cape de S. Maria or Faro, east or a little southerlyer 19 or 20 leagues, between them both lieth Lagos or Laves, 
Lagos or Laves.  and Villa Nova. From Cape de S. Vincent to Lagos it is east and by north seven leagues, there is a tydehaven which runneth through between the rocks, behind a girdle of Sand, but at a low water it is dry, there you may also lie at anchor against a northwest, westnorthwest, and a north wind, at 10 or 12 fathom.  
Villa Nova 
Villa Nova.  lieth about four leagues eastward from Laves, between them both, almost three leagues from Laves, & more than one from Villa Nova there lieth a blind rock, which you must think upon. Villa Nova is a fair haven, it runneth in north and north and by west, and at half flood you have therein two fathom water. Within the haven on the eastside there lieth a little Island or rock, whereon there standeth a steeple or a house, and upon the land there standeth a great mast with a barrel upon it, when that steeple or house is right against the said mast, than you must sail upon it right into the haven, by the east-land, till you be past the steeple, the westside is flat and dry, then when you come by the mast, you must turn up westward before the town of Villa Nova, where you may anchor at four and five fathom.  
From Villa Nova to Faro, 
Faro, C. Maria.  or Cape S. Maria it is about nine leagues, upon the strand there standeth a fire-beakon, and from the point there shooteth off a Sand which you must shun, you must go in east to the haven of Faro, it reacheth west, and west northwest, you must leave the steeple on the left hand, and the strand of Tavila on the right hand, running in at two or three fathom, and being in, you may anchor right over against the town of Faro under the Island, at three fathom, the channel at half flood is two fathom deep.  
To know this land when you come out of the Sea, you must understand that Cape S. Maria is a round hillock, by the which you may know the whole land of Condado.  
Thus Cape S. Vincent showeth itself when it lieth seven leagues northwest from you.   view of Cape Saint Vincent 
When Cape S. Maria lieth North-east and by north from you, than it showeth thus.   view of Cabo de Santa Maria  

II. To sail from Cape de S. Maria to Saltees.  
FIve leagues North-east & by north from Cape de S. Maria or Faro lieth Tavila, 
Tavila.  which is a crooked dry haven, which almost every year altereth, and is not to be trusted to sail into it, unless it be first marked with beakons or boys, at half flood it is scarce two fathom, and you lie right within the downs at four fathom.  
From Tavila to Aimonte 
Aimonte.  the course is e.n.e. five leagues.  
Aimonte is a deep haven, and one of the best havens in all Condado, it reacheth in northwest by the east-land, and at half flood it is 3 fathom deep, there lie some sands before the channel, the marks thereof are these, there standeth a tree upon the eastside of the haven, when Aimonte is over against the tree, than you are east from the Sands, which lie before the haven, than you go to the footstrand, and run in along by it, n. w. and n.w. & by w. and when you are in, than you must turn up northwards before the town, or if you will be before Port Maria, than you must follow the n.w. course, until you come before the castle, within it is wide and broad, and six or seven fathom deep.  
There goeth in a haven also by the westland, where you come cross in out of the Sea, but that by the east-land is deepest.  
From Aimonte to Leepe 
Lepe.  or S. Michael's 
S. Michael.  the course is e. & by n. seven leagues. Leepe hath uncertain channels, which you may not trust to sail into without a Pilot, for they altar continually, now the channel which lieth east from the great Island is the best, from thence you must turn up westward again to Taron, and to the River, and so come to Leepe, where before the deep you take in your lading.  
S. Michael's channel was wont to run cross over into the Sea and with half flood was three fathom deep, and before S. michael's it is five fathom, from whence with a high water a man may well go over the River to Leepe. Men were wont to go in by Taron, but for security it is necessary to take in a Pilot.  
From S. Michael's to Palos 
Palos.  or Saltes 
Saltes.  the course is east, and e. & by south seven leagues. Hear you sail into great Condado, this haven runneth in by the westend of Red-downe, there standeth a great broad tree westward from the white cliff, which you must hold over against a red down, as if it were red earth, this down runneth slope downwards, run with these marks to the strand about north, and n. & by w. then the steeple of Odier which standeth above Wolves, will come over against the eastside of the channel, hold it standing so, and sail along by the strand, within two cables length, till you be about the point, than you may run up north to Palos, or n. w. to Wolves, and there anchor at 6 or 7 fathom.  
There within it is 6, 7 and also 3 & 4 fathom in sailing up, thereafter as you sail up far or not. This channel is at the threshold with half flood three fathom and an half deep, within it is five fathom deep.  
There cometh also a channel out of the Sea, running in between the Sands, than Wolves will be on the eastside of the channel, and you must sail in northnorthwest, and when you are within the haven, then do as aforesaid, this channel is three fathom deep.  
To know the land heereaboutes you must understand, that on the westend of Red-downe there lieth a white shoringland somewhat cliffy, being reddish earth or chalck, he that falleth upon it may think that he is by the haven of Saltes, there stand some box-trees thereon, otherwise the land is clean without trees, and it is reddish sand, & therefore is called Red-downe. 
Red down.    

III. To sail from Saltes to the River of S. Lucas.  
FRom Saltes to the River of S. Lucas the course is s. e. and s. e. & by s. distant about 8 or 9 leagues.  
He that will sail into the River of S. Lucas, he must place the great tree over the northend of the white closter which standeth eastward from S. Lucas, 
To sail into the River of S Lucas.  and sail out & in with those marks, & so at the dryest at low water & dead stream, you shall have three fathom, and with high water and dead stream you shall have 22 foot of scarce 4 fathom. Now when the castle of Scipion and the church begin to come one upon the other, than you come to the first stone or sand, & when the castle and the church are right over, or against each other, than you are upon the dryest, and then they stand right s. s. w. from you. And when the castle and the church come again through each other, than you have deep water again, that is, three and an alf and four fathom with low water and dead stream, then sail forward in with the same marks of the closter & the tree, but you must look well before you, that you bring not the mi● (which standeth east from S. Lucas) over against the round closter, which standeth right east beneath the town, but keep them a bow length asunder, and so sail in through the best channel or depth. But if the round closter and the mill come one over against the other when you sail in, than you shall touch upon the stones or sands. When you are over the Sands and are gotten in, then sail to the strand of S. Lucas, until you see the River clean open, to shun the Sand, which shooteth off from the northwest-point of the River, and sail along by the land, & anchor before the church with the crosses, which standeth below in the downs, at 5, 6, or 10, or 12 fathom, as near as you will, you may also laveere out of this haven with indifferent ships or boats, but you must look well before you, for it is not very wide.  
By the land of Scipion there goeth also a channel in, to reach it, you must sail in within two cables length close by the said land, until you are within the second Sand, than you must turn or put off from the land, until you come to the aforesaid marks of the closter and the great tree, then run forward in upon them as aforesaid. S. Lucas River is good to know by Redde-downe, for it lieth on the east-end thereof.   

FOUR To sail from S. Lucas to Calis.  
FRom Scipion to Calis Malis the course is southeast, nine leagues. Calis is known by the Granado hill, when that is e.n.e. and e. & by n. from you, than Calis lieth e. & by n. from you, then sail up unto it, and you cannot miss Calis.  
Upon the point of Scipion 
Scipion.  there lie rocks, but they are above the water. And between the point of Sipion and Calis, four leagues from Scipion lieth Rottum, from whence there shooteth a great stone-riffe or sand.  

Bay of Calis.  If you will sail into Calis Bay, you must run upon the rocks which lie upon the westside of the Bay, which are called los Puercos, 
Los Puercos.  sail in upon them within two cables length, at 6 or seven fathom, till you be before the town of Calis, and there anchor as deep as you will, at 8, 10, 12, or 15 fathom, it reacheth in for the most part, e. s.e. and s. e. & by e.  
But there lieth a stone under the water which is called the Diamant, 
Diamant.  about n.n.e. and n.e. & by n. from Puercos, a little league, and when S. Catherins' chapel is e.n.e. from you, than you are against that stone or rock, which at half flood hath 3 fathom water upon it. The marks of this rock are these, when S. Mary's church cometh over the north end of Calis (which is a closter standing without Calis) there standeth also a house upon the hill, which you go along by to Xeres, when that house cometh over against the chapel which standeth upon the side of the water, westward from Marie-port, when those marks are one over against the other, than you should sail upon the stone, which at the dryest with high water is but 3 fathom and a half, but set the two high hills which are south from the way to Xeres, so that they may be a little asunder, and come not one under the other, than you sail not upon this stone or rock.  
The Puercos rocks lie about half a league from the northpoint of Calis, he that lieth in the Road before Calis, hath the Puntal south or there abouts from him, after he cometh near to Calis, but southward from Calis there lieth a rock, but go no nearer unto it then 7 fathom.  
Calis Bay is wide and broad, and you anchor there at 5 or 6 fathom, a northwest wind cometh into it, therefore if any man will go in behind the Puntal, he must go on southeast in between the point of Porte-real and the Puntal, and then run up upon the point of Puntal, 
Road behind Puntal.  where you lie safe from all winds, you may there also set a ship dry to make it clean, and if you go into the creak, than you must take in a Pilot, & run into the water of Porte-real, and leave the Island on backborde, than you shall get Herodes creak open, then sail in through the middle of the channel to the Salt-hilles.  
When you sail to Calis the Granado-hill will stand east, and then it showeth thus.   view of Cadiz  

V To sail from Calis Malis through the Straight.  

C. Trafalgar.  TO sail from Calis to the Straight, you must go south & s. & by e. to the point of Trafalgar, than you run far enough without the banks or rocks which lie s. s. e. from Calis. From S. Sebastian's point to the point of Trafalgar it is s. s.e. 11 leagues. There lieth a stony bank two leagues into the Sea, west and by south from the Island of Tarifa, 
Tarifa.  which is 8 9 and 10 foot deep at the dryest, when the wind bloweth hard you may see the Sea raule upon it. If you will enter into the Straight, you must sail close by the land, or far from the land, but it is best in the middle of the Straight, when you are as far from the land on the one side as on the other. From the point of Trafalgar or Tarifa to Gibraltar the course is e. and e. & by s. 5 leagues. On the westside of Gibraltar there is a fair Road to anchor in, 
Road before Gibraltar.  where also it is good anckoring, but a south-west wind bloweth into it, you lie there safe against a west wind, and a south-wind bloweth just upon the point of the land of Gibraltar.  

C. Spartel.  Cape Trafalgar, and Cape de Spichel or Espartel lie distant s. & by e. and n. & by w. 9 leagues. East from Cape de Spartel lieth Tanger, 
Tanger.  in a great creak and sandbaye, there standeth a castle upon the west-point of Tanger, somewhat high, and then somewhat higher upon the hill there standeth a watchtowre, & east from Tanger there standeth another broken watchtowre, so that Tanger is good to know. When you are against Tanger, the coast to Scheminckel-hill reacheth most e.n.e. and e. & by n. therefore go e.n.e. and e. & by n. forward, for that is the right course through the Straight. In the night keep most upon the Barbary side, for it is very fair, and the Spanish side is all foul. Gibraltar or jubleter (as our sailors call it) and Seuta 
Seuta.  lie distant s. & by e. and n. & by w. 8 leagues.  
From Gibraltar to Maribella 
Maribella.  the course is n.e. & by n. it is a Road to lad reasons, oil and other fruits in.  
From Gibraltar to Cap. de Moll, on the westside of Malaga, the course is n.e. 24 leagues. When you lie in the Road at Malaga, than that point lieth about 3 or 4 leagues s. w. from you.  
From Gibraltar to Velis Malaga 
Velis Malaga.  the course is n.e. & by e. about 33 leagues, and lieth about 7 leagues eastward from Malaga.  
From Velis Malaga to Cape de Gato the course is e. and e. & by s. 16 leagues. From thence to Carthagena it is 19 leagues, that is a good haven, there you lie safe from all winds.  
At Malaga 
Malaga.  you lie at 15 or 16 fathom safe from a west-wind, but an eastwind bloweth cornerwise. To know Malaga you must understand, that there standeth a castle on high, eastward from it, and there come two walls down from it to the Sea, to another castle that standeth upon the water, the road is now before that castle, for at the other road it is foul, by means of casting of ballast into it.  
At Velis Malaga you lie at 14 fathom, with an east or Lavant wind it is there open, but there is good ground.  
At Maribella you may anchor at 12 or 13 fathom, there standeth a steeple by the water, bring that in the middle over against the town, and anchor there, there is the best ground.  
Thus the Spanish-coast showeth itself when you are without the Straight, when the northpoint is about seven leagues north and by east, and the innermost point North-east from you.   view of the Spanish coast 
When Tarifa is north from you, than the land showeth thus, & the point of Gibraltar lieth North-east from you.  
Tarifa.   view of Tarifa  

VI What Moon maketh high water upon all this Coast.  
AT Calis in the bay a s. s.w. moon maketh a high water, and also in the Straight of Gibraltar.  
At Calis before the bay a s. w. & by s. and a n. e. & by n. moon maketh a high water.  
Before the River of S. Lucas a s. w. & by s. and n.e. & by n. moon maketh high water.  
Before the Condado a s. s.w. moon maketh a high water.  
Before Palos Moger and Wolves a south and north moon maketh a full Sea.  
At Cape S. Vincent and Cape S. Maria a south-west and n.e. moon maketh a full Sea.  
The ebb falleth without the Puercos south about to the Straight, & the flood falleth north about towards the land, but the most part of the flood falleth cross into the land about the Havens, a s. w. & by s. moon maketh a high water in the Straight, & when it is fair wether, commonly it is there four hours flood and eight hours ebb, but the stream goeth most part with the wind, by this every man may guess how it is.   

VII. How these Countries are distant one from the other.  

FRom Cape S. Vincent to Lagos or Laves the course is east and by north 7 leagues.  
From Lagos to Villa Nova east 4 leagues.  
From Villa Nova to Cape Maria or Faro e. & by s. 9 leagues.  
From C. Maria or Faro to Tavila n.e. & by e. 5 leagues.  
From Tavila to Aimonte e.n.e. 5 leagues.  
From Aimonte to Lepe e. & by n. 7 leagues.  
From Lepe to Saltes or Palos e. and e. & by s. 7 leagues.  
From Saltes to the River of S. Lucas or Sibiona southeast, and southeast & by east 8 leagues.  
From S. Lucas or the point of Sibiona to the point of Calis southeast 9 leagues.  
From Calis to the point of the Straight s. s.e. 11 leagues.  
From the point of the Straight called Trafalgar or Tarifa to Gibraltar e. & by s. 7 leagues.  
From Cape S. Vincent to Cape Maria east 18 leagues.  
From C.S. Vincent to Calis e. & by s. 48 or 50 leagues.  
From Cape S. Maria to Saltes e.n.e. 24 leagues.  
From Cape S. Maria to Sibiona east 29 leagues.  
From C.S. Maria to the Straight e. s.e. and s. e. & by e. 46 leagues.  
From Lepe to Sibiona e. s.e. 16 leagues.  
From Saltes to Calis s. e. and s. e. & by s. 16 leagues.    

VIII. How these Countries lie distant from other countries.  

FRom Cape S. Vincent to Cape Cantin south 87 leagues.  
From Cap S. Vincent to Cape de Geer south & somewhat westerlyer 134 leagues.  
From C.S. Vincent to the Island of Lanzarotte s. s.w. 165 league.  
From C.S. Vincent to Great Canaria s. w. & by s. 211 leagues.  
From C.S. Vincent to Isle de Palma s. w. 224 leagues.  
From C. S. Vincent to Porto Santo s. w. & by w. 137 leagues, 

and to Madera s. w. & by w. 157 leagues.    
From C.S. Vincent to Isle S. Maria west 262 leagues.  
From C.S. Maria or Faro to Cape Cantin s. & by w. 91 leagues.  
From Cap S. Maria to Great Canaria south-west and south-west & by south 220 leagues.  
From C.S. Maria to the I'll of Madera s. w. & by w. 93 leagues.  
From Calis to Great Canaria south-west 240 leagues.  
From Calis to the I'll of Madera w. s.w. 200 leagues.  
From Cape Trafalgar to Cape de Spartel s. e. 9 leagues.    

IX. Under what degrees these Places lie.  

Scape S. Vincent & S. Maria lie under 37 degrees.  
The Coast of Condado lieth under 38 deg. 15 & 20 min.  
The Island of Calis lieth under 36 degrees 30 minutes.  
The middle of the Straight of Gibraltar lieth under 35 degrees & 50 minutes.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 12 and 13.   

CHAPTER XII. A TRUE DESCRIPTION of the Sea-coasts of Barbary, between Cape de Spartel, or the Straight of Gibraltar and Cape de Geer.  

I. From the Straight of Gibraltar to Cape de Cantin.  
Scape de Spartel or Spichel (which is the southpoint of the Straight of Gibraltar) lieth distant from the northpoint, called Cape de Trafalgar south and by east, 
C. Trafalgar.  and north and by west 9 leagues.  
From Cape Spartel south 7 leagues lieth Arsyla. 
Arsila.  Before Arsila there lieth a row of rocks, where you may sail through at two places, you may go at the northchanel with great ships, but at the south-chanel with small barks, & you must then anchor between the town and the rocks.  
From Arsila to Larage 
Larage.  or Alarache the course is south and by west 8 leagues, there runneth in a River to Larage, but it is very crooked and dry, you can not go into it with any great ship, but only with barks & Frigates, you anchor there before the Road, at 16, 17 and 18 fathom. This coast reacheth all south & by west, and southsouthwest, it is from Larage to Mamora 20 leagues. Mamora 
Mamora.  lieth upon a River, which is two fathom deep in the entry thereof, but in the road it is 20 fathom deep, a south-west moon maketh a full Sea along this coast. South from Mamora lieth Salee, & from Salee 
Salee.  to Anafe or Algasse 
Anafe or Algasse.  it is south-west and by south, that is a great decayed town, you may yet see five or six towers standing up, when you come to the land, it lieth 19 leagues east from Masagam. From Anafe to Azamor it is s. w. & by w. 14 or 16 leagues, there you may anchor at 14 or 15 fathom, & there you lie safe against a south-west wind. Two leagues more about west lieth Masagam, he that will sail to Masagam 
Masagam.  must know, that there are Pilots to bring in a ship, for it is a great creak, but it is not too fair, so that many ships could not lie there upon fair ground. On the west-point of the Bay there lie some rocks, which are not seen at high water, but at low water they lie bare, when you lie in the right Road, than the west-point lieth northwest from you, and the other point east. West from Masagam there standeth a tower upon a point.  
From Masagam to Cape de Cantin it is westsouthwest 13 or 15 leagues, when you come to Cape de Cantin, 
C. Cantin.  you must shun the land somewhat, for there shooteth off from it a hard rock somewhat into the Sea.  
Thus the land showeth between Masagam and Cape Cantin, being very even and low land all along to Saffia, you see nothing on it but a small tower by a valley, which is called Casa Cavalgero.  
Thus Casa Cavalgero showeth when it is south from you seven leagues.   view of Morocco 
Eijgentlijke vertooninge der westcusten van Barbarien, tusschen de Strate van Gibraltar end de C. de Cantin, zampt aller Reeden Havenen end Rivieren aldaer gelegen, en hoemen die bequa melijck shall beseijlen.  
Vraije portraiture des costs occidentales de Barbary, entre lest●●ict de Gibraltar et le C. de Cantin, ensemble de toutes Rades, Haures, Ports et Rivieres situez ausdic tes costs, et comet commodieusement on les navigera   map of the coast of Morocco 
Afbeeldinge naeed leaven der Zeecusten van Barbarien. van de C. Cantin zuijdwaert tot verbij de C. de Geer, mitsgaders de gelegent: heijt van't eijlant Mogodor, alles op zijne rechte streckingen en hoochte gesteli.  
Delincation au vif des costs maritime's de Barbary, entre le C. de Cantin et le C. de Geer, ensemble la situation de l'isle de Mogodor, le tout commodieusement accommodé selon ses uraijes distances, routs et haulteurs du pole.   map of the coast of Morocco 
When the northpoint of Saffia is southeast five leagues from you than it showeth thus.   view of Morocco 
When you are about seven leagues south-west and by west from Cape Cantin, than it openeth thus, than the point of Saffia is east southeast four leagues from you, and showeth thus.   view of Safi  

II. The situation between Cape Cantin and Cape de Geer.  
FRom Cap Cantin to the point of Saffia the course is south and somewhat westerlyer 5 leagues. From Cape Cantin as aforesaid there shooteth off a stony Sand, which you must shun, when you are passed that Sand you see two or three rocks as a vessel or boat in a Sandbaye, and the land there is round about black to look on, whereby you shall know that you are not far from the point of Saffia. 
C. Cantin.  Cape Cantin is a low smooth point, whereon there standeth a fire-towre, there about it is all even and smooth land, as if it were Normandy, along from Asamor to Saffia, so that you may know it well by the plainness. When you shall a little northward from the point of Saffia, or put to land, then upon the plain land you see two houses, the one (which is easterlyest) is called Casa Cavalgero, and the other standeth upon Cape de Cantin, which is the fire-towre aforesaid.  
He that will anchor in the Bay or Road before Saffia, 
Saffia.  let him place the point a little more westerlyer than north from him, it is there almost 18 fathom deep, but he that desireth to set further within the boucht, must set the northerlyest point of both, a ships length without the other which lieth nearest to you, than those points will be northnorthwest and north & by west from you, & the thick tower on the southside of the castle of Saffia, will then be east, and e. & by n. from you, there is the best Road at 10, 11 and 12 fathom, you may anchor also so much further inward, until the points be almost hard by each other, & that the towers, which you go by on land, are against the thick tower which standeth above upon the castle, there also it is good anckoring, this Bay is a round Bay or creak, when you fall southward from Saffia, you must understand that the land southward from Saffia is high and uneven land, & most part double land, so that thereby you may easily know whether you be north or south from Saffia, for the land on the northside of Saffia (as I said before) is low and plain ground.  
From the point of Saffia to the Island of Mogodor it is southsoutheast 16 or 17 leagues, 
Island of Mogodor.  and so the land reacheth from Saffia to Mogodor, & also forth to Cape de Geer, the land is all high and double land, and it is all fair sandy strand.  
Against the northend of the Island Mogodor, there cometh shooting off from the fast land a great row of hard rocks, whereof the utmost, or they which lie next to the Island Mogodor lie high above the water, he which cometh out of the north, and will sail beyond Mogodor, he must run between the Island, and the foresaid rocks, hard by the rocks, it is in the entry between the Island and the rocks five fathom deep. Within the foresaid rocks there lie on baghborde certain other rocks, which at high water lie under water, & at low water appear above water, when you come to the end of them, than you may run about toward the firm land, and there anchor behind the rocks at 3 fathom low water: there is fair sandground, but notwithstanding there is not very good riding: for because of the breaking of the Sea upon the aforesaid rocks, it taketh there very strongly, so that with a storm there is very dangerous lying in that place: but further inward behind the Island it is good lying at 2 fathom and an half. From the southend of the Island stretcheth out a little rock toward the firme-land: almost against the footstrand, but southward from the foresaid little rock there stretcheth out a bank from the firme-land a league into the Sea. If you will sail out at the southende, then run along by the shore of the firme-land till you are about the foresaid little rock, and then run out with the plummet by the bank: and then presently you shall find deeper water as 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, fathom, than sail whether you please.  
From the point of Saffia to Cape de Geer it is southsouthwest 48 leagues, 
C. de Geer.  but from Mogodor the same course it is 31 leagues, between them both about North-east 7 or 8 leagues from Cape de Geer, there lieth a point called Cap de Taffalana, 
Cap de Tafalana.  there you may anchor under it safe, against east & North-east winds, there it is all sandy strand. Upon the southpoint of Cape de Geer there standeth a castle, and when you are more than two leagues s. s.e. from Cap de Geer, than you see it within the land, over the downe-land, and you may see the Moors castle on the southend of the highland.  
He that will anchor in the Bay or in the Road of Cape de Geer, 
Road of C de Geer.  he must run so far into the creak till the Moors castle be north from him, than the Christians packhouses will be North-east from him, and there it will be 7 or 8 fathom deep, the northpoint will then lie northwest & by west from him, & there shooteth out a little sand, against the castle there lieth a row of rocks under the water, and there southerly you go in to anchor, against the Christians packhouses it is the best road. But you must be very careful in this Road, touching your anckors, the tie-anckor must always stand before the wind, which bloweth out from the land, the other anckors to seaward, you must hold the sheet or plecht-anckor always ready against it stormeth, than you must bring it out s. w. when it will be a storm, you may see it before by the Sea-downes, you must also keep the fock-sayle ready upon the yard, if you should chance to slip your anchor, that you may help yourself the best you can, in this Bay there is good store of fish to be taken, when you are there at anchor, than they go by turn●s to fish, in the morning by day, & come aboard again about 8 of the clock.  
Thus the land southward from the southpoint of the Bay of Saffia showeth itself when it is westnorthwest two leagues.   view of Morocco 
When you are westnorthwest, or cross from Mogodor two leagues the land showeth thus, and it is double and high land.  
Mogodor.   view of Morocco 
When you are southsouthwest from Cape de Taffalana three leagues, than the land showeth thus to Cape de Geer, and they are seven or eight leagues distant.  
Cap de Geer. Cap de Tafelana.   view of Morocco 
When you are three leagues southsoutheast from Cape de Geer, than it showeth thus, and then the Bay is cast and by south from you, and it is down land.  
Cap de Geer.   view of 'Cape de Geer' (city in Morocco)  

III. How these places are distant one from the other, and from other countries.  

HOw these places and lands are distant one from the other, for the most part it is showed particularly before.  
From Cape de Spartel to Cantin south-west and somewhat southerlyer 75 leagues.  
From Cape de Cantin to Cape de Geer west 53 leagues.  
From Cape de Geer to Cape de Non southsouthwest, & south and by west 28 leagues.  
From Cape de Geer to the point of S. Crus s. e. 5 leagues.  
From Cap. de Non to O fin south 13 leagues.  
From Cap. de Non to Cap Bayador s. w. & by w. 69 leagues.  
From Cape de Geer to Cape de Bayador south-west and somewhat westerlyer 93 leagues.  
From Saffia to Madera east and west 131 leagues.  
From Cape de Geer to Madera w. n. w. 133 leagues.    

FOUR Under what degrees these countries lie.  

Scape Spichel or Spartel lieth under 35 degrees 32 minur.  
Masagam lieth under 32 degrees 52 minutes.  
Cape Cantin lieth under 32 degrees 40 minutes.  
The I'll of Mogodor lieth under 31 degrees 32 minutes.  
Cape de Geer lieth under 30 degrees.  
Cape de Non lieth under 28 degrees 32 minutes.  
Cape de Bayador lieth under 27 degrees.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 14 and 15.   

CHAPTER XIII. THE DESCRIPTION OF the Canary and Flemish islands.  

I. Of Lancerota, Forteventura, and great Canaria.  
THe Islands of Canaria are seven in number, that is, Lancerota, Forteventura, Great Canaria, Tenerifa, Gomera, Palma and Ferro.  
The Island of Lancerota 
Lancerota  is distant from Cap de S. Vincent s. s. w. about 166 leagues. It hath a haven at the North-east end, between the two islands Alegranca and Gratiosa, and you come in from northward, you may run there so far in that you may come by Lancerota again into the Sea, there it is 10, 15 and 20 fathom deep, and there men lie safe from all winds.  
On the eastside of Lancerota there is also a good Rode, before the town, but there lieth a bank northward which you must shun, you must run southward about the bank, and then anchor at 10, 11, or 12 fathom.  
Between Lancerota and Forteventura, 
Forteventura.  there lieth an Island where you may anchor on both sides at 15 or 20 fathom.  
At the Island Forteventura you may anchor under the north and south ends at 15 and 20 fathom, & also on the northwest and southeast sides. On the southeast or eastside you may anchor before the town of Forteventura, at 15 or 16 fathom, there is a fair Rode.  
At the northwest side you may anchor before the village at 20, 25 or 30 fathom, as deep as you will, the land on the northwest-side runneth up with a great boucht. It is from the northerlyest islands of Lancerota to the west-point or Forteventura about 33 leagues.  
The Island of Great Canaria 
Great Canaria.  lieth distant from Forteventura e. and w. 18 or 20 leagues. He that will sail into the Road of Great Canaria he must understand, that the Road lieth behind the North-east point; on the eastside of the land, right against the castle which standeth upon a point of land, when the said North-east point lieth s. e. 6 or 7 leagues from you, than it seemeth to be an Island, for it is fast to the other land only by a sandy strand, and that strand is not broad, and the North-east point is very high. He that will put into the Road, he must sail about by the North-east point, 
The Road of Great Canaria.  until the castle lieth about n. w. and by n. from him, and there anchor at 8, 9, 10 or 12 fathom, than the northpoint lieth n. e. & by n. from you, & the southpoint s. s. e. On the southside of Great Canaria there is a fair Bay, where a man may also anchor well.  
Thus the northwest-side of Canaria showeth itself.   view of Gran Canaria  

II. The situation of the Island of Tenerifa.  
Pascaarte vande Eijlanden van Canarien, vertoonende de rechte gelegentheijt der Custen end Reeden vandien, Item hoese in rechte streckingen end waere distantie van malcanderen verscheijden end hoese in hoochte gelegen sijn.  
Cart marine des Isles de Canary, representant au vif la uraije situation des costes et rades dicelles, Item comment ils sont distantes l'un de l'autre selon leurs uraijes routs, distances, et elevations du pole.   map of the Canary Islands 
Afbe●l●linghe naeed leaven van●e Reedev●o de sta●● Anger aened Eglant Tercera Vray ●●if pour t●a. et de jam Rade d● 〈…〉 d'Angra en l'Jsle de Terrera.  
SANCT MICHIELS  
De Suydt hocek van het Eylandt FAYAL  
Pascaarte vande Eijlanden van Madera en Porto Santo, vertoonende de gelegentheÿt vande Reeden aldaer en hoese van malcanderen zijn gheleghen.  
Cart marine de les Jsles de Madera et Porto Santo, monstrant comment elles sont situeez l'un de lautre, ensemble la situation de leurs Rades.   map of the Azores 
On the northwest-side of Tenerifa lieth the Road of Gerrachia, 
Road of Gerrachia.  and it is from the northpoint of Punte de Nago to Gerrachia w. s. w. and saw s. w. & by w. 8 leagues. He that will anchor before Gerrachia, he must anchor westward from the rock with the cross, called the Lion, that the said rock may lie southeast & by east and southeast from him, than you lie right before the town, and then you look right into the street of the town, through S. Dominicus closter, there it is fair ground at 36 or 40 fathom, than the Pico will lie right west by the town. You may anchor no nearer to the land then at 35 or 36 fathom, nearer on the land or on the rock it is not fair, & westward to the Sand called Lapania it is also foul ground. This is a naughty Rode, therefore they that come here must look well to themselves, and have a care of their anckors and cables, & keep them fix and ready, as also their sails, that they may move when it stormeth.  
There is also a small haven before Gerrachia, wherein men may lie with a few ships; but to sail into it, you must have a Pilot, on the westside of the haven there lieth a rock under the water, but it ravels always upon it, within the haven you anchor always at 5 or 6 fathom, & you must put out two anckors before toward the Sea, with a cable upon the rocks, & an anchor behind upon the land, that the ship may not wind, and the ground is there foul, you must keep your cables well with boys and tons, to keep them from the ground, this is a good haven in Summer, for then commonly it is good wether, but in winter I counsel you not to put in with your sh●ppe there, for the waves of the Sea come out of the n. w. sometimes running in so stiffly, that it is not possible to hold a ship, although it had ten anckors out. It happened certain years past, that a number of ships were cast away in that haven, and a good many houses of that town were washed away with the water.  
Between Gerrachia and the east-end of Tenerifa; there are three places more to lad wine in, that is Laramela, Relecho, and Oratana. 
La●●mela, R●●●cho, and Oratana.   
On the southwest-ende of Tenerifa there is another little haven or bay called Adessa, where also it is good anckoring, but a s. w. wind bloweth open into it, there you lad much wine.  
Thus Tenerifa showeth when the Pico is westsouthwest from you, and then you are open before the Road of S. Crus.   view of Tenerife 
When the Pico is southeast from you it showeth thus, and then you are open before the Road of Gerrachia.   view of Tenerife  

III. Of the islands of Palma Gomera and Ferro.  
FRom Tenerifa to the Island la Palma 
Le Palma.  the course is w. n. w. 20 leagues, in the I'll of Palma there is a town, where men use to lad, called S. Crus, which lieth about the middle, on the southeast-side of la Palma, it is a fair bay. If you come from the north and desire to anchor in the Road of Palma, you must run in so far in the creak, until that you be southward or past by the head or the bridge, and then anchor at 25 or 30 fathom. But in winter time you must not anchor so near the strand, because of southeast, and southsoutheast winds, for than you should lie to near the strand, you must there put out two anckors at one hole, and a tye-anckor behind, to keep the ship right in the Road, there lieth a high white rock with a cross east from the town, there is the best road, right north from the town there is a fair Sandbaye, there it is good anckoring at 20, 30 or 35 fathom, thereafter as men lie far off, this Road is called Rammel-rode, when you lie in the road of Palma, you may from thence see the Pico of Tenerifa e. s. e. from you, the Island of Palma is very high and full of trees, whereby it is well known, On the southwest-side of Palma also there is a place where you may lad wines, which is called Tassa Corda. 
Tassa Corda.   
About five leagues west from the westend of Tenerifa lieth the Island Gomera, 
Gomera.  which on the northside hath a good haven of 10 fathom deep, where it is good lying for almost all winds, better than in any of the other islands, but there is nothing to be laden, you may anchor before the haven at 20 fathom, there also you must shift anckor-place, as at Gerrachia. The road of Adessa in Tenerifa lieth there right against it, east from it, about five leagues. When you lie at Gomera, than the road of Palma is northwest & by north from you 16 leagues.  
The Island Ferro 
I. Ferro.  lieth from the I'll Palma south & by west 13 leagues distant.  
Thus the I'll of Palma showeth itself when it is about east 16 or 17 leagues from you.   view of La Palma 
Thus the Island of Palma showeth uhen it is south, and south and by east from you nine or ten leagues.   view of La Palma 
Thus the Island of Palma showeth itself when it is south-west and by south from you four or five leagues.   view of La Palma  

FOUR The islands Savages, Madera and Porto Santo.  
GReat Canaria & Savages 
Savages.  lie distant from each other n. n.w. and s. s.e. 40 leagues. south-west from Savages lieth a rock, which a far off showeth like a sail, it lieth 3 leagues from the I'll, under the southeast-side of the Island, it is a good road for a northwest and west wind, it reacheth s. w. & n.e. to the uttermost rock, & it is fair ground 15 or 16 fathom deep, it is but half a league long. The westend of Savages is foul far of, therefore you must shun it, and therefore choose rather to sail eastward then westward about it.  
Forty leagues north from Savages lie the Serters, 
Serters.  which are three little islands, lying on the east-end of the Island of Madera, whereof the nearest to the land is the smallest, and lieth about a league from the land, that which is farthest from the land is the greatest, and lieth four leagues from the land, if you come out of the north, or from Porto Santo, you may sail well through between the Island of Madera & the Serters, there it is wide & broad enough, but from the east-end of Madera 
Madera.  there lieth a blind rock in the Sea, which you must shun. In the Island of Madera, before the town of S. Crus 
S. Crus.  it is a good road at 20 fathom, but before Fonsyael 
Fonsyael.  it is the right road to lad at, by the Lion it is best to lie at 30 or 40 fathom. On the southwest-side before Marasylo 
Marasylo.  it is also good anckoring at 16 and 18 fathom, there it is good ground in every place.  
Porto Santo 
Porto Santo.  lieth from Madera North-east 13 or 14 leagues it reacheth most s. e. and n.w. At each end of the Island lieth a great rock, the Road is on the southwest-side, east from the cragged rock before the haven, where you may lie safe with barks.  
When Savages is e.n.e. from you five leagues it showeth thus.   view of the Savage Islands 
When Savages is e. s.e. five leagues from you it showeth thus.   view of the Savage Islands 
Thus the Island of Madera showeth when you come out of the north, and that the middle of the Island is twelve or therteene leagues from you, the southeast end is very cragged when it is near unto you, and the northwest-ende goeth sloping down, and it is a steep point.   view of Madeira 
Thus the Island of Madera showeth when it is south-west from you.   view of Madeira 
When Madera is westsouthwest from you therteene leagues it showeth thus.   view of Madiera 
When Madera is s. from you 16 leagues it showeth thus.   view of Madeira 
When Porto Santo is south-west from you about nine leagues it showeth thus.   view of Porto Santo 
Thus Porto Santo showeth, about southeast from you six or seven leagues.   view of Porto Santo  

V Of the Flemish islands, S. michael's, Tercera and Fayael.  
MAdera and the Island of S. Michael 
S. Mi●haels.  lie distant from each other northwest and southeast 136 leagues. If you desire to anchor under S. Michael's, you must understand that the Road is on the southwest-side of the Island, coming about the east or west-point of the Island you shall see two towns, before the westerlyest is the Road at 20 & 25 fathom, this town is called Punto del Gada, or Punt Algato, there the coast reacheth w.n.w. and e. s.e. to a town called Villa Franco, the elyeth an Island before it, between the Island and S. michael's it is deep 5, 6 and 7 fathom.  
From S. Michael's to Tercera the course is n. w. & by w. 35 ●eagues, 
〈◊〉  under Tercera the road is on the southside of the land, west from the rocks, right before the town of Angra, between two points reaching out, whereof the westerlyest reacheth a good way into the Sea, and on the end thereof hath two very high hills. This point is called Bresil, and when you come out of the Sea, it showeth from far as if it were separated from the land, upon each of these points sticking out, there standeth a castle for defence of the ships, which lie there in the Road, it is there in the Road deep 20 and 25 fathom, and on the westside of the aforesaid point of Bresil, there is a great Sandbaye to anchor in, where there is a village called S. Martens, if you come from the north, or the east, and desire to anchor in the Road of T●●c●ra, you must sail upon the land about the eastpoint, and sail all along by the two islands called the Ilheos, which lie a little east from the Road, you may sail through between those islands & Tercera, it is 15 fathom deep between them, and you may sometimes go without the islands, and sail so long westward, until you come to the aforesaid point of Bresil, there you may anchor right east before the town of Angra at 10 or 12 fathom, or commonly men set the Sea-anckor at 16 fathom, & the tye-anckor towards the land, at 8 or 9 fathom, a southeast wind bloweth there flat in, between the two islands aforesaid it is 6 fathom deep sandy ground, and they lie about a bow shot from each other. But between those Ilheos & the Island of Tercera, it is a great canon shot distant. A little to Seaward from these islands, there lie three or four rocks above the water, which are called Los Frails, and three leagues east from the town of Angra, there lieth a creak called Port judeo, 
Porto judeo.  there the Spaniards entered upon the land with all their power, when they took the I'll of Tercera from the Portugals.  
If you will go from Tercera to Fayal, 
Fayal.  hold your course w. s. w. to the eastpoint of S. George, which is distant from thence 11 leagues, And through between the Pico and S. George to Fayal it is 16 leagues, it reacheth most w. n. w. between them. The Island Fayal lieth west from Pico distant a league.  
If you will anchor in the Road before Fayal, you must anchor in the creak right before the village of Fayal, at 14 or 15 fathom, there it is sandground, & there goeth a strong stream both ebb and flood.  
On the southende of Fayal lieth a little haven, if you will sail into it, you must go in by the southwest-point, and so long about by the land, until you see the haven open, sail about by the southwest-point, until you come in the narrow between the rocks, which lie off from the westside, and as soon as you begin to come within the rocks, then let your anchor shall at 5 fathom, and carry ropes on the eastside of the land, to be made fast to the stakes that are there purposely set. The haven is small, so that there cannot above four or five ships lie in it, for further in it is all flat water.  
Thus the Island of Tercera showeth when it is east and by south about seven leagues from you.   view of Terceira 
when Tercera is four leagues south-west from you, than it showeth thus, the westend of Tercera is higher than the east-end, and therefore it is reasonable well to be known.   view of Terceira 
Thus the Island of S. George or joris showeth when it is westsouthwest from you seven leagues.   view of Terceira 
Thus the Island Gratiosa, when it lieth westsouthwest four leagues from you, showeth itself.   view of Graciosa  

VI What Moon maketh a high water at these islands.  
Upon all these Canary islands a s. w. and n.e. moon maketh a natural tide, or high water, as upon the coasts of Spain, Portugal, Gallicia, France, and other places.   

VII. How these Places lie distant from each other.  

FRom the west-point of Forteventura to the Island of Great Canaria east & west 19 or 20 leagues.  
From the northpoint of Canaria to Punto de Nago the northpoint of Tenerifa w. n. w. 21 leagues.  
From Punto de Nago to Gerrachia westsouthwest, and south-west & by west 9 leagues.  
From Tenerifa to Isle de Palma westnorthwest 20 leagues.  
From the westend of Tenerifa to Gomorrah west 5 leagues.  
From Palma to Fer●o south & by west 13 leagues.  
From Great Canaria to Savages n. n. w. 40 leagues.  
From Gerrachia to Savages n. n. e. 29 leagues.  
From Tenerifa to Isle de Madera north 72 leagues.  
From Great Canaria to the east-end of Madera north and by west 85 leagues.  
From la Palma to Madera n. & by e. 53 leagues.  
From Savages to the Serters of Madera north 40 leagues.  
The uttermost of the Serters reacheth from Madera 4 leagues.  
From Madera to S. Michael's northwest 136 leagues.  
From S. Michael's to Tercera n. w. & by w. 35 leagues.  
From Tercera to the westend of S. George's w. s.w. 11 leagues.  
From the west-point of S. George's to Fayal w.n.w. 16 leagues.    

VIII. How these islands are distant from other countries.  

FRom the westend of Forteventura to Cape de Bayador southsoutheast 20 leagues.  
From Lancerota to Cape de S. Vincent n.n.e. 166 leagues.  
From Great Canaria to Calis Malis North-east 240 leagues.  
From Great Canaria to Cape S. Vincent North-east & by north 212 leagues.  
From Great Canaria to Roxent northnortheast and somewhat easterlyer 240 leagues.  
From Great Canaria to Cape de Finisterre northnortheast and somewhat northerlyer 308 leagues.  
From Tenerifa to Lezard n. n. e. 467 leagues.  
From la Palma to Cape de S. Vincent n. e. 224 leagues.  
From Madera to Cape de Geer e. s. e. 134 leagues.  
From Madera to Saffia east 131 leagues.  
From Madera to Calis eastnortheast 200 leagues.  
From Madera to Roxent North-east 164 leagues.  
From Madera to Cape de Finisterre North-east and by north and somewhat northerlyer 245 leagues.  
From S. Michael's to Cape de Finisterre e. n. e. 246 leagues.  
From Tercera to Cape de Finisterre eastnortheast, and east and by north 279 leagues.  
From Tercera to Lezard North-east and by east 388 leagues.    

IX. Under what degrees these countries lie.  

THe Island Lancerota lieth under 28 degrees 35 minutes.  
The northend of Great Canaria lieth under 28 deg.  
The northend of Tenerifa lieth under 28 deg. 40 min.  
Isle de Palma lieth under 28 degrees 32 minutes.  
Savages lieth under 30 degrees.  
The southend of Madera lieth under 32 degrees, 

but the northend lieth under 32 degrees 30 minutes.    
Porto Santo lieth under 33 degrees.  
S. Michael lieth under 38 degrees.  
The Island Tercera lieth under 39 degrees.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 16.   


Beschrijvinghe der Zeecusten vande Zuijd sijde on Oost-zijde van yerlant van de C. de Clare Oostwaert verbij de Eijlanden van Saltez. Noordtwaert tot aen Dondalck, hoemen all havenen aldaer bescijlen shall, en waer voor men hem te hoeden heeft, alles gestelt op rechte streckingen distantien en hoochte des Pool●  
Deschription de les costs marines' meridionales et Orientales d'Irlande, cōm●ncant du C. de Clare verse l'Est iusques a les isles de Saltez, de la vers le Nort iusques a Dondalck, comprennant touts haures et Ports desdictes costs, et monstrant comment on les navigera, et de quoij en se d●ibt garder  
Afbeeldinghe van 〈◊〉 ●wee voornaemste Havenen op de west custe van ●erlant, als Lemrick end Galwaij, watmen in't 〈◊〉 comen en vijtseijlen aldaer te schouwe● heeft Pourtraicture des d●●c principaux Haures de la cost occidental d'fr●●de Lemrick et Galwaij, monstrant ce qu'on ●a eviter, en les entrant et iss●●t.   map of the coast of Ireland   

CHAPTER XIIII. A TRUE DESCRIPTION teaching how you may sail the Sea-coasts and Havens of the West, South and eastside of Ireland.  

I. How to sail to the Havens of Gallowaye and Lemrick, and the islands thereabouts.  
TThe Island Blackrock 
Blackrock  and Cape Dorsey lie distant s. & by w. & somewhat southerlyer, and n. & by e. and somewhat northerlyer 53 leagues: between them both lie the Havens of Galloway and Lemrick.  
If you will sail into Gallowaye, 
Galloway.  you must run in through between the islands, or along by the firm land North-east to the point Galor, than you must yet go in n. e. to the other point, and then forward three leagues more s. & by e. till you be before the town of Galloway, where you may anchor at 6 or 7 fathom, it is there all over good anchor ground, a great depth and fair Creeks. You may also anchor well without, behind the islands at 12 fathom, there also it is good anchor ground in every place.  
From the islands before Galloway to the Island of Aromen, 
Aromen.  it is about six leagues: behind the Island of Aromen it is also a good Rode: the Island Calos 
Calos.  lieth about a league southward from Aromen, and behind it also there is a Rode.  
From Aromen to the haven of Lemrick 
Lemrick.  it is about 5 leagues southwards, before the mouth of the said haven there lie two rocks, the one south by the haven, and is called Cockuyt, the other north by the haven, and is called Boy, you must sail in by Cockuyt, and run east, and east & by north a league till you be about the point Blaway, and from Blaway to the castle Lamor e. s. e. 4 leagues, and from the castle Lamor to Griel south seven leagues, from Griel to Lemrick s. & by w. 4 leagues, there you may anchor before the town at 6 or 7 fathom, you may also anchor before Blaway, and there take in a Pilot, and he will bring you before the town.  

Further it is from the islands before Galloway to Blasquay 
B●asq●●y.  southsouthwest 18 leagues.  
From Blasquay to Dorsey 
Do●●●y.  southeast 2● leagues.  
From Dorsey to Cabo de Claro e. and by s. 13 leagues.    

II. What Havens and Places lie between Cabo de Claro and Cape Velho.  
YOu may know Cape de Claro 
Cape de Claro.  by reason it is all broken land, when you come somewhat better east about, and are by the land, you shall see a high point reaching out, which reacheth far without the other land into the Sea, the southende whereof is very much shoring down, and on the highest part thereof there standeth a castle with three towers, which is decayed, the middle tower is yet the highest, it lieth 12 leagues eastward from Cape de Claro, & right north from this outpoint, (by our sailors called Cape de Velho, 
Cape Velho or Oldhead.  & by the Englishmen Oldhead) lieth the haven of Kinsale, a fair haven deep & broad, coming from the east, or the west along by the land: this point seemeth to be an Island, because on the westside it is low, but it is fast to the firm land by a small piece of land, and there you may anchor under it on both sides as dry as you wil  
From Cape de Claro to the aforesaid Cape de Velho or Oldhead, the course is east and by north 12 leagues. 
To go into the islands of C. de Claro.  To run into the islands of Cap de Claro, you must understand that there lieth a town westward upon the high land, you must there go east to land, and so go in eastnortheast, leaving the low Island to landwards, and the uttermost Island of Cape de Claro to seawards, and so running in to the second Island, whereon the closter of Claro standeth, there on the westend there is a sandy bay, where you may anchor at eight or nine fathom.  
There goeth also a channel into the Sea close along by the west Island, which is 12 fathom deep, on the eastside of the channel there lieth a rock above the water, which you must shun, and in sailing out you leave it on the eastside, and right within the rock you may anchor.  
If you will sail further into this haven of Cape de Claro, you must run through between the islands to Baldermore, 
Baldermore.  and shun somewhat the Island of Cape de Claro, for from it there run many blind rocks, therefore you must sail to the other Island. But when you are half way by the I'll of Cape de Claro, than you must make to the narrow way, to go through it, it is therefore the most part all about three fathom deep, but in the narrow way it is dry at low water, therefore you must go over there with the tide, there you may anchor on what side you will, whether it be under the closter at Claro, or on Baldermore-side, which is the eastside, where it is 5 and 6 fathom deep.  
The haven of Baldermore goeth in north, and in it it is 11 or 12 fathom deep at low water, on the eastpoint of Baldermore there lie two high steep rocks, as if they were steeples, the one somewhat higher than the other, & there eastward there goeth in a haven, which is called Castle-haven. And a league eastward from it the Haven of Somrack, 
Somrack.  which is 8 or 9 fathom deep, before the haven there lieth a great rock, which you may run in by on both sides, but the eastside is best, for the westside is somewhat foul. To sail in by this rock it is distant at lest the length of the shot of a great piece of Ordnance, you shall there find a tower standing, and against it you may anchor at lowest water, it is there good lying, in the middle there lie two blind rocks, which at half ebb are above water, and between these two rocks, there lieth a rock above the water, therefore you must run in close by the land, leaving the rocks on backborde, the haven is not above eight ships long in length, you may sail through under these islands of Cape de Claro in many places, and anchor, for it is all broken land, as if it were Norway.  
East from Somracke, and about 4 leagues west from the outpoint of Kinsale lieth Rossen, 
Rossen.  a tydehaven, which at a low water falleth dry, you may see the church with the towers in the valley, westsouthwest from the point there lieth a stone under the water.  
There lieth an Island between Rossen and Kinsale or Cape de Velho, also in the creak, which is called Roem, which you may sail round about, & also anchor behind it. Three leagues eastward from this Island Roem lieth Cape de Velho or Oldhead.  
Thus the point of Rossen showeth when it is west and by north from you.   view of 'Rossen' (Ireland)  

III. How to sail into all the Havens between Cape de Velho and Waterford.  
Scape de Velho (as I said before) is a high point reaching out, when it is the length of the shot of a great piece, 
To sail into Kinsale.  or a quarter of a league s. s. w. from you, than you are open before the Haven of Kinsale, & you may see into the same, and see the town of Kinsale lie on starboard of the haven, this is a deep haven, and reacheth in n. n. w. which before it hath no foul entry, but only a blind rock, which lieth off from the eastpoint of the haven, you may sail in in the middle of the water between both the lands, there it is seven fathom deep, and when you are a little within the castle, than you must turn up westward, and anchor on the westside at 5, 6, & 7 fathom, you may also run in further and lie safe against all winds, on either side there standeth a flat tower, & there eastward lie two black rocks a little within the Sea, not far from each other, the one is called Kockul, and the other (which is the easterlyest) Rock.  
He that cometh out of the east, and would sail into the haven of Kinsale, he must understand that there lieth a blind rock which shooteth off from the eastpoint of the haven, (as I said before) therefore he must keep the rock called Rock without the rock called Kockul, so long until that the castle standing within on the eastside of the haven cometh without the eastpoint of the haven, and then you take no hurt upon the blind rock, then sail in n.n.w. and anchor at 6 or 7 fathom, as above said, the Haven of Kinsale lieth from the point with three towers north, and north & by west a great league.  
Thus the point of Kinsale whereon the castle standeth showeth, when you are half a league from it w. s.w, & then you see the haven of Kinsale open.   view of Kinsale 
Thus the land showeth right east from Kinsale.   view of Kinsale 
When you are a league east from the two black rocks aforesaid, or three leagues from Oldhead with the castle with three towers, and are close by the land, than you see two steep hillocks or rocks in the land, as if they were steeples, standing not far one from the other, which stand about two leagues west from the mouth of the haven of Corck, 
Corck haven.  & when you are by the easterlyest hillock, than you may see the haven of Corck, which reacheth in n.n.w. within it is wide and broad, running into a broad river, which goeth up into the land, & right within the haven there lieth an Island, which may be sailed round about, but on the southside it is good anckoring, at 6, 7 & 8 fathom, on the westside there lieth a village, by the which you sail up to the town of Corck, two leagues higher into the land.  
There standeth a castle also from whence there shooteth off a Sand, & there within there lieth a tydehaven in a Sandbaye.  
On the eastside right about the point there standeth a broken castle, upon the low land, and somewhat more eastward in the valley there standeth a foursquare tower, and about a great league east from the haven, there standeth a tower on high upon the point close by the water side, by the same there stand ten or twelve straw houses, & a league more eastward (two ships length from a low point) there lieth a round long rock, which is grown green above, and on the eastside of the point standeth a flat tower, which you may see when you are a great pieces shot e. n. e. from the aforesaid round rock, otherwise you see all low land to the point of jochul.  
This Haven of Corck at low water is 7 fathom, & also 10 fathom deep, so that you may laveere it both out and in, and on the eastside there lieth a row of rocks, about two ships length from it, which you must shun.  
Thus the land showeth which lieth west from Corck.   view of Cork 
Thus the land showeth east from Corck to jochul.   view of Cork 
About 4 leagues eastward from Corck lieth a point called Balicot, 
Balicot.  behind it you may go and anchor at 4 or 5 fathom.  
From Korck to jochul 
jochul.  it is e. n. e. almost 6 leagues, it is a tydehaven, reaching along in by the east-land n. w. and n. w. & by n. there lieth a rock on the westside, and the westside is a sandy strand along to the town.  
He that will sail into jochul must run under the Island of Tapul, and there stay for an after-flood, than there is four fathom water upon the bank, then sail north & by east upon a league right to the haven of jochul, and when you are within then anchor before the town where you will.  
Between the point and the town there standeth a closter, where also you may anchor, and yet you may strike over to the east-land, and so run up the river, within it is 3, 4, and 5 fathom deep, from the eastside of the haven, there come a row of rocks shooting off, well half way into the haven, and right without these rocks it is at low water no more than 5 or 6 foot deep, but at a high water it is deep enough.  
About 5 leagues east from jochul there lieth a tydehaven called Dongarvel, 
Dongarvel.  which is also 8 leagues from Waterford, the same reacheth in n. n. w. but in the haven it is full of rocks, & at a low water it is dry, so that you must go in at a full Sea, & run in between the rocks, it is a narrow haven, but within it is deep enough, the town lieth upon the westside of the haven, and right n. w. within the land there lie three high hills, which are called Cape de Quyn 
Cape de Quyn.  or Kary Quyn, whereby you may know this land, & when they lie n. n. w. from you, than they are cross from you, and then you are right before the haven of Dongarvel, when those hills lie n. n. e. from you, than you are before the haven of Corck, and when they lie n. from you, than you are right before the haven of jochul, but when they lie n. w. from you, than you are right before the haven of Waterford.  
From jochul to Waterford 
Waterford  it is e. n. e. 11 or 12 leagues.  
The haven of Waterford reacheth n. and n. & by w. in between two steep lands, it is a fair wide haven, and 11 fathom deep as you enter in, but when you are a little within, there lieth a bank on the westside, which is long & broad, coming almost into half the haven. Against this bank it is but three fathom deep at low water: therefore when you are a little within you must choose the eastside, & sail close by the castle, which standeth within the haven, and when you are within the castle than you find 7 fathom deep, and when you are at the end of the bank, than you must turn to the westside, & anchor at 4 or 5 fathom, before the little town of Passagie, from whence the River goeth westward further into the land.  
On the westside of the haven it is all flat high land, and on the eastside there standeth a high white flat tower, which is called Balmus, 
Balmus.  whereby the haven of Waterford is well to be known. Two leagues east from jochul there standeth also another high tower called Ardimore, but it is black, that you may see 4 leagues into the Sea, between the outpoint of Kinsale & Waterford along by the whole coast, there stand many other flat towers, but that by Waterford standeth further out, because it is great & high. And the aforesaid three high hills called Cape de Quyn are very good and known marks, whereby this Coast of Ireland is well descried and known. A league east from Kinsale there lie two black rocks, and west from jochul there lie two round rocks, which are overgrown with green weeds, otherwise there are no rocks upon this Coast.  
The islands of Saltees lie east from Waterford, and you may sail from Waterford through between the islands of Saltees and the firm land.   

FOUR How you shall sail by the eastside of Ireland from Saltees to Dondalck.  
FRom the islands of Saltees to the haven of Watchford 
Watchford.  it is 5 leagues, he that will sail into Watchford, he must set the tower (standing upon the northside inward within the haven) west and by north from him, than he shall run between Saltbanck and Watchbanck, sailing in between both the lands, and set within about the point at 4 or 5 fathom.  
From Watchford to Wexfofd 
Wexford.  it is n. & by w. 5 leagues. He that will go into Wexford, he must bring the town of Wexford (lying on the northside in the haven) west from him, so he shall sail between Watchbanck and Griel, where between both the banks it is 10 and 12 fathom deep, then sail in forward west, and shun the southpoint of the haven, for it is somewhat foul, and when you are within then sail along by the southside, till you come before the town of Wexford, and and anchor at 4 or 5 fathom.  
From Wexford to Dublin 
Dublin.  it is n. and n. & by w. 5 leagues. He that will sail into Dublin must bring the tower (standing on the northside of the haven) w. n. w. from him, sailing in between the bank called Griel, and the sand of the Island Lambaye, 
Lambaye.  between them both it is 12 fathom deep, sail all along by Lambaye at 7 fathom, and run so at seven fathom by the sands to the haven, shunning the southpoint, for that is foul, therefore hold the northerlyest tower in Dublin on the second point upon the southside, than you cannot miscarry, then sail about the second point, and then turn up westward and anchor before the town at 4 or 5 fathom.  
Under Lambaye there is also a good Rode, in the boucht at 7 or 8 fathom. You may also sail through between Lambaye and Dagalbanck 
Dagalbanck.  to Dublin.  
Five leagues north from Dublin lieth the haven of Drodag. 
Drodag.  He that will sail into it he must bring the tower (standing upon the northside of the haven) w. n. w. from him, as the line showeth, to shun the foul way which runneth off from the southpoint, and so sail westward in, until he be in, then turning to the southside, he must sail in between the southside and the Island of Carol, which lieth in the middle of the haven, and sail till you be before the town of Drodag, and anchor at 4 or 5 fathom. From Dublin to Drodag it is 8 leagues. On the north side of the haven of Drodag there lie three islands.  
From Drodag to Dondalck 
Dondalck.  it is north 7 leagues. He that will sail in there must know, that on the southside of the haven of Drodag there standeth a castle, you must sail in by the southside, keeping the tower, which standeth north from Dondalck, over the round point of the northside, as the line showeth, for from the north point of the haven there runneth a row of rocks, therefore you must sail in by the southside till you be about the point, and then turn up southward, and anchor before the town at 4, 5, 6 and 7 fathom. East from Dondalck there lie also five or six islands.   

V What Moon maketh high water in these places.  
ON all the havens and places lying on the West-coast of Ireland a North-east and south-west moon maketh a high water. But on the Southcoasts a w. s. w. and e. n. e. moon, but within the channels or haven a point later, that is a west and by south, and an east and by north moon.  
In the open water and in the channel without the land a s. w. and North-east moon.   

VI Of the falling and running of the streams.  
Without Cape de Claro by the land the flood falleth east and the ebb west.  
Between Cape de Claro and Waterford the flood falleth eastnortheast along by the land.  
In the channel of Galls or S. john between England & Ireland the stream falleth North-east and south-west.   

VII. Of the ground and depths of Ireland, and how you may know the land.  
Between Cape de Claro & the point of Dorsey you may see the land at 58 and 60 fathom.  
Between Cape de Claro and Waterford you may see the land at 45 fathom, and you may see all the coast of Ireland at 35 and 40 fathom, and at 35 fathom you are not far without the land, and therefore by night you must go no nearer to Ireland then 40 fathom.   

VIII. How these places are distant from each other.  

FRom Cape de Claro to Cape Velho e. & by n. 12 leagues.  
From Cape Velho to Kinsale n. & by w. a great league.  
From Cape Velho to Corck n. e. & by e. a great league.  
From Corck to the eastpoint of Waterford e. n. e. 20 leagues.  
From Cape de Velho to the islands of Waterford eastnortheast 29 leagues.   
The whole South-coast stretcheth e. n. e. and w. s. w.   

IX. How these places are distant from others.  

FRom Gallowaye to the islands of Aran w. s. w. 8 leagues.  
From Blackrock to Rokot n. & by w. 60 leagues.  
From Cape Dorsey to the Sorrels s. e. & by e. 58 leagues.  
From Cape Dorsey to Cape Finisterre south and by east, and south 164 leagues.  
From Cape de Claro to England's end s. e. & by e. 54 leagues.  
From Cape de Claro to the Sorrels southeast 47 leagues.  
From Cape de Claro to Cape de Finisterre south 164 leagues.  
From Cape de Velho to England's end s. e. 46 leagues.  
From Cape de Claro to Sorrels s. e. & by s. 40 leagues.  
From Waterford to Gresholme e. & by s. 21 leagues.  
From Waterford to Milford east and by south and somewhat southerlyer 23 leagues.  
From Waterford to England's end south & by east and somewhat easterlyer 37 leagues.  
From Waterford to the Sorrels south and somewhat easterlyer 40 leagues.  
From Waterford to Cape de Finisterre s. & by w. 168 leagues. 

or 170 leagues.      

X. Under what degrees these countries lie.  

Scape de Claro lieth under 51 degrees 20 minutes, 

or as some say 51 degrees 38 minutes.    
Cape de Velho or Oldhead lieth under 51 deg. 28 min. 

or as some say 51 degrees 42 minutes.    
Waterford or the tower lieth under 52 degrees 4 minutes, 

or as some say 52 degrees just.      
Hear followeth the Card N. 17.   

CHAPTER XV. A DECLARATION HOW to sail by the Sea-coasts and Havens of Wales: Also from the Channel of Bristol to England's end, and to the Sorlinges.  

I. How to sail by Wales, from Ramsey to the Naes, and to Cardif.  
IT is from the islands of Saltees in Ireland to the Island of Ramsey, 
Ramsey.  or the northpoint of Wales, east and by south 19 leagues. Right north from Ramsey lieth the Bishop with his Clerks, 
The Bishop with his Clerks.  which are certain rocks, which run out a good way from the northpoint of Wales s. w. into the Sea. Upon the said Northpoint there lieth a town, called S. Davies, and from thence northward the land reacheth North-east and south-west.  
Two leagues southward from Ramsey, lieth the Island of Gresholme, 
Gresholm.  and there between them both lieth the Broad-baye, 
Broad-baye.  to go into it you must sail through between the aforesaid islands or Rocks, the one lieth on the northside, the other on the southside, it is a good Road for ships that will go to Bristol, and it is there safe lying against north, North-east, and east-windes, at 7, 8 and 9 fathom. The said islands are well to be known, thereby to know the said point of Wales, the land there reacheth n. n. w. and s. s. e.  
Right south from the Island of Gresholme lieth Milford haven, 
Milford haven.  which first reacheth in n. e. which is a deep and wide haven, in the middle thereof there lieth an Island, within it is very good anckoring, for it is a good haven. About five English miles within the land there lieth a town called Carcewe.  
Two leagues eastward from Milford lieth S. Gawin's point, 
S. Gawin's point.  which is the southpoint of Wales, which is also called the White-point.  
Four or five leagues eastward from S. Grawins' point lieth the Island of Caldye, 
Caldye.  where you may anchor round about against all winds. This Island lieth before a great creak, which all over is good road. He that will go before the town of Tinbuy 
Tinbuy.  he must take heed of a row of blind rocks, which lie northwards from Caldye under the Water, but if you will sail to Tinbuy, eastward from Caldye, you may sail close along by the Island: you may also come about west from Caldye, but there it is not very wide, it is a straight way, but all through it is deep enough, & being east from the rocks you may anchor well.  
East from the Island of Caldye there lieth a white point, called Wormshead-point, 
worms point.  which hath many white chalck spots on the land, whereby that point is well to be known. There eastward it is a good road for west, north, and North-east and by east winds, in a great creak, and southeast from this outpoint there lieth a great bank, which reacheth off from the Naes 
The Naes.  w. & by s. and w. s. w. five leagues.  
You may also sail through this bank and the Naes to Cardyf or the Holm before Bristol, and this sand is called Naes-sand.  
He that will go into this bay or creak eastward, he must sail in close by the Nase, or he must come out of the west, there it is wide and broad.  
East from the Nase there lie two islands, close by the coast of Wales, the one called Barrey, 
Barrey & Sily.  the other Silly. Cardyf and Flatholme lie eastward from them, the northside is most dry and flat water.  
Cardyf 
Cardyf.  is a tydehaven, but there is a very fair road for ships that will go about east or west, for there lie many sands eastward, which at low water are dry.  
He that will go into the road of Cardyf, he must run in between Flatholme and the point of Cardyf, but there lieth a rock in the haven which he must shun, there lieth also a stone s. e. and s. e. & by e. from the west-point of the land under the water: but when it is high water you may go over all that that at half flood is not covered. Cardyf Rode is a fair road, where you may lie safe against all winds.  
Pascaarte van het vermaert Canael van Bristou, vertoonende aent Zuijden de Zeecusten achter Engelant, vande Sorlinghes of tot Bristou toe, Jtem aened Noorden de Custen van bijna geheel Walls Engelandt, met een deel van Yerlant.  
Cart marine du Canal de Bristou, monstrant au Su les costs marines' d'Angleterre de les Sorlinges iusques a Bristou au Nord quasi toutes les costes de Wallie, et aussi une party de Jrlande, le tout dressé selon ses uraijes elevations du pole, routs et distances.   map of the coasts of England and Wales 
Thus Wales showeth itself from Wormshead to Cardyf.   view of Wales  

II. To sail from Naes and the Holm to Bristol.  
HE that will sail from the Naes to Bristol, he must go to the Stepeholme, 
Stepeholm  which lieth e. s. e. about seven leagues from thence, you must sail north along by it, & leave Flatholme 
Flatholm.  on backborde, which lieth somewhat more inwards than St●peholme.  
But he that will sail from Londey to Bristol, he must keep the English side to the Naes, than he is within the great bank which runneth along by Wales, called the Naes sand, you may also sail with ships that draw but little water from the Stepeholme, with half flood, but there it is very flat, there is but two fathom water at lowest water, and under Stepeholme you may anchor when you will at 4 and 5 fathom.  
To sail in the right channel through between the Holm, you must go nearest to Flatholme side, for there is the deepest water, with an open wind you may sail as near as you will, yea so near as that you may cast a stone thereon. Fron the east-land there cometh a shallow shooting off, under which a man may sail as he cometh out of the west. To shun this shallow as you will sail from Flatholme to Brust, set Flatholme when you are passed it, south-west from you, and hold it so, until you have sailed a Dutch mile, then observe a little Island, which lieth almost thwart against you, upon the English coast, whereon stand two mills, and upon the height of the firm land standeth one mill: now when the mill which standeth upon the high land cometh upon the westend of the Island, than you are passed the point of the foresaid English ground, so that then you cannot sail under it, then go eastnortheast by the English ground, which you may sail with your plummet at 3, 4, or 5 fathom, or you may come as near as you will, for it is very flat. When the mill which standeth upon the high land cometh to stand between both the mills which stand upon the foresaid Island, then are you wholly past the English ground, then boldly sail toward the English coast, and so close along if you please to Passis point, keep along by the foresaid coast, and sail close about the corner of Passies point, when you are about the point so anchor there at the Kings road, betwixt the point and the River of Brust, next to the River, at 8 or 9 fathom, there is good clay ground. He that will go into the River, shall be conducted by the Pilots. It is from Flatholm to Passies point deep in the channel 14 or 15 fathom at half flood. Hear you must keep the English side, for the side of Wales is very uneven and full of banks, which in many places fall dry, you come no nearer that coast than 12 fathom, for in sailing toward the coast at one cast you shall have 10 fathom, and at the next be fast on ground, and that wholly from Flatholme to over against Brust. When you are about Passies point you may sail along by the coast forward northerly to the River of Severne, that is also a fair River as Brust, fit to sail into.  
Thus the land of England showeth from Axbridge westward to Ilfordcombe, when you sail along by it.   view of England  

III. To sail into the Havens between the Holms & the Sorlinges.  
Between the Holmes & Ilfordcombe on the English side, & between the banks on the Welsh side in the middle of the channel, it is 15, 16, 18, 20, 25 and 30 fathom deep, the nearer you come to the Holms the flatter water it is. When you come from the west, and are within the Island of Londey, than you may see the land on both sides, that is, both England and Wales.  
In this channel behind England many ships in times past were wont to many times to overshoot themselves, 
How it cometh that ships sail behind England and mistake their course.  which was for want that they had not taken their heigths well, and thought that they were in the channel between England and France. And it happeneth sometimes at this time also, and that by their own default, whereby it is to be marked, how necessary it is for a Sailor to be skilful therein. But he to whom it may happen so hereafter may hereby understand the situation of these parts, all the coast of England, from the end of England to the Holm, is altogether fair, but the Welsh coast is most part all foul and flat water, from the River of Bristol to Caldye, & lieth most full of banks & sands, as I said before.  
Now to sail out of the channel of Bristol, it is from the Holm to Londey w. s. w. 19 leagues.  
And 11 leagues west from the Holmes lieth Ilfordcombe, 
Ilfordcombe.  which is a haven which at low water is 3 or 4 fathom deep. Before the haven it is good road at 8 & 9 fathom, half flood.  
From Ilfordcombe to Bedeford 
Bedeford.  it is s. s.w. 7 leagues. It is a Tydehaven, but a fair channel, where many ships may go out and in, it devideth itself into two Rivers, upon the east River there lieth a town called Barnestable, and on the right side as you go in Bedeford lieth.  
From Bedeford to the westend of Londey 
Londey.  it is n. n. w. five leagues. Under Londey you may anchor on both sides at 14 & 15 fathom.  
From the point of Bedeford to Hartland point 
Hartland-point.  are 7 or 8 leagues. This outpoint lieth right west from Londey.  
From this point to Padstowe 
Padstowe.  or Stoupart the course is s. w. and n. e. 7 leagues. Stoupart is a creak, where there is a good road at 7 or 8 fathom. On the westside there lieth a blind rock under the water, and at the point there lieth a rock high above the water. West from this point there are many white sandy bays, or chalck-bayes in the land, whereby it is a good land to be known.  
Between Padstowe or Stoupart & the Cape of Cornwall lieth the haven of S. Ives, 
S. Ives.  (by the Hollanders called S. Uves) on the eastside there lieth an Island or a great rock above the water, and the town standeth upon the west-point of the land, there you must run in between the rocks & the west-point, then turn up westward, and anchor before the town at 6 and 7 fathom, this haven at half flood is 14 fathom deep.  
From Stoupart to Cape of Cornwall 
The Cape of Cornwall.  s. w. & by s. & somewhat westerlyer, and n. e. and by n. and somewhat easterlyer 12 leagues, and from S. Ives aforesaid it is five leagues.  
From the Cape of Cornewal there lieth an Island or rock inwards to the Sea, called Bresam, 
Bresam.  you may sail through between the Cape & the said Island to England's end. England's end lieth from the Cape of Cornwall south about 5 leagues, the situation thereof, as also of Sorrels is showed in the next Chapter.  
When the Island of Londey is n. n.w from you it showeth thus.   view of Lundy 
When Londey is north from you it showeth thus.   view of Lundy 
Thus the land east from Padstowe or Stupaert showeth when it is three leagues east and by south from you.   view of Padstow 
Thus the land of Padstowe or Stupaert showeth when you sail along by it, and are three or four leagues from it.   view of Padstow 
The land west from Stoupaert showeth thus when you sail along by it three leagues from it.   view of England 
The land between England's end and the point of Cornwall or the Island Bresam showeth thus when you are behind England's end, & it is about five leagues long.   view of England  

FOUR Of the falling and running of the Sreames.  
IN the Channel of Bristol, between Londey and Milford, the stream falleth n. e. & by e. and n. e.  
At Ramsey in the Channel of S. Davies the flood falleth North-east & by north.  
In the Channel of Bristol within the Holm the flood falleth n. e. & by e. and the ebb s. w. & by w.  
In the Channel of Bristol between the Holmes and Londey the flood falleth e. n. e. and w. s. w.  
Between Londey and the Sorrels the flood n.e. & ebb s. w.   

V What Moon maketh a high water in all the places aforesaid.  
AT Milford or Wilford a west and by south moon maketh high water.  
Likewise on the Coast of Wales a west and by south moon maketh a full Sea.  
Also against the Island of Londey a west & by south moon maketh high water.  
At the Island of Londey & the Holmes it is high water with an east and west moon.  
Within at Bristol it is high water with a w. & by n. moon.  
In the Sorrels a s. w. & by w. moon maketh a high water.  
Without the Sorrels in the channel a s. w. & by w. moon.   

VI Of the depths here, and at what depths you may see the Land, and how it is to be known.  
Between England's end and Londey in the channel it is 45 fathom deep, & you may see Cornwall at 44 fathom.  
At Wales about Milford, and there northward from it you may see the land at 42 and 45 fathom.  
In the Channel between the Holmes and Bristol it is 12, 13 and 14 fathom deep, and you see the land on both sides, the English land is the fairest.  
You may see Sorlinges at 45 and 46 fathom, & the ground is oasie, with some small stones among it. Eleven or 12 leagues w. n. w. and w. & by n. from Sorrels it is 56 and 57 fathom deep, and the ground there is so soft that you can hardly get it to stick upon the lead, & sometimes you shall have small shells.  
Between Hartland point and S. Ives, against Padstowe or Stupaert, there are many white chalck hills, and so all along to the end of England, whereby you may know that Coast, upon England's end you see always a tower or two. When you are n. from the Sorrels, than you see a tower or castle upon the east Island, and the Sorrels then lie most upon two islands although they are more than two, & without upon the easterlyest of the islands there lie two great rocks, which are very craggy like hillocks, & without at the uttermost there lie three high black rocks, whereby you may learn to know these Lands.   

VII. How these places are distant from each other.  

FRom Ramsey to Milford s. & by e. 5 leagues.  
From Milford to S. Gawin's point s. e. & by s. 4 leagues.  
Fron S. Gawin's point to the Nase e. & somewhat s. 17 league.  
From the Nase to Stepeholme e. s. e. about 7 leagues.  
From Stepeholme to the river of Bristol n. & by e. 12 leagues.  
From the Holmes to Londey w. s. w. 20 leagues.  
From Londey to the Cape of Cornwall south-west, and south-west and by south 28 leagues.  
From the Cape of Cornwall to the end of England s. 5 leagues.  
From Gresholme to Milford s. s. e. 3 leagues.  
From Ilfordcombe to Bedeford w. s. w. 7 leagues.  
From Bedeford to the westende of Londey w. n. w. 5 leagues.  
From Hartland point to Padstowe s. w. 7 leagues.  
From Stupart to the Cape of Cornwall s. w. 12 or 13 leagues.  
From Milford to Londey s. & by e. and s. s. e. 12 or 13 leagues.  
From Milford to England's end or the Cape of Cornwall southsouthwest 32 leagues.  
From Milford to the Sorrels southsouthwest & somewhat westerlyer 40 leagues.   
How these places are distant from the Havens of Ireland it is showed in the chapter before.   

VIII. Under what degrees these Places lie.  

THe Haven of Milford lieth under 51 degrees 50 minute.  
Londey lieth under 50 degrees 20 minutes.  
The Cape of Cornwall lieth under 50 degrees 25 minute.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 18.   

CHAPTER XVI. A TRUE DESCRIPTION of the Sea-coasts of England, that lie between the Sorlinges and Portland.  

I. The situation of the Sorlinges, and from England's end to Lezard.  
FRom the point of Cornwall, or the Island of Bresam to England's end it is south & north five leagues. From England's end there lie some rocks, 
A Road behind the rocks at England's end.  which shoot off from it, where you may anchor behind them at 8 and 9 fathom: you may sail behind them when you come either north or south, on the southside it is narrow, but deep enough, at least 10 fathom, but out of the north it is best to come in between them, there it is 8 & 9 fathom deep. But there lieth a rock under the water on the left hand, close by the northpoint of England's end, which you must shun.  
The Sorrels 
The Sorrels.  or Sorlinges are distant from England's end w. s. w. & leagues. Between them both lie Sevenstones 
Sevenstones.  w. s. w. and w. & by s. from England's end distant four leagues. It is a row of rocks whereon it always rails, and are not above the water. Sevenstones' is distant from Sorlinges n. e. & by e. and e. n. e. three leagues.  
Three or four leagues from England's end s. s. w. and s. w. & by s. there lieth a sharp rock in the Sea, which at half flood is above the water, and is indifferent fair, it is called the Wolf, 
The Wolf.  it is distant from Sorlinges east and west 5 leagues.  
To sail into the Sorlinges islands, when you come out of the east, 
●o sail into Sorrels.  you must sail in by the east-land at 8 or 9 fathom, there lieth a sconce right without the castle, from thence also there shooteth off a stone under the water, you may sail through between the said stone and the sconce. To shun the stone also that lieth in the haven, you must understand, that there lie two rocks on the westside within the haven, one greater than the other, keep the greatest over against the smallest, & sail nearest to the northside, and hold them so, and then you run wide enough without the point at 10 fathom, but nearer you may not go unto it.  
If you will go southward into the Sorrels, 
To sail out of the south into the Sorrels.  you must look well before you, because of the stone that lieth in the haven, you may well sail about on both sides, but the eastside is the best and fairest. But to go into the best of the channel, and to go as near unto the rock as well you may, then hold the two rocks aforesaid (which lie on the westside of the haven) the smallest under the greatest, nearest unto the northside, as I said before, and so sail about the point, and turn up northward, until you may see the towreful in the middle of the sandy bay, there anchor at 7 or 8 fathom, you may hold the said two rocks, (which are within the haven on the westside) a little distant one from the other, so that you may see just between them, than you are right north or east from the rock which lieth in the haven, and then you must run in so by the east-land, than the said rock will be on the westside, but on the innermost point of the Island, against the Pale there lieth a rock under the water, which you must shun, and then run up northward, until you may see the tower in the sandy Bay, as I said before.  
The Sorrels on the westside are all full of rocks, & have many channels to come in, but the south-chanel or haven is best.  
When you come to the Sorlinges on the southside than you see a flat steeple in the Sandbaye or valley, and west it is all full of islands & rocks, the ground is stony with some red shells, you may see the southland at 52 fathom.  
England's end hath two round hills, 
To know● England's end.  & on the highest there standeth a speere steeple, and when you go somewhat nearer, you discover also upon the uttermost end another speere steeple or tower, in the low land, so that the end of England is well to be known, the ground is whitish sand, mingled with red sand and shells.  
Eÿgent●ijck beworp naet leaven van all Haven●n, Gaten, en Re●den, gheloohen dende Zeecusten van Engelandt, tusschen Engelandts eijndt, end Poortlandt, oock vande rechte gelegentheijt vande Sorlinges, Hoemen deselve gewesten beseijlen end hem van alles ●at aldaar van zanden, bancken, clippen, en ander ondiepten te ghemoeten is, wachten shall.  
Vraije et vive delincation, de touts les Haures, Ports, et Rades de Mer, situez entre les Sorlinges, et Portlande, aussij la uraÿe situation desdictes Sorlinges, Comment on singlera lesdicts endroicts, et se gardera de tous sablons, bancs, rochers, et autres perilz quill ij a. a. rencontrec   map of the southern coast of England 

To sail into Monsbaye.  If you will enter into Monsbaye coming from England's end, or from Lezard you must run upon a castle which standeth upon a high round rock; until you come within half a league near unto it, than you shall turn up west, and sail to the Bay, until you see the Island on the westside, whereon the two stumps stand like beakons, leave that on the left hand, and sail close along by it, for there it is fair, but leave the castle a great way on the right hand, for there it is foul. When you come within the Island or rock, than you shall see a great Sandbaye there behind it, where you may anchor under at 7 or 8 fathom, there you may lie safe against a s. s. e. wind, but a s. e. and specially an e. s. e. wind bloweth open into it, otherwise you lie safe there against all other winds.  
From Monsbaye to Lezard the course is s. e. and n. w. five leagues: The northside is all full of rocks to Lezard. From Lezard also there lie some rocks. And east from Monsbaye there lie rocks a league into the Sea, in dark gloemie weather a man must be careful to take heed of them.  
To know Lezard, it is a small low point, 
To know Lezard.  and on the southende there standeth a steeple, and on high towards the northend there standeth a sharp steeple, you may see Lezard at 55 fathom, the ground is white and red shellie sand.  
When the Sorrels are south-west from you four leagues, than they show thus.   view of 'the Sorrels' (England) 
When the Sorrels are southeast from you three or four leagues they show thus.   view of 'the Sorrels' (England) 
When Sorrels is southeast and southeast and by east from you three leagues then it showeth thus.   view of 'the Sorrels' (England) 
When the Sorrels are eastnort●east from you three leagues then they appear thus.   view of 'the Sorrels' (England) 
Thus England's end showeth when it is east from you four leagues.   view of England 
Thus England's end showeth when you see it first, coming out of the Spanish Sea, it is good to be known for there stand diverse steeples and towers upon it.   view of England 
Thus the land showeth between England's end and Lezard, when the castle of Monsbaye is north, and Lezard about east and by north from you.   view of England 
Thus Lezard showeth being east and by north from you six or seven leagues.   view of Lizard  

II. To sail into the Havens and Rhodes that lie between Lezard and Ramshead, the west-point of the Haven of Plymouth.  
FRom Lezard to Falmouth south and north 4 leagues.  

Hi●●ord h●●●n.  Between Falmouth and Lezard lieth Hilford, where you may run in through the middle of the haven, between a sloping and a low point, on the southside lieth the sloping point, and on the northside the sharp point, it is a short haven to sail into, and within the haven on the southside there standeth a Gentleman's house, below upon the strand, & on high there standeth a company of trees, which you place one over against the other when you run into the haven. On the northside also there stand two or three trees, which come a masts length westward from a house, which standeth in a white sandbaye, sail so in the middle of the haven, & anchor at 6 or 7 fathom. On the southside there standeth a sharp steeple upon the high land, and on the northside there standeth a castle upon the shoring land, 
To s●●le 〈◊〉 a●●●th.  this is in the haven, wherein few ships enter for fear of danger.  
To sail into Falmouth, you shall first see a castle on the high land, on the westside of the haven, then run along in within two cables length by the east-land, there lie rocks upon the inner side of the eastpoint of Falmouth, you must go in close by th●m, and then sail upon the high land, which lieth on the west-s d●. Behind in the haven there standeth a white chalk piece of ground, & there also you see a box tree, you must hold it ov●r against the northpoint of the high westland, & so sail to the high land, until you come to it, and you shall not have less water at half flood then 5 fathom, & that is between the east and west castles, or a little within them, and you may also when you come within the west castle sail forward, to the middle of the high land, which you see on the westside of the haven, and at the northside of the high land you may anchor at 12, 13 and 14 fathom.  
You may also strike over to the east-land, & anchor under the bank which cometh running off from the east-castle in the middle along the haven, at 6, 7 and 8 fathom. This bank at low water is almost dry, and it is soft moorish ground, so that you lie fast in the dirt when you fall on ground there.  
You may also run about west from the stone which lieth in the haven, t●en you must hold the westland side whereon the castle standeth, at 5 or 6 fathom, for it is no deeper than 6 or 7 fathom at half flood, but on the eastside of the stone it is 7 or 8 fathom deep. Four leagues upward from Falmouth lieth a town called Traerens.  
Two leagues east from Falmouth lieth the point of the Deadmanshead, 
The Deadmanshead.  which is a round hill, which towards the west goeth slope down, it is double land, and there westward there standeth a mill at the end of a sharp steeple, there also stand some houses upon the land, and a little westward you may see the castle of Falmouth, upon a round hillock, against that high land, it is well to be known for such as come out of the west from Lezard.  
From the Deadmanshead to Fawick it is North-east 4 leagues. 
Fawick.   
Fawick lieth in a great creak, it is a Tydehaven, where a ship may enter at half flood, on the eastside of the haven there standeth a little church, with a steeple, and on the westside there standeth a white church with a flat steeple, at the westend being somewhat greater than the church upon the east-end.  
If you will sail into Fawick you must stay till half flood, & so sail in the middle of the channel, between the east and west points, & when you are within the point, than you may choose what side you will, yet there is most water by the westside, between the stakes & the steeple that standeth upon the westside.  
But if you go in by the westside, than you must presently turn off when you are within the stakes, and sail almost in the middle of the haven, nearest to the westside, to the town that lieth on the westside of the haven, there is a deep pit, where a man may lie with a ship of sixteen foot deep afloat at a low water.  
You may also sail further in, until you see a wall on the westside of the haven, and behind it there standeth a village: a ships length southward from the wall it is good lying fastened with four ropes, for there you lie close by the eastside.  
You may also sail in further to a hollow place that lieth on the westside, wherein a water-mill standeth, but go not to near the northpoint thereof, for there lieth a rock under the water, and when you are somewhat past it, than you may tow the ship in the middle of the water, for there it is best lying for ships that draw much water: but south from the aforesaid wall a ship of 16 foot may lie afloat.  
Right within the eastpoint of the haven of Fawick there lieth a village, and right before the village there is a deep pool, where you may go in with three or four ships, & the depth goeth right within the eastpoint.  
But if you go in by the eastpoint, and will lie in the said pool, you must sail within the stakes, and put somewhat off from the east-land, that you may go nearest to the westland, for on the eastland there reacheth a flat along the haven, which beginneth right against the first house of the westerlyest village, and if it so fall out, that you can not get in there, then let your anchor fall without the stakes, and make your ship fast with ropes within, for that a ship which draweth sixteen foot water may lie afloat within the stakes at a dead stream.  

Ramshead  From Fawick to Ramshead (the west-point of the haven of Plymouth) it is westsouthwest, and eastnortheast 6 leagues.  
Between them there lieth an Island called Low, where you may anchor under it, at 5 or 6 fathom, you may go both on the east and westside, but the eastside is widest and best to go in.  
Thus Lezard showeth when you sail along by it.   view of Lizard 
Thus the land showeth between Lezard and Deadmanshead.  
Lezard. Falmouth. Deadmanshead.   view of Lizard  

III. How to sail into Plymouth, and from thence into Goutstart  

Road under Ramshead.  NOrth from Ramshead, close under the land, a man may anchor in a sandbaye, at 8, 9, and 10 fathom, for there it is fair.  
From Ramshead to the Meustone or Idestone it is south 3 leagues.  
Idestone lieth from the point of Plymouth s. & by w. and southsouthwest 4 leagues.  
The haven of Plymouth reacheth in n. n. e. If you will go into Catte-water, you must go in between the eastpoint and the Island, upon the point of Plymouth, so long till you see Catte-water open, and then run in between the point of Plymouth and the eastpoint to the northland, and anchor before the steep shoring land, at 4 or 5 fathom at a low water because of the continual tide.  
There lieth a stone under the water westward from the Island, which at a low water hath but 3 fathom water upon it.  
If you will go behind the Island, east or west from the said stone, which lieth within the Island, as I said before, then run to the Island, till you be at five fathom at a low water, until the fishermen's village cometh on the westside of the valley, than you are west from the stone, & you must go through between the Island and the stone, and when the fishermen's village which standeth behind the wall, is in the northside of the valley, than you go east from the stone.  
But if you will sail over the stone, than you must hold the steeple of the fishermen's village over the northside of the valley, and sail to the land of Plymouth, until the wall standing on the land of Plymouth showeth endelong to you, & so long till Catte-water cometh open to you, than you may well sail behind the Island into Westcomfer, or anchor behind the Island at 12 or 13 fathom, & then you are passed over the stone, at three fathom and an half, at lowest water.  
And coming before Westcomfer in the narrow way, than you must go through the middle of the water right in, & then strike up on the left hand, and anchor at 15 or 16 fathom. In the narrow it is 15, 16, & 17 fathom, and also 20 fathom deep, and behind the Island 8, 9, 10, and 12 fathom.  
In the haven of Plymouth there lie two or three blind rocks, at three fathom and a half at low water, the marks thereof are these, there standeth a steeple and a mill east from Plymouth, & west from the Island there standeth a gentleman's house, when the tower of the house cometh over against the point which lieth against the Island, & the steeple & the mill east from Plymouth are one over against the other, than you are upon the innermost stone, which at low water is 4 fathom deep.  
When the west-point of Westcomfer cometh on the point which lieth west from the Island, than you are upon the uttermost stone, and there it is 3 fathom & an half deep, with low water and a springtide.  
Upon the eastpoint of Plymouth haven there lieth a rock very round and high, which by the Englishmen is called Meustone, but by the Dutch sailors Cocxbroot, because it is so round. Fron that stone or rock 7 leagues e. s. e. lieth Goutstart, under the point of Goutstart you may anchor safe against a northwest wind.  
Thus the high land on the east side of Plymmouth showeth.   view of Plymouth 
Thus Goudstart showeth itself when it is seven leagues north from you.   view of 'Goudstart' (town in England)  

FOUR The situation of the land between Goutstart and Portland.  

Road under Goutstart.  Under the point of Goutstart on the eastside you may anchor safe against a n. w. wind, at 10 or 11 fathom, between the church which standeth upon the high land & the point of Goutstart, so that the point may lie s. w. from you.  
West from Goutstart there lieth a haven called Salcem, but from Goutstart to Dartmouth it is North-east 3 leagues.  
Dartmouth lieth in between two high lands, and on each side of the haven there lieth a castle, 
Dartmouth.  it is a narrow haven, so that in time of war there was wont to be a chain laid cross over the haven, and on the westside there standeth a church upon the high land.  

To sail into Dartmouth.  To sail into Dartmouth when you come out of the west, you must sail so long about east, or along by the westside until the Kaye of the village, (which lieth on the eastside of the haven) cometh in the middle of the channel, then sail up upon it, in the middle between both the lands, and be ready with your boat, if the wind should chance to whirl, that then you might tow in, & then turn on the westside before the brewhouse and anchor at 10 or 12 fathom, for within it is a wide haven, and you may as well anchor before the village as before the brewhouse. There lieth a blind rock on the eastside of the haven of Dartmouth, the marks to sail out of the danger thereof are these, there is a red point east from Dartmouth, which upon the water is black, and in the red there lieth a white stone, when the white stone is over against the black point, than you are right over against the said rock, which lieth before the haven of Dartmouth, but when you see the Kaye of the village then do as aforesaid, and you shall not sail by the stone.  
Four leagues east from Dartmouth lieth the bay of Torbaye, 
Torbaye Rode.  where you may anchor, you must place the west-point s. e. and s. s. e. from you, and there you lie safe against a south-west wind at 7 or 8 fathom.  
On the eastside there is also a Tydehaven, where there is good anchor ground, at 4 or 5 fathom, as you are close by or far from the land.  
From Torbaye to Portland it is east, and east & by north 13 leagues. About 5 leagues n. and n. & by e. from Torbaye lyeah the creak of Tops or Exmouth, 
Exmouth.  where you may lie safe ●gainst a south-wind, at 7 or 8 fathom, good anchor ground, on the southside of the Single which lieth before the tydehaven of Exmouth, so that the rocks of Totmanstone lie south, and south and by east from you.  
From Exmouth to Portland the course is e. s. e. 13 leagues.  
Between them both, close by the land there lieth an Island call●d Cob.  
Thus the land showeth between Goutstart and Torbaye.   view of England 
Thus the land on the westside of Portland showeth when you sail along by it.   view of Portland 
Thus Portland showeth when you come from the west.   view of Portland 
Thus Portland showeth when it is north and by west from you seven leagues.   view of Portland 
Thus Portland showeth when you come from the east.   view of Portland 
As long as Portland lieth west and by north from you, than the east point is high and steep, but when it beginneth to come northnortheast from you, than it lieth as it were round to your sight, and when it lieth more easterly from you, than the westside is the highest and steepest.   

V Of many depths and fashions of grounds which men find when they come out of the Sea, to seek out the channel between Heysant and the Sorrels, taken out of the search made by Adrian Gerritson of Haerlem.  
south-west and by south from Seims seven leagues it is 72 fathom deep, 
The Seims  and the ground is slopie white great sand, as if it were wreathed small stones, with small pieces of shells, grey flat stones, and white shining needles, sail from thence n. and n. & by e. then you are in a good way to Heysant.  

The Seims  About 2 leagues s. w. from Seimes it is 52 fathom deep, & the ground is there white yellow, with some small red shells, many grey ragged needles, & with some white shining points, as if they were needles. If a man found 70 or 80 fathom there, they would judge it to be good channel ground, for it is white yellow rough long sand.  

The Seims  Also w. s. w. from the Seimes, so far from the land that you may see the Sheets from the poop of the ship very well, there it is 54. fathom deep, the ground there is red white yellow, and black pieces as if it were parings of cheese, with some great red sand amongst it.  
West and by south 8 or 9 leagues from Seims at 65 fathom there the ground is white yellow, and some small red shellie sand, with some pieces of shells, which are not over great, and with much white-yellowe long sand, with small white points of needles, such as men cast in the channels.  

He●s●nt.  Seven leagues s. w. from Heysant, or thereabouts, where you may plainly see from the poop of the ship at 70 fathom, there the ground is white yellow great sand, with some pieces of crampen, some pieces of white thin shells, & some grey flat hackled stones.  
south-west & by west from Heysant about 19 or 20 leagues, at 78 or 80 fathom, the ground is white yellow great sand with shining needles, white pieces of crampen, grey yellow flat stones, and pieces, as if they were of oyster shells.  
West and by south from Heysant 21 leagues, at 86 fathom, there the ground is red yellow and black, with a little white round sand amongst it, showing as if it were shel-sand. But at 80 fathom, 21 leagues west from Heysant the ground is yellow and shellie, with some grey rugged needles, as if they were the ends of small rye.  
Also at 80 fathom, 
Heysant.  24 leagues from Heysant w. & by s. the ground is rough sand, with many pieces of red white yellow and grey shells, and pieces of crampen or shells.  
From Heysant west 16 or 17 leagues, at 75 fathom, the ground is pale yellow great sand, with pieces of white thin shells, and grey pieces of crampen, or of oyster shells, and white shining needles.  
Eight or 9 leagues from Heysant it is 70 fathom deep, the ground is red yellow white & grey shellie sand, with red yellow and black pieces of shells, & small red yellow black grey little stones, and some white needles.  
Fortie-eight Leagues w. & by n. from Heysant, and w. s. w. from Lezard 50 leagues, or thereabouts, it is 95 fathom deep, the ground is red yellow and black sand, with small white round shellie sand, some small pieces of shells or crampen, and some small pieces of thin shells.  
Thirty three leagues w. & by n. from Heysant, & 28 leagues s. w. & by s. from Sorrels at 95 fathom, there the ground is grey, red yellow with black sand amongst it, & some dark red pieces, and pale yellow pieces of shells, to conclude it is there small grey red shellie sand, and the best course from this ground is e. n. e. it is almost under the height of nine-and-fortie degrees.  
Four-and-twentie leagues w. or w. & by n. from Heysant, and s. & by w. from the Sorrels 21 leagues, at 80 fathom, there the ground is white, grey, red yellow small shellie sand, with small red and white pieces of shells, and to see to, it is like ground mustard seed, it is under the height of 49 degrees.  
Seven or 8 leagues west, and w. and by n. from Heysant at 68 or 70 fathom, the ground is white yellow small shel-sand, with many grey curled needles amongst it.  
About 31 leagues west, & somewhat northerlyer from Heysant at 90 fathom, there the ground is small white rough long sand, mixed with a little red and yellow, and with some shining needles, with two or three pieces of white grey shells, and when you go there n. e. & by n. till you be under 55 fathom, the ground is yellow and white great shellie sand, with white pieces of shells, than you may see the Sorrels 9 or 10 league● northward, or somewhat westerlyer from you.  
Westnorthwest from Heysant 21 leagues, and s. w. & by s. from Lezard 28 leagues, 
Heysant.  at 80 fathom, there the ground is grey red shell sand, and upon the lead there cometh a piece of white or grey crampen or shells, with red and yellow pieces of shells, and many pieces of needles.  
Nine leagues n. w. & by n. from Heysant the ground is white yellow rugged shellie sand, with grey short needles, and shining needles, there also sticks on the lead things like straws, when you go n. e. from thence then you sail upon Goutstart.  
Twenty leagues n. w. and by n. from Heysant, & 16 leagues s. w. & somewhat southerlyer from Lezard at 68 fathom, there the ground is white yellow red small round sand, with some white shining needles, and a grey short needle or two, and two or three pieces of white shells.  
Nineteen leagues n. n. w. from Heysant, & 12 or 13 leagues s. s. w. from Lezard it is 68 fathom deep, the ground is there of all kind of hackled stones, grey, red, and black, with red pieces of shells, and some grey hackled needles.  
Nineteen leagues n. and by w. from Heysant, & southward from Lezard, there it is 62 fathom, there the ground is white, shellie sand, with white needles and grey needles, & white pieces of shells, and two or three red stones amongst it.  

Sorrels.  Twelve or therteene leagues about west from Sorrels, or somewhat northerly, there it is 60 fathom deep, and the ground is grey oasie ground, with small black sand mixed among it, and in some places at the same depth, it is white grey oasie small sand, with pieces of thin white shells among it, with a piece or two like parings of cheese, and this ground you cannot get upon the lead with tallow, for it will not stick upon it, unless you put butter or grease under the bottom of the lead, and in no place else you have this ground at this depth, so oasie as there, and therefore you must certainly know, that there you are behind the Sorrels, or behind England, that is west from Sorrels.  
West from Sorrels seven leagues, there also it is oasie ground grey sand, with two or three pieces of cheese pare.  

Lezard.  Seven or eight leagues southsouthwest from Lezard at 60 fathom, there the ground is white great sand, with a little red, and white shells, and shining white needles.  
Ten or eleven leagues south-west from Lezard at 60 fathom, there the ground is yellow pieces of shells, and grey pieces of soft flat stones, as if they were parings of cheese, and some red pieces of shells, without any sand therein.  
south-west and by west from Lezard, and southsouthwest from Sorrels 19 leagues, there it is deep 78 fathom, there the ground is grey yellow red shellie ground, with red yellow and blue pieces of shells and crampen, and a piece or two as if it were cheese pare, or pieces of oyster shells, and two or three shining needles, at the height of about 49 degrees 30 minutes.  
Fiveteene or sixteen leagues south-west and by south from Goutstart at 57 or 58 fathom, 
Goutstart.  there the ground is all manner of pieces of shells, and crampen, with a little white yellow shellie sand, and all manner of stones, grey pieces like parings of cheese, some rough needles, shining needles, and things like as if they were carnels or measles that are in bacon.  
south-west from Goutstart 16 leagues, at 53 fathom, the ground is white reddish shellie sand, with pieces of crampen, and red and grey stones.  
Southsouthwest 11 or 13 leagues from Goutstart at 50 fathom, the ground is white yellow small shellie sand, with some pieces of white shells, and grey ragged, & shining needles. To conclude he that soundeth much, finds many sorts of Ground, and sometimes much alteration, in small changing of places. But he that findeth depth with white shells and little needles, he must understand that he is nearest to Heysant. But if he find brannie ground, or black stones mingled with white measles or carnels, than he is nearest to the Sorlinges.  
The tokens or signs of Heysant depth, 
Marks of Heysant and Sorrels.  you shall find small white sand and shells, and small things, it being oasie and white, then Heysant lieth n. e. from you, and if you find all along things like needles, then Heysant lieth southeast from you, but if you be not sure of these grounds, than you must go northwards, & if you find it deeper, than you are towards the Seims, and if it be drier than you are in the channel northward from Heysant. If you are between Heysant and the Seims at 70 fathom, than the ground will be stones, like black earth sand. And if you find the ground great red sand, than you must go northward, until you find white sand ground, & long carnels or measles, than you must know that you enter into the channel.   

VI Of the falling and running of the streams about these Lands.  
FRom Sorles to Lezard the flood falleth North-east and the ebb south-west.  
From Lezard to the Deadmanshead it flalleth n. e. and s. w.  
From Deadmanshead to Ramshead the flood falleth e. n. e. & the ebb w. s. w.  
In the channel between Lezard & Goutstart against Fawick the flood falleth e. & by n. and the ebb w. & by s.  
From Ramshead to Goutstart by the land within the Ideston or Mens●one the flood falleth e. s. e. and the ebb w. n. w.  
From Goutstart to Portland in the middle of the channel the flood falleth e. n. e. and the ebb w. s. w.  
Against Dartmouth by the land the flood falleth n. e. & by n. and the ebb s. w. and by s.  
Against Tops or Exmouth in the creak the flood falleth n. n. e. and the ebb s. s. w.   

VII. What Moon maketh high water at these places.  
IN the Sorlinges a s. w. & by w. moon maketh high water.  
In the mouth of the channel of England a south-west and North-east moon maketh full Sea.  
Without the Sorrels in the channel a s. w. & by w. moon.  
At England's end and in Monsbay a westsouthwest moon maketh high water.  
At L●zard on the land an e. s. e. & w. n. w. moon makes full Sea.  
The like also at Hilford.  
In Falmouth an east and by north moon maketh a full Sea.  
Without Falmouth an e. & by s. moon maketh full Sea.  
Against Fawick in the channel an e. s. e. moon makes full Sea.  
In Plymouth & Fawick a w. & by s. moon makes high water.  
Against Goutstart in the channel a w. n. w. and e. s. e. moon makes high water.  
In Dartmouth and Torbaye a west & by south moon maketh high water.  
Against Portland in the channel a southsoutheast, and a northnorthwest moon makes a full Sea.   

VIII. At what depths you may see these countries.  
YOu may see the Sorlinges on the northside at 48 fathom, but on the southside you may see th●m at 52 fathom.  
England's end you may also see at 52 fathom.  
You may see Lezard at 55 fathom, the ground is white and red shellie sand.  
The Deadmanshead may be seen at 42 fathom, from Lezard along to Goutstart.  
You may see Goutstart at 45 fathom.  
The high land of Plymouth may be seen at 50 fathom, being north from you, it is high double land, lying upon two hills, the same high within the land runneth all along the land from Fawick to Dartmouth, and you may see the land of Dartmouth at 45 fathom.   

IX. How these Countries lie distant from each other.  

FRom the Sorrels to England's end e. n. e. about 8 leagues.  
From England's end to Lezard e. s. e. 10 or 11 leagues.  
From Lezard to Falmouth n. & by e. 4 league.  
From Falmouth to the Deadmanshead east & by north and east North-east 4 leagues.  
From the Deadmanshead to Fawick n. e. 4 leagues.  
From Fawick to the I'll of Low east 3 leagues.  
From the I'll of Low to Ramshead e. n. e. 5 leagues.  
From Ramshead to Goutstart e. s. e. 8 leagues.  
From Goutstart to Dartmouth n. e. 3 leagues.  
From Dartmouth to Torbaye North-east 3 leagues.  
From Torbaye to Tops or Exmouth north 5 leagues.  
From Exmouth to Portland e. s. e. 13 leagues.  
From Sorrels to Sevenstones' North-east and somewhat northerlyer 3 leagues.  
From Sorrels to the Wolf east 5 leagues.  
From the Wolf to England's end n. n. e. 3 leagues.  
From the Wolf to Lezard e. and by s. 11 leagues.  
From Lezard to Deadmanshead n. e. 7 leagues.  
From the Deadmanshead to Ramshead e. n. e. 8 leagues.  
From Ramshead to Meustone south 3 leagues.  
From the point of Plymouth to the Meustone southsouthwest and somewhat southerlyer 4 leagues.  
From the Meustone to Goutstart e. & by s. & e. 7 or 8 leagues.  
From Torbaye to Portland e. & somewhat north 13 or 14. league.  
From the Sorrels to Lezard east 16 leagues.  
From Lezard to Goutstart e. & by n. 20 or 21 leagues.  
From Goutstart to Portland North-east and somewhat more eastward 19 or 20 leagues.    

X. How these places are distant from other countries.  

FRom the Sorrels to Waterford in Ireland north and some. what westerly 40 leagues.  
From Sorrels to Cape de Claro n. w. & by n. 40 leagues.  
From Sorrels to Cape de Finisterre south and by west & somewhat westerlyer 151 leagues.  
From Sorrels to Heysant s. e & by s. 37 leagues.  
From Sorrels to the Casquettes east and somewhat southerlyer 56 leagues.  
From Lezard to Tercera s. w. and by w. 387 leagues.  
From Lezard to Tenerifa s. s. w. 467 leagues.  
From Lezard to Cape Finisterre southsouthwest, and then you run about 5 leagues without it, 153 leagues.  
From Lezard to Heysant south 29 leagues.  
From Lezard to Septisles s. e. and by e. 27 leagues.  
From Lezard to Garnsey e. and by s. 37 leagues.  
From Goutstart to Heysant s. w. and by s. 40 leagues.  
From Goutstart to S. Paul de Lyon s. & by w. 29 leagues.  
From Goutstart to Septisles south and by east and somewhat easterlyer 37 leagues.  
From Goutstart to Casquettes e. s. e. 10 leagues.    

XI. Under what degrees these countries lie.  

THe southside of Sorrels & Lezard lie under 50 degrees.  
Goutstart lieth under 50 degrees 12 minutes, or as some say 50 degrees 20 minutes.  
Portland lieth under 50 degrees 30 minutes, or as some say 50 degrees 40 minutes.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 19   


V●●●oon d● naeed leaven vanac Zeecusten van Engelan● tusschen Poo●tlant en Doveren, en voort N●rtu●ert tot het Voorlant, Jtem vande geleg●●●jt der Engde tussche Vruncrijck en Enge●●●t, oock wat sanden Bancken en gevaerlijck● Droochten aen die gewesten zijn geleghen al●e● na rechte mate, streckingen, end hoc●●en vand●● Poole gestelt.  
Representation au vif des Costs marines' D'Angleterre entre Portlande et Dovures, Jtem de la situation de l'estroict entre France et Angleterre nommé le Pas de Calais, aussi quells Bancqs, Sables, Guez, et autres perilz entour et envir●̄ lesdictes costs on a a eviter et fuir, tout accommodé selon sa droicte measure, uruijes ●vutes, et ●levatio●s du Pole.   map of the coast of England   

CHAPTER XVII. A TRUE DESCRIPTION how you may sail into the Havens between Portland and the Foreland.  

I. To sail by the Ras of Portland, and into the Haven of Poole.  
THe Ras of Portland beginneth about half way from Portland, 
The Ras of Portland.  and endeth against the middle of S. Andrew's land, in some places it is all banckie, and sometimes it is deep 7, and then 10, and then 15 fathom;  

Road in Portland.  If you come from the west and desire to go into Portland, you may run along within two cables length, or the shot of a piece by Portland, and sail westward about the point up before the castle, where you may lie safe against a south, and a south and by east wind, at 7 or 8 fathom, but with a south-west, and a southsouthwest wind, a man must take heed of the ravelings, which begin half way from Portland, and end half way at S. Andrew's land.  
About a great league north from Portland there lieth a little Tydehaven, which at low water is dry, it is called Weimouth, before it you may anchor at 4 or 5 fathom.  
Men commonly anchor under Portland at 10 or 11 fathom, that the point may be south and by east, and southsoutheast from you.  

To sail into the haven of Poole.  By the eastpoint of S. Andrew's land, three leagues west from the Needles of the I'll of Wight, you run into the haven of Pool, which is a good haven for ships that will go about eastward. To go into it go along by S. Andrew's land, at 5 or 6 fathom with half flood, but when you come against the Cingle or the other land, then lose westward to the point, and there anchor, for there you lie safe against a s. w. and s. s. w. wind. But if you will sail into the haven of Pool, then shall you perceive another point bearing out, so soon as you are gone about the foresaid point, by the which standeth a high white steep rock like a mast, almost like the Needle on the west end of Wight, there you may sail about at 4 or 5 fathom. Now when you are about the said point with the needle go forward northwest, and you shall see right before you a high flat hill rising up out of the other land, keep that hill between both the shores, and sail right forward. But if it chance that you must laveere, then spare not your lead, & run no further westward as you cross, then that the foresaid flat hill cometh upon the westland: for so soon as the hill beginneth to come upon the westland, you must turn, or else you shall presently be on ground: when you be turned, then cross no further eastward than that the foresaid rock cometh upon the east-downe, which is a high, grey, sharp down, lying upon the eastside: if you hold these marks so, than you have water enough at half flood. Where it is shallowest, at low water there is in the channel 10 or 11 foot water, yet it floweth but five foot up and down. A southeast and northwest moon maketh high water there: but it floweth twice in a tide: for a south and by east moon maketh there also full Sea, and that cometh by reason of the fore-ebbe which falleth out of Wight. When you are within the channel, then go on North-east, and keep the beakons which stand on the east-land on starboard, and go up reasonable close. The shores on both sides are very steep, and the channel is not wide, but without the deep or channel it is very flat. It is Pilots water.  
When you be by Portland then S. Andrew's land thus, when you sail along by it.  
Portland.   view of Portland  

II. To sail into the Havens of the I'll of Wight.  
FRom Portland to the westend of the I'll of Wight it is 11 leagues e. n. e. but to Wolfertshorne it is 13 leagues east and by north and west and by south.  

To sail into the westend of the I'll of Wight.  To sail into the westend of the I'll of Wight, you must sail right upon the Needle of the I'll of Wight, running in close along by the Needle, within a cables length thereof, because of the sands which lie of from the Cingle, before the westend of the I'll of Wight, whereby the channel or haven is not all to wide, and when you are within the Needle, you must turn over to the castle which standeth upon the Cingle, because there lie some rocks upon the Island under the water, it is between the Needle and the bank five fathom deep, with low water.  

Marks of the haven of the Needle.  The marks to sail right into the Haven of the Needle are these, when you hold the inner point of the Island without the Needle, or the castle which standeth upon the Cingle without the Needle, and so run till you be within the banks, being there within, you must put of somewhat to the Cingle, and when you are within the Cingle, then leave two third-parts of the water on the left hand, and so sail before the village of Newton, and there anchor at 9 or 10 fathom. But if you will sail further to Calveroot, you must sail so long until Southampton cometh without the point, there is the best Road, and the best lying in all the Havens of the I'll of Wight, at 10 or 12 fathom.  

To sail into the east-end of the I'll of Wight.  To sail into the east-end of the I'll of Wight, than you must set the easterly castle over the Lime-kil (which is a white place in the land, lying beneath the castle) which you hold standing so, until the Swan-cliffe cometh within or under the point of the I'll of Wight, than you must bring the Lime-kill over against the east-end of Porchmouth, which you must hold in that sort, until the castle that standeth west from Porchmouth cometh upon the wood. These marks standing thus, you shall sail neither by flats nor sands, and you come sometimes about S. Helen's church, and when the castle of the I'll of Wight cometh without the Swan-cliffe, and S. Ellens church two ships length within the redde-point, than you sail not by the sand.  
And if it fall out that you cannot see the Lime-kill, 
Marks not to sail by the Sand.  than you must hold the castle west from the Swan-cliffe, until S. Ellens church cometh a ships length without the point of the Island, than you may freely go northwest without sailing by the sand, than you must set the foursquare steeple between the east-end of Porchmouth and the castle, but when the castle on the westside of Porchmouth cometh upon the eastside of the wood, than you sail neither by flats nor sands, as I said before.  
When the easterly white place is a ships length westward from the wood, which standeth west from the castle, 
Other marks.  than you are east from the sand.  
And when the Swan-cliffe is within the point, than also you are within the cliff.  
The marks of the Flat are these, there standeth a foursquare steeple in the land, 
Marks of the Flat.  and a castle upon the water eastward from Porchmouth, against the castle there standeth a white place called the Lime-kill, as I said before, when that is east from the said castle, so that you may see just between them, than you are upon the Flat, which at low water is 10 foot deep, and then the castle west from Porchmouth, standeth on the westside of the wood.  
But when the foursquare steeple on the westside cometh to the foot of the castle, than the castle west from Porchmouth, standeth on the westside of the wood, and there at low water it is 12 foot deep upon the Fat. And when the foursquare steeple, standeth between the east-end of Porchmouth and the castle right between the lime-kill and the steeple, and the castle west from Porchmouth at the westend of the wood, there it is 11 fathom deep at high water.  
And when the lime-kill standeth against the tower of Porchmouth, and the castle on the westend of the wood, than you have 10 fathom deep at high water.  
When S. Ellens church lieth south-west & by west from you then the southeast-ende of the Flat lieth North-east & by north from you, and the westend north & by east.  
Thus the Island of Wight showeth when you sail along by it, being three or four leagues of from it.   view of the Isle of Wight  

III. To sail from the I'll of Wight to Bevesier.  
FRom Wight to the east-end of Wembridge at twelve fathom the course is eastnortheast 6 or 7 leagues, 
Wembridge.  and from Wembridge to Bevesier east and by north, and somewhat easterlyer 13 leagues.  
You may sound Wembridge at 12 fathom, cross over in the land there standeth a steeple against Wembridge, when that is northnorthwest from you, than you are against Wembridge: and when Swan-cliffe is w. & by n. and w. n. w. from you, them you are without Wembridge: if you be acquainted with the place, you may sail through between the land & Wembride.  
Between Wembridge and Porchmouth there runneth in a great Haven, whereon there lieth a town called Chychester, which by some is placed upon the River of New-haven, which is otherwise.  

Arundel.  From Wembridge to Arundel, it is eastnortheast 5 leagues. This is a deep Tydehaven, where at half flood a great ship may well go in, you go along by the westland, North-east, and in the mouth of the haven you have 2 fathom, between both the lands 3, and within the haven 4 and 5 fathom at low water, where you anchor before the village.  
In this Haven the Englishmen build many ships, because within the River there is much timber.  
Eight leagues east from Arundel lieth the River of Newerhaven, 
Newerhaven.  where there runneth in two channels, the one west, the other east: that on the westside goeth in close by the westland, and is two fathom deep at low water.  
The east-chanel goeth in along by the Cingle, & is three fathom deep. In the same men lie at road west from Bevesier, for it is a good haven, wide & broad, & is 4 or 5 fathom deep within at low water. But on the eastside, within in the same haven there lieth a blind rock, which you must shun. At this haven of Newerhaven begin the Seven-cliffes, which reach to Bevesier. Under Bevesier against the westend of the Seven-cliffes you may anchor right against the Cingle, whereby you run along into Newerhaven, at 7, 8, or 9 fathom, you may also anchor on the eastside of Bevesier at 6, 7 or 8 fathom, than the point shall be south, and south and by west from you.  
Bevesier is the best known land in the whole channel along, & you may see the land without Bevesier, against the Seven-cliffes or Kenning-land at 23 or 30 fathom.  
Thus the land of Bevesier showeth with the Seven-cliffes   view of England  

FOUR To sail from Bevesier to Dover, and then to the Foreland.  
FRom Bevesier to the point of the Cingle it is eastnortheast 8 leagues.  

To sail into the Chamber.  He that will sail into the Chamber coming out of the west, he must keep Bevesier without the point of Fierley, and run so on upon the Cingle, & then along by the Cingle within two cables length, to the end of the Cingle, than you must turn up westward, leaving the beakons on the right hand, till you be before the castle which standeth upon the South-Cingle, there you may anchor in the River of Rye, at four & five fathom, when you sail up, you must leave the beakons on starboard, (as is said before) for the beakons stand upon the darisen, and at low water they are dry, along to the town of Rye, and it is all beakoned along.  
On the eastside of the Cingle, you may also anchor in Rumney-baye, 
Rumney-baye.  before Rumney tower, running in so far that the point of the Cingle, be south, and south and by west from you, there it is seven and eight fathom deep, there you may anchor.  
From the Cingle aforesaid to the northpoint of Dover it is North-east and by east 9 leagues.  
Before Dover you may anchor safe against a north, 
Road under Dover.  and a northwest wind, right against the castle is the best anckoring at 10 fathom, for there it is fair ground.  
To sail into the Downs, sail easily in by the point of Dover, all along by the land, within two cables length, 
To sail into the Downs.  and set beneath the middle castle, at seven or eight fathom.  

To sail through between Goodwin and the land.  When you come out of the west and will go in between Goodwinsands to the Foreland, you must go n. and by e. so long until that the mill which standeth upon the Foreland, come on the westside of the valley, which is in the Foreland, going all along north and by east, and northnortheast, until the tower which is upon the Foreland cometh upon the east-end of the valley, than you are north from the Quernes, than the flat steeple which standeth upon the land of Dover will be upon or right over the third white chalck hill which lieth north from the point of Dover, this is a right long mark to sail through between the Quernes & Goodwinsands, as well from the east as from the west.  

To sail north within Goodwin sands.  If you will go north within Goodwin sands, you must go no nearer to the Quernes then seven fathom, placing the point of Dover southsouthwest from you, and there you go in at the best depth, the● when the flat steeple which standeth upon the Foreland cometh within Ramsgate or the valley, than you are against the Quernes, 
Marks of the Qu●rnes.  and when the mill cometh within Ramsgate than you are south from the Quernes.  
When you lie in the Downs, & that the inner point of Dover cliff is southsouthwest from you, than the Quernes lie north and by east from you, and the northend of Goodwinsands lieth North-east from you.  
Thus the land of Dover openeth when you are we●t from Woman or Vrowen-sand through the Heads.   view of Dover 
When you will sail without Goodwin sands to the Foreland, then hold the point which lieth west from Dover, 
To sail without Goodwin sands to the Foreland.  without the point of the downs, and go in north-east, till the Foreland be northwest and by west from you, than you may well go to the Foreland and anchor before Margat, or where you will, but right against the steeple which hath the mill by it, is the best road: or when the point of the Foreland is southsouthwest, and south-west and by south from you, there also is good anckoring at 8 or 9 fathom.  
You may also go between the Quernes and the Foreland, 
To go within the Quernes to Sandwich.  to Sandwich, but there lieth an other Sand, called the Three-stales, between it and the Quernes, it is 3 fathom deep, and between the land and the said sand it is also 3 fathom deep at half flood, but the Quernes are in short time much lessened, & clean gone, so that the north end is almost gone.  
Between Margat and the Reculvers you may anchor in all places at 6 or 7 fathom at half flood.  
Thus Fierley showeth when you sail along by it four leagues from the land.   view of England 
When you go from the Downs to the Foreland, than the land showeth thus.   view of England  

V Of the running and falling of the streams in these places.  
FRom Portland to the I'll of Wight the flood falleth east & by north, and the ebb west and by south.  
From the I'll of Wight to Bevesier likewise east and by north, and west and by south.  
By Bevesier on the land before the Seven-cliffes, the flood falleth east and by south, and the ebb west and by north.  
From Bevesier to the Single it falleth eastnortheast, and westsouthwest.  
From the Singles to Dover the flood falleth North-east & by east, and south-west and by west.  
In the middle through the Heads the flood falleth North-east and by east, and the ebb south-west and by south.  
From Dover to the Foreland the stream falleth within Goodwinsands through over the Quernes south and north, & by the Foreland in to the Reculvers, over the Brakes the flood falleth westsouthwest, and west and by south.  
About without Goodwin to Kintesknock, the flood falleth north and by west and northnorthwest, there the flood cometh both from north and south, and meet each other, and fall so in to the sands, and the havens or channels.  
In the channel without the Flemish Banks, it is 23 and 24 fathom deep, but close by Goodwin sands it is 28 and 29 fathom deep, and then you are not two pieces shot from them, therefore he that saileth out of the Marsdeepe to the Heads, he must not go otherwise then south-west, and south-west and by south, & he must also stay much upon the stream, for in this place it is very fit & necessary to be done, and when you guess that you have sailed 40 or 45 leagues, then choose the Flemish Banks at 20 and 18 fathom, and when you are sure of the ground, then go south-west, and at last south-west & by west, than you shall come into the middle of the Heads.   

VI What Moon in these places maketh high water.  
AGainst the I'll of Wight before Wolvertshorn a south & by east moon maketh a full Sea.  
At Hampton at the Kaye a south and a north moon.  
Within the Needles of the I'll of Wight a southeast & by south moon.  
At S. Ellens and Calveroort a southsoutheast moon.  
At Bevesier on the land a south and north moon.  
Without in the channel a s. s. w. moon.  
In the channel of Winchelsey a south and by east moon.  
Against the Cingle a southsouthwest moon.  
Between Dover and the Cingle the like.  
At Dover a south and north moon maketh a full Sea.  
In the middle between the Heads a south-west moon maketh full Sea.  
In the Downs a southsouthwest moon.  
On the Foreland a south and north moon.   

VII. What depths are about these places.  
IN the channel between Portland and the Casquettes it is 40 fathom deep, and when it is clear wether, than you may see the land on both sides, & the nearer you are to England the shallower.  
Without or against the I'll of Wight it is 38 fathom deep, and you may see the land.  
Without Bevesier against the Seven-cliffes or Kenningsland it is 28 and 30 fathom deep.  
Between Winchelsey & Picardy in the middle of the channel it is 26 and 27 fathom deep, and you may see Fierley and the land of Dover.  
Vrouwen or Woman-sand lieth in the middle of the Heads, & at low water it is but sixteen or seventeen foot deep, but it is narrow, and runneth about south to the land of Bullen. This Sand lieth south and by east from Dover, and from Caliscliffe west and by south. On both sides of this Bank, both on Picardy and on the English side it is 22, 23, and 24 fathom deep.   

VIII. How these places aforesaid lie distant one from the other.  

FRom Portland to the westend of the Needles of the I'll of Wight e. and by n. and e. n. e. 11 leagues.  
Fron S. Andrew's land to the Needles of the I'll of Wight east about 4 leagues.  
From the Needles of the I'll of Wight to Wolfertshorne east & by south 4 leagues.  
From the I'll of Wight to Wolfertshorne, & up to Wembridge at 12 fathom eastnortheast 5 leagues.  
From Wembridge to Bevesier east and by north 13 leagues.  
From Bevesier to Fierley eastnortheast 5 leagues.  
From Fierley to the Cingle eastnortheast 3 leagues.  
From the Cingle to Dover n. e. and by e. 9 leagues.  
From the point of Dover or the Downs to the Foreland north 7 leagues.  
From Portland to Wolfertshorne e. and by n. 13 leagues.  
From Wolfertshorne to Bevesier e. & by n. 19 or 20 leagues.  
From Bevesier to the Cingles e. n. e. 8 leagues.    

IX. How these parts lie distant from other Lands.  

FRom Portland to Heysant south-west 53 leagues.  
From Portland to S. Paul de Lyon s. w. & by s. 40 leagues.  
From Portland to the Casquettes s. & by e. 13 leagues.  
From Portland to Seynhooft or Stonehead southeast and by east 37 or 38 leagues.  
From the I'll of Wight to Casquettes south-west and by south 20 leagues.  
From the east-end of the I'll of Wight to Struysaert southeast and somewhat southerlyer 29 leagues.  
From the I'll of Wight to Deep or Diepen east-south-east 37 leagues.  
from Bevesier to Casquettes south-west & by west 37 leagues.  
From Bevesier to Struysaert south and north 24 leagues.  
Fr●m Bevesier to Diepen southeast 21 leagues.  
From Bevesier to swartness 20 leagues.  
From Dover to Deep south 23 leagues.  
From Dover to the Wielings eastnortheast 24 leagues.  
From Dover to the Maze or Gorce n. e. and by n. 35 leagues.  
From the Foreland to Texel North-east 45 leagues.    

X. Under what degrees these countries lie.  

POrtland lieth under 50 degrees 30 minute●.  
The I'll of Wight or Wolvertsshorn lieth under 50 deg-36 minutes.  
Bevesier lieth under 50 degrees 48 minutes.  
The point of Dover lieth under 51 degrees 10 minutes.  
The point of the Foreland lieth under 51 degr. 28 or 30 min.     
The end of the first Book.   

A table of the first Book, containing the Arguments of every Chapter.  

CHapter I. Describeth the Vliestreame and Tessel-streame: Item the Vlie and Tessel. pag. 3.  
Chap. II. Describeth the Coasts of Holland, Zealand & Flanders, from Tessel to the Pass of Calis. pag. 12.  
Chap. III. Describeth the Sea-coasts of France, between the Pass of Calis & the Kasquettes. pag. 28.  
Chap. FOUR Describeth the Sea-coasts of Bretaigne, and of all the islands situate between Cape de Hague and the Seims. pag. 33.  
Chap. V Teacheth how you may sail the Sea-coasts of Britain & Poictou, from the Seims to the Island of S. Marten. pag 43.  
Chap. VI Describeth the Sea-coasts and islands of France & Biscaya, between the Island Heys and Cape de Massichaca. pag. 49.  
Chap. VII. Describeth the Sea-coasts of Biscaya, between Cape de Massichaca and Cape de Pinas. pag. 56.  
Chap. VIII. Describeth the Sea-coasts of Gallisia from Cape de Pinas to Cape de Finisterre. pag. 60.  
Chap. IX Describeth the situation of the Coasts of Gallicia and Portugal, from Cape de Finisterre to the Barrels. pag. 65.  
Chap. X. Describeth the Coasts of the Sea of Portugal & Algarve, from the Barrels to Cape de S. Vincent. pag. 72.  
Chap. XI. Declareth the situation of the Sea-coasts of Algarve and Andalusia, between Cape S. Vincent and the Straight of Gibraltar. pag. 75.  
Chap. XII. Describeth the Sea-coasts of Barbary, from the Straight of Gibraltar to Cape de Geer. pag. 80.  
Chap. XIII. Describeth the Canary and Flemish islands. pag. 84.  
Chap. XIIII. Describeth the Sea-coasts of the West, South, and eastside of Ireland. pag. 91.  
Chap. XV. Describeth the situation of the Sea-coasts & Havens of Wales, and of the Channel of Bristol. pag. 96.  
Chap. XVI. Describeth the Coasts of England from the Sorrels to Portland. pag. 100  
Chap. XVII. Describeth the Havens & Sea-coasts between Portland and the Foreland. pag. 109.   
The end of the Table.   

THE SECOND BOOK OF THE LIGHT OF NAVIGATION WHEREIN ARE DESCRIBED ALL THE COASTS Havens and islands of the North and East Seas:  
As, of Friesland, jutland, Denmark, Pomerland, Prusia, Leefland, Sweathland, Norway, Lapland and Muscovia.  
AS ALSO all the North and East Coasts of Scotland and England.  
AT AMSTERDAM PRINTED BY WILLIAM JOHNSON, DWELLING upon the Water, by the Old Bridge, at the Sign of the Golden Son-dyall. Anno 1612.   

Hear followeth the Card N. 20.   


CHAPTER I. THE DESCRIPTION OF the islands and Channels lying between Vlieland and the Elve.  

I. Of the islands of Vlieland and the Schellingh:  
THe Island of the Vlieland is three leagues long, and is well to be known, on the east end there lie high white banks or downs; but on the west it is flat or low land. On the west end there standeth a church with a mill east from it. From the west end thereof there shooteth out a Sand a good way in to the Sea. 
West Vlieland deep.  West from this rock, between Vlieland and Eyerland there runneth in a channel called the Wester got, or West-Vlieland-deepe, but it is not for great ships, but only for fishermen, for therein there is not above 8 or 10 foot water. At the east end there standeth a mill with a cape, which are marks to shun the grounds that lie before the Vlie. The east end of the Vlieland, and the west end of the Tessel are distant from each other 8 leagues.  
East from Vlieland lieth the Schellingh; which is about three leagues long, 
The Schellingh.  upon it there stand four churches & one chapel: the westerlyest is a high flat steeple called Brandaris; which is well known by all Seafaring men. About the middle of the land there stand two steeples, the westerlyest is a statte steeple, called Zeerip, the easterlyest is sharp and is called Midland, and east from it there standeth a high speere steeple called the Horn, and a chapel called S. john's. On the east end there lie high downs, but not upon the west end, but one only called the Lit, between Midlands and the Lit it is low flat land. On the west end there standeth three capes or beakons, the westerlyest is for Bomekins got, the easterlyest for the north got or chain, but the middlemost is for the Slencke, which runneth from the New ligger through Peter's sand into the Sea.  
Thus the Island of the Vlieland showeth being about two leagues cross from it.   view of Vlieland 
Thus the Schellingh showeth when you sail along by it about two leagues from the land.   view of Terschelling  

II. To sail into the channels of the Vlie and first of Stortemelck.  
HOw you must sail up and down the Vlie stream, and how you shall sail out of all the channels of the Vlie stream, it is at large declared in the first Chapter of the first Book. But how a man shall reach the said channels without, and sail into them I will here at large truly declare.  
To sail into Stortemelck (that is the Landdeepe of Vlieland) set the cape and the mill upon the eastende one against the other, and sail up upon it, and so you shall find the uttermost ton lying at five fathom, the cape and the mill shall then stand eastsoutheast, and southeast and by east from you. This uttermost ton lieth nearest to the north side, yet you may well go somewhat north about it, for the north side is reasonable flat, so that coming out of the north, you may sound it at five or six fathom, till you be within the uttermost ton. The second ton, 
The Droghe dry.  called the ton upon the Droghe dry, lieth east, and east and by south from the uttermost, at four fathom on the north side, the right depth there against it is also four fathom, with low water. When you sail in you leave that on the baghborde.  
Between this ton and the uttermost ton, it is not deeper upon the Droghe dry or drumpel then 16 foot with low water. From the second ton to the third the course is east and by north, that lieth on the northside at five fathom, but the right depth there against it, is seven fathom, you may sail in all along by the strand of Flieland to this ton without misdoing, for it is all fair. From the third ton to the fourth or innermost the course is east and by north, that lieth at 3 fathom on the southside, that is, at the point of the Sand, which cometh off from the northpoint of the Vlieland. From the third ton to this ton you must leave the footstrand of Vlieland, because of the said Sand, and run north about by the ton. It is there in the channel 4 fathom deep at low water. From thence forward to the ton upon the Flat the course is southsoutheast, or sail forward by the footstrand of the Vlieland to Langesand, for that is all very fair, there in the channel it is five six and seven fathom deep.   

III. The situation of Boemkens haven.  
Be naminghe der plaetsen die op de Elve met letteren aenghewesen werden 

a De Schortonne  
b De Rostonne  
c De tun op de Meem  
d De Grutpot  
e De witte ton op de nieuwe gronden  
f De noord Elve    
Open de Weser en jaa 

a De ton op t host  
b De tun oped coers  
c De Mellum ton  
d De ton op Bollenzÿl  
e De baecken● op Bollenzÿl  
f De eerste ton op t Vlack  
g t Vlack  
h Cappelmans zandt  
i De Iaa ton  
k De Steenbalgh  
l De backens vaned Wadt  
m Aenten host jeppe plaet    
In dese twee colommen weeden veaclaert, de plaetsen, die op de weser, Jaa end voyde de Eemsen met letteren aenghewosen werden.  
De Eemsen 

a Geltsacx plaet  
b De Mieuwe steert  
c De wolden  
d Borckummer balgh  
e De Ransel  
f Steven janszoons ton  
g De Hondt  
h De Paep  
i jannens sandt oft Reydersant  
k Nesterlandt  
l Brouwers plaet  
m Memer zandt  
n T' baeken op de Hoghe horn  
oh De ton op Conincx plaet  
p De ton op Hamburgher zandt  
q Memer Balgh    
Nieuwe beschrÿvinghe van all de Eylanden end Gaten der Zee, die gheleghen zÿn langs de custen van Vrieslandt Groeningerlandt Embderlandt etc. van Vlielandt of tot de Elve toe, nu nieulÿcx na harc Jeaenwoordighe gheleghentheyt perfectelÿck beschrev●● 〈◊〉 Willem lansz. ●●. 1697  
Van de Scholbalgh, de Lauwers, en de Schille 

a Tnoordwester got vande Scholbalgh  
b Thooghe zandt  
c Tnoordooster got  
d De Paerdemarckt  
e De Knockebalgh  
f Sÿmons zant  
g Bosch sandt  
h De zanden die van Rottum na den Bosch toe strecken    
Aenwysingh der namen, van het Vlie, Amelander got. de Scholbalch, Lauwers en de Schille.  
Vant Vlie ena● Amelander got 

a. De Boomkes gronden  
b. Pieters zandt  
c. Den Bos  
d. De ton op den Bos  
e. De ton op Feyhoeck  
f. De nieuwe leggher  
g. De oude leggher  
h. jelmers plaet  
i. De ton op Hobbezandt  
k. De ton op Speckhoeck  
l. De ton op de Plaet  
m. De nieuwe jetting  
n. Coggedieys gronden  
o. Camper zandt  
p. De Plaet  
q. De ton op Gerritshonden  
r. De wit ton op de Plaet  
s. Coggedieps gronden    
Description de toutes les Isles et Ports de mer gisant au long des costes de Frise, de Groeningerlandt Emderlandt etc. de Vlielande jusques a la Riviere l' Albe, novellement et parfaictement descript selon leur uraye situation, per Guillaume jansz.   map of Friesland 

The New jettingh.  East from the ton at Speckhook goeth the New jettingh in, as I said before, you may sail into it, and come right north from the ton of Langesand again into the Vlie, therein lie three tons. When you come in, and will sail in the New jettingh, than you must leave the black ton at Speckhook on starboard, & go on s. s. e. to the first ton, there in the channel it is 8 fathom deep. From the first to the second ton it is south, from the second to the third s. & by w. & there against it, it is deep 3 or 4 fathom at low water. These tons lie all on the westside which is very steep, but Hobbesand or the westside is flat, which you may sound with the lead, to the high beacon, which standeth upon the point of the jettingh. From the third ton to Langesand, the course is s. w. then when you come against the ton at Langesand, there upon the drumple lie two small tons, which you sail through between, and then you are right north from the ton at Langesand. In the Vliestreame, there upon the said drumple it is 14 or 15 foot deep at low water.  
But to sail into the jettingh, when you come about the high beacon, there lieth a white ton at 3 fathom and an half on the southside upon a point of sand, which without you may sail under, leave it on starboard: from thence you must go southeast forward to the second ton, there in the channel it is 8, 9 and 10 fathom, the northside is all shoring so that you can not sound it, upon it there stand some beakons, but the southside is fair and flat, there you may sound it all along at 3 & 4 fathom, the second ton is a black ton, and lieth upon the northside upon a Sand, which in going up you may sail under. From the second ton to the third, the course is s. s. e. and s. e. & by s. when you are passed it there is good Road on the south side, that is on Langesands side, at 3 or 4 fathom, than the town of Harling will lie e. s. e. from you.   

FOUR The situation of the North channel.  
THe North channel was within few years become the best channel in the Fly, but it is so much altered, that now at this present it can hardly be used by great ships, but only by small and flat bottomed ships. To sail into the North channel, set the northerlyest or easterlyest cape upon the Schelling right upon Brandaris, than they will stand about s. s. w. from you, sail upon them almost to the Schellingh strand, there you shall find the ton at 3 fathom, right without the easterlyest point of Petersand, leave that to Seaward from you, and sail w. s. w. to the second ton, which lieth at the east end of the Bos at 14 foot low water, and there against it is no deeper in the channel, for thereabouts it is dryest, for when you are passed it it is deeper again, and you must leave that ton on baghborde. From the second ton to the new ligger, 
New ligger.  (that is the third ton, as you count them coming in) the course is w. s. w. that ton lieth at 2 fathom and an half, on the south side, and there against it in the channel it is 3 fathom & an half deep. When you are by this new ligger, than the middlemost cape and Brandaris stand one against the other, and are s. s. e. from you. From thence, or right n. n. w. there runneth a channel through Peter's sand into the Sea, in it there is 3 fathom, 
The Slenck or Gutter.  and without in the drumple 12 foot water. When you have the said cape and Brandaris one against another, keep them standing so, and so you go right out of that gutter: also when you will come in out of the Sea, and have the said cape & Brandaris one over against an other, and sail upon them, than you shall go by the new ligger into the north channel, this is a fair gutter for small ships, the west side is shoring, but the east side is flat, which you may altogether sound with your lead.  

Old Ligger.  From the New ligger to the Old ligger the course is westsouthwest, and south-west & by west, it lieth also on the southside at three fathom, but the channel there is north four fathom deep low water, the north side is all through shoring, but the south side is outward somewhat flatter, but inward it is also shoring. From the Old legger to the ton at Feihook the course is south-west and by west, yet that reach it is all four fathom deep, you must go close southward from the white ton at Feihook., 
Feyhook.  for there it is very narrow, and the Bos is all shoring, so that you can not sound it. Now when you are passed the white ton, than you come into Bomekins channel, & you find deeper water, that is, five, six and seven fathom. From thence you must sail south-west forward, to the ton at the Bos, and further as is said in the description of Bomekins channel.   

V The situation of the Landdeepe of the Schellingh.  
THe Land depth goeth in by the foot strand of the Schellingh, it is a fair channel for small ships. To sail into it go along by the uttermost ton of the north channel by the foot strand, and so run in by it, you cannot there do amiss, ulesse you sail bluntly upon the land, now when you come almost against the northerlyest cape, or about the length of the second ton of the Northern channel, there it is dryest, and there at low water it is no more but ten foot deep, being over it, it is three, four and five fathom deep, sail forward by the strand, to the northerlyest point of the Schellingh, there against it it is six fathom deep. Now when you have the length of the northwest point of the Schellingh, then go south-west to the ton at the Bos, but take heed to your streams, that you be not carried by the flood upon jelmers' Flat, which lieth between the Schellingh, and the ton at Hobbesand. Now when you sail south-west from the northwest point of the Schellingh, than you run over the point of jelmers' Flat, along at four fathom, and you come between the ton at the Bos and the ton at Hobbesand into Bomekins channel, 
jelmer Flat.  and then go southsoutheast to Speckhook, and so forth inward as you are taught before.   

VI Of the Island of Ameland, and how you must sail into Amelands' channel.  
ABout two leagues eastward from the Schellingh lieth Ameland, reaching eastnortheast and westnorthwest four leagues. Upon the westende of Ameland there standeth a cape, and also a great flat steeple called the Holmes, 
Hoelum.  the roof of this church is broken off, but the hindermost part of the roof with the gall is yet on, and standeth upon the side walls. There was wont also a church to stand in the same Island called Midland church, but that is broken down, but on the east side of Holme church there standeth a mill, with a house west from the mill, also there standeth a broad tower. There about where Midland church was wont to stand, there lie three or four downs, which are low, flat and somewhat long. On the east end it is knollie black land, mixed with some white among it. But quite upon the east end, there lieth a fair high round white down, which is very well to be known. From the west end of Ameland there reacheth a Sand almost three leagues into the Sea, which is called Borneriffe. 
Bor●riffe.  And west from that riff Ameland channel goeth in. This Borneriffe and the north points of Tessel lie distant from each other North-east & south-west 12 leagues.  
Thus Ameland showeth, being about two leagues and an half from it, when you are ove● against it.   view of Ameland 
IF you will sail into the Channel of Ameland, coming out of the Sea, than set the cape which standeth upon the east end of the Schellingh, right against the steeple of Horn, and sail upon it, and so you shall find the uttermost ton, which lieth at the end of Borneriffe, at five fathom low water. Or if you come out of the west, then run upon the strand of the Schellingh, at low water at five, or five fathom and an half, and so go along by the strand, and you shall sail right upon the uttermost ton. Now when you come to the uttermost ton, than the cape and the steeple of Holme upon Ameland are also one against the other, and stand then east and somewhat southerlyer from you, but Horn church and the cape upon the Schellingh shall then stand southsouthwest from you.  
From the uttermost ton to the second ton the course is east, and a little southerlyer, or hold the church of Holme upon Ameland standing right against the cape, & sail upon it from the first ton, than you shall not miss the second ton, which lieth at seven fathom. When you have the length of the second ton, than you are passed the Coggie deeps grounds. When you sound along by the Schellingh at four fathom, than you shall not sail under the Coggie deeps grounds. Between the first and the second ton it is five or six fathom deep in the channel.  
From the second to the third ton the course is east, and east and by north, 
Gerrits Honden or Dogs.  that is the ton at Gerrits honden, which lieth at three fathom and an half low water. You leave all these tons on baghborde when you sail in, for Borneriffe on the inner side is all shoring, and specially Gerritshonden. Now when you sail from the second ton to the ton upon Gerritshonden, 
Camper-sand.  than Camper Sand is on your starboard, and lieth clean dry, you may sail as close by it as you will. Between the second and the third ton it is nine and eight fathom deep in the channel. When you sail against Camper Sand, you must put over from it to the ton at Gerritshonden, about eastnortheast, to run above the Plate, which lieth south from Gerritshonden, 
The Plate.  for there between them both it is not wide. Between Gerrits Honden & the said Plate it is three fathom deep at low water. The Plate at the north end is flatish, so that there you may sound it with your lead.  
When you sail into or out of this channel, keep good account of the streams, and specially take heed of an ebb, for it falls strongly cross over this channel, northnorthwest, over Borneriffe along into the Sea.  
When you are above the Plate, there lieth a white ton at three fathom, 
The white ton.  or sixteen foot water, which you must leave on starboard, and run there east about it. This white ton lieth distant from the ton upon Gerrits Honden southeast, past the ton presently you find deeper water, as eight, nine, ten, and twelve fathom, then go forth southeast & by east, so long, until the steeple of Holme cometh over the south point of Ameland, where the Scutes lie, than you may go into the bought, where on the south side it is very flat, & there you may anchor at five or six fathom, but on the north side it is altogether shoring. This reach from the white ton till you be in the boucht is 9, 10, and 12 fathom deep, and on both sides is altogether shoring.  
If you will go further into the Horsen, then go on from the bought eastnortheast, along by the south side, at 5 or 6 fathom, 
To sail to the Horsen forward.  so long till that Heynoms' chamber (that is a red tiled house) be a handspake length north from Holmer church, there anchor at 5 or 6 fathom, there is good anchor ground, and there you lie safe from all winds, there also goeth a little stream. The north side is all shoring, & the channel there is 12 fathom deep.  
Borneriffe without also is all shoring. 
The situation of Bornriffe.  When you come out of the Sea, you must go no nearer to it then 12 fathom, for than you shall not be far off from it. The whole Coast of Holland and Freesland a man may not go nearer unto in dark wether nor by night then 14, 15, and 16 fathom, 
Warning.  because of the grounds and Sands. When you come out of the east along by Ameland, you cannot sail under Borneriffe, but if you run along by it at seven fathom, than you shall not go a cast of a bullet outward from it.  
A southeast & northwest moon maketh a high water without, in the channel of Ameland, and also upon the land.   

VII. The situation of Schiermonickooghe, and how you shall sail into Scholbalgh.  
THe Island Schiermonickooghe lieth from the east end of Ameland distant east, & somewhat northerlyer three leagues, it is a low smooth Island, about two leagues long, there stand no special marks upon it, but on the west end there stand two capes, with a white down, otherwise they are all low blackish downs or hillocks, but higher then upon the east end, mixed with white. The east end is a long flat strand, with low rugged downs.  
Between Ameland and Schiermonickooghe the Scholbalgh goeth in. Men were wont to go in along by Schiermonickooghe, but that channel is closed up within, and wholly spoiled.  
Thus Schiermonickooghe showeth, when it is about two leagues cross from you.   view of Schiermonnikoog 
To sail into Scholbalgh, set the capes upon the westende of Scheermonickooghe one right against the other, 
To sail into the Scholba●gh.  than they shall stand about e. s. e. from you, sail upon them, than you shall find the first ton, which lieth in the Sea, at 7 fathom low water. From the uttermost ton to the second ton it is s. e. it lieth at 4 fathom on the south side, as you sail in you must leave it on starboard, and go with a flood at the least e. n. e. to the third ton, which l●eth upon the point of the sand at 3 fathom, but between this ton and the second the channel is dryest, that is two fathom and an half at low water, and that right without the third ton, the south side is fair and flat, and you may sound it, but the north side is all shoring, you must also look well to your streams, for the flood falleth strongly southward cross the lands, and the ebb contrary. When you are passed the third ton, the course to the beacon upon the high Sand is south, there it is deep 7, 8 and 9 fathom. From the beacon upon the High sand sail forth s. s. e. s. e. and east, all along by the beakons, along till you be before Oostmerhorne, and there anchor, on the south side it is all steep and deep, and very white, but the north side is somewhat flat.  

North-east channel.  West from the Horsmarket there goeth another channel in, where at low water you shall have but 8 foot deep, first it reacheth w. s. w. and sometimes somewhat southerlyer, but keep along by the Horsmarket, 
The Horsmarket.  specially with a south wind, so you shall go to the third ton, at the northwest channel, (which lieth upon the point of the channel) and so into the deep, leave that ton on starboard, and go forward southward to the beacon upon the high sand, and there forth, as you are taught before.   

VIII. Of the Island the Bosch, and how you must sail into the Lauwers.  
FOur leagues east from Schiermonickooghe lieth the Island of Rottum, between them both lieth an Island called the Bosch, which not many years since was wholly overwhelmed, and washed away with a storm, and is now again (by means that men have begun to plant heath upon it) grown up again, so that now there lie two or three fair towns upon it. Between this Island of the Bosch and the Ooghe the Lauwers go in.  
The the Island the Bosch showeth thus with two hillocks.   view of Bosch 
To sail into the Lauwers run in east, close along by Schiermonickooghe. 
Marks of the Lauwers.  There stand two towers in Groningherland, whereof the smallest or the shortest is the loper, or the innermost, and is called lians or Leens: the longest or that which standeth nearest to the water is called Hoorhouses: set the steeple of lians a bow length west from Hoorhouses, than it will stand upon the foot strand of Schiermonickooghe, keep them standing so, and run upon the strand of the Ooghe, for there you cannot miscarry, before in the channel it is wide and broad, and at low water no deeper than two fathom and an half, but when you are over the drumple, than it is 4, 5, and 7 fathom deep, and reacheth in s. e. & by s. keep upon the Ooghe side, but beware you sail not under the Knockbalgh, 
Knockbalgh. Symons sand.  which reacheth through between the foot strand of the Oogh, and Symons sand, yet keeping upon three, or two fathom and an half you need fear nothing, for every year it lesseneth much, and is almost clean spoiled, but it is best along by the High sand, on the east side, there also you can get no hurt. Now when you are against Symons sand, there both the sides of the land are shoring, so that you cannot well sound them with the lead, turn then somewhat southward up about Symons sand, and anchor there at 7 or 8 fathom, there it is good lying. You must look well to your stream, for there it falleth strongly both out & in.   

IX. To sail into the Schille.  
EAst from the Bosch goeth in the Schille. If you will sail into the Schille then place the two aforesaid steeples of Leens and Hoorhouses one right against the other, and so run upon the Boscher sand, until you get drought of the sand, 
Boscher sand.  you may sound in all along west from Boscher sand, and also east along to Rottum sand. About a year, or a year and an half since, the channel was almost 5 fathom deep, but now before in the channel at low water, no more than two fathom & an half, but being over the drumple or threshold it is 10 or 12 fathom deep, first it reacheth in s. e. till you come to the dry sand, that is the sand of the Bosch, go in thereby e. s. e. to that Island of the Bosch, there you must sail in close by the land, for there it is very narrow between the Bosch and the Sands, which come shooting off from Rottum, & the Bosch is very shoring. If you will anchor there, 
Road under Bosch.  then turn about right behind the point of the Bosch, there it is good lying at 6 or 7 fathom: but if you will go somewhat better in, then turn off from the Bosch, when you are full past it, and choose the north side, for that is fair and flat, and that you may sound, but on the north side there lie many sands, which you may sail under. sail forward along by the north side till you be behind Rottum, and there anchor at 8 or 9 fathom, 
Road behind Rottum.  you lie there safe against all winds. Wh●n you will sail into or out of this channel, look well to your stream, for it falleth strongly into and out of this channel.  
To know the situation of the steeples in Groninghe land, you must understand, 
To know Leens and Hoorehouse.  that when the steeple of Leens (which is the shortest) is a spar length west from Hoorhouse, then there cometh a high house just as much eastward from Hoorehouse as Leens is west from it, so that then Hoorehouse steeple standeth just in the middle between them, th●n you are right open before the Lauwers as I said before. When those steeples aforesaid are one upon the other, than they stand s. s. e. and somewhat southerlyer from you, than you are right against Boscher sand. But when Leens church leaveth that house and Hoorehouse steeple, than you come against the Sands which shoot off from Rottum to the Bosch. A southeast and northwest moon maketh a full Sea in these channels or havens.   

X. The situation of Rottum and Borcum, and how you shall sail into the West Eems.  

Rottum.  THe Island of Rottum is a small Island, almost a league and an half long, and is very easily known: the west end is high and steep, & the rest is low down land. Upon the east end there stand two capes or beacons: the greatest or the loper standeth upon the east end of the flat strand, and the smallest standeth upon the south side of the downs, there stand also two houses upon it, the one upon the west end, the other in the middle of the land in a low ground.  
Borcum is also an Island well to be known, it is three leagues long, 
Borcum.  commonly when men come out of the Sea it showeth in three parts, as if it were three islands, but when you come out of the west, than it showeth in four parts, for the water runneth through it in three places, when it is a high flood. The town of Embden hath placed a high thick tower upon the west end thereof, which you may see far into the Sea, & west from the tower there standeth a low church. From the west end of Borcum there shooteth off a Sand, 
Borcum sand.  a great way into the Sea, which is called Borcum sand. There southward, between Borcum and Rottum the west Eems runneth in, the best channel in all these coasts along.  
Thus the islands of Rottum & Borcum show when you sail along by them about two leagues from the land.  
Borcum.   view of Rottum and Borkum 
Rottum.   view of Rottum 
If you will sail into West Eems, then place the capes or beacons upon Rottum one against the other, 
The uttermost ton.  than they will stand about s. e. from you, sail out of the Sea upon them, than you shall find the uttermost ton, lying at 6 fathom low water. But if you come out of the w●st along by the land at 7 fathom than you shall also see the aforesaid ton, when you are at the first ton, than Borcum steeple will stand e. from you, and the west end of Rottum will be about s. e. & by s. from you. To landward from the second ton there lieth a Flat called Geltsack flat, which reacheth with her foot along to the fourth ton; 
Geltsac● Plate.  where upon at low water is no more than 15 16 or 17 foot.  
From the first ton to the second, third & fourth the course is e. The second ton lieth at 5 fathom, the third at 4 fathom & an half, that is upon the driest part of West Eems. The fourth ton lieth also at 4 fathom and an half, upon the point of the said Flat. All these tons you leave on starboard when you sail in. When you come out of the west, and are against the Lauwers or the Bosch sand, keep along by the land at 5 fathom until you be passed it, then sail on freely east, than you shall run through within Geltsack flat, at 3 fathom and an half, and so come by the fift ton, into the deep of West Eems, but keep the south side. 
Harling banks.  Harling banks which were wont to reach out to seaward, at the westende of Rottum are clean gone & worn away, so that now it is wide & broad betwe●ne Rottum & the said flat.  
The Sand of Borcum is without and at the end very flat, when the capes or beakons upon Rottum stand southeast from you, than you may go well over the sand, right to the fourth ton, you shall there find no less than sixteen foot water upon the foot of the Sand, at low water, for it is flat & broad, but when you come within the Sand of Borcum, on the inner side it is shoring, and then there shooteth off a point or foot of Sand, which in sailing up you may sail under, you may go no nearer to it then 7 fathom all along to Borcum.  
The fift ton lieth distant from the fourth s. e. and by s. & lieth in the middle of the channel at eight fathom. But with an ebb and a southerly wind you go s. e. on, or else you would soon fall upon Borcum Sand, or behind the point of Sand which cometh shooting off from Borcum Sand.  
From the fift ton to the sixth, seventh and eight the course is all east and by south. The sixth ton, as also the seventh, lie in the middle of the channel, at 8 fathom: but the eight lieth at 5 fathom, 
Huyberts' Flat.  upon the point of Huyberts' Flat, which by others is called the Hacks, which is a Sand which shooteth off from the southside, you cannot miscarry with your lead on Rottum or on the south side, but you may sail under this sand of Huyberts' Flat at 5 fathom low water, but at 6 fathom you must go without about it. When you are by this ton upon Huyberts' Flat, then Borcum steeple standeth about n. n. e. from you, and there against it, it is 12 fathom deep in the channel.  

Stephen johnsons ton.  From the ton at Huyberts' plate to Stephen johnsons ton the course is southeast. That lieth between the Balgh beacon and the Ruyt beacon, at seven fathom and an half. Between these two tons the Eems is 10 or 12 fathom deep. But when you go by the ton at Huyberts' Plate than you must turn somewhat off from Borcum to shun the Mieuwe sand, which cometh shooting off from the Wolden, or the south end of Borcum, which when you will go in, you may sail under at five fathom.  
Westward from Stephen johnsons ton, standeth Wadt beacon, 
Wadt beacon.  where right south Wadt goeth in. But on the other side right over against the aforesaid ton, lieth the Ransel: which is a sand that cometh shooting off from the north side, which in sailing up, you may sail under at 5 fathom. The marks of this reach, 
The Ransel.  and to shun the Ransel are these: upon the south end of Borcum there lie two downs, which are called the Wolden, 
The Wolden.  hold the steeple of Borcum on the west side of these downs, or west from them, than you sail not by the Ransel. In this reach it is 9 and 8 fathom deep.  
From Stephen johnsons ton to Dock ton the course is s. e. Between these two tons there standeth a beacon on the south side, called the Ruyt beacon, 
Dock ton.  
Ruyt beacon.  by this ton the Eems is in the channel about 7 fathom deep, and the ton lieth on the south side at 5 fathom, upon a sand which in sailing up, you may sail under. The flood falleth very strongly behind this ton into Dock channel, which you must be very careful of. 
Dock channel.  The marks of Dock ton are these: when the closter of Dam, which is a flat church, cometh west from Old closter, so that you may see just between them, than you have the length of this ton, and then these marks are about south from you. From Dock ton to the last ton it is e. s. e. when you are passed it then you shall see the beacons on the west side, sail all about by them. The reach from Eems horn to Delfes' Isle reacheth all southerly, up to Wadem. The marks of Eemshorne are these, there standeth a mill in Embden land, 
Marks of Eemshorn  about east and by north from you, and there standeth a high house north from the church, when that mill standeth between the house and the church, than you have the length of Eemshorne, and there stand three or four beakons about Eemshorne, which lead you to Groaning land. When you come to Dock ton and are passed it, than you may sound all the west side to Oterdam, at 5, 6, and 7 fathom, but go no nearer unto it, for it is very steep and shoring, but there you may sail under the east side at 6 fathom, when you come within Eemshorne sailing up, for there lieth a Flat on the east side called the Hound, 
The Hound. The Pap●  which is a hard sand, and somewhat more inward there lieth an other Flat, called the Pape, also a hard sand, and are fast one to the other. But here the west side is all soft & clay ground to Oterdam. You must keep along by the west side, and follow the beacons which stand along. This reach stretcheth first s. s. w. and s. and by w. and about in a boucht or hollow place s. s. e. and by Groaning land southeast.  
To shun Reyders or jannens sand, which is a Flat which lieth in the middle of the Eems, between Oterdam & Reyde, 
Reyders and jannens sand.  (upon it at low water there is no more than ten foot deep) then take heed of Oterdam, which hath a flat church without a steeple, and standeth upon the bank of Groaning land, when you come thither then you must strike over to Embden land to the Knock, which is now a broken steeple, standing in the water upon the point, when you have the Knock then run within two ropes length by the north side, along to Loegherhorne, 
The Knock.  and so you shall not sail by this flat. There standeth a flat steeple between Knock and Loegherhorn, 
Marks of Reyder sand.  called Gerrits Swart, when you may see through this steeple, or when this steeple and the church come one upon the other, than you are against this Flat.  
When you sail up the West Eems, than you must leave all the tons on starboard.  
A southeast and northwest moon maketh a high water with out the Eems. In the Balgh a southsoutheast and northnorthwest moon. But before the town of Embden a south and south and by west, and a north and north and by east moon.   

XI. The situation of the Island juyst, and how you must sail into the East Eems.  
THe Island juyst lieth about a league and an half e. n. e. from Borcum. It is a low Island, but the west land is a high steep point, and grayish land: the east end also is higher than the middle. The church standeth in the middle of the land, the steeple is somewhat sharp, and standeth at the east end of the church. You cannot see the church but when it is against a low piece of ground, or a valley. Between Borcum and juyst the East Eems goeth in. 
juyst sand.  From the west end of juyst there reacheth a Sand, at least two leagues west into the Sea, you may sound it without at 3 or 4 fathom, and south from it you go into the East Eems.  
Thus the Island juyst showeth about two leagues cross from you.   view of Juist 

To sail into the East Eems  If you will sail into the East Eems, than set the church upon Borcum south from you, and so if it be clear wether, than you shall see through the steeple, sail upon it & you shall find the uttermost ton, which lieth at four, or four fathom and an half low water.  
From the uttermost ton to the second ton the course is east and by south. The end of juyst sand, between the two sands, on the inner side is very shoring and steep, so that you cannot sound it, but somewhat more inward from the second ton it is flatter, so that there you may easily sound it.  
The second ton lieth at three fathom low water, at the point of a long small bank or point, which cometh shooting off from the east end of Borcum, which is called Brewers flat, 
Brewer's flat.  which you may sail under, this Sand on the north side is all shoring. Between the first and the second ton it is four fathom deep at low water, but against the second ton it is deeper again, at 8 or 9 fathom. From the second ton the East Eems reacheth in east and by south, and eastsoutheast, and sometimes somewhat southerlyer, but from the second ton with a flood you must go east, and east and by north, that you may not be lead into the fore side of Brewer's flat. juyst sand is inward from the second ton flat, so that you may sound it at 5 or 6 fathom, but come no nearer unto it, and so you shall not sail under Memers sand, which is a sand, 
Memers sand.  which within juyst shooteth off from the footstrand of Memers sand.  
As soon as you have deeper water again, then go first eastsoutheast, than southeast, to the beacon upon the high Horn, 
Beacon upon the high Horn.  which standeth on starboard upon the dry sand, turn southward or westward up behind the beacon, there is the road and there you may anchor at 5, 6 or 7 fathom, as you think good, it is there good lying for a south wind. The East Eemes there against it is wide and broad. The east end of Borcum is flat, you must use your lead, when you go there out or in with a ship that draweth much water.  
About southeast, and south & by east from the beacon aforesaid lieth the ton upon Conincx flat, 
〈…〉 King● 〈◊〉.  upon a sand that shooteth of from the south side, this ton and the said beacon you must leave on starboard, and there between them both on the south side there is good anckoring. At Norden in East uriesland there are two flat steeples, whereof the one is great and flat, the other long and slender, which stand one close by the other, when these steeples come a ships length east from the easterlyest side of the Bantam, (which is a small Island upon the Wadt) than you have the ton upon Conincx flat, that is a good long mark, and when juyst steeple is n. n. e. from you, it is a good cross mark of the said ton.  
From the ton at Conincx flat to the ton at Hamburgh sand, the course is s. e. and s. e. & by e. it lieth at three fathom, 
Ton at Hamburger plate.  but this is Pilots water for great ships. You may there go through a Kill or small gutterie channel into the West Eems, and come out against the southerlyest ton in the West Eems. To sail through this Kill, leave the ton upon Hamburger sand on baghborde, and sail along by the beacons, leaving them on starboard. It is at both ends of this Kill three fathom deep, and in the middle 5, 6, & 7 fathom, it reacheth through about s. s. w. into the West Eems.  

Memer balgh.  Memer balgh lieth about half a league within juyst, between the beacon upon the high Horn, and the ton at Conincx flat, that is on the east side of the East Eems, and reacheth most north in. It is a good road for small ships that will go west about, or without about. Also within the balgh which runneth in by the high Horn, there is a good road for small ships which will go east about, and reacheth in south.  

juyst sand.  When you come out of the east, than you may sound juyst-sand, for without it is flat, as I said before, but without in the point of the said Sand there is a shear or Dodebalgh like two points, where between them it is 3 fathom & an half deep.  
A southsoutheast and northnorthwest moon maketh a high water in the East Eems.   

XII. Of the islands & Channels which lie between the East & West Eems.  

Buys.  EAstward from juyst lieth the Island Buys, which is a short small Island, and upon all that Coast there is no Island so little as it is, it showeth like two hillocks, the easterlyest is the highest and sharpest.  
Between juyst & Buys goeth in the Buys channel, the town of Embden was wont to put tons in it, but now it is no more done, because it altereth so much.  

Norderny.  Above a league and an half east from juyst lieth Norderny, but between them both lieth the Island of Buys. This Island of Norderny is known by a broad flat tower, which standeth upon the west end, but sometimes you see but little thereof. About the middle of the land, nearest to the east end, there lieth a high white down, whereby you know it, otherwise it is all uneven ground, full of hillocks. Between Norderny and Buys the Norther deep or the Norderny runneth in.  
Thus the islands Norderny and Buys show being about two leagues cross from you.  
Norderny. Buys.   view of Norderney 
A league east from Norderny lieth the Island Baltrum, which is about two leagues long, 
Baltrum.  and a little shorter than Norderny. There standeth nothing upon this Island whereby a man may know it, but on the east end there is a high down, which on the top is sharp, and the west end is low downs. When the aforesaid high down is s. e. & by e. from you, than it is round about to be seen, & at the westende there goeth a gulf through Between Baltrum & Norderny the Wichtery runneth in, 
Wichtery.  which is a channel whereof there is nothing to be written, for it altereth many times. Anno 1606 it was 2 fathom & an half deep, but Anno 1607 there was no channel to be found of 4 or 5 foot water.  
Thus Baltrum showeth when it is about 2 leagues cross from you.   view of Baltrum 
The Island of Langheroogh lieth a league east from Baltrum, 
Langheroogh.  it is four leagues long, without it there is a fair strand, it hath three or four downs whereby you may know it, which lie from about the middle of the land to the west end, they lie a good way one from the other, and on the top are even & flat. Between Langheroogh & Baltrum goeth in the Acumy, 
Acumy.  within it there lie two tons, but it is no channel for great ships, it reacheth out by Langherooghe, first n. e. and after somewhat easterly, along by the foot strand of Langherooghe, but there is no hold to be taken of it, it altereth so often.  
Thus the Island of Langherooghe showeth being about two leagues from you.   view of Langeoog 
Between Langherooghe & Wrangheroogh lieth the Island of Spickerooghe, which is about a league long. 
Spikeroogh.  On the east end there was wont to lie a small Island, which was well to be known called Little Spickeroogh, but that is all washed and eaten away. On Spickerooghe there standeth nothing to know it by, but it is downy and hilly, and black land, like the other islands. Between Spickerooghe & Langherooghe the Oxebalgh goeth in. 
Oxebalgh.   
Thus Spikeroogh showeth itself, when it is about two leagues from you.   view of Spiekeroog 
Wrangheroogh lieth three leagues east from Langheroogh, 
Wrangeroogh.  it is about a great league long, it is a low white Island, but at the east end there lie high broad white downs, & at the west end the Earl of Oldenburgh hath caused a great thick tower with two speeres to be set, when they stand one against the other, than you are by the uttermost ton of the Weser, you may see this tower with two speers in the Sea. Between Wrangheroogh and Spikeroogh the Harrel goeth in, 
The Harrel.  about southsoutheast, it is also marked with two tons by the town of Embden, but it is not to be trusted, for it altereth many times, and serveth not also for great ships.  
Thus the Island of Wrangeroogh showeth when it is about two leagues cross from you.   view of Wangerooge 
To conclude the land from Bornriffe to Wrangheroogh reacheth e. n. e. and w. s. w. 29 leagues, or as some say 31 leagues. But the channels which lie there between the East Eems, and Wrangheroogh are no channels for great ships, nor we cannot write any thing of them, which may be trusted unto, for many times in short space they altar both in stretching & depth.   

XIII. How men shall sail up to the jaa and West Weser.  
IF you will sail into the jaa or West Weser with a south wind, then run upon the strand of Wrangheroogh at 4 fathom: but if the wind be westerly, then go at 5 fathom, & so go along in by the strand of Wrangheroogh at 4 or 5 fathom, until you be a good way within, or at the end of the foot strand of Wrangeroogh, there you shall find the first ton, which lieth at low water at 5 fathom, than Menser church shall shand south from you. Against this first ton is the red sand very shoring, which you leave on baghborde, but the ton on starboard. When you go in also against this first ton there cometh a Sand shooting off from the south side, which is the innermost point of Steenbalgh, which you sail under at 3 & an half or 4 fathom, and the first ton is laid upon this point of Sand. 
Steenbalgh.  This Steenbalgh goeth in east by Wrangheroogh, the south side of this Balgh is shoring, & the north side is flat, so that you may sound it. In this Balgh it is 10 foot deep at low water. From the first ton to the second, and so forth to the third, it is east. 
The jaa ton.  The second ton lieth at two fathom and an half, & the third at 3 fathom, that is the jaa ton, which lieth upon the entry of the High way. 
The High way.  It is very uneven between the first and the third ton, you have twice a depth of 5 or 6 fathom, and then again two, and two fathom and an half.  
If you will sail from the jaa up to Weser, 
Mellem ton.  then sail by the third ton over the entry of the High way, n. n. e. to Mellem ton, but you shall find no more water there at low water, upon the aforesaid drumple or entry, or by the third ton, than 10 or 9 foot, & when you are over it you shall get deeper water again, and then you are in the Weser: but look well to your streams, for the ebb falleth very stiff n. n. w. out of the jaa, 
Falling of streams.  & to the contrary the flood falleth very hard inward, so that you cannot get over the stream with still wether, therefore you must look well thereunto.  
But if you will sail up the jaa, then leave the third ton on baghborde, and from thence go up for the most part south, 
Hormmerscheel.  to the point of the bank of land called Hormmerscheel, and when you come to it, than the jaa is wide and broad, and without the said bank there standeth a beacon or two, for ships that will go before the Wadt. If you will go further up the jaa, then keep all the west side, but when you come against the church without a steeple, which standeth by the bank, there you must leave the west side, because of the Aenten or jeppe flat, 
Aenten or I●ppe flat.  which shooteth off far along by the west side, & sometimes at low water lieth dry. The west side reacheth most s. e. & somewhat southerlyer.  
A south & north moon maketh a high water at the jaa, and there it floweth daily two fathom and an half up and down.   

XIIII. To sail up the Weser.  
TO sail up the Weser, go no nearer to Wrangheroogh then seven fathom, and when you have 7 fathom, then turn off to 11 fathom, there you shall find the first ton without in the Weser, 
Red sand.  lying at the point of the red sand at 7 fathom, than Menser church is s. s. e. from you, which is a flat church without a steeple, standing in Vroukens land. Now when you are against the first ton, and that the west end of Wrangheroogh is s. s. w. from you, than you run yet upon the point of the red sand at five fathom.  
From the uttermost ton to the second, third, fourth & fift ton the course is right east, and they lie all at seven fathom, the south side (that is the Red sand) nearest, each a point differing from Menser church, so that Menser church lieth from the second ton southeast, from the third south, from the fourth south and by west, from the fift southsouthwest. This fift ton is called the ton upon the Head, 
Ton at the Head.  and because you should know it before all the other tons, there standeth a pole upon it of half a fathom long, with a white knot upon it. Right against the ton at the Head now there lieth a white ton, which Anno 1608 was there first laid upon the white ground. Between these tons you must mark your streams well, for the flood cometh out of the northwest, & falleth along over the red sand, and the ebb the contrary. The right depth against these tons aforesaid at the coming in is 11 fathom deep, but against the ton upon the Head it is five fathom at low water.  
Right before the Weser lieth the Middle plate, 
The Middle plate.  the easterlyest end, or the innermost side beginneth right north from the ton at the Head, by the white ground, and stretcheth along the reach, to the third ton, accounting from without, this plate is on both sides flat to be sounded, and there lieth a white ton on the west side of the said plate, about south and north from Menser church, which when you come in you must leave on baghborde. If you will go east from the plate out again, from this ton upon the Head to sail to the Elve, then sound about by the white ton at 4 or 5 fathom, till you be in the Sea.  

To sail by east of the Middle plate out the Weser.  To sail up out of the Weser, the course from the ton upon the Head to the sixth ton is s. e. and n. w. then Menser church shall lie from you s. w. & by s. and there against it, the Weser is about 20 fathom deep. But from the sixth ton to the seventh, that is, the ton upon the Cours, 
The ton at the Cours.  or the Wapper-tonne the course is southeast, this ton is also called the south-west ton, because Menser church as then lieth s. w. from you. The jaa ton lieth about south and south and by west from this ton. From the ton upon the Cours to Mellem ton the course also is southeast. You may sail under Mellem ton 
The Mellem ton.  at six fathom. Menser church shall then lie from you s. w. & by west. From Mellem ton to the ton upon Bollensile 
Bollensil.  the course is s. e. and somewhat easterlyer. There you must look well to your streams, for the flood falleth strongly in to the west side. Langheworder church lieth right south and by east from this ton at Bollensile: over against the ton at Bollenzil, upon the point of the black ground lieth a white ton, come no nearer unto it at half flood then four fathom and an half: for if you sail inward, you may sail under the point at four fathom. From the ton at Bollenzil to the beacon at Bollenzil the course is s. s. e. and s. e. & by s. and then Longworder church shall stand about south from you. You leave the beacon on starboard, when you come in, and within the beacon at Bollensil there is a good road for a west wind. From the beacon upon Bollensil to the first ton upon the Flat 
The Flat.  the course is southeast, till you are a little beneath the beacon, but than it is eastsoutheast. The marks of the first ton upon the Flat are these, when you may see through the holes of Langheworder steeple, than you are against the first ton, and then Longworder church is as southerly as s. s. w. from you. From the first ton upon the Flat to the second the course is e. s. e. Between these two tons there stand five beacons, on baghborde as you come in, upon the black ground. From the second ton upon the Flat to the Mailand the course is southeast & by south, but when you are against Wadnis, or the Maieland, then sail along close by the green side to Blixem, 
A road within Blixem.  there is a road for great ships that will put to Sea.  
As at the jaa so at the Weser a south and north moon maketh a high water, and it floweth there two fathom & an half up and down.   

XV. The situation of the East and West Till or Breebalgh, and how you shall sail into it.  
EAst from the Weser lie the south grounds 
South grounds.  of the Elve, there go in two fair and deep balgen or channels, of 10, 12, and 13 fathom, they are called the Till or Breebalghen, 
Brebalghen.  the westerlyest lieth about so far west, that a man may see the new work from thence.  
If it should chance that coming east from the Weser, you should fall upon the south grounds, then sail upon the south grounds at 4 or 5 fathom, but not much nearer, for that is somewhat shoring, and when you go in that manner along by those grounds, in the same course you shall find 8, 9, yea and 10 or 12 fathom water soft ground, then for certain you have that of the Breebalgh or the west Till, 
West Breebalgh or West Till.  keep then the land on which side you will, and go so about by the grounds, at 4 or 5 fathom by the lead, and you shall find fair and good road under the sands, so that you shall there lie safe from all winds. This West Till first reacheth in e. s. e. along by the north side it is deepest, and on the south side when you sail out you sail not under any Sands, but as you go in. Now when you are somewhat within, than it reacheth up southerly, and there are several channels, where you may sail through, for such as are driven to do it.  

East Til.  The East Till haven lieth between the West Till and the Hondbalgh, which runneth in at seven fathom, the east point (or the old Schorhorne) which is a sand which reacheth far out, you may sail under at 7 fathom, when you will go to the Elve. This Till also (as the other) reacheth eastsoutheast in, when you come first in, but a little further in somewhat easterlyer. You may here take which side of the land that you will, for when you come in you shall there find shelter among the sands for all winds, and in this channel it is not less than seven fathom water.  
But the Hondbalgh 
Hondbalgh.  lieth right west from the Sh●ortonne or Schorhorne. If you will go in with small ships, to go over the Wadt and sail into the Weser, then when you have the Schortonne go in s. s. e. the Hondbalgh is indifferent wide, but hold that course until you come against the beakons, which you must leave on starboard, when you will go up you may sound the Schorhorne from without clean within, but not the west side, for there lie flats, which you may sail under from without, at 9 fathom, but upon the Schorhorne you cannot miscarry.   

XVI. Of the Island of Holy land.  
THe Island of Holy land, and the uttermost ton on the Weser lie from each other south, and somewhat westerlyer, and north and somewhat easterlyer, when it is fair and clear wether, than you may see Holy land, when you lie in the Weser, by the ton at the Head. But Holy land and Bornriffe lie distant s. w. & by w. and n. e. & by e. according to the common opinion 32 leagues. When you come out of the west and begin to see Holy land, it is a high radish steep point which is flat upon the top. If you will anchor under Holy land when you come out of the west, then run upon that land at 10 or 12 fathom. As you sail so to the south point and go somewhat near to the land, you shall see a rock like a small steeple stand close by the high land, which is called the Monk, 
The Monk.  which is almost as high as the high land. About s. s. e. and the third or fourth part of a league from this rock there lieth a stone or rock under the water, 
A rock under water.  but if you keep at 8 or 9 fathom, than you run about without this Stone, and cannot hurt yourself upon it: when the Monk is covered by the other land, than you are against that stone, but when the said Monk cometh a handspake length past, or without the other land, there is good road, and there you may anchor at 10 or 11 fathom, there it is fair ground, & all over clean, if it were not for wracks of ships that have been cast away, or lost anckors, whereof there are many there, when you be there at 9, 10 or 11 fathom than you lie safe against a westsouthwest, northwest, & north winds. From the point whereby the Monk standeth there shooteth a small Sand from the land, which you may sound at 3 fathom. You may also go from the land at 5 fathom, & sail safely from the rock aforesaid, that is, through between the rock and the sand, but if you go deeper, at seven fathom, than you shall sail upon the rock. But at 8 or 9 fathom than you go without the stone.  
From the north side of Holy land there reacheth also a bad sand almost a league into the Sea, 
Holy land sand.  so that you may go no nearer to the north along then at 9 or 10 fathom, and when you will go north about Holy land, coming so far that the east end of Holy land is south, and south and by east from you, then sail boldly to Scholvers point, which is a flat point, and that you may sound at 5, 6 and 7 fathom. For if there you will put off at 8 fathom, than you must run 3 leagues off from the land, and the right channel which is between the Hever and the Holy land, is not above 9 or 10 fathom deep. Now when you come about the point into the road, and that Scholvers point is North-east, and the Cliff south-west from you, there it is good anckoring at five fathom.  
Scholvers point 
Scholvers point.  is the point where the south haven lieth within, & reacheth from the high land about east into the Sea, and from the uttermost end of Scholvers point, there reacheth a bank of three fathom, to the point where the Monk standeth, there within it is very good lying for ships that draw not much water, and it is the south haven of Holy land.  
A southsouthwest and northnortheast moon maketh there high water.  
When Holy land is e. n. e. five leagues from you it showeth thus.   view of Heligoland 
When Holy land is north and by east from you it showeth thus.   view of Heligoland  

XVII. How you shall sail up the Elve.  
Holy land and the Schortonne (that is the uttermost ton of the Elve) lie distant southeast and by east, and northwest and by north.  
When you come out of the west, & are past Holy land with a northerly wind, than you may run to the north ground without fear at 10 or 12 fathom, for between Holy land and the s●uth ground, or between the north ground and the south ground it is 20 fathom deep, along to the Elve, but the nearer that you go to the Elve, the shallower water you find. When you are within Holy land, & find shallow water of the North grounds, you may sound it all along to the Elve at 8 fathom, for it is flat: but the South grounds are very shoring, you may go no nearer unto them by night then 10 or 12 fathom, for if you go nearer unto them, than you may sail under the West Till or Breebalgh, at 10 or 12 fathom.  
To sail up the Elve, you must understand, that the North Elve which was wont to go in north by the New grounds, is now so much altered, that you can hardly find two fathom water in it: but to the contrary the South Elve, southward from the New grounds, is broken through with a fair depth, so that Anno 1606 was tonned by them of the town of Hamburgh, as hereafter is showed, which was delivered unto me in writing, by Simon Derrickson of Vlieland, who with great diligence hath sounded and found out the same.  
When you come from Holy land, or out of the west, and see the New work, then bring the beacon and the New work one against the other, and then they will stand southeast and by south from you, keep them standing so, & sail forward upon them, than you shall find the Schor ton, which lieth on the south land, against the Schor horn at 10 fathom half flood, leave it as you sail on starboard, for the south side is all shoring, from the Schor ton to the second ton the course is east and by south, it lieth at 8 fathom low water, and the New work than standeth from you south & by east. From the second ton to the third the course is east & by south, that lieth at 5 fathom, the New work shall then stand from you s. s. w. From the third ton to the fourth the course is still east & by south, it lieth at 4 fathom and an half, than the New work lieth from you s. w. & by s. Right over against this ton there lieth a white ton, which lieth at the foot of the New ground, which as you sail up you must leave on baghborde, but all the black tons lie on the south side, and you must leave them on starboard. From the fourth to the fifth ton, and the sixth and seventh ton, the course is still east & by south. The fifth ton lieth at three fathom and an half, and against it it is the dryest place of the Elve, the New work standeth distant from it s. w. and n. e. The sixth ton lieth at five fathom, and the New work from it south-west and by west. The seventh ton lieth at 7 fathom, and is distant from the New work s. w. & by w. and n. e. & by e. From the seventh to the eight ton the course is s. e. that is the ton in the Ros, it lieth at 8 fathom, when you are against it, than the Ros beacon is against the steeple of Gron or Groen. Right over against the ton in the Ros, on the north side, there lieth a white ton, upon a sand which cometh shooting off from Romarlplate, which in sailing up, you may sail under at 4 or 5 fathom, but when you are past Ros-beacon, than there is a church with two speeres upon a steeple called Oldenbrooke, when the speere steeple of Wordt cometh west from Oldenbrooke, than they are south from you, than you may sound Romerlplate at 6 fathom without danger, otherwise that plate is shoring without, and you may sail under it, as I said before. From Ros ton to the ton at the Meem, the course is s. e. and s. e. & by e. From the ton at the Meem to the Gurtpot, or the first ton upon the flat, the course is e. s. e. From thence to the ton at the host, or Pilgrim's sand it is e. & by s. From Pilgrim's sand to Brunsbuttle, the course is east and east & by north. You may sail under Pilgrim's sand at 5 or 6 fathom. From Brunsbuttle to the ton at Saltshorne, or Vryburgher sand, the course is east and east & by north, all along by the north land. From Saltshorne to the ton which lieth against the Steur it is e. and by s. and e. s. e. From Steur to the ton at Gringeroots sand, the course is s. e. and s. e. & by e. This ton lieth against Bilenburgh, and lieth more than half in the deep. Between this ton & the ton at the Steur lieth another ton in the channel. But from the ton at Gringeroots to the ton at Stadersand s. e. & by s. and s. s. e. This ton you must leave on starboard. From Stadersand to Willemsuliet, or the ton of the Luy, it is s. e. and s. e. & by s. And from the ton at the Luy to the ton at Terloo, the course is e. s. e. From thence to the ton at Hanebal, the course is e. and by w. From Hanebal to the ton at Blanckenes sand, the course is east and east & by north, and you must hold the ton against a great tree, and so you run by the north land, till you be past the ton.  
From Blanckenes sand to the ton in the bocht, the course is e. s. e. And from the ton in the bought to the Eckehout e. & by n. there it is 3 or 4 fathom deep when you are in the right kill or channel, and there lie the great ships to lad and to unlade.  
Thus the New work showeth when you come before the Elve.   view of Neuwerk  

XVIII. Of the running of the streams, and what moon maketh high water in these places.  
BEfore the Vlie a southeast and northwest moon maketh a high water. What moon maketh a high water within the channels of the Vlie and Tessel stream, and how the streams run there, it is at large described in the first Chapter of the first Book. Without the Vlie the streams fall along by the land, till it be half flood or half ebb, and then they begin to fall into Bomekins channel, and to fall out again. The foreflood cometh over Bomekins ground, and so falleth into the Schellingh, out at the north channel, so that the fore flood maketh an ebb in the north channel, and to the contrary the fore-ebbe maketh a flood there. Now when the flood beginneth to fall in, which is sooner in Stortmelck then in Bomekins channel, than it falleth very stiff upon the Schellingh, & behind Grindt into the jettingh, which you must take heed of, but when the flood is about half spent, than it beginneth to fall right in, as in the description also is showed, but at the other channels of Freesland the flood falleth sooner in.  
Without in Ameland channel a southeast & northwest moon maketh a full Sea, and also on the land.  
At the same time it is also high water before the Scholbalgh, the Lauwers and the Schille.  
Before West Eems a southeast & northwest moon also maketh high water.  
In the East Eems and in Borckummerbalgh a s. s. e. and n. n. w. moon maketh high water.  
Before the town of Embden a south or south and by west, and north and north and by east moon maketh high water.  
Before the channels between the East Eems and the Weser, a s. and s. & by e. and a n. and n. & by w. moon maketh high water.  
Under Holy land with a n. n. e. and s. s. w. moon it is a full Sea.  
Before the Weser and before the Elve, a north and south moon. There the flood cometh northwest without, and the ebb southeast, and so fall strongly over the grounds.  
In the channel between the Elve and the Vlie, the fore floods come out of the North Sea, and go about with the Son, and fall but half the tide along by the land, that is eastnortheast, & the ebb westsouthwest.   

XIX. Of the Grounds and Depths about these Countries, and at what depths you may see the land.  
THe Island of the Vlie, the Schellingh, and Texel you may see at 15 or 16 fathom.  
Against the Schellingh you have white Sand, & close by Peter's sand it is 12 or 13 fathom deep. You must take heed of the grounds of the Vlie, as of Bornriffe, for they are very shoring.  
You may see Ameland at 12 fathom, and it is very far flat at 12 and 13 fathom, so that at 15 fathom you can not see it.  
You may see Schiermonickoogh at 12 and 13 fathom, and then it is about four great leagues from you.  
You may see Rottum and Borcum at 14 and 15 fathom. Against Borcum the ground is great red sand, with some black amongst it.  
juyst may be seen at 13 and 14 fathom, and three leagues from the land it is 12 fathom deep.  
Buys and Norderny you may see from the poop at 12 and 13 fathom.  
Baltrum, Langheroogh and Wrangheroogh you may see at 14 and 15 fathom.  
About Holy land it is 7, 8 and 9 fathom deep, that is, on the inner side: but without on the west side it is 15, 16, 18 and 19 fathom, and at such depths you may see the Holy land.  
What notable marks stand upon these islands, whereby you may know them, it is perfectly and at large declared in the description of them.   

XX. How these lands are distant from each other.  

FRom the Vlie to the northnortheast end of the Broad fourteen the course is westnorthwest 8 leagues.  
Petersand and Borneriffe lie distant about North-east and by east, and south-west & by west 4 leagues.  
From Borneriffe to West-Eems e. n. e. about 13 leagues. 

or as some will 15 leagues.    
From Borneriffe to Wrangheroogh about 29 leagues.  
From Borckummer riff to Wrangheroogh e. n. e. 16 leagues.  
From East Eems, or juystriffe to Schortonne n. e. 20 leagues.  
From Wrangeroogh to the New work e. n. e. 8 leagues.  
Holy land and Borneriffe lie distant n. e. & by e. and s. w. & by w. as men commonly say 32 leagues. 

or as some say 34. leagues.    
Holy land & Borkummer riff lie from each other n. e. & s. w.  
Holy land and Langheroogh lie distant northnortheast and southsouthwest.  
Holy land & the uttermost ton in the Weser lie distant from each other, south and somewhat westerly, and north and somewhat easterly. But the ton at the Head in the Weser, and Holy land lie distant south and north 8 leagues.  
Holy land and the Schor ton or the New work lie distant s. e. & by e. and n. w. & by w. 8 leagues.    

XXI. How these Lands are distant from other countries.  

FRom the Vlie to the I'll of Silt in the Coast of jutland North-east 47 fathom.  
From the Vlie to Rincoper or Numer deep northnortheast and somewhat easterlyer 59 leagues.  
From the Vlie to Bovenberghen northnortheast, and somewhat northerlyer about 69 leagues.  
From the Vlie to the Sand at sixteen fathom north and by east 61 or 63 leagues.  
From the Vlie to the Neus' north & by east 85 leagues.  
From the Vlie to Schuytenes north and by west, and somewhat northerlyer 107 leagues.  
From the Vlie to Fairehill n. w. & by n. 144 leagues.  
From the Vlie to Hitland northwest and by north and somewhat northerly 152 leagues.  
From the Vlie to Tinmouth or Newcastle w. n. w. 91 leagues.  
From Borneriffe to the Neus' north, or as some say somewhat easterlyer 83 leagues.  
From the Eems to Bovenberghen north & by east 60 leagues.  
From the Eems to Flamborough Head west & somewhat northerly 85 leagues.  
From Holy land to Bovenberghen n. and by w. 50 leagues.  
From Holy land to Hanglip in Hitland n. w. 147 leagues.  
From Holy land to boeckeness n. w. and by w. 123 leagues.  
From Holy land to Lieth in Schotland west and by north, and somewhat northerlyer 120 leagues.  
From Holy land to Tinmouth or Newcastle west, and somewhat northerly 107 leagues.  
From Holy land to Scarborowe or Flamborough Head west, and somewhat southerly 94 leagues.  
From Holy land to the Holm before jarmouth westsouthwest, and somewhat westerlyer 72 leagues.   
How Holy land lieth distant from the juttish islands, and from all the havens or channels lying on jutland you shall find in the Chapter ensuring.   
Hear followeth the Card N. 21.   


Pascaarte vande westcuste van Juthlant end Holsterlant vertoenende de gelegentheijt van de Reviren de Elve de Eijder en de Hever, Voort all de futsche Eijlanden end all Zeegaten tusschen de Elve end den Reefhorn geleghen met all Sanden Reven end Bank daer outrent alles gestelt of zijne rechte streckinghen end coursen:  
Cart Marine de la cost occidental de Futhlande et Holsterlande, remostrant la situation des vivieres de l'Elbe, Eijder et Hever, en outre toutes les Mes de Juthie et embonchures' de mere, situeez entre l'Elbe et le Reefhorn, Semblablement tous bancs de sable lieux areneux et dangereux entour lesdictes places, le tout exactement pose selon ses uraÿes routes et distances. 

A Westersijd  
B de Reefhorn  
C Dode bergh  
D Doel-sant  
E Schelling kroegh  
F Langhe legh  
G Wisdijc saint  
H Panu knut  
I Grauwe die●  
K Harlsam  
L Reuck en Rust  
M Ameren bor  
N Nubal cylant  
O de Quade  
P Utto  
Q de Koebargh  
R Nieuwe gronden  
r Hecke saint  
S Blau oort  
ss de steert vande hont  
T Vogel saint  
V Schorre horn  
U Nieuwe gronden  
W Ooster end W. tijl  
X Mid plaets  
Y Tun opt host  
Z t'Rroode saint  
Z Steen balgh     map of the coasts of Germany and Denmark   

CHAPTER II. THE DESCRIPTION OF the Sea-coasts of jutland, and the jutish islands, lying between the Elve and Rifhorne.  

I. To sail into the South and North Pip.  
IN the Chapter before it is showed how you shall sail into and out of the Elve. About seven leagues north from the Elve lieth the Eyder, but there right south lies the North Pip, and a league south from the North Pip lieth the South Pip, 
The South Pip.  which lieth right east from the Holy land, and goeth in e. s. e. at 5 or 6 fathom, through the North grounds, and at the north end of Hodemer sand cometh into the flat stream, whereon there standeth a beacon, which you must leave upon the starboard, when you will sail up into this haven.  
The North Pip 
North Pip.  as I said lieth a league northerlyer than the South Pip, and is separated from the Eyder by a Sand, which is called Blaweoort, 
Blawoort.  or the point of the Hound, which runneth off from the beacon upon the Hound, and so far in●o the Sea, almost half way to Holy land. There right south the North Pip goeth in, and reacheth in most part east and east & by south, to the beacon at the Hound.  
Erom the beacon at the Hound to Hudemer sand it reacheth forward most s. e. and s. e. & by e. you may sound it from without clean within along by the south side at 3 and 4 fathom, as far as within the beacon at the Hound, leaving the said beacon on baghborde.  
When you come within Buysen, there it is twice or thrice crooked, and there standeth a beacon upon the north end of Hudemer sand, leave it on starboard, and then go up eastward, till you be about the Sand, which shooteth off from Hudemersand, there you shall find a beacon, which you must sail up unto, and leave it on baghborde, and go s. w. then you shall find another beacon upon the east side of the flat stream, standing upon Roomaerder sand, sail out by the same, leaving it on the left hand, and then you shall come out at the old Elve.   

II. To sail up into the Eyder.  
RIght north from Blauweoort the Eyder goeth in, and lieth distant from Holy land east & by north, and when with that course you fall upon the land, than you shall see a sharp steeple upon Eyder town called Gartinghen, 
Gartinghen.  which is an indifferent long steeple you must bring it on the south side of the downs, which are called the South heads, 
South heads.  and then they stand from you n. e. & by n. or somewhat easterlyer, & with these marks you must sail over Blavoort, so long until you find deep water, as 5 or 6 fathom soft ground, than you shall see a sharp steeple stand in Ditmarse called Weselborne, bring that east or somewhat southerlyer from you, & go in e. & by s. and sometimes somewhat easterlyer, till the Buys be s. e. and by s. from you, and that the beacon at the Hound standeth s. s. w. from you, than Ees will come a ships length north from Tatinghen, which is the southerlyest of the two flat churches standing upon Eyderland, then go up northnortheast, for than you are within the New grounds, than there cometh a Sand on the starboard side shooting off from Ditmarse, which is called Hecke sand, 
Hecke sand.  when you are passed this Hecke sand & the New grounds, than you come against the green land of Coebergh or Cow-hill.  
A little way within Koebergh there cometh a Sand shooting off from Eyder side, which you may sail under, as you go along by the Eyder side, so that you must run into a Dead channel, where you must come backward out again. Behind or in it there lieth a small village of seven or eight houses called Ulckhorne, 
Vlckehorne.  there men lad oxen, and there the oxen come to be bought.  
When you come about Heckesand or against Koebergh or Cowe-hill, than the Eyder reacheth from the aforesaid Sand which cometh shooting off from Eyderstede east & by south. When you are passed that Sand, than the Eyder reacheth eastnortheast, and North-east and by east to Tonninghen. 
Tonninghen.  There also they lad oxen.  
Or to get into the Eyder otherwise, 
To go another way into the Eyder.  when (as I said before) you come from Holy land, then bring Gartinghen before the downs, and run by the south side at 3 fathom, keep the steeple standing so, and sound about by the south side, till you get deeper water, and bring the sharp steeple in Ditmarse aforesaid east or somewhat southerlyer from you, hold that standing so till you be within. But if you will go up the Eyder, then choose the north side when you come in, because of the Pip, for without the Pip and the Eyder is all one channel, and the sand of the Hound whereon the beacon standeth, shooteth there between them both a great way into the Sea, as I said before, and you may sail over the sand into the north Pip, a little westward from the beacon at the Hound, 
Beacon at the Hond.  therefore you must there run over the sand in time, if you will go into the Eyder, otherwise you may sail under the north side inward from without.  
But from the north you cannot well get to the Eyder, because of the points which run off from the grounds. But there look well to your streams, for without the Grounds the streams fall in most part southeast, and northwest out, and a south and north moon maketh a high water there.  
The Eyder is 6 or 7 fathom deep, soft ground. And when you will go out of the Eyder into the Pip, 
To go out of the Eyder into the Pip.  than you must go out so far, until Tatinger church come upon the east end of Ees, there you may go over the Hond sand, you shall not there have less than two fathom and an half at high water.  

The Land channel of the Eyder.  The Land channel, or the Northchanel of Eyder for the most part reacheth in e. & by n. right up upon Koebergh, you must get to that from the north, to sail in north from the New grounds, they lie upon the south side of this channel, and then you come against the Koebergh again into Eyder stream.  
About two leagues north from Koebergh, or from the said Land channel, there lieth another channel or balgh, which you may sail up into, there stand two beacons in it, and it reacheth in most east & by north to the south downs of Ees, than you may go along by the land, till you be behind the Island Utto. You may also in that channel run along by the south downs of Ees, to Koebergh, and so come again into the Land channel of Eyder, but it is very crooked. You may not use this unless you be driven to it, these are bad channels, because they are flat so far out, therefore it is not well to be done, unless a man be forced to search these channels of necessity.  
Thus the land of Eyder showeth  
Ees Gartinghen. North head. Tatinghen. South head.   view of Tating  

III. How to sail up the Hever.  
TO sail from the New work, or from Schor ton to the Hever, you must understand that the course is north and south, distant 11 leagues, but always look well to your streams, for as I said, the fore flood falleth very stiff cross over the grounds into the land, & the ebb contrary, but when you are half way, than you meet with Blawoort sand (whereof I spoke before) at the depth of two or three fathom.  
But to sail from Holy land to the Hever, then go on n. e. and somewhat easterlyer, according as the wind and stream suffer, and run upon the Grounds at 6 or 7 fathom, than you shall find an indifferent high steeple, which on the top is sharp, it is called Pielworme, 
Pielworme.  set this steeple North-east and by north from you, and a mast length south from the southerlyest Cowehouse, which standeth upon the Island of Nubal, 
Nubal.  keep the steeple standing so, and sail up to it, than you shall find the uttermost ton, then go from the first ton to the second ton North-east, and North-east and by east, and coming to it, than Pielworme steeple will stand n. n. e. from you. Fron thence the course inward is n. e. & by e. and when you come a good way in, then you find two beacons standing there on starboard, upon a dry sand called the Quade, 
The Quade a dry sand.  right over against it cometh the North channel into the right Hever. The North channel 
North-balgh.  cometh reaching in from the north, about east and by north from Pielworme, and cometh right upon the I'll of Nubal, whereon the Cowehouse standeth, and you may sail up northward or n. n. e. from the Cow house to the end of the strand, where there standeth a flat church, it is a deep channel. You may also sail from the I'll of Nubal into the right Hever, and then you come against the Quade again into the right deep, as is aforesaid. To sail up into the Hever the course from the first beacon to the third is e. & by n. sail along by the beacons, leaving them on starboard. Between the first and third beacon on the north side it is all full of sands and flats, there you may sail behind them.  
By the third beacon the South channel 
South-balgh.  cometh into the Hever, and cometh running off from the Island Utto, about n. e. & by n. and reacheth from the northend of the I'll of Utto into the Sea, and it is above a league to sail into the Sea.  
From the the third beacon to the two other beacons, the course is North-east and by east, than you come to the Green land, which lieth on starboard, than it is a four squared channel, which is wide and broad, you may there sail in the middle of the water to Hoesem, 
Hoesem.  just to the bridge, or you may anchor where you will.  
Without in the Hever the north side is shoring, therefore keep by the south side, till you are within all the beacons. The channel is two fathom and an half deep at half flood, and it is very far flat water. There lieth also a bank a good way without the Hever, which you must remember when you will sail in. A south and north moon maketh a high water there.   

FOUR To sail into the Small or Narrow Channel.  
THree or four leagues north from the Hever lieth the Small-deepe. 
Small deep.  He that will sail from Holy land to the Small-deepe must go North-east and by north, & run upon the Grounds about west and by north from Pielworme, than the south end of Ameren will be north or there about from you, then seek for the southside, and sound about it, you cannot do amiss on the south side, for it is a rising ground, which lieth far without the land, then sail in north and by east, northnortheast, and North-east and by north, than you shall find a sand or ravelin, which you must leave on baghborde, you may sound about by it, until you come in, you must keep the south side, and sound about by it, going in North-east and by north. On the north side there lie many sands and out-points, but if you let the aforesaid shallow lie on starboard, than you come into a Dead channel, where at the beginning you shall have 7 fathom deep, but it runneth all on a heap to nothing. And when you have sounded so far about the aforesaid shallow, that you come against the south end of Ameren, than you may sail under the north side, for there cometh a shear of the Wadt shooting off from Voren. Then choose the south side till you come against Voren.   

V To sail into the Rood deep or Silter channel.  
TO sail into the Rood deep or Silter channel, coming northward, or out of the Sea, you must run in the sight of the Island of Ameren, and about the middle of the Island of Amerens there lieth a white round hill, a little higher than the other hillocks, in a low plain valley in that Island, place that down or hill North-east from you, 
Marks to reach the channel.  and keep it standing so, and run up upon it, until you be within the sand, which shooteth off from the Foretrap, and is commonly called Amerens borne, 
Ameren Borne.  and you cannot fail thereon, for than you shall have no less than three fathom water upon the point of the Sand, and coming within the said Sand, 11, 12 or 13 fathom water. sail so forward till the north end of Amerens be north & by east from you, when you have these marks standing thus as aforesaid, then run upon the north end of Ameren, till you come within the dry sand, there you may anchor where you will, or sail as far in as you will, and sound along by the sand. The strand of Amerens also is a fair strand, without sands, which you may sail under. But when the said hill lying upon Ameren is e. n. e. from you, and you should sail up to it, than you go to near the said sand of Silt. The hill than is divided into two parts, and then the northerlyest is the smallest.  
But if you will sail into the Rood deep or the Silter channel coming from Holy land, 
To sail into Silter channel coming out of the south.  & see the land, than set the northende of Ameren north and by east from you, till you come between Ameren and Silt sand, and then so in by Ameren strand, till you be about the north point of Ameren, so long till Ameren lieth south, and s. s. w. from you, you may not sail any further into this channel, for than you come against the Island of Vooren. There lie two riffs or bad sands, the one lieth about w. s. w. from Ameren, and is dry above the water, which is a great way f●at, at 3, 4 and 5 fathom, and by the jutters is called the Borne, or Amerens Borne, 
Ameren Borne.  although it is not fast to Ameren, for the Rood channel goeth in there between them both. It is not also fast on the Voortraps or the south end of Silt, although it cometh shooting off from thence, for between them there goeth a fisherman's channel into the Sea of a fathom and an half, where the Fishermen go daily out to fish, specially they of the Island of Vooren. This is the uttermost Sand lying on the channel, such as use much to these places, as to Repen and the places there about, are very fearful of Amerens borne, when they come from the Holy land, and they find this dry sand about w. s. w. from Ameren. The other Sand shooteth off from the south end of Ameren, 

The other Riffe.  
Ameren.   reaching about south and south and by west into the Sea, along by the land. This also by many is called the Borne, or Amerens borne. If you come from Holy land, & will go north about, you need not fear this Sand, for it shooteth out most by the land.  
Thus the Island of Ameren showeth.   view of 'Ameren' (island in Germany)  

VI To sail into the haven of List.  
ABout eight leagues north from Silter channel there lieth a very fair haven called List, which runneth in at the north end of the Island of Silt. To sail into this haven of List coming out of the south, 
Marks to reach the channel.  then run so long about the north at 6 or 7 fathom, until you see a small Island within the land, without the point, whereon you shall then see a house standing, which is called jurtmans' house, when you have that house a masts length without the point of the List, then go in e. & by s. and e. s. e. and keep these marks standing so, until you are within the point of List, then turn up about the point southward, and anchor before the Voochts house, there it is 9 or 10 fathom deep.  
Without in the channel there lieth a Flat or Sand called Haef sand, that you leave on baghborde when you come in, without it is very flat, and you may sound it when you come out of the north. 

Marks to avoid.  
Haef sand.   To shun it when you come north ward, you must turn or put of so far from the land, till the red cliff cometh without the downs, or that you see it full, for than you may well go over Haefsand, with ships that go not very deep. And also when you come out of the haven of List and will go north about, then sail so far out, that you may see the cliff, than you may also go over the said Sand. This Sand reacheth off from the south end of Rem, a good way into the Sea.  
On the south side of the haven of List, there lieth another Sand or Bank, along by the land, not very far without the strand, named Rust or Rusting. 
Rust or Rusting.  To sail into the channel of List coming from the south, you must in time sail upon the land of List, about the red Cliff, because of the Rust, which cometh shooting off from the north end of List, along by the strand, and when you are by the land, and come a good way within the red Cliff, than there cometh a Flat shooting off from the land, which you must shun somewhat, but you may sound it very well, and keep all the foot strand, and you can not fail therein. Rust is a small bank, 
The situation of Rust sand.  which shooteth along by the strand, and beginneth against the innermost point of List, and reacheth till it cometh about the red Cliff. From the inner point of List also shooteth off a Sand which you must also take heed of. Now when you come within the innermost point of List, and are before it, than you may anchor where you think good.  
But if you will go to Lutke Tunderen, 
To sail to Lutke Tunderen.  then leave the Sand, which lieth south from jure sand on starboard, & run through between them both, but if you will go to Hoesem or to Silt, over the Wadt, 
To sail over Wadt to Hoesem.  then leave that Sand on baghborde, and upon Voorn there stand two or three trees, which you must keep against the westerlyest church or steeple, and so you must go to Voorn.  
Between Haefsand or Haes-sand and the Island of Rim, there goeth another channel in, 
The Land deep of List.  of about a fathom and an half water. The I'll of Rim is about 3 leagues long, without it is very flat, so that you can hardly see the land at six or seven fathom.  
About eight or nine leagues without the Island of Silt there lieth a Bank along by the land of eight or nine fathom deep, it is about two leagues long, and near as long as the Island, between this Bank and the Island, it is thirteen fathom deep, but when you are at nine fathom without the Island of Silt, then Holy land lieth about south from you.  
Thus the Island of Silt showeth when you sail along by it.  
List. The red Cliff. Heydom Foretrap.   view of Sylt  

VII. To sail into Knuyts or riper Channel.  
FRom the Haven of List to Knuyts or riper channel the course is north & south, about 7 leagues: but riper deep and Holy land lie distant north and somewhat southerly, and south and somewhat easterly. To sail into Knuyts or riper channel, when you come out of the south, then run by the flat of Rim and Manu, about to the south end of Phanu, called South head or South point, than you shall see two capes or beacons upon a dry sand stand a little southward from South head, bring these beacons a little before each other, that is, the innermost or longest a little, or a hand spoke length north from the shortest or uttermost, than they will stand east, or somewhat northerly from you, let them stand so, and there you shall find the uttermost ton, which lieth at four fathom on the north land, which you must leave on baghborde, & go to the second ton, e. and by s. and when you are by the first ton, than you may see the second, yet they lie a great way one from the other, you must leave the second ton also on baghborde, keep along by the south land till, you be past the beacons, for there shooteth off a Flat from the uttermost beacon to the second ton, which you must shun somewhat. When you are passed the beacons, then lose because of the Sand whereon the beacons stand, and there anchor where you will, for there it is deep and shoring or steep, there you can do no harm. The riper ships which come out lie there staying for a wind. In this channel it is 20 foot water at half flood, but at a high water it is not the best channel, for it is narrow and flat a great way without: and then when you have gotten that, than you may see both the sides of the land raule, when the wind bloweth somewhat hard. But when you come out of the north, than you must run upon the south end of Phanu, until you see the beacons aforesaid, and then do as I showed you before. The Moon being southsouthwest, and northnortheast maketh there a high water.   

VIII. To sail into the Grouwe deep, and Schellingh kroegh.  
ABout n. e. and n. e. & by n. from the north end of Phanu there lieth a little Hill as if it were an Island, called Luysbergh. 
Luysbergh.  A little north from it there lieth a long plain sand hill which is called Langhelech, 
Langhelech.  from thence the land reacheth northwest, from the south to the west side.  
Between the north point of Phanu & Langhelech Grouwe deep 
Grouwe-deepe.  goeth in. To sail into it when you come out of the south run along by the Island, & sound along about the north point, till you get deeper water. The north end of Phanu is flat very far. Now when you get deeper water, than you shall see three or four hillocks about North-east from you, upon the high land, with a flat steeple called Holm or Bruynum, bring this church a cables length north from the hillocks, and then when you have the depth, than those marks are North-east from you, then go in n. e. and keep the south side, till you come within by the dry sand, called Smeur sand, 
Smeursand.  which shooteth off from Phanu, there you may well go along by direction of the eye without failing, and let that be on starboard as you come in. The lands there on both sides are very shoring, both Wisdyke 
Wisdyke.  (which is the Flat which lieth in the channel) and Smeursand also. When you are passed the point of Smeursand, then turn over to Wisdyke, and there anchor, till you have the lowest water, than you may sail to Hartinghen, and go to Wardt or Woordt 
Woordt.  which lieth 8 or 9 leagues within the land, but the River goeth crooked, whereon now & then a house or Gentleman's lodging lieth.  
A southsouthwest and northnortheast moon maketh high water here, and it floweth here with a continual tide about a fathom up and down.  
From Phanu to Schellinghrock it is four leagues. Between them both lieth Suydersid, 
Suydersyd.  which is a River of 8 or 9 foot water. The land between Langhelech and Suydersid is knotty down land, rough and overgrown with heath. If you chance to come to land, or to fall upon Suydersid, and could not get into the channel, then choose the land of Langhelegh, you may run upon it without any danger, but keep at 2 fathom & an half, than you cannot mis-sayle that Kroech, for you may sound all this land from Langhelegh till you be within Schellinghkroech 
Schellingh kroech.  at three fathom and an half: but if you come to three, or three fathom and an half, than you would sail miss the dry sand, and go without the Kroech aforesaid. Schellingh kroech reacheth in northwest for the most part, 
To sail into Schellingh kroegh coming out of the north.  and there you lie safe against all winds, as if you lay in the Ketle at Koninghsberghen.  
But if you come out of the north & will go into this haven, you may well sound about that dry sand at three fathom. And when you come by the innermost point of the dry sand, there shooteth a Sand off, but you may see it well and avoid it: now when you come to the east end of that Sand, than loof up by the Sand into this Kroech, and there anchor at two fathom and a foot water, there it is somewhat wide, you may well go in a pretty way, and laveere in. A southsouthwest and northnortheast moon maketh a full Sea there, but the further you go about northward to jutland, 
NOTA.  there goeth less stream, and it floweth less up and down.  
On the north end of the aforesaid dry sand lieth the Deadhill, which is a short piece of a down, which lieth alone, when you are somewhat off from it, than it saileth under the other land, and then you see it not. But coming from the south and north, than you may always see it lying. From Dead hill to the south end of the dry sand, it is all fair strand, and fair flat ground. If you will anchor under the dry sand when you come out of the north, 
Road under the dry sand.  than you may sound along by it round about, and get good harbour for a northwest wind, and also for westerly winds.  
Right north from the Dead hill lieth the Horn, where the Reef horn shooteth out, whereof I will speak more in the next Chapter.  
Thus the Island of South-sid showeth south from the Dead hill.  
Deadhill. Southside. Langelegh. Luysbergh.   view of the 'Iland of South-Sid' (Denmark)  

IX. Of the falling & running of the streams at these islands and Coasts of jutland, and what Moon maketh high water there.  
IN the Pip, Eyder and Hever a south and north moon maketh high water, the flood cometh there out of the northwest, and the ebb southeast, & runneth so over the North-grounds.  
In the channel of List or Silt a south & north moon maketh high water, and the flood cometh out of the northwest, and falleth little along by the land, but the ebb the contrary.  
In Knuytes Seepe a southsouthwest and a northnortheast moon maketh high water: there also the flood cometh out of the northwest, and falleth more than a great quarter thereof along by the land, and the ebb the contrary.  
In the havens of Suydersid, Grouwe deep, and Schellinghkroegh a s. s. w. and a n. n. e. moon maketh high water. The flood there also cometh out of the northwest, and falleth over the Reef horn to the juts islands, the ebb also to the contrary off from the land to the North Sea.   

X. Of the grounds and depths about these lands, and at what depths you may see them being at Sea.  
IN Ditmarse, the land of Kidingh, and Botjaghers land the grounds lie so far without the land, or the Coasts, that you can not see the Coasts, unless you climb up into the top of the mast.  
The grounds of Hever, and the banks of the Small deep without Strand & Yederstee, they lie about two leagues without the Coasts of the land.  
Between Holy land and Amerens or Strand it is 10 or 11 fathom deep, and at that depth you may see both the lands, if you climb up into the shrouds. You know Strand by the steeple of Pielworme, standing upon the south end of the land, there stand more churches & steeples upon the Island of Strand, but none of them is so well to be known as Pielworme.  
Ameren is a great league long, it is all low downs, overgrown with heath.  
The Island of Silt may be seen at 10 fathom, upon the Island nearest to the north end there lieth a high shoring red cliff going steep down on both sides. On the south side of the cliff there standeth a flat church with a low clockhouse, and eastward standeth another church with a high thick steeple, called Heydom. The north end of the land is called List, but the south end is called the Voortrap.   

XI. How these Lands lie distant from each other.  

FRom the uttermost ton of the Elve to the Eyder north and south 7 or 8 leagues.  
From the Eyder to the Hever the land standeth northnorthwest and southsoutheast 5 leagues.  
From the Hever or the south end of Strand to the south end of Ameren n. n. w. 5 leagues.   
Ameren is a small Island of two leagued long.  
Two great leagues north from Ameren lieth Silt, it is about five leagues long, and reacheth s. and by e. and n. and by w.  
From the north end of Silt called List to the south end of Rim or Rem it is n. e. and s. w. a league long, and the I'll of Rem is three leagues long, and reacheth most south and north.  
From the north end of Rem to the south end of Manu it is n. e. and s. w. a league long, but you can not well see it, because of the grounds and great flats which reach out there from the Sea.  
Manu and Phanu lie about two leagues distant from each other. Manu is about half a league long. The Island of Phanu is about three or four leagues long, and reacheth from Phanuknuyts to Knuyts channel s. s. e. and n. n. w. This Island hath also a fair bottom, but the north end is flat very far to the Grouwe deep.  
Fron Phanu to Deadhill or Dodenbergh it is about 4 leagues. Between them both lie the havens of Grouwe deep & Schellinghkroegh, as it is showed elsewhere.   

XII. How these Countries are distant from other countries.  

FRom Holy land to the Eyder it is east and by north and west and by south 7 leagues.  
From Holy land to the uttermost ton in Hever it is n. e and s. w. 8 leagues.   
You may anchor by the uttermost ton in Hever, and see Holy land plainly.  

From Holy land to Small deep or Ameren northnortheast, & somewhat easterlyer, and southsouthwest and somewhat southerlyer 11 leagues.  
From Holy land to Silt haven or List the course is north and by east distant 19 leagues.  
From Holy land to Knuyts deep or Reper deep north, and north and by east 25 leagues.  
From Holy land to the Horn or Dodenbergh north and south 32 leagues.  
From Knuyts deep or from the Island Phanu to the Vlie south-west and by south 51 leagues.  
From the Island of Silt to the Vlie n. e. and s. w. 47 leagues.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 22.   

CHAPTER III. A TRUE DESCRIPTION of the situation of the Seacoasts and Havens of jutland, from Dodenbergh till you come about Schaghen.  

I. Of the situation of the Horn and of the Reefshorne.  
RIght north from Dodenbergh lieth the point called the Horn, 
Horn.  between Suyder-side and Westerside, which there maketh a Horn of the land: for there southward the land reacheth eastsoutheast and westnorthwest to the Grouwe deep, but there northerly it reacheth north and south to Westerside. Westerside is a village between Blawenbergh and the Horn.  
About this point or Horn there runneth off a long bank, at least 12 leagues about westsouthwest into the Sea, called Reefshorne, 
Reefshorne.  or as some say the devils horn. This bank in some places lieth all dry, specially seven or eight leagues into the Sea, where this bank is no deeper than two and an half or three fathom a foot less, a ship that saileth upon it, may sometimes be seen just from the land, but by the land it is at the deepest, 
Depth upon Reefshorne.  that is four fathom a foot less. He that cometh there with a ship that goeth deep must take heed thereof, for this Bank on the northwest side is so shoring, that a man at one cast of the lead hath 22 fathom, the second cast 15 fathom, and the third cast 3 fathom.  
But it is an assured thing, when you are on the west side, or north from the Reefshorne, than you may sound along by the wall at 6 or 7 fathom, till you come by the said Horn, but than you shall find a dry sand, which runneth off from the land called the Uyl, 
The Owl  which northward is very shoring, you may go no nearer north unto it then seven fathom. Right southward there beginneth Reefshorne to run off from the land, & there it is a small bank, 
Depth upon Reefshorne by the land.  there you shall for certain find but three fathom, or three fathom a foot less, for two or three casts with the lead, as the wind bloweth, and as you go forward, for presently again you have five fathom, sound then forward about by that dry sand, where you desire to be, as I told you before.  
According to some men's opinions, Dogghers sand beginneth from this bank: for as a man early in the morning setteth sail out of Rincopers' haven, with a south-west course, and a good North-east wind, than you are about three or four of the clock in the afternoon, yet at nine fathom, whereby it may partly appear, that Dogghers' sand should have her first beginning from this bank, and the rather, for that Dogghers' sand lieth there about.  
To know the land hereabouts, 
To know the land.  you must understand, that about four leagues north from the said Horn, there lieth a high hill called Blawebergh, which on both sides goeth plainly sloping down, it is somewhat blacker than the other land, and overgrown with heath, and lieth a little from the strand. And southward from this Blauwebergh, as I said before, the fisher's village called Westerside lieth: and betweepe that village and the Horn lieth a black hillock, also a Gentleman's house, otherwise it is altogether hilly ground.  
Thus the land showeth between the Horn or Dodenbergh, and Numans' haven.  
Blauwebergh. Dodenbergh.   view of Denmark  

II. To sail into Numans' channel or Rincopers' haven.  
Ware afbeeldinge der Zeechusten vaunt noorder deel van Jutlandt vanden doodenbergh of tot am den-hoeck van Schagen, tonende hoemen die self beseÿlen, en de ondiepten daer neffens gelegen schouwen shall  
Vraÿ portrait des Costs marines' de la party Septentrionale de Jutlande, commencant du mont dict doodenbergh jusqu'a'lentour la poincte de Schagen, monstrant comment on les navigera et evitera les gues ÿ environ.   map of the coast of Denmark 
If you will sail into Rincopers' haven 
To sail into Rincopers' haven.  or the channel of Numan, then go along by the land of Westerside at six or seven fathom, till you come to the two aforesaid great white downs, than you shall see two beacons stand, whereof each hath a barrel upon it, on the north side of the haven, upon a low land, bring them one against an other, than they will stand north, or north and by east from you, and there you shall find a ton, unless it be laid otherwise. But right before the channel of Numan lieth a sandy flat called Glad jaep: 
Glad jaep.  if you will sail into the south channel, then leave this flat on baghborde, and run in close by the south side or foot strand, whereon the said downs lie, to the beacons, for there you can have no hurt, for you may sound them easily, and that is the most assured course to sail in by the strand, if you look well to your lead. When you are passed by Glad jaep, then run to the north side whereon the said beacons stand, for you must there sail about them, as close as you will: it is a low plain point, very fair and altogether steeping. Now when you are within this point, you may anchor there where you will. This haven from without reacheth in most north, and north and by east, until you are within the Glad jaep, than you must go somewhat easterlyer to the point aforesaid, it is a haven that hath a good stream, because there lieth so great a channel within it, but it floweth there but little up and down, not above two foot and an half, with a daily tide. A south-west and North-east moon maketh there high water.  

Northchanel.  Right north from Glad jaep there runneth another channel in, but there is but eight foot water in it.  
When you are within Numen haven, then forward it is Pilots water, 
To sail from Numit channel to Rincopen.  but ships that go not deep, they may well sail up, unless it be at a low water. The depth runneth by Numits' strand, and when you keep Numits strand, whereon the beacons stand, than you can not go amiss: but as soon as you put off from thence, than you may sail under the sands or shears, which reach off from the Wadt to the land of Numit, therefore run so long close by the strand of Numit, 
Marks of the Sands.  till a church with a flat steeple (which standeth about east from you, against the high land of the Holm) cometh on the south side of the high land, than you are within the sands and outsands, than you must leave the strand, and go in n. n. e. and n. e. & by n. till there cometh a round hillock close south, or right over against a blue church, which standeth upon the high land of the Holm, then go in North-east and by east, till the aforesaid blue church cometh against a Gentleman's house, which standeth below close by the water, in the low land, than sail north and north and by east, till you be before Rincopen, for there it is wide and broad. The right depth there is two fathom and two foot. Rincopen and the haven of Numen lie distant from each other four leagues.  
North from Rincopen there runneth a River into the land, whereon there lie two small towns, the one called Hostebro, 
Hostebro.  the other Huysbuy, 
Huys buy.  they lie at least seven or eight leagues into the land.  
Half a league south from Bovenberghen there goeth another small haven out of the Sea inward, it is called Trosmond. 
Trosmond channel.  There stand two masts, which you must hold one over against the other, and so go in, within it there lieth a village called Trosmond, from thence you may sail over the Wadt to Rincopen.  
This haven or channel is sometimes closed up, and sometimes again boats or crayers and small ships may go out of and into it, but it is reckoned for no haven.   

III. Of the situation of Bovenberghen and the Holmen.  
FRom Rincoper haven or the haven of Numan, to Bovenberghen, the land reacheth most north & south 10 leagues, and between them both it is all over a fair strand, with white downs, which are overgrown with heath, when you sail along by it, than you may see the blue within the land of Rincopen called Holmes, above over this land.  
Between Bovenberghen and Reefshorne 
Banks between Reefshorn & Bovenberghen.  there lie some banks, of 7, 8, and 9 fathom, and some that are deeper.  
Bovenberghen 
Bovenberghen.  is a long plain hill, in the middle having a round hillock or hill, and upon this hill standeth a church with a steeple, you may see the land at 13 and 14 fathom. But if you come upon Bovenberghen to land, than it openeth in three hills, it is a shoring steep point, the middlemost hill is the highest, whereon standeth the church aforesaid, with a flat steeple, and on both sides of this hill there stand other churches, which are not so high. You may see the land at 13 or 14 fathom. The ground is great red sand, with some small stones therein.  
From Bovenberghen to the Holmen the land reacheth north North-east 9 or 10 leagues, but it lieth in a creak, and it is black hillockie downish land, overgrown with heath, and there standeth now and then a flat steeple in the land. And there lieth a bank of 10 fathom about five leagues from the land, but it continueth not long.  

jutland Sand.  Between Bovenberghen and the Holm, from thence the Sand reacheth off from the land west into the Sea, and when you go over that Sand, at 12 and 13 fathom, than the Neus lieth from you northwest and by north 24 leagues.  
The Holmes 
Holmes.  is a plain point, which on the North-east side goeth shoring down, and in the middle upon this hill, there standeth a foursquare church without a steeple. When that height of the land is southsoutheast from you, and that you may justly see the north end, than it is 15 fathom deep, great rough sand, with some stones amongst it. 
A stony bank north from Holmes.  There lieth a bank of stone (like the Trindle of Lesou) two leagues North-east or somewhat easterlyer from the north point of the Holmes, that is between the north and the east points, so that the two third parts of the water is almost between this stonebanck and the north point, and the other third part between the east point & the said stonebanck, and there is not above 12 foot water upon it, there hath some ships been cast away upon it. This east point 
East point  lieth about four leagues eastward from Holmes, and is also a high shoring or sloping point, as if it were Holmes. Right against this east point there shooteth a Sand half a league into the Sea, which you may sound about at seven fathom, but as some say you may go through between the land and this Sand.  
Thus the land between Bovenberghen and the Holmes showeth, when you sail along by it two leagues from the land.  
East point. Holmes Bovenberghen. South of Bovenberghen.   view of Denmark  

III. The situation of the Coasts of jutland, from the Holmes to Schaghen.  
FRom the Holmes to Robbeknuyt the course is North-east nine leagues. And right west from Robbeknuyt, in the creak to the east point, there stand five churches with flat steeples, which stand nearest to Robbeknuyt, there lie also two blue lands between the Eastpoint and Robbeknuyt, and there the land lieth in a creak, and cheer also you see a cloven hill or down before you come to Robbeknuyt. It is there all along flat strand. East from Holmes there goeth in a water called Misdorp, 
Misdorp.  and right west from the white Cliff of Robbeknuyt there also runneth in a little River whereon there lieth a town called Werlom. 
Werlom.   
Robbeknuyt is a high round hill, and right upon the height of the hill there standeth a church with a sharp steeple. 
To know Robbeknuyt.  But east about from this point there goeth a great creak about to Hartshals. Against Robbeknuyt it is very far flat, for fifteen fathom depth is at least two leagues from the land. And about four leagues from the land there lieth a bank of nine fathom, which reacheth along by the land. And against Robbeknuyt there lieth a stone or rock about a league from the land.  
From Robbeknuyt to Hartshals 
Hartshals.  it is south-west and by west four leagues. The land as I said before reacheth that way with a creak or bowing, and there standeth a flat steeple between them both, but nearest to Robbeknuyt, and there you see the high land of Laclowe over that high land.  
Hartshals is a long plain hill, 
To know Hartshals.  on the east end going somewhat shoring down. And right against Hartshals there lieth a sandy or stony ground, about a quarter of a league from the land, whereon some men say many ships have been cast away, but it is little used.  
From Hartshals to Schaghen the course is eastnortheast eight leagues. The land east from Hartshals is altogether downy and hillockie land, you may see the high land of Laclowe beyond it, and you find along upon these Coasts, no such plain hills as Bovenberghen, Holmes, Hartshals, and Robbeknuyt. A little way within the point of Schaghen there standeth a flat church with a flat steeple, when this church is southsoutheast from you, than there runneth a Sand or Flat off from the land, and there you must put somewhat off from the land, otherwise it is all shoring strand between Hartshals and Schaghen; but you may sound that Sand about at six or seven fathom.  
Upon the east end of the outmost of Schaghen there standeth a fire beacon, as if it were a sand beacon, and when the church is south-west and by west from you, than the fire beacon and the steeple are one against the other, and then you are right against the Sand of Schaghen, 
Marks of Schaghen sand.  which reacheth off from the point eastnortheast, and east and by north almost a league into the Sea. When you go along by the land, and go under it at five or six fathom, than you may sound the Sand: but coming south out of the Sea, you can hardly found it, for it is shoring, and then come no nearer unto it then 12 or 13 fathom.  
To know by sure marks when you are passed this Sand, 
Marks to know that you are passed the Sand.  as well over the one side as the other, then mark that as you come out of the west, and the old church and the fire beacon are one against the other, than you come upon the west side of the Sand: but when you come out of the south or the east, & that old church is against or within the south end of the village, than you are upon the south side of the Sand. When the steeple and the fire beacon are south-west and by west from you, than they are one against the other, and then you are against the Sand, as I said before: and when the steeple is south-west, and south-west & by south from you, than you are without or west from the Sand: but when the steeple or fire beacon is westsouthwest, and west and by south from you, than you are within the Sand. This you may by night take by your compass, & mark it so, to see whether you be within or without the Sand, when the fire lighter maketh a clear bright fire. You may set well on both sides of the Sand, so that you may put off from it at 7 or 8 fathom.  
Some say that upon necessity a man might go between this Sand and the land at two fathom and an half.  
About two leagues without Schaghen towards Hartshals, 
Banks between Schaghen and Hartshals.  two leagues from the land there lieth a bank of 10 or 12 fathom, and within this bank it is 16, 17, and 18 fathom deep.  
Between Schaghen and Masterland or Norway it is all soft ground, and the nearer to Norway the deeper water, but when you come out of the Sound, and are in the channel, and find no ground at 18, 20, and 22 fathom, it is a sign that you are about Schaghen Sand.  
When you come out of the west about Schaghen, and will go to the Sound or to the Belt, then take heed of the stream out of the Belt, 
Of the stream out of the Belt.  for commonly it falleth out of the Belt towards Norway, specially when the wind hath blown a while east or North-east, this stream by night or in dark wether will carry you under Norway before you are aware thereof, therefore be careful thereof, and guess accordingly.  
Thus the land between the Holmes and Schaghen showeth, when you sail along by it.  
Schaghen. Hartshals. Robbeknuyt.   view of Skagen  

FOUR How these places lie distant one from the other.  

FRom the Dead hill or the Horn to Numans' channel or Rincoper channel it is n. and by w. 7 or 8 leagues.  
From Rincoper deep or Numans' channel to Bovenberghen north and by west 11 leagues.  
In general from Deadehill to Bovenberghen the land of jutland reacheth n. & by w. and s. & by e. 17 or 18 leagues.  
From Bovenberghen to the Holmes n. n. e. 9 leagues.  
From the Holmes to Robbeknuyt North-east 9 leagues.  
From Robbeknuyt to Hartshals n. e. and by e. 4 leagues.  
From Hartshals to Schaghen e. n. e. 8 leagues.    

V How these Countries are distant from other Countries.  

FRom Rincoper or Numans' channel to the Vlie southsouthwest and somewhat westerlyer 59 leagues.  
From Bovenberghen along by jutland without the grounds to the Elve or the uttermost ton south and by east about 51 leagues.  
From Bovenberghen to Holy land south and by east, and somewhat southerlyer about 45 leagues.  
From Bovenberghen to the Vlie or Borneriffe southsouthwest about 69 leagues.  
From Bovenberghen to the Foreland s. w. & by s. 120 leagues.  
From Bovenberghen to the Holmes before jarmouth south-west 93 leagues.  
From Bovenberghen to Flamboroughhead w. s.w. 100 leagues.  
From Bovenberghen to Scarborough westsouthwest & somewhat westerlyer 100 leagues.  
From Bovenberghen to the River of Newcastle or Tinmouth west and by south about 107 leagues.  
From Bovenberghen to Buqunesse w. and by n. 107 leagues.  
From Bovenberghen to the Neus n. w. & by n. 24 leagues.  
From the Sand at eighteen fathom to the Vlie south and by west 61 or 62 leagues.  
From the Sand at eighteen fathom to the Heads at Calis southsouthwest about 120 leagues.  
From the Holmes to the Neus n. w. 19 or 20 leagues.  
From the Holmes to the Vlecker n. w. & by n. 19 leagues.  
From the Holmes to Mardon north 24 leagues.  
From the Holmes to Langhesond n. & by e. 28 or 29 leagues.  
From the Holmes to farther n. n. e. 36 leagues.  
From Schaghen to Tinmouth w. s. w. 136 leagues.  
From Schaghen to the Neus' west 33 leagues.  
From Schaghen to Vlecker w. and by n. 25 or 26 leagues.  
From Schaghen to Reperwick west and by north, and westnorthwest 24 leagues.  
From Schaghen to Mardon n. w. and by w. 20 or 21 leagues.  
From Schaghen to Langhesond northwest and by north, or a a little northerlyer 21 leagues.  
From Schaghen to Fardero n. and by w. 21 leagues.  
From Schaghen to Ottrum n. and by e. 23 or 24 leagues.  
From Schaghen to Masterland e. n. e. 12 leagues.  
From Schaghen to Nydingh e. and by s. 15 or 16 leagues.  
From Schaghen to Waersberghen e. s. e. 19 or 20 leagues.  
From Schaghen to the Trindle southeast 8 leagues.  
From Schaghen without the Trindel s. e. and by e. 8 leagues.  
From Schaghen to Lesou, or the northend of the Sand southsoutheast 8 leagues.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 23.   


Pascaarte vande Belt, verthoonende de Oostersche Zeecusten van jutlandt, de gelegentheijt vande Melversondt, Wedersont. Jtem aller Eijlanden, Jnwijcken, Droochten, Reven, end Sanden, En hoemen in't beseijlen van die Gewesten 'em voor all periculen hoeden end wachten shall.  
Cart Marine de la Belt, representant les rivages orientaulx de Juthlande, lafoy situation de la Melversonde et Wedersonde, avecq toutes les Isles et gulfs, seicheresses, bancs de sable, et lieux dangereux, et comment navigant en ces quartiers on se gardera et evitera touse perilz et dangiers.   map of the coast of Denmark   

CHAPTER FOUR THE DESCRIPTION OF the Belt, Wedersond, and Melversond, and of all the islands lying thereabouts.  

I. The situation of Lezou and the Trindle, and how you shall sail from Schaghen to Seebuy  
FRom Schaghen sand to Lezou the course is s. s. e. eight leagues. 
The situation of Lesou.  Lesou is a foul Island, which is round about flat, and compassed about with many banks, & sands shooting out. At the south end it is but two fathom deep, above two leagues from the land, and from the south end whereon the church standeth there shooteth a Sand into the Sea, two leagues and an half, which you may anchor under safe against a s. s. e. wind. Also on the other side of the south end there shooteth off a sand, so that when the aforesaid flat church is east, and North-east from you, there you cannot see the land when you are within a league of it: but you may go so near to the north end, that you may lie at anchor under it safe against a south wind, at 3 4 and 5 fathom. From the north end also there shooteth off a sand to the Trindle, but you may sound it about at three or four fathom, through between Lesou and the Trindle.  

Trindle.  The Trindle lieth North-east, or somewhat northerlyer from the northend of Lesou about two great leagues, & from Schaghen sand southeast and northwest eight leagues. It is stony sand ground, about 4 foot deep, and about six or seven acres of land great, reaching along by the channel of the Sea: On the north side always there lieth a ton, whereby men may know it a far off. You may sail well through between Lesou and the Trindel, and the nearer to the Trindel the deeper water, and the nearer to Lesou the flatter & shallower. Close by the Trindle it is 5 or 6 fathom deep.  

Zeebuy.  But to sail from Schaghen to Seebuy, the right course is south and by west 7 leagues. When Schaghen lieth about n. w. and by w. from you, and that you are a league from it, there it is 17 and 18 fathom deep: and when Schaghen is west, and west and by south a league, or a league and an half from you, there it is 34. or 35 fathom deep. And come no nearer to Schaghen by night then 14 or 15 fathom. Now when you will sail from Schaghen to Seebuy, than you go by the small Helms, 
Small helms.  lying south and by west 4 leagues from Schaghen, and if you will go into the Belt, than you leave them on starboard, going all south and by west to Zeebuy. And he that will anchor under the Helms, 
Road under the Helms.  coming off from Schaghen, he must run to the land at three fathom, and run in between the strand & the Helms, until he be within the rocks, there you may anchor or go through at three fathom, along by the foot strand, and when the rocks of Helms are east, and east and by north from you, there is the Road, at four and four fathom and an half.  
The Helms are three islands, the southerlyest the jutters call the Dien or the Dee, the middlemost Holmes, and the northerlyest the Grasholme, and by it there lieth another little Island. You may sail through between the southerlyest and the middlemost, but nearest to the southerlyest Island: there is between them four fathom water. The best Road to lie in for little ships behind the Helms, is between the middlemost and the southerlyest Island, a little nearer the farm land then the islands, but for great ships the best lying is by the Grasholme.  
Between the Holmes and the ferme land in the faire-water, it is at the least three fathom deep.  
When you come on the south end of the rocks, there runneth a Sand off from the Helms to the strand, 
Sand of the Helms  called Boutferriffe or sand, where the great stones lie upon the strand, but keeping at three fathom you can do no hurt upon this sand, and you may so go out again at the south end of Zeebuy.  
A league east from Helms there lieth a heap of stones which you must beware of, when you will go into the Belt.  
A ship that goeth not deep may sail round about the Helms, for there at the least it is three fathom water. In the channel between the Helms, and the north end of Lesou it is 10 fathom deep soft ground, 
Depth between the Helms & Lesou.  and before Zeebuy in the road it is 4 and 5 fathom deep. Lesou lieth about four leagues from Zeebuy. On the west side of Lesou lie the Dwalegrounds, which lie north from the aforesaid Sand (which shooteth off west into the Sea, from the south end of Lesou, whereon the flat church standeth. These Dwalegrounds are very uneven, of 3, 4, 5, and 6 fathom deep, and within Zeebuy there are also flat grounds of 4, 5, and 6 fathom. The channel between the Dwalegrounds and the flats of Zeebuy is seven and eight fathom deep.   

II. To sail from Zeebuy to Aelborgh and Stevenshooft.  

To sail into Aelburgher channel or haven.  FRom Zeebuy to Aelburgher channel the course is south & by west 7 leagues. On the north side of the channel there standeth a flat steeple called Hals, in the channel there lieth a ton, and upon the south land there stand two capes, which you must bring one against the other, and then you find the ton. The haven first reacheth in w. and by s. about a cables length, than you go n. w. and by w. right up to Hals, and go in by the north side till you be against Hals, for from the south point of the land there cometh a Flat shooting off, which you must shun: being against Hals, you must then go s. w. & by w. to the bought or hollow ground, and in the crooking you must shun the north side somewhat, then go northwest and by west again along to the second crooking, then s. s. w. and then w. s. w. to the town. Before in the haven at the ton it is two fathom deep, and there within a little while after five or six fathom: but to sail into it it is best to take a Pilot. By the south side also there goeth in a channel of 6 or 8 foot deep.  
The town of Aelburgh lieth four leagues upwards in the River, within the land: also west along by these Coasts there lie some banks, there you must shun the land somewhat.  
When you sail from the Helms to Stevenshooft, through between the Dwalegrounds and the Flats of Zeebuy, than you find flat grounds about half way between Stevenshooft and Zeebuy of 5, 6, and 7 fathom. This shallow is called the Sweteringh, 
The Sweteringh.  lying above two leagues eastward from Aelburgher haven, and the channel there between them both is about 10 or 11 fathom deep.  
From Aelburgher haven to Haselin the course is southeast and by east about twenty leagues.  
From Aelburgher haven to Stevenshooft 
Stevenshooft.  the course is s. e. and by s. about nine leagues. There between them both the land lieth in a great creak, wherein the two towns called Mariacker and Randersen do lie. Mariacker 
Mariacker  lieth from Aelburgher haven south, and south and by west four leagues, and from Stevenshooft five leagues. Between Mariacker & Stevenhoofr lieth the River of Randersen, 
Randersen  which runneth crooked about so far up into the land, to the town of Schandelburgh, where the King of Denmark hath a great fishing, and also many times cometh there to hunt.  
Thus the land and the church of Aelst showeth two leagues and an half east from Aelburgher haven.  
Aelster church. Melver hill.   view of 'Aelst' (Denmark)  

III. To sail from Stevenshooft to the islands of Syro, Wero, and Sampso, and forth through the Wedersond to the Melversond.  
FRom Stevenshooft to Haselin the course is e. s. e. thirteen leagues, and Haselin 
Haselin.  without is full of foul Sands and grounds: you shall find further and larger description of Haselin and Anout, as also of the foul ways and shallows lying thereabouts in the tenth Chapter of this Book.  
Right south from Stevenshooft lieth a little town called Oruntbuy, there lie the Chalck grounds right before the River of Grimsond in a Creek, right about the point of Stevenshooft, 
Oruntbuy Chalk-grounds.  that is a sand two or three foot water deep, but not far from it, it is 10 fathom deep, you may sound it at 4. fathom. You may sail up the Grimsond 
Grimsond.  to Grimsteed, which is a lading place of Boeyers.  
From Stevenshooft to Great Helms 
Great helms.  the course is s. s. w. about 7 leagues. The land from Stevenshooft to the point of Ebeltud reacheth s. s.w. seven or eight leagues. Ebeltud 
Ebeltud.  is a little town lying against the Great Helms inward to the land. Between the Great Helm & jutland it is 6 and 7 fathom deep. Close by Stevenshooft and the point of Ebeltud it is 8, 9, and 10 fathom deep. The great Helm hath two Sands, one upon the north side, and the other upon the south side.  
From Stevenshooft to Siero 
Siero.  the course is s. s. e. 8 leagues. North from Siero lieth a land-losse ground divided into two Sands, 
Sands of Siero.  which you must shun.  
These two Sands in some places lie above the water.  
From the Great Holm to the Island Wero 
The Island Wero  the course is n. n. w. and s. s. e. four leagues, and there it is 4 or 5 fathom deep.  

The situation of Kayholme and Samps  From Wero there runneth a shallow to Kayeholme, and about Kayholme: and also about the islands Samps, it is all full of dry grounds, and they run all to the great Island Sampso.  
From Great Holm to the Island Sampso 
Sampso.  it is s. w. and n. e. four leagues.  

Sand of Sampso.  From the north end of Sampso there shooteth off a Sand north into the Sea, there you may sound close about, to come into the Road of Sampso, when you will anchor there, there at the Road it is 10 fathom, and under the Swan grounds you lie safe from all winds.  
From the south end of Ebeltud to Aerhuysen 
Aerhuysen  the course is west, and west and by south five leagues, there it is all flat water, that is 2 and 3 fathom deep. He that will anchor in the Road before Aerhuysen, let him bring the great steeple in the middle between the two other speeres, there is the best ground, and good Road at 3, 4, or 5 fathom, so dry as one will.  
South by Aerhuysen the Wedersond 
Wedersond.  goeth in, between jutland and Sampso: he that will sail into it must be well acquainted there with, for there it is all full of Sands and shallows, and also by night you can not use the channel, because of the sands and shallows, and by day also you must look well about you, and spare not your lead, but you may anchor and lie at road there all over. When you will sail through the Wedersond, 
To sail through Wedersond.  coming from Great Holme or Ebeltud, then leave the Island Tons 
Tons.  and the Swan grounds on baghborde, running forth all along by the coast of jutland at 2 or 3 fathom, till you be past Horsens, or the Island of Endelau, which Island of Endelau a man may not go near unto on the west side, because of all the grounds which lie on the west side thereof.  
Between Endelau 
Endelau.  and the firm land it is narrow water, stretching from Wedersond south through the Swan grounds, 
Swan-grounds.  on both sides it is dry, it is but a channel to sail through.  
When you come off from Melversond, & will sail through the Wedersond, it is best to run along by the jutland side, till you be against the River of Horsens, there you must then put somewhat off from the land, & sail upon the I'll of Tons, than you go through between the North and South grounds, leaving the I'll of Tons on starboard. When you are past Tons, than you must go out close by the north point of Sampso, to the land of Ebeltud, it is altogether one course from Horsens to Tons, and forth to Sampso, and the point of Ebeltud, that is, altogether North-east and south-west 8 or 9 leagues.  
Fron Horsens or the Island Endelau to Melversond 
Melversond.  the course is s. s. w. 7 leagues. Melversond is a deep Sound, of 20 and 25 fathom, and is very crooked to go in. It goeth in between Fuynen and jutland, which are two high lands.  
From the Island Ebelo to Melversond the course is south-west and south-west and by south five leagues.  
From Sampso Road to the I'll of Ebelo 
Ebelo.  the course is s. s. w. and s. w. and by w. five leagues. And from the south end of Sampso to Ebelo the course is s. w. and by w. four leagues.  
Fron Sampso to Roems 
Roems.  the course is s. e. & n. w. 5 leagues.  
The northwest Coast of Fuynen reacheth south-west and by west 8 leagues. The Island of Ebelo lieth a league from it, yet you cannot go through between it and Fuynen, it lieth right before Bowens. South from the Island there lieth a great stone or rock under the water, between this Rock & the Island lieth the Road before Bowens, 
Road before Bouwens.  at 8 or 9 fathom.   

FOUR To sail from Syro and Wero to Langheland, and forth about Fuynen to Melversond, also along by Zealand to Golversond.  
Between Syro and Wero lieth a bad sand, long & broad, 
Haters Sand.  reaching further than half way to Siero. When you will sail through between the two islands aforesaid, above Russenesse, you must leave two third parts of the water lying on Wero side, and go in s. s. w. and s. and by w. to Roems, that is nine leagues.  
The said sand is called Haters sand, and it is on the east side it is very hard and stony, and if you come from Boltsack you must run close by the Island of Wero, to shun the Sand, the channel between the sand and Wero is not to broad, but it is three and three fathom and an half deep.  
He that cometh eastward of Wero through between Wero and Haters sand, and will sail to Roems, let him go right south by east, & so he shall run about a quarter of a league eastward of Boltsack, and fall right east from Roems. In like manner he that goeth from Roems or a little east of it, north and by west he falleth between Wero and Haters Sand right in the fairewaie. One may run through between Roems and Fuynen at two fathom, but you cannot go through there with great ships. From the north end of Fuynen there shooteth off a Sand at least a quarter of a league into the Sea. Within Roems in the land of Fuynen there lieth a little town to lad at, which is called Cartmond, 
Cartemonde.  there commonly lie two tons in the haven, you may sail in by them: the haven goeth in east, on the west side it is flat, the tons lie along by the flats, and in sailing up you leave them on starboard: this haven is 12 foot deep.  
From Romps to Spro 
Spro.  or Knuytshooft 
Knuytshooft.  the course is s. & by e and s. s. e. five leagues. Between Siero and Knuytshooft it is 12 and 13 fathom deep, but between Romps and Siero it is 10 or 11 fathom deep.  
Right south about the point of Knuytshooft in Fuynen lieth the Haven of Nyburgh, 
Nyburgh.  when you are about the point, than you go close up to the town, about a league northwestward it is 6 or 7 fathom deep, you lie there with your ship at the Kaye, and have any thing carried aboard that you will.  
From Knuytshooft to Langheland the course is s. e. four leagues, & then you leave Spro on baghborde, from the southeast end of Spro there shooteth off a Sand which you must shun.  
At the northend of Langheland lie the islands of Frissel, 
Frissel.  which are very foul round about.  
From Knuytshooft to the Island of Tassingh the course is s. 4 leagues: you must leave Frissel on the left hand, and you must run through between Frissel and Fuynen. If you will go to Swinburgh, 
Swim. burgh.  then from Frissel go to the southeast end of Fuynen s. s. w. and you shall come to an Island, where you may go about on both sides, through between Tassingh and the Island, or you may run along by the land of Fuynen, till you come to the town of Swinburgh, which lieth over against the Island of Tassingh, & against the point of Fuynen there lieth an Island called Olmes, 
Olmes.  than you must strike up westward. You may also go about on the other side of Tassingh, & leave the Island Arr, & the foul grounds that lie between Arr & the southeast end of Fuynen on baghborde. Upon those Grounds it is not above 6 foot deep. And when you come by the Island of Olmes or the southeast point of Fuynen, than (as aforesaid) you must strike up westward, about the point of Fuynen to Woburgh. On the south side of these Grounds aforesaid there goeth also a channel through, which goeth west and west and by south, between the Grounds and the Island of Arr. In this Island of Arr there is a town called Copingh. 
Copingh.  This foul ground is 2 leagues long, & the Island of Arr is also two leagues long, both of them reach east & west, & Monk Island 
Monk Island.  lieth at the end of these grounds, in Fuynen before Woburgh: it hath two Sands, the one cometh from the southeast end, and shooteth east into the Sea, the other cometh from the north point, and reacheth North-east into the Sea. But when you sail north from these grounds, that is, between Fuynen and these grounds to Woburgh, than you go upon the said I'll of Monk, and an Island or two more, which you must leave on the left hand, and run all along by the land of Fuynen, about w. and w. and by n. to the point of Askens, 
Askens.  which is about five leagues from the southeast point.  
From the east point of Askens to the Island Areu and Toreu, 
Areu and Toreu.  the course is w. and by n. and w. n. w. above 2 leagues. These two islands lie one over against the other, the one on jutland, the other on Fuynen land, and you must go through between two Sands, which run one against the other, and there it is 4 or 5 fathom deep.  
North or west from Areu the channel of Haddersleu 
Haddersleu.  beginneth, and reacheth in about w. and by s. upon it lieth the town of Haddersleu, which is above two leagues within the land.  
From Areu or Toreu to Melversond the course is n. n. w. 5 leagues, which you go into southward: first you go westward in to the channel of Coldinghen, 
Coldinghen.  which is a wide channel, which goeth about a league into the land, when you will go through Melversond, than you leave it on the left hand, and go up eastward to the town of Melver, 
To sail through Melversond.  where you come again into the crooked. Melversond goeth out northward, with a great crooking, and then you must go out again into the broad water north from Fuynen, as I taught you before.  
You may also sail out from Areu or Aelsche channel s. s. w. to Apenrade, 
Apenrade.  and so behind about the Island of Aelsens till you come into the channel of Flensburgh.  
To turn again to the Belt: it is from Rosnes 
Rosnes.  n. n. w. going west from Syro. From Rosnes shooteth a Sand off to seaward, but a little east from Rosnes, that is, from the point which lieth half way at Haselin, there reacheth a Sand off, above a league & an half into the Sea, that lieth at the end quite dry, you may boldly run about close by the dry, for not far from it it is eight fathom deep.  
From Rosnes to Spro south and north 8 or 9 leagues. Between Rosnes and Spro lieth Callenburgh 
Callenburgh.  in Zealand, which also is a lading place, and about two leagues south from Callenburgh shooteth a flat along the Coast, about three quarters of a league from the strand of five fathom deep.  
From the east end of Spro shooteth a stony bank off, and over against it cometh a Flat shooting off from the land, there between them it is 4 and 5 fathom deep. But behind or against Spro lieth Cassuer, 
Cassuer.  a fair Haven, where also lying at the Kaye you may have your goods carried into the ship.  
From Spro to Langheland the course is s. e. and by s. four leagues. Right against Langheland lieth Golbersond, whereof I will speak in the Chapter following.   

V How these places lie distant from each other, and also from other countries.  
ALthough in the description of this Card of the Belt from Schaghen to Langheland, most part of the reachings of the land from one place to another is set down, yet I thought it requisite to set and place them here in order one after the other, as I have done in the rest of the descriptions, and the rather, for that I think it will be profitable for Sailors, when men (having them all together by themselves) may the readier and sooner find such stretchings as they desire to see.  

From Schaghen to Lesou s. s. e. 8 leagues.  
From Schaghen to the Trindle s. e. 8 leagues.  
From Schaghen to the small Helms s. and by w. 4 leagues.  
From Schaghen to Zebuy s. and by w. 7 leagues.  
From the Helms to Zeebuy 2 leagues.  
From Zeebuy to Aelburgher s. and by w. 7 leagues.  
From Aelburgher channel to Mariacker s. and s. by w. 4 leagues.  
From Aelburgher deep to Stevenshooft s. e. & by s. 9 leagues.  
From Aelburgher channel to Haselin s. e. and by e. 20 leagues.  
From Stevenshooft to Haselin e. s. e. 13 leagues.  
From Stevenshooft to the great Holme s. s. w. about 7 leagues.  
Fron Stevenshooft to the point of Ebeltud s. s. w. 7 or 8 leagues.  
From Stevenshooft to Siero s. s. e. 8 leagues.  
From Great Holm to Wero s. s. e. 4 leagues.  
From Great Holm to Sampso south-west 4 leagues.  
From the south end of Ebeltud to Aerhuysen west and west & by south 5 leagues.  
From the Road of Sampso to Ebelo southsouthwest, and south and by west 5 leagues.  
From the south end of Sampso to the Island Ebelo south-west 4 great leagues.  
The northwest coast of Fuynen reacheth s. w. & by w. 8 leagues.  
From Ebelo to Melversond s. w. 5 leagues.  
From Endelau to Melversond southsouthwest and somewhat southerlyer 7 leagues.  
From Sampso to Roems s. e. 5 leagues.  
From west from Siero to Roems s. s. w. and s. & by w. 9 leagues.  
From Wero to Bultsack s. s. w. 4 great leagues.  
From Bultsack to Romps s. s. e. and s. and by e. 4 leagues.  
From Romps to Knuytshooft s. & by e. and s. s. e. 5 leagues.  
From Knuytshooft to Langheland s. e. 4 leagues.  
From Knuytshooft to the Island Tassingh south 4 leagues.  
From the southeast end of Fuynen to the east end of Askens west, and west and by north 5 leagues.  
From the point of Askens to the islands of Toreu & Areu west and by north and westnorthwest 2 leagues.  
From Areu to Melversond n. n. w. 5 leagues.  
From the point of Rosnes in Zealand to the I'll of Spro south 8 or 9 leagues.  
From Spro to Langheland s. e. and by s. 4 leagues.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 24.   

CHAPTER V A DECLARATION HOW you shall sail forth through the Belt to Femeren, and along by the Coasts of Holst, Mechelenburgh and Pomerland: Also the situation of Laland, Falster, Borneholme, and the places lying there about.  

I. The situation of the Golversond, of Laland, Falster, and Meun so far as to Steden.  
THe Island of Langheland is about eight leagues long, and reacheth south and north, there east against it lieth the Golversond, which reacheth in north from Laland, and reacheth all up to Nestvelt, and Wordenburgh, and cometh into the Greensond, and in that Wolf-chanel or Wolve-gat goeth into the East-sea again. Before Golversond there lie three islands: the one called Wedero, which lieth at the point of Laland, and is fast to it by a Sand, so that you may not sail through between them, there northward you go into Golversond, 
To sail into Golversond.  leaving it on starboard. The other two lie north from the said Island of Wedero: the first whereof is called Arnis, and the other Ooms. Ooms is a little plain Island, but Arnis is the greatest, it lieth nearest Zealand, and is full of trees. From the Island Ooms a Sand stretcheth off south-west to seaward, which is at least a league long, and at the end flat, that you may run over with the lead, and when you will sail into Golversond you must let these two islands lie on baghborde of you. The Island Laland at the west point, 
The Sand of Laland.  over against the south end of Langheland hath a Sand or Hooke, which reacheth off from Laland half over the Belt: to shun it, you must run along a quarter of a league east from Langheland: 
Marks of Lalands Riffe or Sand.  or if you leave two third parts of the water on Lalands' side, and the other third part on Langhelands' side, then also you shall not sail upon it. When you come out of the south and will go into the Belt, and that then the steeple of Mascou, which standeth upon Laland, cometh to be North-east and by east from you, than you are passed that sand, and it lieth south from you. In this channel between Laland and the south end of Langheland it is six & seven fathom deep.  
From the south end of Langheland to Femeren the course is southeast and by east seven leagues.  
Now when you come off from Langheland, and have past the Sand or Hooke of Laland, the South coast of Laland reacheth there east and west. There lieth a long Sand along, which is called the Redde-sand, 
Tha Red-sand.  and reacheth out till it cometh before Golversond, which runneth in between Laland and Gester. North from this Sand there is a Road of sixteen and eighteen foot water, before the towns of Aelholme 
Aelholme.  and Robuy, 
Robuy.  where you may lad nuts and barley.  
Between Laland and Gester against this Red sand (as I said) the Golversond goeth in, you may there go into it, and come out again into the Belt: but in this channel there is small depth, for there lieth a stone-bancke within cross over the channel: in it there lieth a town called Nicopen, 
Nicopen.  which lieth upon the Island of Falster a league within Gester.  
From Gester Gestersand 
Gestersand.  shooteth off, at least two leagues into the Sea, it is a dry Sand. East from Gestersand lieth an Island called 'Bout, 
Bout.  and there it is all flat or shallow water at 3 or 4 fathom.  
Beschrijvinghe vant zuijder deel vande Belt, en hoemen de Custen van Mekelemborch Pomeren, met de Landen daer tegen over tusschen Femeren en Bornholm geleghen beseijlen, en all Reven en Sanden daer ontrent schouwen shall.  
Description de la party meridionale de la Belt, comment qu'on doit mariner les costes de Mekelenbourgh, Pomere et les pais la viz a viz situez entre Femere et Bornholm, et eviter tous bancs de sable et dangiers la environ.   map of the coasts of Germany and Denmark 
From Gestersand to Meun 
Meun.  the course is northnortheast eight leagues, but from Bout to Meun it is North-east about seven leagues.  

Road under Meun.  From Golversond to Meun the land lieth in a creak, there you anchor safe against a North-east, north, northwest and west winds at five or six fathom. If you come out of the Sound and will go south from Meun, you may go as near Meun as you will, and lose westward up by the point, and anchor where you will at 5 or 6 fathom.  
On the north side of Meun you may also anchor at six fathom, behind a Sand which shooteth off from the northpoint, against an east, south, south-west, and west winds, it is there all flat and good ground.  
From Meun to Steden 
Steden.  it is northwest and by north four leagues. Between them both the Wolfsond, or the Wolf channel goeth in, 
Wolf's channel.  it runneth by Werdenburgh and Nestvelt, and through the Golversond out at the Belt.   

II. To sail from Melversond out of the Aelse to Langheland.  
MElversond and the Island of Areu are distant southsoutheast and northnorthwest as I said in the Chapter before.  
To sail from Areu to Melversond out of the channel of Aelsche, then go from Areu or Toreu to Roen east and by south above two leagues, and so forth between the Island and Fuynen, that is north along by the Roen, for you can not go south by it. The Roen 
The Roen.  is a bad shallow Sand, which shooteth off from Aelsen, where it is fast, and the outtermost end lieth dry, as if it were Anoulter Sand.  
From Roen to Arr or Copingh the course is southeast and by east five leagues.  
From the southeast end of Aelst there shooteth off a great Sand to Arr, which is called the Poelsche Sand, 
Poelsche Sand.  you must run between Arr and the Sand, and leave two parts of the water on the Aelsche side, and one part towards Arr, and run so upon the south end of Langheland, until you come against Copen.  
From Arr to the southend of Langheland the course is southeast and by east, and southsoutheast four leagues, and from the Poelsche sand to the south end of Langheland the course is west and by south seven leagues.  
You may run through between Langheland and Arr north about and come into the Belt again by Nyburgh. From the south end of Langheland to Tassing it is north and by west seven leagues. You may sail about Tassing on both sides, 
The situation of Tassingh.  and leave Are and the foul grounds sidewaies from you, upon the grounds it is no deeper than six fathom.  
Between the said grounds and Fuynen you may also run forward into the Aelsche channel, to the islands of Areu and Toreu, as I said in the Chapter before.   

III. The situation from Areu off to Apenrade, Flensburgh, and so to Femeren.  
FRom the I'll of Areu to Apenrade the course is southsouthwest five leagues: the channel or haven of Apenrade is an open wide channel, 
Apenrade channel.  and thereon lieth the aforesaid town of Apenrade.  
From the River of Apenrade to the crooking of Sonderburgh, which goeth in between the Island Aelsen and the firm land, the course is east two great leagues: there you may sail through behind the Island of Aelsen about to Sonderburgh, & so into the haven of Flensburgh.  
Between the Island and the firm land it is very narrow & crooked, but when you are through the narrow and crooked way, into the channel of Flensburgh, than it is wider and broader.  
The channel of Flensburgh 
Flensburgh channel.  goeth in between Sonderburgh and Holsterland, it is a wide channel, if you will sail into this channel, you must take good heed of the Holster side, when you begin to come between both the lands, and run in along by the land of Aelst, for from Nubel or Holsterland the Chalck grounds 
Chalck grounds.  reach half over the channel. This channel reacheth west and by south, till you come before the River. Before upon the River there lieth an Island, on the right hand, there you must go in east, and run west and by south, and west, till you come within the crooking of the River, and then you must go south up again, than you may see the town of Flensburgh lie before you.  
South from the channel of Flensburgh there lie three Rivers or channels more, where great ships may go in, that is, the slay, Nilhofvoert, and the Kiel: from Flensburgh to the Kiel, the land reacheth s. s. e, and somewhat easterlyer 7 leagues.  
From Sonderburgh to the slay 
The slay.  the course is s. e. and by e. 4 leagues. This is a deep & wide channel, first reaching in about west, and when you are within, than it runneth by Sleeswick 
Sleeswick.  about s. e. and by w.: there also come many great ships out, the town of Gottorp 
Gottorp.  also lieth upon this River.  
Between the slay and the Kiel lieth Nihofvoert, 
Nilhofvoert.  and upon it there lieth a town called Eckelenford.  
The Haven of Kiel is a great wide haven, it reacheth in about s. e. a great ship may go into it. 
Kill haven   
From Kiel to the west end of Femerens 
Femeren.  it is e. n. e. eight leagues.  
From the Poelsche sand to Femerens over Colbergher Heyde, 
Colberger Heyde.  the course is e. s. e. 13 or 15 leagues, but from the south end of Langhesand, it is s. e. and by e. seven leagues.  
The channel between Femerens and Laland is 5 or 6 fathom deep.  
You may sail round about Femeren, there it is flat ground, you may run through between Femerens and Holsterland, at 8 or 10 foot water, there lieth a town called Heyligher Haven, 
Heyliger haven.  where you may anchor with flat bottomed ships, to lad wheat or barley.   

FOUR To sail from Femerens to Lubeck, and so forth along the Coast from Mekelenburgh to the jelle.  
FRom the Island of Femerens to Gester Sand the course is e. and by n. about 11 leagues, but from Femerens to the Trave of Lubeck 
Trave of Lubeck.  it is s. s. w. eleven leagues. There goeth in a good channel for great ships, and it is 12 foot deep upon the bank. There is also a great creak & a good Haven, where you may lie safe against all winds, except a n. e. & a n.n.e. wind.  
From the Trave of Lubeck to Gester sand, the course is n. e. and s. w. about 19 leagues.  
From the Trave of Lubeck to Wismar haven the course is first n. e. and by e. and then e. n. e. there goeth in a good channel for all kind of ships.  
To sail into Wismare haven, 
To sail into Wismar haven  place the steeple which standeth upon the south land south from you, and so sail in, until the steeple standing on the east land by the easterly house be against five or six houses, and by those houses stand some trees together, from the east end there cometh a Sand shooting off, and reacheth n. w. & by n. off from the east land, and when the steeple cometh upon the houses, then go in s. s. e, and in that deep it is 12 foot water. In the Summer there lie two tons in the channel: the one upon the point of the Sand, which cometh shooting off from the east land, and the other upon the the flat ground, & you must run in through them both. This Wismare haven lieth distant from Femeren south and by east about 7 or 8 leagues, but from Wismare to Gester sand the course is n. n. e. 12 or 13 leagues.  
About south from Gester sand lieth Rostock, 
Rostock.  and there also goeth in a fair haven of ten foot deep, but it is very flat on both sides, you may use it on both sides with the lead. Wismaer and Rostock are distant about 8 or 9 leagues.  
A little east from Rostock lieth a high land called Robbenes, 
Robbenes  from it there reacheth off a great Sand or flat to the Seaward, toward Gester sand: between Gester sand and this Sand it is no deeper than 12 or 13 fathom: if you go nearest to Gester sand, than it is presently dry: but if you go nearest to this Sand, than it is sometimes drier. Gester sand as I said before is a dry Sand, and runneth at least two leagues into the Sea.  
Right east from this Sand aforesaid lieth Berts. 
Berts.  There goeth in a channel of six foot deep, and on the west point there reacheth off a Sand, which you must shun.  
Three or four leagues east from Berts the jelle goeth in, 
To sail into the jelle.  at eight or ten foot deep, there you may go into Mesond or Straelsond, and going into it you may see the steeple of Mesond lying before you, within it is 12 and 14 foot deep, altogether flat water.  
When you sail to Lubeck, between the land of Cruysoort and Holsterland, it showeth thus on both sides.  
Wismar. Great Cruysoort. Little Cruysoort. Holsterland. The East point.  
Thus the Coast of Mekelenburgh, showeth between Cruysoort and Dornebos or the jelle, when you sail along by it a league from the land.  
Berts. Robbenes. Rostock. Oudevaer. Buck point.   view of Mecklenburg  

V The situation of Dornbos, Witmont, jasmont, the Peert and New deep.  

Thornebush.  THe point of Dornbos lieth from jelle north & by west a league and an half: under it you may anchor & lie safe against a North-east and south-west wind.  
From Dornebos to Witmont 
Witmont.  the course is North-east and by east four leagues. Between Dornebos and Witmont there goeth in a great creak, you may there run into it along by Witmont, and there anchor at five or six fathom, safe against a south-west and east wind.  
From Witmont to jasmont 
jasmont.  the course is eastsoutheast two great leagues. Between Witmont and jasmont you may also anchor, there also is a good Rode, at seven or eight fathom, there you may lie safe against a west and south wind, but further from the land, at ten or twelve fathom there is foul ground.  
From jasmont to the Peert 
The Peert.  the course is s. s. e. two leagues. Between jasmont and the Peert one may ride it against a west, south-west, and south wind, it is there all over fair ground.  
The Peert, (which is also called the Great Bocke upon jasmont is a heap or two of trees, and it is an outpoint with two points or ends, and there between them is a brave Sandbaye, where it is good lying at four five fathom fair ground.  

To sail into the New deep.  A league south from the Peert the New Deep goeth in, right within the point there lieth a foul ground under the water, and somewhat inwards to the southerlyest point lieth a dry Sand. To sail into the New Deep, hold the two points one over the other, that is the Peert on the souththerlyest point, and hold it so standing, and so you shall sail right upon the first ton: since there former years there have three tons been laid in the middle of the fair water, southsouthwest and northnortheast from each other. From the third ton to the beacon that standeth upon the end of the Sand that shooteth off from the Roeden the course is southeast, by it you may go about, and anchor behind the Island at five or six fathom. Or if you will go quite within, then run upon the point of Gripswolde, and thereby you may then turn up westwards to Mesond, or eastwards to Stetin. 
To Mesond and Stetin.  That channel is about twelve foot deep, and within it is all flat, and for the most part two or three fathom till you be before the town of Mesond or Straelsond. There lieth an Island, and there is the Veer to set over upon the land of Ruyghen. The town of Gripswold 
Gripswold  lieth in the entry right before you in the River.  
The Coast of Pomeren reacheth from the New Deep to Colsberghen east and by north, and eastnortheast 16 or 17 leagues.  
But between Colsberghen and the New Deep, there lie two Havens more: first the Swim 
Swim.  lying from the New Deep seven leagues, it runneth through with a River, up to Haf, right over against the River of Stetin.  
From the Swim to Camin it is eastnortheast five leagues: Camin 
Camin.  lieth upon the east end of the Stetynsche Haf and goeth also with a River to Haf.  
Thus Witmont showeth when you sail by it being two leagues from the land.   view of 'Witmont' (Germany) 
Thus jasmond showeth when you sail by it, being two leagues from the land.   view of 'Jasmond' (Germany)  

VI The situation of the Island of Borneholme and of the Ertholmes.  
THe Island of Borneholme lieth from the Newe-deepe, north and by east sixteen leagues, but from Witmont North-east and by east twelve leagues.  
From Valsterbon to sail north about Borneholme it is east and by north nineteen leagues: but from Valsterbon to sail south about it is east and by south one-and-twentie or two-and twenty leagues.  

Borneholme.  Borneholme is an Island which is round about fair, and one may sound it round about at twelve and thirteen fathom, and on the south-west side at eight or nine fathom, without any danger: But on the southeast end there lieth a Sand called Brouwers sand, which you must shun. You may anchor round about Bornholme, as before Rottum, Nex, Swanex and Santwick.  
Between Rottum 
Rottum.  and the castle which standeth upon the northwest point, you may anchor at thirteen fathom, and there you lie safe against a North-east wind. You may also anchor under the castle at eighteen or twenty fathom, but the nearer to the land the fouler ground.  
Under the northwest point before Santwick, there also it is good anckoring for a south-west wind, and you may go boldly near to the point. From the northwest point to the other point, the land reacheth eastsoutheast and westnorthwest.  
On the east side of Borneholme it is good anckoring before Swanex and Nex, 
Suanex & Nex.  but by Nex it is not very fair. By Nex there shooteth off a Sand from the land, which on both sides is shoring, but at ten fathom you can not miscarry: there lieth also a rock north from Nex.  
If you will anchor before Nex, you must set the flat steeple, which standeth above Nex between west and west & by south from you, and let the north point be north and by west, and the south point southsouthwest from you, there it is about two-and twenty fathom deep, and it is there fair sandground, for in many places it is nothing but stony and gravely ground, there you lie safe against a south-west wind.  
From the southeast point of Borneholme to Ertholmes 
Eertsholmes.  it is north and by east five leagues, but from the northwest point to Ertholmes it is eastnortheast four leagues. In the Ertholmes it is a fair haven, but because it is not used, it is unknown.  
Thus Borneholme showeth when you come out of the west.   view of Bornholm 
When Eertsholmes is northnortheast from you, it showeth thus.   view of 'Eertsholmes' (Denmark) 
When Eertsholme is east from you it showeth thus.   view of 'Eertsholmes' (Denmark)  

VII. At what reaching and distance these places aforesaid are distant each from other.  

FRom the North end of Langheland to the South end the course is south 8 leagues.  
From the South end of Langheland to Femeren southeast and by east 7 or 8 leagues.  
From Femerens to Gester sand e. and by n. 9 leagues.  
From Gester sand to Meun n. n. e. 8 leagues.  
From Gester to Meun North-east 7 leagues.  
From Meun to Steden northwest and by north 4 leagues.  
From Meun to Falsterboen n. and by e. 5 leagues.  
From the Island of Areu to the Roen e. and by s. 3 leagues.  
From Roen to Arr or Copingh s. e. and by e. 5 leagues.  
From Arr to the south end of Langheland southeast & by east and somewhat easterlyer 4 leagues.  
From Areu to Apenrade s. s. w. 5 leagues.  
From the River of Apenrade to the Straight of Sonderborgh east more than 2 leagues.  
From Sonderburgh to the slay s. e. and by e. 4 leagues.  
From the Sley to the Kiel southeast 4 leagues.  
From Kiel to Femeren east and by north 8 leagues.  
From Femerens to the Trave of Lubeck s. s. w. 9 or 10 leagues.  
From the Trave of Lubeck to Wismer haven first North-east and by north, and then eastnortheast 9 leagues.  
From Rostock to Robbenesse North-east 5 leagues.  
From Robbenesse to Thornebush n. e. and by e. 7 leagues.  
From Thornebush to Witmont n. e. and by e. 4 leagues.  
From Witmont to jasmont eastsoutheast 2 leagues.  
From jasmont to the Peert s. s. e. 3 leagues.  
From jasmont to Camin eastsoutheast 19 leagues.  
From the Poolsche sand on the Island of Aelst to Femeren eastsoutheast 13 or 14 leagues.  
From Femerens to Wismar deep south and by east 7 leagues.  
From Femerens to Rostock e. s. e. 8 or 9 leagues.  
From the Trave of Lubeck to Gestir sand the course is North-east and south-west about 19 leagues.  
From Wismar to Gestir sand n. n. e. 12 or 13 leagues.  
From Rostock to Gestir sand north 7 or 8 leagues.  
From Gestir sand to Dornebosch east 9 leagues.  
From Dornebosch to Meun northwest 9 leagues.  
From Dornebusch to Bornholme North-east and North-east and by east 16 leagues.  
From Witmond to Borneholme North-east 13 leagues.  
From the New deep to Borneholme north and by east 16 or 17 leagues.  
From Meun to Borneholme east 19 leagues.  
From Steden to the north end of Borneholme is the course east and by north 20 leagues.  
From Valsterboen or from the sand north from Borneholme about, the course is east and by north 19 leagues.  
From Valsterbon or from the sand south from Borneholme about, the course is east and by south 21 leagues.  
From Valsterbon to jasmont southeast 16 or 17 leagues.  
How all the rest of the points and islands in the east Sea are distant from Borneholme, that shall you find described in the next Chapter following.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 25.   

CHAPTER VI THE DESCRIPTION OF the Sea-coasts of Pomerland and Prusia, from Colberghen to Memle.  

I. The situation between Colberghen and Righshooft ..  
THe New deep and Colberghen (as I said in the former Chapter) lie distant east and north, and eastnortheast sixteen or seventeen leagues.  
You must sail into the Haven of Colberghen 
Colberghen.  between two Heads, close before the town. Within the River of Colberghen, right over against the town there lieth a Pit or Well, which yieldeth salt to all the Countries there about, but they must seethe it, yet the water of the River is as fresh as milk, for it is an out-water.  
The Coast of Pomerland reacheth from Colberghen to Garshooft 
Garshooft  North-east and by north about thirteen leagues, but between them both there lie two Havens called Coslyn and Ruwold.  
The haven of Coslyn lieth distant from Colberghen North-east four leagues. And from Coslyn 
Coslyn.  to Ruwold the course is northnortheast five leagues. In Ruwold 
Ruwold.  Haven, or in the River called Wipper a good ship may well go in, for there come many Craers out. From Ruwold to Garshooft it is northnortheast four leagues.  
The land from Garshooft to Righshooft reacheth eastnortheast nineteen or twenty leagues: between them there lie the Havens of Stolp, Lyba and Sernevises.  
Right east from Garshooft lieth Stolp 
Stolp.  haven, which is a River called by the name of the town, which runneth unto the said town, it is a River for small ships, although some reasonable great ships lad there.  
From Garshooft to Reefcole it is all white strand, lying distant east four leagues. Reefcol is a high round Hill, whereby you know the land when you go from Borneholme. From Reefcol to Lyba it is seven leagues.  
Lyba lieth upon a great River called the Osse. From Lyba 
Lyba.  to Sernevisse or Sernesse it is five leagues. Between them both there lie the three Wolsackes, 
Wolsackes  which are three black stumps of trees, by the which this Land is well known, and right east from those three hillocks there lieth a long Hill, which when you come out of the west, and are at the west end of it showeth as if it were divided into three or four hillocks. After that followeth the high land of Righshooft, which is very shoring on the water side. Between Righshooft and Reefcol it is a white strand, and for the most part full of trees.  
Sernesse or Sernevisse 
Sernevisse.  is a town lying upon an out-water, which with a River runneth into the Sea, but within it divideth itself into a great water. From Sernevesse to Righshooft it is four leagues.  
You may sound about Righshooft 
Righshooft.  sufficiently at fiveteene or twenty fathom: You may also anchor under Righshooft, for there it is better ground then under Heel. All Pomerland along by the Sea-coast showeth black with trees that stand upon it.  
Thus the land of Pomerland showeth between Colsberghen and the Stolp, when you sail along by it two leagues from the land.   view of Poland 
Pasca●●van een deel der host ●●sschen Bornholm end ●●emel, vertonende de ware ●●theijt der Zeecusten van Pr●, Cassouben, end Pomeren, ●sgaders de monden der Ri● Havenen, end Reeden, aende ●eeven Custen geleghen, Hoeme●●selve allo beseijlen en h●●r all Reven, Sanden, ●cken, Drooch ten en pe●en daer ontrent hoeden shall Cart Marine aune party de la Mer de Germany, entre Bornholm et Memel, representant la uraije situation des costes de Mer de la Prussie, Cassoubie, et Pomere, Emsemble les embonchures des Rivieres, Ports et Rades dicelles costs, comment on les marinera, et se gardera des bancs de sable, improsonditez, et lieux dangereux environ lesdictes places   map of the coast of Poland 
Thus the land showeth between Reefcol and Righshooft when you sail along, about three leagues from the land.  
Righshooft. Wolsackes. Reefcol.   view of Poland  

II. To sail from Righshooft to Danzig.  
FRom Righshooft to Heel the course is southeast eight or nine leagues: when you come near Heel, 
Heel.  than you are presently deep thirty fathom, and the Coast of Heel close by the land is 24 and 30 fathom.  
You may anchor under Heel at sixteen & twenty fathom close by the land, there it is a very sloping ground, when you are a little from the land, than you find no ground, for without the land you have no ground at forty fathom. 
Road under Heel.  A league north from Heel there runneth a flat off from the land, whereof you must take heed. When you will anchor before Heel, you may anchor on both sides of Heel, but on the inner side it is soft ground.  
From Heel to Danzig before the Wissel the course is south and by west five leagues. If you will anchor before Wysel 
To anchor before Wisel.  then anchor west from the Kisten or the West head at ten or twelve fathom.  
But to sail into the Wesel 
To sail into the Wesel.  or the Haven of Dansk, then take heed to the two masts, whereon there stand two barrels, which stand upon the Kisten or the West head, place them one against the other, and sail up upon them, and go in between the two Heads, but when you are within Termunde, then choose the east side, for the west side is flat, and when you come before Botesmans' flat, then go on Groenswoort side, and there make your ship fast with four cables or ropes. Wesel channel was wont to run in by the east side, but that is wholly stopped and spoiled.  
Thus the land showeth between Righshooft and Heel.  
Heel. Vernoorde. Acxternes. Righshooft.   view of Poland  

III. To sail to Conincxberghen and Memle.  
FRom Wesel to Conincxberghen Haven the course is eastnortheast, and North-east and by east thirteen leagues: but from Righshooft to Conincxberghen haven it is east and by south seventeen or eighteen leagues: and from Heel it is distant thirteen leagues east and west. It is altogether fair white strand, 
To sail into Conincxberghen haven.  and on both sides of the Haven there stand dry trees as if they were burnt, and on the west side there stand two beacons, which you must place one against the other, and sailing up upon them than you find the tons: the tons lie on both sides of the channel, and you must sail in between the tons, until you come within the Ketle, there you may lie in the wind at three and four fathom, than you come into a great Haf or Haven, which goeth up eastward to Conincxberghen, and southeast to Melvin 
Melvin.  and Brunsberghen. 
Brunsberghen.   
The two Havens aforesaid of Dansk and Conincksberghen commonly alter every year, by means of the streams of the out-waters, and the great force of the flackes of ice, so that I can not well write of the stretching of them of any certainty, but the Governors of the land have great care thereof, so that they cause them to be continually well marked and beaconed.  
Four leagues north and north and by west from Coninksberghen lieth the point of Loocsteede, 
Lockstede  or Brusteroort.  
There standeth a castle with a church by it, not far from each other, and there also there are two high hillocks, and there it is all full of trees.  
If you will anchor before Conincxberghen channel or haven, you must place the point of Lockstede north and by east from you, and there it will be eight or nine fathom deep.  
From the point of Lookstede to the haven of Memle 
The Memle.  n. n. e. 16 or 17 leagues: there between them both it is altogether a fair strand, & there the land lieth in a great bought or creak. The haven of Memle reacheth in n. e. and n. e. and by e. and it is two fathom deep, being within it you go into a great haven or water, and westward up about the point you may anchor where you will.  
Thus the land showeth between Conincxberghen deep and Lock stead.  
Lockestede. Hankeheer.   view of Russia  

FOUR Of the Depths and shallows lying in these Channels.  
SWin lieth about south from Borneholme, and in the channel between them both, when you may see Borneholme it is 26 fathom deep, and when you may plainly see the Swyn, there it is 7 and 8 fathom deep, but when you cannot discern the land it is 12 or 13 fathom deep, for there along by the Pomersche coast it is all flat, & that most between New deep and Garshooft, but towards Reefcol, Ryshooft, and Heel it is 20, and 22, and 25 fathom deep by the Coast.  
About 7 or 8 leagues south-west and by south from Borneholme there lieth a bank, which is no deeper than five fathom.  
This bank reacheth northwest and southeast, and in this haven there lie more banks, some of 6, 7, 8, 9, and also 10, 11, 12 and 13 fathom.  
From Colsberghen to Garshooft it is altogether an even and flat strand without banks.  
In the channel between Borneholme and Reefcol, it is 27 & 28 fathom deep.  
About four leagues from the land, northwest from Reefcol there lieth a bank of nine fathom, and if you use your lead till you come to Righshooft, you shall then find more banks than are spoken of here.  
When Righshooft is s. s. w. from you about a league there it is 30 fathom deep, and there it is altogether uneven and bankie, and the ground is white great sand.  
When Righshooft is west from you, there it is 16 fathom deep, and the ground is white sand.  
When Righshooft lieth southeast from you, than you have 28 fathom deep, with red stony ground, as if it were bankie sand.  
Between Heel and Righshooft, but nearest to Heel, there it is 33 fathom deep, and there the ground is white sand.  
At Heel in the Road it is 25 fathom deep: the ground is very sloping to 30 and 40 fathom, it is black sand.  
Between Heel and Conincxberghen it is very deep, coming against Heel it is shoring, but to Conincxberghen and the Nerungh it goeth naturally and flat up.  
Between Lockestede and Sevenberghen in Coerland it is all flat rising ground, and there you may see the land at 30 and 32 fathom.   

V How these Lands and Places in their reaches and distances are situate from each other.  

FRom Camin to Colsberghen the course is North-east and by east 4 leagues.  
From Colsberghen to Castlyn North-east 4 leagues.  
From Caslyn to Ruwold n. n. e. 5 leagues.  
From Ruwold to Garshooft n. n. e. 4 leagues.  
From Garshooft to Reefcol n. e. and by e. 4 leagues.  
From Reefcol to Liba e. n. e. 7 leagues.  
From Liba to Sernevisse e. n. e. 5 leagues.  
From Sernevisse to Righshooft eastnortheast 4 leagues.  
From Righshooft to Axternes southeast 4 leagues.  
From Axternes to Vernorden southeast more than a league.  
From Vernorden to Heel n. n. w. and s. s. e. above a league.  
From Heel to Dansk s. and by w. 5 leagues.  
From the Heads of Dansk to Conincxberghen haven e. n. e. and n. e. and by e. 13 leagues.  
From Conincxberghen haven to Lockstede north and north & by west 4 leagues.  
From Lockstede to Memle n. n. e. 16 or 17 leagues.  
From Colsberghen to Garshooft n. e. and by n. 13 leagues.  
From Reefcol to Righshooft e. n. e. 16 leagues.  
From Righshooft to Conincxberghen haven east and by south 17 leagues.  
From Righshooft to Memle North-east & by east 29 leagues.  
From the south end of Borneholme to the Swim s. 13 leagues.  
From the south end of Borneholme to Colsberghen southeast 16 leagues.  
From the south end of Bornholme to Reefcol east & by north 24 leagues.  
And when you lose the sight of Borneholme, than you see Reefcol again within an hour after.  
From the northend of Borneholme, or from Ertholmes to Righshooft east, and east and by north 40 leagues.  
From the northend of Borneholme, or from the Ertholmes to Memle e. & by n. and somewhat northerlyer 65 leagues.    

VI How these Points and Places are distant from other Lands.  

FRom the northend of Borneholme to Utstede northwest 8 leagues.  
From Borneholme to Hanno n. and by w. 12 leagues.  
From Borneholme to the Der-clippen or Uyt-clippen northnortheast 19 leagues.  
From the east or south end of Borneholme to the south end of Oeland northnortheast 26 leagues.  
From the west or north end of Borneholme to the Southnoorden, or the south end of Oeland North-east and by north 25 leagues.  
From Borneholme to Houghburgh, or the south end of Gotland the course is n. e. & somewhat northerlyer 50 leagues.  
From Borneholme to Ostergarde's North-east, or somewhat northerlyer 61 or 63 leagues.  
From Borneholme to Winda is the course North-east & by east, and somewhat easterlyer 80 or 82 leagues.  
From Garshooft to Calmersond north and by west 32 leagues.  
From Righshooft to Hanno west and by north, or somewhat northerlyer about 38 or 40 leagues.  
From Righshooft to the south end of Oeland the course is northwest 33 leagues.  
From Righshooft to Houburgh, the south end of Gotland north and by west 34 leagues.  
From Righshooft to Ostergarde is the course north and south 45 leagues.  
From Righshooft to Dagheroort n. n. e. 80 leagues.  
From Righshooft to Derwinda the course is North-east and by north 54 leagues.  
From Righshooft to Sevenberghen North-east 33 leagues.  
From Conincxberghen deep to Southernoorden, or the south end of Oeland n. w. & by w. and w. n. w. 50 leagues  
From Conincxberghen haven to Houburgh, or the south end of Gotland northwest and by north 48 leagues.  
From Memle to Houburgh is the course w. n. w. 37 leagues.    
Here followeth the Card N 26.   

CHAPTER VII. A DESCRIPTION OF the Sea-coasts and islands of Lyfland, which lie between Memle and Reule.  

I. The situation of Memle to Domesnes.  
FRom Memle to Sevenberghen the land reacheth northnorthwest 11 leagues: but three leagues south from Sevenberghen lieth Helighawe or Heligher Rou, 
Heligher Rou.  which is a place where you lad all kind of wares.  
Four leagues north from Sevenberghen lieth the River of Ter Liba: This River is six foot deep, & goeth far up into the land: but within you come to a great water. Terliba 
Terliba.  is also a lading place, where you lad all kind of Coerland Ware.  
From Olma or Terliba to Backovens 
Bacovens.  the course is north and by east seven or eight leagues, next to Domesnes it is the best land to be known in all Coerland: it is certain hillocks or downs with trees, which show out above the rest of the land. About three leagues south from Backovens there lieth an outpoint called Steensoort, 
Steensort.  which is flat like Luseroort, but it is stony ground. And this Steensoort lieth about four or five leagues south from Derwinda. 
Derwinda  The coast of Cóerland from Sevenberghen to Derwinda reacheth north and by east fifteen or sixteen leagues. At Derwinda there standeth a castle with two or three steeples, whereby it is well known.  
About seven leagues west and by north from Derwinda lieth a bank, upon which there is no more water than five fathom, it is about half a league broad, and groweth deeper on both sides easily, but how far it stretcheth northward or southward is unknown to me.  
From Derwinda to Luseroort 
Luseroort  it is North-east and by north four leagues. Luseroort is an outpoint, but when you are against it then the land seemeth all to have one reach, but when you are a league or two on the east side thereof, than you see it to be an outpoint. Against Luseroort it is all flat water three leagues into the Sea.  
The land of Luseroort to Domesnes reacheth North-east and by east, and somewhat easterlyer about twelve leagues.  
From the south end of Oesel, called Swalueroort 
Swalueroort.  there shooteth off a Sand south and by west at least two leagues into the Sea, between Domesnes and Luseroort, but nearest to Luseroort, and shooteth to the flat of Luseroort, it is a bad Sand, very hard and broad, at some places it is dry, 
Oesle sand  and four fathom deep, and in some places shallower, as you are distant from the point of Oesel, for at some places about Oesel it is dry, and again at some places two, two and an half, and three fathom deep. To conclude it is hard and very uneven, and a man must there be very careful of it. West from that Sand there lie also many Dwalegrounds, which reach north about the coast of Oesel, which in some places are no deeper than two three, four and five fathom.  
If you will go to Ryge, and coming out of the Sea fall upon Derwinda, you must not leave the coast of Coerland, 
To avoid Oesle sand  but you must run about the flat of Luseroort at five fathom, or somewhat less, that you may not sail without the Sand of Oesel. The channel between the flat of Luseroort & the Sand of Oesel is not above eight or nine fathom deep, but commonly you have seven fathom, than you go just about this flat. The ground here against Luseroort in some places is very uneven, sometimes six, sometimes eight and nine fathom: at one cast of the lead you shall have two or three fathom less or more than at another time, and that not very far from the land, but you need not fear it, for (as I said before) you may go near the land at four or five fathom without fear.  
Afbeeldinghe der Zeecusten van Coerlant en Lijflant niet all de eijlanden en Jnwijcken tusschen der Memel en Revel aende self custen geleghen, Vertoonende hoemen in't beseijlen der sclver landen all ondiepten, Reven, bancken, dwaelgronden, en periculeuse plaetsen daer aen en omme g●leghen bequamelijck shall moghen mijden en wijcken  
Pourtraicture des Rivages de Mer de Courlande et Lijflande, avecq toutes les Jsles et Goulphes entre Memel et Revel a ladicte cost gisantes, Monstrant comment singlant le long a icelles costs on pourra eviter et se garder des improfonditez, bancs a sable, fonds, abusifs, et lieux dangereux gisants environ ladicts endroitz   map of the coast of Liefland 
Thus the Coast of Coerland showeth itself about Sevenberghen when you sail along by it, being a league from it.   view of Courland 
Thus the Coast of Coreland showeth from Domesnes to Derwinda, and the Backovens to Sevenberghen.  
Domesnes. Luseroort. Derwinda. Backovens Towards Sevenberghen.   view of Courland 
When you sail about Domesnes then the land of Oesel showeth thus   view of Oesel  

II. To sail from Domesnes to Ryghe and Parmout.  
FRom the point of Domesnes there shooteth off a Sand eastnortheast, and North-east and by east a league into the Sea. 
Sand of Domesnes   
From Domesnes to Rye the coast reacheth first from Domdanghen southeast four leagues: From thence to Voorwalen also southeast five leagues, and all southeast to Tucken. From Tucken it reacheth first east, than eastnortheast, and North-east to the down, or the River of Rye. From Vorewalen to Dunemond it is east and by south twelve leagues, and there the land between both falleth into a great creak.  
From Domesnes to Dunemond, or the haven of Ryghe the course is southeast and by east one-and-twentie leagues. And from Domesnes to the Island Ruynen 
The Island Ruynen.  the course is east and by north eight leagues. You may sound the Island of Ruynen round about at seven and six fathom, yet on the eastsoutheast side it runneth flat a good way off: along the whole west side, or south-west side it is all foul, sharp stony ground, come no nearer the shore there then six fathom, for at such depth you shall sometime sound five, six and seven fathom: Neither is there any good lying there, but on the east side as you come about the southeast corner, there is a little Bay or creak, near whereto stand certain small houses, which may be seen as you come near the shore, there about is it good lying against west winds at five or six fathom, fair sand ground: but when the wind blows hard it will raule there, otherwise round about it is sharp ground: but some say that on the south side it is fair ground.  
From Ruynen to Dunemond the course is southeast sixteen leagues. If you will anchor before the haven of Duyn, 
To anchor before the Haven of Ry.  than anchor at thirteen fathom, south or north from the Haven where you will. Between Ruynen and Dunemond in the channel it is 23 and 24 fathom deep.  
To sail into the haven of Ryge, then set the town of Ryge south and by east, 
To sail into the River of Righe.  or southsoutheast from you, and sail up upon it, so long until that the Poolsche castle standeth eastsoutheast from you, than the houses of Dunemond will be southeast from you, than you shall see a great tree, set that right north from the said houses, that is where the castle of Dunemond stood, for the castle of Dunemond is broken down by them of Ryghe, while Duke Charles of Sweathland lay there about with his ships: but to know this tree, you shall understand that there right north there standeth a dry tree, whereby you may easily know it: now when you have the marks aforesaid of the great tree and the houses, one against the other (as I said before) than you are right before the haven of the Duyn, keep them standing so, and sail right up upon them, and you shall find the right channel, it is about three fathom and an half deep at the entry: you must also coming north or south sound the land, and run along by it at three or four fathom, till the said marks of the houses and the tree are against each other, and so run in upon them, as I said before. The land on both sides within the haven is flat, but when you are over the entry than it is deeper, and the west side shoring or steep, but the east side is flat, and so runneth far out, then go boldly close by the west side, till you be before Boldra, but coming against it you must put somewhat off from the land, for south from Boldra there cometh a Sand shooting off, which in sailing up you may sail under: this is Pilots water as well in going up as in coming down, for in such rivers as have great streams, the shallows alter and change many times, not only by reason of the daily streams, but also of the running of great waters, so that it is not certain to trust to such description as men may make thereof, which every man must think on.  
Thus Ruynen showeth when you sail by it.   view of 'Ruynen' (Estonia) 
Thus the land showeth east from the haven of Ryghe.   view of Riga 
From the Haven of Ry to Parnout 
Parnout.  the course is north and by east twenty leagues.  
About half way between them both, eleven leagues from Righe, and nine leagues from Parnout, there lieth a town called Lemsale, or Sales, 
Lemsale or Sales.  there lieth a bank before the haven, you may go behind it, (behind it it is three fathom deep) you may go about it on both sides, there goeth a channel into Sales of eight foot deep.  
From Ruynen to the Island kin the course is eastnortheast eleven leagues. Kin and Sales lie distant northwest and southeast, it is a low Island, about three leagues long, and hath most part all foul ground. From Kin to Manno and Sorcholme, 
Manno. Sorcholme  all to Parnout, the course is North-east and by north eight leagues. Between Kin and the coast of Lyfland it is wide four leagues▪ and the right deep there between them both is eight or nine fathom. Against Manno and Sorcholme it is five and six fathom deep, and the coast of Coerland is there altogether a fair strand. Parnout lieth there in a great creak, and before Parnout it is three and four fathom deep: 
Road before Parnout.  If you will anchor before Parnout, place the steeple of Parnout northnortheast from you, there is the best Rode.  
The Island kin and the haven of Righelye distant south and north thirteen or fourteen leagues.   

III. The situation of the Eastcoast of Oesle.  
ABout two leagues and an half northwest from Domesnes is the Road of Oesle, 
Road of Oesle.  when the church of Oesel is west and by north half a league from you, and the point of Oesle whereon the houses stand west, there is the best Road at seven fathom soft ground, there you lie safe against a westsouthwest wind, all along by Oesle it is flat ground, of three four and five fathom.  
Five leagues northward from Domesnes lieth the Island Abrick, 
Abrick.  which lieth distant from Ruynen northwest and by west, and southeast and by east seven or eight leagues, and there between them both it is almost full of Dwalegrounds, of three four, five & six fathom, but they lie nearest to Abrick. Abrick is a foul Island, with stony ground, and many Dwalegrounds; it lieth within a league and an half of Oesle. From Abrick to Arensbergh, 
Arensbergh.  in Oesle, the course is north and by west four or five leagues, it is a lading place for barley and fat wares. From the south end of Oesle to Arensbergh through within Abrick it is northnortheast eleven leagues.  
From Abrick to the north end, or North-east end of Oesle the course is North-east and somewhat norrtherlyer ten or eleven leagues: but from Ruynen to the aforesaid point of Oesle it is north 13 leagues. If you will sail from Abrick or from Ruynen, about the North-east point of Oesle you must take good heed of the Paternosters, 
Paternosters.  which is a Sand a league from the said point reaching into the Sea. From the North-east point of Oesle to Parnout the coast of Lyfland reacheth eastsoutheast and westnorthwest.  
The Island Abrick lying a league from Oesle.   view of Abruka  

FOUR The situation of the West-coast of Oesle and of Dageroort.  
FRom the south end of Oesle (as I said before) there shooteth off a great Sand south and by west into the Sea, almost three leagues. From Swalueroort or the south end of Oesle to Hondsoort 
Hondsoort.  the course is northnorthwest, and north and by west sixteen leagues. Between them both lie two lading places, called Wycke and Reecke: 
Wyke and Reek.  this coast of Oesle is very uneven and foul ground, and about the south end there lie many Dwalegrounds, of three or four fathom, which are very hard.  
From Hondsoort to the point of Dageroort the course is northnorthwest eight leagues. Upon Dageroort 
Dageroort  there standeth a high steeple or tower, which they of Reule built there, to know the land by it: and between Hondsoort & Dageroort there is a great creak, for there goeth also a water between Dageroort and Oesle, but is very flat and dry, so that no ships can go through it. Such ships as mistake Swalueroort or Oesle, many times are at their wits ends in this creak, for there is no manner of thing to know the land by, and there it is all sharp ground, but when you come against the land of Dageroort, when you are in this creak, than you see the said tower of Dageroort over the land, whereby men then know it. Under the point of Dageroort there is fair Sandground, and very good anckoring against the north and North-east winds. You may run about the point of Dageroort at seven or eight fathom, and north from the point it is also good lying.  
From Dageroort to Sibrichsnes 
Sybrighsnes.  the land reacheth North-east about seven leagues. Between them both, that is three leagues from Dageroort and four leagues from Sibrichsnes, there reacheth a Sand cross from the land northwest into the Sea six or seven leagues, and it is a flat sloping land, going to the Scharen: first it is of three, four, five, six and seven fathom, and then it is sometimes deeper, to the Finsche Scharen.  
Sybrichsnes is an outpoint that hath two points, from either of which shooteth off a Riffe or Sand: but between the two Sands there is good Road, fair flat ground, and good sandground, there you may anchor as near the shore as you will at six, five or four fathom: but a little west from the westerlyest point of Sybrichsnes, not far from the land, there lieth a shallow about as great as a ship, where it is no deeper than twelve foot water.  
From Sibrighsnes to Oetgensholme the course is eastnortheast seven leagues. Between them both the Meunsond goeth in.  
South from Oetgensholme there goeth a great creak into the land, whereon there lieth an Island, and above the Island there lieth a town called Hapsale, 
Hapsale.  you may anchor there where you will. On the south side of this creak there runneth a great Sand or Stone-shelfe somewhat more than a league into the Sea, which is very broad, 
Sand of Hapsale.  there you may go in by it to Meunsond.  
Thus the land of Dageroort showeth to Sybrichsnes.  
Sybrichnes'. Dageroort.   view of 'Dageroort' (Estonia)  

V To sail into the Meunsond behind or north about from Oesle, to the creak of Ryghe.  
FRom Sibrighsnes to Osseholme & Grasholmes 
Grasholm.  the course is s. e. four or five leagues. The Grasholms are two green islands, and Osseholme 
Osseholm.  lieth about a league west from Grasholmes, where you may sail round about, and also anchor: but about a league north, and north and by east from Osseholme, there lieth a Landlose-ground which you must shun, which is called the West Grasseground, for there are two shallows which are called the Grasgrounds: 
Grasgrounds.  the other Grasground which is called the Easterly, lieth over against Grasholme to the Sand of Hapsale, having no more than four or five foot water, if you will sail into Meunsond, you must be very careful to shun it.  
If you will sail through Meunsond 
To sail into Meunsond.  from Oetgens you must go southsouthwest to Grasholme, and there sail in close by it, to shun the Grasground which there lieth eastward over against it. From Grasholme to the point of Oesle, whereon the great tree standeth, the course is southsoutheast seven leagues. From Grasholme to Oesle there lie four islands, each about a league from the other. When you sail from Grasholme to Oesle, than you sail along by these islands, leaving them about two or three cables length on starboard, till you come to the land of Oesle, right over against the great tree, in that channel it is five fathom deep.  
When you sail in this manner and come before the Grasground, then on baghborde you find an Island, and against it, the haven or channel goeth in to the castle of Meunsond, 
Meunsond castle.  at three fathom, and then it is somewhat flatter, for there it is full of Sands. South or west from the said Island there goeth in a channel, which you may sail through to Oesle, and then you leave the two islands on the south end of Oesle on starboard.  
But the right and best channel goeth from the aforesaid great tree along by the land of Oesle, which is three or four fathom deep, and at last it is six fathom, seven and eight fathom deep again, and sailing along by it, than you leave the two aforesaid islands by the end of Oesle on baghborde. From the great Tree to the first Island the course is eastsoutheast five leagues, then from the first Island to the second southeast, and then forth to the end of Oesle east and by south, and coming about there, you may sail into the Righsche Sea, or the creak eastsoutheast to Kin, south to Ruynen, and south-west or somewhat southerlyer to Abrick, or whither you will: but you must take good heed of the Paternoster, which shooteth off from the point of Oesle, almost a league into the Sea.   

VI The situation of Oetgensholme to Reule.  
THe Island of Oetgensholme 
Oetgensholme.  may be sailed round about, and you may also anchor behind it at six or seven fathom.  
From Oetgensholme to great Roghe 
Great Roghe.  the course is east and by north, or a little easterlyer four leagues: between them both a little beside the right channel lieth a shallow which you may sail round about: this Shallow lieth with a Rig of Sand even and alike with the water, and round about is rocky and stony. Great Roghe is a white outpoint, wherein there are two or three chalk hills. Behind Oetgensholme, south from Great Roghe, there lieth another point, called Little Roghe, 
Little Roghe.  between Great and Little Roghe there goeth in a wide River or Haven of six and seven fathom, but in the end it is dry. It is there all fair ground, and good to anchor in.  
From Great Roghe to the Island Nargen, 
Nargen.  the course is east and west five leagues. When you sail from Great Roghe to Narghen, three or four leagues east from great Roghe you find a point called Surp, 
Surp.  wherein also there lie two white spots or patches, and then you see the Island of Nargen lying out before you, if then you will sail to Reule, then leave the Island Nargen on baghborde, & run in by the point of Surp, about east, to the end of the Island, and when you are at the end of the Island, them go on eastsoutheast more than a league, so shall you come by the end of the Sand that shooteth off from Bare Carels, come no nearer unto it then at six fathom: Now when the castle of Reule cometh without the Carels, 
The situation of the Road before Reule.  then sail straight to the east side of the Head at Reule, & there let your anchor fall, and turn with your beak head or your stern to the Head, and make it fast there with four ropes, for-that the north and northnorthwest winds blow there open into the Haven, so that there it heaveth and setteth very much.  
From the southend of Nargen to the Island Wolf 
Wolf.  the course is east, and east and by north four leagues, and that Island is a league long. Northnorthwest and northwest and by north two leagues from the west end of this Island, and North-east and North-east and by east from the north end of Nargen lieth a rock or stone called the Reule stone, when the steeple of Reule cometh against the west end of the Island, than you are past or east of this rock. The right marks of the Reule stone are these: when the North-east end of Nargen is south-west and south-west and by west from you, and the steeple of Reule is a windbeames length west of the Island Wolf, then are you just about it, there is but three foot water. In Summer when it is fair wether, sometimes the water is so smooth, that the waves beat not upon the rock: but if it be rough wether you may easily perceive it by the breaking of the waves. The Reule stone is very steep, you must not come nearer unto it then twelve fathom.  
From the west end of the Island Wolf shooteth out a point northward into the Sea, about a fourth part of a league toward the Reule stone, upon the end of the point lie five or six stones something above the water, so that they may well be perceived. If you come sailing from Reule north and by west beside the Wolf so long till the point of Surp come even against the Island of Nargen, than you have just the length of that point, then look out of the ship on starboard, and you shall see the foresaid stones upon the end of the point, you may run about by them at five fathom without danger.   

VII. How these Places are distant from each other.  

FRom Memle to Sevenberghen is the course northnorthwest 11 leagues.  
From Sevenberghen to Derwinda north & by east distant 15 or 16 leagues.  
From Derwinda to Luseroort North-east and by north distant 4 leagues.  
From Luseroort to Domesnes North-east and by east, and eastnortheast 12 leagues.  
From Domesnes to Domdanghen southeast 4 leagues.  
From Domdanghen to Ferwalen s. e. 5 leagues.  
From Ferwalen to Duynemond e. and by s. 12 leagues.  
From Domesnes to Duynemond or the haven of Righe southeast and by east 21 leagues.  
From Domesnes to Ruynen is the course east and by north 8 leagues.  
From Ruynen to Duynemond southeast 16 leagues.  
From Ruynen to the Island Kin eastnortheast 11 leagues.  
From Duynemond to Lemsale or Sales north and by east 11 leagues.  
From Lemsale to Parnout is the course north and by east 9 leagues.  
From the haven of Ry to the Island Kin north 13 or 14 leagues.  
From Domesnes to the south end of Oesle westnorthwest 3 leagues.  
From Domesnes to the Road of Oesle northwest also 3 leagues.  
From Domesnes to Abrick north 5 leagues.  
But Abrick and Ruynen are distant southeast and by east, and northwest and by west 7 or 8 leagues.  
From Abrick to the northend of Oesle North-east & somewhat northerlyer 10 or 11 leagues.  
From Ruynen to the North-east end of Oesle is the course north 13 leagues.  
From the south end of Oesle to Arensbergh northnortheast 11 leagues.  
From Arensbergh to the North-east end of Oesle eastnortheast 8 or 9 leagues.  
From the south end of Oesle Swalueroort to Hantsort is the course northnorthwest and north and by west 16 leagues.  
From Hansort to Dagheroort northnorthwest 8 leagues.  
From Dagheroort to Sibrighsnes is the course North-east about 7 leagues.  
From Sibrighsnes to Osseholme and Grasholme southeast distant 4 or 5 leagues.  
From Grasholme to the great tree upon Oesle southsoutheast 7 leagues.  
From Grasholme to Oetgensholme is the course northnortheast 8 leagues.  
From Sibrighsnes to Oetgensholme it is eastnortheast about 8 leagues.  
From Oetgensholme to Great Roghe east and by north distant 4 leagues.  
From Great Roghe to Narghen east 5 leagues.  
From the south end of Nargen to the Island Wolf east, and east and by north 4 leagues.  
From Derwinda to Dagheroort north and by west, and somewhat northerlyer 33 leagues.    

VIII. How these Lands are situate in respect of other Lands, in the reaches and distances.  

FRom Sevenberghen to Righshooft south-west 33 leagues.  
From Sevenberghen to Southernorden west and somewhat southerly 48 leagues.  
From Derwinda to Houburgh west and by south 37 leagues.  
From Derwinda to Ostergarde west 29 leagues.  
From Derwinda to Goetsche sand● the course northwest and by west 31 or 32 leagues.  
From Luseroort to Houburgh west and by south, and somewhat southerlyer 40 leagues.  
From Luseroort to the point of Alant, or the islands northnorthwest 59 leagues.  
From Dageroort to Ostergarde south-west and south-west and by south 37 leagues.  
From Dageroort to Righshooft southsouthwest 80 leagues.  
From Dageroort to Goetsche Sand south-west and by west 27 leagues.  
From Dageroort to Boechschaer west and by north 21 leagues.  
From Dageroort to the point of Aland or the islands northwest 24 leagues.  
From Dageroort to the haven of Abbo or Wtoy northwest & by north 20 leagues.  
From Sibrighsnes to the haven of Abbo or Wtoy northwest 20 leagues.  
From Oetgesholme to the haven of Abbo northwest and by west 27 leagues.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 27.   


Beschijvinghe vande wonderlijcke gebroocken custe van Oost-Vinlant, Jtem vande noordelijcste deelen van Lijflant, end de custen van Ruslant aened vijterste vande Ooster 〈◊〉 geleghen, Hoemen all plaetsen aldaer beseijlen en all sorchelijcke clippen, viiijlen, en ondiepten schouwen shall Description de ládmirable et entrerompue eoste d' host finlande, Jtem des parties Septentrionales de Lijflande, et des costes de Russie, situez a la mer de Finlande, monstrant come en navigant lelong desdictes costs on ij evitera tous escueils, et lieux perilleux.   map of the coasts of Finland and Livonia   

CHAPTER VIII. A DESCRIPTION OF the Sea-coasts of Lyfland, Russia, and Finland, from Reule to the Narve, and Wyborgh, and from thence to Alants Haf.  

I. The situation between Reule and the Narve.  
IN the former Chapter it is showed how you shall sail from Nargen to Reule, before the town, and also to the Island of Wolf.  
From the Wolf to the Island of Wranger 
I'll of Wranger,  the course is east and by south, but going outward about, it is east and by north seven or eight leagues. Under Wranger there is good Road, and good anckoring on both sides, and all over good anchor ground. But on the southside from Wranger lieth a long small Island, which is rocky and foul. Northwest and northwest and by north about a league from Wranger lieth a rock, and about two leagues from Wranger lieth also another little Island.  
From Wranger to the Eecholmes 
Eckholme  it is east, and east and by north thirteen leagues. Between them both lieth a foul point upon the Coast of Lyfland, which you must shun, for there lie many Rocks off from it, otherwise all the Coast of Lyfland is very fair, all along to the River of Narve. Between this foul point aforesaid, and the Island of Eeckholme there is a fair creak upon the Coast of Lyfland, 
Road unner Lyfland.  where you may anchor safely against a southeast wind. The Eckholmes also are fair round about, and under them it is good road.  
From the Eckholmes to Telsborgh, it is east and west six or seven leagues. Northward from Telsborch 
Telsborch  in this channel there lie very bad grounds and rocks, 
Hooften or Huften.  called the Hoften, which round about them have very foul and bad shallows, which you must shun: but the Eckholmes as also the coast of Lyfland are fair, you may sail within half a league along by the coast of Lyfland, and leave these shallows and shelves on the left hand.  
From Telsborch to the Narve in the Road it is east and by south sixteen leagues. 
To sail to the Narve north from the Huf●●,  To sail from Wranger north from the Hoften to the Narve, the course from Wranger to Highland is eastnortheast, and east and by north three-and-twentie leagues. From the Great Hooften there cometh a shallow shooting off westnorthwest into the Sea, which is at least two leagues long, which is called the Chalcke grounds, 
Chalk grounds  you must take heed of it. The Small Hooften 
Small Hoften.  also are full of Sands and Rocks, so that you can hardly sail through them, for those foul Sands and Shallows run all from the Tutters 
Tutters  along Lyfland, near the east end of Eckholme. Tutters lie from High land southsoutheast two leagues distant, and northwest and by west from Highland about four leagues from the land, there lieth a Rock under the water, which is no deeper than two fathom.  
From Highland to the Road of the Narve, 
The Road of the Narve.  the course is southeast thirteen leagues, and then you must go through between Highland and Tutters: and likewise when you sail from the Road of the Narve northwestward, than you go through between Tutters and Highland. 
To sail into the Narve.  If you will go into the Narve, you must place the wooden tower with the mast, right upon Narve castle, and so go into the haven. The land of the Narve is known by the round hills which lie on the south side of the Rode.  
Thus Eckholme showeth when you sail along by it.   view of 'Eckholme' (Estonia) 
Thus Thusten showeth south-west and by west from Highland.   view of 'Thusten' (Estonia) 
Thus the Island of Highland showeth.   view of 'Highland' (island in Estonia) 
Thus the land east from Narve showeth when you come from the Highland.   view of Narva  

II. To sail from Wranger, and also from the Narve to Wybergh.  
ABout two leagues north from Wranger lieth a little Island full north: from that Island toward Highland is the course somewhat more easterly than eastnortheast three-and-twentie leagues, than you run full north. Highland 
Highland.  is about three leagues long, and hardly a league broad: it lieth in length southsoutheast and northnorthwest: to them that come out of the west it showeth with three hillocks: on the north and east side it is full of trees. On the east side a little about the north point is there a little creak by a boors or husbandman's house, there is fair ground, and good lying against west winds. A certain space southward from thence, not far from the shore lieth a great stone above the water: On the north end, also on the west side to the south-west point it is wholly fair ground and good lying.  
From Highland to the Summers (that is a little Island) the course is east and by north seven leagues. A little east from the Island summers 
summers.  there lie certain rocks above the water, but you may safely sail through betwixt the rocks and the Island. From summers to the Goeschare, or (which is all one thing) the great Fisher, 
Goeschare or the great Fisher.  is the course full North-east distant seven leagues. The great Fisher is a low Island, consisting of seven rocks joined together, therefore it is also called the Seven-rockes, and when you first descry it, it appeareth with four hillocks, as if it were four low islands. From the great Fisher to the little Fisher 
The little Fisher.  is the course North-east & by east distant four small leagues. Round about both the Fishers you may seek and find Rode, for both of them are very fair, but that on the south side of the great Fisher there lieth a blind rock about a pieces shot from the shore, when the water is not wholly calm, but that the weather is something rough, you may easily see the waves break thereon. About a pieces shot southeast, or southeast and by east from the little Fisher there lieth a Rock even above the water, as if it were a Seals head, the common channel is there between both. From the little Fisher to Corssenes is the course eastnortheast, and somewhat more easterly a league, upon the point of coarseness 
coarseness.  lieth a stone as if it were a jol, you must sail about it at four fathom and an half. West from coarseness lie two islands close by the land, but eastward from the point you may anchor against westerly winds at five or six fathom. About two leagues cross from coarseness there are many rockss that lie under the water, some at a fathom, some at half a fathom, some more some less, you cannot venture out of the channel but with very great danger. It is not possible to describe the right situation of all, the grounds are there so uneven and craggy: so full of rocks, and craggy shallows, that it is to be wondered at. From coarseness to the Roohel 
Rohel.  the course is North-east and by north about three leagues. You must leave the Island of Rohel on starboard and sail close by it, or in the middle of the water: but not close by the north point, which our sailors call john Lambertsons point, for there shooteth off a stony point, which is shoring: notwithstanding you may sail about there safely by the plummet at seven or eight fathom, but come no nearer. In the right channel betwixt both it is 14 and 15 fathom deep. When you come within the Roodehel you may anchor where you please, and fetch a Pilot from the land, which may bring you to Wyborgh.  
From Narve Road to the Russia Hacken 
Russia Hacken.  the course is north and south five leagues distant. This point is called Castram, 
Castram.  and there lieth a town called so.  
From the Point or the Russia Hacken to the Road Hell the course is North-east and by north, and south-west and by south about 26 leagues. Between them both on the Russia coast there is no Seafaring, although some Rivers go into the land. There the land lieth in a great creak, and reacheth from the Russia Hacken to the River Nioa or Oreschack 
The River of Nioa or Oreschack  eastnortheast 13 or 14 leagues. This River of Nioa devideth Russia from Finland through the Ladingh, which is a great lake or water within the land. The strong castle of Noetenburgh lieth there also upon a River, which reacheth out of the Lyflands or East Sea into the aforesaid Lake: From thence the land reacheth northnortheast and north and by east thirteen or fourteen leagues, to the Roodehel.   

III. The situation from Wyborgh to Elsenvos.  
FRom the Rodehel to Porrescharen the course is south-west and by west about five leagues. And from Porrescharen 
Porrescharre.  to the Fisher the course is south-west three leagues, which is a great out Scharre, which lieth alone: but eastward from the Fisher 
Fisher.  there lie some outscharres in the middle of the channel, and lie almost like water, they lie almost right in the channel between the Fisher and the Roodehel. The course from the Fisher to Roodhel is North-east and by east and south-west and by west 7 or 8 leagues.  
From Goescharen to the Badscharen, or Espelscharen 
Esplescharen.  the course is westsouthwest, and south-west and by west 11 or 12 leagues. The Espelscharen is a great heap of out scharres, and there right east there lieth a great rock called Quade scharre, 
Quade-scharre.  which you may sail round about.  
From Espelscharen to Putsfagre 
Putsfagre.  the course is west and east seven leagues. Putsfagre is a great Rock or Island, lying north & by west from Hogheland, distant seven leagues: from thence you may go where you will between the Swethen Scharres: if you will go within the Scharres, at Putsfagre you must take in a Pilot, who will bring you through the rocks where you will, you run in in all places, & within the Rocks or Scharres it is for the most part good anchor ground. About a league right south from Putsfagre there lieth a blind rock which you must shun. From Putsfagre to Peltingscharen 
Peltingscharres.  it is 5 leagues: West from these outrockes there lieth a haven called Peltingsond, 
Peltingsond.  which runneth in North-east, there within there are a great number of Rocks and Scharres, where you lie safe from all winds, and you may, being in, sail through the rocks, so you have a good Pilot, whither you will.  
From Peltingsond to the haven of Elsenvoes, 
The haven of Elsenvos.  the course is west, and west and by south 12 leagues. On the west side of the haven there lieth a high round rock, whereon there standeth a warder or mast, which is called Cubben: on the other side of the haven, over against Cubben, 
Cubben.  there lieth a long rock or Island called Santam, 
Santam.  between these two rocks the haven of Elsenvos goeth in, and reacheth in most part North-east, and North-east & by north, through between the rocks.  
A certain space east from the foresaid long rock called Santam, there is another round rock called Mely: 
Mely.  these three rocks are marks of this haven.  
To sail into the haven of Elsenvoes, 
To sail into the channel of Elsenvos.  first it reacheth in North-east, till you are within the rocks, than it reacheth northnortheast, till you come to the river of Elsenvoes, there you may anchor between the rocks, for there it is good anchor ground. There runneth also a channel through within the rocks, & cometh in again by Putsfagre into the Sea, but runneth very crookedly about, and it is Pilots water.   

FOUR The situation of Elsenvoes to the Alandsche Haf.  
FRom Elsenvoes to the out-rocks of Lewis 
Out rocks of Lewis.  the course is west and by south twelve leagues: And from the outrockes three or four leagues more to the haven of Lewis. The haven of Lewis 
The haven of Lewis.  goeth in west from the rough Island, and there goeth a channel up through the rocks to Abo east, and east and by north thirteen leagues long, and it runneth into the Sea again by Corpo. A little way upward in this channel, you go by a rock, which lieth under the water, which is of loadstone, 
loadstone  there the compasses always run about, and can not stand still, till you are a league from it. When you are without the rocks of Lewis, than you may see the land of Reule, there right over on the other side.  
From the out-rocks of Lewis to the haven of Wtoy it is west and east about 21 leagues. Between Utoy and the haven of Lewis, there are no havens for ships to go in, although that there between them both it is all broken land and rocks.  
Utoye 
Vtoy.  is a great Island, whereon there standeth a mast with a barrel, there westward the channel of Aboo goeth up: first it reacheth in north, and north & by east about three or four leagues, and then you come against an Island, along by that great Island, 
The channel of Abbo.  and then it reacheth forward North-east to the haven of Aboo, and Aboo lieth at the end of that foresaid great Island.  
From Utoy to the uttermost Island of the Alandsche Haf, it is west & east nine leagues: there lie three islands, called Ercke, 
Ercke.  Castleholme, 
Castleholme.  and Corpo: 
Corpo.  Ercke is the outermost from the Alandsche Haf, and from thence Corpesond goeth in, and goeth along North-east by Corpe. Corpe lieth within the other Island, and from Corpe you may strike over to the haven of Abbo, which cometh running from Utoy. You may also sail up this haven about behind Lipland, 
Corpsond.  and come so out into the Northbodem.  
Between Uxe or Bostle, and the islands of Aland the Alandsche Haf goeth in, which is called the Northbodem, which goeth up so far into Finland, that a ship with a good fair wind can hardly sail to the end thereof in five days. Upon the uttermost of these Northbodems there lieth a town called Toren, there Sweathland and Fynland part asunder.   

V How these Lands and Places lie distant from each other.  

FRom Reule to Wolf the course is n. and by w. 5 leagues.  
From Wolf to the Island of Wranger east & by south, but there without about them it is e. and by n. 7 or 8 league.  
From Wranger to Eckholme east, and e. and by n. 13 leagues.  
From Eckholme to Telsborch east and west 6 or 7 leagues.  
From Telsborch to the Narve in the Road east and by south 16 leagues.  
From Wranger to Highland eastnortheast, and somewhat easterlyer 23 leagues.  
From Highland to Tutters' southsoutheast 3 leagues.  
From Highland to the Narve Road southeast 13 leagues.  
From the Road of the Narve to Russia Hacken, or the point of Castram north and south 5 leagues.  
From Russia Hacken to the River Nioa or Oreschack eastnortheast 13 or 14 leagues.  
From Oreschacke to the Roodehel northnortheast and north-and by east 14 or 16 leagues.  
From Russia Hacken to the Roodehel n. e. & by n. 26 leagues.  
From Highland to the Russia Hacken e. s. e. 29 leagues.  
From Highland to Somera e. n. e. about 7 leagues.  
From Somera to the Island Narve about e. n. e. 4 leagues.  
From Somera to the Great Fisher or Goescharre North-east 7 leagues.  
From the Great Fisher to the Little Fisher North-east and by east 4 leagues.  
From the Little Fisher to coarseness eastnortheast and somewhat easterlyer. 1 league.  
From coarseness to Roodehel n. e. and by n. 3 leagues.  
From Roodehel to the Porrescharres south-west and by west about 5 leagues.  
From Porescharen to the Fisher south-west 3 leagues.  
From Goescharen to Quadescharen or Espelscharen westsouthwest and south-west and by west 11 or 12 leagues.  
From Quadescharen to Somera eastsoutheast 5 leagues.  
From Espelscharen to Putsfagre west 7 leagues.  
From Putsfagre to Somera east 12 or 13 leagues.  
From Putsfagre to Highland south and by east 7 leagues.  
From Putsfagre to Peltingscharen w. and by s. 5 leagues.  
From the Outscharres of Peltingh to the Haven of Elsenvos west and by north 12 leagues.  
From Peltinghscharen to Highland eastsoutheast 8 leagues.  
From Peltingscharen to the Wolf south-west and somewhat westerlyer 20 leagues.  
From Elsenvoes to the Wolf or Nargen s. s. w. 16 or 17 leagues.  
From Elsenvoes to Eckholme southeast 16 leagues.  
From the haven of Elsenvoes to the Outscharres of Lewis west and by south 12 or 13 leagues.  
From the Outscharres of Lewis to Wtoy west 21 leagues.  
Fron Wtoy to Ercke the uttermost Island of Alant w. 9 leagues.  
From the Outscharres of Lewis to Nargen s. s. e. 13 leagues.  
From the Outscharres of Lewis to Oetgensholme south and by west 15 or 16 leagues.  
From the Haven of Abbo to Nargen or the Wolf east and by south 32 or 33 leagues.    

VI How these Lands are distant from other Lands.  

FRom the Haven of Abbo to Boechscharre south-west and by south 16 leagues.  
From the Haven of Abbo to Godsche sand southsouthwest 29 leagues.  
From the Haven of Abbo to Ostergarde s. & by w. 56 leagues:  
From the Point of Alant or from the islands to Luseroort or Derwinda southsoutheast 59 leagues.  
From the islands of Alant to the Sweathland scharres before the Haven of Stockholme south-west and south-west and by south 32 or 33 leagues.    
Here followeth the Card N 28.   


Afbeeldinghe vande wonderlijcke ghebrooken Zeecusten van Sweden en van Schoonen, van benarden Stoeholm of tot verbij Valsterboen, Jtem vande Eijlanden aldner, als Gotlant, Oelandt, Bornholm, en andere aen dat sebe vaerwater gheleghen.  
Pourtraiet de la merveilleuse et entrerompue cost marine de Suede et pais de Schoone, de Stocholme insques a Valsterbon. Jtem de les isles come Gotlande, Oelande, Bornholm, et plusieurs autres situez environ lesaic tes costs.   map of the coast of Sweden   

CHAPTER IX. THE DESCRIPTION OF the situation of the Sea-coasts and Havens of Sweathland, which lie between Stocholme and Valsterboen: as also of Gotland, Oeland, and other islands more there about.  

I. How you shall sail into the Haven of Stockholme.  
THe Sweathland Outscharres and Rocks lying before the haven of Stockholme lie distant from the islands of Aland south-west, and south-west and by south two-and-thirtie or three-and-thirtie leagues: as in the Chapter before is declared.  
The haven of Stockholme goeth in south, by a point called Landsoort, 
Landsoort  a little north from thence there lieth a rock above the water, called the Heyrhamer, 
Heyrhamer.  it is a foul rock, and to seaward from this rock there lieth another great rock, called Wigh-steene, it lieth distant from the point of Landsoort North-east three leagues, 
Wighstone  & upon it there is a cleft, you must go in close by it, and leave it on baghborde, you may also go in westward about, between this rock and the Heyrhamer, for it is very fair round about it, than you come by a rock called Middlestone 
Middlestone.  which also is cloven, and showeth like a saddle of a horse, you must leave that on starboard. Between Wighstone and Middlestone the haven of Stocholme reacheth in about northnortheast: if you will sail into the haven of Stocholme you must be wary and take heed of a row of rocks, which lie under the water, southeast and by east from Wighstone, where you must go close in, cross before the channel, they are called Crawasen, 
Crawasen.  and there north lieth Gomberstone 
Gomberstone.  southsoutheast from the Middlestone. East from the haven of Stockholme there lieth another great rock, which is called Schareopen, 
Scharopen.  when you are past Middlestone & are between both the lands, than you find a rock called Rookoe. From Middlestone to Rookoe 
Rookoe.  the course is North-east and by north a league, and there you may run about on both sides if you will. Rookoe lieth within the haven of Stockholme, and the point thereof reacheth into the Daler 
Daler.  North-east and by north.  
Without the Daler Elsnap 
Elsnap.  lieth, & within the Daler Hartsticke 
Hartstick.  goeth in, but is sunk with ships, so that no good ships can go through: the Hartstick reacheth first northwest to the bought, and then to Conincxhaven west and west and by north.  
From the Daler to Deerhaven, 
Dierhaven.  the haven of Stockholme reacheth North-east and by north, and North-east: from Duerhaven to Steendoren 
Steendoren.  it reacheth south-west, and south-west and by west, from thence to the old church yard 
The Old church yard.  westnorthwest, from the old church yard to Waxholme 
Waxholm.  west and westsouthwest, there you may shut the haven with a boome: from thence it is south-west and by south, and southsouthwest to Conincxhaven or S. Blasins holm: 
S. Blasens holm.  from Conincxhaven or S. Blasins holm the course to the town of Stockholme is westnorthwest, and northwest a league.  
The channel of Stockholme runneth along by the Northland in again into the Northbodem, and so into the East-sea, it reacheth between Wed and Uxe about North-east and south-west, you must leave the firm land on baghborde, and the great islands on starboard, and so run about North-east, and North-east and by east to the North bodem.   

II. The situation of the Coast of Sweathland, between the haven of Stocholme, and the Sweathland joncurouwe.  
TWo leagues westsouthwest from the point of Landsoort there lieth a great rock named Hartshals, which is very well to be known, between them both the land there reacheth east and west. West from this rock there goeth in another haven or channel, which you may run through behind Elsnap with jachts towards Stocholme.  
West from this Haven the Haven of Telghen 
The haven of Telgen.  goeth in, which reacheth in about northwest almost to the Moller, and at the end of the channel lieth Telghen, but before it there lieth a town called Trosa. 
Trosa.   
From the aforesaid rock called Hartshals, to the Haven of Stickborch 
The haven of Stickborch.  the course is w. n. w. but from Landsoort to this haven the land reacheth east and west: it is a wide haven, and in the mouth thereof Newecoppen 
Newecoppen.  lieth on the north side, but Sticxborch lieth on the south side: 
Southcoppen.  then there go two havens more in, the one to South, and the other to North Coppen. 
Northcoppen.   
From Landsoort to the Haven of Silbuy 
Silbuy.  the course is s. w. and by s. 19 leagues: It reacheth in n. w. and n. w. and by n. If you will anchor under Silbuy, you must turn up eastward, and anchor before the town in the middle of the rocks, at seven, eight and nine fathom. You may there sail through the Sweathland Rocks to Westwick, Fluyerbuy, Vrouwenbergh, Sticxholme, and so northward to Schelsuyer, there it is all fair ground, and is fiveteene, eighteen and twenty fathom deep.  
If you will go to Vrouwenbergh 
Vrouwenbergh.  or Fluerbuy, 
Fleurbuy.  then sail forward west, and west and by north, till you come against the land, than you may anchor against Fleurbuy, or you may turn up northwest between the Island of Vrouwenbergh and the firm land, and there anchor at twelve fathom. You may also run through it into Westerwick.  

Westerwick.  Westerwick lieth distant from Silbuy west, and west and by north through within the Rocks, and there it is fiveteene or sixteen fathom deep.  
From Silbuy to Schelsuyr 
Schelsuyr.  it is norrhwest seven leagues, all through within the rocks: Schelsuyr is a fair Haven or creak: there lieth a rock in the Haven, but you may go about it on both sides, and anchor before the town.  
East from Schelsuyr lieth Hontsbaye, 
Hontsbay.  and then Green Island, 
Greene-Iland.  there also is good anchor ground, and you may run along thereby to Sticxborgh.  
The outrockes and scharres of Silbuy, and the land of New Coppen, or of Telghen lie distant about north and by east and south and by west fiveteene leagues: but the Out scharres of Silbuy and the Sweathland joncurouwe lie distant south and by east, and north and by west eight leagues.  
From Landsoort by the Haven of Stockholme to the joncurouwe the course is fouthsouthwest four-and-twentie leagues. But from the Haven or the Out-rocks of Silbuy to the Sweathland joncurouwe it is south and by east eight leagues.   

III. The situation of Gotland with the islands lying about it.  
FRom the Sweathland joncurouwe 
Sweathland joncurowe.  to Carelsoo the course is east, and east and by north eleven or twelve leagues.  
Great Carelsoo and Small Carelsoo, lie close one by the other, they are two small high islands, lying on the west side of Gotland: The Small Carelsoo 
Small Carelsoo.  lieth nearest to Gotland, and there under it is round about good Rode, at eight, nine, and ten fathom, for round about it it is fair and clean: Under Great Carelsoo 
Great Carelsoo.  also it is good Road, on the west and east-sides, but on the north and south sides it is foul, therefore you must go no nearer to Carelsoo by night then eleven or twelve fathom. Between Great Carelsoo and Small Carelsoo it is twelve, thirteen and fourteen fathom deep. Right over against Carelsoo lieth westergarde 
Westergarde.  upon Gotland.  
From Carelsoo to Wisbuy 
Wisbuy.  in Gotland the course is North-east six or seven leagues. Men were wont in old time to anchor there behind a Head or Kissed. In times past this was a notable and famous town of Merchandise, where all trade of Merchandise was used, but now by God's visitation it is clean decayed and spoiled. There yet to this day you may see many decayed houses of Marble, and other hewn stones, whereby a man may partly see and guess her former situation and proportion. The Hanze towns did there for a long time hold their staple and trade, the old Water-lawes are there made, and also the old famous Cards, which in times past were very perfect, but now altogether fpoyled.  
From Carelsoo to Gotland Sand 
Gotland Sand.  the course is North-east, and North-east and by north one-and-twentie leagues. Gotland Sand is an Island of a league great, you may sail round about it, and round about it it is white strand. From the northwest point there shooteth off a Sand, there it is six, seven, and eight fathom deep, and all over good anchor ground.  
The Coperstone 
Coperstone.  lieth distant from Gotland Sand westnorthwest and northwest and by west three leagues.  
Four or five leagues south and by west, and southsouthwest from Gotland Sand lieth Faro Sand, 
Faro sand.  and at the north end of Faro Sand there shooteth off a bad foul shelf or Sand northnortheast about two leagues into the Sea; which is called Salf-onreyn. 
Salf-onreyn.  You may run into Farosand at two and three fathom deep, and there standeth a church with a flat steeple upon the land. From Farosand to Sliet-haven 
Sliet haven.  the course is south and by west three leagues, and from thence to Ostergarde 
Ostergarde.  also south and by west four leagues.  
From Ostergarde there lieth an Island, which you may sail round about, and anchor where you will, at seven or eight fathom. You may sail into Ostergarde about on both sides of the said Island: The south channel reacheth in north at seven fathom, and the east channel, north from the Island, reacheth in south-west and southsouthwest.  
From Ostergarde to Houborch the south-west end of Gotland the course is south-west, and south-west and by south about twelve or thirteen leagues.  
Between them both there lie four Havens, called Santwick, Narwick, Boswick and Heylicholme.  
The haven of Santwick 
Santwick.  reacheth in about northnorthwest, within it is five and six fathom deep: there standeth a chapel upon the point of the land, and there it is good lying. This Haven and Ostergarde are distant south-west and by south, and North-east and by north about a league and an half.  

Narwick.  Narwick lieth from Santwick south-west three leagues, and on the east side of the Haven there lieth a long rock, which you must go in by, and leave the other sharp rock on baghborde, and anchor within the haven at four or five fathom.  
A league west from Narwick lieth Boswick: 
Boswick.  there lieth an Island in the middle of the haven, it is best to go in south from it, but you may also go in north about it, and then you leave the two rocks on starboard: it is a fair haven, and in it is three fathom water.  
A league south from it lieth Heylich holm, 
Heylich-holme.  it is also a good haven, but it is little known.  
From Heylich holm to the south end of Gotland the course is south-west five leagues. On the south end of Gotland there standeth a high steeple called Houborch. 
Houborch  At Houborch also there goeth in a haven, you may anchor before it at six or seven fathom. 
Sand of Gotland.  From the south point of Gotland there runneth a Sand a great way into the Sea, which is very stony, but you may sound it about at seven, eight, and nine fathom.   

FOUR The situation of Oeland, Calmersond, and so to Valsterbon.  
FRom the southpoint of Gotland to the southpoint of Oeland the course is as much westerly as south-west three-and-twentie or four-and-twentie leagues.: but the north end of Oeland lieth distant from the south end of Gotland westnorthwest, or as some say west and by north ten or eleven leagues ..  
The Island of Oeland 
Oeland.  as some say is four-and-twentie leagues long, and a great league broad, when you sail along by it you may tell eighteen steeples which are all flat. The eastcoast reacheth north and by east, and south and by west, it is a fair coast, but about seven or eight leagues south from the north end, there shooteth off a Sand cross from the land about a league into the Sea, which you must shun. By it also there goeth in a haven, 
Haven in Oeland.  where indifferent ships may go in, otherwise Oeland hath never a Haven. But within Calversond there a man may anchor under Oeland, very fitly to lad, for there it is good lying in all places.  
From the north end of Oeland to the Sweathland joncurouwe, 
Sweathland joncurouwe.  the course is west and by south: you may sail round about it, and anchor where you will, there it is eighteen or nineteen fathom deep.  
From the Sweathland joncurouwe to the rocks of Calmer, the course is southsouthwest eleven leagues. Calmersond 
Calmersond.  stretcheth through to Derclipping south and by west, and north-and by east twelve or thirteen leagues, there it is not all to broad nor deep, there about you have three fathom and a foot deep: If you come out of the south you may run in west also from the rocks, but there it is no more than twelve foot deep, and that runneth in northnorthwest.  
About eight leagues south from Calmer, and four leagues north from the Rough Island there lieth a little town called Overschaer, there about shooteth out a stony Sand, about a third part of a league from the shore into the Sea, come no nearer unto it then ten fathom.  
From the south end of Oeland there shooteth off a great Sand, at least a great league into the Sea, 
Sand of Oeland.  and there it is seven or eight fathom deep, when the chapel upon Suyder Norden is northwest a league from you, there it is ten or eleven fathom deep, you may sound it about at eight or nine fathom, the south end of Oeland is called Zuydernorden, and the Sand is called the Sand of Zuydernorden. From thence to Derclipping 
Derclipping.  it is westsouthwest eight leagues  
North from Derclippingh or Out-clippingh lieth the Rough Island. Between that Island and the firm land it is foul and craggy, so that you cannot sail through there: but upon the east side of the Rough Island you may sail along at ten or twelve fathom without hurt. On the west or northwest side of the Rough Island there is good Road, where is good lying, at eight or nine fathom fair ground, against the North-east and east winds.  
From Derclipping to Ahuys the course is west, and west and by south ten or eleven leagues: between them both, that is, west and west and by north from Derclippingh five leagues lieth a great rock called Malqueren, 
Malqueren.  which you may anchor under. North from this rock the town called Rottenbuy 
Rottenbuy.  lieth in a creak: before it, as also before Eleholme 
Eleholme.  you may anchor at six, seven and eight fathom, for there is good anchor ground.  
There goeth up a river to Ahuys 
Ahuys.  of eight or ten foot deep, and before it as also before Selsborgh 
Selsborch.  the Road is seven or eight fathom.  
From Ahuys to Hanneu or Hanno the course is southeast five leagues. Hanno 
Hanno.  is a high round Island, you may sail and anchor round about it at ten, eleven and twelve fathom. From Hanno to the north end of Borneholme it is south and by east and north and by west eleven or twelve leagues distant.  
South from Hanno lieth a town called Santhaver, 
Santhaver  west or north from it lieth Somer-haven 
Summer haven.  in a round bay, and there it is very good anchor ground.  
From the north end of Borneholme to Utstede the course is northwest eight leagues. 
Wtstede.  But from Utstede to Valsterbon the coast reacheth about westsouthwest thirteen or fourteen leagues.  
Thus the southend of Oeland showeth when it is cross from you.   view of Oland  

V Of the depths and grounds situate in these channels.  
Between Gotland and the Sweathland rocks and scars in the channel it is 34 and 38 fathom deep, and close by Gotland it is 25 fathom deep.  
Two leagues from the land west from Ostergarde it is about one-and-thirtie fathom deep soft ground.  
Between Ostergarde and Houborch you have a bank of four-and-twentie fathom, it is great red sand, than you can not see the land out of the top of the mast.  
And eastward also you have a bank there of fourteen fathom deep, it is grey and white sand, when you are over it, than you find no ground at forty fathom.  
When Houborch is northnortheast seven leagues from you there it is fiveteene fathom deep, stony ground. And when you go from thence North-east three leagues, there it is twenty fathom great stony ground.  
If you will sail from Borneholme to Ostergarde, you must not spare your lead, but still cast it out towards these banks, that you may make your account thereafter.  
Between Gotland and Oeland it is uneven to sound the depth: sometimes you have two-and-twentie and three-and-twentie fathom, and sometimes nine-and-twentie fathom, and all black grayish pieces of ground, sometimes stones as great as pease, which are black and earthly coloured.  
When you are northwest and northwest and by north from Houborch almost three leagues from the land, there you have great red stony Sand, with black stones in it as big as beans.  
When Zuydernorden lieth west from you three leagues, there it is soft ground seven-and-twentie and nine-and-twentie fathom deep.  
And when the chapel upon Zuydernorden lieth westnorthwest from you three leagues, there it is thirty and one-and-thirtie fathom deep, it is lymie soft ground.  
When Zuydernorden lieth northnorthwest, and somewhat northerlyer from you, and you are a league from the land, there it is thirteen fathom deep.  
When you are past Zuydernorden and come against Derclippingh in the channel, there it is nine-and-thirtie fathom deep, and there it is slickie and soft ground.  
If I should describe all the banks which lie in the East-sea severally and particularly by themselves, they alone would contain a whole volume, for that in many places it is very banckie and uneven, for you shall come in no place but you shall find banks, as between Houborch and Ostergarde, between Zuydernorden and Gotland, and between Oeland and Borneholme, and likewise against Reefcol and Righshooft, where you find several banks, and of unequal and several depths. Between jasmont and Borneholme you find banks of seven, ten, fiveteene and twenty fathom, as in their places it is partly showed: also on Righsche bodem it is full of banks, of fiveteene, twenty, and five-and-twentie fathom. The deepest water of the East-sea is about forty fathom. Thus much I thought good to place here, that no man by reason of such banks, should err and go out of the way.   

VI How these Places lie distant from each other.  
HOw the Haven of Stockholme reacheth in from point to point, and all the islands and rocks thereabouts, it is already described at large.  

From Landsoort or the point of the haven of Stockholme to the rock Hartshals' westsouthwest 3 leagues.  
From Hartshals to the River of Sticborch the course is w. n. w.  
From Landsoort to Smaland west 5 leagues.  
From Smaland to the haven of Silbuy south and by west distant 15 or 16 leagues.  
From Landsoort to the haven of Silbuy south-west & by south 19 leagues.  
From Silbuy to Schelsuyr the course is northnorthwest distant 7 leagues.  
From Landsoort to the Sweathland joncurouwe southsouthwest 24 leagues.  
From the Outscharres or rocks of Silbuy to the Sweathland joncurouwe south, and south and by east 8 leagues.  
From the Sweathland jonckurouwe to Carelsoo east, and east and by north 11 or 12 leagues.  
From Carelsoo to Wisbuy North-east 6 or 7 leagues.  
From Carelsoo to Gotland sand North-east, and North-east and by north 21 leagues.  
From Gotland sand to the Haven of Stockholme west and by north 16 leagues.  
From Gotland sand to Farosand or the northend of Gotland south and by west, and southsouthwest 4 or 5 leagues.  
From Faro sand to Ostergarde's south and by west 7 leagues.  
From Ostergarde to Houborch south-west, and south-west and by south 12 or 13 leagues.  
From the south end of Gotland to the northend of Oeland westnorthwest 10 or 11 leagues.  
From the Sweathland jonckurouwe to the rocks of Calmer southsouthwest 11 leagues.  
From Calmersond to Derclippingh south and by east distant 12 or 13 leagues.  
From Derclipping to Malqueren west, and west and by north 5 leagues.  
From Derclipping to Ahuys west, and west and by south distant 10 or 11 leagues.  
From Derclipping to Hanno s. w. and by w. 10 leagues.  
From Ahuys to Hanno southeast 5 leagues.  
From Hanno to the north end of Borneholme south and by east 11 or 12 leagues.  
From the north end of Borneholme to the ton at Valsterboen sand west and by south 19 leagues.  
From Stockholme scars or rocks to the north end of Oeland south and by west 22 leagues.  
From the haven of Stockholme to Carelsoo south 21 leagues.  
From the south end of Gotland to Zuydernorden the southend of Oeland s. w. & somewhat westerlyer 23 or 24 league.  
From the south end of Oeland to Derclipping w. s. w. 8 league.  
From Derclipping to the northend of Borneholme northnortheast 19 leagues.  
From Ostergarde to Borneholme south-west and somewhat southerlyer 63 or 64 leagues.  
From Houborch to Borneholme south-west and somewhat southerlyer 51 leagues.  
From the south end of Oeland to the south end of Borneholme southsouthwest 26 leagues.  
But to the northwest end it is s. w. and by s. 25 leagues.    

VII. How these Lands are situate from other Lands.  

FRom Gotland sand to Boechscharre north and by east 20 or 21 leagues.  
From Carelsoo to Boechscharre n. n. e. 40 leagues.  
From Gotland sand to the south point of Alants Haf north, & north and by east 19 or 20 leagues.  
From Gotland sand to Dageroort n. e. and by e. 26 leagues.  
From Gotland sand to Derwinda s. e. & by e. 31 or 32 leagues.  
From Ostergarde to Dageroort North-east and North-east and by north 38. leagues.  
From Ostergarde to Derwinda east 29 leagues.  
From Ostergarde to Conincxberghen deep southsoutheast 48 leagues.  
From Ostergarde to Righshooft south and north 45 leagues.  
From Houborch to Hondsoort North-east 47 leagues.  
From Houborch to Luseroort east and by north, and somewhat northerlyer 40 leagues.  
From Houborch to Derwinda east and by north 38 leagues.  
From Houborch to Memle eastsoutheast 38 leagues.  
From Houborch to Conincxberghen southeast and by south 48 leagues.  
From Houborch to Righshooft south and by east 34 leagues.  
From the south end of Oeland called Suydernorden to Sevenberghen east, and somewhat northerlyer 48 leagues.  
From Suyder Norden to Memle east 48 leagues.  
From Suyder Norden to Righshooft northwest 34 leagues.  
How all the points of the East Sea, are distant and lie in length and breadth from Borneholme, you find it at large described in the sixth Chapter.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 29.   


Pascaarte vaned Schagher rack, vertoonende van Schaghen en Maesterlandt of door de Soudt tot am Valsterboen toe, all de gelegenthent der Zeecusten vaned Lant van Noor doosten, Halant, Schoonen, en Zeelant, Hoemen all Havenen daer ontrent geleghen beseijlen, end all clippen Reven en periculose plaetsen schouwen end mijden shall.  
Cart Marine representant dez Schagen et Maesterlande par la Som●● iusques a Valsterbon, toutes les situations des costes de la Mer du pais de Nord-est, Halande, Schonen et Zeelande. Coment on marinera tous Ports et haures la alentour, et se gardera de tous rochiers, escueils, bancs de sable, et dangereux endroictz.   map of the coasts of Sweden and Denmark   

CHAPTER X. A DESCRIPTION OF the Sea-coasts of Schoonen, Zeeland, Haland, and the Land of North-east, from Valsterbon to Schaghen.  

I. The situation between Valsterbon and the Sound.  

Valsterboen sand.  THe Sand of Valsterbon reacheth about south-west above a league to Seaward: If you come out of the east, you may anchor under Valsterboen Sand at 7 or 8 fathom, so that then the steeple of Valsterbon standeth west or west and by north from you: from Valsterboen Sand along by the Bleesche side to Drelborch it is very flat.  

Road under Steden.  You may also anchor under Steden, safe against a northerly wind, but you must run in somewhat far between Steden and Meun into the creak, and anchor between Meun and Steden at eight or nine fathom, so that the shoring point of Steden may lie northnortheast from you.  

Kuycke.  North from Steden you must run up westward to Kuycke, which lieth in a great creak, it is there all shallow or flat water at five, six, or seven fathom, and you may anchor there where you will. Close by Steden it is twelve and thirteen fathom deep.  
On the Sand of Valsterboen there lieth a ton at four fathom, and you may sound about the Sand at five fathom without danger. When the steeple of Valsterboen and the castle are one against another, than you are right against the Sand.  
When you are about Valsterboen Sand, you may sound there within it at four fathom, along to the strand of Schoonen or old Valsterboen, 
Hul water.  where there lieth a haven called Hul, or Hul-water, it is a deep haven for common ships, and goeth in at three or four fathom, and reacheth in most part North-east, you may sound in along by the footstrand of Old Valsterboens at three fathom, and you must leave Old Valsterboens on the right hand, it is there wide and broad enough. But before or against Old Valsterboens there lieth a Sand called Zuyduliet, which you must remember to shun. 
Southuliet   
From the ton upon Valsterboen Sand to the ton upon Draker sand the course is north five leagues: but if you come out of the east, and come out by Steden, 
Drakersand.  then go north and by east to Drakersand, and that is six leagues, and when the steeple of Coppen haven cometh upon the east end of the wood which standeth west from Draker, 
Marks of Draker sand.  than you have the length of the ton upon Drakersand, than you may well set your course upon Southolme, till you come before Draker, there you shall find five fathom water a foot less, and that is the dryest of all the Middle ground.  
The south ton of the Middle ground lieth somewhat higher up to Draker: 
South ton, in the Middle ground  from the ton upon Draker sand to the Suyder ton north, and north and by west.  
Right over against this Zuyder ton there lieth a stone above the water, which is called the Fisher, there you may sound the Southolme, for there it is flat water. 
Fisher.   
From the Zuyder ton of the Middle ground, 
Casper Caniel ton and the marks.  or the drought, to the ton upon Casper Caniel, the course is north and north and by west, there the Middleground is at the narrowest, & there it is shoring on both sides, if you laver through the shallows, you must wind as soon as it beginneth to dry, on the one or the other side. The marks of this ton upon Casper Caniel are these: when the sharp steeple of Coppen haven is against the white castle, than you have the length of this ton, and there it is seven and eight fathom deep.  
From the ton at Casper Caniel to the Middle ton, 
Middle ton.  the course is north and by west: the southerlyest mill cometh upon the southend of the town, and the flat steeple cometh within a lever or bow length of the speere steeple of Coppen haven, these are marks of the Middle ton: it is there eight or nine fathom deep.  

North ton.  From the Middle ton to the North ton the course is north and by west, and northnorthwest, there in the channel it is nine and ten fathom deep, but the ton lieth at six fathom, on the north end of the Middle ground.  
From the north ton to the Sound the course is north and by west, in that channel it is eight, nine & ten fathom deep: you may also run along by the west side at six and seven fathom.  

Road under the Sound.  A man may anchor in the Sound where he will: all the ships for the most part anchor commonly along by the land south from Elsenore, but with a southeast wind it is bad lying there, for there it is fiveteene and sixteen fathom deep, but to Weem there lieth a bank or flat of seven, eight, or nine fathom, there it is better lying, but it is somewhat far from the land.   

II. How you shall sail out of the Sound through the shallows, and so into Reefshol.  
ALthough I have here perfectly declared how you shall sail through the Sands and Shallows coming from Valsterboen to the Sound, yet I thought it not amiss also to write, How a man coming north, or out of the Sound shall sail through it, in regard that there passeth so great a number of ships that way every year, and for that it is so requisite and convenient to know the true and perfect situation of that channel.  

North ton.  If you will sail out of the Sound to the Shallows and Sands, you must go south and by east, or you may sound along by the wood at five or six fathom, than you shall not in sailing miss the North ton, for it lieth at six fathom, on the north end of the middle ground, east from the ton it is seven fathom deep, 
Marks of the north-tonne.  but in the right channel against this ton it is nine or ten fathom deep. The marks of this ton are, when the end of the wood is westsouthwest, and the steeple of Coppen haven south-west from you, than you are against the north ton, and there standeth a flat steeple a certain space south from that wood: also there come then three hillocks on the northside of the town, all these are marks of the north ton.  
If you will sail to Reefshol or to Coppen haven, then run west about this north ton, 
To sail into Reefshol.  and go on south-west & by south and southsouthwest, till the ton lieth east, and east and by north from you, there it will be four or five fathom deep soft ground. The marks of Reefshol are these, there stand two or three trees on the high land west from Coppen haven, they stand south from two or three hillocks: when they come upon the uttermost trees which stand on the northwest side of Coppens haven, then sail south-west and by south, till Torenbuy or Amack be against the beacon, then go in south and by west, than a steeple which standeth cross within the land west from you, will come against a great stone, than you are in the narrow where in times past the ships were sunk, and you leave a wrack of a ship lying on the south land, and then the beacon and the steeple of Amack are there long marks. Now to sail further forward through that straight or narrow way, go in south and by west, and when you are far enough in, you may anchor where you will, you lie there cross the channel with an anchor on the land, and another to Seaward.  
To turn again to the Middle grounds or sands: 
Middle ton.  from the North ton to the Middle ton, the course is south and by east, and southsoutheast, when you come to the Middle ton, than the southerlyest mill being south from the town of Coppen haven, and the flat steeple come within a leaver or bow length to the speere steeple, these are the marks of the Middle ton, or second ton in the shallows or Sands, and there it is eight or nine fathom deep.  
From the Middle ton to the ton upon Casper Caniel, 
Ton on Casmer Caniel.  the course is south and by east, than the white castle cometh over the sharp steeple, and that is the mark of the third ton, or the ton upon Casper Caniel, which is the south end of the Middle ground, there it is not very wide, but shoring on both sides, the depth is seven or eight fathom. If you will laver there, you must wind as soon as it beginneth to dry on either of the sides.  
From the third ton to the fourth, the course is south, 
Fourth ton. The Fisher.  and south and by east: this lieth upon the north end of Draker upon the flat, right over against it lieth the Fisher, which is a stone (as I said before) which lieth above the water, there you may sound the Southolme, for there it is flat water. Between this third and fourth ton there cometh a channel or haven running out from Coppen haven, which is called Casmer Caniel. 
Casmer Caniel.   
From the fourth or South ton in the Middle ground to Draker sand the course is south, and south and by east, you may sound the land of Draker at 3, 4 and 4 fathom and an half.  
Draker sand lieth a good way without Draker, and it reacheth half a league eastward into the Sea. 
Marks of the ton upon Draker sand.  The marks of the ton at Draker sand are these: when the steeple of Coppenhaven is south from Draker upon the wood, than you are against the ton. The dryest & shallowest water that you find is between this ton upon Draker sand, and the aforesaid fourth ton, there it is 5 fathom less a foot. When you are against the ton upon Draker sand, then go south and s. & by w. to Valsterboens' sand or to Steden, that is 5 leagues: but from the ton upon Draker sand to the Kuycke the course is s. w. six leagues. When coming out of the Sound you are passed the Sand of Valsterboen, than it is somewhat deeper, when you follow your course to Borneholme, but coming from the east than it gins speedily to be deeper when you are about the point of the Sand: the further situation of Valsterboen is declared before.   

III. How you may sail out of the Sound to Elleboghen, Malmuyen, and Landscrone.  
IF you will sail out of the Sound to Elleboghen or Malmuyen, then from Ween go s. e. and s. e. and by s. than you shall see the steeple or town lie before you, sail to it, in that channel it is for the most part 7 or 8 fathom deep, but when you come within the Saltholmes, them it is 5 or 6 fathom deep, the drought soon riseth from seven to five fathom, but before the town it is flat water, there you may anchor at 3, 4 or 5 fathom as you will, 
Road before Malmuyen.  you may also lie at the end of the head at three fathom, there it is good lying, but with a n. w. wind there it is bad road, for it bloweth openly in.  
If you will go out again south from the Southolmes to Valsterbon or Steden, than you must take heed of the Southolms, they are soul round about, from the north end there shooteth a Sand something far out, on the east side, upon the south end it runneth out flat very far: and there also lieth Norduliet, 
Norduliet.  which is a stony Sand which lieth under the warer, but you may see it lie green under the water, which you must leave on the Southolmes side, that is on starboard, 
Southuliet  but Southuliet which lieth against old Valsterboens, you must leave on baghborde, & so run through between them both, in that water at the dryest it is four fathom deep. When you come from Malmuyen, and that the steeple of Coppen haven cometh upon the south end of Southolmes, than you are passed by Northuliet: as you sail through in this sort you must be very watchful, and take heed of the grounds aforesaid.  
You may also go out along by the strand of Schoonen, and leave both Northuliet and Southuliet on starboard, for you may sound that strand at four and five fathom, as also the Sand of Valsterboen.  
If you will sail into Landscrone you must understand that there lieth a shallow Sand before the haven, 
Landscrone.  you must run south into it, there standeth a church on the north side somewhat forward, and a Gentleman's house somewhat further into the land, bring the church against the house, than you are free from that Sand, then sail in upon the point, and anchor at three fathom.  
Thus the land of Schoonen showeth, when you sail through the Sands, from Col to Valsterboen.  
Col. Elsenborgh. Landscrone. Bersebeck. Malmuyen. Schoonen. Valsterboen.   view of Sweden  

FOUR The situation of the Sound to Col, and north from Zeeland to the Belt.  

Col.  FRom Elsenore or the Sound to the point of Col the course is northwest, and northwest and by west 4 or 5 leagues. About a quarter of a league north from Elsenore lieth Lappesand, 
Lappesand.  on the west side of the channel, go no nearer to it then 7 fathom, & you can not be hurt upon it. On the east side about half way between Col and Elsenborch lie the Swyneboden, 
Swyneboden.  which reach off from the land a good way into the Sea, therefore when you are at the end of Lappesand, then go n. w. & by w. till Col Huyberts' cometh out before, & beginneth to lie northnortheast from you, then go boldly northwest and by north, and northnorthwest to the Sand of Anout, than you shall run far enough without.  
But if you will sail from Col to the Sound, then hold the Island of Ween hid behind the Castle of Elsenor, 
How to shun the Swine bode.  for if you bring not Ween without the castle of Elsenor, than you cannot sail under the Swyneboden: when you are passed the Swynboden, than you may sail forward in the middle of the water about Lappesand: and when you are within the castle, than you may anchor where you will, as I said before. Between Col & Zeeland it is sixteen, seventeen, eighteen, and in some places twenty fathom deep, but in the night come no nearer to Zeeland then twelve, thirteen or fourteen fathom, for at that depth you are close by the land: for on Zealand side it is very shoring.  

Haselin.  From Col to the Island Haselin it is south-west and by west eight leagues. From the east end of Haselin there reacheth out a Sand North-east and by north: a great league from the end of the Sand lie the Luysgrounds, 
Luysgrounds.  and lie from the south end of Anout distant northwest & by west and southeast and by east: and from Col east and by south and west and by north, there the water is no deeper than eight foot. When you come from Anout sand, and will go to the Sound, then go no southerlyer than southsoutheast, & so you shall not undersayle these grounds, for with a south and east course you should sail by them, when you come from Anout sand: but coming out of the Sound you should undersayle those Luysgrounds with a westnorthwest course. Therefore if you will sail to the Sound from Anout, or from the Sound to Anout with a sharp wind you must be careful to remember them, and to take heed of them.  

Road under Haselin.  The Island Haselin on the outside is all foul and full of Sands and shallows, but on the Zealand side it is indifferent fair, there you may run under to anchor. The coast of Zeeland is a fair strand, and you may run through between Haselin and Zeeland to the Belt, but a little west from Haselin there shooteth off a Sand from Zeeland, which you must shun.  
About eastsoutheast from Haselin there lieth a great wide river, which without in the beginning is at least a league wide, it is there good anckoring against a North-east wind at five or six fathom. This River devideth itself into three parts in the land of Zeeland: the first or easterlyest goeth up southsoutheast to Roskild: the second goeth up to Isiebie and Holbecke, there there lieth a great Island in the middle, and within it is three leagues broad, this River is called Isenvoort, reaching into the land south, 
Isenvorde.  and south and by west six or seven leagues. The third River reacheth to Draecxholme also five leagues south-west and North-east, so that in Draecxholme you may see the Sea, this river stretcheth as the Sea-coast doth along to the Belt.  
Thus Zeeland showeth itself when you come from Anoult sailing to the Sound.   view of Zealand  

V The situation between Col and Waersberghen.  
FRom Col to the Island Swederoer it is North-east and by north, there you may go northward in behind, 
Swedere.  there it is wide and broad, and between the great and small rocks you may anchor at seven fathom, against the church of Turko, which is a white church, it is good to come in there, you may there go southward out again, leaving the two rocks with the warders on starboard, and run right up to Col close about the rocks. If you come from Anout, and by means of southerly winds can not get above Col, you must go from Col North-east and by north to Swederoer, and go close in by the two rocks whereon the warders stand, there it is soft ground so that you must look to your anckors: a north wind bloweth openly into it.  
Between Col and Swederoer there is a great creak, & there lieth the town of Engelholme, there also you may anchor. 
Engleholme.   
North from Swederoer there goeth in another great creak, wherein Bos-stadt lieth, three leagues east from Swederoer, 
Bos-stadt▪ Laholme.  & a league easterlyer lieth the town or castle called Laholme, & there also goeth a River into the land.  
Three leagues northward from Laholme lieth Helm●te upon a currant or falling water, 
Helmste.  but there may nothing but boyers and small boats go into it.  
Three leagues westward from Helmste lieth the Island Tullo, which lieth northnorthwest about five leagues from Swederoer: 
The Island Tullo.  inward to the land against this Island there lieth a high hill, which showeth white, as if it were sandy land, it is called Haver, but by Sailors it is called Young Col, 
Young Col.  because it is like Col for height and fashion, and sometimes also it is taken for Col.  
Three leagues north from Tullo lieth the River of Valckenborch: on the north side thereof there lieth an Island called Muruptinge.  
And three leagues more north from the River of Valckenborch lieth Waersberghen, 
Valckenburgh.  which is distant from Col north and by west, and south and by east twelve or thirteen leagues. To sail into Waersberghen then run in by the east side, 
To sail into Waersbergen.  but right upon the point of the Island there lieth a rock under the water, and from the point whereon the castle standeth, there also lieth a blind rock, which you must shun, and go in the middle of the water, between the Island and the Maieland, and anchor against the castle at four or five fathom, there within it is all flat water. To sail otherwise into Waersberghen set Outboy north from the castle, and go in northnortheast, there lieth a Rock there even with the water, you must leave it on starboard, and anchor below the castle at four fathom.  
Thus the land of Waersberghen showeth, when you sail by Anout to the Sound.   view of 'Waersberghen' (town in Sweden)  

VI The situation between Waersberghen and Masterland.  
THree leagues north from Waersberghen lieth Monstersond, 
Monstersond.  which is a River, which reacheth up into the land: upon it there lie some towns, as Vlymenes, Horn and Goeswaer.  

Nydingh.  From Waersberghen to Nyding the course is northwest five leagues: it is a very bad rock, it lieth even above the water, so that the water almost striketh over it: every man must take heed of it.  

Malesond.  A great league North-east and North-east and by east from Nydingh there lieth an Island called Malesond, it is a round Island, you may sail round about it at seven or eight fathom, and under it also it is good anckoring. Two cables length westnorthwest from Malesond lieth a blind rock, & there lieth another rock a bow shot from the land even with the water, on it there standeth a beacon, and upon the Mayeland there stand two great beacons each upon a rock, between them both there goeth in a haven, which lieth eastnortheast from Malesond, it is a fair haven of ten fathom deep, there is good anchor ground, 
Consback  about the low point you may see Consback lie north from you, you may run in between Ning or Nydingh and the firm land, for there also it is flat water.  

Wynno.  From Malesond to Wynno the haven of Niloos' the course is northnorthwest three leagues. By Wynno you go into the River of Niloos', 
Reefsond.  the haven is called Reefsond, there lieth a rough Island, which you must leave on baghborde, and the long rock on starboard, and so you must run in through the rocks by the rugged Island, there are no blind rocks which you need to fear▪ Wh●n you come within the rugged Island, than you may anchor there behind or within at twenty fathom. The south channel reacheth in northnorthwest, it is wide and broad and goeth in at eight, nine and ten fathom.  
Fron Reef●ond to Calfsond it is northnorthwest four leagues: you must sail into it south from a great rock, 
Calfsond.  whereon there standeth a beacon, south from the Haven there are many great rocks, and northward they are small rocks: now when you are within the rocks, about the point of the north land, there you may anchor at fiveteene or sixteen fathom, for there it is good anchor ground. From Calfsond you go forward to Bahuys, and then you leave Connel on the left hand: 
Bahuys. Connel.  you may also go within the rocks from Calfsond to the river of Nyleus.  
Masterland and Calfsond lie about four leagues distant. 
M●sterland.  If you will sail from Schagen to Masterland, then go eastnortheast, than you shall see a round rock or hill called Bretto, 
Bretto hill.  when that is eastnortheast from you, and you sail right upon it then you come open before Masterland, and then you see the paternosters lie before you, which is a heap of outrockes, 
Paternosters.  which reach far out into the Sea, leave them on baghborde, and sail along by them eastnortheast, & east and by north, till you come by the Island of Masterland, and when you come to the land then the River will open, which reacheth in by the south side most east and by south and eastsoutheast, and when you are within the Island where the mast or beacon with the barrel upon it standeth, then turn up southward behind it, and anchor before the town, for than you may see it lie before you: there you put an anchor out before to seaward, and make a rope fast upon the Kaye, lying also with the stern of the ship at the Kaye.  
You may go into the Sea again through the south channel close along by the rock, 
South channel.  which lieth in the middle of the channel above the water: you may go about on both sides of this rock: but within the rock which lieth above the water, there lieth a blind rock, and on the south side there lieth a great rock, that lieth somewhat more outward than that which lieth above it: and there lieth also a blind rock under the water on the Island, upon the north side of the rock which lieth in the channel. The channel reacheth in most east and east and by north, there all about it is good anchor ground, and you may also sail within through the rocks to the havens or rivers of Bahuys & Nileus.  
Thus the land showeth between Waersberghen and Masterland.  
Britto. Waersberghen.   view of Sweden  

VII. The situation between Col and Schaghen.  
ANout sand and Col lie distant from each other northwest and southeast about eleven leagues, you may easily see them both upon the hatches of the ship in clear wether, when you are between them: in that channel it is twenty and two-and-twentie fathom deep.  
From Anout sand to Zeeland the course is southsoutheast twelve or thirteen leagues. Between Anout and Zeeland it is fiveteene and sixteen fathom deep.  
Anout sand is very shoring, and reacheth from Anout about eastnortheast into the Sea: but when you come out of the west you may sound it at seventeen or eighteen fathom, but when you come out of the Sound with a sharp wind than you can not sound it. On the north side of Anout you may anchor at ten or eleven fathom, so that then you may shun the Sand to go to the Sound.  
Between Col and Anout there lieth a bank which is no deeper than seven or eight fathom, sometimes the stream raveleth much thereon. There lieth another bank between the bank of Anout and Valkenborch of twelve fathom, which reacheth to Haland, which also in some places is no deeper than eight fathom a little south from Anout sand.  
Between Anout and Waersberghen in the channel it is two-and twenty fathom deep, but there also there lieth a bank between them both of ten fathom deep: when you are forced to lie by a wind between Anout and Lesou, and that you find twenty fathom deep, than you must know that you begin to fall near to Norway side: but when you run westward and find but twelve, thirteen, fourteen and fiveteene fathom, than you must know that you are towards the jutsche or Anout side, than you must wind again towards Norway: but where the banks aforesaid lie is declared before, there you must look to it passing to and again over it, lest thereby you should err and go out of the way. If you must be forced to laveere between Lesou and Anout, or between the Sound and Schaghen by night or in misty wether, you must not spare your lead: the channel for the most part is twenty, one-and-twentie, two-and-twentie and three-and-twentie fathom deep. Between Anout and Lezou in the right channel it is five-and-twentie fathom deep: but right between Anout and Lezou it is flat water, of seven or eight fathom. There you may sail through between them both, till you come to the Belt. Anout on the west side is very foul, and full of Dwalegrounds of two or three fathom.  
From the Sand of Anout to the Trindle it is northwest ten or eleven leagues. 
Trindle.  The Trindle lieth North-east from the north end of Lezou three leagues, upon it is about eight foot water, but as some say but four foot. It is stony sand ground, and a Flat in bigness as much as two Morgens of land, 
Lezou.  it lieth extended along the channel, and on the North-east side there lieth a ton upon it. From Lezou there cometh a Flat towards the Trindle, which you may sound at three or four fathom. When you sail through between Lezou and the Trindle, than the nearer to the Trindle you have the deeper water, that is 5, 6 & 7 fathom: spare not your lead by night about the Trindle, nor come no nearer unto it on the out side then 9 or 10 fathom.  
What may be said more of the Trindle, as also of the full situation of the Island Lezou, with the banks and Flats shooting out from it, and how you may sail forward to Schaghen, & so about it, I have already declared it at large in the fourth Chapter of this Book, whereunto I refer the Reader, and leave it here as needless to be rehearsed again.   

VIII. How the streams run in these places.  
THrough the Sands and the Sound the stream commonly goeth with the wind, but most about the North, when a hard east wind bloweth; and then the stream runneth out north.  
Between Waersberghen and Masterland in the channel, the stream also goeth most with the wind, and it raveleth there sometimes upon certain places as if they were Sands: this you may see in calm wether, when you let a lead sink upon the ground.  
By Schaghen the stream commonly cometh falling out of the Belt, and falleth to the North-east land, specially when the wind hath for a while blown out of the east or North-east: if you come from Anout, and will sail to Schaghen by night with a west wind, or coming out of the west about Schaghen with a southerly wind you would with those streams soon be driven under Norway, before you should once think or imagine so much.  
To conclude, in this channel of Valsterboen, and from Steden to the Sound, & forth from the Sound to Schaghen it behoveth a Master or Pilot of a ship to be very circumspect, and not to be careless or negligent to shun all the dangers of the multitude of foul Sands, Rocks and Shallows which are therein, and about the same: therefore he that will use these Seas must be very wary, for that one that is well acquainted with them hath enough to do to look to himself.  
Thus the Island of Anout showeth when you come from Lezou.   view of 'Anout' (island in Denmark) 
Thus Lezou showeth when you come from Schaghen.   view of 'Lezou' (island in Denmark)  

IX. How these Lands and places are distant from each other.  

FRom the ton upon Valsterboen sand to the ton on Draker sand south and north 5 leagues.  
From Steden to the ton upon Draker sand north and by east 6 leagues.  
The tons in the Sands or Shallows how they lie distant is already showed.  
From the north ton in the Shallows to the  north and by west 7 leagues.  
From the Kuycke to the ton upon Drakersand North-east 6 leagues.  
From Steden to Malmuyen northnortheast 8 leagues.  
From Malmuyen to Reefsholme west 5 leagues.  
From Malmuyen to Weeme northwest and northwest and by north 7 leagues.  
From Lantscrone to Elsenore westnorthwest 3 leagues.  
From Ween to Lappesand northnorthwest 3 leagues.  
From Elsenore or Lappesand to Col northwest and northwest and by north 5 leagues.  
From Col to Engleholme east 4 leagues.  
From Engleholme to Tuerko northwest 4 leagues.  
From the point of Tuerco behind Swederoer to Laholme eastnortheast 3 leagues.  
From Laholme to Tuylo northwest and by west 5 leagues.  
From Tuylo to Waersberghen norhwest 5 leagues.  
From Waersberghen to Malesond n. n. w. 5 leagues.  
From Malesond to Winno northnorthwest 3 leagues.  
From Winno to Masterland northwest 5 leagues.  
From Masterland to the west end of the Paternosters westsouthwest 3 leagues.  
From the point of Col to Haselin s. w. & by w. 8 leagues.  
From Col to the outpoint of Zeeland south-west 5 leagues.  
From Col to the south end of Swedero North-east 4 leagues.  
From Col to Waersberghen north and by west 12 leagues.  
From Waersberghen to Nydingh northwest 5 leagues.  
From Nydingh to Malesond n. e. and n. e. & by e. 1½ league.  
From Nydingh to Masterland northnorthwest 8 or 9 leagues.  
From Col to the Sand of Anout northwest 10 or 11 leagues.  
From Haselin to Anouts sand north 11 leagues.  
From the Sand of Anout to the Trindle northwest 11 leagues.  
From the Trindle to Schagen sand northwest 8 leagues.  
But from within the Trindle to the sand of Schagen northwest and by north also 8 leagues.  
When you come from Schagen and will go without about the Trindle the course is southeast and by east 8 leagues.  
From the north end of the Sand of Lesou to Schagen the course is northnorthwest 8 leagues.    

XI. Cross courses in Schaghen Reach.  

FRom Waersberghen to Anoult or Anouts Sand south-west 10 leagues.  
From Waersberghen to Lesou west 16 leagues.  
From Waersberghen to the Trindle west and by north distant 13 leagues.  
From Waersberghen to Schagen is the course westnorthwest 19 or 20 leagues.  
From Nydingh to Schagen west and by north distant about 15 or 16 leagues.  
From Nileus to Schaghen west 15 leagues.  
From Masterland to Lezou south-west, and south-west and by south 13 or 14 leagues.  
From Masterland to Schagen westsouthwest 12 leagues.  
And how the most part of the places and havens of Norway are distant from Schagen it is already set down in the third Chapter, and also in the Chapter ensuring.    
Here followeth the Card N. 30.   


Eÿgentlÿcke beschryvinghe der Zeecusten van Noor weghen, tusschen der Neus en de paternosters, met all havens daer tusschen beÿden geleghen, daer beneffens de Custe van Jutlandt vande Holms aff tot am Schaghen, hoemen die bescÿlen en hem voor all periculen hoeden shall.  
Naifve description des Costs marines' de Norvege entre le Cape der Neuse et les Paternostres, avecq tous les Ports de mer la entredeux situez, Ensemble la cost de Juthlan de des Holmes jusques au de la Schaghen, et comment on les navigera et evitera tous inconvenients et dangiers.   map of the coast of Norway   

CHAPTER XI. A DESCRIPTION OF the Coasts of Norway, lying between Masterland and the Neus.  

I. The situation between the Paternosters and the Island Farther.  
Behind the Paternosters (as I showed in the Chapter before) there goeth a broad River into the land, whereon the round hill of Britto lieth, 
Britto hill.  which is a hill very well to be known: when it is eastnortheast from you, than you are right before Masterland.  
North upward from this River lieth Kerckesond a great River which reacheth far into the land. 
Kerckesond.   

Harmensond. Harmenshooft.  Three leagues north from Kerckesond lieth Harmensond, & by it there lieth an Island called Harmenshooft.  
Harmenshooft and the west end of the Paternosters lie di-distant north and by west, and south and by east five leagues.  

Boochscharre.  From Harmenshooft to Suyderwicxholme the course is northnorthwest four or five leagues, between them both lieth Boochscharre.  

Suyderwicholme.  Suyderwicxholme & Noderwixholme are two great islands, which lie upon a great River, which runneth up far into the land, whereon many towns lie, which are also far up in the land, as Oldborch, Oldwat, Aleroes and Dragens, from whence much fat wares come. 
Ottrom.  North from thence lieth Ottrom, which also is a great River or creak, reaching into the land.  

Akersond.  West from Ottrom lieth the Island of Akersond, which you may sail round about. The Island of Akersond lieth from Zuyderwicxholme northwest and by west five leagues.  

Schip hill.  By Akersond north from Ottrom lieth Schiphill, it is a haven where men lad sparres and other fat wares.  

The Sisters  From Akersond to the Sisters it is west and by north four leagues: between them both lieth Graswick: When you sail into it than you leave the sharp point on baghborde, 
Graswick.  and within there lieth a round rock, there is good anchor ground: you may go about on both sides of this rock. North from this rock there lieth a great creak, where ships lie in for the wind, and within also there lieth a round rock, run along by the west side, which first reacheth in north, and about the Island northnorthwest, leave the Island on starboard, and then go in northnorthwest by the west side.  
Behind the Sisters lieth Elsange: 
Elsange.  when you come from farther, than you run through within the rocks which lie within the Sisters, till you be against the land, than you see a great grey rock, which you must leave on baghborde, and the small rocks that lie there within on starboard, then go about by the west side of the land, and then you shall see the haven open, which is narrow, but within it is flat water and soft ground.  
North from Elsanghe lieth the point of Rogue: 
Roge.  at the east end of Rogue you may anchor, there it is a smooth strand, and you may go through between Rogue and the Calf. But if you will be under Fleto, then go through between the two small rocks. The point of Rogue lieth distant from the Island farther northnortheast five leagues.  
From the Sisters to the Island Bast it is northwest five leagues. 
Bast.  But Farther and Bast are distant north and by west, and south & by east also five leagues.  
From Bast to the Soenwater it is north and by east & northnortheast four leagues, between them both lieth a foul point: 
Markenboet. Asko. Lousond. Soenwater.  and south from Bast lieth Markenboet, and south from it lieth Asko, which is a creak, and north from Asko lieth Lousond.  
From Farther to Soenwater it is north. When you sail from farther or Bast to Soenwater there lieth a red point between Soenwater and Coperwick: but if you will put into Coperwick you must turn up westward, 
Coperwick.  when you are within the Lammerens, there standeth a church on the west land, there is the lading place: you may sail further upward to Brakenesse, 
Holmson  and on the north side Holmsond lieth. Soenwater reacheth in for the most part north, upon it there lie many havens and lading places, 
Mossond.  most on the right side as you come in: first Mossond, which goeth up eastward: 
Wickste. Schiphil.  then Wickste behind an Island, it is a creak: then Schiphill, which also is a Sandbaye, but it is a good road: It goeth up northward to Anslo, 
Ansloe.  than it runneth southward into the Bodem.  
Upon the coast between Masterland and farther it is all over for the most part good anchor ground at five-and-thirtie and forty fathom.  
Thus the Land of north-east showeth itself between Masterland and Zuyderwicxholme being four leagues from it, as you sail along by it.  
Distlebergh. Langhebergh. Britto.   view of Norway  

II. The situation between farther and Langhesond.  
West from the Island of farther there lieth a town in a great creak called Tonsberghen. 
Tonsberghen.   
From Farther to Larwick the course is westsouthwest four leagues. Larwick is a great broad River, wherein there are many lading places and Creeks, 
Larwick.  where you may anchor. From the east point of Larewick there runneth a row of rocks, which reach southeast and by south a good way into the Sea, which you must shun, for they run almost over half the creak: the rocks are called the Larewicsche Swynen: within it it is flat shallow water, so that far there within it no great ships can lie afloat, the havens of Larewick are all firrwood havens.  

Stavange.  On the west side of Larewick Stavange lieth which are rocks, there you may sail in on both sides.  
A league west from Stavange lieth the Nesse, which is the east point of Langesond. From Farther to Langesond it is westsouthwest eight leagues.  

Langesond.  Langesond is one of the fairest havens of all Norway: before old Langesond there lieth a high round rock, whereon there standeth a great round mast or beacon to know Langesond by. Conincxhaven or the River of Langesond goeth northnorthwest in by a rough rugged point, 
Conincxhaven.  and then you go in east from the Baerse, 
Baerse.  which lieth off from the aforesaid rugged point, within that haven it is thirty fathom deep: when you sail in keep in the middle of the water, and anchor in Conincxhaven at eight-and-twentie or thirty fathom. If you will go into the Nesse, 
The Nesse.  then sail between the great rock whereon the mast standeth, and the land of Old Langesond, leaving the said rock on starboard, and sail so about the rugged point into the Nesse. The Nesse lieth behind a Cingle strand, you lie under a row of Rocks like red sand, there lie some small rocks against this Cingle, there it is wide and broad, 
Strand like a girdle.  and a good haven to come into, there it is four-and-twentie and five-and-twentie fathom deep.  
Thus the land east from Langesond showeth being five leagues from you, when you come out of the west.   view of Norway  

III. The situation of the Havens and Rivers, between Langesond and Maerdou.  
FRom Langesond to jofferland the course is southsouthwest a great league, 
jofferland. Aberfort.  between them both lieth Abbefoert and Ostkiel, and east from the out-rock of jofferland you may go into the two havens. 
Ostkiel.  From the northerlyest rocks of jofferland to Abbefort the course is northnorthwest and north-and by west a league, and to Ostkiel is the course also northwest a league. When you come out of the south, you may go within jofferland through to Ostkiel, or Abbefoert: you may also anck●r behind jofferland at fiveteene and twenty fathom.  
West from jofferland there lie Westkiel, Santfort and Longen. If you will go into Westkiel, 
Westkiel.  you must leave all the great rocks which lie off from jofferland on starboard, and so sail upon the west end of the haven, leaving all the small rocks of Santfort on baghborde, and sail in northnorthwest till you be about the west point, & then turn up northwest. On the north side of the islands which lie within the haven, there is a ditch or falling water, where you may anchor at twenty or five-and-twentie fathom.  

Santfort.  Santfort lieth a league west from Westkiel: if you will sail into Sandfort, leave all the small rocks on starboard, and so go along by the land, till you be within the Longholmes, which remain on baghborde, & go right into the Wike. This is a fair haven, and you may go from the east into it.  

A bank by Santfort.  Against Santfort there lieth a bank into the Sea, which in some places is no deeper than three or four fathom, and it endeth at Westkiel.  

Longhen.  A great league west from Sandvort lieth Longhen, there lieth a round Island or rock before it, and thereon there standeth a mast with a barrel: this Island or rock with the mast lieth upon the east side of the haven, keep along by the land whereon the mast with the barrel standeth, and sail in close by the barrel, for there standeth a hand on starboard of the haven, which showeth you, that there lieth a blind rock under the water, that there you might turn somewhat from it: this haven is narrow, and a short channel to come into: now when you are within you may go eastward again into the Sea, and come out again to the river of Santfort.  
A league west from Longhen lieth the haven of Oxefort, 
Oxfort.  it is a wide haven, & runneth in first north, there lieth a long rock west from the haven, leave that on baghborde, and go north till you be about the west point of the land: when you are a little way within the long rock, there lieth a blind rock under the water, which you must leave on starboard, and on the west point also there lieth a blind rock, which you must shun. When you are there within, than you must sail in northwest and by north and northwest, and anchor upon the north side of the haven, there it is wide and broad, & there are many creeks, wherein you may lie at twenty and five-and-twentie fathom, there you may anchor where you think good.  
When you are before Longhen and Oxefort, than the Drommels lie westnorthwest from you.  
About a league west from Oxford Tromsond goeth in, east from the white church which standeth on the Sea side, 
Tromsond  about half a league east from Mardou: it is a fair river. You must sail in behind the land of Mardou into the haven of Mardou, there stand two masts or beacons upon the east or north side of the haven upon a high hill, you must sail in by them, and there also you may anchor.  
Thus the land between Mardou and Langhesond showeth, when you come out of the west, and are five leagues from the land almost against Longhen.  
Drommels. Hill north from the Drummel. East-drommels. The land of Westkiel.   view of Norway  

FOUR The situation between Mardou and Vlecker.  
THe Island of Mardou on the top is full of green trees, and round about it is all bare rocks, 
The Island Mardou.  on each side of the Island there goeth in a haven: the east haven of Mardou reacheth in w. s. w. there lieth a blind rock on the right hand as you go in, but you must go close in by the Island of Mardou, the haven is no deeper than three fathom, and you may anchor under the Hand at 12 or 13 fathom, you may also go up into the river. The west haven goeth in on the west side of the Island, you must leave Mieuholme on baghborde, and go in n. n. e. & so sail behind the Island, or else go up the river, and there anchor on the west side. Fron the west end of the Island of Mardou there lieth a rock under the water, which you must shun, when you go into the west haven. When you are before Mardou the Drommels' lie n. w. from you, 
Drommels.  but when you are right before the land or the haven you cannot see the Drommels.  
West from Mieuholme there lie many red rocks: west from thence you go into Hesnes, 
Hesnes. Kercksond.  and half a league westerlyer lieth Kercksond: upon the Island of Hesnes there stand two beacons or masts, and there it is very deep, but to Kercken it is shallower, there it is 30 fathom deep, & the outrockes there are all red. On the west side of the haven lieth a rock under the water called Coenagle: there stand two masts upon the land, when they are one against the other, than you are against the Coenagles. The two masts aforesaid stand upon the grey holm, leave them on starboard, and so go inwards, there it is high land, and the Drommels lie about n. n. w. from you: you may sail from thence within the rocks to Mardou.  
Two leagues west from Hesnes lieth Hamersond: the haven of Hamersond reacheth in northnortheast, 
Hamersond.  and you may anchor behind the Island against the beacon at thirty fathom. The east haven of Hamersond reacheth both in and out northwest and southeast, & there lieth a rock on the west side with a mast or beacon upon it.  

Old Hilsond.  West from Hamersond you go into the Old Hilsond: if you will go into Old Hilsond, you must go in east from the rocks of Blindsond, which lie on the west side of Old Hilsond. Before Old Hilsond there lie many great rocks, and there stand two or three masts upon them all, which you must leave upon starboard, and go in (as I said before) by the west side, you may turn westwards up about the point, and sail through between the islands, that you may see no Sea, you may there go into what River you will, they are all fair Rivers to go into. The Island of Blindsond lieth on the point of the west side of Old Hilsond. 
Blindsond   
You shall know the Island of Wolfsond thus: they are all high grey rocks, 
Wolfsond.  and there stand three or four masts upon them. Wolfsond hath two havens: the east haven reacheth in northwest, and then you must leave the great round high rock whereon the mast standeth on the west side: the west haven is a narrow haven to go into, it goeth in upon the north side of Reperwick, there stand two stenges or masts upon the land, which you must leave on baghborde, and there you must go in close by them, and on starboard there lie a company of small rocks, you must go in by them, and sail behind the Island whereon the great masts stand, and there anchor, there you lie safe against all winds, and you may also run there within the rocks, and come out again into the Sea by Old Hilsond, or you may also go out of the east haven of Wolfsond, which you will.  
Reperwick haven goeth in right west from Wolfsond north, and north and by west, it is a fair wide haven, you must sail in by the land of Wolfsond, and leave all the rocks of Wolfsond whereon the masts stand on starboard, and all the great rocks of Ransond on baghborde, and so go in behind into the haven, and then turn up westward, and there anchor, there is the road, and a fair haven for ships that will go west.  
Thus the land showeth between Mardou or the Drommels and Vlecker, when you come out of the west, and sail along by it.  
Vleckereur. The Boot. Wolfsond Hamersond.   view of Norway  

V How you shall sail into Vlecker and the havens between Vlecker and the Neus.  
West from Coperwick lieth Vleckeroer, which also hath two havens to go into, 
Vlecker.  the east haven of Vlecker goeth in west from the point of Ransond westnorthwest: when you are before the east haven of Vlecker, than you may see full into the Vosse, when you sail into it you leave all the black rocks on starboard, and the great grey rocks with the Island whereon the two masts stand on baghborde, & go in by them, leaving them on baghborde, than you must turn up westward to Dievenholme, and there anchor west in the Sandbaye.  
When you are before the east haven of Vlecker there lieth a round hill, called the Omgekeerde Boot, it striketh out above all the land against Hamersond, when you come out of the west, 
Omghekeerde Boot.  than you see three high lands lying inward to the land, which when they come towards the Drommels by little and little vanish away.  
The west haven of Vlecker reacheth in northnorthwest, when you come from Heylighesond you may see the river open, and you may sail by the rocks and scharres of Heylighesond, along into that Island, you must anchor on the west land within Dievenholme whereon the gallows stand, at fiveteene, sixteen and twenty fathom.  
You may go again from thence through that east haven into the Sea▪ and leave the Island with the masts and all the great rocks on starboard, and all the black rocks on baghborde.  

Heylighesond.  On the Island of Heylighesond there stand two great masts, you must go westward into the Island till you be in, & you must anchor under the aforesaid Island, whereon the masts stand, there runneth a great river into the land, there you may sail in, for there the ships lad.  

Scheersond or Westerrysen.  Four leagues west from Heylighesond you go into Scheersond or Westerrysen, you must leave Sparrels on the left hand, and all the great holmes or rocks on starboard, and so you must go in.  
A little east from the Neus lieth a rock with two masts called Melin: 
Melin.  a little easterlyer from that there lieth another rock, whereon also there standeth a mast, which rock is called Sparrels, 
Sparrels.  between these two outrockes you must go into the Cloof, or the Cow and the Calf, which are two well known round hillocks, 
Cow and Calf.  lying in the land of the Neus, when you come against Sparrels, there lieth a blind rock under the water, but when you are within Sparrels, than there lieth a rock above the water, which you must leave on baghborde, than the haven will by little and little open unto you, and then you are against the Clofe, and then turn up westward about the point, and anchor there in the Sandbaye at fiveteene or sixteen fathom, than the Cow and the Calf will be about northnortheast from you.  
Right west from the point of Neus, there goeth in a haven which is called Selloer or Manesond: 
Sellore or Manesond.  if you will sail into the east channel of Manesond, you must beware of the Bishops boeden (lying in the middle of the River) and leave them on baghborde, and go along in by the land of the Neus, until you come a little within Bishops boeden, 
Bishop's boeden.  there you shall find a rock under the water, which you must shun, & anchor right against the white church within the said rock: but if you will go in at the west or north channel, than you must go north about the out-rocks, and sail upon the south end of the low land to least, and go in by it, but you must take heed of the rocks, which lie off from the innermost Island, under the water on starboard: now when you are against or within Bishops boeden, than it will there be nine fathom deep, there you may anchor, or if you will go further in, then sail upon the said white church, which standeth on the north side, & anchor there where you will.  
You may also go in east, behind the low land of least, but it is a whole land.  
East from the Neus the high land of Spangher lieth, 
The high land of Spangher.  which is a land very well to be known.  
Thus the land of Norway showeth between the Neus and Vlecker, when you come out of the west, and are five leagues from it.  
The Neus. The land of Spanger.   view of Norway 
Thus the Cow and the Calf show when you come out of the west, and are against them.  
Calf. Cow.   view of 'the Cowe and the Calfe' (Norway) 
Thus the Cow and the Calf show when they are north and by east four or five leagues from you.  
Calf. Cow.   view of 'the Cowe and the Calfe' (Norway) 
Thus the Neus showeth when it is four or five leagues west from you.   view of Norway  

VI Of the falling of the streams along these Coasts.  
ALthough the water upon the coasts of Norway falleth up and down, yet it holdeth no certain tide: some time of the year, and specially in the fore part thereof there goeth so stiff a stream about the west, along by the coast of Norway, that a ship lying by the wind with a south-west stream, cannot drive downwards if it may bear sail, and the nearer you are under the coast of Norway, there you find the harder stream. This stream cometh in that sort falling out of the Belt against the Land of North-east, and turneth in that sort along by the coast of Norway into the north Sea: but between farther and Masterland it is for the most part all anchor ground at 35 and 40 fathom.   

VII. How these Places are distant one from the other.  

FRom the west end of the Paternosters to Harmenshooft north and by west 5 leagues.  
From Harmenshooft to Zuyderwicxholme northnorthwest 4 or 5 leagues.  
From Zuyderwicxholme to Akersond n. w. & by w. 5 leagues.  
From Akersond to the Sisters w. and by n. 4 leagues.  
From the Sisters to Bast northwest 5 leagues.  
From Bast to Coperwick north and by west 4 leagues.  
From Bast to the Roo-hooke or Soenwater n. n. e. 4 leagues.  
From Soenwater to Farther south 8 leagues.  
From Bast to Farther south and by east 5 leagues.  
From Monick Island & from Rogue to Farther s. s. w. 5 leagues.  
From Farther to Larwick westsouthwest 4 leagues.  
From Farther to Langesond westsouthwest 8 leagues.  
From Langesond to jofferland southsouthwest above a league.  
From Ostrysen to Mardou southsouthwest 3 leagues.  
From jofferland to Mardou south-west 8 leagues.  
From Mardou to Blindsond south-west 4 leagues.  
From Mardou to Reperwick s. w. 8 leagues.  
From Blindsond to Wolfsond s. w. 3 leagues.  
From Wolfsond or Reperwick to Vleckereur westsouthwest, & south-west and by west 3 leagues.  
From Vlecker to Scharsond westsouthwest 3 leagues.  
From Scharesond to the Neus w. s. w. 4 leagues.  
From Vlecker to the Neus w. s. w. 8 leagues.  
From Reper to the Neus' westsouthwest 8 leagues.    

VIII. How these Lands are distant from other Lands.  

HOw all these havens of Norway are distant from Schaghen and the Holmes in jutland, both for length and wideness, you find it in the third Chapter of this Book described at large.  
From der Neus to Schaghen east 33 leagues.  
From der Neus to Holmes in jutland s. e. 19 or 20 leagues.  
From der Neus to Bovenberghen s. e. and by s. 24 leagues.  
Fron der Neus to Holy land s. & by e. & s. s. e. 67 or 68 leagues  
From der Neus to the Eems south and somewhat easterlyer 75 or 77 leagues.  
From der Neus to Bornriffe south, and (as some say) somewhat westerlyer 83 leagues.  
From der Neus to Texel or Marsdeepe s. & by w. 93 leagues.  
From der Neus to Walcheren s. and by w. 126 or 127 leagues.  
From der Neus to the Pass of Calis southsouthwest and somewhat westerlyer 144 leagues.  
From der Neus to the Holmes before Yarmouth southsouthwest and somewhat westerlyer 104 leagues.  
From der Neus to Flamburgh head south-west 101 leagues.  
From der Neus to Scarborowe south-west 100 leagues.  
From der Neus to the river of Newcastle south-west & by west and somewhat westerlyer 104 leagues.  
From der Neus to Lieth in Schotland westsouthwest & somewhat westerlyer 103 leagues.  
From der Neus to Buquhamnesse west and somewhat northerlyer 88 or 90 leagues.  
From der Neus to Fairhill westnorthwest 93 leagues.  
From der Neus to Hitland n. w. and by w. about 100 leagues.   
Here followeth the Card N. 31.    


Pascaarte van Noorweghen, vertoonende de Zeecusten geleghen tusschen der Neus en Berghen, met all hare wonderlÿcke clippen rudsen en menichte van Eÿlanden aende selfde custe geleghen, gestelt op zÿne rechte streckingen en distantien van mÿlen  
Carte Marinesque de Norwege representant les costs situees entre le Cape der Neus et Bergues avecq ses admirables roc hiers escueilz, et quantité d'Jsles gisantes a la dicte cost, le tout exactement mis selon ses urayes routs et distance de lieves.   map of the coast of Norway   

CHAPTER XII. A DESCRIPTION OF the Sea-coasts of Norway, from the Neus to the City of Berghen.  

I. The situation between the Neus and Schuytenes or the Liet or Haven of Berghen.  
IN the Description made before I have sufficiently declared how you shall sail from the west and north into the Havens of the Neus or Maensond.  

Winfort.  Three or four leagues north from the low land of least lieth the Island of Winfort, & southward from thence you go into the haven or Winfort, which reacheth in North-east: but between Winforde and the low land of least there lieth another fair haven called Winterford.  
A league to seaward from the Island of Winfort there lie two outrockes, 
Focksteenes.  which are called the Focksteenes, the one lieth nearer to the land then the other.  

Berchsond  North from the Island of Winfort you go into Berghsond, which haven reacheth in e. n. e. along by the aforesaid great Island, and you may anchor at the end of the Island.  

Ekesond.  Three leagues north from Berghsond lieth Ekesond a good haven, there you go in north from all the outrockes, and you may anchor on the north side, for there is best anckering.  
North or west from Ekesond there lieth a haven called Serenooch, 
Serenooch  north from that there is a white strand, where there standeth a church upon an outpoint, and also there lieth a high rock called Walbert, whereon there standeth a mast or beacon. From that rock there shooteth out a stone Sand or shelf, 
Walbert.  and on this white strand there is a Las or Salmon fishing.  

The jedder.  The aforesaid high rock called Walbert lieth right over against the south end of jedder or the high land of least. The land of jedder is at least five leagues long, without any havens, on each end of this land there standeth a church, & from each end also there shooteth off a Sand: the northerlyest Sand reacheth northwest into the Sea, & an half league northnorthwest from the said Sand there lieth a rock or Island named Rutilio, 
●ut.  which you may go about on both sides. Cross from Rutilio to Seaward lieth the Vesteene, 
Vesteene.  about five leagues north from the jedder.  
About three leagues northnorthwest from the Vesteene there lieth an Island whereon a church standeth called Wittinghs: 
Wittinghs' eye.  but northnortheast from the Vesteene four leagues there lieth an Island before the haven or river of Stavanger called Sibrichtsteen. 
Sibrichsteene.   
If you will sail into Stavanger, coming out of the south, sail through between the Vesteen and the Maieland, leaving the foresaid Rock called Rutilio on starboard, but take good heed of the stone Shelf, which reacheth off from the north end of jedder, sail so inward till the Vesteen be southeast from you, then go in North-east to the point of Tonghenes, 
Tonghenes.  which is a long point and low land, and lieth on the south end of the River: now when you sail from the Vesteene to Tonghenes, than you shall see the Island Sibrichsteen before the River, which openeth itself into two parts, leave it on baghborde, and sail in by the point of Tonghenes, but there lieth a rock northward from the point: sail through between this rock and the point, about east and eastsoutheast into Doeswick, and when you are within the castle of Doeswick there you may anchor. 
Doeswick  But if you will sail forward before the town of Stavangher, 
Stavanghes.  than leave Diefsholme on starboard, and sail in southeast, & southsoutheast, till you be before the town, and there anchor where you will.  
But when you come out of the north and will sail to Stavangher, then go between the Vesteen and Whiting eye, and then go on North-east to Sibrichsteen & the point of Tonghenes, and do as I said before.  
From Vesteen to Schuytenes it is northnorthwest five leagues. But from Schuytenes to Sibrichsteen, through between Whiting eye it is east and west five leagues.  
Four leagues west and west and by north to seaward from Schuytenes there lie certain rocks called the Wtsiers.  
Tus the land of the jedder showeth when it is North-east from you five leagues.   view of 'Iedder' (Norway) 
Thus the land of jedder showeth when it is eastnortheast from you six or seven leagues.   view of 'Iedder' (Norway) 
Thus the Bock showeth when you are south from Schuytenes, before the Liet.   view of 'Bock' (Norway) 
Thus the hill Syke showeth when you are north from Schuytenes.   view of 'Syke' (Norway)  

II. How you may sail up the Liet van Berghen from Schuytenes to Berghen.  
THe Liet goeth in between the Island of Schuytenes and Bock, when Bock lieth North-east from you, than you are right open before the Liet, Schuytenes lieth on the west side, and Bock on the east side, and reacheth in first north and north and by west three leagues to Perdeholme, or the great warder or mast, and there is good road against the foresaid warder or mast. From Perdeholme to Vlocx it is north & north and by west three or four leagues. The Vlocx lieth right without Longhol, which is a good haven, you lie there with an anchor to Sea, and a rope fast on the land, there it is fiveteene fathom deep.  
Over against the Vlocx lieth Bommel haven, there also is a a good Rode.  

Bommelsond.  Bommel or Bommelsond goeth into the Sea by Bommel head, which is a high rock, which lieth on the north side of the haven, but on the south side there lie many small rocks, which as you go out you must leave on baghborde: the haven reacheth south-west, and south-west and by west into the Sea.  
From Vlocx to Bremerholme or Dievenholme the course is northnorthwest three leagues. 
Bremerholme or Dievenholme. Monsterhaven. Roteholme. Soltmer. Sick.  West or south from thence lieth Monsterhaven, there standeth a church, and there it is good road for ships that will go up and down the Liet.  
From Bremerholme to Rootholme it is northnorthwest four leagues: under Rootholme you may anchor at twenty fathom. South from Rootholme the Soltmer river goeth out, and reacheth southeast into the Sea, there lieth a high round hill upon the land of Bommel called Sick, which showeth like a hat, thereby you know Bommel and Soltmer river, for it lieth right between them both: when this hill Sick lieth North-east from you, than you are right before Bommelsond, and north from Soltmer river it is high land, but the land on the south side of Bommel is low land.  
To sail from Rootholme to Crabbekerck, 
Crabberkerck.  first it is a league to sail through the narrow or straight northwest, & from Rootholme to Crabbekerck it is north and by west three leagues: between them both lieth the rain Knape, 
The rain Knape.  which you may sail about on both sides. About south from rain Knape there reach two rivers into the Sea, 
Papesond. Stormsond.  namely Papesond & Stormsond. Papesond reaches southsouthwest into the Sea. But if you will sail out of Stormesond, then go along close by the land of Rootholme fourth and by east, and leave all the broken islands and rocks, with the great Island on starboard, till you come into Soltmer river, there it goeth out into the Sea south and south and by west.  
From the Narrow or Straight of Rootholme to rain Knape it is a league distant, but from rain Knape to Crabbekerck it is north and by east more than a league.  

Bock upon the Ra. Cruys river. North Drommels.  From Crabbekerck to Bock upon the Ramires, or Bockliet the course is northwest and by north three leagues: between them the Cruys river runneth into the Sea south-west: Cruys river is a haven very well to be known, for against it there lie three hills in the land, as if they were the Drommels of Norway, but they are not so high, they are also called the north Drommels, when those three hills are North-east, or thereabouts from you, than you are open before the Cruys river.  
By Bock upon the Ramires you go through the narrow way, & right north from Bock there lieth a stone under the water, whereon always there standeth a beacon or a mast.  

Watgestrome.  From Bock upon the Ramires to the Watgestrome the course is north, and somewhat westerlyer four leagues: in Watgestrome it is good anchor ground to lie there, upon the south side at four-and-twentie fathom. In the Watgestrome the Liet reacheth northwest a league, 
S. Oelofs. holm.  to the Reesteen, against it S. Oelofs holm lieth, by it you may go out of the jelte river, about behind Asland, about northwest into the Sea: when you come out of the Sea to go into the jelte river, than you are right against Reesteene upon that Liet. 
Reesteene.  Reesteen lieth on the east side of the Liet, right against the point whereon the two high hills stand, 
L●torens.  which are called the Letoorens, they are two high sharp hillocks, which you may see far off, when you sail up or down the Liet, in sailing up they lie most northnorthwest, and north and by west from you.  

Struys haven. Berghen. Harle.  Within Asland lieth Struys haven, and from thence to the town of Berghen it is northnortheast two leagues.  
The Island of Harle is five leagues long, you may go about it on both sides, when you come out of the north, and come so into the Waghe of Berghen in Norway. The Harlefoert goeth out about north and by west, 
Harleford.  and northnorthwest between Asland and the land of Harle.   

III. Of the Tide or running of the Streams.  
ON this coast of Norway from Neus to Berghen, & past Berghen as far as Stadt the water riseth and falleth, but holds no certain tides. But northward by Dronton the tide beginneth to hold, and to be ruled by the Moon.   

FOUR How these Places are distant from each other.  

FRom der Neus to the high land of least the course is North-east 3 leagues.  
From der Neus to Fockstenes northwest about 7 leagues.  
From the uttermost rock of Focksteenes to Ekesond north 4 leagues.  
From Focksteenes to the south point of the jedder northwest 7 leagues.  
From the south point of the jedder to the Vesteene northwest 5 leagues.  
From the Vesteen to Sibrighsteen North-east 4 leagues.  
From Vesteen to Schuytenes northnorthwest 5 leagues.  
From Schuytenes to Sibrightsteene through within Whitingsey cast 5 leagues.  
From Schuytenes to the Wtsiers w, and w. & by n. 4 leagues.  
From Schuytenes to Bommels hoofed northnorthwest, and somewhat northerlyer 7 leagues.  
From Bommels hoofed to Cruysfoert n. n. w. 9 leagues.  
From Cruysfoert to Harle northnorthwest 13 leagues.  
The stretching of all reaches in the Liet from Schuytenes to Berghen, you find it in the Description of the Liet, from point to point perfectly set down.  
From the Neus to the Wtsiers' northwest 29 leagues.  
From the Wtsiers to jeltefoert or the Waghe of Berghen north and by west 26 leagues.    

V How these Lands are distant from other Lands.  

IN the former Chapter I have showed how all the places and chiefest points of all the north Seas, are distant in breadth & length from the Neus.  
From Schuytenes to the Vlie south and by east, and somewhat southerlyer 106 leagues.  
From Schuytenes to the Texel south, and south and by east 111 leagues.  
From Schuytenes to Walcheren south 142 or 143 leagues.  
From Schuytenes to the Holmes before jarmouth south & by west and somewhat westerlyer 112 or 113 leagues.  
From Schuytenes to Flamborowe head south-west & by south 105 or 106 leagues.  
From Schuytenes to Tinmouth south-west 105 leagues.  
From Schuytenes to Buquhamnesse west and by south, and somewhat southerlyer 72 leagues.  
From Schuytenes to Hitland west and by north and westnorthwest 67 leagues.  
From Schuytenes to the north end of Hitland westnorthwest and somewhat northerlyer 71 or 72 leagues.  
From the Wtsiers to the Vlie s. and by e. 103 or 104 leagues.  
From the Wtsiers to the Wtweer rocks north and by west 40 leagues.  
From jelteforde or the Waghe of Berghen to Hitland west 48 leagues.  
From jelteford or the Waghe of Berghen to the north end of Hitland west and west and by north 51 leagues.    

VI Of the height of these Countries.  

ACcording to the writing of Lucas johnson Waghenaer these Lands lie under the heigths hereafter set down.  
The Neus lieth under 57 degrees 48 minutes.  
But my opinion is that it is not so much northerly, for the reasons showed in the Preface at the beginning of this Book.  
The Island of Schuytenes lieth under 59 degrees.  
The Waghe of Berghen lieth under 60 deg. 15 or 20 minutes.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 32.   


Beschrÿvinge der Zeecusten van Noorweghen, geleghen tusschen Berghen en Dronten, hoemen all Havenen en Foorden aldaer beseÿlen en all periculose clippen en rudsen mÿden shall  
Description des costs marines' de Norvege situez entre Bergues et Dronten, et comment on abordera a ladicte cost tous Ports et Haures, et evitera tous dangereux rochiers et escueilz▪   map of the coast of Norway   

CHAPTER XIII. A DESCRIPTION OF the Sea-coasts of Norway, from Berghen or jelteford to the North Cape.  

I. The situation between the Waghe of Berghen and the point of Stadt.  

Harle.  THe Island of Harle is five leagues long: south from it Harleforde goeth in, sailing into it you come into the Waghe of Berghen. The same way also you go into jelteforde, but that reacheth in west, or behind Asland, as it is showed in the Chapter before. Also when you come out of the north, you may sail about the Island of Harle, and so come also into the Waghe of Berghen.  
From jelteford or the Waghe of Berghen northnorthwest and north and by west eleven or twelve leagues lie the rocks called Wtweere: 
Wtweere tockes.  they are outrockes which reach somewhat into the Sea about three leagues. There between them both it is all broken rocky land, which you may sail through, for the Northern jachts sail all through within the Kielstrome, and come down from Cows all within the rocks, behind the Island of Harle to Berghen.  
From Wtweer rocks to Old it is northnorthwest, and north and by west twelve or thirteen leagues: between them both lieth Zuydfort, 
Zuydvort.  which is a fair haven, there lie two islands before, and you must run in between them both.  

Old.  Old is a high rock and lieth alone, it showeth like a saddle, and on both sides goeth round down: you may sail southward into Old, and come north out again, and also north in and south out. Oldsond reacheth in North-east. When Old is east from you, than there is a haven, which is three leagues from the uttermost rock, for there lie two rocks right west from Old, and two westnorthwest from thence, those rocks you must leave on baghborde. When Old is southeast from you there lie two or three rocks, which you must leave on starboard, and go in eastnortheast, than you find three or four islands, which you must leave on baghborde, and then go close along by the east end of the Island, and you shall see Stadt lie without the land of Old.  
The innermost land of Old is high land and hilly, as if it were houses: the hackled land which standeth inward is the land of Stadt.  
About northwest and northwest and by north from Old there lie two smooth rocks, some part above, and some part under the water.  
North from Oldsond lieth Cows and Ornel, 
Kin. Ornel.  which is like a saddle for a horse, and goeth round down on both sides, you may sail in southward to it, and come out again north, and so you do Kine also.  
From Old to Cows it is four leagues, 
Stadt.  but Old and Stadt lie about eleven leagues distant. Between Cows and Old there goeth a great River into the land, whereon there lie two towns, called Waldres and Esterdal. Cows is an Island and openeth like the hoof of a cow, or like a bishop's Mitre. Behind Cows there is a fair haven.  
Northwest and by west from Cows there lie three or four rocks, some under the water.  
south-west and by west also there lie rocks under and above the water, these rocks lie at least three leagues from the land.  
North from Cows lie the outrockes of Wtover, 
Wtover.  and there forward it is all sound land to Flowach.  
North about the point of Stadt lieth an Island or rock called Swinost, which lieth four leagues north from the point, 
Swinost.  about half way between Stadt and the Island of Geske.  
Thus the land about Northford and Southford showeth, when it lieth east and by south from you.   view of Norway 
Thus the Fore-lands about Stadt show.  
Stadt. Cows. Ornel. Old.   view of 'Stadt' (Norway) 
When the point of Stadt is North-east and by north from you, than the land of Stadt, Cows and Old showeth thus.  
Stadt.   view of 'Stadt' (Norway) 
This should have followed above, for it is the situation of the land about Old.   view of 'Olde' (Norway)  

II. How you shall sail from Stadt along the Liet of Roemsdale to Boede or the Stopples.  
ABout eight leagues north from Stadt lieth the Island Flowach, 
Flowach.  and the Island Geske lieth there northwards. The Island which some of our Hollanders call Geske, the Boars or Husbandmen in Norway call Sandowe: 
Geske.  but behind it lieth a little low long Island which they call Geske. From the fore part of the Island Sandowe there shooteth out a point of sand toward Flowach: when you come out of the Sea you must turn about behind that point, and there you may anchor at ten fathom fair ground against the Island Geske: but you must not sail far beyond the foresaid point, for there lieth a blind rock somewhat inward close by Sandowe. Therefore you must anchor close within the point: there stand little beacons or warders on the shore, that thereby the Road may be known.  
Between Sandow and Flowach you must fail in eastward, and that is the beginning of the Liet of Dronten. Right south from Flowach there lieth an Island called Harle or Harry, 
Harle or Harry.  you may also go in by it to the Liet of Dronten or Roemsdale, but southeast from Flowach, there goeth a great river up to Zuydmer or Nordmer.  
The Island Sandowe hath a strand round about it, 
Sandowe.  and there standeth a church upon it, there you may go in about north and south on both sides. And east from Geske there lie three or four great islands, which you may also run in between, & go to the Liet of Dronten.  
The first great Island east from Geske is Luycko: north from it Luyckesond goeth in, 
Luycko. Luycsond.  it reacheth about southeast and northwest. The Liet reacheth from Luycko along by the Island Lever to Beresond, most part North-east and by north and south-west and by south, through between Roemsdale rocks, but without about it reacheth North-east and by east and south-west and by west.  
If you will go into Roemsdale, you may go in east or north by Gounske or Gomsky, 
Roemsdale. Gounske. Samso.  it reacheth in east and east & by south. North from Samso, that is between Samso and Gounske, there runneth in a haven east and by south, you may go into all these havens or channels if you will go into Roemsdale, to the Liet: and when you are in Liet, 
The Island Lever.  there lieth the aforesaid Island called Lever, which you may sail round about. The haven of Roemsdale reacheth in from the Liet southeast and northwest. From the Island of Lever to Boede the Liet reacheth North-east.  
Boede is an outpoint, 
Boede.  which is fast to the firm land by a neck or small piece of land, there dwell many fishermen, and there is a great fishing. Against Boede lie the Stopples, and there between them both it is about half a league wide, 
Stopples.  when you go through between them, than you run along by Boede. 
Beresond.  Beresond lieth about three leagues west from Stopples. All these islands between Boede and Flowach are under Zuydmer Leen.  
Thus the Island of Stadt, and thus the point of Stadt showeth, when it lieth southsoutheast from you eight leagues.   view of 'Stadt' (Norway) 
When Geske lieth about four leagues east from you then the land between Geske and Stadt showeth thus, and then Stadt lieth southsoutheast from you.   view of Giske 
This belongeth to the former, for it is the land to the point of Stadt.   view of 'Stadt' (Norway) 
Thus the Island Sandowe showeth, when it is east from you.   view of 'Sandowe' (Norway) 
Thus the Island Luycko showeth when it is east and by north from you.   view of 'Luycko' (Norway)  

III. How you shall sail from Boede along the Liet to Dronten.  
FRom Boede to Witholme the course is North-east five leagues: 
Witholme. Stemmesnes.  between them both lieth Stemmesnes or Heynst, and there against it to Seaward lie four or five Holmes or rocks, you may run in betwixt them, close along by the point of Stemmesnes.  
About half a league southsoutheast from Witholme lieth the point of Smeerholme, and between them both the Liet of Dronten goeth in east, and east and by north, till you come before Normer, which as you sail up lieth on the left hand, 
Smeerholme. Normer.  and the islands of Avero lie on the right hand. From Normer the Liet reacheth to the church of jef bay, along by the East Poster North-east sixteen leagues. From thence the Liet reacheth upwards to Dronten before the town eastsoutheast and east and by south: between them both there lieth a point called Dreckort or Drontenort. 
Drontenort.   

Oster Poster. Hamersond. jorianwagh.  The East Poster is a high land, which in sailing up you leave on starboard. North from the East Poster there lieth a haven called Hamersond, there are many good Deals. Right south from Hamersond lieth jorianwagh, which is a fair river, and there also they saw fair Deals. There lie three Holmes or islands before the haven, but there you may sail through in all places without fear.  

juret.  South from jorianwagh there lie two great creeks or rivers, called juret, where you may also fetch great masts and deals: there lie two islands before them, and you may run through between them both. 
Averosond.  Or if you will go into Averosond, coming from the East Poster, than you may go north about them: there the land reacheth North-east and south-west.  

Anwick. Torwick.  Right south from the creak of joret there lieth a great broad river called Anwick, there are two or three Saws to saw Deals, as Anwick and Torwick, which rivers or Currants are the places whereon the saws are placed, these reach in most southeast, and on the north side of the haven there standeth a church.  
The Island of Grip lieth about four leagues without the land: 
Grip Island  between Witholme and Grip the Gripsond reacheth in eastnortheast, you may go through within the fishermen's Weert, 
Gripsond.  and then you may see the high land of East Poster lie before you, you go in upon it till you be in the Liet of Dronten, and from Grip to East Poster it reacheth most eastnortheast, than you come between two lands, and from that place it is Pilots water to bring you up to Dronten, then forward it reacheth to Dronten first North-east, and then eastsoutheast to the town, as I said before.  
South from Grip there are diverse channels, by the which you come up to the Liet, as also north from Grip: but southward are the best, for northward it is dangerous to come into the land.  
Thus the land between Grip and Geske showeth, when the north point lieth east and by south seven leagues from you.   view of Norway 
This belongeth to that before, and is to be joined by the Crosses, being the rest of the land that followeth along to Geske.   view of Norway 
Thus the point of Stemmesnes or Heynst showeth.   view of 'Stemmesnes' (Norway) 
Hear followeth the Card N. 33.  
Pascaarte vant Noordersche deel van Noorwegen van Dronten aff tot am de Noortcaap toe, met all de eÿlanden aende selfde custen geleghen, alles gestell op zÿne rechte streckinghen en behoorlÿcke distantien  
Carte marine de la party plus Septentrionale de Norwege, de Dronten jusquos au dela du Nortcap, avecq toutes les isles situeez a icelle cost, le tout mis selon ses uraijes routes et exacts distances.   map of the coast of Norway  

FOUR The situation between Dronten or the Island of Grip and the North Cape or point.  
FRom the Island Grip to Nomendaelfch islands 
Nomendael●●h islands.  the course is North-east nineteen leagues: but from Grip to the Island Rust, 
Rust.  the course is north and north and by east four-and-sixtie leagues: between them both (besides Nomendaelfch islands) there lie the islands of Heyligheland, 
Hol● land.  and Tranooch. 
Tr●●●och.  Rust and Tranooch are distant thirteen leagues. From Rust to Loffort 
Lo●● rt.  it is northnortheast three-and-thirtie leagues. But from Rust to Wero 
Wer●  it is North-east and by north nine leagues. Between them both lieth Maelstrome, which you can not go through when the tide runneth, but at still water you may well go through it. Loffort lieth north from Wero, there you may also go through between them, and anchor under the west end of Loffort. You may sail through from Loffort between the islands and the firm land along to the North Cape.  
Between Westerhol, 
Westerhol.  Sanien, 
Sanien.  Tromsondt 
Tromsond  and Ingen, 
Ingen.  you may go in also & seek Rode, but without you may not come to near those islands, for in some places there lie rocks reaching out from them more than a league into the Sea, you may also go through between Surroy and Loppen or the North Cape, and come out again in Keelwick. Under the Island it is a very good Road, before the fishermen's village. Keelwick 
Keelwick.  is a place lying in the creak between the North Cape and the North Cows.  
About seven-and-thirtie leagues west from the North cape reacheth the Coast along the islands west and west and by south.  
Thus the east end of Westerhol showeth, when you sail by it, and are about seven leagues from it   view of 'Westerhol' (island in Norway) 
Thus the Island of Sanien showeth, when the east end, that is, the two high hills are southeast and by south, and the point with the cleft south and by west from you four leagues. But when the two high hills upon the east end are south from you, than they are right one against the other.   view of 'Sanien' (island in Norway) 
This following is the rest of the land of Sanien, and joineth with that before by the Crosses.   view of 'Sanien' (island in Norway) 
Thus the west point of Angenes showeth, when it is east from you.   view of 'Angenes' (island in Norway) 
Thus the Island of Angenes showeth, when the two hills here under are south and by west from you.   view of 'Angenes' (island in Norway) 
This belongeth to that which went before, being the rest of the land of Angenes, which must be joined together by the Crosses.   view of 'Angenes' (island in Norway) 
Thus the Island of Langhenes showeth when it lieth four leagues east from you.   view of 'Langhenes' (island in Norway) 
Thus the Island of Suroy showeth when you sail along by it, and are five leagues from it.   view of 'Suroy' (island in Norway) 
Thus the Island of Ingen showeth when it lieth four leagues eastsoutheast from you, it is the third Island west from the North Cape.   view of 'Ingen' (island in Norway) 
Thus the Island Helmsey showeth being about south or somewhat westerlyer three leagues from you: it is the second Island west from the North Cape.   view of 'Helmsey' (island in Norway) 
When Helmsey is five leagues south and south and by west from you it showeth thus.   view of 'Helmsey' (island in Norway) 
When Helmsey is seven leagues south-west from you it showeth thus.   view of 'Helmsey' (island in Norway) 
Thus Stappen showeth four or five leagues southsouthwest from you: it is the nearest I'll west from the North Cape.   view of 'Stappen' (island in Norway) 
Thus the Island Stappen showeth, when it is six or seven leagues south-west from you.   view of 'Stappen' (island in Norway) 
Thus the east end of Stappen showeth when you sail along by it.   view of 'Stappen' (island in Norway) 
When the North Cape is southeast, and the Mother with the Daughter's southsoutheast from you, than it showeth thus.  
The Mother with the Daughters.   view of Nordkapp 
Thus the North Cape showeth when you sail about three leagues from the land along by it, you may see the Mother above the land, when you sail along close by the land.   view of Nordkapp 
Thus the North Cape showeth when the Mother with the Daughters are southsouthwest four leagues from you, than the North Cows is about southsoutheast from you.  
North Cows. The Mother with the Daughters.   view of Nordkapp 
When the North Cape lieth west and by north from you, than it showeth thus, and then you are three or four leagues without North Cows.   view of Nordkapp 
Thus the North Cape showeth when the points lie from you as they are marked heereunder, and then you may see the Mother from the hatches just above the water.  
south-west and by south. south-west. south-west and by west Mother.   view of Nordkapp 
Thus North Cows showeth being eight or nine leagues southsoutheast from you, and then the North Cape lieth ten or eleven leagues from you.   view of Nordkinn  

V Of the tides and running of the streams in these places.  
Between Stadt and Berghen the water ebbs and flows, but holds no certain tide.  
Between Stadt, Luycksond and Boede a southsouthwest moon maketh full Sea.  
Within Aveiro, in Anwick, and before Dronten a south and north moon maketh full Sea, and the same Tide runneth to Boede.  
On the North Cape a southsouthwest and northnortheast moon maketh high water.  
West from the North Cape the streams come out of the northwest, and westnorthwest, and so fall along by Finmarke to the North cape.   

VI How these Countries are distant from each other.  

FRom jelteford or the Waghe of Berghen to the rocks of Wtweer n. n. w. and n. and by w. 11 or 12 leagues.  
From Wtweer rocks to Old northnorthwest, and north and by west 12 or 13 leagues.  
From Old to Cows northnortheast and north and by east 5 leagues.  
From Cows to Stadt n. n. e. and n. and by e. 8 leagues.  
From Stadt to Flowach North-east 7 leagues.  
From Stadt to Geske North-east and by north 11 or 12 leagues.  
How you shall sail from Geske and Flowach through within the islands is showed before sufficiently in the description.  
From Geske to Gounske North-east and by east, and somewhat northerlyer 8 or 9 leagues.  
From Gounske to Boede eastnortheast 8 leagues.  
From Beersond to the Stopples eastnortheast 3 leagues.  
From the Stopples to Heynst or Stemmesnes North-east and North-east and by north 4 leagues.  
It is already at large declared how you shall sail along from Stemmesnes and Witholme to Dronten along in the Liet.  
From Stemmesnes to Grip North-east and by north 5 leagues.  
From Grip to the islands of Nomendale North-east 19 leagues.  
From Grip to Heiligheland n. e. and by n. 26 leagues.  
From Grip to Rust north and north and by east 64 leagues.  
From Rust to Lofford northnortheast 33 leagues.  
From Loffort to Sanien North-east 37 leagues.  
From Loffort to Tromsond North-east 50 leagues.  
From Sanien to Suroy North-east and by east 43 leagues.  
From Tromsond to Suroy eastnortheast 24 leagues.  
From Suroy to the North cape e. & by n. 24 or 26 leagues.  
From the Island Inghen to Helmsey it is westsouthwest. Where east from it lieth the Island Stappen, and from Stappen to the North Cape it is east 6 or 7 leagues.  
From the North Cape to the North Cows it is east & by south 13 leagues.    

VII. How these Places are distant from other countries.  

FRom Stadt to the north end of Hitland the course is west south-west 69 leagues.  
From Stadt to the east point of Island westnorthwest 200 leagues.  
From Stadt to the right Greenland about n. w. 333 leagues. Men were wont to go thither eastward about Island, but that way is altogether spoiled and utterly decayed, but now within these few years the King of Denmark hath given commandment to his Subjects to sail to Greenland, and to discover the same.  
From Grip to the north end of Hitland south-west and by west 125 leagues.  
From Grip to the south end of Fero w. s. w. 167 leagues.  
From Grip to the east point of Island west, and west and by north 233 leagues.    

VIII. Under what degrees these Lands lie.  

THe Wtweer rocks lie under 61 degrees.  
The Island Cows lieth under 61 degrees 30 minutes.  
Stadt lieth under 62 degrees  
The Island Geske lieth under 62 degrees 30 minutes.  
Luyckesond lieth under 62 degrees 40 minutes.  
The Stopples and Boede lie under 63 degrees 28 minutes.  
The islands Avero, Smeerholme and Witholme lie under 63 degrees 44 minutes.  
The Island Grip lieth under 64 degrees.  
The town of Dronten lieth under 64 degrees 30 minutes.  
Maelstrome lieth under 68 degrees.  
The Island Sanien lieth under 70 degrees.  
The North Cape lieth under 71 degrees 30 minutes.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 34.   

CHAPTER XIIII. THE DESCRIPTION OF the Sea-coasts of Lapland, from the North Cape to the Mouth of the White Sea.  

I. The situation between the North Cape and Kilduyn.  
FRom the North Cape to the North Cows 
North Cows.  the course is east and by south thirteen leagues: and from the North Cows to Tannebay or Matcorf the course is eastsoutheast eleven or twelve leagues.  
Tannebay 
Tannebay  is a great broad River, which within devideth itself in two parts, and in some Creeks there stand some fishermen's houses.  
From Matcorf or the point of Tannebaye to Warhouse the course is southeast and somewhat southerlyer fourteen or sixteen leagues. Between them both there lieth much flat high land, about half way between them both (but nearest to Warhouse) upon the high land there lieth a high hillock, like to a land house, or a little castle, which is very well to be known: when you are by it close by the land, it showeth as if that against it there were a great river which you might sail into.  
If you will sail into Warhouse 
Warhouse.  coming southward you may sail in without doubt between the Island and the firm land, for there it is deep enough in every place, there you may anchor about the middle way from the Island, at ten or twelve fathom before a Sandbaye, against the castle, there it is good anchor ground.  
But if you will go out again at the north channel, then sail nearer to the rock whereon the gallows stand then to the Island, for there against it it is somewhat foul on the Island of Warhouse, and the channel reacheth out most part northward. The Island of Warhouse is about half a league long, and there lie also two small islands more close by to seaward.  
From Warhouse to the point of Kegro, 
Fisher's Island or Kogor.  or the fishermen's Island it is eastsoutheast, and southeast and by south eleven or twelve leagues. When you are against the point of Kegro, than you may see the land of Warhouse from below. You may anchor under the point of Kegro, but it is no fair road for great ships, for there it is not deep. Between Warhouse and Kegro there is a great creak, therein lieth the river of Pitsingh, 
Pitsingh.  where there is fishing for salmon. Southsouthwest from the point of Kegro or Oosterhaven there lie two islands, there southward you may go into Monick river. 
Monickfoert.   
Fron the point of Kegro or Kegor to Laus 
Laus.  the course is along by the land southeast and southeast and by south about nine leagues, it is a fair sandbaye: behind the point, and a little more towards Kegro there is a point like an Island, and upon the point of Laus there stand two great beacons or masts.  
From Laus to the river of Cola the course is south and by east, and southsoutheast about eleven leagues. 
Cola and Kilduyn.  But Kilduyn and Laus lie distant southeast & somewhat southerlyer and northwest and somewhat northerlyer.  
Thus Matcorf showeth when it is cross from you three leagues.  
Thus North Cows showeth when you sail by it.  
Tannebaye.   view of Nordkinn 
Thus the land east from Tannebay showeth, when coming out of the west you sale along by it three leagues from the land.  
Tannebaye. Cows.   view of Norway 
Thus the Island of Warhouse showeth when it lieth three or four leagues southward from you.  
Warhouse. The land north from Warhouse.   view of 'Warhouse' (Norway) 
Thus Kegro or the fishermen's Island showeth, when coming out of the west you sail along by it   view of 'Kegro' (island in Norway)  

II. How you may sail up into the River of Cola, and the situation of Kilduyn.  
TO sail up the River of Cola, then go from Laus or the south end of the fishermen's islands to the River southsoutheast and south and by east, and go about by the high land of Podenvolke, than the river will show very wide open unto you. When you are by the point of Laus, than you may easily see the Island of Kilduyn and the River of Kola, or the land by it, and between Laus and the River of Cola there is also a great creak, and when you are within the mouth of the River, first it reacheth in south and by west, and then southsouthwest to the Island, which in the Card of this River is marked with the Letter A, and then sometimes south-west and by south by the Island marked with the letter B to the Trane Island, than south-west and by west, and sometimes about the point west and by south, and then in west to Diules' point, there over against it lieth the white stone, which lieth on the land, and against it is good Road: from thence again west and by south, westsouthwest, south-west, and southsouthwest most part to Cola.  
When you are up within the River, 
Road in the river:  and will anchor there, then keep along by the west side, and when you are a little within there you shall see a little small Island, lying close by the land, from thence a little further forward about the high point there is a bought or creak, and in it there is a Sandbay, where you may lay a ship safe without anchor or cable, it is a fair Sandbaye where you go full in, along by the north side it is five fathom, and fair sandy ground, and there you go in between the two points: but there lieth a black rock in the narrow way between both the sides of the land, which you must leave on starboard, and within that rock it is dry & two fathom deep, till you be against the strand, there within it is fair green fields. Right without the bay there lie two islands, whereof the uttermost or the easterlyest is the smallest, where in sailing up  
Hear followeth the Card N. 35.  
the River by these two islands, you come in the middle way between the Island marked A, there also is good road on the west side, there upon the high ground you shall see three beacons or masts, called the three Kings, against them there is a road, & when you are a little past the Island marked with A, than you can see the river no more open, but it seemeth to be close and shut up, for then the Island marked with A cometh under the high land on the east side.  
Under the Island marked with B there is also good Rode and fair sandy ground, it is also good Road under the Traen Island, 
Trane Island.  and that is reckoned for half of the River, to weet, from the Mouth to Cola.  
When you are a little past the Traen Island, where the letter C standeth, then before you see a black bluish hill, called the devils hill, 
devils hill.  and it seemeth from thence forth, as if the River were close and shut up: on the starboard side it is best sailing along for there you have good ground most part along close by the land, there are many bougths, hooks, and Creeks, which can not all be described: on the other side men use not so commonly to go, unless it be by default, and there are as it seemeth many bays and rivers, and also some by-rivers. Now when you are passed the devils hill, where the letter D standeth, past the white stone, than you may see Clinck hill 
Clinckhil.  on the west side, and almost along to Cola. When you may see Clinck hill, there is ground all along by the west side to anchor, and then it is not foul on neither side: but when you come in so far to the place which is marked with the letter E, there you must somewhat shun the west side, because of a foul place, which there shooteth off from the land, and keep in the middle of the water till you be against Clinckhill, there you must go close to the land again, for in the middle of the river there lieth an Island of rocks, which at high water are covered, you must look well unto it: from Clinckhill to Robben Island 
Robben Island.  sail all along by the west side: Robben Island also is covered at high water, and when it is covered then anchor under the dried trees. Against Robben Island there lieth a very great stone at the foot of the hill, look well unto it there, and go without it or north from it, at least a bow shot, there is the Road, and there you may anchor by the land as dry as you will, there it is good lying, and there you begin to see Cola by the house.  
If you will seek for road under Kilduyn, 
Kilduyn.  when you come out of the north or the west, then go to the west end of Kilduyn, through between the mayeland and Kilduyn, and when you have sailed a little within, than you shall see a round Island, and there it beginneth to be narrow, but you may well laveere through it, then go forth to the southeast end, and there anchor in the bought under Kilduyn, as near to the land as you will, there stand a company of Lapland houses, and there is the principal road, there you are safe against all winds: the point south from the road is low land. You may also anchor under the firm land, between the narrow way and the road of Kilduyn, at a place where in the Card an anchor is marked. Through between Kilduyn and the land it reacheth westnorthwest and eastsoutheast.  
To sail from the east into Kilduyn then go in west, till you come by the aforesaid low point of the Island, then turn up northward along about the point, & anchor in the bocht aforesaid before the houses upon the Road, at twelve thirteen or fourteen fathom, on the south side it is very deep, fifty or sixty fathom.  
There lie also some other islands east from Kilduyn, where possible you should find Road under them, but I can write no certainty thereof.  
Thus the Island of Kilduyn showeth itself when you come out of the west.   view of Kildin (island in Russia) 
Thus Kilduyn showeth when the shoring point is south and by east, and the river of Cola southsouthwest from you about five leagues, the land west from Kilduyn is very hilly, and the river openeth very wide as it standeth here.  
Kilduyn. The firm land. The river Cola.   view of Kildin (island in Russia) 
Eyghentlÿcke afbeeldinghe van de Riviere van Kola, met all Eylandekens clippen end Reden daer in gheleghen. Item de gheleghentheyt van Swetenoes' end Lombascho   map of the Kola River (Russia)  

III. The situation of the Seven islands, Swetenose and Lombasco, and so forth to Orloghones.  
FRom Kilduyn to the Seven islands 
Seven islands.  the course is southeast nineteen leagues: under the islands you may anchor where you will: you may go in by the westerlyest Island, and there anchor at five or six fathom.  
From the Seven islands to Swetenose the course is southeast one-and-twentie leagues. About three leagues west from Swetenose 
islands west from Swetenoes'  there lie certain islands, where you may anchor behind them, the northerlyest lieth right west from the point of Swetenose, you may the●e go in by it & anchor behind it, when you are by Swetenose, than you see little of those islands, because the firm land is much higher than those islands. To sail into jokena or the river of Swetenose when you come north or west, than you must sail close by the land, to have a sight of the Island, and go through between the Mayeland and the Island, but the best channel to go into it is through between the third and the fourth Island, which is a deep wide and broad channel, and lieth south-west, and south-west and by west from the point of Swetenose, you run most south into the River, and then you see the Island, which lieth within the other islands, you may anchor there behind. When you are a little past the innermost Island, and come against the high point, than you sail in in the middle of the water between both the lands, and there it is shallow water at five, four, three and two and an half fathom, as it standeth marked in the Card, but you may go boldly in through the middle of the channel, along to the Lapland houses, where the salmon fishing is, and anchor there in the midst of the water, but you must there look well about you, for there about there lie some blind rocks, 
Blind Rocks.  which are bare at low water.  
To find the right situation of this haven, then mark, that when the high point is behind the fourth Island, about south from you, and the point of Swetenose North-east and North-east and by east, than you are right open before or against the said haven. Some say that you may sail through behind, between the fourth Island and the point, but there between them both it is very narrow. The Tide there falleth just with the Tide at Swetenoes', not much differing, and with a Springtide ebbeth and floweth two fathom and an half.  
Behind the point of Swetenoes' 
Swetenoes'.  you may run into the creak and there anchor safely against a north, North-east, and east winds, there it is fair ground.  
From Swetenose to Lombasco 
Lombasco  the course is southsoutheast about thirteen leagues, you may also anchor under Lombasco, but there it is not so good lying, specially with great ships, and also there it is not very fair, it beats there very strongly in, when the wind bloweth out of the Sea. You may see the situation of this road in the Card, & there the depth is perfectly marked, both at high and low water. The water ebbs and flows there at least two fathom, and at a Springtide little less than three, or two fathom and an half. Within the point or the bought you can not lie, for there it is not above three foot water, and there also it is very stony and foul.  
From Lombasco to Orlogones 
Orloghones.  the course is southsoutheast and south and by east six or seven leagues. But from Orlogones to the three islands it is southsoutheast about twelve leagues.  
When you are about half way between the North Cape and North Cows, and about seven leagues without the land, you go with a course of southeast and by south without all land, but if you set your course something more southerlyer than you fall on Swetenoes'.  
Thus the land showeth between Swetenose and Orloghones, when you sail along by it.  
Orloghones. Lombasco. Third point. Second point. First point. Swetenoes'. Sconce.  
Under this Island you may hide a ship from yseganges, and it lieth half a league beyond the Sconce.  
These grey points are between Swetenoes' and Lombasco.   view of Russia  

FOUR Of the Tide and running of the streams.  
AT the North Cape a southsouthwest moon maketh a high water.  
Against Tannebaye a south-west moon maketh high water.  
At Warhouse a south-west and North-east moon maketh high water.  
At Kilduyn an eastsoutheast moon maketh high water.  
At the Seven islands a southeast moon maketh high water.  
At Swetenose a south and north moon maketh high water.  
Along by these Coasts cast from the North Cape the streams come out of the northwest and northnorthwest, and go so along the coast of Lapland to Orloghonoes'.   

V How these Lands are distant from each other and from other Lands.  

FRom North-kyne to Tannebaye or Matcorf the course is southeast 11 or 12 leagues.  
From Matcorf or the point of Tannebaye to Warhouse southeast and somewhat southerlyer 14 or 16 leagues.  
From Warhouse to the point of Kegor or Osterhaven southeast and southeast and by south 11 or 12 leagues.  
From the point of Kegro to Laus southeast and southeast and by south about 9 leagues.  
From Laus to the River of Cola south and by east and southsoutheast about 11 leagues.  
From Kilduyn to the Seven islands southeast 19 leagues.  
From the Seven islands to Swetenose southeast 21 leagues.  
From Swetenose to Lambasco southsoutheast 13 leagues.  
From Lambasco to Orlogenes southsoutheast and south and by east about 6 or 7 leagues.  
From Orlogenes to Cape de Candenoes' North-east 47 leagues.  
From Kilduyn to Costintsarke upon Nova Zembla east and by north 118 leagues.    

VI Of the height of these countries.  

THe Island of Kilduyn lieth under 69 degrees 34 minutes.  
Cape de Candenose lieth under 68 degrees 46 minutes.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 36.   

CHAPTER XV. A DESCRIPTION OF the Sea-coasts of Russia, Corellen and Lapland: and also the Coast of Russia, between Cape de Candenose and Nova Zembla, or the Straight of Waigats.  

I. The situation between Orloghones and the River of Archangel.  
FRom Orloghones to the three islands 
Three islands.  (as I have also showed in the Chapter before) the course is southsoutheast five leagues: from thence three leagues distant southsouthwest, lieth the river of Ponoy. 
Ponoy.   
The Mouth of the White Sea is but eleven leagues broad: about four leagues from the three islands, in the middle of the Mouth of the White Sea there lieth a Sand, 
A Sand in the Mouth of the white Sea.  which in some places at a low water is bare, you must sail westward about it, and you may also go eastward about it, but there it is flat water and very shallow.  
From the three islands to the Island Sousnowits, which is commonly called the Cross Island, 
Cross Island.  the course is southsouthwest thirteen leagues, but from Ponoy it is eleven leagues. 
Sousnowits.  Southeast and by south from the three islands on the Russia side the Mesensche Golf 
Mesensche golf.  goeth in, whereinto there runneth a great river to Colmogro, and there goeth another river into the land, whereon the town of Slowodo 
Slowodo.  lieth.  
From the Cross Island or Sousnowits to the Cats or Catsnose point, which is also called the Blue or Grey point, 
Catsnoes or Grace point.  the course is south-west and by south twenty or one-and-twentie leagues, upon the south side of the channel there lieth a bank, 
Bank.  which is no deeper than three fathom, it is at least seven or eight leagues long, and reacheth south-west and by west and North-east and by east.  
From Catsnose point to the Mouth of the river of Archangel the course is south and by west seventeen leagues.  
Thus the Island of Orloghones showeth southward from the three islands, Ponoy, and the Cross Island,  
Cross Island. Ponoy. Orloghones. Three islands.   view of 'Orloghones' (Russia)  

II. How you shall sail into, and up the River of Archangel.  
When you go south and by west from Blue point to S. Nicolas you see the land a great way west from S. Nicolas, which showeth like a long piece of land, and a little nearer to the River you see more land, which openeth itself as if it were a round Island, and after that you may see the steeple of S. Nicolas, 
S. Nicolas.  & when the steeple of S. Nicolas standeth south and south and by west from you than you are open before the Mouth of the River of Archangel. 
Marks of the haven.  If you will go into the River, then sail upon the steeple of S. Nicolas until you see the Cape which standeth upon the west side, place that a lever or bow length west from S. Nicolas steeple, than there come two small downs under the said steeple, those two small downs lie right west from the cross down, and there lieth also another down westward, which also is greater, for those downs are very small, than the steeple standeth also in a valley of the wood, which are all marks of this haven. Having brought the Cape so as I said, then sail in upon it south and south and by west, and sometimes somewhat easterlyer. You may also place the Cape and the steeple right against each other, and go in upon them, 
Depth in the channel.  than you go in along by the west side, which far off from the land is altogether flat. Without before the haven it is five, four, and three fathom deep: but in the mouth or upon the Drumple of the haven it is no deeper at high water then fiveteene or sixteen foot, and at low water twelve or thirteen foot. But when you can not see the Cape, or that it is gone, than you may bring the town of S. Nicolas into the wood, in such manner, as that almost the third part of the wood be westward, and almost the other two third parts of the wood stand eastward of it. When you have gotten to the mouth of the River, you must sometimes go easterlyer, as, south and south and by east, till you come to the west side, then go close along by it, and put not off from it, until you come against the white pleck or place on the west side, to the place, the which is marked in the Card with the letter A. Then strike over from it east and by south, and eastsoutheast right to the point of the wood on the east side, and so southeast along by the east side, close by the land: but against the two islands which lie on starboard, it is very foul and shallow along by the east side, which you must look to: but go along by the east side, until you come to the first river on baghborde, then strike over again to the west side southsouthwest to the bought, there on the east side it is flat water: and when you are in the bought, then go on eastsoutheast, and then east and by south to the Stone-reach, 
Stone-reach.  there sail in the middle of the river, along by the tons, for they lie in the middle of the channel, and on both the sides of the tons it is uneven & rugged ground. When you come against the Stone-reach there standeth a fisher's house upon the west side, by the little river that runneth into the land, on the north end or west end of the Stone reach: against that foresaid house there lieth a great stone under the water, about which you may sail on both sides, it lieth about the middle in the channel, as you sail forward, but Mariners are accustomed to sail westward about, along by the west side, as also through the Stone-reach, for the west side is deep enough, and in some places soft yielding ground, but the east side is full of stones. When you are passed the tons, than you must again keep some thing off from the shore. There was wont to lie an Island at the end of the Stone reach, but not long since it is wholly cut and broken away by the ice. When you are through the Stone-reach, than the course is first southeast, and then southeast and by south into the bought, then go eastsoutheast, and keep along by the west side, till you see the town of Archangel, 
Archangel  then sail right to it, but shun the point on baghborde for that is foul.  
To sail further up the river, from Archangel to Colmogro it is about twelve or thirteen leagues, 
To sail to Colmogro.  most southeast crooking about, according to the stretching of the crooking of the River.  
From the haven of Podessemsche, or from the River of Archangel to the Road of S. Nicholas it is four leagues: there standeth a beacon upon the end of the Island, whereon the English house standeth, and west from that beacon is the Road for the English ships at six or seven fathom, as you lie near or far from the land. The English river 
English River.  reacheth in eastnortheast and North-east and by east, along by the closter of S. Nicolas, but it is a dry River, so that no ships may go into it, but you must lad your ships with lighters or boats.  
About south-west and south-west and by west from the mouth of the River of Archangel there lieth a Salt-Iland, 
Salt Island.  whereon there standeth a closter, it is fast to the firm land. From thence to Cape de Onega 
Cape de Onega.  the land reacheth west and by north.   

III. The situation of the Coast of Russia between Cape de Candenoes' and Nova Zembla.  
Scape de Candenoes' 
Cape de Candenoes'.  and Orloghones lie distant North-east and south-west seven-and-fortie leagues: this point of Candenoes' is a place well to be known, upon it there stand five Crosses for marks: and when you fall upon it, you may perfectly perceive, that the land falleth on the one side south-west to the white Sea, and southeast to the other side.  
About thirteen leagues east from Cape de Candenoes' there lieth an Island called Morsonowits, 
Morsonowits.  and east there goeth a great creak into the land, but it is very flat water, with many shallows and dwalegrounds: ere now it happened that some ships sailed into this place, thinking that they sailed into the mouth of the white Sea, & knew not where they were, for it is almost one height & stretching with the white Sea, but it is easily to be known and discerned by the land, for the Coast of Russia east from Candenoes' is altogether downy lands, and flat strand, but the Coast of Lapland is high and hilly. Within this River there runneth up a River through the land, which you may go through with Lodges into the White Sea.  
Against this creak, about six-and-twentie leagues east, and east and by south from Candenoes' lieth the Island of Colgoia, 
Colgoia.  which is thirteen leagues long, you may sail round about it, but on the south side there goeth a great Sand or shelf along by the land: when you come out of the east you must shun it, for it is fast to the west end of the Island. Upon this Island there are a great number of Geese, which in Summer are all clean naked, without any feathers, they sit and hatch upon one egg, which lieth under them, and so breed their young ones, and are so great a number there, that the Russians go there on land with their Lodges, and lay a deal or board upon the land, and drive the geese with staves in so great number into their jachts and Lodges, that they salt great number of them in barrels.  
From Candenoes' to the Island Tussara 
Tussara.  it is eastsoutheast three-and-fortie leagues: Between them both the creak aforesaid goeth in. West from Tussara lieth the point of Swelgenoes'. 
Swelgenoes'.   
From Tussara to the River of Colcova 
Colcova.  the course is east seven leagues: it is a good River, being twelve foot deep, but there is no other trade there, but that the Russians come thither from Colmogro and S. Nicolas with Lodges to traffic there, and to barter their wares for skins and other wares.  
Seven leagues east from the River of Colcova lieth the river of Pitsana, 
Pitsana.  in it there is but six foot water, & it is an unknown place, but right west from it there lieth a Sand, which you must shun, for Oliver Brunel in his voyage to Nova Zembla fell on ground upon it.  
About thirteen leagues east from Pitsana lieth the River of Pitsora, 
Pitsora.  which reacheth in by the east point southsoutheast, it is twelve foot deep: there the land is low and downy, and on the west side there standeth a Packhouse, with some Crosses: when you are within the River, than you turn up westward to the Packhouse, and there you must anchor at three and four fathom, for there is a great Haf or Inland-water: you must shun the east side of the River, for it is full of Sands and Banks. The town of Pitsora lieth about six-and-twentie dutch miles into the Land, and there is great abundance of Skins and Crystal.  
Between Pitsora and Waygates lieth Oltgin, 
Oltgin.  and without upon the land there lie two rocks or ●ands, the one called Orangien, 
●ra●g●a.  the other Grave Maurits, 
Gra●l Mourits.  there you may anchor under them at six or seven fathom: from the southerlyest there cometh a Sand shooting off, but you may well sound it at three fathom. East and west from these two islands there is a great creak, it is flat water, & there the land runneth round about to the point of Pitsora, altogether in one creak from Pitsora to Waygates: and it is from Pitsora to Waygates North-east and North-east and by east two-and-thirtie leagues.   

FOUR The situation of Waygates and Nova Zembla.  
Waygates 
Waygates.  (which also is called the Straight of Nossowe) is a Straight which you may sail through into the Tartarian Sea, which first reacheth about east, and then North-east till you be through it, about eight or nine leagues, & about the middle thereof there lieth an Island, which you may sail about on both sides. A little within the point, on the north side there lieth a fair Bay, 
Tra●nb●y.  which you may sail into as deep as you will at five, four and three fathom good anchor groun●, along by the east side it is deep water, and there you lie ●a●e from all kind of winds and currants of ice. This Straight or narrow passage hath been twice sought to find a way to go north about Tartary to the rich Kingdoms of China and Cathaya, and so to the Molucques, but it was all in vain, because of the great ice, which all the year long stayeth there, and can never melt, by means of the continual cold.  
From the east end of the Straight of Waygates to the creak of Oby 
Oby.  it is eastsoutheast, & southeast & by east forty leagues. There eastward the land reacheth forth North-east forty leagues more, to the two northerly rivers, & then reacheth also North-east forward, but how far it is yet unknown. The west coast of Nova Zembla reacheth from Waygates or northwards to Costinsarck about northnorthwest three-and fifty leagues, and there about the north, it is about north and by east to the point of Longhenes, or the State's point, and then northnortheast, North-east, and eastnortheast to the islands of Orange, the northerlyest part of Nova Zembla, which lieth under seven-and-seventie degrees and an half.   

V What Moon maketh high water here, and how the streams rise and fall.  
AT the three islands it is high water with a south-west and North-east moon.  
At Catsnose point an east and west moon maketh high water.  
Before Podessemsche and S. Nicolas an east and by south and w●st and by north moon maketh high water.  
At the Island of Nova Zembla a southeast moon maketh high water.  
F●om Orloghones & the three islands the stream falleth into the mouth of the White Sea, to the Grey point of Catsnose, about southsouthwest and south-west and by west.  
But about the point of Catsnose the stream falleth into the White Sea, part to Warsiga and Ombay, and also to Podessemsche and S. Nicolas south, and south and by west, and so falleth out and into the River of Archangel.  
East from Candenoes' to the Island of Colgoya the stream falleth east and east & by south, as also along by the same Island, & from Colgoya to Waygates the stream falleth east & west.  
Along by Nova Zembla the streams follow the moon, & along by Russia they come between Candenoes' and Pitsora out of the west and westnorthwest, and so fall along by Russia.  
The streams to Waygates come from Colgoya and Nova Zembla, and fall with the others east and by north, through the Straight of Waygates, to the river of Oby, so that the ebbs and the floods keep the channels of Waygates open, whereby many times they are without ice, or at least but with such ice as driveth in shoals or great stakes.  
But east from Waygates the floods come out of the North-east and so fall into Oby, and into the Straight of Nassowe, the water there riseth and falleth, but it holdeth no certain tides.   

VI Of the depths and grounds, as well east as west from Waygates.  
ALl the whole Coast along from Candenoes' to Waygates you find a flat rising ground, most part sand and soft or steek-ground. When you sail in misty wether, you must understand that you are at eight or nine fathom depth four or five leagues from the Coast, but when you are at thirty, five-and-thirtie or forty fathom, than you are far enough from the land, so it is also along by Nova Zembla, as also before the east side of Waygates, but when you come before the channel it is shallower.   

VII. How these Lands are distant from each other.  

FRom Orloghenoes' to the three islands s. s. c. 5 leagues.  
From the three islands to the Island with the cross, called Sousnowits' southsouthwest 13 leagues.  
From the Cross Island to Catsnoes', or the Grey point south & by west 17 leagues.  
From Podesemsche or the river of Archangel to the Salt Island south-west and somewhat westerlyer 7 leagues.  
From the Salt Island to Cape de Onega west and west and by north 18 or 19 leagues.  
From Cape de Onega to the islands of Solofky northwest and by west 20 leagues.  
From the islands of Solofky to the Somma west and west and by south 9 leagues.  
From Candelex to Ombay southeast and by east 13 leagues.  
From Ombay to Stulsland southeast 11 leagues.  
From Stulsland to Warsiga e. s. e. 16 leagues.  
From Warsiga to Pelitsa e. s. e. 16 leagues.  
From Pelitsa to Sousnowits or the Cross Island e. n. e. and somewhat northerlyer 13 leagues.  
From Ombay to Warsiga southeast and by east 25 leagues.  
From Warsiga to Coroa eastsoutheast 11 leagues.  
From Coroa to Craswick east 7 leagues.  
From Craswick to Polongi east 7 leagues.  
From Polongi to the Island Sousnowits n. e. & by e. 8 leagues.  
From Orloghenoes' to C. de Candenoes' North-east 47 leagues.  
From Candenoes' to the Island Colgoya e. and by s. 26 leagues.  
From Candenoes' to Swelgenoes' s. e. and by e. 29 leagues.  
From Candenoes' to the Island Morsonowits s. e. 13 leagues.  
From Candenoes' to Tussara e. s. e. 43 leagues.  
From Tussara to Colcova east 7 leagues.  
From Colcova to Pitsana east and by north 7 leagues.  
From Pitsana to Pitsora east and east and by north distant about 13 leagues.  
From Pitsora to Waygates about North-east and by east distant 14 or 16 leagues.    

VIII. Some long and cross courses from the White Sea, and also from Russia between C. de Candenoes' and Nova Zembla.  

FRom Catsnoes' or the Grey point to the islands of Solofky west & somewhat southerlyer 37 leagues.  
From Catsnoes' to Warsiga northwest and somewhat westerlyer 29 or 30 leagues.  
From Catsnoes' to Polongi northwest & by north 23 leagues.  
From the Island of Solofky to Ombay in Lapland the course is north 32 or 33 leagues  
From Solofky to Warsiga North-east and somewhat easterlyer 32 leagues.  
From Solofky to Polongi North-east and by east 51 leagues.  
From Candenoes' to Costintsarke in Nova Zembla North-east & by east about 61 leagues.  
From the east end of Colgoya to Waygates east 60 leagues.  
From Pitsora to the east end of Colgoya w. n. w. 43 leagues.    

IX. Under what degrees these countries lie, as writings do witness.  

THe point of Catsnoes' or the Grey point lieth under 65 degrees.  
S. Nicolas or the River of Archangel lieth under 64 degrees 30 minutes.  
The islands of Solofky lie under 65 degrees.  
Ombay lieth under 66 degrees 45 min●  
Cape de Candenoes' lieth under 69 degrees 30 min●  
The Island of Colgoya lieth under 69 degrees 10 minu  
The Rivers of Colcova, Pitsana, and Pitsora lie under 68 degrees 30 minu  
Waygates or the Straight of Nassowe lieth under 69 degu 40 minutes.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 37.   

CHAPTER XVI. THE DESCRIPTION OF the islands of Fero or Ferre: also of Hitland, Fulo, and Fayrhil.  

I. The situation of the islands of Fero.  

The names of the islands of Fero.  TThe greatest and chiefest islands of Fero are twelve in number: as Suydro, Sando, Mogghenes, Waghe, Stromo, Ostro, Calso, Cuno, Bordo, Wydro, Swyno and Fulo: the small islands of Fero are ten, as Littledymen, Stoerdymen, Schuyvo, Dalsfles, Hesten, Trollo, Closter, Mogghenesholme, Monick, and the Bishop. Besides these there are some rocks & small islands six or seven in number.  
The southerlyest great Island called Suydro, 
Suydro.  it reacheth most southeast and northwest about seven or eight leagues. On the southeast end of this Island there lieth a high rock called the Monick 
Monick.  or Somby, 
Somby.  after the name of the first or southerlyest haven in Suydro. Between the Monick and the southeast end of Zuydro there is a Ras or Well, which you must shun, specially at a Spring tide.  
Upon the west side of this Island of Suydro there are no havens for ships to lie at Rode in, for it is altogether high shoring land, but on the north side there are many havens, whereinto you may sail and lay ships at anchor, as Somsond or Hest, Hofwick, Vroby, Quaelby or Rane, which are all wide rivers or havens. A husbandman or Pilot will bring you into them all, whensoever you will or need.  
From the northwest end of Suydro to Mogghenesholme, 
Mogghenesholme.  the westerlyest or uttermost Island of Fero, the course is northwest and by north and northnorthwest about eight or nine leagues.  
At the east end of Mogghenesholme lieth Mogghenes, and east from it lieth the Island Wage. 
Wage.  East from Wage there runneth a fair river out of the southeast, from the Island Sando, about Hesten and the Island Kolster: for you may go about on both sides of these islands, and leave the great Island Stromo on the east side, and so come into Waghe. In the middle of the river or haven of Waghe, there goeth a fair haven eastward, up into the great Island of Stromo, therein you may anchor at ten or twelve fathom, but the haven is at least twenty fathom deep.  
Mogghenes and the North-east end of Fero lie distant eastnortheast, or a little northerlyer, and westsouthwest about sixteen leagues. Between them both there lie ten islands, and between each Island there is a fair deep channel or river, whereof the fourth from Mogghenes is called Somsond: 
Somsond.  all these channels reach most northnorthwest and southsoutheast through the land, and upon all those islands there stand churches, except it be Ostra, which never the less is a great Island.  
From the southeast end of Suydro to Schalhooft, or the southeast end of the Island Sando, the course is north and by west about five leagues. Between Suydro and Sando there lie the islands of Luttledymen, Stoerdymen, Schavo and Dalsfles.  
From Schalhooft till you be within the Island Mulso, lying before Stromo, the course is north and by west four leagues, there you may anchor in every place when you will, at twenty, thirty or forty fathom. If you come out of the Sea, and desire to find a good road under the islands of Fero, you must hold the middlemost great Island (named Stromo) northwest and northwest & by west from you, then in the middle of the Island Stromo you shall see a high steep hill called Schellinck, 
Schellinck  which you must sail up unto, than you shall come to the Island Mulso aforesaid, which is a low Island, which you may go about on both sides, but it is best to go into it on the south end: and under this Island it is all over good anchor ground. Right over against this Island, on the great Island lieth Torshaven, 
Torshaven.  the principal haven of Fero, where all their trade of merchandise is used.  
Eijgentlijcke afbeeldinghe vande Eijlanden Hitlandt anders Scotlandt, Fulo, en Faijerhil naer hare rechte gelegentheijt ontworpen.  
Vive portraiture des Jsles Hitlande autrement dict Schetlande, Fulo et Feril, selon leurs uraijes situations   map of the Shetland Islands 
Cart marine des Jsles de Fero ou far, montrant au vif la situation merveilleuse et entrerumpue desdictes Isles, et tout ce qu' il ÿ a (en les navigeant) a eviter  
Pascaarte vande Eijlanden van Fero oft far, vertoonende naeed leaven de wonderlijcke gebroockenheijt end gestalte der selver, en watmen (in't beseijlen vandien) aldaer te schouwen heeft.   map of the Faroe Islands 
If you desire to sail from Mulso into Somsond 
Somsond.  you must go North-east and by north three leagues, to the point of Bordenes, then from Bordenes North-east, than you shall see a church upon the Island of Calso, which you must leave on starboard, & go in westnorthwest, till you be in the bought of the Island Ostro, and there anchor at seventeen or eighteen fathom.  
These islands of Fero lie in a Triangle form: from the southeast end of Suydro to Fulo or the north end of Fero it is northnortheast and southsouthwest one-and-twentie leagues.   

II. The situation of Hitland.  
THe south-west coast of Hitland, that is, from the southerlyest point to the northwest point reacheth northwest & by north seven or eight leagues. On the same northwest side right over against the Island Fulo, there lieth a sandy Bay, where you may anchor, but on the east side of that Bay it is altogether foul. From the northwest & west point to the north end, the land of Hitland reacheth North-east and south-west about eighteen or nineteen leagues.  
Three leagues north from the aforesaid west point lieth the haven of S. Magnus, 
S. Magnus' haven.  which is a wide river, and there is good anchor ground within it: within it is sixteen or seventeen fathom deep, as you are far within the land. On the north side there lieth a high rock, from which you must go in south: and on the south side there lie two or three rocks, which you must leave on starboard when you will sail in.  
Right east about the southeast point of Hitland there lieth a fair sandy Bay, where you may anchor at twelve or thirteen fathom: and from thence to Hanglip 
Hanglip.  the course is North-east, and somewhat easterlyer ten or eleven leagues.  
Between Hanglip and the south point there lieth an Island which you may sail about on both sides, and behind it lieth Hamburgher haven 
Hamburgher haven.  or the Scotish haven: it is a lading place for the Hamburghers and Scots: it is also called Bremer haven. There lieth also a high steep point south from Hanglip, which you must go by into the Breesond, 
Breesond.  which is the principal haven of all Hitland, for it is deep, and hath fair ground, and there you lie safe against all winds.  
North from Hanglip the land of Hitland reacheth north, north and by east, and northnortheast, and lastly north: and in some places you may sail through Hitland, specially north from Hanglip, where there goeth a river northwest through it, and it is a fair wide river, and there in some places it is good anchor ground, for such as know it, and are forced to seek it. Fron Hanglip to the North-east point of Hitland it is northnortheast eleven leagues: there lie some out-rocks, which are called the Out-scheren. From thence to the north point of Hitland it is north about four leagues.  
Right about the north point, there is a fair haven, which runneth in southsouthwest, which is all sandy ground. On the west side there lieth a long rock, you must sail in by it on the east side, and anchor right within the haven: it is all fair and good road within it. This haven is called Blomesond, 
Blomesond.  and goeth in right west from the North-east point: and first (as I said) reacheth in southsouthwest, than south, and south and by east: on both sides it is good anchor ground, you may there sail clean through, and come through jellesond into the Sea again about the Island Fetlo.  
Thus Hitland showeth when it is northwest and by west about four leagues from you.   view of Shetland 
Thus Hitland showeth between Hanglip and Hamburgher haven.  
Bremerhaven. Point of Breesond. Hanglip.   view of Shetland 
Five leagues north from Hanglip the land showeth thus, when you are about a league from it, and there Hitland runneth into a great bought with many islands.   view of Shetland 
Thus Hanglip showeth when it is northwest from you eight leagues.   view of Shetland 
When the north end of Hitland is southeast and by east from you than it showeth thus.   view of Shetland  

III. The situation of the islands Fayrhil and Fulo.  
THe Island of Fayrhil 
Fayrhil.  lieth from the south end of Hitland southsouthwest seven or eight leagues. Fulo and Fayrhil lie distant northwest and by north, and southeast and by south eleven leagues. But Fulo 
Fulo.  lieth about west and by north four leagues from the aforesaid south point of Hitland. The south point of Hitland lieth between Fulo and Fayrhil.  
On the west side of Fayrhil in some places it is foul ground, but on the southeast side it is good anchor ground, where you may lie at road. Fayrhil and the east point of Orcanes lie distant from each other south-west and North-east.  
When Fayrhil is west and by south four leagues from you it showeth thus.   view of Fair Isle 
When Fayrhil is southeast and southeast and by east three or four leagues from you it showeth thus.   view of Fair Isle 
Thus Fayrhil showeth when it is five leagues south-west and by west from you.   view of Fair Isle 
When Fulo lieth northn●rtheast from you four leagues it showeth thus.   view of Foula 
Thus the Island Fulo showeth when it lieth northwest from you, and then you may see it out of the top of the mast.   view of Foula 
Thus Fulo showeth when it lieth five leagues eastnortheast from you.   view of Foula  

FOUR Of the Tides and running of the streams about these islands.  
IN the islands of Fero a north and south moon maketh high water.  
Under the islands of Fero there runneth a hard stream, which cometh out of the west and westnorthwest, and from the east and eastsoutheast, and so falls through the islands, so that you must there look unto it, and reckon your Tides well, when you will sail from one Island to another, for there the stream drives hard, and there are two principal wells or Mael-streames, 
Mael-streames.  the one on the southend of Suydro, and the other a league within Schalhooft or Qualenes. But although the streams run so stiffly through these Isles, yet it floweth there hardly four foot.  
In Hitland within the Rivers and havens a southsouthwest & northnortheast moon maketh high water. The streams there go east and west about, specially on the south and north ends of Hitland, and so fall cross through the rivers and havens.   

V How tbese Countries are distant from each other, and also from other countries.  

FRom the north end of Hitland to the south end of Fero the course is west and west and by north 59 leagues.  
From the south end of Hitland to Fero it is westnorthwest & northwest and by west 61 leagues.  
F●om the south end of Hitland to the Island Rona westsouthwest 47 leagues.  
From the north end of Hitland to the rocks of Rocol westsouthwest 127 or 128 leagues.  
From the south end of Fero to Rona s. and by e. 45 or 46 league.  
From the south end of Fero to Rocol south-west & somewhat westerlyer 81 leagues.  
From the Island Fayrhil to the North-east end of Orcanes south-west 10 or 11 leagues.  
The Island Fayrhil lieth from the south end of Hitland southsouthwest and south and by west 7 or 8 leagues.  
From Hitland to the east point of Ysland northwest & by west about 133 leagues.  
In the thirteenth Chapter it is sufficiently showed how these islands lie distant from the havens and islands of Norway both in breadth and length.    

VI Under what height these countries lie.  

THe north end of Fero lieth under 62 degr. 10 minutes.  
The south end of Fero lieth under 61 deg. 15 minutes.  
The north end of Hitland lieth under 60 degr 45 min.  
The south end of Hitland lieth under 59 degrees 48 minutes.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 38.   

CHAPTER XVII. A DESCRIPTION OF the islands lying behind the Northwest point of Scotland.  

I. The situation and names of the said islands.  
WEst from Scotland and north from Ireland there lie many islands, whereof I will here describe some, in such manner as they are known at this day.  
The names of the principal islands 
Names of the islands.  lying there are these, Aren, Ila, jona, Mulla, Bragedul, Hun, just, Leeus, S. Patricius, S. Maria, S. Colane, S. Petous, Epth and S. Kilda: these are the greatest and principalest. There are also some small islands, as Rona, Cheut, Trauta, Fladde, Grand Melul, Petit Melul, Scalpan, Cannay, Rum, Egghe, Mule, Cut, Carndenburgh, Gronsay, S. Karbo, Lismont, Swinoy, Machare, Gegay, Caray and Naversay. All these islands lie about, & belong to Scotland, & are those which by the Cosmographers are called Insulae Hebrides.  
The Island Bar or Rona 
Bar or Rona.  is the northerlyest Island behind Scotland, it lieth distant from Fulo about westsouthwest eight-and-thirtie or nine-and-thirtie leagues, & it lieth by two other small islands, more than a league each from other.  
The islands of Leeus are distant from Rona south-west sixteen or seventeen leagues: and from the north end of Leeus to S. Kilda 
S. Kilda.  it is south-west and by west sixteen leagues.  
Upon the east side of S. Kilda there is a good road for a west, and northwest wind: this Island lieth by the other islands, whereof two are not very great, on that which lieth west you may see some houses standing, and those small islands lie eleven leagues distant west from the great Island of Leeus. Upon the coast of Leeus there lie two fair great rocks, as if they were islands, they lie south and north and somewhat easterlyer and westerlyer from each other, about seven or eight leagues.  
The southerlyest lie by three islands, but the northerlyest lie by eight small islands or rocks. You must understand that the Island of Leeus 
Leeus.  is divided into many pieces, through the which you may sail to many places. Leeus with his islands reacheth southsouthwest and south and by west about 29 leagues.  
But on the east side there is a great River or haven through, of six or seven leagues. You must sail into it close by the Island of Leeus, about s. s. w. till you be before the Island of Cheut.  
From thence the river between the great Island B●agadul, & Leeus reacheth through south and south & by west to the west end of Leeus, which is called the Epths, 
Epths.  and then you leave Mulla and Ila with many other islands on the left hand.  
jona, Ila, Mulla and Bragedul, 
jona, Ila, Mulla, Bragedul.  are four of the greatest islands that lie on the west coast of Scotland, they lie close by the firm land, but there are many havens and rivers, so that you may sail in and round about them all.  
Upon the northwest point of Ireland there lie also some islands, which also you may sail through and round about.  
Between Rona and Orcanesse there lie also islands, which may also be sailed into and round about.  
Whosoever travileth into these parts may help himself with that description which we have here made, till such time as we can get further and fuller knowledge of them.  
He that falleth upon any of these islands must look well to himself, for the most part of them are inhabited by wild and cruel men.  
In Leeus and the islands there about'ts a south-west and North-east moon maketh high water. The like also without the northpoint of Scotland.  
Thus S. Kilda showeth when it is northnortheast 4 leagues from you, & then the rocks lie west.   view of St Kilda (Scotland) 
When S. Kilda is about five leagues s. w. from you than it openeth thus.   view of St Kilda (Scotland) 
When the Island of Leeus lieth ●ight leagues from you it showeth thus, and then you are within S. Kilda.   view of the Outer Hebrides 
This Island lieth also upon the coast of Leeus.   view of the Outer Hebrides 
Pascaarte, verthoonende in what ghestalte de Eylanden (Hebrides ghenaemt) achter de noordwesthoek van Schotlandt gheleghen zÿn.  
Cart marine de les Isles Hebrides situez verse norovest arriere l'Escosse   map of the Outer Hebrides 
Thus the Island Barro or Rona showeth, when it is 4 leagues southsoutheast from you.   view of 'Barro' (island in Scotland) 
This Island lieth westsouthwest from Scotland.  
Withert.   view of 'Barro' (island in Scotland) 
This Island lieth on the northwest point of Scotland towards Locherme.   view of 'Barro' (island in Scotland)  

II. How these islands are distant from each other, and from other Lands.  

FRom Rona to Leeus south-west 16 leagues.  
From the north end of Leus to S. Kilda s. w. 16 leagues.  
From the south end of Leeus to the northwest point of Ireland southsouthwest about 27 leagues.  
From S. Kilda to the north end of Hitland North-east and by east 70 leagues.    

III. Under what degrees these islands lie.  

THe Island of Rona lieth under 58 degrees 46 minutes.  
The north end of Leeus lieth under 58 degrees 18 min.  
The rock Rokol lieth under 58 degrees 20 minutes.  
The northwest point of Scotland lieth under 58 deg. 30 min.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 39   

CHAPTER XVIII. THE DESCRIPTION OF the islands of Orcanesse or Orcades, with the Sea-coasts of Scotland.  

I. Of the islands of Orcanesse.  
THe Island Fayrhil and the North-east end of Orcanes 
The north 〈◊〉 point of Orcanesse.  lie distant south-west and North-east ten or eleven leagues. This North-east point is a high hill, whereby there are many points and Creeks: when you come out of the south and are about it, than the land falleth downward towards the west, and you may go there in every where. Between Rona and Orcanes you shall find an Island or two, under the which you may make a road.  
The islands of Orcanes are one-and-thirtie in number. The Island Ways or Elhoy 
Wa●s or Elhoy.  lieth nearest to Scotland five leagues westward about the point of Catenes. About northnortheast from the point Catenes there lie two islands, which are called Pits and Pichlandskarres, 
Pits and Pichlandskarres.  you may there go through between Ilhoy and Scotland towards the west.  
North from thence lieth an Island called Heynda, 
Heynda.  and another Island called Platta. 
Platta,  North from Platta lieth Mayland or Ponoma. 
Ponoma.  On the north side of this great Island lie all the havens where the ships enter into.  
On the east side of this great Island there lieth another Island, called Kabunsa, north from it on the North-east point of that great Island there lieth another Island: when you will lie in the haven thereof you must go in there: you may go through there to Papewester, 
Papewest●r.  and leave Sanda on starboard.  
Close by Papewester lieth Fara, 
●ara.  south from it lieth Sirza. East from Sirza and Fara there lie two islands in the middle of all the islands, called Eeda and Chapuoza.  
Sanda 
Sanda.  lieth north from all these islands: Papa 
P●p●.  and Stronsa 
St●●●sa.  lie south from Sanda. East from Stronsa lieth an Island called Cruistella, that is the easterlyest Island of them all: the northerlyest is named Ronalse 
Ronalse.  or Nordernanse.  
Eleven or twelve leagues northwest from the great Island there lie two rocks, one under the water, the other above: if you come out of the west you must look unto them.  
You may sail in through these islands of Orcanes in many places, to wete, by Catenes, and south from Sanda, and come out north again.  
Thus the North-east point of Orcanes showeth when you sail along by it.   view of the Orkneys 
Thus the land of Catenes showeth, when you sail along by it.   view of 'Catenes' (Scotland)  

II. The situation between Catenes and the River or creak of Edenborowe.  
FRom Catenes to Buquhamnesse the course is southeast one-and-twentie leagues. Between them both there lieth a great creak, wherein there are many havens, which are deep enough for great ships to enter into them, and where ships may well lie at road.  
south-west & by south from Catenes about sixteen leagues there lieth an outpoint called Cabo Terbate: 
Cabo Terbate.  north from it lieth Dornock, 
Dornock.  and south from it lieth the haven of Ros 
Rosse.  and Luvernes: 
Lovernes.  from thence the land reacheth east and eastnortheast to Buquhamnesse or Boeckenesse. 
boeckeness   
Ware afbeeldinghe vande Oostelijcke Zeecusto●i van Schotlandt, van all Jnwijcken Havenen end Rivieren daer aen geleghen, hoemen deselve beseij len, end voor wat Clippen, Droochten, en ondicpten men hem wachten end hocden shall, alles correctelijck gestelt na zijne rechte streckinghen end distantien van mijlen.  
Vraije contrafaicture des costs Orientales de Schotlande, de tours gulfs Haures et Rivieres la situez, comment on les navigera, et de quells rochers escueils et lieux secs on se faut garder.   map of the coast of Scotland 
Boecknesse is a high hill which lieth on the south side of the point: right north from boeckeness there lieth a fair creak, as if it were a haven, which is called Spy or Spieloort, 
Spyloort.  on the south side there is a single strand, there you go in by it.  
Thus Boeckenesse showeth when you sail along by it.   view of 'Boeckenesse' (Scotland) 
From Boeckenesse to Aberdin 
Aberdin.  the course is southsouthwest twelve or thirteen leagues: but between them both there lieth a Tydehaven. On the south side of Aberdin there lieth a rock half a league from the land, which you must shun. The north point is all foul: you must go in by the south point at three or four fathom, till you be within the haven, and you may sail further westward up to the town, and anchor there at four or five fathom. Northward also there is a great water, which is very flat, and dry on both sides, from thence there goeth a channel to Old Aberdin which is a decayed town.  
Three leagues south from the haven of Aberdin lieth the outpoint of Stonehead, 
Stonehead  or the Torre, whereon there standeth a castle: right south from thence the Stonebay goeth in, it is a deep creak, where you may lay many ships safely at anchor: it is a good haven for ships that will go south.  
Four leagues southeast and by south from the Stonebay or Torre lieth the haven of Monros, 
Monros  it is also a good haven: you must sail in westnorthwest through both the lands, in the middle of the channel, than you must turn up north, and anchor before the town.  
More than a league south from Monros there lieth an outpoint called Readhead, 
Readhead.  on the land there standeth a high steeple called Albroed. 
Albroed.  Four or five leagues south from thence lieth the river of Donde 
Dunde.  or Dunday, which also is a fair haven, it goeth in between two high lands west and by north, till you be before the town. Within upon the River there lieth a town called S. john's, 
S. john's.  which you may go unto with a high water.  
About southeast from the River of Dunde almost two leagues there lieth a great rock under the water, whereon it raveleth continually, it is called the Sheep, 
The Sheep  if you come from the River of Edinburgh and will go northward, or if you come out of the north and will go into the said river you must take heed of it. Between the river of Dunde & Fisnes or the north point of the creak lieth the creak of S. Andrew's, 
S. Andrew's.  where there is a good road for a westerly wind.  
Thus the land of Scotland showeth north from Aberdin, when you sail along by it three leagues from the land.   view of Scotland  

III. How you must sail up the river to Edinburgh, and the situation from thence to Coket Island.  
ABout a league south from Fisnes lieth the Island May, 
The Island May.  it is a great Island when you are in it, but no man can get upon it, unless he be drawn up upon it in a car or vessel: if you will go up the River you must go about on the south side of May, and leave the islands Bas and Heynkief on the left hand. The Island of Bas 
Bas.  lieth distant from May south-west and by south three leagues: but from Bas to Heynkief or Inchkiet the course is west three leagues: you must sail north about Heynkief, 
Heynkief.  for on the south side, along to the firm land it is all full of rocks and very foul ground.  
From Heynkief to Lieth or Seton 
Lieth or Seton.  the course is south and by west three leagues, there over all it is deep enough, and there you may anchor on which side you will, you have good road in all places. On the south side thereof lieth Edinburgh, 
Edinburgh.  the chief city of Scotland.  
From the Island Bas to S. Abbenhooft or S. Tabs head 
S. Tabs-head.  the course is east five leagues, and from S. Abbenhead to the uttermost end of Schassen it is southeast seven or eight leagues.  
To go through within the Schassen 
The Schassen.  place the castle of Bamburgh or Badenburgh right over against the steeple of Denstenburgh, and sail up upon it, than you go through between the Ploegh and Goldstone, 
Ploegh & Goldstone.  which are two rocks lying between the Schassen and Holy Island, which lie even almost with the water.  
The Schassen reach North-east into the Sea three leagues from the land, and north from them lieth the Holy Island. 
Holy Island or Land.  South from the Holy Island there is a creak, wherein you lie safe against all winds, and against the castle is the best road.  
To sail into Barwick 
Barwick.  coming out of the south, you must sail westnorthwest from the north point of Holy Island, till you come before the haven, there you shall see two beacons, you must sail in between them both, & so forward between the two ●oints in the middle of the channel right before the town.  
From the Schassen to Coket Island the course is southsoutheast eight or nine leagues. There a man may sail round about and anchor at four fathom. There about also there run many little rivers into the land, but at low water they are most of them dry.   

FOUR What Moon in these places maketh high water, and of the falling and running of the streams.  
AT Orcanes and Buquhamnesse a south-west and North-east moon maketh high water.  
In the haven of Lieth a south-west and by west moon maketh a high water.  
The streams come behind Scotland from the west, and so fall through between Orcanes and Fayrhil, and there a south-west and North-east moon maketh high water.  
From Bokenesse to Lieth the flood falleth south and north along by the land. And from Lieth along by the Schassen and Coket Island southsoutheast.  
In this channel it is 40, 50 and 60 fathom deep, and at 45 & 50 fathom a man may see the land. In this channel the first herrings are yearly taken.   

V How these Countries lie distant from each other.  

FRom Cattenes to the Island Hoy w. n. w. 5 leagues.  
From Catenes to C. Terbate s. w. and by s. 15 or 16 league.  
From the haven of Ros or Luvernes to the point of Elgin east and by north and somewhat northerlyer 7 leagues.  
From the point of Elgin to Spilort east 1● leagues.  
From Spilort or Philort to boeckeness s. s. e. 3 leagues.  
From Catenes to boeckeness s. e. and by s. 21 leagues.  
From boeckeness to Aberdin s. s. w 12 or 13 leagues.  
From Stonebay to Monros s. w. and by s. 4 leagues.  
From Monros to Readhead south 3 leagues.  
From Dunde to Fisnes southsoutheast 5 leagues.  
From Fisnes to the Island May south-west 1 league.  
From May to the Island Bas s. w. and by s. 3 leagues.  
From Bas to Heinkief west 3 leagues.  
From Heinkief to Lieth or Zeton s. and by w. 3 leagues.  
From Bas to Abenhooft or Tabs head west 4 or 5 leagues.  
From May to Tabs head s. e. and by e. about 4 leagues.  
From Tabs head to Barwick southsoutheast 5 leagues.  
From Cattenes to boeckeness s. e. and s. e. & by s. 21 leagues.  
From boeckeness to Lieth in Scotland s. s. w. 33 leagues.  
From Fisnes to S. Tabs head s. e. and by s. 4 leagues.  
From S. Tabs head to the Schassen southeast 8 or 9 leagues.    

VI How these Lands are distant from other points and places.  

FRom boeckeness to the uttermost Island of Orcanes north and north and by west 32 or 33 leagues.  
From boeckeness to der Neus east and somewhat southerly 88 or 90 leagues.  
From boeckeness to the Texel southeast and somewhat southerlyer 118 leagues.  
From Lieth to der Neus e. n e. & somewhat easterlyer 103 league.  
From Schassen to the Teese southsoutheast 21 leagues.  
From Schassen to Flamborowe head southeast and somewhat southerlyer 29 leagues.  
Fron Aberdin to the haven of Yarmouth s. e. & by s. 93 leagues.    

Under what height these countries lie.  

THe greatest uttermost Island of Orcanes lieth under 59 degrees 8 minutes.  
Catenes lieth under 58 degrees 32 minutes.  
boeckeness lieth under 57 degrees 50 minutes.  
S. Tabs head lieth under 56 degrees 12 minutes.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 40.   

CHAPTER XIX. A DESCRIPTION OF the North coast of England, from north of Newcastle to Yarmouth.  

I. How a man shall sail into the River of Newcastle and into the Teese.  
SEven or eight leagues south from Coket Island lieth Tinbuy or Tinmouth, 
Tinmouth or Tinbuy.  which is distant from the Schassen southsoutheast fiveteene or sixteen leagues. South from Tinmouth there lieth an outpoint called Sonderla: 
Sonderla.  between this point and Tinmouth the River of Newcastle runneth in, wherein there is twelve foot water at half flood. From the point of Tinmouth there shooteth off a stony bank, which you must sail in by, but the southeast end is flat, there you may go in with the lead at ten foot half flood. The marks to sail into this River are these: there are two fire towers which stand on the north side of the haven, you must set them one over against the other, and sail in upon them, along by the said stony bank, until you are in, and when you are within, first you must sail all along by the north side till you are passed the town of Tinmouth, than you must turn over to the other side, and so you come into a crooked way which striketh up northward, & having past that you must go southward to Haesoort, and so forward about Haesoort to the town of Newcastle.  
From Tinmouth to the Teese or Hartlepoole 
Hartlepool.  the course is southsoutheast eight or nine leagues. Hartlepool is a Peer or Head, behind it at low water you may lie dry with your ship. Right south from it the Teese 
The Teese.  goeth in, it is a great wide and deep river, and reacheth in westsouthwest, with seventeen eighteen or nineteen fathom water, and there is nothing in the way that can hurt or hinder you, you must sail in through the middle of the channel, and anchor before the castle of Wisten. In the innermost part of this haven, that is before the town of Stockton, it is but four fathom deep. Right east or south from the Teese there lie two chalck hills, called Humplefoot 
Humplefoot.  and Read hill. 
Reddehil.   
Thus the land between Coket Island and Tinmouth showeth, when you sail against it.  
Tinmouth. Coket.   view of England 
Thus the land showeth between Tinmouth & the hills of Humplevoet & Readhil south from the Teese, when you sail along by it.  
Humplevoet. Readhil. Teese. Hartlepoole. Esenton. Schel. Sonderla.   view of England  

II. The situation between the Teese and Flamborowe head.  
FRom Teese to Scarborowe the course is southeast and by east 11 leagues. Between them both lieth Whiteby, 
Whitbye.  which is a Peer or Tydehaven, which at low water is dry, so that as then you may there lie dry. On the east side thereof there shooteth off a stonebanck, which you must shun. If you will go into Whitby you must sail in between the two beacons, till you come between both the lands. Between Whitbye & Scarborowe lieth Robbenhoods bay: it is a fair road for a southsouthwest and west winds, there you may anchor at seven or eight fathom.  
Skarborowe 
carburgh  hath two peers or heads, you may go behind them at high water, and at low water lie dry: you must sail in south from them.  
From Skarborowe to the point of Philo 
P●ilo.  the course is southeast three leagues. Southward about you may sail into the Bay of Philo: it is a round Bay, which at low water is dry. But without the head of Philo there lieth a rock under the water, which is called Philo crack. 
Philo crack.  Between this stone and the Peer a man with a ship of two hundred ton may lie aslote at five fathom low water, and there lie safe against a North-east and east winds.  
Three leagues west from Philo lieth Flamborowe head, 
Flamborowe head.  which is distant from Scarborowe southeast and northwest five leagues. Flamborowe head hath many white patches & chalck hills, specially on the north side to Philo: on the south side it hath a head or peer, and a league west about the point lieth Berlington, 
Berlington.  which also hath a peer, you may anchor there in the Bay or creak at six or seven fathom.  
This is the form of the land between the Teese and Flamborowe head, when you sail along by it.  
Flamborowe head. Philo. Scarborowe. Robbenhood. Whitebye. Humplevoet. Redhill.   view of England  

III. How you shall sail up the River of Humber to Hul, into Boston, and to Lin.  
FRom Flamborowe head to Kelbese 
Kelbese.  or Ravenspurre the north point of Humber, 
Humber.  the course is south and by east about eight or nine leagues, there is is all flat water five, six, seven and eight fathom deep. To sail into the River of Humber when you come out of the south, set Poltoren right upon the north point of the River, and sail up upon it, so long until the steeple south from Doepenton cometh between the trees and the other steeple, then sail in westsouthwest and west and by south to the first middle flat, then sail north or south about till you be before Grimsby, there is the road at six or seven fathom, and there you lie behind a Middle-flat: from thence further inward the course is west and by north, and west northwest to the end of the bank, which reacheth along the haven on the north side: when you are at the end thereof, than you must turn up northward in the river of Hul, there within it is six, seven, eight and nine fathom as you lie, and there it floweth three fathom up and down, with dead stream. An east and west moon maketh a high water there.  
If you will go into Boston river 
Boston river.  you must go along by the land of Slegnesse, and sail close in by the foot strand, and so you shall not sail by Elleknock. When the three trees stand south from Somkil or the speere steeple, than Elleknok lieth right to seaward from you, than you may sail forward along by the land of Leeck, at three or four fathom, to the river of Boston.  
You may also come again into the Sea between Elleknock and Long sand, 
Long sand.  at three fathom. Between the channel of Boston and the channel of Lin it is all full of Sands and shallows, so that it is very needful there to take a Pilot for him that will sail there, it floweth there three fathom up and down, so that with ships that draw not much water you may go over the sands at high water. An east and west moon maketh there a full Sea between the Sands.  
From Flamborowe head to Chapel or the Sunk it is south and by east nineteen or twenty leagues. The Sunk is a Sand which at low water is seen: west from it the east channel of Lin goeth in.  
To sail into the haven of Lin 
Lin.  sail westward about the Sunk, & place the heap of trees over against the point of Sitsem or Suytsom, and Chappel east from you, and then go in southeast and by south, than you shall find the first ton, than south and by west and southsouthwest, and sometimes somewhat westerlyer till you be about the point, the tons and the beacons will show you the way: when you are about the point, than you may run through the sands into the north channel, and sail through it into the Sea again, by the tons and marks thereof. This north channel reacheth North-east and North-east & by east, it is very well marked and beaconed.  
When you will sail into the aforesaid east channel of Lin coming out of the north, than you may sail in west from Sunk, that is, south and by east in, and so go between the Sunk and Chapel south and by west to the first ton: and so from the ton by the beacons, along to Lin before the town. When you come out of the east, you may go along by the land within through the Sunk, close by Chapel, and so south and by west to the first ton aforesaid.   

FOUR The situation of the Havens and Banks lying between Chapel and Yarmouth.  
FRom Chapel to Cromere the coast reacheth eastnortheast, east and by north, east, and east and by south: between them both lieth Burnham, 
Burnham.  Wells and Blancknye, which are tyde-havens. From Chapel to Burnham the course is east southeast three leagues. If you will put into Burnham you must go in at a high water, you must place the steeple against the black, & so sail in by the beacons, leaving them on baghborde.  
Between Burnham and Welles there lieth a bank which you may anchor behind at five or six fathom, but upon the bank it is but two fathom deep at half flood.  
Five leagues east from Burnham lieth Wells: between Wells & Blakny there lieth a Sand called the Pol & the Pepper, 
Pol or Pepper.  it lieth fast to the land, and there it is shallow or flat far into the Sea, which you must shun. On the west side of this Sand the haven Welles 
Welles.  goeth in, and the beacons stand all along by the Pepper, when Hobrom standeth southsoutheast from you, than you are west from the Pepper, and there is good road (as I said before) at six fathom. Then Welles lieth southeast from you, and then the trees stand against the steeple, you may then sail openly into the haven of Welles, along by the beacons.  
Blackney 
Blackney.  is a Tide haven going in on the east end of the Pol: at Blackney there standeth a high steeple, which may be seen a great way into the Country, when that high steeple is against the small steeple, than you see the first ton, lying upon the east or south end of the Pol, then go from ton to ton till you are within the haven.  
From Blackney to Cromere 
Cromere.  the course is eastsoutheast four leagues, and from thence the land reacheth southeast and by east to Haesberghernesse four leagues. Right south from the Admiral's house lieth Haessant or the bank of the Admiral's house, you may sail through between this Bank or Sand and the land at two fathom. But without it is eight or nine fathom deep: when Winterthon 
Winterthon.  lieth west from you, than you are south from this bank. A little to seaward from this bank lieth Winterthon Sand: when Winterthon lieth south-west from you, than you are at the north end of Winterthon sand.  
About northnorthwest and north and by west from Winterthon sand lieth the bank before Cromere, 
Bank before Cromere.  which lieth at least five leagues from the coast of England. When you come out of the north, you may go through between Winterthon sand & the Bank of the Admiral's house at ten or twelve fathom within the banks, till you come to Yarmouth. But between Kockling & the land it is but four or five fathom deep. Kockling is a Bank lying against Keson: when Keson is against the bunch of trees which stand there, & upon the flat steeple which standeth upon the water side, than you are south from Kockling.  
Against Kockling there is a channel in the Sea along through the Holmes: if you will go through it out into the Sea, than set Keson against the wood, and then sail out of that channel, you shall there have five or six fathom deep, but on the south side it is the deepest water.  
When the speere steeple of Winterthon is north from the small steeple, than you may also go through between Winterthon bank, and the Holmes into the Sea, and there you shall have ten or twelve fathom deep.  
These streams aforesaid are the principal places, where the greatest number and best herrings are taken, which men keep all the year and send into other countries.  
Thus the north coast of England showeth between Cromere and Yarmouth, when you sail through between the banks.  
Keson. Winterthon. Haesbergh. Cromere.   view of England  

V Of the running and falling of the streams about these places.  
NOrth from the Teese the flood falleth southsoutheast along by the land.  
Against the river of Newcastle and the Teese the flood falleth southeast, and the ebb northwest.  
Against Scarborowe and Flamborowe head the flood falleth southeast and the ebb northwest.  
From Flamborowe head to Blackney the flood falleth southeast and the ebb northwest.  
Against the banks of Cromere & Winterthon the flood falleth southsoutheast, and the ebb northnorthwest.   

VI What moon maketh high water in these places.  
BEfore the River of Newcastle a south-west and North-east moon maketh high water.  
In the Teese and Hartlepool a south-west and North-east moon maketh high water.  
At Robbinhoods' bay and Scarborowe a south-west and North-east moon maketh high water.  
At Philo and Flamborowe in the Peer a westsouthwest moon maketh high water.  
Before Humber & Lin a w. s. w. moon maketh high water.  
In the river of Humber and of Lin an east and west moon maketh full Sea.  
At Burnham, Welles, and Blackney an east and west moon maketh full Sea.  
Before Cromere a southeast moon maketh high water.  
Without the banks of Yarmouth a southeast moon maketh high water.   

VII. Of the depths against these countries, and at what depths you may see them.  
YOu may see Scarborowe upon the hatches of the ship at five-and-fortie fathom.  
You may see Flamborowe head also at 45 fathom.  
North from Humber you may see the land at 25 fathom.  
When you come from Flamborowe head and will go to Flanders or the Heads, than you go over a Sand of nine or ten fathom: this Sand is called the well, which goeth through the whole north Sea, against Heliger haven, and there it endeth, by our sailors it is called Dogghers sand or White Bank, by England's side it is the shallowest, for there it is but ten fathom and, sometimes deeper as twelve, thirteen, fourteen, fiveteene and sixteen, and so forth still somewhat deeper till you be at the Holy land. That which lieth south from this bank towards the Heads is called Deepewater, which is in the place where the Buyses fish in Harvest time: there it is two-and-twentie, four-and-twentie, six-and-twentie and eight-and-twentie fathom deep.  
That which lieth north is called Bynorth, it is thirty, five-and-thirtie, forty, five-and-fortie and fifty fathom, and sometimes sixty fathom.  
North and by east from Blackney there lieth a bank, whereon at half flood there is no more than five fathom water, and at eighteen fathom you may see the land: there to the point of Chapel it is all flat or shallow.  
north-east and North-east and by north from Cromere there lieth also a bank, whereon there is but four fathom water at half flood, from thence you may easily see the land.  
Winterthon sand lieth about four or five leagues from the land, and northwest from Winterthon.  
Against Winterthon and Cromere seven or eight leagues into the Sea, it is eighteen and nineteen fathom deep, and there you may see the land.   

VIII. How these Places lie distant from each other.  

FRom Coket Island to Tinmouth s. s. e. 7 or 8 leagues.  
From Tinmouth to Hartlepoole or the Teese southsoutheast 8 or 9 leagues.  
From Teese to Whitbye eastsoutheast 7 leagues.  
From Whitbye to Scarborowe southeast 5 leagues.  
From Scarborowe to Philo southeast 3 leagues.  
From Philo to Flamborowe head southeast 3 leagues.  
From Flamborowe head to the north point of Humber south and by east 8 or 9 leagues.  
From Raven spur to Elleknock south, and south and by east 7 leagues.   

Eijgentlijck ontwerp vande Noortcuste van Engelandt, tusschen Jarmuijen en het Coggen eijlandt, met all inwijcken, houcken, havenen, reeden, en rievienren daer aen gelegen, mitsgaders aller sanden, bancken, droochten, en ondiepten, diemen aldaer te schouwen heeft alles gestelt op zijne rechte streckinghe end coursen.  
Vraije contrafaicture des costs Septentrionales d'Angleterre, entre Jarmout et l'Jsle de Cocquet, avecq touts les gulfs, Cabes, Haures rades et rivieres a lesdictes costs, ensemble touts bancqs de sable et guez, quon ÿ a a eviter, le tout dressé selon ses uraijes distances et ruutes.   map of the coast of England  

From Elleknock or the north point of Boston haven to Chapel southsoutheast about 5 leagues.  
From Chapel to Burnham eastnortheast 3 leagues.  
From Burnham to Blackney through within the sands it is east 7 leagues.  
From Blackney to Cromere eastsoutheast 4 leagues.  
From Cromere to Hasberghnesse's southeast & by east 4 leagues.  
From Hasebergnesse to Keson southsoutheast and somewhat easterlyer 7 leagues.  
From Keson to Yarmouth more than a league.  
From Tinmouth or Newcastle to Robbenhoods bay southeast 19 leagues.  
From Teese to Flamborowe southeast and by east 19 leagues.  
From Flamborowe head to Chapel or the Sunk south and by east 19 or 20 leagues.  
From Flamborowe head to Blackney or Schilt southeast or somewhat southerlyer 24 leagues.  
From Flamborowe head to Winterton sand or the Holmes of Yarmouth southeast 29 leagues.    

IX. The situation of these Countries from others.  

FRom Tinmouth or Newcastle to Schuytenes North-east 104 leagues.  
From Tinmouth to der Neus North-east and by east and somewhat easterlyer 104 leagues.  
From Tinmouth to Schaghen eastnortheast 136 leagues.  
From Tinmouth to Heyligheland east, and east and by south 106 leagues.  
From Tinmouth to the Texel eastsoutheast and southeast and by east 90 leagues.  
From Scarborowe to der Neus North-east and south-west about 99 leagues.  
From Scarborowe to Bovenberghen eastnortheast and somewhat northerlyer 101 leagues.  
From Scarborowe to Heylighe land east & somewhat southerly 93 leagues.  
From Flamborowe head to the Eems east and somewhat southerly 85 leagues.  
From Flamborowe head to Marsdeepe or Texel eastsoutheast 61 leagues.  
From the point of Cromere or Schilt to the Texel east about 40 or 42 leagues.    

X. Under what degrees (as the Cards show) these Lands lie.  

TInmouth or Newcastle river lieth under 55 degrees.  
Scarborowe lieth under 54 degrees 12 minutes.  
Flamborowe head lieth under 54 degrees 5 minutes.  
The east point of Humber lieth under 53 degrees 20 minutes.    
Hear followeth the Card N. 41.   

CHAPTER XX. THE DESCRIPTION OF the Sea-coasts of England from Yarmouth to the Foreland: and also the situation of the famous River of London.  

I. How to sail into the Rhodes of Yarmouth and Leystaf.  
TO sail into the road of Yarmouth through the Holmes, place the speere steeple which standeth within the land north from Yarmouth, right against the broad castle, or place the mill on the north side of the town: keep these marks standing so, and so go in westnorthwest, you shall not find less water in that channel than eight or nine fathom at half flood. This road is called S. Nicholas road, 
S. Nicolas Rode.  and on the north side it is deepest: when you are within it, than the road is five or six fathom right before the town.  
Against the haven of Yarmouth there goeth a channel also through the Holmes: to sail through it coming from the south, than set Suython over against the north side of the haven, and the great tree between Northon and the flat house or castle, and sail upon them, and keep those marks standing so, till you are within the Holmes, and when you are within, then there lieth a Sand on the right hand, right north from the haven, called the Middle ground, 
Middleground.  you may go about it on both sides, to landward at five fathom, but towards the Holmes, or east about from them eight or nine fathom. This bank reacheth north to Keson and Cockling.  
To go into the road of Yarmouth coming from the north you must go along by the land, as I said before: you may also sail so along by the land to Leystaf.  
To sail through the Holmes of Yarmouth into the road of Leystaf, 
Leystaf.  then mark the brewhouse which lieth north from Leystaf: when the mill which standeth on high is over against the Brewhouse, than there goeth a channel west and west and by south through the Holmes, there at half flood it is two fathom deep, and before the brewhouse there the road is five fathom deep. When Leystaf steeple is west and by north and westnorthwest from you, than you are at the south end of the Holmes, you may sail in there to the south or north road, and anchor south from Leystaf, or else north, before the brewhouse, that is the best road.   

II. The situation between Leystaf and the Nase.  
FOur leagues south from Leystaf there standeth a high speere steeple called Cochey, 
A bank against Cochey.  against it to Seaward there lieth a bank, but you may sail through between the land and this bank at three fathom with half flood: when the steeple of Cochey is westnorthwest from you, than you are south from the bank, but when Ees is south-west and by west from you, than you are on the north side of the bank.  
South from Cochey lieth Swolle, 
Swolle.  which hath a haven that at half flood is two fathom deep: but between Swolle and Orfordnesse lieth Dunwich. 
Dunwich.   
From Leystaf to Orfordnesse or Abre the course is south ten or eleven leagues. Southeast eight leagues from Orfordnesse 
Orfordnesse.  lieth the Nase. 
The Nase.  Between them both lieth the haven of Harwich. More than a league eastsoutheast from Abre lieth Abreknock: and between Abreknock and Orfordnesse lieth Whiton or Whitesand.  
East North-east from Abre, about half a league from the land there lieth another bank, which at low water is no deeper than a fathom and an half, and is fully as big as Witting-sand or Abreknock: between the land and this bank it is at least ten fathom deep: this bank is flat so that you may sound it round about with the lead.  
Ware afbeeldinge der Zeecusten van Engelant gelegen tusschen Doveren en jarmuijen, waerine beneffens all andere havenen, reeden, sanden, en bancken aende self custen gelegen oock vertoont wert de gelegentheijt vande mont der vermaerde Riviere van Londen, item aller ondiepten daer voor geleghen, en hoemen de self beseij lē sal.  
Vraije portraiture des costs marines' de Angleterre entre Dovures et Jarmout, en laquelle ioignant tous autres haures rudes et sables situez ausdietes costes est aussi representé la situation de l'embouchure de la fameuse Riviere de Londres ensemble toutes inprofonditez, guez, et bancqs de sable devant la dicte Riviere, et comment on la navigera.  
Afbeeldinghe vande vermaerde Riviere van Londen de Teemse genaemt, hoc die met zijne cromten streckt vande mont of tot aende stadt van Londen  
Portrait de la fameuse Riviere de Londres (nominee lafoy Teemse) monstrunt la situation avecq toutes les courbures de ladicte riviere, des la bouche iusques a la ville de Londres   map of England with inset of the River Thames 
You may also go in between Abreknock and Whitsand at six fathom, but within it is ten fathom deep: being there within, you may go along by the Koert or Koertsand at five fathom, to the Nase. When you come so far that Harwich steeple cometh into the valley of Heyningh, than you go forward southsoutheast, till you be about the Nase. This Koersand (which also is called Koert) lieth right before Harwich, and along from the Nase to Abreknock.  
Between Abreknock and Koersand there also runneth a channel east and by north into the Sea: when Basil is behind that red Cliff, than you may go out there east and by north, and in west and by south.  
To sail into the haven of Harwich, 
Harwich haven.  when you come out of the north, then mark a flat steeple, which standeth within the land, with a heap of trees: when that steeple is against the trees, then go in a cables length from the north land northnorthwest and northwest and by north, (for that is indifferent fair) till you are within the fishing-place. In the middle of the mouth of the haven there lieth a Sand called Otter: 
Otter.  when you have passed the fishermen's stakes, then turn up westward before the town, and there anchor at six or seven fathom half flood, or at low water at five or six fathom.  
But if coming out of the south from the Nase you will go into Harwich, than place Harwich steeple in the valley of Heyningh, which standeth upon the land, and hold it standing so, (going northnorthwest) till you come by the north land, then sail upon the north point of the haven, until Harwich steeple cometh without the point of the land, then sail in about a cables length by the north side, and do as I said before.   

III. How you shall sail into the River of London, called the Thames.  
SOuth from Koersand or Koert there goeth a channel east and by north, and eastnortheast into the Sea: to sail into it, place Walton, (which lieth south f●om the Nase) west and by south and westsouthwest from you, and sail so right upon it west & by south, and westsouthwest, until Harwich steeple cometh in the aforesaid valley of Heyningh: if then you will go to Harwich do as I said before. But if you will go to the Spits, then go south-west along by the north land, for that is fair & flat, and you may well sound it, and leave the long sand Goenuliet on baghborde, 
Goenuliet o ●●gsand.  & go not near unto it, for there it is very shoring, the nearer to it the deeper water, sail forward as I said before, until S. Oges steeple, which standeth there upon the high land (being a speere steeple, which is also called the Spits) be over against the red tiled house, which standeth on the water side against the white Cliff, & they will then stand about north and by west from you, keep them standing so, and go south and by east, and southsoutheast along over the Sands, there at half flood it is three fathom water, but look well to your streams, for the flood falleth strongly along by the north land to Colchester haven: not long since there happened a ship to be cast away on the east side upon Long sand, w●ich lieth sunk there, the mast thereof still showing above the water, being now a very fair beacon, and a certain mark, for those that will go in or out that way, for when you come against the Sand, you shall presently see it, leave it on baghborde when you will go inward, and sail your course aforesaid, until you find deeper water again, to weet, six or seven fathom, there you shall find a ton: when you come to the ton, then go southeast to Whitakers beacon, 
Whitaker beacon.  and from thence forward southsouthwest and south-west & by south to the beacon upon the Shoe, from the Shoe beacon 
Shoe beacon.  to Black tail westsouthwest, and being past it, than you come into the reach of the Sea or the channel, and then the beacon upon the Noore or the Loer standeth about south-west from you, leave it on baghborde, and go then in the middle of the channel to Gravesende.  
To sail up the River of Thames from Margat, 
To sail from Margat up the Thames.  sail along by the land, two cables length from it, until the Recolvers be southsouthwest or south from you, than you come against the beacon called the Spill, than you must put somewhat off from the land to the Lassen, and sail between the ton & the beacon, there you shall find it three fathom deep at low water, and five fathom at high water. From thence go forward to the I'll of Sheppie, 
Sheppie.  and sail along by it within two cables length from the land, and when you are past Quinborowe, than put somewhat off from the south side, to shun the Noore or Loer, which cometh shooting off from the point of the south land, but there standeth always a beacon upon it, whereby you may know it, you must sail along by it, leaving it on baghborde, when you are passed it, than you enter between both the lands into the channel of the Thames, it reacheth east and west, there you must sail in the middle of the channel to shun the Sands, which lie on the north side of the river, and sail so forward inwards to Gravesende.  
To sail into the north channel off from the Foreland, than place Margat steeple over against the white sandbaye, which lieth west from Margat, and go northwest and by west, than you shall find the first ton, lying on the south side of the north Lassen, from thence to the second ton the course is west and west and by north, it lieth upon the point of Lassen, you must leave them both on starboard, southward over against the second ton standeth the beacon upon the Spill, leave it on baghborde when you go in: when you are against this ton, than the Recolvers stand south from you. From the ton upon the Lassen, or the beacon upon the Spill, over the Swalve to Sheppie the course is west and by north, and westnorthwest, but look well to your streams, for the flood falleth very strongly into the Swalve: when you come to Sheppie, then hold Quinborowe over against the trees, which stand in the middle upon the I'll of Sheppie, or without upon the point of the land, and go close by Sheppie, within two cables length of the land, to shun the point of the Spaniard, 
The Spaniard.  which cometh shooting toward Sheppie, and then go forward to the channel, as I said before. In the channel between the ton upon the Lassen and Sheppie it is flat water, and is not used by ships that draw much water, but such as will go with great ships along by the Foreland up the river, they sail through the fishermen's channel, 
fishermen's channel.  and as soon as they are passed the ton upon the Lassen, they go first northward, & so come out against the point of Blacktayle, from thence they sail westsouthwest to the channel, as I said before.   

FOUR How to sail out of the River of London.  
IF you will sail out of the River of Thames, then go from the beacon upon the Noore eastnortheast to the beacon upon the shoe. Now when the beacon upon the Shoe is on your left hand, than you are in a good way, for there it is eight or nine fathom deep. From the beacon upon the Shoe to Whitakers beacon the course is North-east, and North-east and by north, when you are somewhat past it, holding the same course, there you shall find a ton, which coming to, you shall see a speere steeple standing on the land, and a white or red house upon the side of the land, place that house and the steeple one against the other, and sail north and by west upon them, than you shall go over a Sand of three fathom deep at half flood, which Sand is called the Spits: when you are over that Sand, & have six or seven fathom deep again, then go North-east towards the point of the Nase, till you come to it, then leave Goenuliet on starboard. From the Nase there reacheth a channel east and by north, and eastnortheast into the Sea, if you will sail out there, then place Walton in the valley south from the Nase, and then go east and by north and eastnortheast into the Sea, through between Goenuliet and Coersand.  
When you come off from the beacon of the Shoe and are past Whitakers beacon, and come near unto the ton, than there runneth a channel eastnortheast into the Sea, of five, six or seven fathom deep: this channel is called the Kings or Queen's channel. 
The King's channel.  There lieth a Sand on the south side called the Muys, 
The Muys  the foot whereof reacheth far into the north. They that should desire to sail out at this channel, coming eastnortheast from Whitakers beacon, should easily miscarry behind a point or foot of Sand, which reacheth about half way out from the Muys. On the north side of the channel lieth Goenuliet, which at low water or half flood is dry. Against the north end of the dry sand there lieth a bank shooting off, which is two fathom deep at half flood, which bank is called Westrocks, 
Westrocks  it is very stony and uneven: you must shun it.  
But if you will sail from the Thames to the Recolvers, then place the steeple which standeth above Lee haven a lever or bow length south from the heap of trees, keep it standing so, & sail to it, until the steeple of Whitstaple cometh against the black hillock, which is there within the land, 
Marks of the Spaniard.  now when those marks are one against the other, than you are against the Spaniard, and you can not sail by it from Lee haven with such marks.   

V Of the running and falling of the streams against these places.  
Between the Holmes & Yarmouth, & the banks of Harwich the flood falleth south and the ebb north.  
Between Orfordnes in the channel the stream falleth southsoutheast. Between Orfordnes and the Foreland the streams fall without the Sands south and by east and southsoutheast.  
From Dover to the Foreland the flood runneth within Goodwin sands, through over the Quernes north, and the ebb south. But by the Foreland in to the Recolvers the flood falleth westsouthwest and west and by south. About without Goodwin sands the flood falleth north and by west and northnorthwest, than also the flood cometh there from the north and meet together, and so falls into the Sands and channels.  
North from the Galper you can reckon no ebb, but that which goeth along by England about the north, nor no flood more than that which goeth south about. The streams (as I said before) fall there most as the Coast stretcheth.  
The floods out of the north and from the south meet each other about the Galper, and so fall with great ravelin over the sands towards Flanders.  
In the channel between the Flemish Banks and the Heads the stream goeth about with the Son, so that it falleth but little along the Seas.   

VI What Moon maketh high water in these Places.  
Without the banks of Yarmouth a southeast and northwest moon maketh high water.  
But at Yarmouth a southsoutheast moon maketh full Sea.  
At Leystaf and Orfordnes a southsoutheast moon maketh high water-  
And at Harwich also a southsoutheast moon doth the like.  
Before the Thames a southsoutheast moon maketh high water.  
Within the Thames a south and by east moon maketh high water.  
At the Foreland a south and north moon makes full Sea.   

VII. Of the depths and Banks about these Places, and at what depths you may see the land.  
FOur leagues about east and by south without the Banks or H●lmes of Yarmouth, there lieth a bank called the New Sand, it is but two fathom deep.  
Five or six leagues without Yarmouth & Leystaf southeast and by east in the Sea, it is seven-and-twentie and eight-and-twentie fathom, and being there you may see the land.  
Against Orfordnes you may see the land upon the hatches at two-and-twentie fathom.  
About east from the Nase seven or eight leagues into the Sea there lieth a bank called the Galper, it is five, six and seven fathom deep, and lieth about thirteen leagues North-east and by north from the Foreland. On it the stream alway raveleth much.  
The west Rocks lie southeast from the Nase about three leagues distant, there on them it is but two fathom water at half flood, and it is stony ground.  
Without the Sand of Harwich five leagues from the Nase it is twenty and two-and-twentie fathom deep, and th●re you may see the land.  
Five or six leagues north and by east and northnortheast from the Foreland, or from Margat, there lieth a bank called Kintersknock, it is three fathom deep, being there you may see the land just upon the hatches. Five leagues northward from this bank it is twenty fathom deep.  
Without Goodwin sands it is eight-and-twentie & nine-and-twentie fathom deep, and you may see the land of Dover and the Foreland: but go no nearer to Goodwin sands by night then sixteen fathom.  
In the middle between the Heads it is two-and-twentie and three-and-twentie fathom deep.   

VIII. How these Lands and Places are distant each from other.  

From Yarmouth to Leystaf within the banks it is s. 5 leagues.  
From Leystaf to Abre or Orfordnes s. 10 or 11 leagues.  
From Abre to Abreknock e. s. e. more than a league.  
From Orfordnes to the Nase south-west 8 league.  
From Orfordnes to the Galper s. s. e. 10 or 11 leagues.  
From Orfordnes to Kinterknock south & by west 16 leagues.  
From the Nase to the Foreland south and somewhat easterlyer 13 leagues.  
From Kinters' knock to the Foreland s. s. w. about 7 leagues.  
From the Foreland to the north end of Goodwin sands southeast and by east 1 l●ague.  
The point of Dover and the south end of Goodwin sands lie distant south-west and North-east.    

IX. How these Places are situate from other countries.  

FRom Yarmouth or Leystaf to the Texel or Marsdeepe east and east and by north 33 or 34 leagues.  
From Yarmouth or Leystaf to the Maze eastsoutheast and somewhat southerlyer 37 leagues.  
From Yarmouth or Leystaf to Walcheren or the Wielings southeast, and southeast and by east about 34 or 40 leagues.  
From Orfordnes or the Nase to Texel e. n. e. 37 leagues.  
From the Nase or Harwich to the Maze east & west 29 leagues.  
From the Foreland to the Texel or Marsdeepe n. e. 45 leagues.  
From the Foreland or Goodwin sands to the Maze eastnortheast and somewhat easterlyer 33 leagues.  
From the Foreland to the Wielings east and somewhat northerly about 26 leagues.  
From Dover or the Heads to the Texel or Marsdeepe North-east and somewhat northerlyer 53 or 54 leagues.  
From Dover to the Maze or Goree n. e. and by e. 35 leagues.  
From Dover to the Wielings eastnortheast 26 leagues.  
From the Heads to der Neus in Norway north and by east 153 leagues.  
From the Heads to the Rif the course is n. n. e. 120 leagues.    

X. Under what degrees these Lands lie, as writings do witness.  

YArmouth lieth under 52 degrees 52 minutes.  
Orfordnes lieth under 52 degrees 12 minutes.  
The Foreland lieth under 51 degrees 35 minutes.  
Dover lieth under 51 degrees 12 minutes.     
End of the second Book.   

A table of the second Book, showing the Contents of every Chapter.  

Chap. I. Drscribeth the situation of all the islands and Channels in the Sea, that lie between the Island of Vlieland and the Elve. Also of the Island of Holy land. pag. 3.  
Chap. II. Describeth the Sea-coasts of jutland, and the juttish islands lying between the Elve and the Rifhorne. pag. 19  
Chap. III. Declareth the situation of the juttish Coasts from the Dead hill to Schaghen. pag. 26.  
Chap. FOUR Describeth the Belt, Wedersond and Melversond: Item the islands lying there about pag. 31.  
Chap. V How you shall sail forward through the Belt to Femeren, and along the Coasts of Holsten: Item along the Coasts of Mekelenburgh and Pomeren to Bornholme, and along the islands of Laland, Falster and Meun to Falsterbon. pag. 36.  
Chap. VI Describeth the Sea-coasts of Pomerens & Prussia, from Kolberghen to Memle. pag. 42.  
Chap. VII. Describeth the Sea-coasts, islands, Havens, Rivers and Creeks of Coerland, which are situate between Memle and Reule. pag. 46.  
Chap. VIII. Describeth the Sea-coasts of Lifland, Russia and Finland, from Reule to der Narve and Wyborgh, and from thence to the Alands Haf. pag. 53.  
Chap. IX. Describeth the situation of the Sea-coasts of Sweathland, which lie between Stockholme and Falsterbon: also from Gotland, Oeland, and other islands there about. pag. 57  
Chap. X. Describeth the Sea-coasts of Schoonen, Zeeland, and the Northeast-land. pag. 63.  
Chap. XI. A description of the Sea-coasts of Norway, from Masterland to der Neus. pag. 71.  
Chap. XII. Describeth the Sea-coasts of Norway from der Neus to Bergen. pag. 77.  
Chap. XIII. A description of Bergen or jelteford to the North cape. pag. 81.  
Chap. XIIII. Describeth the Sea-coasts of Lapland, from the North-cape to the Mouth of the White Sea pag. 90.  
Chap. XV. Describeth the Coasts of Russia, Corellen, and Lapland, which lie by the White sea. pag. 95.  
Chap. XVI. Describeth the situation of the islands of Fero: Item of Hitland, Fulo, and Fayrhil. pag. 100  
Chap. XVII. Describeth the islands which lie behind the northwest point of Scotland. pag. 104.  
Chap. XVIII. A description of the islands of Orcanes or Orcades with the Sea-coasts of Scotland. pag. 106.  
Chap. XIX. Describeth the North-coasts of England from north of Newcastle to Yarmouth pag. 109.  
Chap. XX. Declareth the situation of the English coasts betwixt Yarmouth and the Foreland: Item of the River of London. pag. 114.   
The end of the Table.